SigmaPlot 12

User’s Guide
Published by Systat Software, Inc.
© 2010 –2010 by Systat Software, Inc.. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America

Systat Software, Inc.
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide
Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 About SigmaPlot............................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Graph Types and Styles .......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 The Graph Style Gallery and Templates ................................................... 2
1.1.3 Graph Defaults ....................................................................................... 2
1.1.4 Axis Scales............................................................................................. 3
1.1.5 Automatic Legends ................................................................................. 3
1.1.6 Smooth Data........................................................................................... 3
1.1.7 SigmaPlot 12 Worksheet ......................................................................... 3
1.1.8 Microsoft Excel ...................................................................................... 3
1.1.9 Statistics................................................................................................. 3
1.1.10 Regression Wizard ............................................................................... 4
1.1.11 Transforms ........................................................................................... 4
1.1.12 Drawing Tools ...................................................................................... 4
1.1.13 Reports................................................................................................. 4
1.2 What’s New in Sigmaplot ................................................................................. 4
1.3 Installing SigmaPlot 12 ..................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 System Requirements ............................................................................. 5
1.3.2 Serial Numbers ....................................................................................... 6
1.3.3 About SigmaPlot’s User and Program Files .............................................. 6
1.4 SigmaPlot Basics .............................................................................................. 7
1.4.1 Using SigmaPlot’s Ribbons ..................................................................... 7
1.4.2 The Property Browser ............................................................................. 8
1.4.3 Main Button ........................................................................................... 8
1.4.4 Quick Access Toolbar ............................................................................. 8
1.4.5 Setting Program Options ....................................................................... 10
1.5 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs......................................................................... 10
1.5.1 2D Cartesian Graph .............................................................................. 11
1.5.2 Pie Chart Example ................................................................................ 13
1.5.3 Polar Plot Example ............................................................................... 14
1.5.4 Contour Plot Example ........................................................................... 15
1.5.5 3D Cartesian Graph Examples ............................................................... 15
1.5.6 Waterfall Plot Example ......................................................................... 17
1.5.7 Area Plot Example ................................................................................ 18
1.6 SigmaPlot Help............................................................................................... 19
1.6.1 SigmaPlot FAQs ................................................................................... 19
1.6.2 Customer Service.................................................................................. 19
1.6.3 Training Seminars................................................................................. 20
1.6.4 Tell Us Your Thoughts .......................................................................... 20
1.6.5 Getting Technical Support ..................................................................... 20
1.6.6 Contacting Systat Software, Inc. ............................................................ 20
1.6.7 References............................................................................................ 21
2 Creating and Modifying Graphs ................................................................................. 23
2.1 About Creating and Modifying Graphs ............................................................. 23
2.1.1 Setting Graph Defaults .......................................................................... 23
2.1.2 SigmaPlot Graph Types ........................................................................ 24
2.1.3 SigmaPlot Graph Styles ........................................................................ 25
2.2 Arranging Data for Graphs .............................................................................. 39
2.2.1 Arranging Data for 2D Plots .................................................................. 39
2.2.2 Arranging Data for Polar Plots............................................................... 44

iii
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.2.3 Arranging Data for a Ternary Graph ...................................................... 45

2.2.4 Arranging Data for Bubble Plots ............................................................ 46
2.2.5 Arranging Data for 3D Graphs............................................................... 47
2.3 Creating Graphs.............................................................................................. 50
2.3.1 Creating a Graph from the Quick Start Screen......................................... 51
2.3.2 Creating Graphs Using the Graph Wizard .............................................. 52
2.3.3 Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard ......................................... 55
2.4 Using the Graph Style Gallery ......................................................................... 57
2.4.1 Adding Styles to the Graph Style Gallery ............................................... 58
2.4.2 Applying Graph Styles to Pages............................................................. 58
2.4.3 Editing Graphs in the Graph Style Gallery .............................................. 59
2.4.4 Creating Graph Style Gallery Graphs from the Graph Wizard .................. 59
2.5 Modifying Graphs .......................................................................................... 61
2.5.1 Modifying Plots and Axes ..................................................................... 61
2.5.2 Modifying Grids and Planes, Titles and Legends..................................... 61
2.5.3 Selecting a Graph or a Plot ................................................................... 62
2.5.4 Picking Different Data for the Current Plot ............................................. 63
2.5.5 Changing Graph Type and Style ............................................................ 65
2.5.6 Adding New Plots................................................................................. 66
2.5.7 Creating Additional Plots ...................................................................... 67
2.5.8 Hiding, Showing, and Deleting Plots...................................................... 68
2.5.9 Sampling Fewer Data Points.................................................................. 70
2.5.10 Plotting Missing and Out of Axis Range Data Points ............................. 72
2.6 Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs ...................................... 74
2.6.1 Creating Embedded Graphs ................................................................... 74
2.6.2 Using Embedded Graph Options............................................................ 74
2.6.3 Editing Embedded Graphs ..................................................................... 75
2.6.4 Viewing Data for an Embedded Graph ................................................... 75
2.6.5 Resizing Embedded Graphs ................................................................... 75
2.6.6 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using Microsoft Excel ................................. 76
2.7 Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options........................................... 76
2.7.1 Changing Symbol Type, Size, and Color ................................................ 76
2.7.2 Automatically Incrementing Symbols..................................................... 78
2.7.3 Using Characters and Text as Symbols ................................................... 80
2.7.4 Using Different Symbol Sizes................................................................ 82
2.8 Changing Line Type and Other Line Options .................................................... 84
2.8.1 Changing Plot Line Attributes................................................................ 85
2.8.2 Automatically Incrementing Lines ......................................................... 86
2.9 Changing Patterns and Fill Colors .................................................................... 88
2.9.1 Changing Plot Fill Patterns and Colors ................................................... 88
2.9.2 Automatically Incrementing Chart Fills .................................................. 91
2.9.3 Using Custom Symbol, Fill, Line, and Color Increments ........................ 92
2.10 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing .................................................... 95
2.10.1 Uniform versus Variable Bar Widths .................................................... 99
2.11 Adding and Modifying Drop Lines ................................................................. 99
2.11.1 Drop Lines for a Single Point..............................................................102
2.12 Plotting and Solving Equations .....................................................................103
2.12.1 Plotting Equations onto Existing Graphs..............................................105
2.12.2 Setting Equation Parameters ...............................................................106
2.12.3 Plotting Saved Equations ....................................................................107
2.12.4 Solving Equations ..............................................................................108
2.12.5 Results Box Tips and Tricks ...............................................................110
2.12.6 Equation Solving Guidelines...............................................................111

iv
 2.13 Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines ......................................................112
2.13.1 Modifying and Adding Linear Regression Lines ..................................112
2.13.2 Viewing and Saving Regression Equation Results ................................114
2.13.3 Adding Confidence and Prediction Intervals ........................................114
2.13.4 Linear Regression, Confidence, and Prediction Calculation...................115
2.14 Adding Reference Lines ...............................................................................117
2.14.1 Drawing Reference Lines ...................................................................118
2.15 Creating Histograms.....................................................................................120
2.15.1 Using the Histogram Wizard ...............................................................120
2.15.2 The Histogram Transform Function ....................................................123
3 Graph Page Basics ...................................................................................................125
3.1 About Graph Pages ........................................................................................125
3.1.1 About Graph Pages ..............................................................................125
3.1.2 Setting Page Options ...........................................................................125
3.1.3 Exporting Graphs and Pages .................................................................126
3.1.4 Printing Graph Pages ...........................................................................127
3.2 Working with Page Objects.............................................................................127
3.2.1 Selecting Page Objects ........................................................................128
3.2.2 Selecting Multiple Objects....................................................................128
3.2.3 Selecting Objects that Overlay One Another ..........................................129
3.2.4 Real Time Mouse-Over Feedback .........................................................130
3.3 Adding Another Graph to a Page.....................................................................130
3.3.1 Creating a New Graph on the Current Page............................................130
3.3.2 Copying a Graph on the Same Page ......................................................130
3.3.3 Copying and Pasting a Graph from One Page to Another........................130
3.4 Zooming In and Out .......................................................................................131
3.5 Using Graph Pages as Templates.....................................................................131
3.5.1 Applying Templates .............................................................................131
3.5.2 Templates and Notebooks ....................................................................133
3.5.3 Changing the Page Created with the New Page Button ...........................134
3.5.4 Changing the Template File Used for New Pages ...................................135
3.5.5 Adding New Pages to [Link] .......................................................136
3.6 Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects ...........................136
3.6.1 Cutting and Copying Graphs.................................................................136
3.6.2 Pasting Objects ....................................................................................136
3.7 Using OLE to Paste, Link and Embed Objects ................................................137
3.7.1 SigmaPlot and OLE .............................................................................137
3.7.2 Methods Of Placing Objects .................................................................137
3.7.3 Linking or Embedding Objects .............................................................138
3.7.4 Placing SigmaPlot Objects into Other Applications ................................139
3.7.5 View as Icon........................................................................................139
3.7.6 Placing SigmaPlot Graphs into Other Applications.................................141
3.7.7 Pasting Objects onto a Graph Page or Report .........................................143
3.7.8 Placing Objects without the Clipboard...................................................145
3.8 Dragging and Dropping Graphs ......................................................................146
3.8.1 Dragging and Dropping Graphs Between Pages .....................................147
3.9 Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page ....................................................147
3.9.1 Hiding and Viewing Graphs on a Page ..................................................147
3.9.2 Hiding Graph Titles and Legends ..........................................................148
3.9.3 Removing Graphs, Plots, Titles, Legends, and Other Page Objects ...........148
3.10 Drawing Objects on the Page ........................................................................149
3.10.1 Graph Page Tools...............................................................................149
3.10.2 Drawing an Object .............................................................................150

v
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.11 Modifying Object Colors and Lines...............................................................150

3.11.1 Changing Object Fills.........................................................................151
3.11.2 Changing Lines .................................................................................151
3.11.3 Changing Line Ending Attributes ........................................................152
3.11.4 Changing Multiple Page Objects .........................................................154
3.12 Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects .........................................................154
3.12.1 Using Your Mouse to Move Graphs and Objects ..................................154
3.12.2 Using Your Mouse to Change Graph and Object Size ..........................155
3.12.3 Setting a Specific Size and Location ....................................................155
3.12.4 Nudging Graphs and Objects ..............................................................156
3.12.5 Moving Objects to the Front or Back...................................................157
3.12.6 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ......................................................157
3.13 Arranging Graphs on a Page .........................................................................158
3.13.1 Adding New Pages to [Link].........................................................159
3.13.2 Creating a Custom Layout Template File .............................................161
3.13.3 Changing the Default Layout Template File ........................................162
3.14 Aligning Page Objects ..................................................................................163
3.14.1 Working with Grids and Rulers ...........................................................163
3.15 Editing Text .................................................................................................165
3.15.1 Creating Text Labels ..........................................................................165
3.15.2 Editing Text and Individual Characters ................................................167
3.15.3 Formatting Text ................................................................................167
3.16 Working with Automatic Legends .................................................................168
3.16.1 Editing Individual Legend Entries .......................................................169
3.16.2 Sizing Legend Symbols ......................................................................169
3.16.3 Editing Automatic Legends ................................................................169
3.17 Changing Graph Page Format .......................................................................170
3.17.1 Changing and Displaying Graph Page Margins ....................................171
3.17.2 Graph Page Size and Orientation.........................................................172
3.17.3 Changing Page Units of Measurement ................................................173
3.17.4 Changing Page Color .........................................................................174
3.17.5 Page Color Default Setting .................................................................175
3.17.6 Templates ..........................................................................................175
3.18 Using Custom Colors ...................................................................................175
3.18.1 Configuring Your Display for Color ....................................................176
4 Notebook Manager Basics ........................................................................................179
4.1 About the Notebook Manager .........................................................................179
4.1.1 Opening and Closing Notebooks in the Notebook Manager ....................180
4.1.2 Sizing and Docking the Notebook Manager ...........................................181
4.1.3 Saving Your Work ...............................................................................181
4.1.4 Printing Selected Notebook Items .........................................................184
4.2 Protecting Notebooks .....................................................................................185
4.2.1 Setting a Password ...............................................................................185
4.2.2 Changing or Removing a Password .......................................................187
4.2.3 Creating a Notebook Audit List ............................................................189
4.3 Working with Sections in the Notebook Manager .............................................191
4.3.1 Creating New Items in the Notebook Manager.......................................192
4.3.2 Copying and Pasting to Create New Sections.........................................192
4.3.3 Renaming Notebook Files and Items .....................................................192
4.3.4 In-place Editing Section and Item Names ..............................................193
4.3.5 Copying a Page to a Section with No Worksheet ....................................193
4.4 Opening Files in the Notebook Manager..........................................................193
4.4.1 Opening Worksheets, Reports, and Pages ..............................................194

vi
 4.4.2 Copying and Pasting Items in the Notebook Manager.............................195
4.4.3 Deleting Items in the Notebook Manager...............................................195
5 Worksheet Basics .....................................................................................................197
5.1 About Worksheets..........................................................................................197
5.1.1 Opening a New and Multiple Worksheets ..............................................197
5.1.2 Saving Worksheets to Notebooks ..........................................................197
5.1.3 Setting Worksheet Display Options .......................................................198
5.1.4 Freezing Panes.....................................................................................201
5.2 Moving Around the Worksheet .......................................................................201
5.2.1 Going to a Cell ....................................................................................201
5.2.2 Using the Worksheet Shortcut Menu .....................................................202
5.3 Entering Data into a Worksheet.......................................................................202
5.3.1 Entering Dates and Times.....................................................................203
5.3.2 Insertion and Overwrite Modes .............................................................203
5.4 Importing Files from Other Applications .........................................................204
5.4.1 Copying and Pasting Data from Other Applications ...............................205
5.4.2 Importing ODBC Databases .................................................................205
5.4.3 Importing Excel as ODBC....................................................................208
5.4.4 SigmaPlot, SigmaStat, SigmaScan, and Mocha Worksheets ...................209
5.4.5 MicroSoft Excel, Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Files .....................................209
5.4.6 Importing Text Files.............................................................................210
5.4.7 Importing Axon Files ...........................................................................211
5.4.8 SPSS (.SAV) .......................................................................................211
5.5 Exporting Worksheet Data ..............................................................................211
5.5.1 How to Export a Worksheet ..................................................................213
5.5.2 Exporting Worksheets as Text Files.......................................................213
5.5.3 Exporting to SYSTAT ..........................................................................213
5.6 Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets ..............................................................213
5.6.1 Available Statistics ..............................................................................214
5.6.2 Statistics Options .................................................................................215
5.6.3 Engineering and E Notation..................................................................217
5.7 Displaying Worksheet Data ............................................................................218
5.7.1 Sizing Columns and Rows....................................................................219
5.7.2 Changing the Appearance of the Worksheet Grid ...................................221
5.7.3 Setting Data Feedback Colors ...............................................................223
5.7.4 Setting Decimal Places.........................................................................225
5.7.5 Changing Numbers Display ..................................................................227
5.7.6 Changing Date and Time Display..........................................................230
5.7.7 Setting Day Zero..................................................................................233
5.7.8 Regional Settings.................................................................................235
5.7.9 Using Date/Time Format with Other Programs ......................................236
5.8 Formatting Worksheets...................................................................................236
5.8.1 Setting Row and Column Size ..............................................................237
5.8.2 Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric Display .......................238
5.8.3 Sorting Data ........................................................................................240
5.9 Cutting, Copying, Pasting, Moving and Deleting Data......................................240
5.9.1 Stacking Columns................................................................................241
5.9.2 Selecting a Block of Data .....................................................................241
5.9.3 Cutting and Copying Data ....................................................................242
5.9.4 Pasting Data ........................................................................................242
5.9.5 Moving Data .......................................................................................242
5.9.6 Deleting Data ......................................................................................243
5.9.7 Inserting Blocks of Cells, Columns, and Rows of Data ...........................243

vii
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.9.8 Deleting Blocks of Cells, Columns, and Rows of Data ...........................244

5.9.9 Switching Rows to Columns.................................................................244
5.10 Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles ............................................244
5.10.1 Using the Column and Row Titles Dialog Box ....................................245
5.10.2 Using a Worksheet Row for Column Titles ..........................................246
5.10.3 Using a Worksheet Column for Row Titles ..........................................247
5.10.4 Using a Cell as a Column or Row Title ................................................249
5.11 Removing Outliers and Other Data ................................................................250
5.11.1 Highlighting Outliers..........................................................................252
5.12 Indexing Data ..............................................................................................254
5.12.1 Creating Indexed Data........................................................................254
5.12.2 Unindexing Data................................................................................254
5.13 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot ...........................................................255
5.13.1 Using Excel as Default Workbooks .....................................................255
5.13.2 SigmaPlot Functionality within Excel Workbooks ................................255
5.13.3 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs With Excel Workbooks..............................256
5.13.4 Using Transforms on Data in Excel Workbooks ...................................256
5.13.5 Using Statistics with Excel .................................................................256
5.14 Printing Worksheets .....................................................................................256
5.14.1 Printing the Current Worksheet ...........................................................257
5.14.2 Previewing Worksheets ......................................................................257
5.14.3 Printing Column Statistics ..................................................................258
5.14.4 Setting Printing Options .....................................................................259
5.14.5 Configuring Printer Settings................................................................260
6 Working with 2D Plots .............................................................................................261
6.1 About 2D Plots ..............................................................................................261
6.1.1 Scatter, Line, and Line/Scatter Plots ......................................................261
6.1.2 Area Plots ...........................................................................................262
6.1.3 Bar Charts ...........................................................................................262
6.1.4 Box Plots ............................................................................................262
6.2 Creating 2D Plots...........................................................................................263
6.2.1 Creating 2D Plots with Multiple Curves ................................................264
6.2.2 Plotting Category and Grouped Data .....................................................264
6.3 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars........................................................266
6.3.1 Creating a Range Plot...........................................................................269
6.4 Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars................................................270
6.4.1 Creating Quartile Plots .........................................................................271
6.4.2 Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data .......................................271
6.5 Modifying Error Bars .....................................................................................272
6.5.1 Changing Error Bar Appearance ...........................................................272
6.5.2 Changing Error Bar Directions..............................................................273
6.5.3 Customizing Error Bar Directions .........................................................274
6.5.4 Changing the Mean Computation Method..............................................275
6.5.5 Changing Error Bar Source...................................................................275
6.6 Grouped Bar Charts .......................................................................................275
6.6.1 Creating Grouped Bar Charts................................................................276
6.6.2 Spacing Bars from Different Plots.........................................................278
6.6.3 Grouping Column Averaged Bars..........................................................278
6.7 Creating Box Plots .........................................................................................280
6.7.1 Changing Other Box Plot Attributes ......................................................281
6.7.2 Modifying Box Plots............................................................................282
6.7.3 Computing Percentile Methods .............................................................283
6.8 Creating Area Plots ........................................................................................283

viii
 6.8.1 Creating Simple and Vertical Area Plots ................................................284
6.8.2 Creating Multiple Area and Multiple Vertical Area Plots ........................286
6.8.3 Creating Complex Area Plots................................................................287
6.8.4 Converting a Multiple Area Plot to a Complex Area Plot........................288
6.8.5 Shading in Different Directions.............................................................289
6.8.6 Changing Area Plot Fill Colors .............................................................290
6.8.7 Shading Between Two Curves ..............................................................291
6.9 Bubble Plots ..................................................................................................297
6.9.1 Creating a Bubble Plot .........................................................................297
6.10 Vector Plots .................................................................................................298
6.10.1 Creating a Vector Plot.........................................................................298
6.10.2 Modifying Vector Plot Arrowheads .....................................................301
6.11 About Axes and Plots ...................................................................................301
6.11.1 Creating Additional Axes for Multiple Plots ........................................301
6.11.2 Creating Multiple Axes for a Single Plot..............................................302
7 Working with 3D and Contour Graphs.......................................................................305
7.1 About 3D and Contour Graphs........................................................................305
7.1.1 3D Scatter and Line Plots .....................................................................305
7.1.2 Mesh Plots ..........................................................................................306
7.1.3 3D Bar Charts......................................................................................307
7.1.4 Waterfall Plots .....................................................................................308
7.2 Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts ...................................................309
7.2.1 Creating a 3D Scatter Plot or 3D Bar Chart:...........................................309
7.3 Creating Trajectory Plots ................................................................................310
7.3.1 Creating a Trajectory Plot.....................................................................310
7.4 Creating Waterfall Plots..................................................................................311
7.4.1 Creating a Waterfall Plot ......................................................................311
7.5 Creating Mesh Plots .......................................................................................313
7.5.1 Creating a 3D Mesh Plot ......................................................................313
7.5.2 Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color....................................................314
7.5.3 Changing Graph Perspective, Rotation, and Shading ..............................315
7.6 3D Graph Axis Placement ..............................................................................319
7.6.1 Axis Placement During Graph Rotation.................................................319
7.6.2 Drawing, Modifying, and Hiding Frame Lines .......................................319
7.7 Creating Contour Plots ..................................................................................321
7.7.1 Creating a Contour Plot ........................................................................321
7.7.2 Creating a Filled Contour Plot ..............................................................322
7.8 Modifying Contour Plots ...............................................................................323
7.8.1 Displaying and Changing Contour Lines ..............................................323
7.8.2 Adding Fills to Contour Plots ...............................................................324
7.8.3 Modifying Interpolated Filled Contours.................................................325
7.8.4 Changing Contour Vertical (Z Data) Range and Scale ............................326
7.8.5 Changing Contour Line Intervals ..........................................................327
7.8.6 Displaying and Modifying Contour Labels ...........................................328
7.8.7 Changing Contour Label Settings..........................................................330
8 Working with Pie, Polar, and Ternary Plots ................................................................337
8.1 Working with Pie, Polar, and Ternary Plots ......................................................337
8.2 Pie Charts......................................................................................................337
8.2.1 Creating Pie Chart................................................................................337
8.2.2 Modifying Pie Charts ...........................................................................338
8.2.3 Rotating the Pie ..................................................................................339
8.2.4 Adding Exploding Slices ......................................................................340
8.3 Polar Plots .....................................................................................................341

ix
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

8.3.1 Creating a Polar Plot ............................................................................342

8.3.2 Modifying a Polar Plot .........................................................................343
8.4 Ternary Graphs ..............................................................................................343
8.4.1 Ternary Plot Styles...............................................................................343
8.4.2 Creating a Ternary Plot.........................................................................343
8.4.3 Modifying Ternary Graphs ...................................................................345
9 Modifying Axes, Tick Marks, and Grids ....................................................................347
9.1 About Axes, Tick Marks, and Grids ................................................................347
9.2 Axis Scale Types............................................................................................347
9.2.1 Linear .................................................................................................348
9.2.2 Common Log ......................................................................................348
9.2.3 Natural Log .........................................................................................348
9.2.4 Probability...........................................................................................348
9.2.5 Probit ..................................................................................................349
9.2.6 Logit ...................................................................................................349
9.2.7 Category .............................................................................................349
9.2.8 Date/Time ...........................................................................................350
9.2.9 Reciprocal ...........................................................................................350
9.2.10 Weibull .............................................................................................351
9.3 Changing Axis Scales and Range ....................................................................351
9.3.1 Changing Axis Range ..........................................................................352
9.4 Changing Scale Type......................................................................................353
9.4.1 Using a Category Scale ........................................................................354
9.4.2 Using a Date and Time Scale ................................................................355
9.4.3 Using a Custom Axis Scale ..................................................................356
9.5 Hiding, Displaying, and Deleting Axes............................................................356
9.5.1 Changing Axis Line, Color, and Thickness ...........................................357
9.5.2 Moving Axes.......................................................................................358
9.6 Setting Axis Breaks........................................................................................360
9.6.1 Creating an Axis Break ........................................................................361
9.7 Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels .......................................................363
9.7.1 Editing an Axis Title ............................................................................363
9.7.2 Rotating Axis Titles .............................................................................363
9.7.3 Viewing and Hiding Axis Titles and Tick Labels....................................364
9.7.4 Moving an Axis Title ...........................................................................364
9.8 Changing Tick Mark Intervals.........................................................................364
9.8.1 Changing Linear and Probit Scale Tick Mark Intervals ...........................364
9.8.2 Tick Intervals for Log Axes ..................................................................366
9.8.3 Natural Log and Logit Scales................................................................367
9.8.4 Tick Intervals for Probability Scales......................................................368
9.8.5 Tick Intervals for Date/Time Axes .......................................................369
9.8.6 Customizing Tick Intervals...................................................................370
9.9 Changing Tick Mark Appearance....................................................................371
9.9.1 Tick Mark Direction.............................................................................371
9.9.2 Hiding Tick Marks...............................................................................372
9.9.3 Changing Tick Mark Line Attributes .....................................................372
9.10 Changing Tick Labels...................................................................................374
9.10.1 Changing Tick Label Font and Other Text Attributes ............................374
9.10.2 Changing Tick Label Type..................................................................375
9.10.3 Formatting Numeric Tick Labels.........................................................376
9.10.4 Formatting Series Tick Labels.............................................................379
9.10.5 Adding a Prefix or Suffix to Tick Labels ..............................................380
9.10.6 Changing Date and Time Tick Labels ..................................................381

x
 9.10.7 Using Custom Tick Labels..................................................................383
9.11Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes ..........................................................385
9.11.1 Modifying Backplanes........................................................................385
9.11.2 Modifying Grid Lines.........................................................................385
9.11.3 Hiding and Viewing Grid Lines...........................................................387
9.12 Modifying Polar Axes ..................................................................................388
9.12.1 Angular Axes.....................................................................................388
9.12.2 Radial Axes .......................................................................................391
9.13 Modifying Ternary Axes...............................................................................396
9.13.1 Modifying Ternary Axis Title Location................................................396
9.13.2 Changing Ternary Axis Range, Scale, and Direction.............................397
9.13.3 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick Labels ............................402
10 Using the Report Editor ..........................................................................................409
10.1 About the Report Editor................................................................................409
10.1.1 Creating Reports ................................................................................409
10.1.2 Setting Report Options .......................................................................410
10.1.3 Setting Report Page Size and Margins .................................................413
10.1.4 Exporting Reports ..............................................................................415
10.1.5 Printing Reports.................................................................................416
10.2 Inserting the Current Date and Time into a Report ..........................................420
10.3 Formatting Text and Paragraphs ....................................................................421
10.4 Using the Report Editor Ruler .......................................................................422
10.4.1 Showing and Hiding Report Rulers .....................................................422
10.4.2 Setting Report Ruler Units..................................................................423
10.4.3 Setting Tabs.......................................................................................423
10.4.4 Setting Paragraph Indents ...................................................................424
10.4.5 Adding Tables to Reports ...................................................................425
11 Publishing Graphs ..................................................................................................427
11.1 About Publishing Graphs ..............................................................................427
11.2 Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web....................................................427
11.2.1 About the SigmaPlot WebViewer ........................................................427
11.2.2 Exporting Graphs into HTML Format..................................................427
11.2.3 Password Protecting Data on the World Wide Web ...............................428
11.2.4 Exporting Data Associated with the Graph...........................................429
11.3 Submitting Graphs for Publication.................................................................430
11.3.1 Figure Submission Requirements ........................................................430
11.3.2 Creating Files for Figure Submission...................................................431
11.3.3 Why Use EPS?...................................................................................432
11.3.4 About dpi ..........................................................................................432
11.4 The Submission Assistant .............................................................................433
11.4.1 Using the Submission Assistant...........................................................433
11.4.2 Editing a Submission Profile ...............................................................434
12 Automating Routine Tasks ......................................................................................435
12.1 About Automating Routine Tasks..................................................................435
12.1.1 Before you Record a Macro ................................................................435
12.1.2 Recording Macros..............................................................................435
12.1.3 Creating Macros Using the Macro Language........................................438
12.2 Editing Macros ............................................................................................439
12.2.1 Getting Help for Sax Basic in SigmaPlot .............................................440
12.2.2 Using the Macro Window Toolbar ......................................................440
12.2.3 Color-Coded Display .........................................................................441
12.2.4 Object and Procedure Lists ................................................................441
12.2.5 Setting Macro Window Options ..........................................................442

xi
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.2.6 Parts of the Macro Programming Language ........................................443

12.2.7 Scrolling and Moving the Insertion Point ............................................443
12.2.8 Editing Macro Code ..........................................................................443
12.2.9 Adding Existing Macros to a Macro ...................................................444
12.2.10 Creating Custom Dialog Boxes .........................................................444
12.2.11 Using the Object Browser ................................................................445
12.2.12 Using the Add Procedure Dialog Box ...............................................445
12.3 About User-Defined Functions ......................................................................445
12.3.1 Creating User-Defined Functions .......................................................446
12.4 Using the Debug Window.............................................................................446
12.4.1 Debug Toolbar Buttons ......................................................................446
12.4.2 Debug Window Tabs .........................................................................447
12.4.3 Immediate Tab ..................................................................................447
12.4.4 Watch Tab ........................................................................................447
12.4.5 Stack Tab ..........................................................................................447
12.5 Streamlining Procedures with Macros............................................................447
12.5.1 Opening SigmaPlot from Microsoft Word or Excel...............................448
12.5.2 Running SigmaPlot Macros from the Command Prompt .......................448
12.5.3 Creating Macros as Menu Commands ................................................449
12.6 Using SigmaPlot’s Macros............................................................................449
12.6.1 How to Run a Macro ..........................................................................449
12.7 SigmaPlot’s Macros .....................................................................................450
12.7.1 Area Below Curves ............................................................................451
12.7.2 Batch Process Excel Files ..................................................................451
12.7.3 Bland-Altman Analysis ......................................................................452
12.7.4 Border Plots.......................................................................................453
12.7.5 By Group Data Split...........................................................................454
12.7.6 Color Transition Values ......................................................................454
12.7.7 Compute 1st Derivative ......................................................................454
12.7.8 Dot Density Plot ................................................................................455
12.7.9 Frequency Plot...................................................................................456
12.7.10 F Test Comparison of Curves ............................................................456
12.7.11 Gaussian Cumulative Distribution .....................................................458
12.7.12 Insert Graphs into Microsoft Word ....................................................458
12.7.13 Label Symbols ................................................................................459
12.7.14 Merge Columns ...............................................................................459
12.7.15 Paste to PowerPoint Slide .................................................................459
12.7.16 Piper Plots .......................................................................................460
12.7.17 Plotting Polar and Parametric Equations ............................................462
12.7.18 Power Spectral Density.....................................................................463
12.7.19 Quick Re-Plot ..................................................................................463
12.7.20 Rank and Percentile..........................................................................463
12.7.21 ROC Curve Analysis ........................................................................464
12.7.22 Standard Curve ................................................................................479
12.7.23 Survival Curve.................................................................................485
12.7.24 Vector Plot.......................................................................................486
13 Using Transforms...................................................................................................487
13.1 About Transforms ........................................................................................487
13.2 Normalizing Ternary Data ............................................................................487
13.2.1 How to Normalize Ternary Data..........................................................487
13.3 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data ..........................................................................488
13.3.1 Smoothing 2D Data............................................................................489
13.3.2 Smoothing 3D Data............................................................................493

xii
 13.4
Using Statistical Transforms .........................................................................496
13.4.1 Stacking Data ....................................................................................497
13.4.2 Indexing Data ....................................................................................497
13.4.3 Unindexing Data................................................................................498
13.4.4 Simple Transforms .............................................................................498
13.4.5 Centering Data...................................................................................499
13.4.6 Standardizing Data.............................................................................500
13.4.7 Ranking Data.....................................................................................501
13.4.8 Creating Interaction Variables .............................................................502
13.4.9 Creating Dummy (Indicator) Variables ................................................503
13.4.10 Creating Lagged Variables ................................................................506
13.4.11 Filtering Strings and Numbers...........................................................507
13.4.12 Generating Random Numbers ...........................................................508
13.4.13 Translating Missing Value Codes.......................................................510
13.5 User-Defined Transforms..............................................................................511
13.5.1 How to Create a User-Defined Transform ............................................512
13.5.2 Transform Syntax and Structure ..........................................................513
13.5.3 Transform Components ......................................................................514
13.6 Performing Quick Transforms.......................................................................518
13.6.1 Automatic Updating of Transforms .....................................................519
13.6.2 Setting Trigonometric Units for Quick Transforms ...............................520
13.6.3 Setting a Quick Transform as a Column Title .......................................521
13.7 Transform Operators ....................................................................................521
13.7.1 Order of Operation .............................................................................521
13.7.2 Operations on Ranges.........................................................................522
13.7.3 Arithmetic Operators..........................................................................523
13.7.4 Relational Operators...........................................................................523
13.7.5 Logical Operators ..............................................................................524
13.8 Transform Examples ....................................................................................524
13.8.1 Data Transform Examples ..................................................................525
13.8.2 Graphing Transform Examples............................................................530
14 Transform Function Reference ................................................................................559
14.1 Transform Function Reference ......................................................................559
14.1.1 Function Arguments...........................................................................559
14.1.2 User-Defined Functions ......................................................................559
14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions ........................................................560
15 Nonlinear Regression .............................................................................................625
15.1 What is Regression? .....................................................................................625
15.1.1 About the Regression Wizard..............................................................625
15.1.2 About the Curve Fitter........................................................................626
15.1.3 Opening .FIT Files .............................................................................627
15.1.4 Using the Regression Wizard ..............................................................628
15.1.5 Setting Nonlinear Regression Report Options ......................................631
15.1.6 Running a Regression From a Notebook .............................................636
15.1.7 Creating New Regression Equations ...................................................637
15.1.8 Viewing and Editing Code .................................................................638
15.1.9 Saving Regression Equation Changes ..................................................638
15.1.10 Variable Options ..............................................................................639
15.1.11 Equation Options..............................................................................639
15.1.12 Watching The Fit Progress ................................................................644
15.1.13 Interpreting Fit Results .....................................................................645
15.1.14 Saving Regression Results ................................................................646
15.1.15 Graphing Regression Equations ........................................................647

xiii
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

15.1.16 Confidence and Prediction Bands ......................................................649

15.1.17 Interpreting Regression Reports ........................................................654
15.1.18 Regression Equation Libraries and Notebooks ...................................660
15.1.19 Curve Fitting Date And Time Data ....................................................663
15.1.20 Regression Results Messages ...........................................................668
15.2 Dynamic Curve Fitting .................................................................................670
15.2.1 Using the Dynamic Fit Wizard ............................................................670
15.2.2 Dynamic Curve Fit Reports ................................................................678
15.2.3 Dynamic Fit Profile Graph..................................................................679
15.2.4 Dynamic Curve Fitting Examples........................................................680
15.3 Global Curve Fitting.....................................................................................694
15.3.1 Using the Global Fit Wizard ...............................................................694
15.3.2 Global Curve Fit Reports....................................................................700
15.4 Regression Lessons ......................................................................................701
15.4.1 Lesson 1: Linear Curve Fit .................................................................701
15.4.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit........................................................703
16 Regression Lessons ................................................................................................707
16.1 Regression Lessons ......................................................................................707
16.1.1 Lesson 1: Linear Curve Fit .................................................................707
16.1.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit........................................................710
17 Regression Equation Library...................................................................................713
17.1 About the Regression Equation Library .........................................................713
17.1.1 Polynomial ........................................................................................713
17.1.2 Peak ..................................................................................................714
17.1.3 Sigmoidal ..........................................................................................715
17.1.4 Exponential Decay .............................................................................717
17.1.5 Exponential Rise to Maximum ............................................................718
17.1.6 Exponential Growth ...........................................................................718
17.1.7 Hyperbola Library..............................................................................720
17.1.8 Waveform..........................................................................................721
17.1.9 Power................................................................................................722
17.1.10 Rational...........................................................................................723
17.1.11 Logarithm........................................................................................725
17.1.12 3 Dimensional..................................................................................725
17.2 Standard Curves...........................................................................................726
17.3 Ligand Binding ............................................................................................726
17.4 Piecewise ....................................................................................................728
Index ............................................................................................................................729

xiv
1 Introduction
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About SigmaPlot
♦ What’s New in Sigmaplot
♦ Installing SigmaPlot 12
♦ SigmaPlot Basics
♦ Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs
♦ SigmaPlot Help

1.1 About SigmaPlot

SigmaPlot 12 makes it easier for you to present your findings accurately using precise,
publication-quality graphs, data analysis and presentation tools. SigmaPlot 12 offers numerous
scientific options such as automatic error bars, regression lines, confidence intervals, axis
breaks, technical axis scales, nonlinear curve fitting and a data worksheet for powerful data
handling.
SigmaPlot is a state-of-the-art technical graphing program designed for the Windows platform.
It is certified for , Microsoft Office 98, 2000, Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows 7.
SigmaPlot is specifically designed to aid in documenting and publishing research, specializing
in the graphical presentation of results.
Creating and editing graphs is easy. Just click the Create Graph tab, select a graph type,
and pick your data with the Graph Wizard, and you can create a graph in seconds. You can
create a formatted worksheet, or use templates or the Graph Style Gallery to apply favorite
graphs again and again.
SigmaPlot also includes a powerful nonlinear curve fitter, a huge scientific data worksheet that
accommodates large data sets, summary statistics including SigmaStat’s entire test collection,
a mathematical transform language and much more.
OLE2 technology is fully supported. You can annotate graphs with the Microsoft Word
Equation Editor, edit your graphs directly inside Word or PowerPoint, or plot your data with
an Excel spreadsheet right inside SigmaPlot 12.

1.1.1 Graph Types and Styles

SigmaPlot12’s selectable Graph Type determines the structure of your graph. SigmaPlot
12 provides many different types of two- and three-dimensional Cartesian (XY and XYZ)
graphs, as well as pie charts and polar plots..
Graph Style determines how data is plotted on a graph. Available styles depend on the selected
Graph Type. SigmaPlot 12’s Graph Wizard conveniently displays all available graph styles
associated with each graph type.

1
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.1.2 The Graph Style Gallery and Templates

Use the SigmaPlot Graph Style Gallery create and store true graph templates using any
existing graph style as the model. For more information, see page 57.
Every graph that you add to the Graph Style Gallery is saved as a bitmap image. You can later
apply this as a template for future graphs, saving you time and effort. Using the Graph Style
GalleryFor more information, see page 57.

Figure 1.1 The Graph Style Gallery

Templates. The SigmaPlot template notebook contains a variety of page layouts. Apply
these predetermined template attributes to previously saved pages and graphs, or create a
user-defined template. Store your templates in a SigmaPlot Notebook Template file (.JNT).
You may want to create your own template notebook. For more information, see page 131.

1.1.3 Graph Defaults

Preset graph attribute default settings, such as size and position, font, and symbol, line and
bar settings.

2
 1.1.4 Axis Scales

1.1.4 Axis Scales

Create multiple axes for 2D graphs. SigmaPlot 12 , by default, automatically calculates axis
ranges and enables each plot to contain separate X and Y axes.
Tick Marks. Use both major and minor axis tick marks and grid lines. Tick intervals, length,
direction, thickness, and color are all adjustable; grid line types are also adjustable. Tick labels
can be numeric, time series, or customized, using labels in a worksheet column.
Axis Breaks. You can specify an axis break with a different post-break tick interval.

1.1.5 Automatic Legends

Generate legends automatically, or ungroup legends and individually customize text labels.

1.1.6 Smooth Data

Smooth sharp variations in dependent values within 2D and 3D data sets using SigmaPlot
12 smoothing algorithms.

1.1.7 SigmaPlot 12 Worksheet

The SigmaPlot 12 worksheet is capable of containing data up to 32,000,000 rows by
32,000 columns. Enter data in columns or rows, and perform calculations either row-wise
or column-wise.
Worksheet cells within columns are adjustable, and capable of holding up to 16 significant
digits. Place labels, customized fill colors and patterns, and error bar direction codes into these
cells in order to specify changes to graphs.

1.1.8 Microsoft Excel

SigmaPlot 12 uses automation communication standards to create and open Excel workbooks
within SigmaPlot 12. This functionality enables you to run transforms, perform statistical
tests, and graph data stored in Excel worksheets.

1.1.9 Statistics
SigmaPlot provides over fifty frequently used statistical tests to analyze data, including an
Advisor Wizard to guide you through the process of selecting the appropriate test. Detailed
reports are provided in an easy-to-read format and includes interpretations of many results.
Result graphs are also provided.
Descriptive statistics are available for all your worksheet columns. The Statistics Worksheet
lists basic statistics for all worksheet columns.
Display linear regression lines with confidence and prediction intervals, chart error bars for
graphs of column means, and run paired and unpaired t-tests between worksheet columns. Use
the Histogram feature to compute and plot distributions for data sets.

3
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.1.10 Regression Wizard

The Regression Wizard steps through curve fitting, plotting, and generating a report.

1.1.11 Transforms
Modify and compute data using SigmaPlot 12’s comprehensive transform language.

1.1.12 Drawing Tools

Change the font, size, and style of any text, and change the color, line type, thickness, and
fill pattern of graphs and drawn objects with drawing tools.

1.1.13 Reports
The SigmaPlot 12 Report Editor displays regression results and features complete text editing
functionality.

1.2 What’s New in Sigmaplot

SigmaPlot 12 packs in even more functionality from a few of our other products, including
SigmaStat and the Enzyme Kinetics module, plus several new statistical tests. In addition to
this, creating and modifying graphs is both easier and even faster.
New Macros. New macros include:
• Scale Graph. Using SigmaPlot’s new Scale Graph macro, now you can zoom and pan
through a long time series or data sequence.
• Dot Density. The dot density plot is a graphical histogram of your data. The SigmaPlot
dot density macro produces a graph very much like what an artist would prepare, where
adjacent data values either stack or nestle.
• Normal Distribution Comparison. This macro produces a visualization of the distributions
of up to four measured variables to quickly detect and demonstrate possible product defects.
Normal distributions and the corresponding limit specifications are displayed. Descriptive
statistics of the data and process capability statistics Cp and Cpk are also computed.
• Parallel Line Analysis. The slopes and intercepts of linear fits to data sets can be tested for
equality.
• Bland Altman Method Comparison. Two methods can be compared using the Bland
Altman method to see if they produce the same results. A comparison scatter plot and the
Bland Altman difference graphs are created and agreement statistics computed.
New ribbons, mini toolbars, tabbed window views, Gallery docking panel, the Main
button, and the Property Browser. SigmaPlot BasicsFor more information, see page 7.
New Analysis Features. SigmaPlot’s new analysis features include:
• Enzyme Kinetics. The Enzyme Kinetics module is now integrated into SigmaPlot,
providing additional enzyme kinetics analysis features and additional graph types
(Lineweaver-Burk, Eadie-Hofstee, Scatchard, and so on.)

4
 1.3 Installing SigmaPlot 12

• More Curve Fitting features. SigmaPlot’s newest curve fitting features include: weight
variables that are functions of the parameters; parameter confidence intervals; implicit
function curve fitting; and values that are defined implicitly by the fit model.
• New Statistics. SigmaPlot’s latest statistical tests include the Non-parametric One Sample
t-test and Deming Regression.
• Additions to the transform language. Now with the transform language you can set
column and row titles. New functions for root finding and equation solving, including a
function to help solve fit models that are defined implicitly.
New Graphing Features.
• Radar Plots. Subtypes include scatter, line, vector, area, line & error band. Useful for
comparing multiple data sets divided into different categories.
• Gradient Fills. Color gradients available for almost all graph objects.
• Color Transparency. Transparency support is provides for all fill and line objects.
• Anti-aliasing. Smoothing provided to reduced the jagged appearance of line objects.
• New Zoom and Pan controls.
New Report Features.
• Tables. Insert tables with predefined styles and customization.
• Enhanced PDF export.

1.3 Installing SigmaPlot 12

Install SigmaPlot 12 on your computer from the CD. The installation program automatically
starts up when the CD is placed in the CD-ROM drive. The dialog boxes that guide you
through the installation process are simple and self-explanatory.
Note: In order to accomplish your installation, you will need to have your product registration
number available.

1.3.1 System Requirements

SigmaPlot 12 runs under the following systems:
• Windows XP
• Windows Vista
• Windows 7
Excel Workbooks:
Excel for Office 2000 and 97 takes full advantage of SigmaPlot 12’s functionality. Import
excel workbooks into SigmaPlot.
Hardware:
Minimum requirements are Pentium 200 or better
• 64MB of RAM
• 48MB available Hard Disk space
• CD-ROM drive

5
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• SVGA/256 color graphics adapter (800 x 600, High Color recommended)

1.3.2 Serial Numbers

This unique serial number is located on the CD cover. Have this number available when you
call for product support, payment, or system upgrade. Copy this number to the registration
card and send it in to Systat Software, Inc.
Registration entitles you to:
• Unlimited technical support.
• System upgrades.

1.3.3 About SigmaPlot’s User and Program Files

SigmaPlot 12 is installed for all users that have user accounts on a machine. It installs its
program files into a Program Folder - these are necessary for the program to run - and then
creates files in User Folders for each user on a machine.
This means that two or more separate users can share SigmaPlot using his or her own set of
SigmaPlot files and settings. When someone uses SigmaPlot for the first time, it creates a User
Folder just for that person. In this way, many people can use the same version of SigmaPlot
without risking damage to others’ files.

[Link] SigmaPlot’s User Files

When SigmaPlot starts, it checks to see if a user folder exists for the current user. The User
Folder is either in:
• C:\Documents and Settings\user\My Documents\SigmaPlot\SPW12 for SigmaPlot, or
• C:\Documents and Settings\user\My Documents\SigmaStat\Stat12 for SigmaStat.
If the User Folder does not exist, SigmaPlot creates the folder and copies user files from the
Program Files folder to the User Folder. For more information, see page . The user files for
SigmaPlot include:
• Submission Profiles. This directory contains all the available submission profile .ini files.
For more information, see page 433.
• [Link]. This is the Graph Gallery file including any user-defined graph styles. For
more information, see page 57.
• [Link]. This file stores all Graph Wizard settings. For more information, see
page 52.
• [Link]. This file stores Histogram Wizard settings. For more information,
see page 120.
• [Link]. This file stores Deming Regression Wizard settings.
• [Link]. This notebook file is the layout file used when formatting or arranging graphs.
For more information, see page 158.
• SigmaPlot Macro [Link]. This notebook file contains the Standard Macro Library
and user-defined macros. For more information, see page .
• Macro Data [Link]. This notebook file contains sample data sets for the macros in the
Standard Macro Library.
• [Link]. This file stores all SigmaPlot user’s settings.

6
 [Link] SigmaPlot’s Program Files

• [Link]. This Standard Equations Library includes all user-defined equations. For
more information, see page 660.
• [Link]. This notebook file is where all the graph page templates are stored. For
more information, see page 131.
• [Link]. The files stores settings used by the Enzyme Kinetics module.
• [Link]. The file stores the option settings used by all statistical tests.

[Link] SigmaPlot’s Program Files

During installation, SigmaPlot by default installs the following directories and files into
C:\Program Files\SigmaPlot\SPW12.
The installed files include [Link], all the Help files, .dll files, .pdf manuals, and the following
sub-folders:
• FAQs directory. This directory contains all the .html and graphics files used in the
SigmaPlot FAQs. For more information, see page .
• Macro Transforms directory. This directory contains the .xfm files used for the macros
Frequency Plot, Power Spectral Density, Rank and Percentile, and Vector Plot. For more
information, see page 449.
• Samples directory. This directory includes sample graphs, data and nonlinear curve fit
examples. .
• Submission Profiles. This directory contains all the available submission profile .ini files.
For more information, see page 433.
• Transforms directory. This directory contains sample transforms.

1.4 SigmaPlot Basics

SigmaPlot runs under the Windows operating system and functions within the standard
Windows interface. For information on how Windows works, refer to your Windows
documentation.

1.4.1 Using SigmaPlot’s Ribbons

New for SigmaPlot version 12 is "the Ribbon," very similar to what you’ve seen in 2007
Microsoft Office.

The idea is to make SigmaPlot’s most frequently used commands easy to find, to save you
time. Generally, what you select on a graph, worksheet, or notebook determines which ribbon
is immediately in view. The same is true for SigmaPlot’s new Property Browser.

7
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.4.2 The Property Browser

SigmaPlot 12 has completely replaced the Graph Properties dialog box of old with the
Property Browser. This is a dockable window that by default appears to the right of your work
space. You can drag and drop it to whatever location you choose.
To show or hide the Property Browser

1. Click the Home tab.

2. In the Navigate group, click Property Browser.

Now instead of double-clicking a graph or object on a graph page, now whatever you
select on the screen, if it is possible to edit it, appears immediately in the Property
Browser, ready for you to make changes. Whatever changes you make then appear
immediately in the graph, without having to click OK or closing a dialog box.

1.4.3 Main Button

The SigmaPlot Main Button replaces all that once appeared in the File menu. Whenever you
need to save, print, or open a file, go to the Main Button.

1.4.4 Quick Access Toolbar

When you want to quickly print a file, save, or undo, just click the Quick Access Toolbar. In
addition to holding some of the most commonly used commands, you can customize it to
include just about any SigmaPlot feature you like, including commands for creating graphs,
running regressions, or statistical tests.
To customize the Quick Access Toolbar

1. Click the Quick Access Toolbar drop-down button.

8
 1.4.4 Quick Access Toolbar

2. Click More Commands.

3. Select from the Commands list.

4. Double-click or click the Add or Remove buttons to move commands to the Quick
Access Toolbar.
5. Click OK, and the new command appears in the Quick Access Toolbar.

9
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.4.5 Setting Program Options

Use SigmaPlot’s program options to control application settings, as well as how worksheets
and new pages and graphs will appear. To change program options:

1. Click the Main Buttonand then click Options.

2. Choose the appropriate tab and make changes.

Worksheet. Worksheet options include settings for numbers, statistics, date and time,
worksheet display, default column width, number of decimal places, and use of
engineering notation. For more information, see page .
Page. Page options control graph page properties. For more information, see page .
General. The General tab controls application settings. For more information, see page .
Report. Set report options, such as measurement units or to display rulers, on the Reports
tab. For more information, see page .
Graph. Graph defaults control attributes that are applied to all new graphs. For more
information, see page .
Macro. Select macro options, such as code colors and which macro library to use on the
Macro tab. For more information, see page .

3. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

1.5 Anatomy of SigmaPlot Graphs

A SigmaPlot graph consists of one or more plots of data, and one or more sets of axes. It
uses a specific coordinate system (e.g., 2D Cartesian, 3D Cartesian, pie, or polar) and has a
specific size and location on the page.
Plots are graphical representations of worksheet data. For example, view data as a vertical bar
chart or change the plot to a horizontal bar chart, even after creating the graph. You can even
display more than one plot on most graphs.
Axes are the scales that determine position of the graph’s data points. Each axis contains tick
marks that indicate the type of scale used. Scales range from linear to nonlinear within a
Cartesian coordinate system. Customize tick mark labels with worksheet cells or use numeric
or time series labels.

10
 1.5.1 2D Cartesian Graph

The X, Y, and for 3D graphs, Z coordinates, are indicated on each axis by tick marks. An axis
can use a linear numeric scale, nonlinear scales such as log, natural log, and probability, or a
date/time scale. 2D graphs can have multiple sets of X and Y axes. The axes’ tick marks and
tick labels, can be numeric, time series, or customized with worksheet column labels.

1.5.1 2D Cartesian Graph

The following figures show a examples of 2D Cartesian graphs available in SigmaPlot.
This example of a grouped error bar chart includes:
• A post break tick interval set to a new value.
• A Y axis break at 75% along the axis length.
• Error bars using worksheet column data.
• Bar fill colors using a pattern from a worksheet column.
• X axis tick labels using text from a worksheet column.
• A grouped bar chart with specified bar and group widths.
• Legend symbols and text labels.
• Image art cut from a paint program and pasted onto the page using the Windows Clipboard.

Figure 1.2 An example of a 2D Cartesian graph.

This example of a multiple scatter plot includes:

• Common log scale Y axis with major and minor tick marks.
• Custom sized symbols using an incrementing earthtone color scheme.

11
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 1.3 An example of a multiple scatter plot.

This example of a box plot includes:

• Variable box widths expressing another variable dimension.
• Tick mark direction pointing out.
• X axis tick labels using a category axis scale.
• A Tukey box plot with mean value lines.
• Custom fill colors.

This line and scatter plot with error bars includes:

12
 1.5.2 Pie Chart Example

• A scatter plot of column averaged data points, with Y error bars computed from the
standard deviations of the data.
• A top X axis with tick marks turned off.
• Y axis with a linear axis scale.
• A left Y axis title.
• A left Y axis with major tick marks.
• Numeric major tick labels.
• An X axis with a linear axis scale.
• A bottom X axis title.
• A right Y axis with tick marks turned off.
• An automatically generated legend.
• A reference line.

1.5.2 Pie Chart Example

Use Pie charts to display a quick comparison of ratios in a data set. The example figure
displays:
• Slice fills
• Text labels
• Exploded slices

13
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.5.3 Polar Plot Example

Use polar plots to display modular data such as average monthly temperatures, or satellite
positioning in the sky over a period of time.

14
 1.5.4 Contour Plot Example

1.5.4 Contour Plot Example

Use 2D Contour Plots to graph three dimensional data in two dimensions. The following
example includes:
• Major and minor contour lines
• Contour labels

1.5.5 3D Cartesian Graph Examples

3D Cartesian Graphs include scatter, 3D trajectory and waterfall plots, mesh plots, and bar
charts.
The following figures contain examples of these plots, as well as some additional 3D features.

15
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3D graph view can be displayed at any horizontal and vertical rotation. This example of
a 3D mesh plot includes:
• A Mesh plot with colored fills and lines.
• A Z axis drawn at left side.
• Grid lines at major tick intervals.
• A Y axis drawn at front bottom.
• Axes automatically move to the front view at any rotation.
• X axis drawn at front bottom.
• Light source shading.
• Overlapping and transparent meshes.

16
 1.5.6 Waterfall Plot Example

1.5.6 Waterfall Plot Example

3D waterfall plots are stacked line plots along the Y axis of a 3D line plot. Because hidden
lines are eliminated, waterfall plots are useful for showing trends of line plots. The following
example includes:
• Incremented line fill color
• Eliminated "hidden" lines

17
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.5.7 Area Plot Example

Area plots are 2D line plots with regions below or between curves filled with a color or
pattern. Most commonly, an area plot is a line plot with shading that descends to the axis.
You can add shade below a curve and shade in different directions. You can also identify
intersecting sections.
This example consists of two plots, and includes:
• A simple bar chart using hairline bars.
• A multiple area plot using the X many Y data format.

18
 1.6 SigmaPlot Help

1.6 SigmaPlot Help

SigmaPlot’s online help uses new HTML online Help. View the HTML Help using Microsoft
Internet Explorer version 4.0 or higher.

1.6.1 SigmaPlot FAQs

Some of SigmaPlot’s most frequently asked questions (and answers) are available on the Help
menu. The SigmaPlot FAQ includes helpful tips and work-arounds.
To view the SigmaPlot FAQs:

1. On the Help menu, click SigmaPlot FAQs.

1.6.2 Customer Service

If you have any questions concerning your shipment or account, contact your local office.
Please have your serial number ready for identification when calling.

19
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1.6.3 Training Seminars

Systat Software, Inc. provides both public and on-site training seminars for Systat Software,
Inc. products. All seminars feature hands-on workshops. Systat seminars will be offered in
major U.S. and European cities on a regular basis.

1.6.4 Tell Us Your Thoughts

Your comments are important. Please send us a letter and let us know about new and
interesting applications using Systat products. Write to Systat Software, Inc. Marketing
Department, 1735 Technology Drive, Suite 430, San Jose, CA 95110 USA.

1.6.5 Getting Technical Support

The services of Systat Technical Support are available to registered customers. Customers
may call Technical Support for assistance in using Systat products or for installation help for
one of the supported hardware environments. To reach Technical Support, see the Systat home
page on the World Wide Web at [Link] or contact us:
In the U.S.:
Telephone: (510)-231-4780 (8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. Pacific Time)
Fax: (510) 412-2909
E-mail: techsupport@[Link]
Mail: 1735 Technology Drive, Suite 430, San Jose, CA 95110
In Europe:
Telephone: 49 2104 / 95480
Fax: 49 2104 / 95410
Email: eurotechsupport@[Link]

1.6.6 Contacting Systat Software, Inc.

If you would like to be on our mailing list, contact one of our offices or distributors below.
We will send you a copy of our newsletter and let you know about Systat Software, Inc.
activities in your area.
In the U.S.:
Systat Software, Inc.
1735 Technology Drive, Suite 430
San Jose, CA 95110
Tel: 866.797.8288
Fax: 510.231.4789
[Link]
Outside the U.S.:
Systat Software, Inc. GmbH

20
 1.6.7 References

Schimmelbuschstrasse 25 40699
Erkrath, Germany
Tel: +49.2104.9540
Fax: 49.2104.95410
Or contact the distributor nearest you:
[Link]

1.6.7 References
We have found the following references very useful for graph design and layout.
M. Brent Charland, Ph.D. 1995. SigmaPlot for Scientists. Wm. C. Brown Communications,
Inc., 2460 Kerper Boulevard, Dubuque, Iowa, 52001.
Cleveland, William S. 1985. The Elements of Graphing Data. Monterey, Calif.: Wadsworth,
Inc. (408) 373-0728.
Kosslyn, Stephen M. 1994. Elements of Graph Design. New York: W.H. Freeman and
Company.
Tufte, Edward R. 1983. The Visual Display of Quantitative Information. Cheshire, Conn.:
Graphics Press. Available from Science News Books, 1719 N. St. NW, Washington, D.C.
20036.
Scientific Illustration Committee of the Council of Biology Editors. 1988. Illustrating
Science: Standards for Publication. Bethesda, Maryland: Council of Biology Editors, Inc.

21
2 Creating and Modifying Graphs
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Creating and Modifying Graphs
♦ Arranging Data for Graphs
♦ Creating Graphs
♦ Using the Graph Style Gallery
♦ Modifying Graphs
♦ Creating and Modifying Embedded SigmaPlot Graphs
♦ Changing Symbol Type and Other Symbol Options
♦ Changing Line Type and Other Line Options
♦ Changing Patterns and Fill Colors
♦ Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing
♦ Adding and Modifying Drop Lines
♦ Plotting and Solving Equations
♦ Plotting and Modifying Regression Lines
♦ Adding Reference Lines
♦ Creating Histograms

2.1 About Creating and Modifying Graphs

A graph is a representation of selected worksheet columns on a graph page. You select the
representation, or graph type (for example, 3D scatter plot, vertical bar chart, and so on), when
you create a plot or graph, but you can change it at any time.
Most plot types can graph many worksheet columns, column pairs, or column triplets.
Depending on the plot type, a separate curve or set of bars represents each column. A graph
must have at least one plot, but most graphs can hold many more plots, each with a different
type and style.
This chapter provides an overview of the graph creation process using the Graph Wizard,
including descriptions of the different graph types and styles available, and common
modifications.

2.1.1 Setting Graph Defaults

Changing graph defaults affects only new graphs created.

To change existing graphs:

1. Select the graph.

2. Change its properties using the Graph Wizard, Property Browser, or other dialog
boxes and commands.

23
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The graph default options are intentionally limited and simple. If you want to use more
complex graph defaults, use templates or the Graph Style Gallery to create complex
graphs that can be applied to data as a template, bypassing graph creation entirely. Using
the Graph Style GalleryFor more information, see page 57.
To change graph defaults:
3. Change the graph defaults options as desired.
4. Click the Main Button and then click the Optionsbutton.

On the Options dialog box, click the Graph tab.

5. Change the graph defaults options as desired.

6. Change the graph defaults options as desired.

2.1.2 SigmaPlot Graph Types

There are more than a dozen graph types available in SigmaPlot. Choose a graph type on the
Create Graph tab.
Scatter Plot Plots data as XY points using symbols.
Line Plot Plots data as XY points connected with lines.
Line and Scatter Plots data as XY points using symbols connected with
Plot lines.
Area Plot Plots data as XY points with regions below or between
curves filled with a color or pattern.
Polar Plot Plots data using angles and distance from center.
Arranging Data for Polar PlotsFor more information, see
page 44.
Ternary Plot Plots data on a coordinate system based on three different
components which always add up to 100%. Arranging
Data for a Ternary Graph For more information, see page
45.
Vertical Bar Plots data as Y points with vertical bars.
Chart
Horizontal Bar Plots data as X points with horizontal bars. Creating 2D
Chart PlotsFor more information, see page 263.
Box Plot Plots data as the median and percentiles. Creating Box
PlotsFor more information, see page 280.
Pie Chart Plots data as a percent of the total. Arranging Data for a
Pie ChartFor more information, see page 39.
Contour Plot Plots data as XYZ values in 2D space. Format data
columns as: many Z; single XY, many Z; or XYZ triplet.
Arranging Data for 3D GraphsFor more information, see
page 47.

24
 2.1.3 SigmaPlot Graph Styles

3D Scatter Plot Plots data as XYZ data points in 3D space. Format data
columns as: many Z; single XY, many Z; or XYZ triplet.
Arranging Data for 3D GraphsFor more information, see
page 47.
3D Line Plot Plots data as XYZ data points connected with lines.
Format data columns as: many Z; single XY, many Z;
or XYZ triplet. Arranging Data for 3D GraphsFor more
information, see page 47.
3D Mesh Plot Plots data as a 3D surface. Format data columns as: many
Z; single XY, many Z; or XYZ triplet. Arranging Data for
3D GraphsFor more information, see page 47.
3D Bar Chart Plots data as Z values on an XY grid. Format data
columns as: many Z; or single XY, many Z. Arranging
Data for 3D GraphsFor more information, see page 47.
Vector Plot Plots an XY column pair for the vector start point and an
XY column pair for the vector end point. Format data
columns as: XYXY; or XYAM. Arranging Data for a
Vector PlotFor more information, see page 44.

2.1.3 SigmaPlot Graph Styles

Many graph types have several styles to choose from. When you select a graph type from the
Create Graph tab, you are prompted to choose a graph style.

[Link] Scatter Plots

Simple Scatter Plots a single set of XY pairs. Format data columns as:
• XY Pair
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Scatter Plots multiple sets of XY pairs. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single Y, Many X
• Single X, Many Y
• Many X
• Many Y
• XY Category
• X Category
• Y Category

25
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Simple Plots a single set of XY pairs with a regression line.

Regression Format data columns as:
• XY Pair
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with regression lines.
Regressions Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single Y, Many X
• Single X, Many Y
• Many X
• Many Y
• XY Category
• X Category
• Y Category
Simple Error Plots a single set of XY pairs with error bars. If using
Bars worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns,
format data columns as:
• XY Pair; or Single Y
If using columns means, the first column entry, or the last
column entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Single X, Many Y
• Many Y
If using Row Mans, Row Median, First Row Entry, or
Last Row Entry as symbol values, format data columns
as:
• Single X, Single Y Replicate
• Y Replicate
Multiple Error Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with error bars. If
Bars using worksheet columns, asymmetric error bar columns,
columns means, the first column entry, or the last column
entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• X Many Y
• Many Y
If using row means, row median, first row entry, or last
row entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Single X, Many Y Replicates
• Many Y Replicates

26
 [Link] Scatter Plots

Simple Error Plots a single set of XY pairs with error bars and
Bars & a regression line. If using worksheet columns or
Regression asymmetric error bar columns, format data columns as:
• XY Pair
• Single Y
If using columns means, the first column entry, or the last
column entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Single X Many Y
• Many Y
If using Row Means, Row Median, First Row Entry, or
Last Row Entry as symbol values, format data columns
as:
• Single X, Single Y replicate
• Y replicate
If using By Category, Mean, or By Category, Median,
format data columns as:
• Category, Many Y
Multiple Plots multiple sets of XY pairs with error bars
Error Bars & and regression lines. If using worksheet columns,
Regressions asymmetric error bar columns, columns means, the first
column entry, or the last column entry as symbol values,
format data columns as:
• Single X Many Y
• Many Y
If using Row Means, Row Median, first Row Entry, or
last Row Entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Single X, Many Y Replicates
• Many Y Replicates
If using By Category, Mean, or By Category, Median,
format data columns as:
• Category, Many Y
Simple Plots XY pairs with horizontal error bars. If using
Horizontal worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as
Error Bars the as symbol values, format as:
• XY pairs
• Single X, Single Y, Many X
• Many X
If using column means, column median, the first column
entry, or the last column entry as symbol values, format
data as:

27
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Single Y, Many X
• Many X
If using Row Means, Row Median, the First Row Entry,
or the Last Row Entry as symbol values, format data
columns as:
• Single X Replicates
• Single Y, single X Replicates
• Many X Replicates
• Single Y, Many X Replicates
If using By Category, Mean, or By Category, Median,
format data columns as:
• Category, Many Y
Bi-directional Plots XY pairs with both horizontal and vertical
Error Bars error bars. Format data columns as XY pairs. If using
worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as
the as symbol values, format as:
• XY pairs
• Single X
• Single Y, Many X
• Many X
If using column means, column median, the first column
entry, or the last column entry as symbol values, format
data as:
• Single Y, Many X
• Many X
Vertical Plots one X column and at least one Y column. Format
Asymmetric data columns as:
Error Bars
• X Many Y
• Many Y
• XY Pairs
Horizontal Plots one Y column and at least one X column. Format
Asymmetric data columns as:
Error Bars
• Y Many X
• Many X
• YX Pairs

28
 [Link] Line Plots

Vertical Point Plots columns of data as Y values. Format data columns

Plot as:
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Many Y Replicates
• Single X, Many Y Replicates
Horizontal Point Plots columns of data as X values. Format data columns
Plot as: Many X
• Single Y, Many X
• Many X Replicates
• Single Y, Many X Replicates
Vertical Dot Plot Plots a column of data as Y values. Format data
columns as:
• Many Y
• Single X Many Y
• XY pairs
• X Category
Horizontal Dot Plots a column of data as X values. Format data
Plot columns as:
• Many X
• Single Y, Many X
• YX pairs

[Link] Line Plots

Simple Straight Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting the data

Line points with straight lines. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Straight Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting the data
Lines points with straight lines. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Many X
• Single Y

29
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Simple Spline Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting the data

Curve points with a spline curve. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Spline Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting the data
Curves points with spline curves. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
Simple Vertical Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting the data
Step Plot points with vertical and horizontal lines, starting
with vertical. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Vertical Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting the data
Step Plot points with vertical and horizontal lines, starting
with vertical. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
Simple Horizontal Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting the data
Step Plot points with vertical and horizontal lines, starting
with horizontal. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting the data
Horizontal Step points with vertical and horizontal lines, starting
Plot with horizontal. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y

30
 [Link] Line & Scatter Plots

• Single Y, Many X

[Link] Line & Scatter Plots

Simple Straight Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting symbols with
Line straight lines. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting symbols
Straight Lines with straight lines. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
Simple Spline Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting symbols with
Curve a spline curve. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Spline Plots multiple sets of XY pairs connecting symbols
Curves with spline curves. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
Simple Error Plots a single set of XY pairs as symbols with error
Bars bars connected with straight lines. If using worksheet
columns or asymmetric error bar columns, format data
columns as:
• XY Pair
• Single Y
If using columns means, the first column entry, or the last
column entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• X Many Y
• Many Y

31
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

If using row means, row median, first row entry, or last

row entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• X, Y Replicate
• Y Replicate
Multiple Error Plots multiple sets of XY pairs as symbols with error
Bars bars connected with straight lines. If using worksheet
columns, asymmetric error bar columns, columns means,
the first column entry, or the last column entry as symbol
values, format data columns as:
• X Many Y
• Many Y
If using row means, row median, first row entry, or last
row entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• X, Many Y Replicates
• Many Y Replicates
Simple Vertical Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting symbols with
Step Plot vertical and horizontal lines, starting with vertical.
Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Plots a multiple sets of XY pairs connecting symbols
Vertical Step with vertical and horizontal lines, starting with
Plot vertical. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X
• Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
• Single X, Many Y
Simple Plots a single set of XY pairs connecting symbols with
Horizontal Step vertical and horizontal lines, starting with horizontal.
Plot Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Plots a multiple sets of XY pairs connecting symbols
Horizontal Step with vertical and horizontal lines, starting with
Plot horizontal. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many X

32
 [Link] Area Plots

• Many Y
• Single Y, Many X
• Single X, Many Y

[Link] Area Plots

Simple Area Plots single set of XY pairs as a line plot with a downward
fills. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
• Single Y
Multiple Area Plots multiple sets of XY pairs as line plots with
downward fills. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
• Many X
• Single Y, Many X
Vertical Area Plots single set of YX pairs as a line plot with a left
direction fill. Format data columns as:
• Single X
• YX Pair
Multiple Plots multiple sets of YX pairs as line plots with left
Vertical Area direction fills. Format data columns as:
• Many X
• Single Y, Many X
Complex Plots multiple line plots with downward fills and
Area Plot intersections. Format data columns as:
• XY Pairs
• X Many Y
• Y Many X
• Many X
• Many Y

33
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Polar Plots

Scatter Plots angle and distance data as symbols. Format data

columns as:
• Theta, R Pairs
• XY Pairs
• Many Theta
• Many R
• Single Theta, Many R
• R, Many Theta
Lines Plots angle and distance data points connected with
lines. Format data columns as:
• Theta, R Pairs
• XY Pairs
• Many Theta
• Many R
• Single Theta, Many R
• R, Many Theta
Scatter & Plots angle and distance data as symbols connected with
Lines lines. Format data columns as:
• Theta, R Pairs
• XY Pairs
• Many Theta
• Many R
• Single Theta, Many R
• R, Many Theta

[Link] Radar Plots

Scatter Plot
Line Plot
Scatter & Line Plot
Arrow Line
Error and Radio Band
Line plus Radar

34
 [Link] Ternary Plots

[Link] Ternary Plots

Scatter Plots ternary triplet data as symbols. Format data

columns as:
• Ternary Triplets
• Ternary XY Pairs
• Ternary YZ Pairs
• Ternary XZ Pairs
Lines Plots ternary triplet data as data points connected with
lines. Format data columns as:
• Ternary Triplets
• Ternary XY Pairs
• Ternary YZ Pairs
• Ternary XZ Pairs
Scatter & Plots ternary triplet data as symbols connected with
Lines lines. Format data columns as: X,Y, and Z values; or data.
• Ternary Triplets
• Ternary XY Pairs
• Ternary YZ Pairs
• Ternary XZ Pairs

[Link] Vertical Bar Charts

Simple Bar Plots a single column of data as Y values. Format data

columns as:
• XY Pair
• Single Y
Grouped Bar Plots multiple columns of data in a series of bars.
Format data columns as:
• Single X, Many Y
• Many Y
• Many Y Replicates
• Single X, Many Y Replicates

35
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Simple Error Plots data as Y values with error bars. If using

Bars worksheet columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the
symbol value source, format data columns as:
• Single Y
• XY Pair
If using columns means, the first column entry, or the last
column entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Single X Many Y
• Many Y
If using row means, row median, the first row entry, or the
last row entry, format data columns as:
• Single Y Replicate
• X, Y Replicate
Grouped Plots data as multiple sets of Y values in a series of
Error Bars bars with error bars. If using worksheet columns or
asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol value source,
format data columns as:
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
If using row means, row median, the first row entry, or the
last row entry, format data columns as:
• Many Y Replicates
• Single X
• Many Y Replicates
Error bar values are from the worksheet.
Stacked Bars Plots multiple columns of data as a series of stacks in
bars. Format data columns as:
• Single X, Many Y
• Many Y
• Many Y Replicates
• Single X, Many Y Replicates

36
 [Link] Horizontal Bar Charts

[Link] Horizontal Bar Charts

Simple Bar Plots a single column of data as X values. Format data
columns as:
• XY Pairs
• Single X
Grouped Plots multiple columns of data in a series of bars. Format
Bar data columns as:
• Single Y, Many X
• Many X, Many X Replicates
• Single Y, Many X Replicates
Simple Plots data as X values with error bars. If using worksheet
Error Bars columns or asymmetric error bar columns as the symbol
value source, format data columns as:
• Single X
• YX pair
If using columns means, the first column entry, or the last
column entry as symbol values, format data columns as:
• Many X;
• Single Y, Many X
If using row means, row median, the first row entry, or the
last row entry, format data columns as:
• Many X Replicates
• Single Y, Many X Replicates
Error bar values are from the worksheet.
Grouped Plots data as multiple sets of X values in a series of bars
Error Bars with error bars. If using worksheet columns or asymmetric
error bar columns as the symbol value source, format data
columns as:
• Single Y
• Many X
• Many X
If using row means, row median, the first row entry, or the
last row entry, format data columns as:
• Many X Replicates
• Single Y, Many X Replicates
Error bar values are from the worksheet.
Stacked Plots multiple columns of data as a series of stacks in
Bars bars. Format data columns as:
• Single Y, Many X

37
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Many X
• Single Y
• Many X Replicates

[Link] Box Plots

Vertical Plots the median, 10th, 25th, 75th, and 90th percentiles as
vertical boxes with error bars. Format data columns as:
• Many Y
• Single X, Many Y
Error bar values are column means.
Horizontal Plots the median, 10th, 25th, 75th, and 90th percentiles as
horizontal boxes with error bars. Format data columns as:
• Many X
• Single Y, Many X
Error bar values are column means.

[Link] Contour Plots

Contour Plots data XYZ values in 2D space. Format data

columns as:
• XYZ Triplet
• Many Z
• XY, Many Z
Filled Plots data XYZ values in 2D space filling in the area
Contour between contour levels. Format data columns as:
• XYZ Triplet
• Many Z
• XY, Many Z

[Link] 3D Line Plots

3D Plots data as XYZ data points connected with lines.

Trajectory
3D Waterfall Plots data as XYZ data points, but only displays X or Y
gridlines. Format data as:
• Many Z
• Single XY
• Many Z

38
 2.2 Arranging Data for Graphs

2.2 Arranging Data for Graphs

For most graph types, unless you are creating a pre-formatted worksheet from the Start Up
Screen, the Graph Wizard prompts you to select a data format. For more information, see
page . Your selection determines how your worksheet data is associated with points on the
graph. For example, an XY Pair data format means that graph uses two columns; one column
corresponds to the X-axis and the other corresponds to the Y-axis. In the XY, Many Z data
format, one column corresponds to the X-axis data, another column corresponds to the Y-axis,
and the remaining columns correspond to Z-axis data.

2.2.1 Arranging Data for 2D Plots

Organize data for 2D graphs by columns. Place data for the X values of a graph in a single
column, and place data for the corresponding Y values in another column.

[Link] Arranging Data for a Pie Chart

To organize data for a pie chart, place data in a single worksheet column.

Figure 2.1 When creating pie charts, all data is placed into a single column.

[Link] Arranging Category Data

Use Category Data formats (indexed data) if your data is organized row wise by categories
with corresponding data, as is often the default data organization for both statistics data tables
and databases. Using this format, you can plot data files from other statistical packages, such
as SigmaStat or SYSTAT, without having to divide the data into groups.

39
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.2 In this worksheet, the data is arranged for an XY Categories data
format. The "Animals" column is what you would select as the "category"
column in the Graph Wizard.

The Category Data format is available when creating summary plots. Graph types and styles
that can use a category data format are:
• Scatter Plot. Multiple Scatter; Multiple Regression
• Line Plot. Multiple Straight Lines; Multiple Spline Curves; Multiple Vertical Step Plot;
Multiple Horizontal Step Plot; Multiple Vertical Midpoint Step Plot; Multiple Horizontal
Midpoint Step Plot
Plotting Category and Grouped DataFor more information, see page 264.

[Link] XY Pair Format for a Single Curve

If the graph you are creating uses only one set of X and Y values, enter all X data in one
column, and all corresponding Y data in another column. Depending on the setting, these
columns do not need to be adjacent or the same length (missing values are ignored).

40
 [Link] XY Pair Format for Multiple Curves

Figure 2.3 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as XY

[Link] XY Pair Format for Multiple Curves

If the graph style you are creating plots more than one curve, place as many additional X and
Y values in worksheet columns as you want to plot. Enter X and Y data in the worksheet in
consecutive columns, or in any order you want.

Figure 2.4 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as XY Pairs

[Link] Using the Same Column for Multiple Curves (Single X or Y vs.
Many Y or X)

SigmaPlot can graph many curves using the same X or Y data column. There is no need to
duplicate a column that is used for more than one curve; for example, enter the X data into
only one column, and enter the corresponding Y data into as many columns as you have
curves. Order and length of columns does not matter.

41
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.5 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as X Many Y

[Link] Using Row Numbers for X or Y Values (Single X; Single Y; Many X;

or Many Y)
SigmaPlot can also graph data as only X or Y values, and use the row numbers of the columns
as the corresponding Y or X coordinates. If you want to graph data as only X or Y values,
enter the data for each plot into a column, and do not enter data for corresponding coordinates.

Figure 2.6 Data for a 2D Graph Arranged and Picked as Many Y Only

[Link] Arranging Data for Plots with Error Bars

Arranging Data for Column Averaged Error Bar Plots. Certain graph styles plot data by
representing the mean of an entire column as a single data point. In these cases, place the
values you want represented as a single X or Y value into one column.

42
 [Link] Arranging Data for a Stacked Bar Chart

Arranging Data for Asymmetric Error Bar Plots. Asymmetric error bar plots use two
columns as the error bar source from which you can independently control the values of error
bars. Place the values you want to represent the error bars to the right of the plotted column.
Arranging Data Using Column Means. Plots the average of an entire worksheet column
as a single data point, then uses the column statistics to compute error bars, as specified
by the Error Calculation.
Arranging Data Using the Column Median. Plots the median of an entire worksheet column
as a single data point, then uses the column statistics to compute error bars, as specified
by the Error Calculation.

[Link] Arranging Data for a Stacked Bar Chart

In a stacked bar chart the bars appear on top of each other. The stack level corresponds to
the location of the stack in the bar. Its stack level value corresponds to the height of the bar
at a specific stack value.
X Many Y Data Format. This consists of one X column and an n number of stack level
value (Y) columns. A stack level value column consists of numbers that correspond to the
heights of the bars for the specific stack level. The following graph has four stacks, each
with three stack levels.

Figure 2.7 This stacked bar chart has four stacks. Each stack has three levels..

Its corresponding worksheet has three stack level value columns. Each column contains
four rows.

43
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The X values are in the first column. The second column, Stack Level 1, contains the bar
heights for the first stack level. This appears as the first bar in each stack, in black. The bar
heights for the second and third stacks appear the third and fourth columns, Stack Level 2 and
Stack Level 3. The values in the Y rows are the bar heights for each stack. In this example,
because the values for each row (Stack Level 1 through Stack Level 3) add up to 100, the height
of each stack in the graph will also be 100.

[Link] Arranging Data for a Vector Plot

.
.

2.2.2 Arranging Data for Polar Plots

Data for polar plots can be entered in either one of two ways:
• R, q values
• X,Y coordinates

[Link] Data for Radial and Angular Values (R, Theta)

To arrange data using q (angular) and R (radial) values, enter all q values in one column, and
enter the corresponding R values in another column. Data is plotted as q versus R, which
is similar to X,Y plots in organization, but differs from X,Y plots in that R is usually the
dependent variable.

[Link] Using X,Y Values for Polar Plots

Polar plot X,Y data is arranged the same as 2D plot X,Y data, with all X values in one column,
and all Y values in another column; however, polar plots are plotted as R,q pairs defined as:

R= x2 + y2

and
y
= atan
x

where R is the radius, and q is the angle of the data point from the origin.

[Link] Data for Multiple Curves

Since SigmaPlot can graph more than one curve per plot, place as many additional q, R values,
or X,Y coordinates, as you want to plot in worksheet columns.

[Link] Using Data from One Column for Multiple Curves

SigmaPlot can also graph many curves using the same column as the q or R data (or, X
or Y data). There is no need to duplicate a column that is used for more than one plot; for
example, enter the q data into only one column, and enter the corresponding R or dependent
data into as many columns as needed.

44
 2.2.3 Arranging Data for a Ternary Graph

2.2.3 Arranging Data for a Ternary Graph

Data for ternary plots can be XYZ data in three separate columns or SigmaPlot can extrapolate
a third column from data pairs in two columns. Ternary graphs must have at least one single or
multiple curve plot, but can hold many more plots, each with a different style and data format.
If your raw values do not add up to 100% or 1, SigmaPlot can convert them to normalized
ternary data. If you have XY, YZ, or YZ pair data, SigmaPlot can compute the third-column
values shown in the resulting graph.

[Link] Data for a Single Curve Plot (Ternary Triplets)

If you are creating a graph with a single curve plot using only one set of XYZ values whose
sum is 100% or 1, enter all X data in one column, all Y data in another column, and the
corresponding Z data in another column. The columns do not have to be adjacent to one
another, but they must be the same length. Ternary triplet data should always add up to 100%
or 1. Normalizing Ternary DataFor more information, see page .

[Link] Data for a Multiple Curve Plot (Ternary Triplets)

If you are creating a graph with a multiple-curve plot using multiple sets of XYZ values where
the sum of each set is 100% or 1, enter into worksheet columns as many additional ternary
triplet data sets as you want to plot. Each set of ternary triplet data is a separate plot-curve.
All ternary triplet data sets should add up to 100% or 1. Normalizing Ternary DataFor more
information, see page .

Figure 2.8 Multiple Columns of Triplet Percentage Data for a Ternary Plot

[Link] Data for a Single or Multiple-Curve Plot (Ternary XY, YZ, or XZ

Pairs)

If you are creating a graph with a single or multiple curve plot using XY, YZ, or XZ pairs,
enter all X, Y, or Z data in one column, and the corresponding X, Y, or Z pair values in another
column. As long as all data pairs use a percentage or unitary scale, SigmaPlot will compute
the third-column data shown in the resulting graph.
SigmaPlot computes third column data for plotting only. Computed third-column data is not
displayed in the worksheet.

45
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.2.4 Arranging Data for Bubble Plots

Data for bubble plots can either be X, Y data in two separate columns or single X or single
Y data in one column. In both cases, an additional column is needed to indicate bubble size
values. Since the bubble size column corresponds to symbol diameter, you must convert
the data for your third variable to diameters.
Bubble plots must have at least one plot, but can hold many more plots using different data
formats if appropriate. The bubble plot type has available only the default scatter style. You
can change the symbol type. However, if you use something other than a circle you will need
a different equation to transform area to diameter.

Figure 2.9 Example of a Bubble Plot

[Link] Using X, Y Values for Bubble Plots

Bubble plot X, Y data is arranged in the same way as other 2D plot X, Y data, with all X
values in one column and all Y values in another.

[Link] Data for Bubble Size

SigmaPlot can graph bubble plots using XY pair, Single Y, Single X, and bubble size data.
Bubble size values must be entered in a separate column. Each value corresponds to the
diameter of the symbol, in whatever page units are being used. If you want bubble size to
correspond to area data, you must convert your area data to diameters before creating the
bubble plot.

[Link] Converting Area Data to Diameters

If you want your bubble plot to display area data, you must run this transform where area is
the source column number and the diameter is the results column number. This transform is
derived from the formula for the area of a circle.
To convert your area data into diameters:

46
 2.2.5 Arranging Data for 3D Graphs

1. Click the Analysistab, and then in the Transformgroup, click User-Defined.

2. In the User-Defined Transform dialog box, type the transform function as follows:

pi=3.14159265359 col(diameter)=sqrt(col(area)*factor/pi)
where diameter is the column number for your diameter data, area is the column number
for your original data to be represented by area, and factor is some number to increase or
decrease the magnitude of your data to a reasonable range.
Tip: Reduce the diameters of your symbols to a reasonable size before plotting them.

Figure 2.10 Transforming Area Data to Diameters

3. Click Run.

Your new data appears in the worksheet. If you change the symbol shape, you must use a
different equation to transform area data.

2.2.5 Arranging Data for 3D Graphs

Organize data for SigmaPlot graphs by column. Typically, data for contour plots and 3D graphs
is composed of X, Y, and Z value columns, or one or more Z columns and optional X and Y
columns. 3D bar charts, scatter plots, and line plots can use any three columns as XYZ data.
Note: If multiple Z columns are plotted, they all must be next to each other. The X and Y
columns can be located anywhere.

47
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Data for 3D Bar Charts, 3D Scatter Plots, and 3D Line Plots
Arrange data for 3D bar charts, scatter plots, and line plots either as XYZ triplet data, multiple
columns of Z data, or as a single column for Y values, a single column for X values, and
multiple columns for Z values. For each of these graph types, the data in each row is graphed
as a data point. For bar charts, each column of Z data is plotted as a row parallel to either
the X axis, with Y values as the constants.
If you are formatting XYZ triplet data, you also can use one of the multiple Z column formats
designed for 3D mesh plots.
Note: 3D bar charts cannot use XYZ triplet data. You can use the X, Y, and many Z format;
however, you must have at least two columns of Z data.

[Link] Data for Contour and Mesh Plots

A regular rectangular mesh plot requires XYZ coordinates for each intersection of a
rectangular mesh. The data for a contour or mesh plot can be in the form of either a regular
rectangular mesh or an irregular mesh. If the data is a regular rectangular mesh it is graphed
as-is without any modification. If it is an irregular mesh then it is interpolated to form a
regular rectangular mesh and then graphed.
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
X1 Z1 Z4 Z7 Z10
X2 Z2 Z5 Z8 Z11
X3 Z3 Z6 Z9 Z12

The arrangement of this data for the three possible methods of picking columns to plot are
described in the following sections.
X, Y, and Z Data in Three Columns. To plot three columns as the X, Y, and Z values of
a contour or mesh plot, the data must be in long form mesh format. This format assigns the
proper Z value to each X and Y point in the mesh, in the required order.
For example, for the table of X, Y, and Z values shown above, the three column mesh format
must be arranged in the worksheet as:
X data Y data Z data
X1 Y1 Z1
X2 Y1 Z2
X3 Y1 Z3
X1 Y2 Z4
X2 Y2 Z5
X3 Y2 Z6
X1 Y3 Z7
X2 Y3 Z8
X3 Y3 Z9
X1 Y4 Z10
X2 Y4 Z11
X3 Y4 Z12

48
 [Link] Data for Contour and Mesh Plots

This arrangement places the XYZ data point coordinate values in the required order. The XYZ
columns must be the same length.

Figure 2.11 Data Arranged in Long Form Mesh Format

X and Y Columns vs. Many Z Columns. You can also place the X and Y data in single
columns, then place the corresponding Z data in many continuous columns. This method may
work best if you have XYZ data displayed in a table, or if you have irregularly incremented
X or Y values.
To use this option, you should have as many Z columns as you have Y rows, and the Z
columns should be the same length as the X column.
X data Y data Z data
X1 Y1 Z1 Z4 Z7 Z10
X2 Y2 Z2 Z5 Z8 Z11
X3 Y3 Z3 Z6 Z9 Z12
Y4

The data in the first Z column is assigned to the first Y value, the data in the second Z column
to the second Y value, etc.
The data in each row of the X column is assigned as the X value for the data in the same
row in the Z columns.

49
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.12 XYZ Data Arranged as One X Column, One Y Column, and Many Z
Columns

You can use columns of uneven length. Extra X, Y, or Z values created by uneven columns
are not plotted, as mesh plots cannot graph missing values.
Z Data vs. Row and Column Numbers: You can also plot columns as Z values versus the
cell columns and row numbers as the X and Y values.
This is the appropriate column assignment option to use: for mesh plots and 3D Bar Charts
where X and Y values are evenly and equally spaced; for example, when graphing pixel
intensity data for an image.
All data is assigned as a Z value, and the Z columns must be contiguous. To use this format
for a mesh plot, no special data arrangement is required other than equal column length. The
rows and columns of the cells can be used as either the X or Y values.

2.3 Creating Graphs

Once your data is entered into a SigmaPlot worksheet, creating a graph in SigmaPlot is quick
and easy.

1. Click the Create Graph tab, and then click any one of the available graph types and
styles in the 2D Graphs and 3D Graphs groups.

50
 2.3.1 Creating a Graph from the Quick Start Screen

Note: The Create Graph tab has replaced the Graph Type and Style toolbars that had
appeared in previous versions of SigmaPlot.
2. The Graph Wizard appears and walks you step-by-step the rest of the way to creating
your graph.

Tip: You can either select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by
dragging the pointer over your data, or you can select data columns later in the Graph
Wizard. You can also select data ranges.
Graph Style Gallery and Templates
You can also create graphs using existing in-house styles that are available both in the
easy-to-find Graph Style Gallery and in SigmaPlot [Link] more information,
see page 131.

2.3.1 Creating a Graph from the Quick Start Screen

When you first start SigmaPlot, the Quick Start screen appears with the Welcome to
SigmaPlot tab in view. From here, you can create a new notebook or open an existing file.
Creating Pre-Formatted Worksheets
You can also create pre-formatted worksheets. These are empty worksheets that contain
predefined sections that represent the data formats used for creating SigmaPlot graphs. To do
this, click Create graph. From here, you have most of the control of creating graphs that you
have in the standard SigmaPlot Graph Wizard, but in one dialog box.

51
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.13 The SigmaPlot Quick Start Screen

1. Select a graph type. On the top of the dialog box, you see a row of Graph Style icons.
Click one. Its available graph styles appear on the Graph Style menu on the left hand
side of the Start Up screen.
2. Create another pre-formatted worksheet. Click the Main Button and then click
Quick Start.

2.3.2 Creating Graphs Using the Graph Wizard

While it’s often times most easy to create a graph using any of the graph styles and types on
the Create Graph tab, you can also create a graph directly from the Graph Wizard.
To create a graph using the Graph Wizard:

52
 2.3.2 Creating Graphs Using the Graph Wizard

1. On the Create Graph tab, in the Wizard group, click Graph Wizard.

Figure 2.14 Graph Wizard Graph Types

2. Click Finish to create the plot.

3. In the Graph Wizard, under Graph Types, select the type of graph you want to make.
4. Click Next.
5. Under Graph Styles, select the desired graph style.

Figure 2.15 Graph Wizard - Style

6. Click Finish to create the plot.

53
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

7. Click Next. If the graph style you have chosen uses error bars, you are prompted to
choose an error bar source and a value to use for the error bars. Creating 2D Scatter Plots
with Error BarsFor more information, see page 266.
8. Click Next.
9. Under Data format, select how your data is formatted, and click Next.

Figure 2.16 Specifying the Data Format

10. Click Finish to create the plot.

11. From the Data for drop down list, select the worksheet columns that correspond to the
axis or error bar of your plot.

You can also drag a range of data on the worksheet using the mouse.
Note: If you create a graph using Microsoft Excel, you’ll have to manually enter the
ranges. Or you can select a range of data by entering the range manually into the Data for
box. After entering the range, press Enter. The range appears in the Graph Wizard.
If you make a mistake while selecting data, double-click the mistaken column in the
Selected Columnslist to clear the selection.

54
 2.3.3 Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard

Figure 2.17 Selecting Columns to Plot

Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using Microsoft ExcelFor more information, see page 76.
12. Click Finish to create the plot.

2.3.3 Entering Data Ranges into the Graph Wizard

The simplest way to select a region of data is to drag the columns or range using the mouse.
You can, however, manually enter the ranges into the Graph Wizard. This is necessary when
creating graphs using Microsoft Excel where it is not possible to use the mouse to select a
range of data.
The Graph Wizard supports the following formats when specifying a region in the worksheet:
• rc Notation. Specify a cell using the letter r to denote the row, and the letter c to denote
the column. For example, to specify the cell in the third row and twelfth column, you
would enter r3c12.
To specify a rectangular region, follow the upper left cell of the region by the lower right cell,
separated by two periods. For example, if the upper left cell of the region is r2c1 (second row,
first column), and the lower right cell of the region is r4c4 (fourth row, fourth column), you
would enter r2c1..r4c4 into the Graph Wizard.
You can also specify the column first. For example, both c2r2...c4r5 and r2c2...r5c4 denote
the same region in the worksheet.

55
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.18 Selecting a Range of Data Using the rc Format

• Excel Notation. You can also use Excel notation in the Graph Wizard. In Excel notation,
the columns are alphabetized in lexicographic order and the rows are numbered. In this
case, to specify a rectangular region you would again specify the upper left and lower right
cells. For example, both A3:D9 and $A3;$D9 specify a region with the upper left cell in
the first column, third row and the lower right cell as the fourth column, ninth row. Note
that the separator is a colon. The letters are case insensitive.

Figure 2.19 Selecting a Range of Data Using the Excel Format

• Column Numbers Notation. You can make a selection of a consecutive group of entire
columns by specifying the range of column indices. For example, to specify columns
1 through nine, type 1:9 or 1..9.

56
 2.4 Using the Graph Style Gallery

Figure 2.20 Selecting a Range of Data Using the Column Numbers Format

2.4 Using the Graph Style Gallery

Use the Graph Style Gallery custom create a graph from a predefined graph style. You can
create this style yourself, or use one of the many existing templates. When creating a custom
graph style, you save all graph, plot, and axes attributes, including graph size and position.
Then you can quickly use these attributes to create future graphs. All you supply is the data,
and the Graph Style Gallery formats the rest.
To open the Graph Style Gallery:

1. On the Home tab, in the Navigate group, click Gallery Pane.

Each graph style appears as a thumbnail preview in the Graph Style Gallery. You can
create new graphs by choosing one of the styles from the window. You can either
double-click a graph or click Create Graph to create a graph. The graph then appears
in a location defined by the graph style.
This section discusses:
• Adding styles to the Graph Style Gallery. For more information, see page .
• Applying graph styles to pages. For more information, see page .
• Editing graphs in the Graph Style Gallery. For more information, see page .
• Creating Graph Style Gallery graphs from the Graph Wizard. For more information,
see page .

57
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.4.1 Adding Styles to the Graph Style Gallery

After creating and formatting a graph, you can save its style in the Graph Style Gallery, and
later apply that style to future SigmaPlot graphs.
To add a graph style or object to the Graph Style Gallery:

1. Open the graph that you wish to add to the Graph Style Gallery.
2. Select the graph.
3. On the Create Graph tab, in the Graph Gallery group, click Add to Gallery.

4. Right-click and on the shortcut menu click Add Graph. The graph style appears in
the Gallery.

5. You can also drag and drop it into the Graph Style Gallery window.

A thumbnail of the graph appears in the Graph Style Gallery. The graph title appears as
the graph style’s name.
To use the right-click short cut menu:
6. Right-click and on the shortcut menu click Add Graph. The graph style appears in
the Gallery.

7. Select the graph on the page, and then click inside the Graph Style Gallery.
8. Right-click and on the shortcut menu click Add Graph. The graph style appears in
the Gallery.

2.4.2 Applying Graph Styles to Pages

Use the Graph Style Gallery to quickly apply your own custom graph styles to data.
To apply a graph style:

1. View the Graph Style Gallery. Using the Graph Style GalleryFor more information, see
page 57.
2. Double-click the graph style you want to use.

58
 2.4.3 Editing Graphs in the Graph Style Gallery

The Graph Wizard - Create Graph panel appears. Creating Graphs Using the Graph
Wizard For more information, see page 52.
3. Click Finish to create the plot.

4. In the Graph Wizard, select the worksheet columns you want to use for the plot.
5. Click Finish to create the plot.

2.4.3 Editing Graphs in the Graph Style Gallery

1. Select the graph to edit in the Graph Style Gallery.
2. Right-click, and from the menu click Edit.

The graph appears in a graph page.

3. Close the graph page. The new style is saved in the Graph Style Gallery.

4. Modify the graph using the Property Browser. Modifying Graphs For more information,
see page 61.
5. Close the graph page. The new style is saved in the Graph Style Gallery.

2.4.4 Creating Graph Style Gallery Graphs from the

Graph Wizard

You can use the Graph Wizard in conjunction with the Graph Style Gallery to create graphs
by selecting Graph Gallery as a graph type in the Graph Wizard.
To create a Graph Style Gallery graph from the Graph Wizard:

1. On the Create Graph tab, in the Wizard group, click Graph Wizard.

2. Click Finish to create the graph. A graph appears on the page using the applied Gallery
graph style.

3. In the Graph Wizard, under Graph Types, select Graph Gallery, and click Next.

59
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.21 You can choose Graph Gallery as a Graph Type when creating
graphs using the Graph Wizard.

The Create Graph - Gallery panel of the Graph Wizard appears. All graphs that appear
in the Gallery graphs list are also in the Graph Styles Gallery.

Figure 2.22 Selecting a Style from the Graph Style Gallery

4. Click Finish to create the graph. A graph appears on the page using the applied Gallery
graph style.

5. Under Gallery graphs, select the graph type that you want to apply to your data, and
click Next.

The Create Graph - Select Data panel of the Graph Wizard appears.

60
 2.5 Modifying Graphs

Figure 2.23 Selecting Data in the Graph Wizard

6. Click Finish to create the graph. A graph appears on the page using the applied Gallery
graph style.

7. Under Data for, select the worksheet columns to plot. If you make a mistake while
selecting data, select the correct column in the Selected Columns list.
8. Click Finish to create the graph. A graph appears on the page using the applied Gallery
graph style.

2.5 Modifying Graphs

Use the Property Browser to make most graph modifications. The Property Browser
replaces the Graph Properties dialog box that had been used in previous versions of SigmaPlot.
Now instead of clicking and double-clicking through tabs on a dialog box to find what
modifications you can make, now all you need is to click any object on the graph, and the
available options are immediately visible to you in a pop up window. The choices you make
are reflected immediately in the Property Browser, a floating window that appears to the right
of the graph page. There is now no need to open and close dialog boxes. To undo a change,
just press Ctrl + Z.

2.5.1 Modifying Plots and Axes

All you need to do to modify a plot or axis on any graph page is click it (the same for
modifying any object on a graph page). The available options immediately appear in the
Property Browser.

2.5.2 Modifying Grids and Planes, Titles and Legends

To modify grids, in the Property Browser, navigate to Grid Lines.

61
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To hide or show graph titles and automatic legends, to hide or show plots, and to make
modifications to automatic legends, in the Property Browser, navigate to

2.5.3 Selecting a Graph or a Plot

To select a graph or plot:

1. View the page window.

2. On the Graph Page tab, in the Tools group, click the Select Object button.

3. Place the pointer over the desired graph or plot and click.

62
 2.5.4 Picking Different Data for the Current Plot

Figure 2.24 Small, square handles surround selected graphs.

A selected graph is surrounded by small square handles.

2.5.4 Picking Different Data for the Current Plot

To change data columns for an existing plot:

1. Click the plot to modify.

Square handles appear over the data points for the clicked curve. Do not click the graph,
or you will add a plot to the graph.
2. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph.

3. On the Create Graph tab, in the Wizard group, click Graph Wizard.

4. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph.

5. In the Graph Wizard, under Data Format, select a data format, and click Next.

63
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.25 The Graph Wizard displays the available Data Formats for the
current plot

6. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph.

7. If you don’t change the data format for your graph, your previous column choices
appear under Selected Columns. To change column assignments, under Selected
Columns, select the desired assignment, then under Data For, select the appropriate
column from the worksheet or from the data list.

Figure 2.26 You can change the column assignments using the Graph Wizard.

Note: To clear a column assignment by double-click it in the Selected Columns list.

8. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph.

64
 2.5.5 Changing Graph Type and Style

9. If you change the data format for your graph, a single data type is highlighted in the
Selected Columns list. To pick data, either click the corresponding column directly in the
worksheet, or choose the appropriate column from the Data for list. Use this method to
pick X, Y, or Z data, R and theta data, and error bar data, if applicable.
10. Click Finish to close the Graph Wizard and view the changed graph.

2.5.5 Changing Graph Type and Style

Change plots using the Graph Wizard; however, once you have defined a plot style and type,
the styles and types available for you to apply to the created plot are limited. If the plot you
have selected cannot be changed to the plot type or style that you want, use the Graph Wizard
to create another plot using the desired style and type.
To change graph type and style:

1. Click the plot to modify. Square handles appear over the data points for the clicked curve.
Do not click the graph, or you will add a plot to the graph.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the Wizard group, click Graph Wizard.

3. If necessary, pick the data columns to plot again. Otherwise, click Finish to complete you
plot type or style change.

4. To change plot style, in the Graph Wizard , click Back to view the Graph Styles list.
Choose from the list of available styles then click Next.

65
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.27 You can use Graph Wizard to change the type and style of the graph.

5. If necessary, pick the data columns to plot again. Otherwise, click Finish to complete you
plot type or style change.

6. To change the plot type, click Back twice to view the Graph Types list. Choose from
the list of available graph types, then click Next.
7. If necessary, pick the data columns to plot again. Otherwise, click Finish to complete you
plot type or style change.

2.5.6 Adding New Plots

Graphs can have multiple plots and plot types. Although most 2D graphs with multiple curves
do not require more than one plot, if you want to mix plot types on a single graph you will
need to create multiple plots.
Use multiple plots per graph rather than a single plot with many curves only if different plot
types or styles are required (i.e., placing a bar chart and a line plot, or a 3D scatter and mesh
plot on a graph), if different data formats are required (such as XY and Y only for a scatter
plot), or if a curve requires a different axis (scale, range, etc.).
2D graphs with multiple plots can also have multiple axes.

66
 2.5.7 Creating Additional Plots

Figure 2.28 In this example of a graph with two plots, each plot has separate
Y-axes.

2.5.7 Creating Additional Plots

Use the Graph Wizardto add a plot to a selected graph.

To add another plot to a graph:

1. Click the graph to modify. Small square handles surround the graph. Do not click a
curve, or you will modify that curve instead.
2. Right-click the graph, and then click Add New Plot.

The Graph Wizard appears displaying all the graph types. The available styles and types
for a new plot are limited depending on the other plot types and styles in the current
graph; for example, you cannot add a Polar plot to a 2D Cartesian plot, or vice versa.

67
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: If the selected graph cannot accommodate the plot type or style that you want to
add, the plot will be created as a new graph. You can move the graph of the new plot over
the original graph so that it appears to be in the same graph.
3. Click Finish.

4. Select a Graph Type and click Next.

5. Select a Graph Style and click Next.
6. Select a Data Format and click Next.
7. Pick data either by clicking the corresponding column directly in the worksheet, or
choosing the appropriate column from the data list. Use this method to pick X, Y, or Z
data, R and theta data, and error bar data.

Note: If you make a mistake while picking data, click the wrong entry in the Graph
Wizard, then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You can also clear a column
assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list.
8. Click Finish.

9. Repeat the process for every data column. When you have chosen the data appropriate
for your style of plot, click Back to re-pick data columns, or if applicable, click Next
to pick data for additional plots.
10. Click Finish.

2.5.8 Hiding, Showing, and Deleting Plots

Occasionally, you may want to remove a plot from a graph without deleting it. You can hide
plots from view without deleting them by using the right-click shortcut menu.
To hide a plot:

1. Right-click the plot and then click Hide.

The plot is hidden, but not removed.

68
 2.5.8 Hiding, Showing, and Deleting Plots

Figure 2.29 You can use the right-click shorcut menu to hide graphs.

To show a hidden plot:

2. Press Delete.

3. In the Property Browser, navigate to the hidden plot.

All plots associated with the current graph are listed under Show/hide plots in the Object
Properties window. A check mark in the check box next to the name of a plot indicates
that the plot is displayed.

69
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Press Delete.

5. Clear a check box to hide a plot from view, or select it to show the plot.

To delete a plot:
6. Press Delete.

7. Select the plot.

8. Press Delete.

2.5.9 Sampling Fewer Data Points

If you have a graph with a large number of data points, you can plot only a portion of the
column(s) or sample only a portion of the data from the column. This is useful if you are
interested only in graphing part of the data, or if you want to increase drawing speed while
working on the graph.
To plot only a portion of your data:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to the name of the plot
that contains the data you want to sample, and then navigate to Data Sample.

70
 2.5.9 Sampling Fewer Data Points

2. To sample the column rows by a specified increment, select a number from the Sample
Freq drop-down list. Selecting a 2 samples every other row and reduces the number of
rows plotted by 50%, selecting a 3 samples every third row, and so on.

3. To plot only a portion of your data, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, in Sample Range, select Only Rows, and then select the range to plot in the
Sample Top and Sample Bottom drop-down lists.

4. To sample the column rows by a specified increment, select a number from the Sample
Freq drop-down list. Selecting a 2 samples every other row and reduces the number of
rows plotted by 50%, selecting a 3 samples every third row, and so on.

5. To sample the column rows by a specified increment, select a number from the Sample
Freq drop-down list. Selecting a 2 samples every other row and reduces the number of
rows plotted by 50%, selecting a 3 samples every third row, and so on.

71
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.5.10 Plotting Missing and Out of Axis Range Data

Points

You can choose to either plot or ignore bad points. Bad points are either missing values, or
data that lie outside the axis ranges.

Figure 2.30 Example of Graphs Plotting Bad Data Points

The graph on the left plots both a missing data point and out-of-range data point. The graph on
the right ignores both missing and out of range points.
To ignore missing and out of-range points:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to the name of the plot
that contains the data you want to sample, and then navigate to Data Sample.

72
 2.5.10 Plotting Missing and Out of Axis Range Data Points

2. To plot out of range values, select Accept in Out of Range Values field.

3. To plot data without missing values, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, select Ignore in the Missing values field. To plot missing values, select .

4. To plot out of range values, select Accept in Out of Range Values field.

5. To plot data without out of range values, select Ignore in the Missing Values field. ,
select Out of Range Values.
6. To plot out of range values, select Accept in Out of Range Values field.

73
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.6 Creating and Modifying Embedded

SigmaPlot Graphs
When you insert a SigmaPlot graph into a document as a SigmaPlot object, different options
are available than when viewing graphs inside SigmaPlot.
The following describes the behavior of SigmaPlot features while editing a SigmaPlot graph.
Tip: You can also open embedded graphs inside SigmaPlot, gaining full SigmaPlot
functionality.

2.6.1 Creating Embedded Graphs

You can create embedded graphs in any number of ways, including:
• Copying and pasting into an application that accepts embedded objects, like Word, Excel
or PowerPoint.
• Using the Insert tab from an application that accepts embedded objects.
• Running any of the SigmaPlot integration routines (for example, Excel integration).
• Using the Paste to PowerPoint Slide or Insert Graphs into Word Toolbox macros.

2.6.2 Using Embedded Graph Options

To activate SigmaPlot options for an embedded graph, double-click the graph in the
application. The Page tab appears with the following available groups:
• Edit. Paste, Cut, Copy

• Insert. Insert New Object, Links, OLE.

• Format. Arrange Graphs, Bring to Front, Group, Align, Send to Back, Ungroup, Line,
Fill, Size and Position

74
 2.6.3 Editing Embedded Graphs

• Tools. Select Object, Text, Draw Line, Draw Arrow, Draw Box, Draw Ellipse, Line Type,
Line Color, Line Thickness, Fill Color, Symbol Type, Fill Pattern, Axis Scale.

• Text. Font, Font Size, Bold, Italic, Underline, Superscript, Subscript, Normal, Color, Align
Left, Align Center, Align Right, Rotation, Increase Space, Decrease Space, Line Spacing,
Greek Characters, Legend Symbol

2.6.3 Editing Embedded Graphs

You can choose to edit a SigmaPlot graph from inside the current program, or open the
embedded graph inside SigmaPlot.
Editing "in-place". To edit a graph in place, double-click it. You can also right-click it and
select Edit the SigmaPlot Graph Object. To modify the graph at this point, right-click or
double-click the graph to access the different settings.
Opening graphs. To open an embedded graph inside SigmaPlot, you can right-click the
inactive graph, and click Open the SigmaPlot Graph Object. The graph will open as a graph
page and worksheet inside SigmaPlot as an Embedded Page.
Note: No notebook window or file is associated with this graph.

2.6.4 Viewing Data for an Embedded Graph

If you need to view or edit the data for an embedded graph, you must open that graph inside
SigmaPlot.

2.6.5 Resizing Embedded Graphs

The sizing and scaling of the SigmaPlot graph is controlled by the "container" application,
that is, the program for the document where the graph has been embedded; however, you
can change the size of the page for the embedded graph itself. This is particularly useful if
for some reason the graph has been clipped, or you need to rescale and resize the graph or
other page objects.
The embedded graph resides on a graph page that has been clipped to just contain the
embedded content.

75
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.6.6 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using Microsoft Excel

You can launch the Graph Wizard and subsequently create a SigmaPlot graph using Microsoft
Excel. Just as you would using SigmaPlot, you can select data from the worksheet. You can
also select ranges of data. If you change your data in Excel, the SigmaPlot graph automatically
updates.
To create a graph using Microsoft Excel:

1. View a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

2. On the Add-Ins tab, in the Menu Commands group, click SigmaPlot Graph.

3. Create the graph using the Graph Wizard as you would normally.

4. Create the graph using the Graph Wizard as you would normally.

2.7 Changing Symbol Type and Other

Symbol Options
You can specify the symbol type used either for the symbols in a single curve, or for all the
curves in a plot. The default is to use the same symbol for a single curve and increment
symbols for multiple curves.
You can only modify symbols. Plots that normally use symbols are scatter plots, line plots,
line/scatter plots, bubble plots, polar plots, box plots, 3D scatter plots, 3D trajectory plots,
and ternary plots.
Bubble plots use circles as the default symbol shape. If you choose a different symbol shape,
you must change the transform function used to translate area to diameter.
You cannot increment Symbols for single curves, unless there is only one curve within a plot.

2.7.1 Changing Symbol Type, Size, and Color

To change symbol attributes:

1. Select a symbol on the graph page.

2. If necessary, in the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Symbols.

76
 2.7.1 Changing Symbol Type, Size, and Color

3. To change the symbol type for the selected plot, in the Object Properties window of
the Property Browser, from the Type drop-down list select a symbol type, or choose to
increment symbols using the one of the symbol schemes. To create a plot that displays
lines only, turn off symbols by choosing (none).

4. To change the size of the symbol, move the Size slider, or type a new value in the Size
box. By default, all symbols in a plot are the same size. Use symbols of different sizes by
entering symbol sizes in a worksheet column, then selecting the column from the Size list.
5. To change the fill color of symbols for the selected plot, select a color from the Fill
Color drop-down list, or choose to increment fill colors using the one of the incrementing
schemes. To turn off symbol fills select (none). Select (Custom) to open the Color dialog
box to create or choose a custom color. Using Custom ColorsFor more information,
see page 175.

Note: Hollow Symbols are symbols that use (none) as the fill color. They are hollow,
that is, they are composed of the edge lines only. Lines, error bars, and graph background
colors all show through unfilled symbols. This is useful if you have many overlapping
data points.

77
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. To change the edge color of symbols, select a color from the Edge Color drop-down
list. To turn off symbol edge color, select (none).
7. To control the color of symbol dots and crosshairs, or of text used as symbols, use
Edge Color. If a symbol is filled with black and has a black edge, then dots and crosshairs
automatically default to white.
8. To change the thickness of the symbol edge, move the Edge Thickness slider, or
type a new value.

2.7.2 Automatically Incrementing Symbols

When incrementing symbols automatically, symbol types are assigned to curves (or points, if
the plot has only one curve) in the same order as the column pairs listed in the Graph Wizard.
SigmaPlot increments symbols according to the selected scheme.

Figure 2.31 Both graphs use the Doubles symbol scheme and the Black and
White color scheme. The first graph has only one curve; the second has four.

Symbol types and colors appear on the curves of the plot in the same order as the symbol types
and colors in the right-click popup menus of the incrementing option.
To automatically increment symbols:

1. Select a symbol on the graph page.

2. If necessary, in the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Symbols.

78
 2.7.2 Automatically Incrementing Symbols

3. To increment symbol types and fill and edge colors automatically, in the Object
Properties window of the Property Browser, select Incrementing from the Type
drop-down list.

Note: Increment schemes do not include (None) as a symbol type.

79
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.7.3 Using Characters and Text as Symbols

You can use numbers, characters, and text as symbols by entering them in a worksheet column
and specifying the column in the Property Browser.

Figure 2.32 Using Text from a Worksheet Column as Plot Symbols

To specify characters as symbols:

1. Enter the text you want to use as symbols in a worksheet column in the order you want the
curve(s) to use them. To use numeric values as symbols, add a space after each value in
the worksheet. You can assign the numbers that appear aligned to the left as symbols.

80
 2.7.3 Using Characters and Text as Symbols

Figure 2.33 Example of Worksheet with Plot Symbol Text Entered in Column 3

You can use all the non-keyboard characters available for the default font. To view and
access these characters, you can use the Windows Character Map utility. The Windows
User’s Guide also lists these special characters, along with the keystrokes required
to enter them.
2. View the graph page.
3. Double-click the plot on which you want to use text symbols.
4. If necessary, in the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Symbols.

5. In the Object Properties window of the Property BrowserUnder Symbols, select the
column that contains the text or numeric values you want to use as symbols from the
Type drop-down list.

Note: The column option does not appear in the Type list unless text or symbols are
entered in a worksheet column.

81
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.7.4 Using Different Symbol Sizes

By default, all symbols in a plot are the same size. To use symbols of varying sizes, enter
symbol size values in a worksheet column, then set symbol size using Property Browser.

Figure 2.34 Using Symbol Sizes from a Worksheet Column for Plot Symbols

Symbol sizes are assigned to symbols and curves (or points, if the plot has only one curve) in
the same order as the column pairs that form the curves are listed in Graph Wizard.
To use worksheet values for symbol size:

1. Select the first cell of an empty column in the worksheet containing data for the current
plot.

82
 2.7.4 Using Different Symbol Sizes

2. Type the size values to use in the order you want to use them. Since the symbol sizes
correspond to symbol diameters or widths, make sure that the symbol sizes you enter are
of a reasonable size, that is, small fractions of inches or only a few millimeters or points.

If desired, you can also include the measurement unit for the value. For example, for
inches type in, for millimeters type mm, or for points type pt.

Figure 2.35 Example of Worksheet with Symbol Sizes Entered in Column 3

If you omit the measurement unit, the numeric values in the symbol size column are
assigned the measurement unit specified on the Page tab of the Options dialog box.

83
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To view, click the Main Button, click Options, and then the Pagetab.
3. View the graph page and select the plot.
4. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to the plot that contains
the symbols to modify.
5. Navigate to Symbols.
6. Use the Size drop-down list to choose the worksheet column containing the symbol
size values.

2.8 Changing Line Type and Other Line

Options
You can change the line type, shape, thickness, and color for all lines in a plot. Because
plots can also have multiple curves, you can also increment the line types and colors for any
plot with multiple curves.
Lines can only be modified in or added to plots that normally use lines, i.e., scatter plots, line
plots, line/scatter plots, polar plots, 3D scatter plots, 3D trajectory plots, and ternary scatter,
line, and line/scatter plots.

84
 2.8.1 Changing Plot Line Attributes

2.8.1 Changing Plot Line Attributes

To change the attributes of lines in a selected plot:

1. Select the line.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Lines.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a line type from
the Line Type drop-down list.

Tip: To create a plot that displays symbols only, choose (None) to turn off lines.
4. To change the thickness of the line, type the new value in the Thickness box.
5. To change the color of the lines in the selected plot, select a color from the Color
drop-down list, or choose to increment line color using the one of the incrementing
schemes. Select (None) to create transparent lines. This in effect turns them off.

85
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. To change or add a gap color, select a color from the Gap Color color drop-down
list. This option is only available if you select a line type with actual "gaps" in it, like
dotted or dashed, for example.

2.8.2 Automatically Incrementing Lines

Line types and colors appear on the curves of the plot in the same order as the line types and
colors in the right-click popup menus of the incrementing option. There are two line type
incrementing schemes: Incrementing and Monochrome. There are nine different incrementing
color schemes to choose from for line colors.

86
 2.8.2 Automatically Incrementing Lines

Figure 2.36 Each of these graphs uses the Incrementing option, but are
assigned different starting line types.

To use automatically incrementing line types:

1. Select the line.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Lines.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select Incrementing from
the Type and Color drop-down lists.

87
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.9 Changing Patterns and Fill Colors

You can modify and increment the background colors, patterns, and pattern colors used for
plots.
You can only modify or add fill colors and patterns to plots that normally use fills, i.e.,area
plots, bar charts, box plots, pie charts, 3D bar charts, and ternary plots.

2.9.1 Changing Plot Fill Patterns and Colors

Modern laser printing and color slides have removed much of the need for using hatch marks
and other line patterns for bar and pie charts. Use gray shades and colors whenever possible.

88
 2.9.1 Changing Plot Fill Patterns and Colors

Figure 2.37 Example of a Bar Chart with a Gray Scale Fill Color Scheme

To change fill attributes:

1. Select the fill.

2. If necessary, in the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Fills.

89
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To change the background fill color, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, select a color from the Color drop-down list.

4. To turn off background fills, select (None).

5. To create a custom color, select (Custom). Using Custom ColorsFor more information,
see page 175.
6. To change the fill pattern for the selected plot, select a pattern from the Pattern
drop-down list.

90
 2.9.2 Automatically Incrementing Chart Fills

7. To change the thickness of the pattern lines and edges, move the Edge Thickness
slider.

2.9.2 Automatically Incrementing Chart Fills

You can increment fills for bar charts automatically using the Property Browser. When
incrementing fills, different fill colors and patterns are assigned to each bar, box and pie
chart slice in the plot. If you are incrementing fills for a grouped bar chart fill colors and
patterns are assigned to each group in the plot in the same order the column pairs forming
the groups are listed in the Graph Wizard.
There are two file type incrementing schemes: Monochrome and Incrementing. There are
nine different incrementing color schemes to choose from for fills.
To use automatically incrementing fills:

1. Select the plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Fills.

91
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select Incrementing from
the Color and Pattern drop-down lists.

2.9.3 Using Custom Symbol, Fill, Line, and Color

Increments

When using a series of incremented symbols, fills, lines, or colors you have defined, the
increment scheme is assigned to curves or points in the same order the columns plotted for
the curves are listed in the Graph Wizard.

92
 2.9.3 Using Custom Symbol, Fill, Line, and Color Increments

Figure 2.38 A Bar Chart Using Custom Incremented Fills

To define and apply a series of incremented symbols, fills, lines, or colors:

1. View the worksheet.

2. On the Worksheettab, in the Insert group, click Graphic Cells.

93
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.39 Using the Insert Graphic Cells Dialog Box to Specify a Custom
Line Sequence

3. In the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box, click the Colors, Lines, Symbols, or Patterns
tab.

Note: Using symbol types from a column specifies the symbol shape only. If you want to
change the symbol fills, create another color column and use it as the symbol fill colors.
Typically, white is used for hollow symbols, and black for solid symbols.
4. Select the first cell in an empty column in the worksheet.
5. Double-click the color, line, symbol, or fill pattern in the Insert Graphic Cells dialog
box you want to place in the cell.

Note: Do not mix graphic cell types within the same column; for example, place colors
in one column, symbols in a different column, fills in yet another column, and lines in
a fourth column. However, you can use multiple columns to define several different
increments of the same graphic cell type. For example, you can have several columns
containing colors of differently ordered increments. The item appears in the worksheet
cell.
6. Continue adding to the column, in the order you want the curves to use the colors, lines,
symbols, or patterns. The order of the curves is the order in which they appear in the
Selected Columns drop-down list in the Graph Wizard.
7. Close the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box.
8. View the graph page and select the graph.
9. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Fills, Area Fills,
Symbols, or Linesdepending on what you have defined in the worksheet..

94
 2.10 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing

10. Choose the name of the column which contains the appropriate graphic cells from the
Symbols Type, Fills Foreground Pattern, or Lines Type, or Color drop-down lists.

If you are applying a large number of colors or other property schemes, you may wish to
turn off the automatic legend, which will attempt to display your first 25 different data
points. Editing Automatic LegendsFor more information, see page 169.

2.10 Changing Bar and Box Widths and

Spacing

Control the amount of space between bars and boxes, and between grouped 2D and 3D bars
by adjusting the percent of the maximum possible widths of both the individual bars and
the bar groups.

Figure 2.40 From left to right: bar charts with a group spacing of 50% and
relative thickness of 100%, group spacing and relative thickness both set to
66%, and both settings set to 100%.

To control bar and box width and spacing for bar charts and box plots:

1. Select the plot to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Widths.

95
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To change the width and spacing between bars for all bar charts and box plots,
in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, move the Bar thickness
slider. The wider the bars or boxes, the less space between them. The narrower the bars
or boxes, the more space between them.

4. To change the width and spacing between groups of 2D and 3D bars, move the Group
spacing slider. This option is only available for grouped and 3D bar charts. SigmaPlot
sets grouped bar widths and spacing to as wide or as narrow and as far or as close as
possible given the corresponding spacing or width setting.

96
 2.10 Changing Bar and Box Widths and Spacing

5. To set a constant width for all bars or boxes, from the Bar Width style drop-down
list, select Uniform. If the bars are set to Uniform, the Bar thickness setting has the
same effect on all bars.

6. To set potentially uneven widths for bars and boxes,, select Variable from the Bar
Width style drop-down list. If the constant column values are uneven, the bars will vary
in width according to the corresponding axis values. Change bar widths according to the
percent of their total widths, if the bars are set to Variable, so that wide bars are more
affected than thin bars.

Note: Bars created with a single plot will not overlap; however, you can create bars using
separate plots and overlap them. Spacing Bars from Different PlotsFor more information,
see page 278.
7. To create a needle plot, move the Bar thickness slider to set bar widths to the narrowest
possible widths.

97
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.41 To make a histogram needle plot, create a bar chart and set the Bar
Thickness to Needle.

8. To change bar alignment, select either Center, Left, or Rightfrom the Bar Alignment
drop-down list.

By default, bar chart bars are centered around the data point. Use Bar Alignment to
alternately draw the bars right or left aligned with the data points.

98
 2.10.1 Uniform versus Variable Bar Widths

Figure 2.42 From Left To Right: Bar Charts with Alignments to the Left of the X
Points, to the Right of the X Points, and Centered over the X Data Points

2.10.1 Uniform versus Variable Bar Widths

Uniform bar widths set all individual bars to the same width, using the width of the narrowest
bar. If the values which the bars are plotted along are unevenly incremented, the bar widths
still remain constant.
Variable bar widths set the widths to be as wide as possible, as determined by the Bar
Thickness and Group Spacing settings. If the values which the bars are plotted along are evenly
incremented, this option has no effect. However, if the values which the bars are plotted along
are unevenly incremented, the bar widths will vary according to their corresponding values.

2.11 Adding and Modifying Drop Lines

Use drop linesFor more information, see page . to produce dot plots and other types of graphs
which connect data points to their axis values. You can add drop lines from plotted data points
to either or both axes in a 2D scatter, line, or line/scatter plot, or to any or all back planes in a
3D scatter or trajectory plot. Drop lines are drawn for every curve in a plot.

99
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.43 The graphs on the left are examples of 2D plots with drop lines to
the Y and X axes. The graph on the right is an example of a 3D graph with
drop lines to all axes.

Drop lines always fall toward the minimum of a range; for example, if a Y axis range were
reversed, a drop line to the X axis would fall to the top of the graph rather than the bottom.
Use the Drop Lines settings in the Property Browser to create new drop lines, and to modify
existing drop line type, thickness, and color.
To add or modify drop lines for a selected plot:

1. Select the plot to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Drop Lines.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select Show X drop line or
Show Y drop line. Drop lines are added to any and all planes or axes that are selected.

100
 2.11 Adding and Modifying Drop Lines

4. To specify the type of line to use for selected drop lines, in the Page Objects window
of the Property Browser, navigate to either X drop line or Y drop line.

In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, from the Line Type
drop-down list specify the type of line to use for selected drop lines.

101
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. To adjust line thickness, type the new value in the Thicknessbox.

6. To set drop line color, select a color from the Color drop-down lists. Select any of
the listed colors, or select (Custom) to select or define a custom color. Using Custom
ColorsFor more information, see page 175.

2.11.1 Drop Lines for a Single Point

You can use drop linesFor more information, see page . to indicate the position of a single
point. To show a single drop line, create a second plot which graphs only the desired data
point, then add drop lines to the single-point plot. If you do not want the symbol to show
for the point, set the symbol type to (None).

102
 2.12 Plotting and Solving Equations

2.12 Plotting and Solving Equations

Use the Plot Equation dialog box to create and plot equations defined using the Transform
language. You can use one of over 100 built-in equations, or create an equation of your own
and save it to a notebook.
To create and plot an equation and save it to a notebook:

1. With the worksheet in view, on the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click
Plot Equation.

2. To manually enter the equation, from the Name drop-down list, select Untitled.
3. If necessary, delete the existing equation in the f = field, and then either type the equation,
or click the Functions Palette button to open the Functions Palette. The Functions
Palette provides immediate access to some of the most frequently used functions.

You can also select one of the last ten used functions from the Name drop-down list.

103
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. From the Variables group box, select either 2D or 3D.

5. Set the independent variables using the Name, Minimum, Maximum, and Intervals
boxes.

• Name. Type the name of the independent variable(s).

• Minimum and Maximum. Type the extent of the range of values for the corresponding
independent variables.
• Intervals. Set the number of intervals for sampling independent variables over
a specified range.

Note: You can also select a column in the worksheet. The range of that column appears in
the Minimum and Maximum edit boxes.
6. To set the equation parameters, click the Options tab.
7. Click Add As. The Add As dialog box appears.

8. Type the name of the equation in the Equation Name edit box.
9. Click OK. The equation name appears in the Name drop-down list on the Equation tab.

10. Click Plot. A graph page appears with the plotted equation, and the equation values
appear in the worksheet.
11. Click Close to close the dialog box.

104
 2.12.1 Plotting Equations onto Existing Graphs

If desired, you can add plot an equation and add it to the existing graph, or plot a new
equation on a new graph page.

2.12.1 Plotting Equations onto Existing Graphs

Use the Plot Equation dialog box to plot equations onto existing graphs. This is especially
helpful if you want to see how the curves change by modifying the parameters.
To plot the equation:

1. Select the graph.

2. On the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Plot Equation.

3. Click Close to close the Plot Equations dialog box.

4. In the Plot Equation dialog box, either manually enter the equation in the f = edit box, or
choose an existing equation, or use the same equation as used previously if you want to
change the parameters.

5. Click Close to close the Plot Equations dialog box.

6. To set the equation parameters, click the Options tab.

105
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

7. Click Close to close the Plot Equations dialog box.

8. If you don’t want to create a second graph page, select Add to current graph and clear
Create new graph.
9. Click Close to close the Plot Equations dialog box.

2.12.2 Setting Equation Parameters

All equations that you create or use from the [Link] library have editable parameters.
You can either enter the parameters or modify them using the Graph Equation dialog box
Options tab.
To set equation parameters:

1. With the worksheet in view, on the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click
Plot Equation.

2. Click Plot to plot the equation.

3. Click the Options tab.

106
 2.12.3 Plotting Saved Equations

4. Click Plot to plot the equation.

5. In the Parameters box, enter or edit the parameters.

Enter parameters with the name of the parameter first, followed by an = sign, and then the
value, i.e. a=3 or b=7.231
6. Click Plot to plot the equation.

7. To assign a value to the next parameter, press Enter.

8. Click Plot to plot the equation.

2.12.3 Plotting Saved Equations

Each equation you create is saved in the [Link] library. Select the equation to plot from
the Library tab of the Plot Equation dialog box.
You can also select one of the last ten equations plotted from the Name drop-down list of
the Plot Equation dialog box Equations tab.
To plot an equation using the Library tab:

1. With the worksheet in view, on the Analysis tab, in the Graph Analysis group, click
Plot Equation.

107
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. Click the Library tab.

3. Select an equation category from the Equation category drop-down list. The items that
appear in the Equation category drop-down list are sections in the [Link] library.
Below, in the Equation Name list, are items that appear under that section name in the
notebook.
4. Select an equation from the Equation name list.
5. Click Select. The Equation tab appears with the selected equation displayed in the Name
drop-down list.

Some of the settings for SigmaPlot’s built-in equations in the [Link] library are
read-only. To modify a built-in equation, click Add As to create an equation based on
the built-in equation.
6. Click Close to close the Plot Equation dialog box.

7. Click Plot. A graph page appears with the plotted equation, and the equation values
appear in the worksheet.
8. Click Close to close the Plot Equation dialog box.

2.12.4 Solving Equations

Use the Equation Solver on the Plot Equations dialog box to evaluate mathematical
expressions for functions and to solve equations.

108
 2.12.4 Solving Equations

The Equation Solver uses the expression entered in the Equation tab on the Plot Equations
dialog box as the basis for its results. This expression then appears on the Solve tab for
evaluation.
To solve an equation:

1. On the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Plot Equation

Figure 2.44 Plot Equation Dialog Box

2. Under Options, click Evaluate or Solve, depending on the selected mode of operation.
The resulting value or the equation solutions that lie between the prescribed ranges appear
in the Results box.

3. Click the Equation tab, and enter an equation in the f = box. You can also select one of
the last ten used functions from the Name drop-down list, or you can choose any of the
built-in parameterized equations used by the Regression Wizard. Select these equations
from the Library, too.
4. Click the Solve tab. The entered equation appears in the f = box on the Solve tab.

109
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Under Options, click Evaluate or Solve, depending on the selected mode of operation.
The resulting value or the equation solutions that lie between the prescribed ranges appear
in the Results box.

6. Under Options, select the mode of operation. You can select from one of the following:

• Evaluate F at. Enter a numerical value for each variable that occurs in the expression
in the boxes that appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
• Solve equation for x within range. Enter a numerical value into the box which
appears to the left of the expression (the default value is 0) to complete the definition of
the equation. You must also enter limits for a range of values of the equation variable.
The default range limits are taken from the values entered on the Equation tab.

The Solver is only available for expressions containing a single independent variable,
although any number of parameters can be present.
7. Under Options, click Evaluate or Solve, depending on the selected mode of operation.
The resulting value or the equation solutions that lie between the prescribed ranges appear
in the Results box.

8. Under Options, click Evaluate or Solve, depending on the selected mode of operation.
The resulting value or the equation solutions that lie between the prescribed ranges appear
in the Results box.

2.12.5 Results Box Tips and Tricks

• The Results box keeps a tally of all evaluation and solving results relative to the given
expression. If you alter this expression on the Equation tab or select a new plot expression,
the Results box appears with no text. Modifying the expression also clears the other boxes
on the Solve tab.

110
 2.12.6 Equation Solving Guidelines

• Click Copy to place the entire contents of the Results box onto the Clipboard.
• You can annotate the results in the Results box. All annotations are preserved when your
perform further computations using the same expression.
• In addition to displaying the results of evaluating functions and solving equations, the
Results box also displays estimates for any singularities found in the course of solving an
equation. Singularities are values of the expression variable (in the given range) where the
expression is undefined. When you perform a computation, a label precedes the values in
the Results box to indicate the type of output displayed.

2.12.6 Equation Solving Guidelines

Sometimes the solutions to an equation 0 = f(x) are not obvious and the basic methods for
solving it are unavailable. If this is the case, then the simplest way to estimate the location of
solutions is to:

1. Using the Plot Equations dialog box, graph the function equation y = f(x).
2. Observe where the graph intersects the x-axis.

This technique aids in determining range limits for the independent variable in the
Function Solver (Solve tab of the Plot Equation dialog box).
If the distance between two solutions of an equation is small relative to the size of the
range, then the Function Solver may not return both solutions. The resolution of the
solutions is approximately two orders of magnitude less than the size of the range. You
can obtain higher resolution by adjusting the range limits to reduce the range size.
There is particular difficulty, due to roundoff error, in determining solutions to 0 =
f(x) at points where the graph of y = f(x) does not cross the x-axis, but lies on
one side of it.
An example of this situation is the graph of y = x^3+x^2 at x = 0. Although in
many cases, as with the above equation, the Function Solver provides the solution, in
some cases, however, the solution will not be found and recorded in the Results box.
If you suspect that there is such a solution and the Function Solver does not find it, then
try the following technique for approximating the solution:
3. Alter the value for the left side of the equation by a small amount.
4. Re-solve the equation.

This is equivalent to slightly shifting the graph of the equation up or down until it lies on
both sides of the axis. In general, the Results edit box then reports two solutions that are
very close together. As smaller amounts are used to adjust the left side of the equation,
these two solutions are seen to converge to one solution.
As an example, try solving the equation 0 = sin(2*x)*cos(3*x) over the range
from x = 1 to x = 2. The Function Solver will indicate that there are no solutions.
Using the above technique will yield solutions that are close to the true solution of PI/2.
Spurious Solutions

111
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

A less frequent problem involves the appearance of spurious solutions. Due to the limits
of floating point numbers, the value of an expression f(x) at x = a might compute to
zero even if x = a is not a true solution to 0 = f(x). This situation commonly arises
when the graph of y = f(x) is very "flat" near a point where it intersects the x-axis.
For example, consider the equation 0 = x^201. If you solve this equation over the
range from x=0 to x=1, then the Function Solver will return 13 solutions even though
the only true solution is x = 0. This is because each of 13 results raised to the 201st
power is equal to zero in the machine’s floating point representation.

2.13 Plotting and Modifying Regression

Lines
You can automatically compute and draw linear and polynomial regressions with confidence
and prediction intervals. The regression equation can be computed using all the data in a
plot, or individually for each curve in a multiple-curve plot. Polynomial curves can be fitted
up to the 10th order.
Regressions for column averaged data are computed using all the data from the columns, not
just from the mean value. Regressions are computed and drawn linearly on nonlinear (e.g.,
log, probability, etc.) axis scales.
Regression equation coefficients, R2 values, and predicted values can be viewed and copied to
the Clipboard.
To perform nonlinear regressions and curve fits, such as sigmoidal, exponential, and peak
functions use SigmaPlot’s Regression Wizard. The Regression Wizard provides an extensive
set of equations for curve fitting.

2.13.1 Modifying and Adding Linear Regression Lines

Add a first order regression to a graph by selecting one of the graph styles that has a regression.
These styles include:
• Simple Regression
• Multiple Regression
• Simple Error Bars and Regression
• Multiple Error Bars and Regression

To modify or add a regression to a plot:

1. Click the plot to select it.

2. On the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Linear Regression.

112
 2.13.1 Modifying and Adding Linear Regression Lines

3. Click OK.

4. In the Linear Regression dialog box, click the Regression Line tab.

5. Click OK.

6. Under Regressions, select either Each Curve to draw a regression for the data in each
curve of the selected plot, or All data in plot to draw a single regression for all of the
data in the selected plot from the Regressions group box.

If neither box is selected a regression is not drawn. If both boxes are selected, regressions
are drawn for each curve and for all the data in the plot.
7. Click OK.

8. Under Line, select the desired regression order from the Order drop-down list.
9. Click OK.

113
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.13.2 Viewing and Saving Regression Equation

Results
If you want to view and save the coefficients of the regression(s), select the Results tab of the
Linear Regression dialog box. The Results tab appears displaying regression equation results.
The regression equation coefficients, correlation coefficientFor more information, see page .
R2, and function results are displayed for each regression curve computed. If you computed
confidence and prediction intervals, these values are also displayed

Click Copy to copy the results and paste them into the worksheet, a report, or any other
Windows application.

2.13.3 Adding Confidence and Prediction Intervals

SigmaPlot can draw lines which describe either the 95% or 99% confidence and prediction
intervals around a regression line.
Confidence intervals (or confidence lineFor more information, see page .), also called the
confidence interval for a regression, describe the range where the regression line values will
fall a percentage of the time for repeated measurements.
Prediction intervals, also called the confidence interval for the population, describe the range
where the data values will fall a percentage of the time for repeated measurements.
Note: You must compute a regression in order to compute confidence and prediction lines.
To add prediction and confidence lines:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Linear Regression.

114
 2.13.4 Linear Regression, Confidence, and Prediction Calculation

2. Click OK.

3. Click the Confidence Intervals tab.

4. Click OK.

5. Choose the method of prediction to use from the Method drop-down list. Select either
95% or 99% for confidence and prediction intervals.
6. Click OK.

2.13.4 Linear Regression, Confidence, and Prediction

Calculation
Regression Calculation. SigmaPlot linear regression uses the least squares method to
construct a fit a set of data points (xi, yi) i = 1, ..., n by a polynomial of degree p where:
y=π0+πx1+π2x2+πpxp

In vector-matrix notation this problem is formulated as Y=Xπ+π

: where the n * 1 vector containing the yn data is:

115
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Y= y1 y2 yn

and the n * (p +1) design matrix is:

1 x1 x21 x p1
X = 1 x2 x 2
2
x p2

1 xn x2n x pn

β is a (p + 1) * 1 vector of parameters to be estimated:

= 0 1 p

ε is an n x 1 vector of residuals.
The solution for the least squares estimates of the parameters β is: b=(XX)-1XY
where X1 denotes the transpose of X.
SigmaPlot uses the Cholesky decomposition to invert the X1 Ymatrix. (see Dongarra, J.J.,
Bunch, J.R., Moler, C.B., and Stewart, G.W., Linpack User’s Guide, SIAM, Philadelphia,
1979). This produces the regression curve: y=b0+b1x0+b2x2+bpxp

For further details on matrix linear regression, refer to chapter 2 of Draper, Norman, and
Smith, Harry, Applied Regression Analysis, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, 1981.
Confidence Interval Calculation. Given a set of n data points (xi, yi) from two
columns in the worksheet, SigmaPlot computes the pth order polynomial regression:
y=b0+b1x0+b2x2+bpxp0where (b0, b1, ..., bp) are the p + 1 estimated parameters and ŷ0 is the y
value predicted for any x0.
The confidence interval for this calculated regression is defined by the two confidence limits:

y0± t(n p 1)s X 0(XX ) 1X 0

where X0 is the (p +1) * 1 vector defined by

X 0= 1 x 0 x20 x p0

116
 2.14 Adding Reference Lines

X is the n * (p +1) design matrix:

1 x1 x21 x p1
X = 1 x2 x 2
2
x p2

1 xn x 2n x pn

s is obtained from the variance about the regression

= (yiy 0)2
s=
2
i n 2

and the t value for n - p - 1 degrees of freedom and the standard normal percentile equivalent
z (z = 1.96 or 2.576 for 95% and 99% confidence intervals respectively) is computed from
a six term rational polynomial approximation taken from Sahai, H. and Thompson, W.,
“Comparisons of Approximation to the Percentile of t,χ2 , and F Distributions,” Journal of
Statistical Computation and Simulation, 1974, Vol. 3, pp. 81-93.
Prediction Interval Calculation. The prediction interval is calculated using the following
equation:

y0± t(n p 1)s 1 + X 0(XX )1X 0

2.14 Adding Reference Lines

You can add horizontal or vertical lines at specific locations using the Property Browser.
Reference lines can be used to draw lines at specific values, to set quality control limits,
and specify other reference values.
Note: Bar and stacked bar charts automatically place a reference line at the zero value.
You can add up to five reference lines. All lines can be drawn only horizontally or vertically as
a set. The Reference settings display the current calculation, line type, label, and color for
each line.
One set of five reference lines, either horizontal or vertical, can be drawn for each plot. If
you need more than five lines or need both horizontal and vertical lines, you must create an
additional plot.

117
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2.14.1 Drawing Reference Lines

To draw reference lines:

1. Select the plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Reference Lines.

3. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

4. Select a reference line to draw by selecting its check box in the Object Properties
window of the Property Browser. You can add up to five lines for each plot. The default
names and calculations are the names commonly used when employing reference lines
for quality control charts.

118
 2.14.1 Drawing Reference Lines

5. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

6. To change the reference line name, in the Page Objects window of the Property
Browser, navigate to any one of the labels listed. Its properties appear below in the
Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

7. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

8. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, enter a new reference line
name in the Name box.

9. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

119
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

10. To display the label next to the reference line, select Left or Right for horizontal
reference lines, or Top or Bottom for vertical reference lines.
11. To change the value or statistic used for the line, select an option from the Calc
drop-down list.

If you are not using a mean as the calculation, type a value to multiply the statistic by, or a
value to use as a constant, in the box next to the Calc drop-down list. The calculation
options apply only to the reference line highlighted in the Property Browser list of
reference lines.
To set the reference line value to a specific value, select the Constant Calc option,
and enter the value to the right.
Automatically calculated statistics are derived from the plot data. All data points graphed,
including multiple columns of data, are used for reference line calculations.
12. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

13. Use the Appearance options to set a line type, thickness, and color for the highlighted
reference line. Each reference line can have separate line attributes.
14. Click Apply when finished modifying the current reference line, then highlight another
reference line to continue modifying reference lines, or click OK.

2.15 Creating Histograms

Histograms are step, needle, or bar charts that represent counts of the data points that fall
within specified ranges. The Histogram Wizard guides you through the steps in creating a
histogram: generating frequency data, specifying the number of buckets or intervals, and
selecting a graph style.
The Histogram Wizard allows you to specify the number of bins into which to partition the
source data. The range of each interval is identical; the total range is the data minimum to
the data maximum. The number of bars, steps, or needles displayed is generally equal to
the number of bins.
You can also create a histogram with an uneven bucket size.

2.15.1 Using the Histogram Wizard

To use the Histogram Wizard:

1. Enter the data you want to analyze in an empty column of the active worksheet.
2. On the Analysistab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Histogram.

120
 2.15.1 Using the Histogram Wizard

3. Select the data for the histogram by choosing the appropriate column from the Source
data for histogram drop-down list.

4. Select the column for the Output for histogram either from the drop-down list, or by
clicking the column.
5. Select the column for the Output for bin counts either from the drop-down list, or by
clicking the column.
6. Click Next. The Histogram - Bin Options panel appears, with Automatic binning
already selected. The algorithm calculates the number of bins for representation, based
upon the number of data points.

Approximate Bins = 3 + log10(N) * log10(N)/log10(2)

where N = number of non-missing points.

121
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 2.45 The Histogram Wizard – Buckets Dialog Box

7. To specify a different number of bins, clear Automatic binning and select a number
from the Number of bins list. You can enter values from 1 to 100.
8. Click Next.
9. Select a graph style from the Graph Styles list. A preview of the graph appears.

Figure 2.46 The Histogram Wizard – Graph Style Dialog Box

10. Click Finish.

The graph appears on the active graph page, or a new page if the worksheet has no
associated graph pages. The X axis representing the buckets is titled Raw Data. The Y
axis representing the frequency or the number of data points in each bin, is titled Bin
Count. Both use a linear scale.

122
 2.15.2 The Histogram Transform Function

Note: If you choose None, SigmaPlot displays the worksheet with the output column
containing the histogram frequency data.

Figure 2.47 Example of a Histogram Created Using the Histogram Wizard

2.15.2 The Histogram Transform Function

If you need to use uneven bucket sizes for a histogram, use SigmaPlot’s built-in histogram
transform function.
To use the histogram transform function:

1. Enter the data to analyze in column 1 the bin values in column 2 of the worksheet.

Bin values are used as the upper bounds (inclusive) of the histogram interval ranges. The
number of data points that fall within each specified range is counted. The number of
histogram bars is equal to the number of interval upper bounds entered. The number of
values that fall beyond the largest upper bound is also counted.
2. To graph the data, plot column 3 as a bar chart. Creating 2D PlotsFor more information,
see page 263.

3. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, click User-Defined.

4. To graph the data, plot column 3 as a bar chart. Creating 2D PlotsFor more information,
see page 263.

123
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Enter the following transform into the Edit Transform box:

col(3)=histogram(col(1),col(2))

6. To graph the data, plot column 3 as a bar chart. Creating 2D PlotsFor more information,
see page 263.

7. Click Run. The histogram data appears in column 3.

8. To graph the data, plot column 3 as a bar chart. Creating 2D PlotsFor more information,
see page 263.

124
3 Graph Page Basics
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Graph Pages
♦ Working with Page Objects
♦ Adding Another Graph to a Page
♦ Zooming In and Out
♦ Using Graph Pages as Templates
♦ Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphs and other Page Objects
♦ Using OLE to Paste, Link and Embed Objects
♦ Dragging and Dropping Graphs
♦ Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page
♦ Drawing Objects on the Page
♦ Modifying Object Colors and Lines
♦ Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects
♦ Arranging Graphs on a Page
♦ Aligning Page Objects
♦ Editing Text
♦ Working with Automatic Legends
♦ Changing Graph Page Format
♦ Using Custom Colors

3.1 About Graph Pages

Use Graph Pages to display and modify graphs that plot data from your worksheets. You can
create as many graph pages as you wish per worksheet. New graph pages are associated with
the current worksheet, and are placed in the current notebook section.

3.1.1 About Graph Pages

Graph pages are true graphical representations of a printed page that contain graphs, text, and
other drawn and pasted objects. You can select objects on graph pages and modify them
using the Property Browser and with options available on the Graph Page tab. You can
manipulate all objects graphically using your mouse.
A page can contain an unlimited number of graphs and other objects, and you can create an
unlimited number of pages for each worksheet. You can also paste graphics, OLE (Object
Linking and Embedding) objects, and other objects onto a page.
Graph pages are created in several ways. You can create a graph page as a notebook item, or
by using the Graph Wizard, the Graph Style Gallery or by templates. Creating GraphsFor
more information, see page 50.

3.1.2 Setting Page Options

125
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

You can control graph page properties on Page tab of the Options dialog box. To open the
Options dialog box:

1. Click the Main Button.

2. Click the Page tab.

3.1.3 Exporting Graphs and Pages

You can export SigmaPlot graphs and graph pages to other files formats.
To export a graph or graph page:

1. Select and view the graph page. If you want to export specific graph(s), select the graphs
you want to export to a file.
2. On the Home tab, in the Export group, click the Graph drop-down list.
3. Click Export.
4. In the Export File dialog box, enter the file name, directory and drive for the export
file destination.
5. Click Export. If you chose one of the graphic file formats, a secondary dialog box
appears, asking you to enter some graphic format information.

6. Click OK to create the exported file using the specified file name and graphic resolutions,
if applicable.

7. Enter the desired DPI and Color Resolutions; for EPS files, these setting only affect the
resolutions of the TIFF header, not the actual PostScript resolution. For metafiles, this
setting affects only 3D graphs.

126
 3.1.4 Printing Graph Pages

The higher the DPI and Color resolutions, the better quality the image, but also the larger
the file. Limit the DPI and Color resolutions to the capability of the intended output
device. For example, if you are going to create 600 dpi slide output, set the DPI resolution
no larger than 600.
8. Click OK to create the exported file using the specified file name and graphic resolutions,
if applicable.

9. If you want to export only the selected graph(s) or objects, select Export selected only.
10. Click OK to create the exported file using the specified file name and graphic resolutions,
if applicable.

3.1.4 Printing Graph Pages

You can print any graph in a SigmaPlot notebook.

To print a graph page:

1. Select and view the page window.

2. Click Main Button and then click Print to print the page using all the default settings.

To set printing options before you print the graph page:

3. Click OK to print the graph.

4. Click Main Button and then click Print.

5. In the Print dialog box, click Properties.
6. Click OK when you are satisfied with the printer properties settings.

Note: The Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer.
7. Click OK to print the graph.

8. Click OK to print the graph.

3.2 Working with Page Objects

Using SigmaPlot ribbon commands, the Property Browser, and wizards you can create and
modify graphs and other page objects.
Graph Wizard. The Graph Wizard guides you through a series of dialog boxes to select the
type and style of graph, and to select worksheet data for plotting. After you create the graph,
you can open the Graph Wizard to add or modify plots and axes.

127
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Property Browser. The Property Browser customizes the plots, axes, grids planes, titles and
legends of your graph. Use it for more advanced modifications to your graph.
Text Properties. Most Text Properties appear either in the Text group on the Graph Page tab
or you can right-click text on a graph to open the Text Properties dialog box.

3.2.1 Selecting Page Objects

When you select text, drawn objects, or individual elements on the graph page, and then
double-click, you open the dialog box specific to that element.
To select a graph element, make sure you are in selection mode by clicking Select Object
in the Tools group on the Graph Page tab.

Selected objects are surrounded with square handles; selected axes and text are surrounded
by dotted lines.

3.2.2 Selecting Multiple Objects

To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift key while clicking objects, or drag a window
completely around the objects you want to select. When you select multiple objects, only the
last selected object has solid black handles; the other objects have hollow handles.

128
 3.2.3 Selecting Objects that Overlay One Another

You can edit, copy, paste, move, size and scale, delete or hide all selected page objects,
including graphs, text, drawn objects, and pasted objects.

3.2.3 Selecting Objects that Overlay One Another

To select objects that overlay one another, press either the Alt-Click or Alt-Arrow keys
To use Alt-Click:

1. Click the object that you want to select, which may be covered by another object, and
then press the Alt key.
2. While holding down the Alt key, repeatedly click the object until it is selected under the
position that you initially clicked.

As you repeatedly click you will cycle through all objects that overlay one another.
To use Alt-Arrow:
3. Click the object that you want to select and then press the Alt key.
4. While holding down the Alt key, repeatedly press one of the arrow keys (up, down, right,
or left) to select the object of interest. Use of different arrow keys will cycle through
the objects in a different order.

Note: It is important that you click on top of the object that you eventually wish to select.
For example, selecting the intersection of the horizontal and vertical grid lines slightly
below the symbol will result in a different sequence of selectable objects, i.e. vertical
grid line, right y-axis, horizontal grid line and plot error bars. It is not possible in this
case to select the symbol.

129
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.2.4 Real Time Mouse-Over Feedback

You can obtain numeric data values from your plots by placing the mouse cursor over the data
points. To do this click on the particular plot to select it. Then move the mouse cursor over the
data points. When the cursor is over a data point the cursor background color is cyan and you
can read the numeric value from the cursor window. When the cursor is not over a data point
you can read the position of the cursor using the x and y scales for that plot.
Turning Off Mouse Over Feedback
If you would like to disable this feature, click the Main Button and then click Options.

1. Click the Page tab.

2. Clear the Show data values option .

3.3 Adding Another Graph to a Page

You can add additional graphs to the current graph page by:
• Creating a new graph onto the current page. For more information, see page .
• Copying a graph to the same page. For more information, see page .
• Copying and pasting a graph from another page. For more information, see page .

3.3.1 Creating a New Graph on the Current Page

If you want to add a graph to a page by creating a new graph:

1. Add the data for the new graph in the worksheet associated with the current graph page.
2. After clicking Finish to create the graph, you’ll need to align the graphs on the graph
page, which you can do manually, or on the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click
Arrange Graphs. Arranging Graphs on a PageFor more information, see page 158.

3.3.2 Copying a Graph on the Same Page

One of the quickest and the easiest ways to add a second graph is to copy the one you have
already created, arrange the graphs so they’re both visible on the page, and then modify it.
Arranging Graphs on a PageFor more information, see page 158.

3.3.3 Copying and Pasting a Graph from One Page to

Another

130
 3.4 Zooming In and Out

You can copy a graph from a graph page within the current notebook section, or from a
different notebook section.
To copy a graph from one page to another:

1. Select the graph you want to copy.

2. Press Ctrl+C.
3. Make the destination page the current page either by opening it, or if it is already open,
select the graph page name from the Window menu. A check mark next to the page
name indicates that it is the active window.
4. Press Ctrl+V to paste the graph.

The graph appears on the current page, and the graph data appears in the worksheet
associated with the current page. Another method is dragging and dropping. For more
information, see page 146.

3.4 Zooming In and Out

Right—click the graph page (not the graph!), and select Zoom or Zoom window. You can
view the page at several different levels of magnification, magnify the page centering on a
specified page location, or choose a completely unobstructed view of the page.

3.5 Using Graph Pages as Templates

Graph page templates simplify graph and graph page creation and modification. You can use
templates to create pages and graphs with preset properties. For example, if you need to create
a set of slides, you can open pages that are already set to attributes for slides.
Note: Never use templates to add a graph to a page.
Template pages are ordinary graph pages. Any graph page can act as a template page. All
attributes from the page - size, color, margins, and orientation - are retained. Any graphs and
other objects on the page are also duplicated.
Template graphs automatically plot the worksheet column data that was selected when the
graph was created.
When applying a page to a worksheet, make sure your data is already arranged as required,
or re-pick the data for the graph after applying the template.
Note: Graphs created by templates can be modified like any other graph.

3.5.1 Applying Templates

There are three methods for using pages as templates:
• Creating a new but blank graph page. Creates a new page with attributes from the
template applied.

131
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Copying a graph page from one notebook section to another. Creates a new page in a
section, using the data in the existing worksheet for graphs.
• Overwriting an existing page. Replaces the existing page.

[Link] Creating a New Page with Attributes from a Template

1. Click the Main Button, and then click New.
2. In the New dialog box, select Graph Page from the New drop-down list.

3. Right-click the page and then click Create Graph.

4. Select the type of graph page you want to open from the Type scroll-down list.
5. Right-click the page and then click Create Graph.

[Link] Copying a Graph Page to use as a Template

The best method of applying a page template to a worksheet is to use an existing graph page
as a template. The copied page acts as a template using the worksheet in the new section.
Copying and Pasting Items in the Notebook ManagerFor more information, see page 195.
If you plan to copy a page, set up your worksheet so that the data is in the appropriate columns
before applying the template. You can also change the columns to plot after applying a
template by selecting the plot, clicking the Create Graph tab, and clicking Graph Wizard
in the Wizard group. Picking Different Data for the Current PlotFor more information, see
page 63.

[Link] Overwriting an Existing Page

When you apply a template to an existing graph page, all features of the existing page are lost.

132
 3.5.2 Templates and Notebooks

To apply a template to an existing page:

1. Make the graph page the active window.

2. Click the Main Button and then click Templates.
3. In the Templates dialog box, select a template from the Templates list.

4. Click Apply.

5. Click Apply.

To apply a template from a different notebook template file:

6. Click Apply.

7. Click the Main Button and then click Templates.

8. Click Apply.

3.5.2 Templates and Notebooks

Templates are stored as pages in notebook files with the extension .jnt. You can open and edit
template notebooks like any other notebook file; the different extension is only provided for
organizational purposes.
A sample template notebook, [Link], is provided with SigmaPlot, and is set as the
initial template source notebook. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more
information, see page .

133
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 3.1 An Opened [Link] file in the Notebook Manager..

[Link] is the default source for new pages. It contains both pages with no graphs and
pages with graphs.
You can modify existing pages or add your own graphs or graph pages to [Link].
Open the file, open the page you want to modify, then save your changes. You can add files
by creating new pages or by copying pages from your notebooks to [Link]. Adding
Another Graph to a PageFor more information, see page 130.
You can also create your own template notebook containing your own customized graph
pages. Save template notebooks as SigmaPlot Template (.jnt) files, then specify that file
to be your Template File.

3.5.3 Changing the Page Created with the New Page

Button
Anytime you click the Main Button and then New and then Graph Page, SigmaPlot
automatically uses whichever page is titled Normal as the source for new pages. If you want
to modify the attributes of your new page, open and modify the Normal page, or replace
it with the desired page.
If there is no page named Normal in your template file, the page is formatted according
to settings found in the [Link] file. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more
information, see page .

134
 3.5.4 Changing the Template File Used for New Pages

3.5.4 Changing the Template File Used for New Pages

SigmaPlot automatically uses the template notebook when you open a graph or graph page.
You can set this file name in the General tab of the Options dialog box.
To change the source file template:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Options.

2. On the Options dialog box, click the General tab.

3. Type the path and file name of the desired template file in the Template File field.
4. Click OK. The notebook becomes the default template source.

Note: If a valid default template source file is not specified, a default page is created
instead. This page is a letter-sized, white portrait page by default.

135
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.5.5 Adding New Pages to [Link]

You can add a previously created page to the [Link] notebook.

To add a page to [Link]:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Open.

2. Under New, select Graph page. The page you copied appears on the list.

3.6 Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphs

and other Page Objects
Cut and copy selected page objects to the Clipboard.

3.6.1 Cutting and Copying Graphs

The easiest way to cut or copy a graph or other page object select the graph or object to cut
or copy by clicking it. To cut the item, press Ctrl+X. To copy, press Ctrl+C and to paste,
press Ctrl+P.
A copy of the selected graph or object or is placed in the Clipboard. Since copied items
remain in the Clipboard until replaced, you can paste as many copies as you want without
having to cut or copy the object each time.
You can also use the buttons available in the Edit group on the Graph Page tab.

3.6.2 Pasting Objects

You can paste Clipboard contents to any open page, report, or into any other Windows
application that supports Windows Metafiles or OLE (Object Linking and Embedding).
To paste an object to a page, click where you want the object to appear, then press Ctrl+V.
Using OLE to Paste, Link and Embed Objects For more information, see page 137.
Note: The Clipboard is a Microsoft Windows feature. To learn more about how the Clipboard
works, refer to your Windows User’s Guide.

136
 3.7 Using OLE to Paste, Link and Embed Objects

3.7 Using OLE to Paste, Link and Embed

Objects
There are various ways to paste SigmaPlot objects into other applications, and vice versa.
One method is using OLE (Object Linking and Embedding), which is fully supported by the
SigmaPlot page. OLE provides the ability to move or copy information among supporting
applications, and to use the applications interchangeably to modify the data.

3.7.1 SigmaPlot and OLE

SigmaPlot can place and receive OLE and other types of objects, such as scanned images,
clip art, or text from a word processor. For example, you can place an equation created
with the Microsoft Word Equation Editor into a SigmaPlot report, and edit it with the Word
Equation Editor when it changes.

Figure 3.2 Example of an Microsoft Excel Equation Embedded into a SigmaPlot

Report

3.7.2 Methods Of Placing Objects

You can copy, cut, and paste graphs among applications without using OLE. The method of
placing objects depends on each application’s implementation. The following list shows
how objects can be placed:
• OLE object. Can be placed if application supports OLE.
• Windows Metafile. Can be placed if application doesn’t support OLE, but supports pictures.
• Enhanced Metafile. Can be placed in Windows applications only.
• Bitmap. Can be pasted in applications that support bitmaps only (for example, Microsoft
Paint).

137
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: SigmaPlot always pastes an OLE object if it is available. The SigmaPlot graph and
report pages support OLE. Graphs (not graph pages) pasted into SigmaPlot reports are always
pasted as Windows metafiles.

3.7.3 Linking or Embedding Objects

Use Paste Special, Insert Object , and Ctrl+Drag to either link or embed the object in
the page or report.
Linking appears to place a copy of the object in the destination application, but actually
only places a reference to it. Therefore, the object is modified every time the original file is
modified.
You can only link to a file if you create an object using the Paste Special in the Edit group
or Insert New Object in the Insertgroup, both on the Graph Page tab, or if you drag and
drop an object with the Ctrl key held down.
Linking is useful when you need to update an embedded object when the file is updated. The
disadvantage of linking objects is that you cannot open a referenced file if the locations of
either the SigmaPlot file and the source file change.
Embedding places a copy of the object in the destination application, and then you can
edit it by activating its source application when you double-click it. Embedding does not
use a reference file; the "file" is actually embedded completely in the SigmaPlot file. For
example, if a Microsoft Word embedded object has been placed in a SigmaPlot report, and you
double-click it, Microsoft Word opens. Word temporarily runs under SigmaPlot. When you
are finished editing the item and close Word, SigmaPlot remains open.
Embedding an object has the advantage of keeping all the associated data in one place, but
can create large files.
To embed an object:

1. With a graph page in view, on the Graph Page tab, in the Insert group, click Insert
Object.

2. Click OK to insert the object.

3. Click Insert Object from the drop-down list.

4. In the New Object dialog box, select the type of object to insert from the Object Type
list. A description of the object type appears below.

138
 3.7.4 Placing SigmaPlot Objects into Other Applications

5. Click OK to insert the object.

6. Click OK to insert the object.

3.7.4 Placing SigmaPlot Objects into Other

Applications
You can paste SigmaPlot graphs and reports into other applications, and link or embed them
for future editing with SigmaPlot. For example, you can paste a SigmaPlot graph into a
Microsoft Word document (as an OLE object), and use the Property Browser to edit it by
double-clicking the graph.
When you link to SigmaPlot and double-click the graph or report, the notebook file containing
the graph or report opens.
You can change the source of any linked object.

3.7.5 View as Icon

With OLE, the View as Icon allows you to place an icon representing the application that
created the file in your data. For example, if you have a description of a graph written in a
Microsoft Word document, you can embed it, and display it as an icon that shows on the graph
page. If you want the object displayed as an icon, select the Display As Icon option. Click
the icon to view and edit the object in its source application.

139
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 3.3 Displaying a Microsoft Word Document as an Icon on a Graph Page

To embed the object and view as an icon:

1. With a graph view, on the Graph Page tab, in the Insert Group, click the Insert Object
drop-down list.
2. Click Insert Object
3. In the Insert Object dialog box, select the type of object to insert from the Object
drop-down list.

140
 3.7.6 Placing SigmaPlot Graphs into Other Applications

4. Click OK to insert the object as an icon.

5. Select Display as Icon.

6. Click OK to insert the object as an icon.

3.7.6 Placing SigmaPlot Graphs into Other Applications

You can copy or cut SigmaPlot graphs to the Windows Clipboard, then paste the graph directly
into another document, like a word processing or desktop publishing page, without having to
do any file exporting or importing.
You can also drag and drop graphs directly from SigmaPlot into any other Windows program
that supports OLE. Dragging and Dropping GraphsFor more information, see page 146.
To paste a graph to another application:

1. Select the graph to cut or copy.

2. Press Ctrl+X or Ctrl+C .
3. Open or switch to the other application, and click where you want the graph to appear.
4. Paste the graph.
5. If the graph isn’t an OLE object, try using Paste Special, and select SigmaPlot Graph
or SigmaPlot Graph Object.
6. To create a link between SigmaPlot and the other application, click Paste Link in
the Paste Special dialog box. To insure you are pasting an OLE object, use the Paste
Special command. If a Paste Special command doesn’t exist, the application probably
doesn’t support OLE.

141
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 3.4 Using the Paste Special Dialog Box to Paste a Graph from SigmaPlot
to another program

The SigmaPlot graph appears in the other application.

7. You can now in-place activate the graph by double-clicking it. If the application does not
support OLE, the SigmaPlot graph is pasted as a metafile or bitmap graphic.

SigmaPlot graphs pasted into other applications take their plotted data with them in the
form of the plotted graph, but the worksheet is not shown. If you want to view or edit the
data, you must open the graph rather than simply editing it.

142
 3.7.7 Pasting Objects onto a Graph Page or Report

Figure 3.5 Example of a SigmaPlot Graph Pasted into Microsoft Word.

3.7.7 Pasting Objects onto a Graph Page or Report

You can paste contents, including OLE objects, into both page and report documents.
To paste artwork, text from a word processing application, or other objects onto a graph
or report page:

1. Open the application and file containing the desired artwork or text, and cut or copy
the object.
2. Switch to SigmaPlot and view the graph or report page.
3. Click the location where you want the object to appear, then press Ctrl+V. The graphic
is pasted to the page. If the object can be an OLE object, SigmaPlot always defaults
to the OLE object.
4. To paste the object as a specified file type, on the Graph Page tab, in the Edit group,
click the Paste drop-down list.

143
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Select the type of object to paste from the As box, then click OK. The object appears
at the selected location.

6. Click Paste Special.

Figure 3.6 Using the Paste Special Dialog Box to Paste an Object from Microsoft
Word to SigmaPlot

Note: The options available in the Paste Special dialog box depend on the type of file
being pasted.
7. Select the type of object to paste from the As box, then click OK. The object appears
at the selected location.

8. Select Paste to paste the object as a specified file type. Select Paste Link to paste the
object as a linked file that can be updated in another application. The options in the As list
change depending on your selection of either Paste or Paste Link, and the explanation in
the Result box changes depending on your selection in the As list.
9. Select the type of object to paste from the As box, then click OK. The object appears
at the selected location.

144
 3.7.8 Placing Objects without the Clipboard

3.7.8 Placing Objects without the Clipboard

You can select objects from applications that are installed on your system and to place them
into a SigmaPlot graph or report. The object types available on your system depend on the
applications installed.
To insert an object using the Insert Object command:

1. View the report or graph page, and click where you want the insertion point.
2. On the Graph Page tab, in the Insert group, click the Insert Object drop-down list.
3. Click Insert Object.

4. Click OK.

5. If you want to display the new object as an icon, select Display As Icon in the Insert
Object dialog box.

You can also specify a different icon to display the inserted object. Click the Icon button
to open the Change Icon dialog box. Choose a different icon from the available options,
or click the Browse button to search for alternative icons on your system.
6. Click OK.

7. To create a new object to place on the report or graph page, select Create New, then
choose the type of object from the Object Type list.

145
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

8. Click OK.

9. Click OK to open the application associated with the selected object. Create the desired
object, then close the application and return to SigmaPlot. The created object is displayed
on the graph or report page as an embedded object.
10. Click OK.

3.8 Dragging and Dropping Graphs

Using OLE you can drag objects between compatible applications within Windows.
Additionally, you can drag and drop graphs from one graph page to another.
To drag a graph into another application, the other application must support OLE.

1. Make sure the other application is open and visible from the desktop, with the location
where you want to drop the graph also visible.
2. Select the SigmaPlot graph you want placed in the other program, then drag the graph
from the SigmaPlot page. If you want to drop a copy of the graph, press the Ctrl key
while dragging.
3. Move the mouse to the location you want the SigmaPlot graph to appear.
4. Release the mouse; the graph appears at the drop location. You can now edit the graph
with SigmaPlot in the future by double-clicking.

Note: You can also drag and drop graphs onto your Windows desktop. Dropping a graph
onto the desktop creates a scrap file that can be dragged into another document at a later
date.

146
 3.8.1 Dragging and Dropping Graphs Between Pages

3.8.1 Dragging and Dropping Graphs Between Pages

You can drag a graph from one graph page to another. If you drag a graph from a different
notebook section, it will insert its data into the destination section worksheet.
To copy or move a graph from one graph page to another:

1. Open the source and destination pages.

2. Release the mouse where you want the graph to appear. The graph is placed on the new
page. If the page is in a different section, the data plotted by the graph is copied to the
current worksheet.

3.9 Hiding and Deleting Objects from the

Page
You can delete drawn and pasted page objects from the page, and graphs, automatic legends,
automatically created graph titles, plots, and axes can be deleted and/or hidden from view.

3.9.1 Hiding and Viewing Graphs on a Page

The quickest way to hide a graph on page is to select the graph page, then right-click the graph
you want to hide, and on the shortcut menu, click Hide.
To control which graphs are displayed on the page:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Print, then click Page Setup.
2. Click the Page Layout tab. The graphs on the current page are listed in the Shown box.

147
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to apply your selections and close the Page Setup dialog box. Note that hidden
graphs do not print.

4. To hide a graph, select it from the list and click Hide. The selected graph is moved
to the Hidden list. (To select multiple graphs, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while
making selections.)
5. Click OK to apply your selections and close the Page Setup dialog box. Note that hidden
graphs do not print.

3.9.2 Hiding Graph Titles and Legends

You can hide automatically generated graph and axis titles and legends from view without
being permanently removed from the graph page.
To hide an automatic legend or automatically created graph title:

1. Right-click the legend or title and then on the shortcut menu click Hide. The title or
legend is not deleted, only hidden.

3.9.3 Removing Graphs, Plots, Titles, Legends, and

Other Page Objects
Anything on the graph page can be removed from the page by selecting the object, then
pressing the Delete key..
Deleting removes curves, plots and graphs entirely. You can use undo (Ctrl+Z) to retrieve
these items. When a graph or plot is removed, worksheet data remains intact. Delete also

148
 3.10 Drawing Objects on the Page

completely removes drawn and pasted objects. Note that delete only hides titles and legends,
and does not remove them permanently.

3.10 Drawing Objects on the Page

Use the tools available on the Tools group of the Graph Page tab to draw rectangles, ellipses,
lines, and arrows.

Any drawn object or text is not attached to the graph until they are grouped with the graph.

3.10.1 Graph Page Tools

Use the Tools group on the Graph Page tab to draw objects on the graph page.

The drawing tools on the Page toolbar buttons are:

Select Object Use the Select Object button to select objects on the
graph page.
Text Click this button to add text, labels, or manually created
legends to the graph page.

149
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Draw Line Click this button to draw a line on the graph page.

Draw Arrow Click this button to draw an arrow on the graph page.

Draw Box Use the Draw Box button to draw a box on the graph
page.
Draw Ellipse Click this button to draw an ellipse on the graph page.

3.10.2 Drawing an Object

To draw an object:

1. Click a drawing tool in the Tools group on the Graph Page tab. The pointer has a
crosshair appearance when over the graph page.
2. Release the mouse button to finish drawing the object.

3.11 Modifying Object Colors and Lines

Use the tools available below the drawing tools on the Tools group on the Graph Page tab to
modify line type, thickness, color, line end appearance (arrow heads, etc.), object fill color,
pattern, and pattern color.
You can also select an object, then right-click it, select Object Properties.

150
 3.11.1 Changing Object Fills

3.11.1 Changing Object Fills

Change fill patterns and colors of drawn rectangles and ellipses, and of graph symbols, bars,
and boxes using the Object Properties dialog box.
Note: When you select multiple objects, fill options apply to all selected objects that can be
filled, including lines. Using Custom ColorsFor more information, see page 175.
To change the background color of an object fill:

1. Select the object(s) to modify on the graph page.

2. Right-click the graph, and select Object Properties.

3. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

4. Click the Fills tab.

5. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

3.11.2 Changing Lines

151
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

For drawn lines and graph lines, you can change line type, color, and thickness. You can also
use the Object Properties dialog box to add arrowheads and other line endings to lines.
Using Custom ColorsFor more information, see page 175.
To change line color:

1. Select the object(s) to modify on the graph page.

2. Right-click the graph, and select Object Properties.
3. Click the Line tab.
4. Under Line, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose None to create a
transparent line.
5. To set a gap color, select from the Gap Color drop-down list. This option is only
available if you select a line type with actual gaps in it, like dotted or dashed, for example.
6. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

To change line type and thickness:

7. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

8. Select the object(s) to modify:

9. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

3.11.3 Changing Line Ending Attributes

Edit line ending attributes for existing lines and arrows, or set the default line endings for
drawn arrows. Line ending attributes affect only plain lines and arrows, not graph lines.
To change line ending attributes:

1. Select the line(s) to modify:

2. Right-click the graph, and select Object Properties.

152
 3.11.3 Changing Line Ending Attributes

3. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

4. Click the Line End tab.

5. Add or edit line ends at both the start and end of a line. The Start options add or modify
the beginning end of the line (where you start drawing the line). The End options add
or modify the line end at the end of the drawn line (where you stop drawing the line
by releasing the mouse button).
6. To change the type of line used, select a style from the Style drop-down list.
7. To change the arrowhead length and angle, move the Angle and Length slider. The
angle is the angle between the arrowhead line and the main line. The Angle option is
unavailable if the line Style is dotted or plain.

Note: Clicking the slider causes the slider to move incrementally, while dragging it
moves it more precisely. To change the range of control of the slider, move the slider to
one end of the selectable range, select the text in the corresponding edit box, and type a
new numeric value.
8. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

9. Click OK to apply your changes and to close the dialog box.

153
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.11.4 Changing Multiple Page Objects

When making changes to multiple objects with different properties, the Object Properties
dialog box options are blank. Only options that are changed are applied to selected objects.

3.12 Moving and Sizing Graphs and Objects

You can modify graph or object size and position either by using your mouse on the page, or
by setting specific position, size, and scaling options.

1. Right-click the object and select Object Properties.

2. Click the Size and Position tab.

3.12.1 Using Your Mouse to Move Graphs and Objects

When you use your mouse to move graphs, graph titles, axis labels, and automatic legends are
automatically grouped with a graph and move with it. You can move graphs and objects to
other page windows.

Figure 3.7 Moving a Graph

To move a graph or object with your mouse:

1. Select the desired graph.

2. Release the mouse button. The graph moves to the new position.

154
 3.12.2 Using Your Mouse to Change Graph and Object Size

3.12.2 Using Your Mouse to Change Graph and Object

Size

The easiest way to adjust the size and shape of a graph is to resize the graph using the mouse.
You can also specify proportional scaling of graphs and objects so that the height and width
ratios are maintained, and choose to rescale graph and axis titles and tick marks accordingly.
To adjust graph or object size with the mouse:

1. View the page window.

2. Click the graph or desired objects to select them. Selected page objects are surrounded
with small square handles. Place the pointer over a handle.
3. Press and hold down the left mouse button to drag the handle to a new location. The
shape of the pointer changes when you move it over a handle, indicating the direction you
can stretch the graph or object.

Drag a side handle to stretch or shrink an object horizontally, drag a top or bottom handle
to stretch or shrink an object vertically, or drag a corner handle to stretch an object
two-dimensionally. A dotted outline of the resized graph or object follows the pointer
position.

Dragging a corner handle preserves the aspect ratio (relative height and width) of objects
by default. Also, graph text, symbols and tick marks are rescaled along with the graph.
4. Release the mouse button when finished. The graph or object resizes to the indicated size.

Note: Unlike graphs and drawn objects, you cannot stretch or shrink text labels manually.
To resize text, change the font size.

3.12.3 Setting a Specific Size and Location

155
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To move an object to a specific location on the page, or to scale the object to a specific size,
use the Size and Position tab of the Object Properties dialog box.
To set graph size and location with the Object Properties dialog box:

1. Select the object on the page.

2. Right-click the selected item, and on the shortcut menu, click Object Properties.

3. Click OK.

4. Click the Size and Position tab.

5. Click OK.

3.12.4 Nudging Graphs and Objects

You can use your keyboard arrow keys to move graphs and objects on a graph page. Select the
object using your mouse, and then move the object by using the arrow keys. You can also
select objects by pressing the Tab key. Press Shift+Tab to scroll back. Press Shift+Arrow
to select multiple objects.
Pressing an arrow key moves the graph or object one one point, or .014in. You can change this
default setting in the [Link] file. If you have activated Snap-to grids, nudge will not work
unless you set the nudge value to be greater than or equal to the Snap-to value.

156
 3.12.5 Moving Objects to the Front or Back

You cannot nudge computable objects, such as plots and all parts of plots, tick marks, and
regression, reference, and grid lines.

3.12.5 Moving Objects to the Front or Back

You can move selected objects so that they appear in front of or behind other page objects.
To move an object to the front or back:

1. Select the object to move by clicking it.

2. To move the selected object to the foreground, on the Graph Page tab, in the Format
group, click Bring to Front. The selected object is drawn in front of all other objects.

3. To move the selected object to the background, on the Graph Page tab, in the Format
group, click the Bring to Front drop-down list, and then click Send to Back. The
selected object is drawn behind all other objects.

Note: If you select more than one object, the selected objects remain in their relative
front to back positions. Grouped objects, including titles and legends with graphs, move
as a single object.

3.12.6 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

You can move and modify selected items on the page by grouping multiple objects as one
object. To individually modify grouped objects, you must ungroup them first. Objects and
text must be grouped with the graph for them to stay in place, and move with the graph if you
shift the graph’s location.
To group and ungroup objects:

1. On the Graph Page tab, in the Tools group, click Select Object.

157
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click the Group drop-down list, and then
click Ungroup. If you have grouped a group, you may need to ungroup the objects as
many times as they have been grouped.

3. Select the graph, by clicking it, if you wish to attach the graph to the objects or text.
4. Select the objects and text to group by holding down the Shift key while selecting
individual objects. Handles appear around the graph and each selected object.
5. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click the Group drop-down list, and
then click Group. The Group button is available only when more than one object is
selected. All selected objects are grouped and can be selected, moved, sized, aligned,
and positioned as a single object.

To ungroup objects on a graph page:

6. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click the Group drop-down list, and then
click Ungroup. If you have grouped a group, you may need to ungroup the objects as
many times as they have been grouped.

7. Select the group.

8. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click the Group drop-down list, and then
click Ungroup. If you have grouped a group, you may need to ungroup the objects as
many times as they have been grouped.

3.13 Arranging Graphs on a Page

Use the Arrange Graph dialog box to quickly arrange, resize, and set positions of multiple
graphs on a page.
To arrange graphs on a page:

1. Select the graph page.

2. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format Group group, click Arrange Graph.

158
 3.13.1 Adding New Pages to [Link]

3. In the Arrange Graphs dialog box, select a layout for the page from the Layouts list.
A preview of the layout appears in the Preview window.

Figure 3.8 Arrange Graph Dialog Box

Layouts are stored in a template file called [Link].

Note: You must apply a layout to a page that has the same or fewer number of graphs.
4. Click Apply. The graphs on the page match the layout you selected, and the Layout
dialog box remains open.
5. To arrange the graphs again, you can select another layout from the Layouts list, then
click Apply, or click Close to close the dialog box.

3.13.1 Adding New Pages to [Link]

Layouts, like templates, use a .jnt extension and are stored in notebooks. A sample layout
notebook, [Link], is provided with SigmaPlot and is set as the default layout source
notebook. You can add a your own graph page to this file to use the next time you arrange
graphs on the page.

159
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To add a page:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Open.

2. In the Open dialog box, select Template Notebook (*.jnt) from the Files of type
drop-down list.

Figure 3.9 Open Dialog Box

3. Select [Link] from the SPW12 folder. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor
more information, see page .
4. Click Open. The [Link] notebook appears in the Notebook Manager.

160
 3.13.2 Creating a Custom Layout Template File

3.13.2 Creating a Custom Layout Template File

You can create and save your own custom layouts by saving a graph page as a .jnt file.
To create your own layout template file:

1. Create a graph page and position the graphs as desired.

2. Click Save in the Quick Access toolbar.

3. Click Save. Now you can add future layouts to their own separate layout notebook.

4. In the Save As dialog box, type the name of the new layout template notebook in File
name box.
5. Click Save. Now you can add future layouts to their own separate layout notebook.

161
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.13.3 Changing the Default Layout Template File

Set the default layout template file using the Options dialog box General tab.
To change the source template file:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Options.

2. In the Options dialog box, click the General tab.

3. Click OK. The notebook becomes the default layout source.

4. Type the path and file name of the desired layout file in the Layout file field.
5. Click OK. The notebook becomes the default layout source.

162
 3.14 Aligning Page Objects

3.14 Aligning Page Objects

You can align labels and objects with each other as well as with graphs and axes.
To align page objects:

1. Select the labels, graphs or other object(s) you want to align by holding down the Shift
key while selecting individual objects. (You must select more than one object in order
to align them.)
2. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click Align.

3. Align dialog box, under Horizontal and Vertical, choose the appropriate options to
align the selected objects vertically, horizontally, or both. Graphical feedback for your
selections appears in the lower right corner of the dialog box.

4. To align selected objects relative to each other, select Each Other.

You must have multiple objects selected if you want to align selected objects relative to
each other. Each Other moves aligned objects with respect to the last selected object,
which remains in a fixed position. The last selected object can be distinguished from other
selected objects by solid rather than hollow selection handles.
5. To align objects relative to the page margins rather than the page edge, select Page
Margins.
6. Click OK.

3.14.1 Working with Grids and Rulers

Use grids and rulers to quickly and easily align graphs and objects on the page. You can show
or hide grids and rulers from the Format group on the Graph Page tab.

163
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Using Rulers

Rulers are optionally displayed at the top and left hand side of all graph pages. They display
the current units set in the Options dialog box. You can choose between inches, centimeters,
or points. Setting Program OptionsFor more information, see page .

[Link] Using Snap-to

You can use Snap-to if the grids are displayed or hidden. To use grids:

1. On the Graph Page tab, in the Format group, click the Rulers. drop-down list.

2. Click Snap-to.

Graphs and objects snap to the nearest grid.

[Link] Using Crosshairs

Use Crosshairs as an object alignment tool. To turn on crosshairs, click the Crosshairs
button on the upper left hand corner of the graph page window. Crosshair lines extend from
the pointer tip to the rulers and to the right and bottom of the window, and follow the pointer.

164
 3.15 Editing Text

1. To hide crosshairs, click the Crosshairs button again.

3.15 Editing Text

Use the Page toolbar to add and edit text labels and legends to the graph page, in addition to
editing automatically created graph and axis titles. SigmaPlot automatically creates legends
for every plot. You can modify the existing automatic legend by clicking the Text button on
the Page toolbar, and then edit the text using the Formatting toolbar.
You can format tick and contour labels, but you cannot edit their content.

3.15.1 Creating Text Labels

You can add an unlimited number of text labels and legends to any graph page. SigmaPlot for
Windows supports:
• All TrueType, PostScript, and other fonts installed on your system.
• Multiple lines of text aligned left, right, or centered, with adjustable line heights.
• Mixed fonts and other attributes within a single label.
• Multiple levels of superscripting and subscripting.
• Rotation of text in single degree increments.
• Color using up to 16.7 million different combinations of red, green, and blue

To create text labels or legends on a page:

1. Select and view the page window, then click the Text button on the Page toolbar. This
places you into text mode until another mode or tool is selected
2. Click the page where you want the label to begin. A text box appears.
3. Select the font, character size, and other starting character attributes from the Formatting
toolbar.

The following table outlines the functions of each button. These buttons act on selected
text, or set the format for following text.

165
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Control Function

Set Font

Set Size

Normal Format

Bold

Italic

Underlined

Superscript One Level

Subscript One Level

Toggle to Greek (Symbol) Font

Left Align

Center Align

Right Align

Line Spacing (Multiline Paragraph Only)

Rotation

Color

The Rotation, Alignment, and Line Spacing options affect the entire label, not just the
selected text, and Line Spacing is a minimum spacing control, not fixed. If you change
the height of characters by changing font sizes or by adding superscripts or subscripts, the
line height adjusts automatically.
Note: Using the Default Text Properties you can set default text label attributes by
opening the Text Properties dialog box with no labels selected.

166
 3.15.2 Editing Text and Individual Characters

Note: In addition to using the Greek Characters button to add a Greek symbol to text,
you can also select pre-existing text and choose Symbol as the font type in the Text
Properties dialog box.
4. To add legend symbols to your text, click Symbols. The Symbol palette appears.

5. Type your label.

6. To add legend symbols to your text, click Symbols. The Symbol palette appears.

3.15.2 Editing Text and Individual Characters

To edit existing text on a graph page, you can click the text if you are in text mode, or if
you are in select mode, double-click the text.

3.15.3 Formatting Text

If you want only to change the attributes (the formatting) of selected text on a graph page, use
the Formatting toolbar. The Text Properties dialog box sets properties for all selected labels,
and applies changes to all characters within selected labels.
Note: If you have complex font and character changes within a label, take care not to
overwrite these formats with Text Properties dialog box settings.
Global Text Changes. The Text Properties dialog box is useful for formatting multiple
labels as well as all text on a graph. Select the graph and choose Text Properties, then select
the attributes you want applied to all graph labels and titles.
Default Text Properties. The Text Properties dialog box is used to set the default character
and paragraph properties for new labels. Open the Text Properties dialog box with nothing
selected, and set the options you want applied to new text labels.
To format text using the Text Properties dialog box:

1. Select the text object you want to modify.

If you want to modify several text objects, hold down the Shift key while clicking the
objects, or drag a select window around all objects
2. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

3. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

4. To change the font, style, character size, or color of text, or to underline text, click
the Font tab.

167
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: If you have multiple text objects with different text properties selected, the
attributes that are not the same appear blank. Do not select an attribute for these options
unless you want it to be applied to all selected objects.
5. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

6. To change paragraph attributes, including line spacing, alignment, or rotation,

click the Paragraph tab.

Figure 3.10 Text Properties Dialog Box Paragraph Tab

7. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

8. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

3.16 Working with Automatic Legends

Legends work as a key for your graph. They label what the different graph symbols, lines, or
fills represent. SigmaPlot automatically creates legends for all graphs, always placing them
below the graph on the left side. Legend entries are labeled using the titles of the columns
plotted; if there are no column titles, column numbers are used instead.
Move and modify legends as you would any other page object. They also have a special set
of controls and features. This section describes how to modify and control these automatic
legend features.
You can also add legend symbols to any text label or title. For more information, see page .

168
 3.16.1 Editing Individual Legend Entries

3.16.1 Editing Individual Legend Entries

To edit legend entries:

1. Select the legend on the graph page.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, select the legend name under the
Legend for...entry.
3. Edit the text of the legend entry properties in the Object Properties window of the
Property Browser.

3.16.2 Sizing Legend Symbols

You can individually control legend symbol size using the Property Browser.
To resize legend symbols:

1. Select the legend.

2. Select the legend entry, which appears under Legends in the Page Object window of
the Property Browser.
3. Control the symbol size and width using the Symbol Height and Symbol Width sliders
which appear in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

3.16.3 Editing Automatic Legends

You can edit a legend as a single object.

To edit an automatic legend:

1. Select the legend on the graph page.

2. To show or hide an automatic legend, under Legend Properties, in the Page Objects
window of the Property Browser, select Legends, and then in the Object Properties
window, under Legends Properties, select or clear Show auto legend.
3. To enclose the legend in a box, select Legend framed in box in the Object Properties
window. To hide a legend, clear this option.
4. To halt all automatic updating of the legend text for the whole legend, select Lock
legend.
5.
6. To modify the line thickness and fill of the legend box, in the Page Objects window
of the Property Browser, select Legend Box. Then in the Object Properties window,
move the Edge Thickness slider.
7. To annotate from the For legend symbol drop-down list, select the legend entry under
the Legend for... list in the Page Objects window. Then in the Object Properties

169
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

window, click ... (next to Text). In the Edit Text dialog box, type text. Do this for as
many legend symbols as you want.
8. To move the legend symbols either to the right or to the left of text, select a position
from the Symbol placement drop-down list.
9. To modify the appearance of the symbols for the current legend, select a symbol style
from the Legend Style drop-down list. The Legend Style drop-down list only affects
scatter and line plots.
10. To change the text size or style, select from the Font and the Font Size drop-down lists.

[Link] Permanently Displaying and Hiding Automatic Legends

You can control the display of automatic legends either for all subsequently created graphs.
To view or hide automatic legends for all subsequently created plots:

1. Select the legend on the graph page.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, select Legends.
3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select or clear Show auto
legend.

[Link] Locking Legend Text

Locking legends halts all automatic updating of the legend text for the whole legend. For
example, if you lock the legend, you can change column titles and column data without
resetting the legend label. The legend will automatically update, however, if you remove
or add a curve.
You can also lock a legend by editing it.
If you do not lock the legend, the legend automatically updates itself when you change column
titles and data. Locking the legend affects the entire legend, not just individual entries.
To lock legend text:

1. Select the legend on the graph page.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, select Legends.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select Lock legend.

3.17 Changing Graph Page Format

Use the Page Setup dialog box to change graph page margins and size. This dialog box also
controls which graphs on a page are displayed or hidden from view, and the color of the page.
Hiding and Deleting Objects from the Page For more information, see page 147.
To change graph page margins and size:

170
 3.17.1 Changing and Displaying Graph Page Margins

1. Make sure a graph page is in view.

Click the Main Button and then click Print and then click Page Setup.

Note: The options in the Page Setup dialog box affect both the view of the page
on-screen, and the printer settings for the page you are printing.

3.17.1 Changing and Displaying Graph Page Margins

To change page margins, and to view or hide margins on the current page:

1. Make sure a graph page is in view.

Click the Main Button and then click Print and then click Page Setup.

171
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. Click OK.

3. Click the Margins tab.

4. Click OK.
5. Use the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right options to specify the width or height of the
corresponding page margin. You can type values in the edit boxes using any of the
available units of measurement; the value is converted to the current measurement units
specified in the Options dialog box. Type in for inches, mm for millimeters, and pts
for points.

Margins do not affect printing, they are only a guide. The Align dialog box uses margins
when aligning the page.
6. Click OK.
7. Clear or check the Show Margins option by selecting it. If this option is checked, margins
are displayed on the page. To hide page margins, clear Show Margins.
8. Click OK.

3.17.2 Graph Page Size and Orientation

To change the size or orientation of the graph page:

Click the Main Button and then click Print and then click Page Setup.

1. Click the Page Size tab.

172
 3.17.3 Changing Page Units of Measurement

2. From the Paper Size drop-down list choose the appropriate size for the page, or select
unique page sizes from the Width and Height drop-down lists.

Note: SigmaPlot does not support heights or widths greater than 32 inches.
3. To switch between portrait (normal) and landscape (sideways) orientation, select
either the Portrait or Landscape option.
4. Click OK to accept your changes and close the dialog box.

Note: If you change the page size and/or orientation, the page changes on the screen, but
your graphs remain in the same relative position. You may have to move the graphs
back into position.

3.17.3 Changing Page Units of Measurement

Use the Page Options dialog box to change the units of measurement used on a graph page.
Page units of measurement are important when specifying margins and object size and
position. These settings apply to all pages and graph and object properties dialog boxes.
To change the unit of measurement used:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Options.

2. Click the Page tab.

173
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.

4. From the Units box, select the unit of measurement to use on the page. You can choose to
use inches, millimeters, or points.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.

3.17.4 Changing Page Color

You can change the color of a page using the Page Setup dialog box. This is especially useful
when creating output for slides or for overhead projectors.
To change the color of a page:

1. Make the page active by selecting it.

2. Click the Main Button and then click Print and then click Page Setup.
3. Click the Page Layout tab.

174
 3.17.5 Page Color Default Setting

4. From the Color drop-down list, select the color to use for the page. Select (Custom) to
use or create a custom color. Using Custom ColorsFor more information, see page 175.
5. Click OK.

Note: If you want no background color to show up for pasted graphs (e.g., pasting a graph
into PowerPoint), set the page color to None.

3.17.5 Page Color Default Setting

You can set the default color for a new page by opening the template file and change the
attributes for the Normal page using the Page Setup dialog box for that page.
If there is no template file or Normal page present, page settings are derived from the settings
stored in the [Link] file. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information,
see page .

3.17.6 Templates
You can overwrite the current page entirely by applying a template to it. This is not
recommended as a means of reformatting the page unless you intend to discard all changes
made to the page up to this point. Using Graph Pages as TemplatesFor more information,
see page 131.

3.18 Using Custom Colors

Color drop-down lists have a (Custom) option that opens the Color dialog box, from which
you can select a custom color from over 16.7 million possible combinations of red, green, and
blue (24-bit color).

175
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3.18.1 Configuring Your Display for Color

If you want the truest representation of what your colors will appear like when printed, you
should always set you display to the highest color level possible. Most Windows systems
support Hi Color (16-bit) or True Color (24-bit) modes. Right-click your desktop, choose
Properties, select Settings, then set your Color palette to the highest possible level.
To select a custom color:

1. Open the dialog box that has the color option in it, and from the Color drop-down list,
select (Custom).

If you have not already selected a custom color, the Color dialog box appears.

176
 3.18.1 Configuring Your Display for Color

If a custom color has already been defined for this option, the custom color is selected.
2. From the Basic Colors list, select a color, or click Define Custom Colors to define your
own color. The dialog box expands to show a color palette.

3. Click the large color field, or drag your mouse across it to indicate the approximate color
you want to use. If you know the numeric RGB (red, green, blue) values of the desired
color, you can select each of the Red, Green, and Blue edit boxes and type the correct
values. The selected color box appears.
4. Move the slider next to the vertical color bar along the right of the dialog box to fine-tune
the range of the Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity of the selected color, or type new

177
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

values in the edit boxes. The current custom color appears in the Color|Solid box as
a gradational color and a solid.
5. To change the color assigned to a Custom Color box, select the box in the list, then
specify the new color from the large color field.
6. To select the gradational color, click Add to Custom Colors. The color appears in the
first available box of the Custom Colors list.
7. To select the solid version of the color, double-click the solid in the Color|Solid box,
then click Add to Custom Colors. The color appears in the first available box of the
Custom Colors list.
8. Select the color to use from the Custom Color list, then click OK.

The Color dialog box closes, and you are returned to the dialog box from which you
opened the Color dialog box.
The color drop-down list that you are using now has the color you created as an option
with the word (Custom) next to it. If the custom color you created is a duplicate of a
pre-existing system color, the system color is selected instead of the (Custom) option in
the drop-down list.

178
4 Notebook Manager Basics
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About the Notebook Manager
♦ Protecting Notebooks
♦ Working with Sections in the Notebook Manager
♦ Opening Files in the Notebook Manager

4.1 About the Notebook Manager

When you first start SigmaPlot, the Quick Start dialog box appears with the Open notebook
tab in view, with a variety of options to start creating graphs. The simplest way is to select the
first option, Create new blank notebook, and then click OK.

The Quick Startdialog box closes, and you see the SigmaPlot desktop, with a worksheet
in the center, the Property Browser and Data Properties to the right, and the Notebook
Managerto the left.

179
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Like all the windows open on the SigmaPlot desktop, the Notebook Manager is a dockable
and floating window. Notebook files contain all of your data and graphs, and are organized
within the Notebook Manager. It is in the Notebook Manager that you can open and work
with many notebook files at once.
The first time you see the Notebook Manager, it appears with one open notebook file, which
contains one section. That section contains one empty worksheet. Contents of the Notebook
Manager appear as a tree structure, similar to Windows Explorer.
Each open notebook appears as the top level, with one or more sections at the second level,
and one or more items at the third level. Within each section you can create one worksheet and
an unlimited number of graph pages, reports, equations and macros. The most recently opened
notebook file appears at the top of the Notebook Manager.
Modified Notebook Names. An asterisk next to an item in the Notebook Manager indicates
that the item has been modified since the last time you saved the notebook.
Notebook Item Names. The default startup notebook is named Notebook1. It contains one
notebook section, Section 1, and one worksheet, Data 1. When you save your notebook file,
the name of the file appears at the top of the Notebook Manager window. Notebook files
use a (.jnb) extension. The default names given to notebook sections and items are, Section
(number), Data (number) or Excel (number) and Report (number). Regression equations are
named when they are created. New items are numbered sequentially.

4.1.1 Opening and Closing Notebooks in the Notebook

Manager

You can open as many notebooks as you like. All opened notebooks appear in the Notebook
Manager. You can navigate through the different open notebooks by selecting them in the
Notebook Manager. The current open notebook’s title is in bold type. To open the contents of
another notebook, double-click any of the contents of a section of a particular notebook.
To open a notebook:

180
 4.1.2 Sizing and Docking the Notebook Manager

1. In the Notebook Manager, select All Open Notebooks.

2. Right-click, and then select Notebook. A new notebook file appears in the Notebook
manager with its title in bold type.

To close a notebook:
3. Right-click to select Close.

4. Select the notebook to close in the Notebook Manager.

5. Right-click to select Close.

4.1.2 Sizing and Docking the Notebook Manager

The Notebook Manager can appear in six states:

• Docked with summary information in view.
• Docked with summary information hidden.
• Floating with summary information in view.
• Floating with summary information hidden.
• Docked and collapsed.
• Hidden.

1. To undock the Notebook Manager, double-click the title bar and drag it to the desired
location.
2. To drag and drop the Notebook manager, click the title bar and drag the Notebook
Manager anywhere on the SigmaPlot desktop.

4.1.3 Saving Your Work

Be sure to save your work at regular intervals.

To save a notebook file for the first time:

1. Click Save on the Quick Access Toolbar.

181
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

3. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the directory where you want to save your notebook.

4. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

5. Type a name for the notebook in the File Name text box.
6. Click Save save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

To save changes with the same name and path:

7. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

8. Click the Main button.

9. Click Save.

182
 4.1.3 Saving Your Work

To save to a new name and path:

10. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

11. Click the Main button.

12. Click Save As.

183
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

13. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

14. Select the type of document you’d like to save, which can either be a SigmaPlot Notebook
(.jnb), SigmaPlot Template, or an equation in the SigmaPlot Equation Library.
15. Click Save to save the notebook file and close the Save As dialog box.

4.1.4 Printing Selected Notebook Items

You can print active worksheets, graph pages, reports, and selected notebook items. You can
print individual or multiple items from the notebook, including entire sections.
To print one or more items or sections from the notebook:

1. Select any item or section in the notebook.

2. Right-click to open the shortcut menu, and then click Print.

184
 4.2 Protecting Notebooks

To set printing options before printing a report, graph page, or worksheet:

3. Click Properties.

4. Open each item.

5. Click Properties.

4.2 Protecting Notebooks

To ensure security of notebook contents, you can lock notebooks using a password. This is
particularly useful if two or more users are using the same version of SigmaPlot. You can also
use a password to send confidential data to other SigmaPlot users.

4.2.1 Setting a Password

To set a password:

1. Select the notebook in the Notebook Manager.

2. Click the Main button on the Quick Access Toolbar.
3. Click Protections .

185
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Click OK.

5. In the Set Password tab on the Protections dialog box, type a password in the New
Password box.

186
 4.2.2 Changing or Removing a Password

6. Click OK.

7. In the Reconfirm box, type the password again.

8. Click OK.

4.2.2 Changing or Removing a Password

To change or remove a password:

1. Select the notebook in the Notebook Manager.

2. Click the Main button on the Quick Access toolbar, and then click Protections.

187
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK.

4. In the Set Password tab on the Protections dialog box, type the old password in the
Old Password box.

188
 4.2.3 Creating a Notebook Audit List

5. Click OK.

6. In the New Password box, type a new password.

7. Click OK.

4.2.3 Creating a Notebook Audit List

Use SigmaPlot Auditing to create a record showing who has modified and saved a Notebook
file and what operations he or she has performed during a given period of time.
To create an audit list:

1. Click the Main button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2. Click Protections.

189
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to save passwords and settings and to close the Protections dialog box.

4. Click the Auditing tab on the Protections dialog box.

5. To create an audit trail, select Enable Audit List.

190
 4.3 Working with Sections in the Notebook Manager

6. Click OK to save passwords and settings and to close the Protections dialog box.

7. To prevent other users from disabling the audit list, enter and reconfirm a password in
the Auditing Password (optional) and Reconfirm fields.

Creating an Auditing password is optional. Passwords can be any combination of letters,

symbols or numbers, up to 250 characters in length. It is strongly advised that if you
create a password, write it down as lost passwords can not be retrieved.
8. Click OK to save passwords and settings and to close the Protections dialog box.

9. To view the audit list, click View Audit List.

10. Click OK to save passwords and settings and to close the Protections dialog box.

4.3 Working with Sections in the Notebook

Manager
Notebook sections are placeholders in the notebook. They contain notebook items, but no
data; however, you can name, open, and close notebook sections.
You can create as many new sections as you want in a notebook. You may also create reports
within each section to document the items in each section.
To expand or collapse a section, double-click the section icon or click the (+) or (-) symbol.

191
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4.3.1 Creating New Items in the Notebook Manager

Using the right-click shortcut menu, you can create new sections and items in the Notebook
Manager, such as:
• Worksheets
• Excel Worksheets
• Graph pages
• Reports

• Equations

• Sections

• Macros

To create a new section or item:

1. Right-click anywhere in the Notebook Manager in which you want the new section
or item to appear.
2. On the shortcut menu click New, and then the item to create. The new section or item
appears in the Notebook Manager.

4.3.2 Copying and Pasting to Create New Sections

Another method to create a new notebook section is to copy and paste a section in the notebook
window. Whenever you copy and paste a section, its contents appear at the bottom of the
notebook window. SigmaPlot names and numbers the section automatically. For example, if
you copy notebook Section 3, the new section is named Copy of Section 3.
Copied sections create copies of all items within that section as well.

4.3.3 Renaming Notebook Files and Items

You can change summary information for all notebook files and items.
To change summary information:

1. If the summary information is hidden on the Notebook Manager, click Summary

information.
2. Select the notebook item and edit as appropriate.

192
 4.3.4 In-place Editing Section and Item Names

4.3.4 In-place Editing Section and Item Names

You can change the name of a notebook section or item in the notebook itself without opening
the Summary Information dialog box.
To in-place edit:

1. In the Notebook Manager, click the section or item you want to rename.
2. Click it a second time.
3. Type the new name.
4. Press Enter. The new section or item name appears.

Note: To change the name of the notebook, use the Save As dialog box.

4.3.5 Copying a Page to a Section with No Worksheet

If you copy a graph page into an empty section or a section that has no worksheet, you create
an independent page. The independent page retains all its plotted data without the worksheet.
You can store the pages from several different sections that have different data together this
way. However, if you ever create or paste a worksheet into a section, all independent pages
will revert to plotting the data from the new worksheet.
Use independent pages as templates, or to draw or store objects. You cannot create graphs for
an independent page until it is associated with a worksheet (and no longer independent).

4.4 Opening Files in the Notebook Manager

You can open SigmaPlot files and other types of files as SigmaPlot notebooks.
To open a notebook file that is stored on a disk:

1. Click the Main button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2. Click Open.

193
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the Open dialog box, choose the appropriate drive and directory of the notebook file
to open.
4. Double-click the desired notebook file.
5. If you want to open another type of file, choose the type of file from the Files of
type list.
6. Click Open. The opened notebook appears in the Notebook Manager.

4.4.1 Opening Worksheets, Reports, and Pages

You can open a worksheet, report, or page by double-clicking its icon in the Notebook
Manager. You can also right-click the item, and on the shortcut menu, click Open. Open
worksheets, pages and report appear in their own window, and in the notebook as a colored
icons.
Double-clicking an item that is already open brings the item’s window to the front.
Opening Multiple Items. You can open as many items as your system’s memory allows. You
can open multiple items from multiple notebooks. The selected item appears highlighted in
the Notebook Manager.

194
 4.4.2 Copying and Pasting Items in the Notebook Manager

4.4.2 Copying and Pasting Items in the Notebook

Manager

You can copy and paste items from one open notebook file to another in the Notebook
Manager; however, you cannot copy a worksheet into a notebook section that already contains
a worksheet.
Copying and pasting pages and worksheets between sections results in using graph pages as
templates. Using Graph Pages as TemplatesFor more information, see page 131.
To copy and paste a notebook item:

1. Right-click the item in the Notebook Manager that you want to copy, and on the shortcut
menu, click Copy.
2. Right-click the section where you want to paste the item, and on the shortcut menu, click
Paste. The selected item is pasted to the current notebook and section.

4.4.3 Deleting Items in the Notebook Manager

To delete an item from the Notebook Manager:

1. Select the item and press Delete. The item is deleted.

Items removed from a notebook file using the Delete button are removed permanently.

195
5 Worksheet Basics
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Worksheets
♦ Moving Around the Worksheet
♦ Entering Data into a Worksheet
♦ Importing Files from Other Applications
♦ Exporting Worksheet Data
♦ Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets
♦ Displaying Worksheet Data
♦ Formatting Worksheets
♦ Cutting, Copying, Pasting, Moving and Deleting Data
♦ Entering and Promoting Column and Row Titles
♦ Removing Outliers and Other Data
♦ Indexing Data
♦ Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot
♦ Printing Worksheets

5.1 About Worksheets

Worksheets are the containers for the data you analyze and graph. They are spreadsheet-like in
appearance but are limited in function, and are column rather than cell oriented.
To enter data, you can type in, paste, or import data from other sources. You can also
automatically generate and place data in worksheet columns by data transforms and statistical
procedures.

5.1.1 Opening a New and Multiple Worksheets

You can open as many worksheets as you like in a single notebook file. Each worksheet you
open is assigned to its own notebook section.
To open a worksheet:
1. Right-click the notebook file in which you would like the new worksheet to appear. In
the shortcut menu click New and then click Worksheet.

5.1.2 Saving Worksheets to Notebooks

Worksheets are saved along with the other contents of notebook files, including graph pages,
reports, and so on.
To save data for the current worksheet to a notebook file:

1. Right-click the worksheet in the Notebook Manager, and then click Save.

197
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

If you are saving the notebook for the first time, the Save Asdialog box appears prompting
you for a file name and path for the notebook file. If you are saving the worksheet to
an existing notebook file, the notebook is updated to include the new worksheet or the
changes to the existing worksheet.
To export a worksheet as a different file type (non-notebook file)
2. With the worksheet in view, click the Home tab.
3. In the Export group, click Worksheet.

5.1.3 Setting Worksheet Display Options

Use the Options dialog box to set the default display settings for worksheets.
Note: You can also change individual cells or blocks of cells using the Format Cells dialog
box. These custom formats remain even after editing options in the Options dialog box.
Formatting WorksheetsFor more information, see page 236.
To set worksheet display options:

1. Click the Mainbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2. Click Options.

198
 5.1.3 Setting Worksheet Display Options

3. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab. Displaying Worksheet DataFor
more information, see page 218.

199
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 5.1 The Options Dialog Box Worksheet Tab Data and Time Options

Options on the Worksheet tab include:

• General. Select to turn Worksheet undo on or off, or to set SigmaPlot to display
an error message if duplicate column titles appear when running transforms. Turn
Worksheet undo off if you are using a large data set and have a small amount of
memory.
• Numeric. Select to control how many decimal places you want to appear in the
worksheet, or if you want to use E notation.
• Date and Time. Select to set the display for the specified columns.
• Statistics. Use the Show and Hide buttons to move the statistics between the Shown
and Not Shown lists. These buttons are available only if a Statistics worksheet is
in focus.
• Appearance. Set column widths, row heights, color and thickness of the worksheet
grid lines, adjust data feedback colors, and select a font style and size. Displaying
Worksheet DataFor more information, see page 218.

200
 5.1.4 Freezing Panes

5.1.4 Freezing Panes

You can freeze panes to keep rows and columns visible as you scroll through the worksheet.
To freeze panes:

1. Select a cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear.
2. On the Worksheet tab, in the View group, click Freeze Panes.

5.2 Moving Around the Worksheet

You can move around the worksheet using scroll bars or, move the highlighted worksheet
cursor with the keyboard.
• → or ←. Move one column right/left
• ↑ or ↓. Move one row up/down
• Page Up or Page Down. Move one window view up/down
• End. Move to end of column
• End+End or Ctrl+End. Move to end of worksheet
• Home. Move to top of column
• Home+Home or Ctrl+Home. Move to column one, row one
• Ctrl + →. Move to last column of next data block
• Ctrl + ←. Move to first column of previous data block
• Ctrl + ↑. Move to top row of previous data block
• Ctrl + ↓. Move to last row of last data block
• F2. Put cells into Edit mode

5.2.1 Going to a Cell

You can move the worksheet cursor to any cell in the worksheet by specifying the column and
row number in the Go to Cell dialog box.
To go to a cell:

1. Press Ctrl + G.
2. In the Go to Cell dialog box, enter the desired column and row number.

201
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to move to the new cell.

4. To select the block of cells between the current highlight location and the new cell,
click Extend Selection to Cell.
5. Click OK to move to the new cell.

5.2.2 Using the Worksheet Shortcut Menu

In addition to the commands available in SigmaPlot ribbons, right-clicking the worksheet
displays a shortcut menu. The commands on the right-click shortcut menu include the Cut,
Copy, Paste, Transpose Paste, Insert Cells and Delete Cells commands.

Figure 5.2 Right-click Edit Worksheet Menu

5.3 Entering Data into a Worksheet

202
 5.3.1 Entering Dates and Times

This section describes entering data into worksheet columns, and formatting the columns
for numeric, label, or date and time display.
To enter data in a SigmaPlot worksheet:

1. Place the cursor in a cell.

2. Type a number, label, or date and time value.
3. Press Enter to move down one row, or use the arrow keys to move around the worksheet.
4. If you make a mistake entering data, press Ctrl + Z.

5.3.1 Entering Dates and Times

Enter dates and times using delimiters. The delimiters used are determined by the Windows
Regional Settings. For more information, see page .
Date Delimiters. The default date delimiter for most systems is a forward slash. An entry
that displays only two fields of a date value is assumed to be day and month. If the second
field’s value is greater than 31, months and years are assumed. Entries with two delimiters
assume month/day/year. If you enter only two digits for the year, the century defined in
your Regional Settings is implied.
Time Delimiters. The default time delimiter is usually a colon (:). Entries displaying
two fields of a time value are assumed to be hours and minutes. If PM is not specified,
hours less than 12 are assumed to be morning hours. An entry with two colons assumes
hours:minutes:seconds.

5.3.2 Insertion and Overwrite Modes

Press Insert on your keyboard to switch between overwrite and insert data entry modes.
If in Insertion Mode, Ins appears in the status bar.

If in Insertion Mode, new data entered in a cell does not erase the previous contents. Any
existing data in the column is moved down one row. Pasting a block of cells pushes existing
data down to make room for the pasted cells. If you cut or clear data, data below the deleted
block moves up.
If not in Insertion Mode, the worksheet is in overwrite mode. Data entered into a cell replaces
any existing data. If you paste a block of data, the block overwrites existing data.

203
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.4 Importing Files from Other Applications

You can import data from other applications into an existing worksheet for graphing,
worksheet display, or running regressions. When you import data, it appears at the position
of the worksheet cursor.
• Excel 2007 files (.xlsx)
• SAS Data Set (V6) (*.sd2)
• SAS Data Set (V8 and V9) (*.sas7bdat)
• SAS Export File (*.xpt)
• Minitab (v8 to v12) (*.mtw, *mpj)

You can import the following file types into SigmaPlot worksheets:
• SPSS (.sav). For more information, see page .
• SigmaPlot 1.0 and 2.0 files (.spw). For more information, see page .
• SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 Worksheet.
• SigmaPlot Macintosh 5 Worksheet.
• SigmaStat 1.0 files (.spw).
• SigmaPlot and SigmaStat DOS files (.spg, .sp5).
• TableCurve 2D and 3D files.
• Microsoft Excel files (.xls). For more information, see page 209.
• Lotus 1-2-3 files (.wks, .wk*). For more information, see page 209.
• Quattro/DOS files (.wk*). For more information, see page .
• Plain Text files (.txt, .prn, .dat, .asc). For more information, see page .
• Comma Delimited files (.csv)
• SigmaScan. For more information, see page .
• SigmaScanPro Worksheets. For more information, see page .
• SigmaScan Image
• Mocha Worksheets. For more information, see page .
• Axon Text and Binary formats. For more information, see page .
• Paradox (.db)
• Symphony (.wkl, .wri, .wrk, .wks)
• SYSTAT (.sys, .syd)
• Microsoft Access (.mdb)

When you import data from another application that is left-justified, SigmaPlot assumes
it is text.
To import data:

1. Place the cursor to the worksheet cell where you want the imported data to start.
2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Import group, click Import File.

204
 5.4.1 Copying and Pasting Data from Other Applications

3. In the Import File dialog box, select the type of file you want to import from the Files
of Type drop-down list.
4. Change the drive and directory as desired, select the file you want to read, then click
Import, or double-click the file name. Depending on the type of file, the data is either
imported immediately, or another dialog box appears.

5.4.1 Copying and Pasting Data from Other

Applications
Perhaps the easiest way to import data from another application is to simply copy and paste
it from that application’s spreadsheet into SigmaPlot . This is perhaps the simplest method,
especially if you cannot directly import the data into SigmaPlot . Cutting, Copying, Pasting,
Moving and Deleting DataFor more information, see page 240.
Once you have copied and pasted the data, you can promote the top row of data - the variable
names - to become the column titles.

5.4.2 Importing ODBC Databases

You can import ODBC compliant databases into SigmaPlot . To import a database, first define
an ODBC Data Source. After defining the data source, you can then either import tables or
import using SQL (structured query language).
Note: For more information on SQL, see the many sources and tutorials available on the
Internet.
To define the ODBC data source:

1. On the Worksheet tab, in the Import group, click Import Database.

2. In the ODBC Options dialog box, click the Select ODBC Data Source tab. The User
and System Data Sources list contains all defined the ODBC data sources.

205
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To add a data source that is not on the list, click Add.

4. In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click the User DSN tab.

5. Select a name from the User Data Sources list.

6. Click Add.
7. In the Create New Data Source dialog box, select a driver for which you want to set up a
data source from the Name list.

206
 5.4.2 Importing ODBC Databases

8. Click Finish.
9. In ODBC Setup dialog box (this is specific to the driver you selected for the data source),
enter a name to identify the new data source in the Data Source Name box.

10. Under Database, click Select.

11. In the Select Database dialog box, select the database, and click OK.
12. Click OK again to close the ODBC Setup dialog box.
13. Click OK in the ODBC Data Source Administrator.

207
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

14. Click OK in the ODBC Options dialog box.

15. If the data source already appears in the User and System Sources drop down-list,
select it. The Import Table dialog box appears.
16. In the Import Table dialog box, select a table from the Select Table/Query drop-down
list.
17. Select fields in the table by moving fields from Unselected fields to Selected fields by
double-clicking a selection in the list. You can also click << and >> to move all the
selections, or < and > to move them individually.
18. Click Import to import the fields into the worksheet. Field names in the database become
column headings in the worksheet. All records in the table are imported.
19. To import using SQL, on the ODBC Options dialog box click the SQL Query tab.

20. Under Recently Used SQL, type the name of the path where the SQL is stored, or select a
recently used SQL (SigmaPlot Query) from the drop-down list.
21. Click Open to open an .spq file.
22. Click Import to run the query and import the data.

• If the SQL is valid, SigmaPlot imports that data into the worksheet based on the SQL
statement. Field names in the database become column headings in the worksheet.
Only the records defined by the SQL (rows) are imported.
• If the SQL is invalid, you are prompted to correct the SQL.

5.4.3 Importing Excel as ODBC

When importing Excel spreadsheets using the ODBC Options dialog box, you must first
assign a name to each data set (or a range of data) which is then imported as a table; otherwise,
the Excel file will not import.

208
 5.4.4 SigmaPlot, SigmaStat, SigmaScan, and Mocha Worksheets

5.4.4 SigmaPlot, SigmaStat, SigmaScan, and Mocha

Worksheets

If you are importing a SigmaPlot, SigmaStat, SigmaScan, or Mocha file, a dialog box appears
prompting you to select a range of data to import.

1. Select the range of data by specifying the start and end of the range; the default is the
entire range.
2. Click Import to place the data in the worksheet.

5.4.5 MicroSoft Excel, Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Files

To import a spreadsheet:

1. On the Worksheet tab, in the Import group, click Import File.

2. In the Import File dialog box, select an .xls or .wks file to import, and click OK.
3. In the Import Spreadsheet dialog box, select either the entire spreadsheet or a specified
range of cells. Specify cells using the standard Lotus 1-2-3 notation (for example, A1:C50
for a range from cell a1 to cell c50).

4. When you have finished specifying the range to import, click Import. The selected
data is imported.

209
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: The dialog box indicates whether or not the worksheet is in overwrite or insert
mode, and where the imported data will begin.
5. To import spreadsheet data from non-compatible programs, save the spreadsheet as
either an Excel or text file, then import that file.

If you want to use an Excel workbook as an actual Excel workbook within SigmaPlot ,
you must open the workbook instead of importing it. Importing places the Excel data into
a SigmaPlot worksheet, and does not open the workbook as an actual Excel workbook.
Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlotFor more information, see page 255.

5.4.6 Importing Text Files

If you are importing a text file, the Import Text dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to
view the text file and to specify other delimiter types, or to build a model of the data file
according to custom column widths.

Figure 5.3 Import Text Dialog Box

Note: A quicker method of importing text is copying the data in your source application,
then opening SigmaPlot and pasting the data.

210
 5.4.7 Importing Axon Files

1. To specify a different column separator, select Delimiter to activate the delimiter

options; then select the appropriate type. You can select commas, hyphens, or any other
characters. For example, many databases use semicolons (;) as delimiters.
2. When you are finished specifying the file parameters, click Import. The specified data
from the file is imported.

5.4.7 Importing Axon Files

SigmaPlot can import data files produced by Axon Instruments, Inc. laboratory equipment and
data acquisition programs. SigmaPlot imports both text and binary data files; if you select one
of these options, the Import Axon dialog box appears prompting you to select a range of data
to import. The File selected is indicated in the dialog box title.
Select the range of data by specifying the Row and Column ranges; the default is the entire
range. Click Import to place the data in the SigmaPlot worksheet.

5.4.8 SPSS (.SAV)

If you are importing SPSS (.sav) files, the Import Worksheet dialog box appears prompting
you to select variables to import.
To select variables to import:

1. In the Unselected Variables list, select a variable you want to import.

2. Click the single > arrow to move that variable to the Selected Variables list.
3. Click the double >> arrow to move the entire contents of the Unselected Variables
list to the Selected Variables list.
4. Click Import to place the data in the SigmaPlot worksheet.

Note: SPSS data files use category data as the default data format. Plotting Category and
Grouped DataFor more information, see page 264.

5.5 Exporting Worksheet Data

Saving worksheets as non-notebook files is useful if you want edit your data in other
spreadsheet applications. Exporting worksheets does not export associated graphs.
You can only export the entire worksheet. If you want to export a portion of the worksheet,
delete the portion you do not want to export, then export the remainder of the worksheet.
You can export worksheets as the following file types:
• MS Excel (*.xls)
• SigmaPlot 9.0 Notebook (*.spw)
• SigmaPlot 8.0 Notebook (*.spw)

211
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• SigmaPlot 7.101 Notebook (*.spw)

• SigmaStat 2.0 Notebook (*.snb)
• Comma Delimited (*.csv)
• Tab Delimited (*.tab)
• Plain text (*.txt)
• SigmaPlot 2.0 (*.spw)
• SigmaPlot 1.0 (*.spw)
• SigmaPlot Macintosh 5 Worksheet (*.spw)
• SigmaScan, SigmaScan Pro (*.spw)
• Mocha, SigmaScan Image (*.moc)
• Lotus® 1-2-3 v1.0 (*.wks)
• DBase III (*.dbf)
• Quattro Pro v1.0 (*.wq1)
• Paradox v3.0 (*.db)
• Symphony v1.0 (*.wrk)
• SYSTAT (*.syd)
• SAS Data Set (V6) (*.sd2)
• Minitab (V11) (*.mtw)
• Minitab (V11) (*.mpj)
• SigmaStat 2.0 Notebook (*.snb)
• SigmaStat 1.0 (*.spw)
• MS Excel (*.xls)
• Comma Delimited (*.csv)
• Tab Delimited (*.tab)
• Plain text (*.txt)
• (*.spw)
• Lotus® 1-2-3 v1.0 (*.wks)
• DBase III (*.dbf)
• Quattro Pro v1.0 (*.wq1)
• Paradox v3.0 (*.db)
• Symphony v1.0 (*.wrk)
• SYSTAT (*.syd)
• SAS Data Set (V6) (*.sd2)
• Minitab (V11) (*.mtw)
• Minitab (V11) (*.mpj)
• SigmaScan, SigmaScan Pro (*.spw)
• Mocha, SigmaScan Image (*.moc)

212
 5.5.1 How to Export a Worksheet

5.5.1 How to Export a Worksheet

1. Select the worksheet you want to export by opening and viewing it, or selecting it in the
notebook window.
2. On the Home tab, in the Export group, click Worksheet.

3. Click Export to create the file.

4. In the Export File dialog box, select a file format from the Files of type drop-down list,
and then enter the file name, directory, and drive for the exported file.
5. Click Export to create the file.

5.5.2 Exporting Worksheets as Text Files

When you export a worksheet as a text file, tabs or commas are used to separate data columns
and data is saved at full precision. If you want to save a text file with data as it appears in
the worksheet rather than at full precision, copy the selected data to the Clipboard, paste it
into a text editor, and save it as a text file.

5.5.3 Exporting to SYSTAT

When exporting data to SYSTAT, make sure that there are no text cells or indefinites in data
columns you export, or they will be converted by SYSTAT into text instead of numbers.

5.6 Descriptive Statistics for Worksheets

SigmaPlot automatically calculates a number of basic statistical values for all the data in your
worksheet columns. Printing Column StatisticsFor more information, see page 258.
To view the statistics for the currently selected worksheet:
On the Worksheet tab, in the View tab, click View Column Statistics.

The running calculations performed for each column appear in a Column Statistics window
for that worksheet.

213
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 5.4 Column Statistics Worksheet

5.6.1 Available Statistics

To determine the statistics shown in the Statistics windows, use the Statistics Options dialog
box. For more information, see page . Most calculations ignore empty cells, missing values,
and text. The following statistics appear in the Column Statistics window.
Mean. The arithmetic mean, or average, of all the cells in the column, excluding the missing
values. This is defined by

1
X= xi
N i

Std Dev. The sample standard deviation is defined as the square root of the mean of the
square of the differences from their mean of the data samples xi in the column. Missing
values are ignored.

1 = 1
s= (x1 x)2 2
n 1 i

Std Err. The standard error is the standard deviation of the mean. It is the sample standard
deviation divided by the square root of the number of samples. For sample standard deviations

s
Std Err =

95% Conf. The value for a 95% confidence interval. The end points of the interval are
given by:

214
 5.6.2 Statistics Options

s
x ± t(v,z)
n

where x is the mean, s is the sample standard deviation, and t(v,z) is the t statistic for v= n-1
degrees of freedom and z = 1.96 standard normal percentile equivalent.
99% Conf. The value for a 99% confidence interval. The end points for this interval are
computed from the equation for the 95% confidence interval using z = 2.576.
Size. The number of occupied cells in the column, whether they are occupied by data, text, or
missing values.
Sum. The arithmetic sum of the data values in the column.
Min. The value of the numerically smallest data value in the column, ignoring missing values.
Max. The value of the numerically largest data value in the column.
Min Pos. The smallest positive value.
Missing. The number of cells in the column occupied by missing values, denoted with a
double dash symbol (–).
Other. Either text or an empty cell.

5.6.2 Statistics Options

To display only a portion of the available statistics, use the Worksheet Options dialog box,
then select the column statistics to show or hide. Displaying Worksheet DataFor more
information, see page 218.
To specify which statistics are shown or hidden:
On the Worksheet tab, in the View tab, click View Column Statistics.

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

215
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Select the appropriate options to change the column widths and data display.

4. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

216
 5.6.3 Engineering and E Notation

5. Select the appropriate options to change the column widths and data display.

6. Select the statistic(s) you want shown or hidden.

7. Select the appropriate options to change the column widths and data display.

5.6.3 Engineering and E Notation

In SigmaPlot , E Notation is synonymous with scientific notation. The E expresses the power
of 10.
For example, 1.23 e+03 is 1230, or, equivalently, 1.23 e+03. Select E Notation When
Needed or E Notation Always on the Worksheet tab of the Options dialog box if you want
to use Scientific Notation.
Engineering Notation, which you can select as an option on the Worksheet tab of the Options
dialog box, uses integral powers of 3 (with 10 as the baseFor more information, see page .).

217
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Number Scientific Notation Engineering Engineering Notation

Notation (SigmaPlot )
1230 1.23 e+03 1.23 e+03 1.23 x 10^3
12300 1.23 e+04 12.3 e+03 12.3 x 10^3
123000 1.23 e+05 123 e+03 or 0.123 123 x 10^3 or 0.123 x 10^6
e+06

5.7 Displaying Worksheet Data

You can display data in your worksheet columns as:
• Text
• Numbers
• Date and Time values
• Graphic information

Figure 5.5 Numbers are displayed in Column 1, dates are displayed in Column
2, and text is shown in Column 3

You can enter numbers, labels, and dates and times directly into the worksheet. You can also
convert numbers to dates and times and vice versa. You can change column widths, number
decimal places, or date and time format, and you can also change the color and thickness of
the worksheet gridlines, and adjust data feedback colors.
Note: You can format columns to override the defaults set using the Options dialog box.
Formatting WorksheetsFor more information, see page 236.

218
 5.7.1 Sizing Columns and Rows

5.7.1 Sizing Columns and Rows

If the contents of your column exceed the column width, cell contents display as pound
symbols (####). Label entries are truncated.
To change a column width:

1. Drag the boundary on the right side of the column heading until the column is the size
you want.

To change a row height:

2. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. SigmaPlot’s worksheet can
display up to fourteen digits of precision regardless of how many decimal places you
specify.

3. Drag the boundary below the row heading until the row is the size you want.

To adjust column width and row height using the Options dialog box:
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. SigmaPlot’s worksheet can
display up to fourteen digits of precision regardless of how many decimal places you
specify.

5. Click the Main button.

6. Click Options.

219
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

7. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. SigmaPlot’s worksheet can
display up to fourteen digits of precision regardless of how many decimal places you
specify.

8. On the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

9. In the Settings For list, click Appearance.
10. Set column width and row height in the Column Width and Row Height drop-down lists.

220
 5.7.2 Changing the Appearance of the Worksheet Grid

11. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. SigmaPlot’s worksheet can
display up to fourteen digits of precision regardless of how many decimal places you
specify.

12. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. SigmaPlot’s worksheet can
display up to fourteen digits of precision regardless of how many decimal places you
specify.

5.7.2 Changing the Appearance of the Worksheet Grid

You can change the color and thickness of worksheet grid lines.
To change the grid appearance:

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

221
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

4. On the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

5. In the Settings For list, click Appearance.
6. Set color and thickness in the Color and Thickness drop-down lists.

222
 5.7.3 Setting Data Feedback Colors

7. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

8. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

5.7.3 Setting Data Feedback Colors

Data Feedback highlights the cells and columns on the worksheet that correspond to the X
and Y values of the selected curve or data point. You can change these colors on the Options
dialog box.
To change the data feedback colors:

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

223
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

4. On the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

5. In the Settings For list, click Appearance.
6. Set data feedback colors and thickness in the X and Y drop-down lists.

224
 5.7.4 Setting Decimal Places

7. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

8. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

5.7.4 Setting Decimal Places

To set the number of decimal places used for worksheet values:

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

225
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box. If the number of decimal places
exceeds the column width they appear as # symbols.

4. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

5. In the Settings For list, click Numeric.
6. Select the number of decimal places from the Decimal Places drop-down list.

226
 5.7.5 Changing Numbers Display

7. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box. If the number of decimal places
exceeds the column width they appear as # symbols.

8. Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box. If the number of decimal places
exceeds the column width they appear as # symbols.

5.7.5 Changing Numbers Display

You can display numbers in the worksheet in four ways:

227
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Numeric Display Description Example

E Notation When Needed Displays worksheet data as 12.00

scientific notation only when
the length of the value exceeds
the width of the cell. The
default column width is twelve.

E Notation Always Always displays data as 12.00e+1

scientific notation. The number
of decimal places is set in the
Decimal Places edit box.

Fixed Decimal Displays data with a fixed 12.00

number of decimal places. Set
the number of decimal places
in the Decimal Places edit
box. The number of decimal
places allowed is limited by the
column width—the maximum
number of decimal places
cannot exceed the column
width or it appears as a series of
# symbols. The default setting
for decimal places is two.

General Displays data exactly as you 12

enter it in the worksheet.

To set the numeric display for your worksheet:

1. View the worksheet.

2. Click the Main button.
3. Click Options.

228
 5.7.5 Changing Numbers Display

4. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

5. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

6. In the Settings For list, click Numeric.
7. Select a Numeric format setting from the Display As drop-down list.

229
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 5.6 Selecting Numbers Display Format

8. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

9. To use engineering scientific notation for worksheet values, select Engineering

Notation. Engineering and E NotationFor more information, see page 217.
10. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

5.7.6 Changing Date and Time Display

SigmaPlot has a variety of date/time displays. When you enter a value into a date/time
formatted cell, SigmaPlot assumes internal date/time information about that value from the
year to the millisecond. For example, if you enter a day and month, you can display the
month and year.
To view and modify the current settings:

230
 5.7.6 Changing Date and Time Display

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

3. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

4. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

5. Click the Worksheet tab.
6. Select the Date and Time from the Settings for list.

231
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

7. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

8. Type one of the following examples into the Date box, or select a format from the
drop-down list:

• M/d/yyyy. 10/8/2005
• M/d/yy. 10/8/05
• MM/dd/yy. 10/08/05
• MM/dd/yyyy. 10/08/2005
• yy/MM/dd. 05/10/08
• yyyy-MM-dd. 2005-10-08
• MMMM. Complete month
• dd-MMM-yy. 08-Oct-05
• dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy. Tuesday, October 08, 2005
• MMMM dd, yyyy. October 08, 2005
• dddd, dd MMMM, yyyy. Tuesday, 08 October, 2005
• dd-MMMM-yy. 08-October-05

232
 5.7.7 Setting Day Zero

• dd MMMM, yyyy. 08 October, 2005

• gg. Era (AD or BC)
9. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

10. To change the display Time format, type one of the following examples into the Time
box, or select a format from the drop-down list:

• hh or h. 12 hour clock
• HH or H. Military hours
• mm or m. Minutes
• ss or s. Seconds
• uu or u. Milliseconds
• H: h: m: s: or u. No leading zeroes for single digits
• HH: hh: mm: ss: uu. Leading zero for single digits
• tt. Double letter AM or PM
• t. Single letter AM or PM
11. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

12. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

5.7.7 Setting Day Zero

SigmaPlot provides three date systems:

• 1900
• 1904
• -4713

Note: SigmaPlot by default uses the system zero date of 4713 BC.
Setting a Start Date is only necessary if you are importing numbers to be converted to dates,
or converting dates to numbers for export. The starting date must match the date used by
the other application.
Note that SigmaPlot recognizes day zero as starting at 0. Some spreadsheet software products
begin day zero at 1. This means that you may have to set your starting date in SigmaPlot to
one day prior.
Also, unlike Microsoft Excel, SigmaPlot correctly treats the year 1900 as a normal year
and not a leap year (a century year, to be a leap year, must be divisible by 400). If you’re
importing from Microsoft Excel, dates from January 1st 1900 to the day before March 1st
1900 will differ by one day.
To set the start date:

233
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1. Click the Main button.

2. Click Options.

3. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab. tab.

4. Select a date from the Day Zero drop-down list, or type your own start date. The default
start date is 1/1/1900.

234
 5.7.8 Regional Settings

Figure 5.7 The Day Zero Drop-down List

Day Zero becomes the number 01.00 when you change from Date and Time to Numbers
format. The basic unit of conversion is the day; that is, whole integers correspond to days.
Fractions of numbers convert to times. Zero becomes Day Zero, and negative numbers
entered into the worksheet convert to days previous to the Day Zero start date.
Conversion between date/time values and numbers can occur for the calendar range of
4713 BC to beyond the year 4,000 AD. The internal calendar calculates dates using the
Julian calendar until September, 1752. After that, dates are calculated using the Gregorian
calendar.
Note: If you convert numbers to dates, a start date is applied. If you convert the dates
back to numbers, be sure you use the same start date as when you converted them, or
they will have a different value.

5.7.8 Regional Settings

Drop-down lists in the Options dialog box worksheet tab use the current date/time settings
in your operating system. The Windows Regional Settings control date/time delimiters,
12 or 24 hour clock, and AM/PM display.

235
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Date and time display formats may be affected by your operating system’s Regional Settings.
For example, if your Time Zones are specified as British (English), your date values appear as
dd/mm/yy. If the setting is US (English), your date values appear as mm/dd/yy. If you want
to view or modify the current settings, or view alternative settings available on your system,
click the Regional Settings button, or modify them directly from the Windows Control tab.
Note: Date and time values appear on the worksheet using the date and time delimiters,
generally a forward slash (/) or colon (:).

5.7.9 Using Date/Time Format with Other Programs

You can copy date/time values from a SigmaPlot worksheet and paste them into other
programs, such as an Excel workbook, or, you can copy date/time values from another
program and paste them into a SigmaPlot worksheet. If the date/time format you are pasting is
larger than the worksheet column width, you may need to change the column width.
If you are copying date/time values from another program to SigmaPlot , make sure that the
program is displaying dates/times in a format that SigmaPlot accepts as valid data entry. For
example, if you are pasting dates from Excel, make sure the dates are displayed as numbers
separated by slashes (/), or whatever date delimiter Windows is set to.

1. To change Excel formats, see your Excel reference.

Keep the following in mind when copying or importing date and time formatted data:
• Pasted or imported numeric data does not automatically convert to Date and Time
format. You must convert it using the same start date (Day Zero) that is used by the
other program.
• When copying worksheet values, values are copied as numeric strings, not date/time.
• SigmaPlot recognizes Date and Time formats imported from Excel, but you will need
to convert most other non-text dates and times from numbers to dates and time.

5.8 Formatting Worksheets

You can format entire columns even if they contain no data. If a populated cell in a column is
already specifically formatted, as you enter data the entire column continues to use the same
format, provided the data is appropriate to that format.
When importing data, the import format takes precedence over the column format.
Note: Formatting worksheets is not the same as setting worksheet display options. Setting
worksheet display options sets the default for the entire worksheet. You can override these
defaults by formatting worksheet columns using the Format Cells dialog box.
To format worksheet columns:

1. Select an entire column.

236
 5.8.1 Setting Row and Column Size

2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format.

3. In the Format Cells dialog box, click the Data tab.

4. Select a Type. The Type you select determines which Settings are available. Available
Types are:

• Numeric. Select Numeric to control how many decimal places you want to appear or
if you want to use E notation in a selected worksheet column.
• Text. Select text to wrap text using the existing column width.
• Date and Time. Select Date and Time to set the display for the specified columns.

5.8.1 Setting Row and Column Size

To set row and column size for a selected block of data:

1. Select a block of data on the worksheet.

2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format.

237
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. in the Format Cells dialog box, click the Rows and Columns tab. The selected box
reflects the selected block of rows and columns.

Figure 5.8 The Format Cells Dialog Box.

4. Set column width and row height from the Column width and Row height drop-down
lists.
5. To apply the row and column formats to the whole worksheet, select Apply to entire
data region.
6. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. The worksheet appears with new
column and row sizes for the selected cells.

Note: Setting row height and column width from the Format Cells dialog box only
changes the selected block of data.

5.8.2 Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric

Display

You can convert between date/time and numeric display when:

238
 5.8.2 Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric Display

• Importing data.
• Switching numbers to dates.
• Modifying the display between date, time and date/time.

To display worksheet cells in Date and Time format:

1. View the worksheet.

2. Select the data you wish to display in date/time format.
3. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format.

4. Click OK. The data is displayed showing the date, time, or date and time as specified. The
dates and times that are entered as dates and times are automatically displayed as such.

5. In the Format Cells dialog box, click the Data tab.

6. Click OK. The data is displayed showing the date, time, or date and time as specified. The
dates and times that are entered as dates and times are automatically displayed as such.

7. In the Type list, click Date and Time.

8. Click OK. The data is displayed showing the date, time, or date and time as specified. The
dates and times that are entered as dates and times are automatically displayed as such.

239
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.8.3 Sorting Data

You can use SigmaPlot’s built-in Sort Selection transform to move selected blocks of data in
ascending or descending order according to the order in a key column.
Note: Because the sort command sorts data in place, if you want the original data to remain
intact, copy the data to a new location and sort the copied data.
To sort selected data:

1. Use the mouse or keyboard to select the data you want to sort. Only the selected columns
and rows are sorted; unselected values within a column are ignored.
2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Edit group, click Sort Selection.

3. Click OK to sort the data in place and close the Sort Selection dialog box.

4. In the Sort Selection dialog box, select the key column by choosing the appropriate
column title or column number from the Key Column drop-down list, or by typing the
column title or column number in the Key Column box.
5. Click OK to sort the data in place and close the Sort Selection dialog box.

5.9 Cutting, Copying, Pasting, Moving and

Deleting Data
Use the Edit group on the Worksheet tab to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear a selected cell or
block. You can also use the Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V shortcut keys or Standard toolbar
buttons.

240
 5.9.1 Stacking Columns

5.9.1 Stacking Columns

You can merge the contents of two or more columns by stacking the column contents on top
of each other.

1. Click a worksheet in view, click the Analysis tab.

2. In the Transforms group, select
Statistical→Stack
The Pick Columns for Stacked Columns dialog box appears.
3. Select the output column to place the stacked data by clicking the worksheet column.
4. Select the columns to stack, either by clicking the worksheet columns, or selecting the
column from the Data for Input drop-down list.
5. Click Finish to stack the contents of the selected input columns in the selected output
column.

Note: You cannot stack blocks of data, only entire columns.

5.9.2 Selecting a Block of Data

There are several ways to select a block of worksheet cells. You can:
• Drag the mouse over the desired worksheet cells while pressing and holding down the
left mouse button.
• Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow, PgUp, PgDn, Home, or End keys.
• Click Go To in the Edit group on the Worksheet tab.

241
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 5.9 Selecting a Block of Data in the Worksheet

1. To select an entire column, move the pointer to the column title row and click.
2. To select entire rows, move the pointer to the row title column and click.

5.9.3 Cutting and Copying Data

Cut removes a selected cell or block from the worksheet and copies it to the Clipboard. Copy
copies data to the Clipboard without deleting it from the worksheet.

5.9.4 Pasting Data

To paste data:

1. Click or move the worksheet cursor to the cell where you want to paste the data, or to
the upper-left corner of the block.
2. Press Ctrl+V. Any data in the Clipboard is placed in the worksheet.

5.9.5 Moving Data

Move a block of data by cutting it, selecting the upper-left cell of the new location, then
pasting the block.

242
 5.9.6 Deleting Data

5.9.6 Deleting Data

Press Delete. This operation does not copy data to the Clipboard, and is faster than cutting.

5.9.7 Inserting Blocks of Cells, Columns, and Rows

of Data

You can insert blank blocks cells, rows, and columns into the worksheet, and fill them with
data. If you’re moving and copying cells, you can insert them between the existing cells
to avoid pasting over data.
To insert a column, row, or blocks of cells into the worksheet:

1. Drag the mouse over the region where you want the empty block of cells, column, or row
to appear. The selected region of cells indicates exactly which cells will be inserted.
2. Right-click, and then on the shortcut menu, click Insert Cells. The Insert Cells dialog
box appears.

Figure 5.10 Inserting an Empty Block of Data in the Worksheet

3. Click OK. The column, row, or block of cells appears on the worksheet.

4. Select the direction you want the existing data to shift when the cells are inserted, or to
insert an entire column or row, select Insert Columns or Insert Rows.
5. Click OK. The column, row, or block of cells appears on the worksheet.

243
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.9.8 Deleting Blocks of Cells, Columns, and Rows of

Data

When you delete blocks of cells, columns, and rows, you are also permanently erasing the
data. It will not be available on the Clipboard.
To delete columns, rows, and blocks of cells from the worksheet:

1. Drag the mouse over the block of cells, column, or row you with to delete.
2. Click OK.

5.9.9 Switching Rows to Columns

You can rearrange data from a row-oriented format to a column orientation, or vice versa.
When you swap data, SigmaPlot pastes contents with the row and column coordinates
transposed.
To swap data column and row positions:

1. Select the block of data to transpose.

2. Cut or copy the selected data.
3. Select the cell where you want to begin pasting the data.
4. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu, select Transpose Paste.

The data is pasted to the worksheet with the column and row coordinates reversed.

5.10 Entering and Promoting Column and

Row Titles

Column and row titles label and identify columns and rows of data. Column titles appear in
the Graph and Regression Wizards when you pick columns, identify columns for legends,
and can be used instead of column numbers in transforms.
To enter or edit a worksheet column or row title:

1. Double-click the title, and enter or edit the title.

2. Press Enter to accept the new title. The new column or row title appears along with the
original column or row number.

244
 5.10.1 Using the Column and Row Titles Dialog Box

You must use at least one text character in every column title. If you need to use a number
as column title, type a space character (by pressing the space bar) before the number.

5.10.1 Using the Column and Row Titles Dialog Box

Enter and edit column and row titles using the Column and Row Titles dialog box.
To enter or edit a column title:

1. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells dialog box, click Titles.

2. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

3. In the Column and Row Titles dialog box, click the Column tab.
4. Enter the column title in the Title box.

5. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

6. To edit an existing title, move to that column by clicking Next or Prev, then edit the title.
7. Click OK to close the Column Titles dialog box when you are finished editing column
titles.

To enter or edit a row title:

245
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

8. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

9. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells dialog box, click Titles.

10. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

11. In the Column and Row Titles dialog box, click the Row tab.
12. Enter the row title in the Title box.

13. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

14. To edit an existing title, move to that row by clicking Next or Prev, then edit the title.
15. Click OK to close the Column and Row Titles dialog box when you are finished editing
row titles.

5.10.2 Using a Worksheet Row for Column Titles

Enter labels into a row, then use that row for worksheet column titles. This is useful for
data imported or copied from spreadsheets.
All the cells of the selected row are promoted, not just those cells which contain column titles.
This may effect other data sets in the worksheet.

246
 5.10.3 Using a Worksheet Column for Row Titles

To use a row for column titles:

1. If necessary, enter the column titles you want to use in a single worksheet row.
2. Select the cells in the row you want to use as column titles.
3. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells dialog box, click Titles.

4. Click Promote. The selected row contents appear as column titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

5. In the Column and Row Titles dialog box, click the Row tab. The number of the row
you wish to promote appears in the Promote row to titles box.

6. Click Promote. The selected row contents appear as column titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

7. To delete the original row once it has been promoted, select Delete Promoted Row.
8. Click Promote. The selected row contents appear as column titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

5.10.3 Using a Worksheet Column for Row Titles

247
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Enter labels into a column, then use that column for worksheet row titles. This is particularly
useful for data imported or copied from spreadsheets.
All the cells of the selected row are promoted, not just those cells which contain column titles.
This may effect other data sets in the worksheet.
To use a column for row titles:

1. If necessary, enter the row titles you want to use in a single worksheet column.
2. Select the cells in the row you want to use as row titles.
3. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells dialog box, click Titles.

4. Click Promote. The selected column contents appear as row titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

5. In the Column and Row Titles dialog box, click the Column tab. The column you wish
to promote appears in the Promote column to titles box.

248
 5.10.4 Using a Cell as a Column or Row Title

Figure 5.11 Using a Column for Row Titles

6. Click Promote. The selected column contents appear as row titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

7. Select Delete Promoted Column to delete the original column once it has been promoted.
8. Click Promote. The selected column contents appear as row titles and the Column
and Row Titles dialog box closes.

5.10.4 Using a Cell as a Column or Row Title

Use the Column and Row Titles dialog box to promote individual cells to column and row
titles.
To promote individual cells:

1. Click the cell on the worksheet that you want to promote to a column or row title.
2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells dialog box, click Titles.

249
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click Next or Prev to move to the next desired column or row, then follow steps above.

4. In the Column and Row Titles dialog box, click the Row tab to promote a row cell to
title; click the Column tab to promote a column cell to a title.
5. Click Next or Prev to move to the next desired column or row, then follow steps above.

5.11 Removing Outliers and Other Data

You can manually omit or ignore an outlying point or group of points by converting the
number to a text cell which removes the data point from both graphing and computation.
To remove or ignore an outlier:

1. Find the outlier on the graph, then click it to select the curve, pause, and then click again
(do not double-click).
2. View the worksheet. The data for the selected symbol is indicated with colored
highlighting.

Note: It is possible to highlight data points only if you create graphs using symbols.

250
 5.11 Removing Outliers and Other Data

Figure 5.12 When you find the outlier on the graph, click it once to select it, and
click it again, but make sure not to double-click.

3. Select the highlighted worksheet cell(s).

4. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format.

5. In the Format Cells dialog box, click the Data tab.

251
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 5.13 Format Cells Dialog Box

6. Select Text from the Type list, then click OK. This converts the number to text characters;
you can tell this if the alignment of the cell changes to be left aligned.

Figure 5.14 Graph with Removed Outlier

The data point is no longer plotted, and if you perform additional statistics on the graph,
the data point will also be ignored.

5.11.1 Highlighting Outliers

252
 5.11.1 Highlighting Outliers

Another way to remove an outlier is to cut the data and move it to another part of the
worksheet. This is useful if you still want to plot the data but ignore the outlier. Then you can
plot the moved outlier data with a second plot to continue displaying the outlying data.
To plot outlier data as a separate plot:

1. Identify the worksheet cell(s) corresponding to the outlier(s).

2. Select (highlight) the cells, and press Ctrl+X to cut them.
3. Move to another location in the worksheet and paste the data.

4. Plot the outlier data by adding it as a second plot to your graph. Change the symbol color
or other attributes to distinguish the data.

Figure 5.15 A Highlighted Outlier

253
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.12 Indexing Data

You can convert raw data to indexed data and vice versa, using the Index and Unindex
transforms available from the Statistical drop-down list in the Transform group on the
Analysis tab. You can index and unindex data with one and two factors.

5.12.1 Creating Indexed Data

Before indexing data, add titles to the columns. The column title strings are used as the index
codes.
Tip: If you are indexing two ways, use columns titles consisting of the levels of the two
factors for that table cell, separated by a hyphen (–), forward slash (/) or colon (:). These
levels names will be used for the index codes.
Indexing Raw Data for a Two-Way ANOVAFor more information, see page .
To index data by one factor:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, click Statistical and then One Way.
2. To index data by to factors, click Two Way
3. Click the worksheet column to select the output column for the indexed data. This should
be an empty column with at least one empty column to the right for a One Way ANOVA,
or two empty columns for Two Way ANOVA.
4. Select the columns to index, either by clicking the worksheet columns, or selecting the
column from the Data for Input drop-down list.
5. Click Finish to index the contents of the selected input columns in the selected output
column.

The indexed data is tabulated, with the indexes appearing in the left column(s), and the
data in the right column.

5.12.2 Unindexing Data

Indexed data can be unindexed for graphing purposes using the Unindex command.

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, click Statistical and then One Way.
2. To unindex data by to factors, click Two Way
3. If you unindexed two ways, each column contains the data for one cell in the Two Way
ANOVA table, and the two factor levels appear as the column title, separated by a hyphen
(-).

4. Select the columns to unindex as prompted.

254
 5.13 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot

5. If you unindexed two ways, each column contains the data for one cell in the Two Way
ANOVA table, and the two factor levels appear as the column title, separated by a hyphen
(-).

5.13 Using Excel Workbooks in SigmaPlot

SigmaPlot supports Microsoft Excel workbooks which you can use to create graphs, run
transforms, and perform regressions and other statistics on your data.
Most Excel ribbons are available when Excel workbooks are viewed, as are all of SigmaPlot’s
functionality. When an Excel worksheet is in focus, all keyboard shortcuts are assigned to
Excel’s hotkeys, not SigmaPlot’s.
Excel workbooks created by SigmaPlot are initially limited to a single worksheet. Excel
workbooks with multiple worksheets that are opened by SigmaPlot as notebooks retain all
sheets, but only the first sheet can be used for graphs and statistics.
To open a new Excel worksheet:

1. Click the Main Button, New, and then Excel Worksheet.

5.13.1 Using Excel as Default Workbooks

You can use Excel workbooks as the default SigmaPlot worksheet.

To set Excel as the default worksheet:

1. Close all open Excel workbooks.

2. Click the Main Button, and then click Options.
3. Click the General tab.
4. Select New notebooks use Excel workbook.,
5. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. All new notebooks will use
Excel workbooks as the default worksheet.

5.13.2 SigmaPlot Functionality within Excel Workbooks

To understand how Excel works with other applications, please see your Excel documentation.
The following functions are unavailable when working with data in an in-place active Excel
workbook:
• You cannot insert graphic cells into an Excel workbook for customized sequences of colors,
lines, symbols, and patterns. When an Excel workbook is the active window, there is no
Edit menu Insert Graphic Cells command.
• An Excel workbook does not have an associated Statistics worksheet. To view statistics
for data in an Excel workbook, use Excel’s own statistics, or copy and paste the data

255
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

into a SigmaPlot worksheet. To display the statistics worksheet for the active SigmaPlot
worksheet, on the Worksheet tab, in the View group, click View Column Statistics.

5.13.3 Creating SigmaPlot Graphs With Excel

Workbooks
An Excel worksheet works the same as a SigmaPlot worksheet when creating graphs. You can
select data before beginning a graph, or click or highlight columns from the Graph Wizard.
You can also create SigmaPlot graphs using Excel. Creating SigmaPlot Graphs Using
Microsoft ExcelFor more information, see page 76.

5.13.4 Using Transforms on Data in Excel Workbooks

You can perform Transform menu commands and user-defined transforms on data in Excel
worksheets. The transform language uses syntax which refers to columns numerically, or by
the column titles currently assigned. When prompted to pick columns, you can select columns
as you would on a SigmaPlot worksheet.
To perform user-defined transforms on an Excel worksheet, use the corresponding column
number in place of the column letter that appears in the gray heading area at the top of the
column. For example, the transform function:
col(1)=data(1,100)
corresponds to inserting data values from 1 to 100 into column A of an Excel workbook.

5.13.5 Using Statistics with Excel

You can use SigmaPlot’s statistical tests, including the Regression Wizard, with Excel
worksheets.
When prompted to pick columns, select the columns from the Excel worksheet just as you
would from a SigmaPlot worksheet. Results for statistics can be placed in Excel worksheets as
well.

5.14 Printing Worksheets

You can print active worksheets by clicking the Mainbutton and then clicking Print. You
can print any worksheet in a notebook. This section explains:
• Printing the current worksheet. For more information, see page .
• Previewing worksheets before printing. For more information, see page 257.
• Printing column statisticsFor more information, see page ..
• Setting printing options. For more information, see page .
• Configuring printer settings. For more information, see page .

256
 5.14.1 Printing the Current Worksheet

5.14.1 Printing the Current Worksheet

1. Select and view the worksheet. If you want to print only a portion of the columns in the
active worksheet, select a block from the worksheet.
2. Click the Main button.
3. Click Print.

5.14.2 Previewing Worksheets

1. With a worksheet in view, click the Main button.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Print Preview.

257
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5.14.3 Printing Column Statistics

1. On the Worksheet tab, in the View group, click Column Statistics.

2. Click OK to print.

3. With the column statistics worksheet in view, click the Main button.
4. Click Print.
5. From the Name drop-down list, select the printer you wish to use.
6. Click OK. The Print Data Worksheet dialog box appears.

258
 5.14.4 Setting Printing Options

Figure 5.16 The Print Data Worksheet Dialog Box for Columns Statistics

7. Click OK to print.

8. To print the names of the statistics that appear in the row region of the worksheet,
under Headers select Row Headings.
9. Click OK to print.

5.14.4 Setting Printing Options

1. Click the Main Button.
2. Click Print.
3. In the Print Data Worksheet dialog box, specify whether you want to print the entire
worksheet, only the selected cells in the worksheet, or a specified range of columns by
selecting one of the options under Area to Print.

259
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Click OK to print the worksheet.

5. Click OK to print the worksheet.

5.14.5 Configuring Printer Settings

1. With a worksheet in view, click the Main button.
2. Click Print.
3. In the Print Data Worksheet dialog box, click Setup.

4. In the Print dialog box, click OK when you are satisfied with the Printer settings, or click
Properties to edit the printer properties.

Note: The Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer.

260
6 Working with 2D Plots
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About 2D Plots
♦ Creating 2D Plots
♦ Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars
♦ Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error Bars
♦ Modifying Error Bars
♦ Grouped Bar Charts
♦ Creating Box Plots
♦ Creating Area Plots
♦ Bubble Plots
♦ Vector Plots
♦ About Axes and Plots

6.1 About 2D Plots

You can create 2D Cartesian (XY) plots from many worksheet columns or column pairs. Each
column is represented as a separate curve, set of bars, or box, depending on the plot type. 2D
graphs must have at least one plot, but you also can display many more plots, each with
a different type and style.
You can draw linear or polynomial regressions with confidence and prediction intervals.
Plotting and Modifying Regression LinesFor more information, see page 112. You can
also draw reference lines for each curve. Adding Reference LinesFor more information,
see page 117.

6.1.1 Scatter, Line, and Line/Scatter Plots

Scatter, line, and line/scatter plots graph data as symbols, as lines only with no symbols, or as
symbols and lines. Line shapes can be straight segments, splines, or steps. You can add drop
lines to either axis to any of these plot types, and add error bars to plots with symbols, and you
can draw linear or polynomial regressions with confidence and prediction intervals for each
curve. Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric Error BarsFor more information, see page 270.

Figure 6.1 Examples of a Stepped Line Plot, a Scatter Plot, and a Line Scatter
Plot

261
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6.1.2 Area Plots

Using area plots, you can fill an area under a curve with a color making the curve easier to
see. You can orient the fill up, down, left, or right. If your curve is a closed polygon, you can
also fill the polygon. You can have multiple curves (plots) on a page, so you can stack Area
Plots. Creating Area PlotsFor more information, see page 283.

Figure 6.2 Examples of Area Plots

6.1.3 Bar Charts

Bar charts plot data either as vertical or horizontal bars. They originate from zero in either a
positive or negative direction. Simple bar charts plot each row of data as a separate bar, and
grouped bar charts plot multiple columns of data by grouping data in the same rows. Stacked
bar charts plot data as segments of a bar; each data point is drawn as a bar segment starting
where the previous data point ended.
Use the Property Browser to modify bar width, bar fill colors, and bar fill patterns and to add
error bars to simple and grouped bar charts.

Figure 6.3 Examples of a Simple Bar Chart, a Grouped Bar Chart, and a Stacked
Bar Chart

6.1.4 Box Plots

Box plots graph data as a box representing statistical values. The boundary of the box closest
to zero indicates the 25th percentile, a line within the box marks the median, and the boundary
of the box farthest from zero indicates the 75th percentile. Whiskers (error bars) above and

262
 6.2 Creating 2D Plots

below the box indicate the 90th and 10th percentiles. In addition, you can graph the mean and
outlying points. Creating Box PlotsFor more information, see page 280.
You need a minimum number of data points to compute each set of percentiles. At least
three points are required to compute the 25th and 75th percentiles, and at least nine points
are required for the 5th, 10th, 90th and 95th percentiles. If SigmaPlot is unable to compute
a percentile point, the related graph element is not drawn.

Figure 6.4 Example of a Box Plot

6.2 Creating 2D Plots

To create a 2D plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.
2. Select the desired graph type and style from the Create Graph tab. The Graph Wizard
appears.
3. From the Data Format list, choose the appropriate data format, and click Next.
4. Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot. Since you selected
columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices automatically appear in the
dialog box and you can click Finish to create the graph.

Note: If you have not already picked columns, note that a single data type is highlighted
in the Selected Columns list. This shows the data type you are picking a column for.
Begin picking data either by clicking the corresponding column directly in the worksheet,
or choosing the appropriate column from the Data Columns list. Repeat this process for
every column you are using to create your graph.
5. If you make a mistake while picking data, select the wrong entry in the Graph Wizard,
then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You can also clear a column
assignment by double-clicking it in the list.

263
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. When you have finished picking data, click Finish to create the plot and close the Graph
Wizard. Use the Property Browser dialog box to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph
Wizard to pick different data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph.
Creating GraphsFor more information, see page 50.

6.2.1 Creating 2D Plots with Multiple Curves

You do not have to create multiple plots to obtain multiple curves. To plot more than one
curve, choose any of the plot styles described as Multiple and add additional columns, or
column pairs to the list of curves in the Graph Wizard. Both the Graph Wizard and the graph
styles available on the Create Graph tab list all types of multiple plot graph styles.
The order of the curves is determined by the order of the column pairs in the Graph Wizard.
To change the curve order, select columns again in the Graph Wizard or select the column in
the worksheet.

Figure 6.5 Plot Styles that Include Multiple Curves

6.2.2 Plotting Category and Grouped Data

Use the Category Data formats (indexed data) if your data is organized row-wise by categories
with corresponding data. Arranging Category DataFor more information, see page 39.

264
 6.2.2 Plotting Category and Grouped Data

Figure 6.6 The data in this worksheet is arranged as category (or indexed) data.
The data is organized row-wise by categories.

To plot category (grouped) data:

1. Select any multiple graph style for any one of these following graph types on the Create
Graph tab:

• Scatter Plot
• Line Plot
• Line/Scatter Plot

Figure 6.7 Selecting a Category data format from the Graph Wizard.

2. In the Data Format panel of the Graph Wizard, select one of the following category
data formats:

265
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• XY Category. Uses one worksheet column to graph the categories, and a pair of XY
columns.
• X Category. Uses one X column, and a column for categories, indexes, or levels
to group the data in corresponding rows.
• Y Category. Uses one Y column, and a column for categories, indexes, or levels
to group the data in corresponding rows.
3. Click Next. The Select Data panel of the Graph Wizard appears.
4. Select which data columns will correspond to which axis or category. For example, if
you are using an XY Category Data format, first select the column to use for the X data
from the Data for drop-down list. This selection appears in the Selected columns list.
Then select the column to use for the Y data from the drop-down list. Lastly, select the
column to use as the Categories from the drop-down list.

5. If you make a mistake while picking data, select another entry in the Graph Wizard,
then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You can also clear a column
assignment by double-clicking it in the list.
6. When you have finished picking data, click Finish to create the plot and close the Graph
Wizard.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph. Creating
GraphsFor more information, see page 50.

6.3 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error

Bars

In a Line and Scatter Plot with Error Bars, plot the means of each column as the Y value, and
represent the standard deviations with error bars.

266
 6.3 Creating 2D Scatter Plots with Error Bars

Use the Graph Wizard to create 2D plots with error bars. Scatter plots, line/scatter plots,
or simple bar charts can be created with error bars. SigmaPlot Graph Styles For more
information, see page 25.

Figure 6.8 2D Plots with Error Bars

To add error bars to an existing plot, first change the plot type. Changing Graph Type and
Style For more information, see page 65.
To create a scatter plot with error bars:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click the Scatter group, and then click Simple Scatter -
Error Bars.
3. In the Graph Wizard, select the error bar source from the Symbol Value drop-down list.

Symbol Value. Choose either Column Means to use the column means as the error bar
source, Replicate Row Means to use the row means as the error bar source, Worksheet
Columns to use values you’ve entered in the worksheet, or 2 Worksheet Columns to
read error bar end values from sets of two adjacent columns. You are prompted during
data picking to specify the column to use as error bar source data.

Error Calculation. If you choose any option besides Worksheet Columns as the symbol
value, specify the error calculation method to use for upper and lower error bars.

267
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Specify the error calculation for the error bars from the Error Calculation - Upper and
Error Calculation - Lower drop-down lists. Error Calculations are not applicable if you
select Worksheet Columns or Asymmetrical Error Bars from the Symbol Value list.
5. Click Next.

6. Select the appropriate data format from the Data Format list. X column averaged plots
require a constant Y column value, and Y column averaged plots require a constant X
column value.
7. Click Next.

268
 6.3.1 Creating a Range Plot

Figure 6.9 Specifying the Data Columns for the Error Bars

8. Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot. Since you selected
columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices automatically appear in the
dialog box, and you can click Finish to create the graph.
9. To create a single plot graph, choose data for every column you are using to make the
graph. To create a graph of multiple plots, choose data for the first plot, then click Next to
pick data for the next plot. Repeat this process for as many plots as necessary.
10. To make a graph with simple error bars or a graph with multiple error bars using
worksheet columns as the Symbol Value for error bar data, you are prompted to
choose columns for error bar data. Repeat the data picking process for every column
you are using to create your plot.
11. To make a graph using any of the other sources for error bar data (i.e. Column
Means, Column Median, Standard Error, etc.) with multiple error bars, you can
create a graph using a single plot, or a graph with multiple plots. Use multiple plots if you
want to use different symbols to distinguish between data sets.

Note: If you make a mistake while picking data, click the wrong entry in the Graph
Wizard, then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You can also clear a column
assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list. Click Back to access
previous Graph Wizard panels.
12. Click Finish when you have finished picking the data to create the plot.

6.3.1 Creating a Range Plot

A range plot is an error plot that plots the highest and lowest values in a column or row of data
as the range of the error bar, using the mean or median value as the data point.
To create a range plot from columns of data:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.

269
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. Click Finish. A range plot appears.

6.4 Creating 2D Plots with Asymmetric

Error Bars

Create 2D scatter plots with error bars using two adjacent worksheet columns as the error bar
source to independently control the error bar values. SigmaPlot computes the asymmetrical
error bars by using the column value as the absolute value.
The column to the right of the plotted data is the source for the bottom or left error bar; the
next column is the source for the top or right error bar.

Figure 6.10 2D Plots with Asymmetrical Error Bars

To create a plot with asymmetric error bars:

1. Drag the pointer over your worksheet data to select the data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click Scatter Plot, and then click either Simple Scatter -
Vertical Asymmetrical Error Bars or Simple Scatter - Horizontal Asymmetrical
Error Bars.

The Graph Wizard appears.

3. From the Data Format list, select a data format, and click Next.
4. Specify which worksheet columns correspond to the data for your plot. Picking Different
Data for the Current PlotFor more information, see page 63.

Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices automatically
appear in the Selected Columns list.
5. Click Finish to create the graph. Modifying Error BarsFor more information, see page
272.

270
 6.4.1 Creating Quartile Plots

6.4.1 Creating Quartile Plots

A quartile plot is an asymmetrical error bar plot that divides the total sample of a frequency
distribution into four quarters. The median of the data is the data point, while the 75th and
25th percentiles of the data represent the upper and lower error bars.
By default, SigmaPlot uses the Standard method to calculate percentile values for box and
quartile plots. You can change this setting to the Cleveland method on the General tab of the
Options dialog box. For more information, see page .

Figure 6.11 Example of a Quartile Plot

To create a quartile plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.
2. Click Finish.

6.4.2 Creating Error Bar Plots Using Category Data

271
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

You can create SigmaPlot error bar plots using category data entered into a SigmaPlot
worksheet. Arranging Category DataFor more information, see page 39.
To create a SigmaPlot error bar plot using category data:

1. Open or import a worksheet using a category data format. Importing Files from Other
ApplicationsFor more information, see page 204.
2. From the Data for Y drop-down list, select the column that corresponds to the Y data
you wish to plot, and click Finish. An error bar plot appears.

6.5 Modifying Error Bars

You can compute error bars for scatter, line/scatter, and bar charts. You select error bar values
when you pick the data for a plot and compute using values in a worksheet column or using
column means.
Note: You cannot add error bars to existing plots. However, you can select the desired plot on
the page and change its plot type and style so that it includes error bars. Changing Graph Type
and Style For more information, see page 65.

Figure 6.12 Examples of Graphs with Error Bars

6.5.1 Changing Error Bar Appearance

Use the Property Browser to change error bar color, cap width, line thickness, mean
computation method, and direction.
Note that you cannot select error bar values from the Property Browser, as it only affects the
appearance of error bars. Determine error bar values when you pick data to plot.
To change error bar appearance:

1. Select the error bar in the plot.

Error bars appears highlighted in the Page Objects window of Property Browser. You
can edit this object’s properties in the Object Properties window that appears below it.
2. To change line thickness and error bar cap width, move the Thickness and Cap
Width sliders in the Object Properties window.

272
 6.5.2 Changing Error Bar Directions

3. To change the color of the error bars, select Error lines in the Page Objects window
of the Property Browser. Then select a color from the Error Color drop-down list in
the Object Properties window.
4. To change line thickness and error bar cap width, move the Thickness and Cap
Width sliders in the Object Properties window.

6.5.2 Changing Error Bar Directions

You can specify error bar direction using two different methods: absolute and relative. Specify
absolute error bars to point in either a positive or negative direction; specify relative error bars
to point either towards or away from zero.
To change error bar direction

1. Select the error bar in the plot.

Error bars appears highlighted in the Page Objects window of Property Browser.
2. Select a direction from the Direction drop-down list in the Object Properties window of
the Property Browser.

Note: An X positive absolute direction always points right; a Y positive direction always
point up. An X negative absolute direction always points left; a Y negative absolute
direction always points down.

Figure 6.13 The bar chart on the left uses Y error bars with an absolute positive
direction. The bar chart on the right uses a relative direction away from zero.

A relative to zero direction always points toward or away from zero. This option is useful
for bar charts that have negative values.

273
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.14 The bar chart on the left uses X error bars with an absolute negative
direction. The bar chart on the right uses a relative direction towards zero.

6.5.3 Customizing Error Bar Directions

You can customize the error bar direction used for each data point by entering error bar
directions into a worksheet column.
To use custom error bar directions:

1. Select the first cell in an empty worksheet column.

2. Enter the codes for the error bar directions. The codes for the directions are:

Direction Code
Absolute Positive Positive or P
Absolute Negative Negative or N
Relative From Zero From Zero or F
Relative To Zero To Zero or T
Absolute or Relative, Both Directions Both, PN or FT

Note: Codes you type in the worksheet can be either upper or lower case.
3. Select the error bar in the plot.

Error bars appears highlighted in the Page Objects window of Property Browser.
4. Select the name of the first column which contains the error bar direction codes in the
Direction drop-down list in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

Note: SigmaPlot assumes that it is the next column that contains the second column
of error bar codes.

274
 6.5.4 Changing the Mean Computation Method

6.5.4 Changing the Mean Computation Method

If your graph uses a log axis scale, you can choose between calculating the column means
arithmetically (the default) or geometrically on a log scale. This option is only available
for log axis scales.
To change the mean computation method:

1. Select the error bar in the plot.

Error bars appears highlighted in the Page Objects window of Property Browser.
2. Select Arithmetic or Geometric from the Mean Computation drop-down list in the
Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

3. Select Arithmetic or Geometric from the Mean Computation drop-down list in the
Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

6.5.5 Changing Error Bar Source

Use this method to change the error bar source after you have created a graph. You can:
• Plot the means of worksheet columns as single data points and compute the error bars values
from column statistics (column averaging).
• Use data in worksheet rows and columns as error bar values. Creating 2D Scatter Plots with
Error BarsFor more information, see page 266.
• Use data in two adjacent worksheet columns as the absolute error bar values. Creating 2D
Plots with Asymmetric Error BarsFor more information, see page 270.

To change the error bar source after you have created the graph:

1. Select the plot to modify by clicking it. Small, square, black handles surround the
selected plot.
2. Click Finish. The graph appears with the new error bars.

6.6 Grouped Bar Charts

You can create grouped bars charts by picking multiple columns for a single plot. Data points
within the same row appear within the same group, and each additional column adds another
bar to each group. There are as many groups as there are rows of data.

275
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The order of the column pairs in the list determines the order of the bars for each group. To
change the bar orders within groups, change the order the column pairs appear in the list by
using the Graph Wizard to repick column data. For more information, see page [Link]
Different Data for the Current PlotFor more information, see page 63.
Use the Graph Wizard to create grouped bar charts with or without error bars. If creating a
grouped bar chart with error bars, error bar values must be from worksheet column values
entered prior to creating the plot. You are prompted during graph creation for error bar
worksheet columns.

Figure 6.15 Examples of Grouped Bar Charts with and without Error Bars

6.6.1 Creating Grouped Bar Charts

To create a grouped bar chart:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data. Picking Different Data for the Current PlotFor more information, see
page 63.
2. Click the Create Graph tab.
3. In the 2DGraphs group, click Horizontal or Vertical Bar Chart, and then click either
Grouped Bar Chart, or Grouped Error Bars.

The Graph Wizard appears.

276
 6.6.1 Creating Grouped Bar Charts

Figure 6.16 Using the Graph Wizard to Specify the Data Format

4. Click Finish. Modifying Error BarsFor more information, see page 272.
5. From the Data Format list, choose the appropriate data format to specify how your data
is formatted. The data formats available depend on the graph type and style.
6. Click Next.

Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices automatically
appear in the in the Selected Columns list. To change the selected data, select the wrong
entry in the Graph Wizard, then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You can
also clear a column assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list.
Notice that this dialog box also prompts you for the columns with the data to use as the error
bar values.

7. Click Finish. Modifying Error BarsFor more information, see page 272.

277
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6.6.2 Spacing Bars from Different Plots

If you need to create a bar chart with two or more different axes scales, or a chart with
overlapping bars, use multiple plots.
SigmaPlot does not automatically space bars from different plots. However, you can manually
space bars by grouping your data column(s) with column(s) containing missing or empty
data. This creates bar groups with null values and leaves room for other bars. When picking
columns to plot, pick the missing columns in a different order for each plot, so that the bars
do not overlap.
To overlap bars, plot your bar values versus a column of evenly incremented values rather
than by row numbers.

Figure 6.18 Bars graphed with different plots that both overlap and are spaced
differently by using different x increments.

6.6.3 Grouping Column Averaged Bars

You cannot create a grouped bar chart with error bars using column averaging; the bars do not
group or space correctly. However, you can copy the worksheet means and standard deviations
from the statistics window, then plot this data as a grouped bar chart with error bars.
To create a bar chart with grouped column averaged bars:

1. Click the Worksheet tab.

2. In the View group, click View Column Statistics.

The statistics window for the worksheet appears.

278
 6.6.3 Grouping Column Averaged Bars

Figure 6.19 Column Statistics Worksheet

3. Click Finish when done.

4. Select the block of data in the statistics window that consists of the means and standard
deviations of the first set of bars.
5. Right-click, and on the shortcut menu click Copy.
6. Select the first row of an empty column in the worksheet.
7. Right click, and on the shortcut menu click Transpose Paste

The first pasted column of data is the mean, and the next column is the standard
deviations. Switching Rows to ColumnsFor more information, see page 244.

279
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.20 The data in columns 8 and 9 of the worksheet are transposed from
the selected data in rows 1 and 2 of the Column Statistics window. Column 8
contains the means of the column data and column 9 contains the standard
deviations of the data.

8. Click Finish when done.

9. Repeat the copy and transpose paste procedure for the remaining sets of bars. Each pair of
mean and standard deviation columns you create adds an additional bar to each group.
10. Click Finish when done.

6.7 Creating Box Plots

A box plot is a summary plot that plots graph data as a box representing statistical values. The
boundary of the box closest to zero indicates the 25th percentile, a line within the box marks
the median, and the boundary of the box farthest from zero indicates the 75th percentile.
Whiskers (error bars) above and below the box indicate the 90th and 10th percentiles. In
addition, you can graph the mean and outlying points.
By default, SigmaPlot uses the Standard method to calculate percentile values for box and
quartile plots. You can change this setting to the Cleveland method on the General tab of the
Options dialog box. For more information, see page .

280
 6.7.1 Changing Other Box Plot Attributes

To create a box plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 2DGraph group, click Box Plot.

3. Click Horizontal Box or Vertical Box.

4. From the Data Format list, choose the data format that you want to use, and click Next.
Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the Selected Columns list.

Note: You need a minimum number of data points to compute each set of percentiles. At
least three points are required to compute the 25th and 75th percentiles, and at least nine
points are required for the 5th, 10th, 90th and 95th percentiles. If SigmaPlot is unable to
compute a percentile point, that set of points is not drawn.
5. Click Finish to create the graph.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph.

6.7.1 Changing Other Box Plot Attributes

To add a mean line, change which outliers are displayed, and change the 10th and 90th
percentile whisker cap widths:

1. Select the box plot.

281
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. In the Property Browser, navigate to Box options.

3. To display a mean line in addition to the median line, in the Object Properties
window of the Property Browser, select Box average so that it is True. If this check box
is False, the mean line is not displayed.
4. To modify the mean line, under Box Plot Mean line, from the Line Type drop-down
list, select a mean line type.
5. Select a line thickness and color using the Thickness and Color options.

Selecting (none) from the Line Type or Color lists creates a transparent mean line.
Selecting (Custom) from the color list enables you to use a custom mean line color,
or to create a new color.
6. Click OK.

7. To change how outliers are handled, from the Handling Outliers drop-down list,
select either Show Each Outlier (to plot outside the 10th and 90th percentiles), or Show
5th/10th Percentiles (to plot only the 5th and 95th percentiles as symbols).

Note: At least nine data points are required to compute the 5th, 10th, 90th and 95th
percentiles. Also, there may be no data points beyond the 10th and 90th percentiles.
8. Click OK.

9. To modify whisker cap width, under Whisker Caps, move the Width slider, or type
a new value in the Width box.
10. Click OK.

6.7.2 Modifying Box Plots

The fill, width, and symbol settings for the boxes can be modified using the appropriate
Property Browser settings.

282
 6.7.3 Computing Percentile Methods

You can change:

• Symbols used to display extreme data points. For more information, see page 76.
• Box fill color and patterns (including edge and whisker color). For more information, see
page 88.
• Box widths. For more information, see page 95.

6.7.3 Computing Percentile Methods

When graphing error bars and creating box plots, you can select the method of computing
percentiles.
To compute the percentile method:

1. Click the Main button, and then click Options.

2. On the Options dialog box, click the General tab.
3. From the Percentile Method drop-down list, select either:

• Cleveland
• Standard

Both the Cleveland method and the Standard method use linear interpolation to determine
the percentile value, but each uses a different method of rounding when determining the
smallest data index used for the interpolation. The two methods give the same result when
computing the 50th percentile (median).
If the data in increasing order is x1, x2, ..., xN and the percentile is p, then the two
methods compute the data percentile value v using the following formulas:
• Cleveland: Let k be the nearest integer to N*p/100, and let f = N*p/100 + .5 - k.
• Standard: Let k be the largest integer less than or equal to (N+1)*p/100, and let f =
(N+1)*p/100 - k.
4. Click OK.

5. To compute the percentile value, each of the above methods uses the formula:
v=f*xk+1+(1-f)*xk.
6. Click OK.

6.8 Creating Area Plots

Area plots are 2D line plots with regions below or between curves filled with a color or
pattern. Most commonly, an area plot is a line plot with shading that descends to the axis.
You can add shade below a curve and shade in different directions, and you can uniquely fill
and identify intersecting regions.

283
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.21 This example is actually four plots: a simple straight line,
simple scatter, vertical area, and multiple area. You can find this example in
[Link].

6.8.1 Creating Simple and Vertical Area Plots

Simple Area Plots plot a single line plot with a downward fill. Vertical Plots plot single YX
line plots with a left direction fill.

284
 6.8.1 Creating Simple and Vertical Area Plots

Figure 6.22 In this example, there are see two vertical area plots, a simple area
plot, and a simple scatter plot.

To create a simple straight line area plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click Area in the 2DGraphs group, and then click Simple
Area Plot.
3. From the Data Format list in the Graph Wizard, choose the appropriate data format,
and click Next.

Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the Selected Columns list.
Note: You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve.
4. Click Finish to create the graph.

285
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.23 Example of a Vertical Area Plot

Use the Property Browser modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different
data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph.

6.8.2 Creating Multiple Area and Multiple Vertical Area

Plots

Multiple Area Plots plot multiple line plots with downward fills. Multiple Vertical Area Plots
plot single YX line plots with left downward fills.
To create a multiple area plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click Area in the 2DGraphs group, and then click Multiple
Area plot.
3. From the Data Format list in the Graph Wizard, choose the appropriate data format,
and click Next.

Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the Selected Columns list. To change the selected data, select the
wrong entry in the Graph Wizard, then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You
can also clear a column assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list.
Note: You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve.
4. Click Finish to create the graph.

286
 6.8.3 Creating Complex Area Plots

Figure 6.24 Example of a Multiple Area Plot using a Y Many X data format.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different
data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph.
You can identify intersections either by using the Property Browser or by creating a
complex area plot.

6.8.3 Creating Complex Area Plots

Complex Area Plots plot multiple line plots with downward fills and intersections.
To create a complex area plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click Area in the 2DGraphs group, and then click Complex
Area Plot. The Graph Wizard appears.
3. From the Data Format list, choose the appropriate data format, and click Next.

Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the Selected Columns list. To change the selected data, select the
wrong entry in the Graph Wizard, then choose the correct column from the worksheet. You
can also clear a column assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list.
Note: You can plot no more than 2500 data points per curve, and you cannot plot more
than four curves.
4. Click Finish to create the graph.

287
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.25 Intersections only appear for two our more curves, and a legend
appears for each intersection.

6.8.4 Converting a Multiple Area Plot to a Complex

Area Plot

You can uniquely identify intersecting areas of all curves of a multiple area plot with a separate
fill by using the Property Browswer. Each possible intersection appears on the area plot, and
each identifiable set of intersections uses the next color or pattern in the selected scheme.
You can display intersections for a minimum of two curves and a maximum of four. Plots with
two curves will have up to three different regions, one region for each tuple, and one region
for the intersection. Three curves yield up to seven regions, and four curves up to fifteen.
To change a multiple area plot to a complex area plot:

1. Select the graph.

2. In the Page Objects window of Property Browser navigate to Data Points.

288
 6.8.5 Shading in Different Directions

3. In the Data Points Properties in the Object Properties window, select True for Identify
Intersections.

4. In the Data Points Properties in the Object Properties window, select True for Identify
Intersections.

6.8.5 Shading in Different Directions

Use the Property Browser to change the direction of fill colors in an area plot.
To change the area fill direction:

1. Create an area plot.

2. Select the graph.
3. In the Page Object window of the Property Browser, navigate to Data Points.

289
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Under Data Points Properties in the Object Properties window, select a direction
from the Direction drop-down list.

6.8.6 Changing Area Plot Fill Colors

Use the Property Browser to change area plot fill colors.

Note: SigmaPlot only supports system patterns. If you enter patterns into the worksheet, you
should only use system patterns.
To change the area plot fill color:

1. Create an area plot.

2. Select the graph.
3. In the Page Object window of the Property Browser, navigate to Fills.

290
 6.8.7 Shading Between Two Curves

4. Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. Changing Patterns and Fill ColorsFor
more information, see page 88.
5. In Fills Properties in the Object Properties window, select a color from the Color
drop-down list.

6. Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. Changing Patterns and Fill ColorsFor
more information, see page 88.
7. Select a pattern from the Pattern drop-down list. Changing Patterns and Fill ColorsFor
more information, see page 88.

6.8.7 Shading Between Two Curves

You can emphasize the difference between two curves by filling in the area. This is useful
when creating a climograph, for example, where two lines could show high and low

291
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

temperatures throughout the year. Shading between the curves aids in visualizing the range in
temperatures which would otherwise be lost in a sea of data points.

Figure 6.26 An example of two plots, a bar chart and an area plot. In the area
plot (in red), the area between the two curves is shaded.

You can shade the area between two curves by:

• Using the Property Browser to change the background color of the graph to match the
lower shade.
• Using the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box to insert colors in to the worksheet, and then
applying those to the plot.

To shade the area using the Object Properties dialog box:

1. Create an area plot that uses either X Many Y or XY Pairs data formats. Make sure,
when in the Graph Wizard, that you first select to plot the column with the largest Y values
for the upper curve. Then use the column with the smallest Y values for the lower curve.

292
 6.8.7 Shading Between Two Curves

Figure 6.27 To shade between the curves, first create an area plot that uses
the larger values for the upper curve.

2. Once you’ve created the graph, select the fill. A shortcut menu automatically appears.
3. Click the Paint button, and then select the fill color that matches the color of the lower
curve.

The graph appears with the area between the two curves shaded.

293
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.28 The area between the two curves appears shaded, while the area
under the lower curve matches the background..

To insert graphic cells to shade between two curves:

For more flexibility you can define the area colors by inserting colors into a column in the
worksheet and then use the front area color as the graph background color.
4. As above, create an area plot.
5. View the worksheet, and select a cell in the first row of an empty column.
6. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group click Graphic Cells.

7. In the Insert Graphic Cells dialog box, click the Colors tab.
8. Double-click to select two colors. In the first cell (row 1), select the color that you want the
area to be and in the second cell (row 2), select the color you want the background to be.

294
 6.8.7 Shading Between Two Curves

9. Click Close to close the dialog box.

10. To assign the area plot colors to those in the worksheet, in the Page Objects window
of the Property Browser navigate to Fills.

11. In Fills Properties in the Object Properties window, scroll to the bottom of the Color
drop-down list and select the column that contains the colors you selected in the Insert
Graphic Cells dialog box.

The graph now appears with the two shaded areas filled with the colors you inserted in
worksheet; however, the background of the graph is still white.

295
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.29 Once you’ve selected the color for the lower curve, you still must
match a color for the background.

12. Now select the background fill of the graph, and in the shortcut menu, click the Paint
button.
13. Select the color that matches the lower shaded area on the graph.

The graph appears with one shaded area between the two curves.

296
 6.9 Bubble Plots

Figure 6.30 As in the example above, the graph appears with the background
color matching the color of the lower shaded region.

6.9 Bubble Plots

Bubble plots are XY scatter plots that use symbols to represent not only XY locations, but also
a third dimension represented by the size of the symbol. Use bubble plots to plot population
density, epidemiological data, or other similar data sets where a third variable can be clearly
illustrated by the size of the symbols.

6.9.1 Creating a Bubble Plot

To create a bubble plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click Bubble in the 2DGraphs group.

297
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. When you have selected all the columns to plot, including the Bubble Size column, click
Finish.

4. In the Graph Wizard, select the appropriate format from the Data Format list, and
click Next.
5. When you have selected all the columns to plot, including the Bubble Size column, click
Finish.

6.10 Vector Plots

A vector plot is a line plot where the line represents the magnitude, and an arrow head
represents the direction.

6.10.1 Creating a Vector Plot

To create a vector plot:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot before creating your graph by dragging the pointer
over your data.

298
 6.10.1 Creating a Vector Plot

2. On the Create Graphs tab, in the 2DGraphs group, click Vector.

3. When you have selected all the columns to plot, click Finish.

4. In the Create Graph - Data Format panel of the Graph Wizard, select one of the two
available formats:

• XYXY. Select XYXY when you want both Start and End points of the graph appear
as XY coordinates.
• XYAM. Select XYAM if you want the end points to be represented in terms of angle
and magnitude. The XY point is the midpoint of the vector.

Figure 6.31 Selecting a Vector Plot Data Format

If you select XYAM, when you click Next, the Create Graph - Angle Units panel
appears. Graph Wizard: Create Graph - Vector Angle UnitsFor more information, see
page .

299
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 6.32 Selecting Vector Plot Angle Units for the XYAM Data Format

Note: You may need to scale the magnitude data if you are using the XYAM format and
your vector magnitudes are either much larger or smaller than the X,Y coordinates. The
vectors should be large enough to be clearly visible, but also small enough to be spaced
within the X,Y coordinates so that they do not overlap.
If, for example, the magnitudes are too large, use a Quick Transform to divide the
magnitude column by a constant that is roughly the ratio of the largest magnitude to the
smallest X and Y coordinate increment. Then you can easily adjust this constant to obtain
a pleasing graph. For more information, see page .
5. When you have selected all the columns to plot, click Finish.

6. Click Next. The Create Graph - Select Data dialog box appears.

Figure 6.33 Selecting Data for a Vector Plot

7. When you have selected all the columns to plot, click Finish.

300
 6.10.2 Modifying Vector Plot Arrowheads

8. When you have selected all the columns to plot, click Finish.

6.10.2 Modifying Vector Plot Arrowheads

You can edit the degrees and length of vector plot arrowheads using the Property Browser.
To edit the vector plot:

1. Select a vector arrowhead on the graph, or in the Property Browser, navigate to Vector
Plot and then Lines..

2. Use the Lines options to set the arrowheads’ angles in degrees and their lengths.

3. Use the Lines options to set the arrowheads’ angles in degrees and their lengths.

6.11 About Axes and Plots

You can only create new pairs of X or Y axes if you have more than one plot on a graph
and you want to scale these plots differently. About Axes, Tick Marks, and GridsFor more
information, see page .

6.11.1 Creating Additional Axes for Multiple Plots

If you have more than one plot on a graph and want to use multiple axes, use the following
steps to add additional axes. About Axes, Tick Marks, and GridsFor more information, see
page .
To create an additional axis:

301
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1. Right-click the plot, and on the shortcut menu, click Add New Axis. The Graph Wizard
appears.
2. Select to create either a new X axis or Y axis for the specified plot.
3. Click Next.
4. Select which side of the graph to add the new axis. You can add the new axis to the left,
right, top, or bottom of the graph. Selecting an Offset location moves the new axis slightly
to the side, top, or bottom of the original axis.
5. Click Finish to add the new axis according to the specified settings. The New axis appears
on the graph, and the plot re-scales to reflect the new axis

Figure 6.34 Example of a Second Y Axis Added to the Graph for a Line Plot

6.11.2 Creating Multiple Axes for a Single Plot

If you want to use two or more X or Y axes for a single plot (for example, to show two
different units of measurement), first create a plot which graphs empty columns, then add
an axis to the empty plot.
To add an axis to the second plot:

1. Right-click the graph, and on the shortcut menu, click Add New Plot.

302
 6.11.2 Creating Multiple Axes for a Single Plot

The plot type does not matter, so long as it is a 2D Cartesian plot.

2. Pick any data format.
3. Pick empty columns when prompted to select the data to plot.
4. Create an axis for this "dummy" plot at the desired location
5. Select the new axis, then use manual scaling to set the appropriate range and tick interval
for the new axis. This scale is often a linear transformation of the opposite axis scale, for
example, a Celsius scale to a Fahrenheit scale.

Figure 6.35 The second temperature axis for the single plot was created by first
creating a “dummy” plot, creating a Y axis for the dummy plot, then manually
scaling the axis range.

About Axes, Tick Marks, and GridsFor more information, see page .

303
7 Working with 3D and Contour
Graphs
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About 3D and Contour Graphs
♦ Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts
♦ Creating Trajectory Plots
♦ Creating Waterfall Plots
♦ Creating Mesh Plots
♦ 3D Graph Axis Placement
♦ Creating Contour Plots
♦ Modifying Contour Plots

7.1 About 3D and Contour Graphs

Create 3D (XYZ) plots from many worksheet columns or column triplets. XYZ plots must
have at least one plot, but can display many more plots, each with a different type and style.
Graphs can be rotated and shaded added to enhance the height and depth of mesh and bar
charts.

7.1.1 3D Scatter and Line Plots

3D scatter and line plots graph data as symbols, as lines only with no symbols, or as symbols
and lines. Use the Property Browser to add symbols to a 3D line plot, or the Lines settings to
add lines to a scatter plot.
You can add drop lines to any back plane of either of these plot types.

305
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 7.1 Examples of a 3D Scatter Plot and a 3D Line Plot

7.1.2 Mesh Plots

Mesh plots graph 3D data as a continuous surface with a mesh. Use the Property Browser
to modify mesh lines, color, transparency, and to enable the light source for shading. For
more information, see page .

306
 7.1.3 3D Bar Charts

Figure 7.2 Mesh Plot with No Fill Color and with a Gradient of Colors

7.1.3 3D Bar Charts

Create bar charts in 3D space using 3D data. Modify 3D bar charts by changing fill color
and pattern. For more information, see page 88. You can also adjust bar width and spacing.
For more information, see page 95.

307
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 7.3 3D Bar Charts

7.1.4 Waterfall Plots

Waterfall plots graph 3D data as stacked line plots along the Y axis. Use the Property
Browser to modify plot lines, color, and transparency.

Figure 7.4 Waterfall Plots

308
 7.2 Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar Charts

7.2 Creating 3D Scatter Plots and 3D Bar

Charts
3D scatter plots can use any data format; however, 3D bar charts are limited to XY Many
Z or Many Z only.

7.2.1 Creating a 3D Scatter Plot or 3D Bar Chart:

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3DGraphs group, click 3D Scatter Plot or 3D Bar
Chart.

3. In the Data Format list in the Graph Wizard, specify how your data is formatted. The
data formats available depend on the graph type you are making.

Figure 7.5 Specifying the Data Format

4. Click Next.

309
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 7.6 Selecting Columns to Plot

Since you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the dialog box.
5. Click Finish.

Use Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick different
data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph. Modifying Graphs For
more information, see page 61.

7.3 Creating Trajectory Plots

Trajectory plots use an XYZ coordinate system to create a 3D line plot.

7.3.1 Creating a Trajectory Plot

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3DGraphs group, click 3D Line Plot .

3. Click 3D Trajectory. If you already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard,
your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list.

310
 7.4 Creating Waterfall Plots

4. Click Finish.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph. Modifying
Graphs For more information, see page 61.

7.4 Creating Waterfall Plots

3D waterfall plots are stacked line plots along the Y axis. Because hidden lines are eliminated,
waterfall plots are useful for showing trends of line plots.
3D waterfall plots are limited to Many Z and XY Many Z data formats.

7.4.1 Creating a Waterfall Plot

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3DGraphs group, click 3D Line Plot.

311
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click 3D Waterfall.
4. From the Data Format list, choose the appropriate data format.

5. Click Next. Since you’ve already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard,
your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list.

6. Click Finish.

Use the Property Browser to modify plot lines, color, and transparency. For more
information, see page .

312
 7.5 Creating Mesh Plots

7.5 Creating Mesh Plots

When you create a mesh plot you can choose between solid and transparent mesh with discrete
or gradient shading. Use a transparent mesh to highlight the relationship of one mesh plot to
another on the same graph.
3D mesh plots use an XYZ coordinate system; the data points are graphed as intersections
of a mesh grid. If you select Many Z as the data format, SigmaPlot uses column numbers as
the X values, and row numbers as the Y values. If you are using XYZ triplet data, you need
to reformat the data.

7.5.1 Creating a 3D Mesh Plot

1. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3DGraphs group, click 3D Mesh Plot.

2. Choose the appropriate data format from the Data Format list in the Graph Wizard.

3. Click Next. If you’ve already selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your
choices automatically appear in the dialog box.

313
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Click Finish.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns for your plot, or to add another plot to your graph.

7.5.2 Modifying Mesh Lines and Fill Color

To modify mesh lines and fill color:

1. Select the mesh plot. Mesh appears highlighted in the Page Objects window in the
Property Browser. You can edit all of these properties in the corresponding Mesh
Properties which appear in the Object Properties window below.
2. To change the color of the mesh, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Select
(none) to create a transparent mesh, select (Custom) to create a custom color, and select
one of the color schemes or color columns to increment the mesh from bottom to top
using a color array. Using Custom Symbol, Fill, Line, and Color Increments For more
information, see page 92.
3. To make your mesh translucent, select Transparent so that it appears as True. Objects
behind it will be visible. Use this option to more clearly show the intersections between
two or more 3D meshes.

Tip: Set your display to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (24 bit) for this feature
to work properly. Check your system’s color capabilities under the Windows Display
Properties Settings.
4. To change line thickness, select the value in the Edge Thickness field. Then you can
either move the Thickness slider, or type a new value in the Thickness box.

314
 7.5.3 Changing Graph Perspective, Rotation, and Shading

5. To specify how the colors flow across the grid, from the Transitions drop-down list,
select either Discrete to use an increment with a clear shift between colors, or select
Gradient to use an increment with a gradual shift between colors.
6. To change line thickness, select the value in the Edge Thickness field. Then you can
either move the Thickness slider, or type a new value in the Thickness box.

7.5.3 Changing Graph Perspective, Rotation, and

Shading

Modify the view of the 3D graph by changing perspective and rotation of the graph, and
by enabling a light source to add shading.
Changing the View of a 3D Graph
To change the perspective of a 3D graph, rotate a graph, and enable the light source:

1. To rotate the graph, select it so that black handles appear surrounding it, and then
move the Horizontal and Vertical View sliders in the Object Propertieswindow of the
Property Browser, or type horizontal or vertical values into the boxes.

Note: and vertical values are in degrees. Rotate the graph horizontally from 0° to 360°,
or vertically from −90° to +90°. The recommended Horizontal View is 205°, and the
Vertical View is 25°. The rotation is displayed in the axes degrees from 0°. The origin
used to determine the degree from the horizontal or vertical is the intersection of the
three axes.
When both rotation angles are set to 0°, the origin as you see the graph, is the left bottom
rear corner.
Note: The origin axes are not related to the axes marked with ticks and tick labels, but act
as the zero point for tick labels and data.

315
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 7.7 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 0°, a vertical rotation of

0°, and a perspective of 20.

2. To change the perspective of the graph, move the Perspective slider, or type a new
value into Perspective box.

Figure 7.8 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 0°, a vertical rotation of

45°, and a perspective of 20.

316
 7.5.3 Changing Graph Perspective, Rotation, and Shading

Figure 7.9 A 3D graph with a horizontal rotation of 45°, a vertical rotation of

45°, and a perspective of 20

Figure 7.10 A 3D graph with a perspective of 0.

Note: The Perspective value is based on the “depth” of the graph. A perspective of 0%
means that the graph has no depth; 100% means that the graph has maximum depth. The
recommended perspective is 20%.

317
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 7.11 A 3D graph with a perspective of 50.

Figure 7.12 A 3D graph with a perspective of 100.

3. To enable the light source and create shading on your graph, select 3D Light ON to
True. If the check box is False, the light source is not applied to the graph.

318
 7.6 3D Graph Axis Placement

Note: Set your display to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (24 bit) for this feature
to work properly. You may check your system’s color capabilities under the Windows
Display Properties Settings.

Figure 7.13 The graph on the right has the light source option selected.

3D line and scatter plots are not affected by the light source option.

7.6 3D Graph Axis Placement

3D axes are always at the following positions (unless you rotate the graph horizontally):
• X: bottom right front
• Y: bottom left front
• Z: left front

7.6.1 Axis Placement During Graph Rotation

When you rotate the view of a 3D graph, SigmaPlot automatically repositions the visible axes
to the front of the graph so that the axes do not become positioned behind the graph.

7.6.2 Drawing, Modifying, and Hiding Frame Lines

Drawing a 3D graph frame completes the cube surrounding the plotted data. Normally, these
lines are hidden. You can use a frame to mark the origin axes, or to mark the 3D extent of
the graph.
Frame lines are unrelated to the lines used to draw axes and planes, and are controlled
independently of those lines. Frame lines are drawn over the axes.
To add frame lines, modify frame lines, or hide frame lines from view:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser , navigate to Frame lines.

319
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. To the modify frame line thickness, move the Thickness slider, or type a new thickness
value into the thickness field.

3. In the Objects Properties window of the Property Browser, from the Frame Lines
drop-down list, select either:

• Relative to Viewer: If the frame is oriented from your perspective, one set of lines is
composed of the three cube edges closest to you, and the other lines are the remaining
sides of the cube. The position of these lines is independent of the graph’s rotation.
This is the default position.
• Relative to Graph Origin: If the frame is drawn according to the origin, one set of the
lines is drawn over the origin axes, and the other lines draw the remainder of the cube.
The position of these lines is dependent on the graph’s rotation

Figure 7.14 These graphs use the Viewer as the point of reference. The graph on
the left draws only the front lines, and the right graph draws only the back lines.

Figure 7.15 These graphs use the Origin as the point of reference. The graph
on the left draws only the origin lines, and the right graph draws only the
non-origin lines

320
 7.7 Creating Contour Plots

4. To the modify frame line thickness, move the Thickness slider, or type a new thickness
value into the thickness field.

5. Hide frame lines, or add frame lines to your graph by selecting or clearing the appropriate
Show check box. Selected frame lines are drawn.

A graph cannot display frame lines for both the Relative To Viewer and Relative
To Graph Origin perspectives. If Relative To Graph Origin is selected from the
Frame Lines drop-down list, the Show check boxes for Relative To Viewer are cleared
automatically, and vice versa.
6. To the modify frame line thickness, move the Thickness slider, or type a new thickness
value into the thickness field.

7. To change the frame line type, under Front lines, from the Line Type drop-down list,
select a line type.
8. To the modify frame line thickness, move the Thickness slider, or type a new thickness
value into the thickness field.

7.7 Creating Contour Plots

Contour graphs and filled contour graphs plot 3D data on an XYZ coordinate system with the
Z data (vertical) indicated with lines at specified Z intervals. If you select Many Z as the data
format, SigmaPlot uses column numbers as the X values, and row numbers as the Y values. If
you are using XYZ triplet data, it needs to be reformatted as mesh data.

Figure 7.16 Contour Plots

7.7.1 Creating a Contour Plot

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3D Graphs group, clickContour Plot .

321
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click Finish.

4. Click Contour.
5. In the Graph Wizard, from the Data Format list, select the appropriate data format,
and click Next. The Graph Wizard prompts you to specify which worksheet columns
correspond to the data for your plot. Since you selected columns prior to opening the
Graph Wizard, your choices automatically appear in the Selected Columns list.

Note: If you made a mistake picking data, click the wrong entry in the Selected Columns
list, then select the correct column from the worksheet. You can also clear a column
assignment by double-clicking it in the Selected Columns list.
6. Click Finish.

7. Click Finish.

7.7.2 Creating a Filled Contour Plot

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 3DGraphs group, click Contour Plot.

322
 7.8 Modifying Contour Plots

3. Click Finish.

4. Click Filled Contour.

5. Click Finish.

7.8 Modifying Contour Plots

Use the Property Browser to modify a contour plot. You can:
• Pick new data for the plot. Picking Different Data for the Current PlotFor more information,
see page 63.
• Change contour line attributes, and hide or display lines.
• Modify back plane color and grid lines.
• Change the vertical (Z data) range and scale.
• Change X and Y axis and tick attributes.
• Add colors to contour fills.
• Turn on or off interpolated fills.
• Change and display contour labels.

7.8.1 Displaying and Changing Contour Lines

To modify contour lines:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Contours.

323
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To set the thickness of the contour lines, select the value in the Thickness box and
type a new value, or you can move the Thickness slider.

4. Select Major contours lines or Minor contours lines.

The Contours lines Properties appear below in the Object Properties window of the
Property Browser.
5. To set the thickness of the contour lines, select the value in the Thickness box and
type a new value, or you can move the Thickness slider.

6. To specify the line type of major and minor contour lines, select a line type from the
Line Type drop-down list. Select one of the incrementing schemes to increment contour
line types, or select (none) to create transparent lines.
7. To set the thickness of the contour lines, select the value in the Thickness box and
type a new value, or you can move the Thickness slider.

7.8.2 Adding Fills to Contour Plots

To fill intervals between contour lines with colors:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Contours.

324
 7.8.3 Modifying Interpolated Filled Contours

3. In the Color drop-down list, select from several predefined color schemes.

4. Select Major contours fills or Minor contours fills. The Contours fills Properties
appear below in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

5. In the Color drop-down list, select from several predefined color schemes.

6. In the Color drop-down list, select from several predefined color schemes.

7.8.3 Modifying Interpolated Filled Contours

When you create a filled contour plot from the toolbar, its fill colors are automatically
interpolated and stretched to fit the number of z-intervals.
To turn off interpolated fills:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Contours.

325
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the Color drop-down list, select (none).

4. Select Major contours fills or Minor contours fills. The Contours fills Properties
appear below in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser.
5. In the Color drop-down list, select (none).

7.8.4 Changing Contour Vertical (Z Data) Range and

Scale

Use the Property Browser to select the scale type and set the vertical range used by the
contour lines.
To set the scale and range used by contour lines:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale. The Scale
Properties appear below in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser.

326
 7.8.5 Changing Contour Line Intervals

3. To extend the range to the nearest major tick mark, select Nearest Tick so that it is
True.

4. In the Type list, select Linear or Log (Common) scale. The linear scale uses a standard
base 10 numeric scale, and the log scale uses a base 10 logarithmic scale.
5. To extend the range to the nearest major tick mark, select Nearest Tick so that it is
True.

7.8.5 Changing Contour Line Intervals

Use the Property Browser Line Interval settings to select line intervals for Major and Minor
contours.
To set line intervals for major contour lines:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale.

327
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Select Major Contour Lines. The Major contour lines Properties appear below in the
Object Properties window of the Property Browser.
4. Select one of the following intervals from the Major Line intervals drop-down list:

• Automatic: SigmaPlot automatically determines the interval at which contour lines

are drawn.
• Manually: Manually set the number of contour lines are drawn. Enter the z interval in
the Every box, and the value at which the first interval is drawn in the From boc.
• Columns: Select the column used to determine major contour line z values.

Note: When major contour lines are plotted from a column, no minor lines are drawn.

7.8.6 Displaying and Modifying Contour Labels

Use the Property Browser Label settings to switch contour line labels on and off, add prefixes
or suffixes to labels, and rotate labels relative to the contour line.
To add, hide or modify contour line labels:

1. Select the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Labels.

328
 7.8.6 Displaying and Modifying Contour Labels

3. To separate a suffix or prefix from the tick label, type a space before a suffix or after
a prefix.
4. To display or hide contour labels, in the Object Properties window, select Show
Major Contour Labels and Show Minor Contour Labels so that they are True or
False. True displays labels, and False hides labels.

5. To align contour labels parallel to the contour line, under Label Appearance, select
Align With Contour Line.
6. Clear the option to align the contour labels parallel to the X axis.
7. Clear the option to align the contour labels parallel to the X axis.
8. To separate a suffix or prefix from the tick label, type a space before a suffix or after
a prefix.

9. To align contour labels parallel to the contour line, under Label Appearance, select
Align With Contour Line.
Clear the option to align the contour labels parallel to the X axis.

329
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

10. To control how many labels appear for the contour lines, select the Contour Label
Frequency box and either enter a value or move the slider.

Move the slider toward Fewer to reduce the number of contour labels, or move the slider
toward More to increase the number of contour labels.
11. To separate a suffix or prefix from the tick label, type a space before a suffix or after
a prefix.

12. To add to the contour labels, under Add to Major Labels and Add to Minor Labels,
in the Prefix and Suffix boxes, type the prefix or suffix.
13. To separate a suffix or prefix from the tick label, type a space before a suffix or after
a prefix.

7.8.7 Changing Contour Label Settings

Using the Property Browser Details settings you can:
• Use a numeric type of contour label. For more information, see page .
• Use a series type of contour label. For more information, see page .
• Use values or text from a worksheet column for contour labels. For more information,
see page .
• Change the font size, style or color of contour text labels. For more information, see page .

[Link] Setting a Numeric Type of Contour Label

1. Select a tick label on the contour plot.
2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

330
 [Link] Setting a Numeric Type of Contour Label

3. Use the Precision options to specify the number of places used to display numeric tick
labels. Select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or select
Manual, then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop-down list.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, from the Type drop-down
list, select Numeric.

5. Use the Precision options to specify the number of places used to display numeric tick
labels. Select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or select
Manual, then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop-down list.

6. From the Notation type drop-down list, specify which type of numeric display to use.

The Scientific Notation and Engineering Notation options always use scientific notation
or engineering notation to display numbers.
• For large numbers options, use scientific or engineering notation only when numbers
exceed a specified range. Use the Above and Below lists to specify the range beyond
which scientific notation or engineering notation is used.
• For linear scale, you can always use scientific notation, or only when needed. If you
use scientific notation only when needed, set the range to by typing values in the Lower
and Upper ranges in the edit boxes. These values are expressed in log units.
7. Use the Precision options to specify the number of places used to display numeric tick
labels. Select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or select
Manual, then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop-down list.

8. Use the Precision options to specify the number of places used to display numeric tick
labels. Select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or select
Manual, then select the number of decimal places to use from the Places drop-down list.

331
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Setting a Series Type of Contour Label

1. Select a tick label on the contour plot.
2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and make the changes.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, from the Type drop-down
list, select Series.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box and make the changes.

6. From the Series list, select one of the following series:

332
 [Link] Using Values or Text from a Worksheet Column for Contour Labels

• Months
• Days of the week
• Years
• Alpha Series
• Numeric
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and make the changes.

8. From the Length drop-down list, select the number of characters to use for the labels.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box and make the changes.

[Link] Using Values or Text from a Worksheet Column for Contour Labels

1. Enter the values or text in a worksheet column.

2. Select a tick label on the contour plot.
3. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, from the Type drop-down
list, select the worksheet column that contains the tick label values.

333
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Changing the Font Size, Style or Color of Contour Text Labels

Changing the text attributes for both major and minor contour labels involves changing the
font, style, size and color of the text.

1. Select a tick label on the contour plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick text
or Minor tick text.

All of the text properties for the contour tick labels appear in the Object Properties
window of the Property Browser

334
[Link] Changing the Font Size, Style or Color of Contour Text Labels

335
8 Working with Pie, Polar, and
Ternary Plots
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ Working with Pie, Polar, and Ternary Plots
♦ Pie Charts
♦ Polar Plots
♦ Ternary Graphs

8.1 Working with Pie, Polar, and Ternary

Plots
This chapter describes basic procedures specific to pie charts, polar plots, and ternary plots.

8.2 Pie Charts

Pie charts plot a single worksheet column by representing each data point in the column as
a pie slice. Each data point in the column is graphed as a slice size equivalent to the data
point’s percent of the sum of all the data.

Figure 8.1 Examples of Pie Charts

The first pie slice starts at 0 degrees (3 o’clock) by default. Additional slices are added
counterclockwise, in the order the data points occur in the column.

8.2.1 Creating Pie Chart

1. Select worksheet data before creating the graph.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 2DGraphs group, click Pie.

337
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the Graph Wizard, specify which worksheet column corresponds to data for your
plot. Since you selected a column prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choice
automatically appears in the dialog box and you can click Finish to create the pie chart.

4. If you selected the incorrect columns to plot, select a column either by clicking the
corresponding column directly in the worksheet, or selecting the appropriate column
from the Data for Pie list.

Note: If you make a mistake while picking data, click the wrong entry in the Graph
Wizard, then select the correct column from the worksheet.
5. Click OK.

Use the Property Browser to modify the pie chart, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick a
different data column for your plot.
Note: You cannot add plots or axes to pie charts.

8.2.2 Modifying Pie Charts

Modifying pie charts includes:
• Changing fill color and patterns of pie chart slices. For more information, see page 88.
• Rotating the pie chart. For more information, see page .
• Adding exploded pie slices to the pie chart. For more information, see page .
• Picking new data for the graph. For more information, see page 63.

338
 8.2.3 Rotating the Pie

To modify a pie chart, select the graph and modify it using the Property Browser. For more
information, see page 61.

8.2.3 Rotating the Pie

Use the Property Browser rotate pie charts or add single or multiple exploding slicesFor
more information, see page ..
To rotate the pie:

1. Select the pie chart.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Pie slices.

The Pie slices Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

339
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the First slice starts at box, either enter a value or move the slider to change the
starting angle. Increasing the starting angle for the first slice moves the starting slice
counterclockwise. The default is 0° (3 o’clock).

4. In the First slice starts at box, either enter a value or move the slider to change the
starting angle. Increasing the starting angle for the first slice moves the starting slice
counterclockwise. The default is 0° (3 o’clock).

8.2.4 Adding Exploding Slices

1. Use the Property Browser to add single or multiple exploding slices.

To explode one slice:

2. In the Object Properties window, select the column containing exploding slice data
from the Exploded slice drop-down list.

3. Select the pie chart.

4. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Pie slices.

5. In the Object Properties window, select the column containing exploding slice data
from the Exploded slice drop-down list.

6. In the Object Properties window of Pie slices Properties, select Single Slice from the
Exploded slice drop-down list.

340
 8.3 Polar Plots

7. In the Object Properties window, select the column containing exploding slice data
from the Exploded slice drop-down list.

8. Select the number of the slice to explode from the Exploded slicedrop-down list.

By default, the first slice begins at 0° and proceeds counterclockwise. If you have not
rotated the pie chart, the slice number corresponds to the worksheet row number.
Note: Choosing No exploded slices from the Explode drop-down lists replaces any
exploded pie slices.
To explode multiple slices:
9. In the Object Properties window, select the column containing exploding slice data
from the Exploded slice drop-down list.

10. Select an empty column.

11. In the Object Properties window, select the column containing exploding slice data
from the Exploded slice drop-down list.

8.3 Polar Plots

Polar plots display data in the coordinate system format where r is the distance from the origin
of the graph, and theta (θ) is the angle between the positive horizontal axis and the radius
vector extending from the origin to the plotted data point.
Use polar plots to show data where one value (θ) is periodic in nature, like a clock. An
example of this is a graph that shows average temperatures of differing geographical regions
during the days of a month, or months of a year.

341
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 8.2 Polar Plots

8.3.1 Creating a Polar Plot

1. Select the worksheet columns to plot by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 2DGraphs group, click Polar Plot.

3. Click the style of polar plot you want to create.

4. In the Graph Wizard, choose a unit type from the Angular units drop-down list. The
Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound boxes change depending on your
selection from the list.

Tip: If you don’t see the axis units you want to use for your polar plot listed in the list, you
can type the desired values in the Range Lower Bound and Range Upper Bound fields.
5. If you want to create a polar plot with its angles increased in a clockwise direction,
select Clockwise. This creates a plot where the Range Lower Bound starts at the top
of the graph. On a counter clockwise polar plot, the Range Lower Bound starts at the
3 o’clock position.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the appropriate data format from the Data format list.
8. Click Next.
9. Click Finish.

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot, or reopen the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns for your plot. Modifying Graphs For more information, see
page 61.

342
 8.3.2 Modifying a Polar Plot

8.3.2 Modifying a Polar Plot

Modifying polar plots involves:
• Modifying angular and radial axes. For more information, see page .
• Picking new data for the plot. For more information, see page 63.
• Changing symbol type, size, and color. For more information, see page 76.
• Changing line type, size, and color. For more information, see page 84.
• Modifying back plane color and grid lines. For more information, see page .
To modify a polar plot, select the graph and modify it using the Property Browser. For more
information, see page 61.

8.4 Ternary Graphs

Ternary graphs plot data on an XYZ coordinate system in the form of three variables that
add up to 100% or 1. These variables are typically the normalized proportions of three
substances and are plotted on three axes generally arranged as an equilateral triangle, known
as a composition triangle. These graphs are also commonly referred to as triangle plots.

Figure 8.3 Examples of a Ternary Line Plot, Scatter Plot and Scatter and Line
Plot

8.4.1 Ternary Plot Styles

You can create ternary scatter, line, and scatter and line plots. These graph data as symbols,
as lines only with no symbols, or as symbols and lines, respectively. Line shapes can be
straight segments or spline.

8.4.2 Creating a Ternary Plot

Ternary plot data set (triplet or pair) must be based on a percentage or unitary scale with the
sum of all values being 100% or 1. If your data does not add up to 100% or 1, you must first
normalize the data. Normalizing Ternary DataFor more information, see page .

1. Drag the pointer over your data to select the worksheet columns to plot.
2. On the Create Graph tab, in the 2DGraphs group, click Ternary Plot.

343
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click the style of ternary plot you want to create.

4. In the Graph Wizard, select the appropriate format.

5. Click Next. Since you selected columns prior to opening the Graph Wizard, your choices
automatically appear in the dialog box.

Figure 8.4 Selecting Columns to Plot Using the Graph Wizard

Tip: If you made a mistake picking columns, highlight the wrong entry in the Graph
Wizard, then choose the correct column either in the worksheet or from the column list.
6. Click Finish.

344
 8.4.3 Modifying Ternary Graphs

Use the Property Browser to modify the plot or to open the Graph Wizard to pick
different data columns to plot or to add another plot to your graph. Modifying Ternary
AxesFor more information, see page 396.

8.4.3 Modifying Ternary Graphs

Modifying ternary graphs involves:
• Changing axis properties. For more information, see page 396.
• Picking new data for the plot. For more information, see page 63.
• Changing line and symbol type, size, and color. For more information, see page 76.
• Modifying backplane color and grid lines. For more information, see page .
To modify a ternary graph, select the graph and modify it using the Property Browser. For
more information, see page 61.

345
9 Modifying Axes, Tick Marks,
and Grids
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Axes, Tick Marks, and Grids
♦ Axis Scale Types
♦ Changing Axis Scales and Range
♦ Changing Scale Type
♦ Hiding, Displaying, and Deleting Axes
♦ Setting Axis Breaks
♦ Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels
♦ Changing Tick Mark Intervals
♦ Changing Tick Mark Appearance
♦ Changing Tick Labels
♦ Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes
♦ Modifying Polar Axes
♦ Modifying Ternary Axes

9.1 About Axes, Tick Marks, and Grids

Axes are the scales or rulers along which data is plotted. 2D Cartesian graphs have an X
(horizontal) axis, and a Y (vertical) axis. For 3D graphs, the X and Y axes form the base of
the graph, and the Z axis is the vertical axis. Polar plots use an angular axis to draw the
circumference of the plot and the radial axes to draw the radius of the plot. An axis is always
associated with at least one plot on a graph, and determines the scaling of the plot.
Each axis consists of pairs of lines that you can move and modify independently. Tick marks
are short lines along the axis that represent scale intervals. You can display and modify tick
marks for each axis. Grid lines are attached to the graph planes, and can be drawn at tick
intervals for all axes. Make most axis modifications using the Axes tab of the Property
Browser.

9.2 Axis Scale Types

Scale types appear under Axes in the Property Browser.

1. Select an axis on a graph.

2. In the Property Browser navigate to Scale.

The Scale Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

The available scale types appear in the Type list. They include:

347
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Linear. For more information, see page .

• Common Log. For more information, see page .
• Natural Log. For more information, see page .
• Probability. For more information, see page .
• Probit. For more information, see page .
• Logit. For more information, see page .
• Category. For more information, see page .
• Date/time. For more information, see page .
• Reciprocal. For more information, see page .
• Weibull. For more information, see page .

9.2.1 Linear
A linear scale is a standard base 10 numeric scale. (This scale is recommended for a date
axis when an exact representation of spacing depicted by dates is not required. Otherwise,
use the date/time scale.)

9.2.2 Common Log

A common log scale is a base 10 logarithmic scale.

9.2.3 Natural Log

A base e logarithmic scale.

Figure 9.1 Graphs of the Same Data Using Linear, Common Log, and Natural
Log Scales

9.2.4 Probability
A probability scale is the inverse of the Gaussian cumulative distribution function. The graph
of the sigmoidally shaped Gaussian cumulative distribution function on a probability scale
is a straight line. Probabilities are expressed as percentages with the minimum range value
set at 0.001 and the maximum range value set at 99.999. The default range depends on the
range of the actual data.

348
 9.2.5 Probit

9.2.5 Probit
A probit scale is similar to the probability scale; the Gaussian cumulative distribution function
plots as a straight line on a probit scale. The scale is linear, however, with major tick marks
at each Normal Equivalent Deviation (N.E.D. = X - μ)/σ) plus 5.0. At the mean (X = μ) the
probit = 5.0; at the mean plus one standard deviation (X = μ + σ) the probit = 6.0, etc. The
default range is from 3 to 7. The range limit for a probit axis scale is 1 to 9.

Figure 9.2 Graphs of the Same Data Using Linear, Probability, and Probit Scales

9.2.6 Logit
A logit scale uses the transformation

y
logit= ln
a y

where a = 100 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 100.

9.2.7 Category
A category scale uses numerical values or text from a worksheet column used to generate a
plot. Each distinct entry in the column is a separate category against which the corresponding
data values are plotted. This scale is commonly used for bar charts or other plots used to
graph different categories of data.

349
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 9.3 A Graph Showing the Category Scale

Any plot generated by plotting a column containing any text versus a column containing
data will use a category axis automatically.
You can select a category scale for numeric data, and each unique value will be treated as its
own category.
Note: If a column contains more than one instance of the same category, the category appears
only once, and all corresponding data is plotted within that category.

9.2.8 Date/Time
Date and time formatted data are automatically plotted using a Date/Time axis scale. This
scale is specifically designed to handle true calendar date and time units, labeling and spacing.
You can:
• Plot date and time data. For more information, see page 203.
• Change date and time labels. For more information, see page .
• Change data and time intervals. For more information, see page .
Although you can plot numeric data as date and time, you should first view these numbers as
dates and times in the worksheet to make sure they are sensible values.
If a worksheet cell is a label, it won’t plot as a date and time value. In this case, you may want
to reenter the label as a date and time value.

9.2.9 Reciprocal
A reciprocal axis scale uses the multiplicative inverse of a number, where x is the number
which, when multiplied by x, yields 1. Its equation is 1/x or x-1

350
 9.2.10 Weibull

Figure 9.4 An Arrhenius Plot with a Reciprocal Axis Scale

Researchers often use a reciprocal scale when creating graphs for reliability studies. For
example, there is a theory that aging accelerates as temperature rises. The plot in this case
would use a reciprocal temperature (1/T (1/mK)) x-axis and a log (ln k) y-axis. The slope
of the line fitted through the plot is the activation rate of the studied chemical reaction, that
is, the reaction causing the failure.

9.2.10 Weibull
The Weibull axis displays the Cumulative Percent Failure (CPF) using the Weibull distribution
using the formula:
y = ln(ln(1/(1-CPF/100)))
This scale is frequently used for life data analysis. The Failure Time, typically a log scale on
the x-axis, is plotted against the Cumulative Percent Failure, typically on the y-axis.

9.3 Changing Axis Scales and Range

You can control the axis units and increments used in representing your data. Axis scale and
range are modified within the Scale Properties in the Property Browser.
You can also use transforms and tick labels and intervals from worksheet columns to create
your own custom axis scales.

351
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

9.3.1 Changing Axis Range

Axis range includes the values of the starting and ending points of an axis. You can choose
to set axis range automatically or manually.
To change the axis range:

1. Select the axis to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale. The Scale
Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

3. Set Nearest Tick to True to extend the range to the nearest major tick mark.

4. To automatically set the axis range, select Data Range from the Start Calculation
and End Calculation lists. SigmaPlot automatically determines the axis range based
on the data plotted.

For log axes, or axes that forbid zero or negative numbers, the minimum is set to the
nearest major tick mark beyond the smallest value.
5. Set Nearest Tick to True to extend the range to the nearest major tick mark.

6. To manually set the axis range, select Constant Start Calculation and End
Calculation lists, and then type beginning and ending axis range values in the Start
value and End value boxes.

352
 9.4 Changing Scale Type

Note: Date/Time axes display the ranges in date and time units.
7. Set Nearest Tick to True to extend the range to the nearest major tick mark.

8. Set Pad 5% to True to add padding to both ends of the axis.

9. Set Nearest Tick to True to extend the range to the nearest major tick mark.

9.4 Changing Scale Type

To change an axis scale type:

1. Select the axis to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale. The Scale
Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

3. From the Type list, select the desired axis scale type. The default axis scales are Linear
for all numeric data, Category for text data, and Date/Timefor date and time data. Axis
Scale TypesFor more information, see page 347.

353
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

9.4.1 Using a Category Scale

Use the category scale type by plotting a column containing categories against other columns
of data values, or modify an already existing plot to use a category scale by changing the axis
scale type to Category, then using the Graph Wizard to re-pick the data and assign your
category column as the X or Y coordinate values.

Figure 9.5 Plotting Category Data Using a Category Scale

To plot a column of text as a category scale:

1. Enter your category data (text) into a worksheet column, and corresponding data into
adjacent worksheet columns.
2. On the Create Graph tab, click the graph type and style you want to create.
3. In the Graph Wizard , select the data format, and click Next.
4. Since you have not already selected your data from the worksheet, click the worksheet
columns to assign them under Selected Columns. Plot your category column as the
category axis data type, and pick your other column(s) as the corresponding data type.
5. Click Finish to create the graph.

To modify a plot to use a category scale:

6. Click Finish to create the graph with the newly assigned worksheet data and modified axis.

354
 9.4.2 Using a Date and Time Scale

7. Click the axis you want to modify.

8. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale under either
X Data or Y Data.

The Scale Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

9. Click Finish to create the graph with the newly assigned worksheet data and modified axis.

10. Select Category from the Type drop-down list.

11. Click Finish to create the graph with the newly assigned worksheet data and modified axis.

9.4.2 Using a Date and Time Scale

SigmaPlot graphs date and time data from worksheet columns as specific calendar dates and
times against which corresponding data values in other columns are plotted.
To create a plot using a date/time scale:

1. Enter dates or times into a column of a worksheet. For example, enter 1/1, 2/1, 3/1,
etc., indicating months and days.
2. Click Finish in the Graph Wizard to create the graph.

355
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

9.4.3 Using a Custom Axis Scale

Use the transform language to transform your data for a new axis scale, then use tick intervals
from a column to the place correct ticks marks and labels.
For example, to use an Extreme Value Distribution scale, apply the transform:
f(y)=ln(ln(100/(100-y)))
and for the Arrhenius scale, use the transform:
f(y)=1-273/(T+273)
Apply the transform to both your original interval values and data, then plot the transformed
data using the transformed intervals as the tick mark values, and the original interval data
as tick labels.

Figure 9.6 This graph uses the Arrhenius scale. You can skip labeling tick
intervals by using empty cells in the tick label column.

9.5 Hiding, Displaying, and Deleting Axes

The easiest way to hide an axis is to select it, then press Delete. The axis is hidden rather than
deleted. You can also hide an axis by right-clicking the axis, then choosing Hide.
Control the display of axes using the Lines settings in the Property Browser.
To view, hide or modify the display of an axis:

1. In the Property Browser, navigate to Line details, under X Dataor Y Data, depending
on which axis you would like to hide.

356
 9.5.1 Changing Axis Line, Color, and Thickness

The Line details Properties appear below in the Object Properties window of the
Property Browser.
2. In the Show left line, Show right line, or Show bottom line or Show top line boxes,
select True to show the line or Falseto hide it.

Note: You can hide 3D axes, but if frame lines are active, a line will remain present.
Drawing, Modifying, and Hiding Frame LinesFor more information, see page 319.
Also, if the graph has grid lines, a line will remain present. Displaying Grid Lines and
BackplanesFor more information, see page 385.

9.5.1 Changing Axis Line, Color, and Thickness

Use the Property Browser to change axis color and thickness.

To change the color and thickness of an axis:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line.

357
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The Line Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

2. To change the color of the axis, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose
(None) to make the axis transparent, and choose (Custom) to open the Custom Color
dialog box.
3. To change the thickness of the axis, move the Thickness slider or type a thickness in
the Thickness box.

Note: 3D graph frame lines are drawn over axes lines and may obscure 3D axes
modifications.

[Link] Using the Object Properties Dialog Box to Change Line Attributes
You can change axis line attributes by right-clicking the axis.

9.5.2 Moving Axes

To move a 2D axes, select it and then move it with your mouse. You cannot move 3D axes, but
you can hide them from view. Hiding, Displaying, and Deleting AxesFor more information,
see page 356.

358
 [Link] Moving 2D Axes Manually

[Link] Moving 2D Axes Manually

To move a 2D axis with the mouse, select the axis and drag it to a new position. Y axes move
only horizontally and X axes only vertically. Moving ternary graph axes changes the axis
range and scale, along with the size and shape of the graph. Axis titles move with the axis.

Figure 9.7 Moving an Axis by Dragging

[Link] Moving Axes to a Precise Location

Use the Lines settings in the Property Browser to position axes a precise distance from the
graph origin. Modifying Ternary AxesFor more information, see page 396.
To move an axis:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line Details. The
Line details Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

359
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. In the Placement and Mirror Position boxes, move the sliders to change the percentages,
or type a value.

Locations are described as the percentage of the graph dimension the axes lie from the
original position. To move an axis up or right, enter a percent greater than 0% (positive).
To move an axis down or left, enter a percent less than 0% (negative). The defaults
is 0.0%.

9.6 Setting Axis Breaks

You can set axis breaks for 2D Cartesian graphs over specific ranges, at a specific location
along the axis and you can change the major tick intervals that occur after the break. You
can also use several different break symbols.
Note: You can’t create axis breaks on a graph that uses a date and time axis scale.

360
 9.6.1 Creating an Axis Break

Figure 9.8 A Graph Before and After the Addition of a Y Axis Break

9.6.1 Creating an Axis Break

To create an axis break:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Breaks. The Breaks
Properties appear below in the Object Properties window.

361
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. To show an axis break, in the Show axis break box, select True.
3. In the Break start and Break end boxes, enter the axis break start and end values.
4. To specify the break position, move the Position slider or enter a specific value.

The location of the break is determined as a percent of the total axis length, from the origin.
5. To set the width of the space between break lines, move the Gap Width slider or
enter a specific value.
6. To set the width of the break symbol, move the Break symbol width slider or enter a
specific value.
7. To set a post break interval, type a value in the Post Break Interval box.

The default value is the interval specified for the axis range.
Note: Tick values from a column are not applied to the post break interval.

362
 9.7 Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels

To set axis break properties, select Break linein the Page Objectswindow of the
Property Browser.

9.7 Working with Axis Titles and Tick Labels

SigmaPlot automatically labels graph axes with titles and tick labels. Axis titles can be
modified like any other text label.

9.7.1 Editing an Axis Title

To edit an axis title:

1. On the graph page, select axis title. The title appears highlighted.
2. Make your changes to the title.

9.7.2 Rotating Axis Titles

To rotate an axis title:

1. Right-click the axis title, and then click Edit. Edit Text dialog box appears.

2. Select a degree of rotation for the selected label from the Rotation drop-down list.

3. Select a degree of rotation for the selected label from the Rotation drop-down list.

363
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

9.7.3 Viewing and Hiding Axis Titles and Tick Labels

The easiest way to hide a graph axis title or tick label is to click it and press delete. You can
also right-click, and select Delete.

9.7.4 Moving an Axis Title

To move an axis title, drag it with the mouse, just like any other text label. Using Your Mouse
to Move Graphs and ObjectsFor more information, see page 154.
Note: Axis title position, relative to the axis, remains constant when the axis or graph is moved.

9.8 Changing Tick Mark Intervals

Use the Property Browser to modify tick intervals. You can also change tick marks for
ternary graphs.
Note: Tick Intervals options vary depending upon the axis scale used. For example, there are
no tick interval options for category axes.

9.8.1 Changing Linear and Probit Scale Tick Mark

Intervals

To change the tick intervals for linear and probit axis scales:

1. Select the tick marks you want to change.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Ticks.

3. Click OK.

364
 9.8.1 Changing Linear and Probit Scale Tick Mark Intervals

4. To change major tick intervals, select Major Ticks.

5. In the Object Properties window, select a value from Major Tick Intervals drop-down
list.

6. Click OK.

7. If you select Manual, enter interval values by typing into the Major Tick Every and
Major Ticks From boxes.

The value in the Major Tick Every field specifies how often major tick marks appear,
and the Major Ticks From value specifies and origin point on the axes from which major
tick marks start appearing. For example, if you type 0 into the Major Ticks From field
and the 2 into the Major Tick Every field, the major tick marks appear at even numbers
on the axis. If you type 1 into the Major Ticks From field , the major tick marks appear
at odd numbers on the axis.
8. Click OK.

365
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

9. To set custom tick intervals, choose the major tick interval values from the worksheet
column available in the Major Tick Intervals drop-down list. Custom tick intervals
are not available for minor ticks.
10. Click OK.

9.8.2 Tick Intervals for Log Axes

You can only specify log axis major tick marks automatically or from a column. However, you
can select specific intervals for log scale minor ticks.

Figure 9.9 A View of a Graph with Log Y Axis Minor Ticks

To change log scale minor tick intervals:

1. Change the axis scale to a log axis. Changing Axis Scales and RangeFor more
information, see page 351.
2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Minor Ticks.

366
 9.8.3 Natural Log and Logit Scales

3. Click OK.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a tick interval from
the Minor Tick Frequency drop-down list.
5. Click OK.

9.8.3 Natural Log and Logit Scales

Natural log and logit scales have only Automatic and from column Tick Intervals.
Natural log intervals occur at every factor of e. Logit ticks occur at 7, 10, then every ten
until 90, then 95 and 97.

367
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 9.10 Tick Intervals for Natural Log and Logit Scales

9.8.4 Tick Intervals for Probability Scales

Probability scale axes have no minor ticks, but have three different settings for major tick
intervals, coarse, medium, and fine, as well as the option to set tick intervals from a worksheet
column.

Figure 9.11 Coarse, Medium and Fine Tick Intervals for Probability Scales

To specify the tick mark density for probability scales:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks.

368
 9.8.5 Tick Intervals for Date/Time Axes

2. Click OK.

3. Under Tick Intervals, from the Density drop-down list, select a tick mark density.
4. Click OK.

9.8.5 Tick Intervals for Date/Time Axes

SigmaPlot automatically sets both major and minor tick intervals that are computed from the
data range. You can also manually set Major Ticks and Minor Ticks.
To set tick intervals for a date/time axis:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks.

2. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a type of tick interval
from the Tick Intervals drop-down list. Tick intervals are defined by the unit Type used

369
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

and the selected Count. Dates fall at 12:00 AM of the first day for that period. The major
tick interval options available are limited by the data range. You are prevented from
selecting time units that would create too many tick marks.
3. To increase the period between tick occurrences, change the Count. For example, set
ticks to occur every other Type date by changing the Count to 2, or every fifth by changing
the count to 5. Counts must be positive integers.
4. To set a minor tick frequency, select Minor Ticks in the Page Objects window of
the Property Browser.
5. Select a minor tick frequency from the Minor Tick Frequency drop-down list.

Note: Do not select a minor interval that creates hundreds or even many thousands of
minor tick marks.

9.8.6 Customizing Tick Intervals

You can specify major tick locations by entering major tick values into a worksheet column,
then selecting that column from the Property Browser.
Custom tick intervals are not available for minor ticks.
To use worksheet columns to customize tick intervals:

1. Enter the desired tick marks into an empty worksheet column.

2. Select a tick marks.
3. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select the column number or
title of the column you want to use for major tick marks from the Major tick intervals
drop-down list. The numeric values of the intervals are automatically used for tick labels,
that you can modify them like any other tick labels.

370
 9.9 Changing Tick Mark Appearance

5. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select the column number or
title of the column you want to use for major tick marks from the Major tick intervals
drop-down list. The numeric values of the intervals are automatically used for tick labels,
that you can modify them like any other tick labels.

9.9 Changing Tick Mark Appearance

Use the Property Browser to modify tick appearance including tick length and color. You can
also specify tick mark direction, or hide tick marks altogether.
You can change:
• Tick marks for polar plots. For more information, see page .
• Tick marks for ternary graphs. For more information, see page .

9.9.1 Tick Mark Direction

To turn tick drawing on and off and to select tick directions for both sides of an axis:

1. Select a tick mark.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks or
Minor Ticks.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a direction from one
of the following from the Tick Style drop-down lists:

• Select Outward, to point tick marks away from the graph.

• Select Inward to point tick marks toward the inside of the graph.
• Select Both to point tick marks in both directions.
• Select (none) to hide tick marks.

371
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: The options that appear under the Tick Style drop-down lists are dependent upon
what type of graph you are modifying. If you are modifying a 3D plot, then the options are
Front and Rear. If you are modifying a polar plot with a radial axis, then the options are
Outer and Inner. In a polar plot with a radial axis, you change the direction of the spokes.
Directions for tick marks are independent for either side of the axis.

9.9.2 Hiding Tick Marks

To hide tick marks:

1. Click the tick marks on the page.

2. Press Delete, or right-click and from the shortcut menu, click Hide.

9.9.3 Changing Tick Mark Line Attributes

To change tick mark length, color, and thickness:

1. Select the tick mark.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks or
Minor Ticks.

372
 9.9.3 Changing Tick Mark Line Attributes

3. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Thickness button, and then select a thickness
from the palette that appears.

4. To change tick length, in the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, select
a length from the Tick length drop-down list. You can either manually type in a value
or move the slider.

5. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Thickness button, and then select a thickness
from the palette that appears.

6. To change tick color, select a tick on the graph.

373
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

7. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Thickness button, and then select a thickness
from the palette that appears.

8. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Color button, and then select a color from the
palette that appears. Using Custom ColorsFor more information, see page 175. Select
(none) to create transparent tick marks.
9. To change tick tickness, select a tick on the graph.

10. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Thickness button, and then select a thickness
from the palette that appears.

11. In the pop up menu that appears, click the Thickness button, and then select a thickness
from the palette that appears.

9.10 Changing Tick Labels

SigmaPlot can display tick labels for:
• Both major and minor tick marks.
• Standard numeric labels.
• Time and series labels.
You can also add a suffix or prefix to all major or minor tick labels on a selected axis, and
modify the calculation and precision of numeric labels, view different dates and times, select
among many different series labels, and change the font and other text attributes.

9.10.1 Changing Tick Label Font and Other Text

Attributes

374
 9.10.2 Changing Tick Label Type

To change the font size, style, or color of tick labels:

1. Select a tick label.

2. Edit the font size, style, and color properties from the pop up menu which appears.

3. To rotate tick labels, select a tick label, and on the pop up menu that appears, select
form the Rotation drop-down list.

Formatting Text For more information, see page 167.

9.10.2 Changing Tick Label Type

You can change the type of tick label used for all axis types except for category axes.
To change all other tick label types for all other axes:

1. Select a tick label.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

375
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To use a numeric type of tick label, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, from the Type drop-down list, select Numeric.

4. To use a series type of tick label, from the Type drop-down list, select Series.

Note: If you want to plot data versus true calendar dates, you should have entered date
and time data in the worksheet, and use a date/time axis scale.

9.10.3 Formatting Numeric Tick Labels

To format numeric tick labels:

376
 9.10.3 Formatting Numeric Tick Labels

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

2. To specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels, under Precision
field, select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or clear
Automatic (this selects Manual), then select the number of decimal places to use from
the Number of places drop-down list.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select Under Label
appearance, from the use drop-down list, select the type of label notation to use.

• Select Scientific Notation or Engineering Notation for large numbers use scientific or
engineering notation only when numbers exceed a specified range. Use the When
below and or above drop-down lists to specify the range beyond which scientific
notation or engineering notation is used. Once a label exceeds the range, then all the
labels will use the specified notation.

377
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• For log axes, you can select to display the number, only the Exponent, or both the
Base and exponent.
• For linear axes, you can select Scientific notation or Engineering notation to use
always, or you can select Scientific notation, for large numbers or Engineering
notation, for large numbers to use only when needed for large numbers. To specify
when scientific notation is needed, enter the lower and upper ranges in the When
below and or above.

Figure 9.12 Log Scale Y Axes Using Numbers, Exponent Only, and Base and
Exponent

4. To specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels, under Precision
field, select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or clear
Automatic (this selects Manual), then select the number of decimal places to use from
the Number of places drop-down list.

5. To divide numeric tick label values by a specific number, enter a divisor in the Factor
Out drop-down list. A value of 2 divides label values in half, a factor of 0.5 doubles
the tick label values, etc.

6. To specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels, under Precision
field, select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or clear
Automatic (this selects Manual), then select the number of decimal places to use from
the Number of places drop-down list.

378
 9.10.4 Formatting Series Tick Labels

7. To specify the number of places used to display numeric tick labels, under Precision
field, select Automatic to let SigmaPlot automatically determine precision, or clear
Automatic (this selects Manual), then select the number of decimal places to use from
the Number of places drop-down list.

9.10.4 Formatting Series Tick Labels

To format series tick labels:

1. Select the tick labels of the axis you want to change.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks or
Minor Ticks.

3. To re-start tick labeling from a specified point, use the Repeat From drop-down list.
For example, if you were using a Days of the Week series, and were stepping by 2 days at
a time, you might use the After and Repeat From lists to specify that after Friday, repeat
the series from Monday. Tick labels appear as Monday, Wednesday, Friday, Monday,
Wednesday, Friday, etc.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, in select Series from the
Type drop-down list.

379
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. To re-start tick labeling from a specified point, use the Repeat From drop-down list.
For example, if you were using a Days of the Week series, and were stepping by 2 days at
a time, you might use the After and Repeat From lists to specify that after Friday, repeat
the series from Monday. Tick labels appear as Monday, Wednesday, Friday, Monday,
Wednesday, Friday, etc.

6. From the Series drop-down list, select a series.

7. To re-start tick labeling from a specified point, use the Repeat From drop-down list.
For example, if you were using a Days of the Week series, and were stepping by 2 days at
a time, you might use the After and Repeat From lists to specify that after Friday, repeat
the series from Monday. Tick labels appear as Monday, Wednesday, Friday, Monday,
Wednesday, Friday, etc.

9.10.5 Adding a Prefix or Suffix to Tick Labels

To add a suffix or prefix to the major or minor tick labels on a selected axis:

1. Select the axis you want to change.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

380
 9.10.6 Changing Date and Time Tick Labels

3. To add a prefix or suffix to the major or minor tick labels, Object Properties window
of the Property Browser, type the prefix or suffix into the appropriate Tick Label Prefix
or Tick Label Suffix boxes. All labels on the selected axis appear with the specified
suffix or prefix.

Tip: You can use any keyboard or extended characters. Use the Windows Character map
accessory program, or Alt+Numeric keypad combinations to enter extended characters
like degrees symbols (Alt+0176).

9.10.6 Changing Date and Time Tick Labels

To change the format of date/time tick labels, use the Property Browser. Entering values in
these boxes is similar to entering date/time values in the worksheet.
To change date and time tick label format:

1. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

381
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. To change the display Date format, select a format from the list, or use the following
table to enter a new label, using any additional characters as delimiters (i.e., slashes,
commas, spaces, etc.). As you enter a different format, the Sample window shows an
example of the label.

Typing: Displays:

M/d/yy No leading 0 for single digit month, day or year

MM/dd/yy Leading 0 for single digit month, day or year

MMMM Complete month

dddd Complete day of week

yyy or yyyy Complete year

MMM Three-letter month

ddd Three-letter day of week

gg Era (AD or BC)

3. To change the display Time format, select a format from the list, or use the following
table to enter a new label, using any additional characters as delimiters (i.e., colons, spaces,
etc.). As you enter a different format, the Sample window shows an example of the label.

Typing: Displays:

hh or h 12 hour clock

HH or H 24 hour clock

mm or m Minutes

ss or s Seconds

uu or u Milliseconds

382
 9.10.7 Using Custom Tick Labels

Typing: Displays:

H:h:m:s:or u No leading zeroes for single digits

HH:hh:mm:ss:uu Leading zero for single digits

tt Double letter AM or PM

t Single letter AM or PM

9.10.7 Using Custom Tick Labels

You can enter text and numbers into worksheet columns and use them as major tick labels.
To customize tick labels using worksheet columns:

1. Enter the labels you want to use in a worksheet column in the order you want them to
appear. Enter minor labels in the right adjacent column.

Note: To skip specific labels, leave an empty cell for that tick mark when entering the
labels into the worksheet column.
2. Select the axis tick labels you want to modify.
3. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major tick labels or
Minor tick labels.

383
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select the column in which
you entered the tick labels from the Type drop-down list. Labels for minor ticks are
automatically taken from the column to the right of the major tick labels.

5. To change the font used for the tick labels, select the tick label. On the pop up that
appears, select a font from the Font drop-down list.

384
 9.11 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes

9.11 Displaying Grid Lines and Backplanes

Display and modify grids for each graph plane using the Property Browser. Grid lines are
associated with both a backplane and one of the two axes which form the plane. If a graph has
multiple axes, the axes used are the original pair.
You can choose to turn on and modify grid lines for both major and minor tick intervals.

9.11.1 Modifying Backplanes

To change backplanes:

1. Double-click the graph to modify. The Graph Properties dialog box appears.
2. Click the Graph tab.
3. Under Settings for, select Backplanes.
4. If your graph is a 3D graph, from the Plane list, select the plane to modify.

Note: When modifying a 2D graph, only one plane is available.

5. Click OK.

6. To select a background color for the selected plane, under Background, select a color
from the Color drop-down list.
7. Click OK.

9.11.2 Modifying Grid Lines

385
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To change major or minor grid lines:

1. Select the graph to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Grid Lines.

3. To change grid line thickness, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, move the Thickness slider or type a thickness value in the Thickness box.
4. To change grid line style, select a type from the Line Type drop-down list.
5. To change grid line color, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose any of
the listed colors, or choose (Custom) to use or create a custom color. Choose (none) to
turn off grid lines.
6. To change or add a gap color, select a color from the Gap Color drop-down list.
This option is only available if you select a line type with actual "gaps" in it, like dotted
or dashed, for example.

7. To move the grid behind or in front of the plot, from the Layering drop-down list,
select to move either the plot or grid to the front. This feature is especially useful for bar
charts, and is not available for 3D plots.

386
 9.11.3 Hiding and Viewing Grid Lines

Figure 9.13 A Bar Chart with a White Backplane and White Grid Lines Placed in
Front of the Plot

9.11.3 Hiding and Viewing Grid Lines

To view hidden grid lines, or hide visible grid lines:

1. Select the graph to modify.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Grid Lines.

3. To display grid lines, change select any style other than (none) from the Line Type
drop-down list.

387
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. To hide grid lines, in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select
(none) from the Line Type drop-down list.
5. To display grid lines, change select any style other than (none) from the Line Type
drop-down list.

9.12 Modifying Polar Axes

Polar plots have a radial axis and an angular axis. The angular axis describes a circle and can
use radians, degrees, or other units as the scale. There are both outer and inner angular axes.
The radial axes are spokes of the circle and scale the distance from the center of the circle (the
radius, or R). There are four radial axes, referred to as spokes 1-4.

Figure 9.14 A Diagram of the Axes of a Polar Plot

Note: Axis breaks cannot be created for either radial or angular axes.

9.12.1 Angular Axes

You can draw angular axes along the inner and outer circumferences of the graph. By default,
the inner axis is not displayed. You can modify angular axes by:
• Changing axis titles. For more information, see page 363.
• Displaying or hiding either axis. For more information, see page 356.
• Changing axis lines. For more information, see page .
• Changing axis scaling, range, and rotation. For more information, see page .

388
 [Link] Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position

• Changing tick marks. For more information, see page 364.

• Changing axis tick labels. For more information, see page 374.

[Link] Changing Angular Axis Scaling and Position

Polar plot angular axis scale and range settings control the axis units and increments used to
plot data. You can modify axis scale, range, units, and rotation using the Scale settings on
the Property Browser.
To change an axis scale, range, units, and rotation:

1. Select the plot.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale.

3. To change the axis scale used, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, select the desired axis scale type from the Type drop-down list. Axis Scale
TypesFor more information, see page 347.
4. To change the measurement units of the angular axis, select measurement units from
the Polar Units drop-down list. If you don’t see the axis units you want to use for your
polar plot listed in the list, select Others, then type new axis range values in the Start
value and End value fields. If using a predefined measurement unit, the Start value and
End value box values are entered automatically.

Note: The only effect of changing units is to change the pre-defined axis range. This
range can be manually changed regardless of the current units.
5. To change the size of the displayed arc of the polar plot, move the Polar Period slider.
A setting of 360 degrees displays the entire circle, 270 degrees displays three-quarters
of the circle, and 90 degrees displays half of the circle.

Note: If you change the arc of the angular axis, the axis range remains the same. The
current axis range appears along the new distance of the arc.

389
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. To change the start angle for the displayed arc, move the Polar Axis Start slider. The
default is 0 degrees (3 o’clock). Rotation is counterclockwise.

Figure 9.15 Polar plots with: Starting angle of 315° and arc of 270°; start angle
of 0° and arc of 180°; and start angle of 135° and arc of 22.5°.

[Link] Moving Angular Axis Positions

You can drag both inner and outer angular axes closer or further from the center of the graph.
Select the axis, and move it using the mouse.
To set exact locations for angular axes:

1. Select an angular axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line details.

3. To change the percentage in the Outer and Inner axes, in the Object Properties
window of the Property Browser, select Outer Line and Inner Line to be True. Then
move the Outer Position and Inner Position sliders or enter values. Locations are
described as the percentage of the distance the axes lie from the center of the graph. To
move an axis out, increase the percent. To move an axis in, decrease the percent.

390
 9.12.2 Radial Axes

4. To change the percentage in the Outer and Inner axes, in the Object Properties
window of the Property Browser, select Outer Line and Inner Line to be True. Then
move the Outer Position and Inner Position sliders or enter values. Locations are
described as the percentage of the distance the axes lie from the center of the graph. To
move an axis out, increase the percent. To move an axis in, decrease the percent.

9.12.2 Radial Axes

The radial axes are drawn along the radius of the graph, and by default are displayed as four
axes extending from the center of the graph to the outer of edge the graph. Each of the radial
axes is a representation of the same data, so the range and scale must be the same for each
radial axis; however, you can modify the color, tick marks, labels, location, and display of
each radial axis independently.
Modify radial axes by:
• Displaying or hiding any axis. For more information, see page 356.
• Changing display of axis and tick label titles. For more information, see page .
• Changing axis lines. For more information, see page .
• Changing axis scaling. For more information, see page 351.
• Changing tick marks. For more information, see page 364.
• Changing axis tick label type. For more information, see page 374.

[Link] Modifying Radial Axes Lines and Position

To control polar plot radial axes line settings:

1. Select the graph.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line details.

391
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link].1 Moving a Radial Axis

To move a radial axis:

1. Select the axis on the page.

2. Use the mouse to drag it to a new location. Radial axes rotate about the center of the
graph like the spokes of a wheel.

[Link].2 Setting Radial Axis Positions to Exact Degree Positions

To set radial axis positions to exact degree positions

1. Select a radial axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line details.

3. To move a radial axis, in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser,
move the Spoke Position sliders to set new locations for the individual spokes. The axis
location is in degrees from 0 degrees (3 o’clock). The defaults are 0 degrees, 90 degrees,
180 degrees, and 270 degrees.
4. To offset an axis from the center of the graph, move the Polar Axis Start slider to
change the length of the radial axes. Setting the slider to 0% draws the axis from the
center of the graph outward, 25% draws the axis beginning a quarter of the distance from
the center, 50% draws it half the distance from the center, and so on.

392
 [Link].3 Displaying and Modifying Radial Axes Lines

Figure 9.16 Radial Axes in the Default Positions, and Offset by 45 degrees with
an Axes Start of 30%.

[Link].3 Displaying and Modifying Radial Axes Lines

To display and modify radial axes lines:

1. Select a radial axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line details.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a color and thickness
from the Color and Thickness drop-down lists.

4. To view or hide a radial axis, in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser, select Spoke 1, 2, 3, or 4 to be True.

To change line color and thickness:

5. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a color and thickness
from the Color and Thickness drop-down lists.

393
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Line.

7. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a color and thickness
from the Color and Thickness drop-down lists.

8. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a color and thickness
from the Color and Thickness drop-down lists.

[Link] Displaying and Changing Radial Axis Ticks and Labels

Use the Property Browser Tick Label settings to display polar radial axis labels, and modify
tick labels. Angular axes labels are analogous to standard Cartesian graph titles and labels;
however, radial tick marks and labels have additional positioning options.
Other than display and position, polar plot tick marks and labels have the same options as
Cartesian graph tick marks and labels.

[Link].1 Viewing, Hiding, or Moving Titles and Tick Labels on the Radial Axes

To view, hide, or move titles and tick labels on the radial axes:

1. Select a radial axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to either Major tick
labels or Minor tick labels.

394
 [Link].2 Hiding Tick Marks

3. To move or hide the major or minor tick labels on the radial axes, edit the Major
(or Minor) Tick Labels Properties in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser.

4. To move or hide the major or minor tick labels on the radial axes, edit the Major
(or Minor) Tick Labels Properties in the Object Properties window of the Property
Browser.

[Link].2 Hiding Tick Marks

Hide tick marks by clicking the ticks and pressing the Delete key. You can also right-click
the labels and click Hide.

[Link].3 Specifying the Direction for Radial Axis Tick Marks for Each Pair of
Radial Axes

To specify the direction for radial axis tick marks for each pair of radial axes:

1. Select radial axis tick mark.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to either Tick lable.

395
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select directions for the
individual spoke drop-down lists to change the tick directions on the radial axes.

Figure 9.17 Polar Plots with All Ticks Pointing Inward, Spokes 1, 3 Inward and
2,4 Outward, and All Ticks Pointing in Both Directions

9.13 Modifying Ternary Axes

Ternary axes are drawn to represent increases in data value in a counterclockwise direction by
default. You can reverse the axis direction, which is indicated by a reversal of tick labels. The
tick direction changes accordingly.
Because ternary axes are interdependent, any modification in the scale type or range of one
of the axes is reflected in the other axes, and may alter the shape and size of the graph. You
can modify the color and thickness of axis lines, the appearance of tick marks and tick labels,
location and rotation of axis titles, and display of each ternary axis independently.
Ternary axes can be modified similarly to other graph axes.
Note: You cannot create axis breaks for ternary axes.

9.13.1 Modifying Ternary Axis Title Location

396
 9.13.2 Changing Ternary Axis Range, Scale, and Direction

You can position axis titles of ternary graphs either at the apex or along the length of the axis.
You can also rotate them to a position parallel to the axis.
To reposition a ternary graph axis title:

1. Select the axis.

2. In the pop up menu that appears, select a degree of rotation from the Rotation drop-down
list.

Figure 9.18 The titles along the axes are also rotated with the axes.

9.13.2 Changing Ternary Axis Range, Scale, and

Direction
Ternary axis scale type and range settings control the units and increments used to plot the
data. Axis scale, range, and direction are modified using the Scaling settings displayed in the
Property Browser. Axis range can also be modified by dragging a selected axis. Modifying a
ternary axis range can alter the size and even the shape of the graph.

397
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Modifying Axis Range by Dragging

You can modify axis range by dragging a selected axis or apex. Because ternary axes are
interdependent, dragging an axis to modify its range can change the ranges of the other axes.
Dragging an apex modifies the ranges of the two axes which form the apex; reducing the
maximum of an axis range introduces a fourth axis, creating a trapezoid graph. Dragging a
selected axis toward or away from the center of the graph modifies all three axis ranges by the
same increment, maintaining the original shape of the graph.
To modify ternary axis ranges:

1. View the ternary graph.

2. Select either an apex or an axis to modify. A selected apex displays a black, square
selection handle and is surrounded by a dotted line; a selected axis displays a selection
handle at the center point of its range and is surrounded by a dotted line.

Figure 9.19 Dragging an Axis to Rescale a Ternary Plot Range

3. Drag either the apex or the axis toward or away from the center of the graph. The axis
ranges adjust accordingly.

Note: Modifying axis ranges of ternary graphs often introduces additional axes. These
axes are the second axes of each "pair’ of axis lines. An axis which appears as a result of
moving an apex is paired with the axis opposite the apex which moved.

398
 [Link] Modifying Ternary Axis Range

Figure 9.20 The left graph Y axis was dragged to 50%. The right graph Y apex
was dragged to 50%.

[Link] Modifying Ternary Axis Range

You can modify ternary graph ranges using the Property Browser.

1. Select the axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, enter values in the Start
Value and End Value boxes to change individual axis ranges.

Note: Increasing an axis range minimum reduces the size of the ternary graph because it
is always reduces the other axis range maximums. Reducing the maximum of a ternary
axis range changes the graph shape.

[Link] Ternary Scale Type

All ternary axes on a single graph use either the default Percentage (0-100) scale or the Unitary
(0.0-1.0) scale. Data used by each scale should be within the required ranges for each scale.

399
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The type of graph you create determines the graph scale. There should be no need to change
the scale unless a mistake was made while creating the graph. Changing the scaling from
Percentage to Unitary can also hide out-of-range data.

Figure 9.21 The data range used for Percentage is 0-100; the data range for
Unitary data is 0-1.

To change ternary axis scale type:

1. Select the axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select a scale type from
the Ternary Scale Type drop-down list. When you change the axis scale type for one
axis, it is changed for all axes.

400
 [Link] Changing Ternary Axis Direction

[Link] Changing Ternary Axis Direction

Ternary graph axes show data increasing in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
Each axis line can represent either or both of two values in the graph. Changing the direction
changes which values are shown on the axis by default. Modifying axis direction changes all
three axes; ternary axes are interdependent.
Ternary graph axes have interdependent axis ranges from 0 to 100, where 0 to 100 is the
default setting or 0-1.0 where 0-1.0 is the default setting.
The axis range and scale control the axis units and increments used to plot data.
To modify the axis direction:

1. Select the axis.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Scale.

3. Select the axis direction from the Direction drop-down list in the Object Properties
window.
4. Click OK.

401
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The tick directions change on all three axes and the axis ranges reverse.
Changing the axis directions inverts the 0-100 direction of the labels and changes the
direction of the tick marks. However, axis titles only move if they are positioned along
an axis, not at an apex. Apex position for each variable remain constant regardless of
axis direction.

Figure 9.22 Ternary Graphs Displaying Counterclockwise (Left) and Clockwise

(Right) Axis Directions

9.13.3 Changing Ternary Axis Tick Marks and Tick

Labels
Ternary axes tick marks indicate the precise location of each value at specific intervals
determined by the axis range. Tick marks and tick labels along ternary axes have both
direction and origin. Every tick location can have tick marks and labels pointing in clockwise,
counterclockwise, both clockwise and counterclockwise, and perpendicular directions,
independent of the actual direction of the data.

[Link] Tick and Tick Label Directions and Ownership

Tick marks and labels indicate which values correspond to the plotted data points by the
direction they lean in. The direction also indicates which axis the tick is actually controlled by.
This can be a different axis than the tick mark is actually drawn on.
For example, the default ticks for the X axis are drawn leaning in a clockwise direction on
the bottom axis. These tick marks also correspond to the counterclockwise tick marks on the
Y axis. If you change the tick mark attributes for X axis ticks, you can affect tick marks
that are actually drawn on a different axis.
The following figure best illustrates tick mark and label ownership.

402
 [Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Marks Direction and Intervals

Figure 9.23 The X Axis ticks and labels are drawn in light gray, the Y Axis
ticks and labels are drawn in black, and the Z Axis ticks and labels are drawn
in dark gray.

[Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Marks Direction and Intervals

Use the Property Browser to modify tick appearance including tick length and color. You
can also specify to view or hide tick marks, which side of the axis they extend from, and
the tick interval.
To modify tick marks:

1. Select a tick mark.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Ticks or
Minor Ticks.

403
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To turn tick drawing on and off and to select tick directions for both sides of an axis
line, use the Direction lists in the Object Properties window. The second list is only
available if a ternary plot range change has created a secondary axis.
4. Select Out, In, or In and Out to display tick marks on the selected axis out from the
center of the graph, in toward the center of the graph, or both outward and inward.
Select a clockwise, counterclockwise, both, or 90 Degree option to select the tick mark
direction along the axis. Select (none) to hide tick marks.

Figure 9.24 Graph Examples of Tick Marks Pointing, counterclockwise,

Clockwise, Both, and 90 Degrees

5. Click OK.

6. To change major tick intervals, move the Major Tick Intervals slider.
7. To change minor tick intervals, under Tick Intervals, select a new value from the
Minor Tick Intervals drop-down list.

404
 [Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Mark Line Appearance

Figure 9.25 Ternary Graphs with Tick Intervals of 15 and 30

8. Click OK.

9. Click Apply.
10. Click OK.

[Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Mark Line Appearance

To change tick mark display, length, color, and interval:

1. Select a tick marks you’d like to change.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Tick Lines or
Minor Tick Lines.

3. To change tick color, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose from any
of the listed colors, or select (Custom) to use a pre-defined custom color or create your
own color. Select (none) to create transparent tick marks.

405
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. To change tick thickness, in the Object Properties window of the Property Browser,
move the Thickness sliders or type a value.
5. To change tick color, select a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose from any
of the listed colors, or select (Custom) to use a pre-defined custom color or create your
own color. Select (none) to create transparent tick marks.

[Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Label Display

Tick labels are drawn using directions clockwise, counterclockwise, and both clockwise
and counterclockwise. Tick label direction is controlled independently of the data direction.
Tick labels can also be turned off, have a prefix or suffix added, and be rotated along the
angle of the axis line.
You can also modify the tick label.
To modify tick label display along an axis:

1. Select the axis you want to change.

2. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Tick label.

3. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, type a prefix and suffix in
the Tic Label Prefix and Tic Label Suffix bo boxes.

4. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, select which major and
minor, top and bottom tick labels you’d like to appear.

To change the direction of the axis tick label:

5. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, type a prefix and suffix in
the Tic Label Prefix and Tic Label Suffix bo boxes.

406
 [Link] Modifying Ternary Tick Label Display

6. Select the tick label.

7. Rotate the tick labels using the Rotationdrop-down list that appears in the pop up menu.

To add a suffix or prefix to the major or minor tick labels on ternary axes:
8. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, type a prefix and suffix in
the Tic Label Prefix and Tic Label Suffix bo boxes.

9. In the Page Objects window of the Property Browser, navigate to Major Tick Labels
or Minor Tick Labels.

10. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, type a prefix and suffix in
the Tic Label Prefix and Tic Label Suffix bo boxes.

11. In the Object Properties window of the Property Browser, type a prefix and suffix in
the Tic Label Prefix and Tic Label Suffix bo boxes.

407
10 Using the Report Editor
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About the Report Editor
♦ Inserting the Current Date and Time into a Report
♦ Formatting Text and Paragraphs
♦ Using the Report Editor Ruler

10.1 About the Report Editor

Use the Report Editor to annotate and document your graphs and data. The Report Editor
features a complete text editor and OLE2 insertion and editing. It is also used by the Regression
Wizard to report regression results and by the Statistics Wizard to report statistics test results.

10.1.1 Creating Reports

To create a new report:

1. Right-click the section in the notebook where you want to create the report, and on the
shortcut menu click New.

409
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. Click Report. A report window opens and a new report is added to the selected section.

3. Click Report. A report window opens and a new report is added to the selected section.

10.1.2 Setting Report Options

Use the Reports tab on the Options dialog box to:

• Set the number of decimals displayed in the report.
• Enable or disable scientific notation.
• Enable or disable explanatory text for report results.
• Set whether or not you want to report only flagged values.

410
 10.1.2 Setting Report Options

• Hide or display the report ruler.

• Set measurement units.

To set report options:

1. Click the Main button, and then click Options.

2. To display the ruler at the top margin of the report page, select Show Ruler. This
option is enabled by default. Clear this option to hide the report ruler.

3. Click the Report tab.

411
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. To display the ruler at the top margin of the report page, select Show Ruler. This
option is enabled by default. Clear this option to hide the report ruler.

5. To set the number of significant digits used for the values in the report, select
Number of Significant Digits. The default is three digits. The maximum number of
digits is sixteen.
6. To use scientific notation for the appropriate values in the report tables, select
Always Use Scientific Notation. If this option is disabled, scientific notation is only used
when the value is too long to fit in the table cell. This option is disabled by default.
7. To explain explanatory text for test results in the report, select Explain Test Results.
This option is enabled by default. Clear this option to keep explanatory text out of the
report.
8. To specify a significant P value, select P Value for Significance. This option determines
whether there is a statistically significant difference in the mean values of the groups
being tested. The value you specify is compared to the P values computed by all tests.

Note: This P value does not affect the actual test results. It only affects the text that
explains if the difference in the mean values of the groups is due to chance or due to
random sampling variation.

412
 10.1.3 Setting Report Page Size and Margins

If the P computed by the test is smaller than the P set here, the text reads, "The difference
in the mean values of the two groups is greater than would be expected by chance; there is
a statistically significant difference between the input groups."
If the P value computed by the test is greater than the P set here, the text reads, "The
difference in the mean values of the two groups is not great enough to reject the possibility
that the difference is due to random sampling variability. There is not a statistically
significant difference between the input groups."
One of the above explanation text strings appears for each P value computed by the test.
ANOVAs and some regressions produce multiple P values.
Note: If the Explain Test Results option is cleared, the results of this P value do not
appear in the report.
9. To display the ruler at the top margin of the report page, select Show Ruler. This
option is enabled by default. Clear this option to hide the report ruler.

10. To display the ruler at the top margin of the report page, select Show Ruler. This
option is enabled by default. Clear this option to hide the report ruler.

10.1.3 Setting Report Page Size and Margins

Use the report Page Setup dialog box to set report margins, paper orientation, paper size,
and paper source.
Note: These settings apply to the current report, but not to other open reports. To have these
settings apply to subsequently opened or created reports, make your changes, then close the
page. Newly opened or created reports will use all of these settings.
To open the Page Setup dialog box:

1. Select the report window.

2. Click the Main button, and then click Print, and then Page Setup.

413
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To change the margins, under Margins (inches), type the desired values into the four
boxes. The current ruler units appear in the Margins title.

4. In the Page Setup dialog box, select the paper size and source from the Size and Source
drop-down lists. The page sample at the top of the dialog box reflects changes.

414
 10.1.4 Exporting Reports

5. To change the margins, under Margins (inches), type the desired values into the four
boxes. The current ruler units appear in the Margins title.

6. To select the printer, click Printer. The Page Setup dialog box appears on which you
can select and setup any printer configured for your system.
7. To change the margins, under Margins (inches), type the desired values into the four
boxes. The current ruler units appear in the Margins title.

10.1.4 Exporting Reports

You can only export the entire report. If you want to export a portion of the report, delete the
portion you don’t want to export, then export the remainder as the file.
To export a report:

1. Select and view the report window you want to export.

2. On the Home tab, in the Export group, click Report.

415
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click Export to create the file.

4. In the Export File dialog box, from the Files of type drop-down list, select a file format.
5. Click Export to create the file.

10.1.5 Printing Reports

You can print any report in a SigmaPlot notebook.

To display a report as it will look when printed:

1. Click the Main button, and then click Print, and then Print Preview.

416
 10.1.5 Printing Reports

2. Click OK to print the report.

To set printing options before printing the report:

3. Click the Main button, and then click Print, and then Page Setup.

417
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. In the Page Setup dialog box, click Printer.

418
 10.1.5 Printing Reports

5. In the next Page Setup dialog box, click Properties.

6. Click OK when you are satisfied with the printer properties settings.

Note: The Properties dialog box options vary from printer to printer.
7. Click OK to print the report.

419
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

10.2 Inserting the Current Date and Time

into a Report

To insert the current date and time into reports:

1. Select the report and click where you want to insert the Date or Time.
2. On the Report tab, in theInsert group, click the Insert drop-down list.

3. Click Date and Time.

4. In the Date and Time dialog box, select the date and time format from the Available
formats list.

5. Click OK. The current date and time appear as text at the specified location.

Note: The list of available date and time formats depends on your Regional Settings. You
can view or modify the Regional Settings directly from your Windows Control Panel.

420
 10.3 Formatting Text and Paragraphs

10.3 Formatting Text and Paragraphs

Use the Format, Ruler, and Text groups on the Reports tab to change report text attributes
such as font, font size, color, and style of selected text.

To modify text with the Formatting Toolbar:

1. Select the text you want to modify. You can select individual characters, words,
paragraphs, or the entire report.
2. To format character font, size, weight, underlining, or color, use the Text group.
Formatting Text For more information, see page 167.
3. To set paragraph alignment, use Align Left, Align Center, and Align Right and
Justify in the Text group.

4. To remove bullets, click the Bullet Style or Number Style again. You can also right-click
the report page and on the shortcut menu click Bullet or Number.

5. To add bullets or numbers a to selected paragraph, select the Bullet Style or Number
Style in the Format group.

6. To remove bullets, click the Bullet Style or Number Style again. You can also right-click
the report page and on the shortcut menu click Bullet or Number.

7. To remove bullets, click the Bullet Style or Number Style again. You can also right-click
the report page and on the shortcut menu click Bullet or Number.

421
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

10.4 Using the Report Editor Ruler

Use the Report Editor ruler to view margins and to both view and modify report page tabs
and paragraph indents.

Figure 10.1 The Report Editor Ruler

The ruler indicates:

• Usable page column width
• Default tabs
• User-defined tabs
• Left and right paragraph indents
• First line indent

10.4.1 Showing and Hiding Report Rulers

To show or hide horizontal and vertical rulers:

1. On the Report tab, in the Ruler group, click the Show Ruler drop-down list.

2. Click Show Vertical Ruler and Show Horizontal Ruler. A check mark means the ruler
is visible. Clear it to make the ruler invisible.

422
 10.4.2 Setting Report Ruler Units

10.4.2 Setting Report Ruler Units

You can set the horizontal and vertical ruler units in SigmaPlot reports to either Inches
or Centimeters.

1. On the Report tab, in the Ruler group, click the Show Ruler drop-down list.

2. Click Units and then either Inches or Centimeters.

3. Click Units and then either Inches or Centimeters.

10.4.3 Setting Tabs

All tab stops appear on the report ruler. The default tab stop is 0.25" regardless of the current
units. Tab stops are made for individual and selected paragraphs, and are saved with reports.
To set a tab:

1. Select the paragraph(s) to change the tab stops.

2. Click the ruler where you want to place a tab. A tab marker appears at the clicked location.
3. To move a tab, drag the tab marker to another location on the ruler. To delete a tab,
drag the tab marker off the ruler.

You can also set tabs from the Tabs dialog box:
4. Click OK to add the tab setting to the list.

423
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. On the Report tab, in the Format group, click Tabs.

6. Click OK to add the tab setting to the list.

7. In the Tabs dialog box, select tab stops from the Tab position in inches drop-down list.

8. Click OK to add the tab setting to the list.

9. Enter Tab locations using the current ruler units.

10. Click OK to add the tab setting to the list.

10.4.4 Setting Paragraph Indents

You can set left, right, and first line indents for individual paragraphs. These settings are
saved with the report.
To set paragraph indents:

1. Select the paragraph(s) to change the indents.

424
 10.4.5 Adding Tables to Reports

2. To change the first line indent, drag the marker at the top left of the ruler.
3. To change the left indent, drag the marker on the bottom left of the ruler.
4. To move both the left and first line indents, drag each marker separately.
5. To change the right indent, drag the marker on the bottom right side of the ruler.

Note: To create an indented line, drag the top left marker to the right of the left indent. To
create a hanging indent, drag top left marker to the left of the bottom left indent marker.

10.4.5 Adding Tables to Reports

425
11 Publishing Graphs
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Publishing Graphs
♦ Publishing Graphs on the World Wide Web
♦ Submitting Graphs for Publication
♦ The Submission Assistant

11.1 About Publishing Graphs

You can use SigmaPlot to publish graphs on the World Wide Web, and to create publication
quality graphs for submission to journals and other printed forms.

11.2 Publishing Graphs on the World Wide

Web
You can save your graphs in high resolution and then later publish them on the Internet using
the SigmaPlot WebViewer. For more information, see page .
Saving your graphs as a web page creates HTML code that you can later import into any
HTML editor. For more information, see page .

11.2.1 About the SigmaPlot WebViewer

The SigmaPlot WebViewer is an ActiveX control freely distributed from the Systat Web
site. If this control is not installed the first time a SigmaPlot graph is viewed on a web page,
the WebViewer is automatically installed. Then you can view the graphs in high resolution
on the Intranet or Internet.
Using the SigmaPlot WebViewer, you can:
• View the graphs in high resolution.
• Pan and zoom the graph without losing resolution.
• Print in high resolution (printer resolution) as opposed to typical Web graphics (GIFs,
JPEGs, etc.) that are printed in low resolution.
• View the data used to create the graph.

11.2.2 Exporting Graphs into HTML Format

When you export a graph to the Web, SigmaPlot automatically creates three files:
• A notebook .JNB file which contains the SigmaPlot graph and data worksheet.
• A .JPG of the graph, viewable by those who do not have the SigmaPlot WebViewer.

427
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• An .HTM file which references a .JPG of the graph and the .JNB file.

You can export an entire graph page or other pasted objects.

To export a SigmaPlot graph into HTML format:

1. Open a graph page.

2. Select the page objects you want to publish.
3. On the Home tab, in the Export group, click the Graph drop-down list.

4. Click Save as Web Page.

5. In the Export File dialog box, enter a name of the file in the File name box.
6. Click Export.

7. To set the size of the figure, in the Export Web Graph dialog box, select desired
measurements from the Height and Width drop-down lists.

Note: One inch is 96 pixels, and the Export Web Graph dialog box uses a fixed aspect
ratioFor more information, see page ..
8. To export the currently selected graph or objects, select Export Selected Only.
9. To export the entire graph page, clear Export Selected Only.
10. To password protect the file, click Set Password. For more information, see page .
11. Click OK. Three files are created: an .HTM file which references a saved .JPG file, and a
.JNB file. You can later insert this .HTM file into any HTML editor.

11.2.3 Password Protecting Data on the World Wide

Web

428
 11.2.4 Exporting Data Associated with the Graph

You can secure your data for a graph you export to an HTML file by setting a password for
viewers to enter when viewing this graph on the Internet. Setting a password also prevents
the opening and downloading of this file.
To set a password:

1. On the Export Web Graph dialog box, click Set Password. The Set Password dialog
box appears.

11.2.4 Exporting Data Associated with the Graph

When you export a graph to a web page, you not only export the data for the graph but the
entire worksheet as well. This can be useful if you want to associate or display additional data
for the graph, but it can also increase the size of the .JNB file, which can slow viewing.
To export just the data associated with the graph:

1. Select the graph on the page, and copy it.

2. Click the Main Button.
3. Click New.
4. Click Graph Page.

429
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Click No on the Graph Page dialog box.

6. Paste the graph to the new page.

Now when you export this graph, you will also only export the data associated with
the graph.

11.3 Submitting Graphs for Publication

The following are some guidelines for preparing graphs for submission to journals or other
printed form. This process is not necessarily simple, and requires understanding both the
figure requirements of the publication as well as graphic file formats and terminology.

11.3.1 Figure Submission Requirements

The ultimate destination for most SigmaPlot graphs is a publication, and most publishers are
now equipped for digital pre-press. This requires graphic files with specific formats and
properties. Keep in mind the requirements of the different journals and other publications.

430
 11.3.2 Creating Files for Figure Submission

These tend to vary, but are usually available at the web site for the journal submission
requirements.
Some URLs (as of the writing of this document) for requirements for some major publications
are:
• Nature: [Link]
• Science: [Link]
• The Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences:
[Link]
• Journal of the American Chemical Society: [Link] and
[Link]
Many journals also use the Cadmus electronic prepress service. Their requirements can be
found at: [Link]

11.3.2 Creating Files for Figure Submission

The steps to producing a file for publication can vary from publisher to publisher.
When preparing a figure for file export, first determine:
• The final size of the figure, including the size of text (usually inches or millimeters).
• The required line weights.
• Acceptable typefaces (especially important for EPS - Encapsulated Postscript - files).
• The desired final dpi (the dots-per-inch resolution), if necessary.

To produce a file for publication:

1. Determine the final size of the figure, the heights of text and thicknesses of lines and
whether the figure will be color, grayscale, or black and white.
2. Determine what file formats are acceptable, and choose the best one. The ranking in
which you should choose your format is:

• SigmaPlot
• EPS
• TIFF
3. Printed hardcopy (not really a file, but some publications actually still prefer this).

These formats are regardless of whether the graph is color or not.

Some publishers will directly accept SigmaPlot files. Most others accept EPS, TIFF, or
both.
4. Determine how much the figure is going to be scaled using the size of your current figure.
For example, if your graph is 5 inches wide, but the figures are printed at 3.25 inches
wide, then scale your graph by a factor of 3.25/5, or .65.
5. Increase text labels and line widths accordingly on your SigmaPlot graph.

431
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

For example, if you reduce your graph to .65 of the original size, and text must be 10pt in
height, increase your labels to at least 15.5pt.
Alternately, you can reduce the graph itself to the final publication size.
6. Make any other changes to your graph to meet the publisher’s requirements, such as
typeface, labeling, and so on.
7. Once you have your graph formatted, produce the selected file. Make sure that you select
the figure (click it) before choosing export-this will automatically crop your figure for you.

If you are producing an EPS file, you don’t need to pay attention to dpi at all.
If you must use TIFF format, make sure you use the CMYK-compressed TIFF format.
Uncompressed TIFF files are too big to easily handle. Also, you will now have to do
some dpi calculations.
For example, if you are producing a file that requires a final printed dpi of 600, and the
graph is being reduced by a .65 ratio, do not set the file dpi to 600. Instead, use a dpi of 390
(600*.65). When this file shrinks to the final printed size, the final dpi will also be 600.

11.3.3 Why Use EPS?

Most publishers request either EPS or TIFF formats. When given a choice, choose EPS. Why?
Because EPS is known as a vector format. This means that the image is not made up of pixels,
but instead graphic descriptions of lines, fills, text, and so on. A vector format has no "size." It
is dimensionless. This means you can shrink it as small as you want, or grow it as big as you
want, with no change in resolution. dpi has no meaning for a vector file.
This format is ideal for a graph figure since there is no degradation of the quality of the figure
as it re-scales. It is also means that when you place a vector format file in a document, it often
first appears at an arbitrary size, and then you can scale it to the final desired size. This can
often startle, annoy or confuse someone not familiar with the behavior of vector files.
The other vector format supported by SigmaPlot is the Windows Enhanced Metafile format.

11.3.4 About dpi

dpi (dots per inch) is a printer term, and is often misleading. dpi determines how many pixels
are used to create the figure. A more accurate term would be resolution. You can increase the
final dpi of a raster figure by shrinking it. This creates more pixels within a smaller space,
increasing the dpi.
Most printed figures do not require a dpi higher than 600 for grayscale figures, and 300 dpi
for color figures. The 1200 dpi number is for black and white figures only that have no half
toning. If you must produce a 1200 dpi figure, you will have to do some post-processing on
your file in order make it palatable to the printer. This can be beneficial if you must use TIFF
file and have Photoshop.

432
 11.4 The Submission Assistant

11.4 The Submission Assistant

The Submission Assistant walks you through the sometimes arduous process of creating
graphs suitable for publication. Choose from a list of journal profiles that correspond to
specific journal submission requirements, or create and edit your own profiles. If you run
into any problems along the way, the Submission Assistant offers suggestions to get your
graph publication-ready.
This section explains how to:
• Submit a graph using the Submission Assistant.
• Editing a submission profile.

11.4.1 Using the Submission Assistant

To start the Submission Assistant:

1. On the Home tab, in the Export group, click Graph.

2. Click Submission Assistant.

3. Once the graph has met the Submission Criteria, click Export.

4. In the Submission Assistant dialog box, pick a journal profile from the Submission
Profile drop-down list.

433
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: Profile data is stored by default in individual profile files in your User’s Folder.
For more information, see page .
5. Once the graph has met the Submission Criteria, click Export.

6. Enter the final figure size into the Height and Width fields. This is either set by default
or you enter this information manually.
7. Once the graph has met the Submission Criteria, click Export.

11.4.2 Editing a Submission Profile

Use the Submission Assistant - Pick profile dialog box to modify the file type, figure size
and minimum sizes for fonts and lines.
To edit a profile:

1. On the Submission Assistant - Edit profile dialog box, click Edit.

2. After you’ve edited the profile, click OK to save it.

434
12 Automating Routine Tasks
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Automating Routine Tasks
♦ Editing Macros
♦ About User-Defined Functions
♦ Using the Debug Window
♦ Streamlining Procedures with Macros
♦ Using SigmaPlot’s Macros
♦ SigmaPlot’s Macros

12.1 About Automating Routine Tasks

SigmaPlot uses a VBA®-like macro language to access automation internally. However,
whether you have never programmed, or are an expert programmer, you can take advantage of
this technology by using the Macro Recorder. This chapter describes how to use SigmaPlot’s
Macro Recorder and integrated development environment (IDE). It also contains descriptions
of related features accessible in the Macro window, including the Sax Basic programming
language, debugging tool, dialog box editor, and user-defined functions.
Record a macro any time that you find yourself regularly typing the same keystrokes, choosing
the same commands, or going through the same sequence of operations.

12.1.1 Before you Record a Macro

Before you record the macro:
• Analyze the task you want to automate. If the macro has more than a few steps, write
down an outline of the steps.
• Rehearse the sequence to make sure you have included every single action.
• Decide what to call the macro, where to assign it, and where to save it.

12.1.2 Recording Macros

To record a macro:

1. On the Toolbox tab, in the Macros group, click Record New Macro.

435
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

REC appears in the status area of SigmaPlot’s main window, indicating that the macro is
recording your menu selections and keystrokes.

2. After you have finished recording the macro, save it globally (for use in all of SigmaPlot)
or locally (for use in a particular notebook file). Your macro appears in the Notebook
Manager.

3. Complete the activity you want to include in this macro.

Note: The Macro Recorder does not record cursor movements.

4. After you have finished recording the macro, save it globally (for use in all of SigmaPlot)
or locally (for use in a particular notebook file). Your macro appears in the Notebook
Manager.

5. When you are finished recording the macro, On the Toolbox tab, in the Macros group,
click Stop Recording.

436
 12.1.2 Recording Macros

6. After you have finished recording the macro, save it globally (for use in all of SigmaPlot)
or locally (for use in a particular notebook file). Your macro appears in the Notebook
Manager.

7. In the Macro Options dialog box, type a name for the macro in the Name text box.

Give the macro a descriptive name. You can use a combination of upper- and lowercase
letters, numbers, and underscores. For example a macro that formats all of your graph
legends to match a certain report might be called "Report1AddFormatToLegend".

8. After you have finished recording the macro, save it globally (for use in all of SigmaPlot)
or locally (for use in a particular notebook file). Your macro appears in the Notebook
Manager.

9. Enter a more detailed description in the Description text box.

437
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

10. After you have finished recording the macro, save it globally (for use in all of SigmaPlot)
or locally (for use in a particular notebook file). Your macro appears in the Notebook
Manager.

12.1.3 Creating Macros Using the Macro Language

You can record a macro using the Macro Recorder, or you can create a macro manually using
a VBA®-like macro language in the Macro Window.
To create a macro using the Macro Window:

1. Click the Main Button, and then click New, and then click Macro. Creating New Items
in the Notebook ManagerFor more information, see page 192.
2. The Macro Window appears.

Figure 12.1 A new Macro Window. You can create SigmaPlot macros from
scratch using SigmaPlot’s VBA-like macro language.

Editing MacrosFor more information, see page 439.

438
 12.2 Editing Macros

12.2 Editing Macros

When you record a macro, SigmaPlot generates a series of program statements that are
equivalent to the actions that you perform. These statements are in a form of SigmaPlot
language that has custom extensions specifically for SigmaPlot automation and appear in the
Macro Window. You can edit these statements to modify the actions of the macro. You can
also add comments to describe code.
To edit a macro:

1. On the Toolbox tab, in the Macros group, click Macros.

2. In the Macros dialog box, select a macro from the Macro list.

3. Click Edit. The Macro Window appears.

Creating Macros Using the Macro LanguageFor more information, see page .

439
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.2.1 Getting Help for Sax Basic in SigmaPlot

To get help for Sax Basic, in the Macro Window, click on an item you want to learn more
about, and press F1.

12.2.2 Using the Macro Window Toolbar

The Macro Window toolbar appears at the top of the Macro Window. It contains buttons
grouped by function.

Figure 12.2 The Macro Toolbar

The following describes the functions of the toolbar buttons in the Macro Window.
Button Button Name Function
New Procedure Opens the Add Procedure dialog box that lets
you name the procedure and paste procedure
code into your macro file

Start Runs the active macro and opens the Debug

Window.

Pause/Continue Pauses and restarts a running macro. This

button also pauses and restarts recording of
SigmaPlot commands while using the Macro
Recorder.
Stop Terminates recording of SigmaPlot commands
in the Macro Recorder. Also, stops a running
macro.

Find Opens the Find dialog where you can define a

search for text strings in the Macro Window.

Step in Executes the current line. If the current line is a

subroutine or function call, execution will stop
on the first line of that subroutine or call.

Step Over Executes to the next line. If the current line is a

subroutine or a function call, execution of that
subroutine or function call will complete.

Step Out Steps execution out of the current line the

cursor is on.

440
 12.2.3 Color-Coded Display

Run to Cursor Steps execution out to the current subroutine or

function call.

Toggle Breakpoint Toggles the breakpoint on the current line. The

breakpoint stops program execution.

Quick Watch Shows the value of the expression under the

cursor in the Immediate Window.

Macros Opens the Macros dialog box.

User Dialog Opens the Dialog Box Editor.

Object Browser Object Browser

Reference Editing Macros Opens the Reference dialog

box which contains a list of all programs that
are extensions of the SigmaPlot Basic language.

12.2.3 Color-Coded Display

The color-coding of text in the Macro Window indicates what type of code you are viewing.
The following describes the default text colors used in the script text:
• Blue. Identifies reserved words in Visual Basic (for example, Sub End Sub, and Dim).
• Magenta. Identifies SigmaPlot macro commands and functions.
• Green. Identifies comments in your macro code. Separates program documentation from
the code as you read through your macros.

12.2.4 Object and Procedure Lists

The Object and Procedure lists show SigmaPlot objects and procedures for the current
macro. These lists are useful when your macros become longer and more complex.
• The object identified as (General) groups all of the procedures that are not part of any
specific object.
• The Procedure list shows all of the procedures for the currently selected object.

441
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.2.5 Setting Macro Window Options

You can set appearance options for the Macro window in the Macros tab of the Options
dialog box.
To set the options of the Macro Window:

1. With a Macro window open, click the Main Button and then click Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click the Macro tab.

3. Set the location for the macro library.

4. Set text colors for different types of macro code and Debug Window output.
5. Set the location for the macro library.

442
 12.2.6 Parts of the Macro Programming Language

12.2.6 Parts of the Macro Programming Language

The following topics list the parts of the macro programming language:
• Statements are instructions to SigmaPlot to perform an action(s). Statements can consist of
keywords, operators, variables, and procedure calls.
• Keywords are terms that have special meaning in SigmaPlot. For example, the Sub and End
Sub keywords mark the beginning and end of a macro. By default, keywords appears as
blue text on color monitors. To find out more about a specific keyword in a macro, select
the keyword and press F1. When you do this, a topic in the SigmaPlot on-line reference
appears and presents information about the term.
• You can add optional comments to describe a macro command or function, and how it
interacts in the script. When the macro is running, comment lines are ignored. Indicate a
comment by beginning a line with an apostrophe. Comments always must end the line
they’re on. The next program line must go on a new line. By default, comment lines appear
as green text.

12.2.7 Scrolling and Moving the Insertion Point

When you use the scroll bars the insertion point does not change. To edit the macro code that
you are viewing in the macro window, you must move the insertion point manually.
To edit macro code manually:

1. In the Macro Window, click where you want to edit.

2. You can also use arrows and key combinations to move the insertion point; when you
do this the window scrolls automatically.

12.2.8 Editing Macro Code

You can edit macro code in the same way you edit text in most word-processing and text
editing programs. You add select and delete text, type over code, or insert text by moving
the insertion point and then typing in new text. As with other programming languages, you
can also add comments to code.
To edit macro code:

1. Open the macro code window and select the text to edit.

Adding Comments to Code

Add comments to code to identify the purpose of the various parts of a macro and to map
locations as you edit a complex macro. Insert comments to fully document how to use
and how to understand the macro code.
Deleting Unnecessary Code

443
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The Macro Recordercreates code corresponding exactly to the actions that you make in
SigmaPlot while the recorder was turned on. You may need to edit out unwanted steps.
Moving and Copying Code
You can cut, copy, and paste selected text.
Finding and Replacing Code
When you need to find and change text in a macro that you have written, use the Find
commands. For example, if you change the name of a file that is referenced in your macro,
you need to change every instance of the file name in your macro. Use Find to locate the
instances of the filename in the macro and replace using cut and paste edit commands.

12.2.9 Adding Existing Macros to a Macro

If you have another macro that already does what you want, you can just paste it into your new
macro. Copy and paste the macro into your new macro, test it in the new code and run it.

12.2.10 Creating Custom Dialog Boxes

Design and customize your own dialog boxes using the UserDialog Editor. When you are
designing and creating SigmaPlot macros, you can automatically create the necessary dialog
box code and dialog monitor function code. Like the other automated coding features in
SigmaPlot, the code may require further customizing.
To create a custom dialog box:

1. In the Macro Window, place the insertion point where you want to put the code for the
dialog box. Editing MacrosFor more information, see page 439.
2. On the Macro Window toolbar click the User Dialog

button. The blank grid in the UserDialog Editor appears.

3. On the left hand side of the UserDialog Editor there is a Toolbox. You can select a
tool, such as a button or check boxes, from the Toolbox. The cursor changes to a cross
when you move it over the grid.
4. To place a tool on the dialog box, click a position on the grid. A default tool will be
added to the dialog grid.
5. Resize the dialog box by dragging the handles on the sides and the corners.
6. Right-click any of the controls that you have placed on the dialog surface (after selecting
the control) and enter a name for the control.
7. Right-click the dialog form (with no control selected) and enter a name for the dialog
monitor function in the DialogFunc field.
8. To finish, click OK. The code for the dialog box with controls will be written to the
Macro Window.

444
 12.2.11 Using the Object Browser

Finally, and in most cases, you must edit the code for dialog box monitor function to
define the specific behavior of the elements in your dialog box. SigmaPlot Automation
ReferenceFor more information, see page .

12.2.11 Using the Object Browser

The Object Browser displays all SigmaPlot object classes. The methods and properties
associated with each SigmaPlot macro object class are listed. A short description of each
object appears in the dialog box as you select them from the list.
To view the Object Browser, the Macro Window must first be in view. Creating Macros
Using the Macro LanguageFor more information, see page .
To open the Object Browser:

1. On the Macro Window toolbar, click the Object Browser button.

2. Use Paste to insert generic code based on your selection into a macro.

Tip: Press F1 at any time for full details on using the Object Browser.

12.2.12 Using the Add Procedure Dialog Box

Organizing your code in procedures makes it easier to manage and reuse. SigmaPlot macros,
like Visual Basic programs, must have at least one procedure (the main subroutine) and often
they have several. The main procedure may contain only a few statements, aside from calling
subroutines that do the work. You add procedures using the Add Procedure dialog box.
To add a procedure:

1. On the Macro Window toolbar, click the New Procedure button.

2. In the Add Procedure dialog box, define a sub, function, or property using the Name,
Type, and Scope boxes.
3. Click OK to paste the code for a new procedure. The new procedure appears at the
bottom of the macro.

Tip: For full details on using the Add Procedure dialog box, press F1 from anywhere
in the Macro Window.

12.3 About User-Defined Functions

A user-defined function is a combination of math expressions and Basic code. The function
always requires input data values and always returns a value. You supply the function with a

445
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

value; it performs calculations on the values and returns a new value as the answer. Functions
can work with text, dates, and codes, not just numbers. A user-defined function is similar to a
macro but there are differences. Some of the differences are listed in the following table.
Recorded Macro User-Defined Functions
Performs a SigmaPlot action, such as Returns a value; cannot perform actions.
creating a new chart. Macros change the Functions return answers based on input
state of the program. values.
Can be recorded. Must be created in Macro code.
Are enclosed in the Sub and End Sub Are enclosed in the keywords Function and
keywords. End Function.

For More Information

Press F1 from anywhere in the Macro window to view user-defined function on-line Help.

12.3.1 Creating User-Defined Functions

A user-defined function is like any of the built-in SigmaPlot function. Because you create
the user-defined function, however, you have control over exactly what it does. A single
user-defined function can replace database and spreadsheet data manipulation with a single
program that you call from inside SigmaPlot. It is a lot easier to remember a single program
than it is to remember several spreadsheet macros. SigmaPlot Automation ReferenceFor
more information, see page .

12.4 Using the Debug Window

The Debug Window contains a group of features that are helpful when you are trying to locate
and resolve errors in your macro code. The debugging tools in SigmaPlot will be familiar
if you have used one of the modern visual programming languages or Microsoft Visual
Basic for Applications. Essentially, the Debug Window gives you incremental control over
the execution of your program so that you can sleuth errors in your programs. The Debug
Window also gives you a precise way to determine the contents of your variables. Again, a
series of buttons is used to select the operation mode of the Debug Window.

12.4.1 Debug Toolbar Buttons

The debugging features of the Debug Window are controlled by buttons on the Macro
Window toolbar. To review:
• The four Step buttons provide methods for controlling the execution of commands. They
offer various ways of responding to subroutines and functions.
• The Breakpoint button lets you set a point and execute the program until it reaches that
point.
• The Quick View button displays the value of the expression in the immediate window. The
inclusion of these features for controlling program execution are a standard but powerful
combination of tools for writing and editing macros.

446
 12.4.2 Debug Window Tabs

12.4.2 Debug Window Tabs

The output from the Debug Window is organized in four tabs that allow you to type in
statements, observe program execution responses, and iteratively modify your code using this
feedback. If you have never used a debugging tool and are new to programming, it would be a
good idea to supplement the following description with further study.

12.4.3 Immediate Tab

The Immediate Tab lets you evaluate an expression, assign a specific value to a variable
or call a subroutine and evaluate the results. Trace mode prints the code in the tab when
the macro is running.
• Type "?expr" and press Enter to show the value of "expr".
• Type "var = expr" and press Enter to change the value of "var".
• Type "set var = expr" and press Enter to change the reference of "var" for object vars.
• Type "subname args" and press Enter to call a subroutine or built-in expression "subname"
with arguments "args".
• Type "trace" and press Enter to toggle trace mode. Trace mode prints each statement in the
Immediate Tab when a macro is running.

12.4.4 Watch Tab

The Watch Tab lists variables, functions, and expressions that are calculated during execution
of the program.
• Each time program execution pauses, the value of each line in the window is updated.
• The expression to the left of the "->" may be edited.
• Pressing Enter updates all the values immediately.
• Pressing Ctrl+Y deletes the line.

12.4.5 Stack Tab

The output from the Stack Tab lists the program lines that called the current statement. This is
a macro command audit and is helpful to determine the order of statements in you program.
• The first line is the current statement. The second line is the one that called the first, and
so on.
• Clicking a line brings that macro into a sheet and highlights the line in the edit window.

12.5 Streamlining Procedures with Macros

Use SigmaPlot macros to help streamline your workflow. For example, you can create
macros in Microsoft Word or Excel that allow you to open SigmaPlot from within either
application. You can place macros that you create yourself on the main menu. You can even
run a SigmaPlot macro by specifying its path in your command prompt without ever having to
open SigmaPlot. Examples of these macro applications appear in the following topics. Using
SigmaPlot’s MacrosFor more information, see page 449.

447
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.5.1 Opening SigmaPlot from Microsoft Word or

Excel

You can create a macro in either Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel that can open SigmaPlot
directly from either application.
To create this macro:

1. In either Microsoft Word or Excel, click the Microsoft Office Button, and then click
Excel Options.
2. In the Popular category, under Top options for working with Excel, select the Show
Developer tab in the Ribboncheck box, and then click OK.
3. Click the Developer tab, and then in the Codegroup, click Visual Basic.
4. Type (or copy and paste):

Sub SigmaPlot()
’
SigmaPlot Objects and Collections
’
SigmaPlot Macro
’

’
Dim SPApp as Object
Set SPApp = CreateObject("[Link].1")
[Link] = True
[Link]
End Sub 4.

5. Click Run. SigmaPlot appears with an empty worksheet and notebook window.

6. To run the macro, in Excel, on the Developer tab, in the Code group, click Macros.
7. Click Run. SigmaPlot appears with an empty worksheet and notebook window.

12.5.2 Running SigmaPlot Macros from the Command

Prompt

You can run SigmaPlot macros directly from your command prompt, saving you valuable time.
Suppose you need to produce the same graph report of a data set week after week. Rather than
going through the trouble of starting up SigmaPlot, opening a file, and then running a macro,
you can run the entire macro from a run command on the Start menu instead.

448
 12.5.3 Creating Macros as Menu Commands

1. In your command prompt type: c:\spw "filename" /runmacro:"macroname".

For example, if you want to run a macro you created called "ErrorBars", and it
is stored in a notebook file called "[Link]", you would type c:\spw
[Link]\runmacro:ErrorBar.
Tip: You can also create a batch file or script that runs SigmaPlot from the DOS command
prompt as part of the batch file’s set of operations.

12.5.3 Creating Macros as Menu Commands

You can place your macro as a menu command on the main menu that you specify. For
example, your new macro could appear on the main menu under the macro command "My
Macros".
To create a new menu command:

1. On the Toolbox tab, in the Macros group, click Macros.

2. Enter the same menu command name in the Menu Name field of future macros if you
want them to appear on your new macro command menu. By default, if the Menu Name
field is left empty, the macro name appears on the Tools menu. You can also create your
own menu by entering the menu name in the Menu Name field.

12.6 Using SigmaPlot’s Macros

SigmaPlot comes with an extensive library of Macros. The macros,
along with their corresponding sample data, can be found in:
ProgramFiles\SigmaPlot\SPW12\SigmaPlot Macro [Link].
SigmaPlot’s MacrosFor more information, see page 450.
You can double-click the macro in the Notebook Managerto run it. If the macro does not
have any errors or run into difficulties with your data, it will run to completion.
Note: You can also run a macro from the Macro script window. This is useful for debugging
the macro script.

12.6.1 How to Run a Macro

1. On the Toolbox tab, in the Macros group, click Macros.

2. Click Run.

449
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Select the macro to run from the Macro name list.

4. Click Run.

12.7 SigmaPlot’s Macros

SigmaPlot’s available macros are:
• ROC Curve Analysis.
• Area Below Curves. Integrates under curves using the trapezoidal rule.
• Batch Process Excel Files. Imports data from multiple Excel Files into individual
SigmaPlot worksheets, then plots and curve fits the imported data automatically.
• Border Plots. Draws a histogram or box plot along the top and right axes of a scatter plot.
• By Group Data Split. Splits data contained in one column into groups of data sorted into
multiple data columns within one SigmaPlot worksheet.
• Color Transition Values. Creates a column of colors changing smoothly in intensity as the
data changes from its minimum value to its maximum value.
• Compute 1st Derivative. Computes a numerical first derivative of a pair of data columns.
• Frequency Plot. Creates frequency plots with mean bars for multiple data columns.
• F-test Comparison of Curves. Compares the fits of two equations to determine if the more
complicated equation provides a significantly better fit.

450
 12.7.1 Area Below Curves

• Gaussian Cumulative Distribution. Returns the results of a GaussianFor more

information, see page . Cumulative Distribution function (CDF) for a single column of data,
and optionally plots the results with a probability Y axis scale.
• Insert Graphs into Microsoft Word. Inserts a SigmaPlot graph into an open Microsoft
Word document.
• Label Symbols. Labels a plot with symbols or text from a specified column.
• Merge Columns. Merges two separate worksheet columns into one single text column.
• Paste to PowerPoint Slide. Creates PowerPoint slides from selected SigmaPlot graphs.
• Piper Plots. Creates a Piper Plot.
• Plotting Polar and Parametric Equations. Creates curves in either CartesianFor more
information, see page . or polar coordinate systemsFor more information, see page ..
• Power Spectral Density. Computes the power spectral density (psd) for a data column.
• Quick Re-Plot. Re-assigns the columns that are plotted for the current curve in the current
two- or three-dimensional plot.
• Rank and Percentile. Computes ranks and cumulative percentages for a specified data
column.
• Survival Curve. Computes and graphs a Kaplan-Meier survival curve using the SurvlMod
transform.
• Vector Plot. Uses the vector transform to plot X,Y, angle and magnitude data as vectors
with arrowheads.

12.7.1 Area Below Curves

This macro integrates under curves using the trapezoidal rule. This can be used for equal or
unequally spaced x values. The algorithm is:
=
Area = yi(xi+1 xi)+ 0.5(yi+1 yi)(xi+1 xi)
i

Specify the column number for the results. Click Compute to calculate the area under the
curve. The results are in the Results Column.
Restrictions
• This macro only works using a SigmaPlot worksheet.
• This macro only works with plots with both X and Y data.
• A graph window containing a scatter or line plot must be open and in focus when running
the macro.

12.7.2 Batch Process Excel Files

Use this macro to import data from multiple Excel Files into individual SigmaPlot worksheets,
then plot and curve fit the imported data automatically. The macro plots the first two columns
of data for each file as a Simple Scatter Plot, curve fits the data using a Logistic, 4 parameter
equation, and generates a statistical report. You are then prompted to save the results in a
"[Link]" SigmaPlot notebook.
The following options are available:

451
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Single-step mode. Displays a dialog box after each step within the macro. For instance,
after the Excel data is imported a dialog box appears that states, "The data is imported from
the Excel Worksheet..." You must click OK to continue running the macro. By default, this
mode is disabled so that the macro runs without stopping at each step.
• Add File button. Opens the Select Excel File dialog box. Double-click the Excel file to
add it to the Excel files list.
• Excel Files. Select the Excel file in the Excel files list to activate this button. Click to delete
the file from the Excel files list.
• Import Range. Enter the starting and ending ranges to import from the first worksheet in
the Excel files. Only the first two columns of imported data are plotted and/or fit.
• Process. Plot data as a Simple Scatter Plot or a Simple Bar Chart. Curve fit data using an
equation from the drop-down list.
• Save notebook to. Shows the path where the [Link] notebook is saved.
• Browse. Select to save the [Link] notebook file to a folder other than the default.
You may edit the macro to change:
• To a different fit library.
• The default location of the source data block.
• Whether the data are plotted or fit.
• The file extension to import different file types.
Restrictions
• Only data from the first Excel worksheet from each file is imported.
• You cannot specify a different Excel worksheet.
• You must select an Excel file.
• You must select a curve in order to plot curve fit.
• You may change the default equation Only simple scatter and bar charts are available.

12.7.3 Bland-Altman Analysis

The Bland-Altman analysis compares two methods to see if they agree. It consists of
two graphs a method comparison graph and the Bland-Altman graph, and some statistics
associated with the latter.
Data
Double-click a column or click >> in the Available Columns list to move it into the
appropriate Method field under Selected Columns.
Plots
Select which type of plot you’d like to appear when you run the macro.
Plot Method 1 versus Method 2. This is a method comparison graph in which an XY
scatter plot of the two methods shows the results values. Select Add Linear Regression
Line to add a linear regression line, and Add Line of Equality to add a confidence lines and
the line of identity.
Plot Bland -Altman Graph. Select this option to produce a Bland-Altman graph, which is an
XY scatter plot in which the difference of the two methods is on the Y axis and the average of

452
 [Link] Bland-Altman Settings

the two methods is on the X axis. The mean of the differences is displayed together with the
Limits of Agreement for the difference data.
Bland-Altman Difference Statistics
The Bland-Altman graph appears with the following Difference Statistics:
Bias. The mean of the differences.
Std Dev. The standard deviation of the differences.
Limits of Agreement. The mean of the differences (bias) +- 1.96 (or 2) times the standard
deviation of the differences.
Confidence Intervals (CI). These are the 95% or 99% CIs for the:
• Bias
• Lower limit of agreement
• Upper limit of agreement
Options
Click Options to view and edit the Bland-Altman settings.

[Link] Bland-Altman Settings

Statistics
Number of SDs (Standard Deviations). This option is used in the Limits of Agreement
computation. Select either 1.96 or 2.
No. of decimal places. This option sets the number of decimal places in the difference
statistics.
CIs (Confidence Intervals) to be used for B-A plot. Used in difference statistic Confidence
Interval computation. Select either 95% or 99%.
Add confidence lines. Select 95%, 99% or None for the Method Comparison Graph
regression confidence lines.
GoTo Column Position. Allows viewing the extents ofyour data while the Bland-Altman
graph Dialog is displayed.
Graph Options. Select to place both graphs on either one or two pages.

12.7.4 Border Plots

This macro draws a histogram or box plot along the top and right axes of a scatter plot. The
border plots are located .5 inches from each axis. When using histogram border plots, specify
the number of bins displayed.
Restrictions
• A graph window containing a scatter plot must be open and in focus when running the
macro. If the current plot is not a scatter plot, the macro can convert the plot to the required
form.
• If the plot is an X only or Y only plot, the macro creates one border plot corresponding
to the X or Y axis.

453
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.7.5 By Group Data Split

This macro splits data contained in one column into groups of data sorted into multiple data
columns within one SigmaPlot worksheet.
The following options are available:
• Data Column. Define the column to begin the data grouping, and to use as column
headings.
• Group Column. Define the column data to group. This column should not have empty cells.
• Output Column. Define the column to begin placing the group results. The default is
the First Empty column found in the worksheet. Change the output column location by
entering the number of the worksheet column. The Output column must be greater than
the last data column.
• Sort Data. within the Group Arranges the data within each group into ascending order.
Restrictions
• To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.
• The worksheet must have at least two columns of data.
• Can accept empty cells. Puts "–" into grouped cell to indicate an empty cell or missing data.
• Group Column should not have empty cells.
• Grouped Data Column Heading Titles correspond to the Group Column contents.
• Output column entry must be numeric and greater than the last data column.

12.7.6 Color Transition Values

This macro creates a column of colors changing smoothly in intensity as the data changes from
its minimum value to its maximum value and employs this gradient to color the symbols in a
scatter plot. Define X and Y columns, as well as the column for displaying the color gradient.
The Y column generates the gradient. The scatter plot plots the Y column against the X
column with the color column determining the symbol color.
Restrictions
To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.

12.7.7 Compute 1st Derivative

This macro computes a numerical first derivative of a pair of data columns. It computes
the running average of specified adjacent first order derivatives. Both the original data and
resulting derivative values can be plotted automatically.
The SigmaPlot transform language ’diff’ function is used to compute the first order differences
in x and y required for the numerical derivative. The data need not be sorted by x. Replicate x
values and the associated y values are row-wise deleted to eliminate zero divides.
To run the macro, choose the first data column and results column. You can also change the
length used to determine the running average. Use even values for the length of the running
average to place each derivative at the midpoint of the derivatives used in the average. Use
odd values to place it at the first point to the left of midpoint.

454
 12.7.8 Dot Density Plot

For even running average length values, there will be len/2 empty cells at the beginning
and end of the derivative values.
Finally, you can also automatically generate graphs of the original data and the derivatives.

12.7.8 Dot Density Plot

Data Selection
Select multiple data columns using the First Column (left most) and Last Column (right
most) of data. The data column range need not start in column 1 and may contain empty
columns. The number of data columns is limited to 30 except with percentiles lines which
are then limited to 5.
Graph Attributes
Symbol Size. Select Auto to obtain a reasonable symbol size. Enter a symbol size to obtain
exactly that size.
% Overlap. A positive value overlaps the symbols to obtain a grape cluster effect. A negative
value creates space between the symbols.
% Width. The percent of total horizontal space taken up by the widest portions of multiple
dot densities. Adjustment may be required in some cases to allow space for percentile or
box plot display.
Symmetry. The dot density can be symmetric or one-sided.
Orientation.
• Vertical. The X axis is the variable, the Y axis is categorical.
• Horizontal. The Y axis is the variable, the X axis is categorical.
Graph Dimensions
Select the height and width of the graph. This allows the symbols to touch for different sized
graphs.
Axis Scale
Select Linear or Logarithmic.
Axis Range
• Automatic. Select Automatic if you’d like the axis minimum, maximum and tick interval
to bedetermined automatically.
If you leave Automatic clear, enter Minimum and Maximum values. These must exceed
the minimum and maximum for all data. The data minimum and maximum are displayed
when the Axis Range is set to Automatic.
Other Lines
Line Type.
• None.
• Mean. Displays a mean line across the dot density.
• Median. Displays a median line across the dot density.
• Percentiles. Shows "internal" percentile values next to each dot density.
• Box Plot. Draws a box plot next to each dot density.

455
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Line Length (Percentiles only).

• Short. Draws a short indicator line for each percentile.
• Long. Draws a line across the dot density for each percentile.

12.7.9 Frequency Plot

Creates frequency plots with mean bars for multiple data columns. The following options are
available:
• Column Selection. Specify the number of data columns. The analysis includes all columns
between the first and the specified column, inclusive. Each column corresponds to a group.
In addition, define the column in which to begin placing the macro results.
• Graph Dimensions. Set the height and width of the frequency plot in inches.
• Bins. The Vertical Interval indicates the range into which data points will be grouped.
The Start Value defines the smallest vertical interval value. A value of 0 corresponds to a
vertical range from 0 to 100.
• Mean/Median Lines. Add a line (of the specified width) corresponding to the mean or
median for each group. Symbols Size defines the diameter of the plotting symbols. Gap
represents the horizontal distance between symbols as a percentage of the symbol diameter.
Restrictions
• To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.
• Data must begin in column 1.

12.7.10 F Test Comparison of Curves

You can use the F Test Comparison of Curves macro to compare the fits of two equations to
determine if the more complicated equation provides a significantly better fit. For the test to
be valid the two equations must be nested; i.e., the simpler equation must be a subset of
the more complicated one.
The F test is a hypothesis test with the null hypothesis being that the simpler equation is
correct. An F ratio is computed which compares the relative difference in the sum of squares
of the two fits to the relative increase in the number of degrees of freedom. If this value is
significantly greater than 1.0 then the null hypothesis is rejected and the more complicated
equation is chosen as the best fit. A P value is used to determine if the F value is significantly
greater than 1.0. If P < 0.05 then the null hypothesis is rejected and the more complex model
is considered the best.
An example is to determine whether the double exponential rise to maximum equation
provides a better fit to the data than a single exponential rise to maximum.
Single Exponential Rise to Maximum

f= z 1 e
( bx
)
Double Exponential Rise to Maximum

456
 12.7.10 F Test Comparison of Curves

f= z 1 e
( )+ c(1
bx
e dx
)
Fitting these two equations to the data in the graph below gives the relative increase in the
sum of squares

(SS sim ple SS com plex ) = (9.2521 9.0477)

= 0.02259
SS com plex 9.0477

and the relative increase in the degrees of freedom

(D F sim ple D F com plex ) = (42 40)

= 0.05
D F com plex 40

The F ratio is the ratio of these two which is

0.02259
F= = 0.4518
0.05

The P value is computed from the F distribution and is P = 0.65.

If you fit the simpler equation first and then the more complex equation the macro will select
for you all the options in F-test Comparison of Curves dialog box.

457
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Otherwise you can enter by hand the number of parameters in each equation (simpler equation
first) and the columns containing the fit residuals for each equation.
The results are given in the report.

12.7.11 Gaussian Cumulative Distribution

This macro returns the results of a Gaussian Cumulative Distribution function (CDF) for a
single column of data, and optionally plots the results with a probability Y axis scale. The
error function is approximated with a polynomial approximation.

12.7.12 Insert Graphs into Microsoft Word

Use this macro to insert a SigmaPlot graph into an open Microsoft Word document.

1. In your Word Document, place your cursor at the position where you want to insert the
graph.
2. The macro lists all graph pages in your currently active notebook. Select the page
containing the graph(s) you want to insert.
3. Adjust the size and positioning of the figure as desired, then click Insert. All graphs on the
selected page are placed into the specified frame. The next version of this macro will also
allow selection of a specific graph on a page.
4. To insert additional graphs from this notebook, move to where you want to place the
graph in Word, then switch back to SigmaPlot, click the desired page, and click Insert.

Restrictions
You must have both a Word Document and a SigmaPlot notebook open in order to use
this macro.

458
 12.7.13 Label Symbols

12.7.13 Label Symbols

This macro labels a scatter or simple bar plot with text from a specified column. Select an
offset percentage and one of eight locations for the labels. The offset percentage is a percent of
each axis range - 3 to 5 percent is a good starting value. If you have more than one plot in your
graph then select the plot you want to label by clicking on a symbol or bar of the particular plot.
Rerun the macro to obtain the best position for the labels and then use Graph, Delete Plot to
remove the unwanted label plots.
You can label the plot with numbers by placing the numbers in a column and using Format,
Cells to change the numbers to text. Then format each text-number for a pleasing appearance
by removing places to the right of the decimal point, and so on.
If the label column contains fewer entries than the plot contains symbols or bars, labeling
continues by returning to the first case of the label column. For example, in a scatterplot
containing six points, if the label column contains three entries (A,B,C), the points are labeled
(A,B,C,A,B,C).
Restrictions
• A graph window must be open and in focus when running the macro.
• The macro is restricted to scatter and simple bar charts and is not applicable to stacked or
grouped bar charts.

12.7.14 Merge Columns

This macro merges two separate worksheet columns into one single text column. This is
useful if you have two text fields that need to be combined into one, or if you have imported
data that contains dates in one column and time in another.
To run the macro, simply select the first and second columns to merge, then click OK.
Restrictions
At least two columns of data must present on your worksheet. The results are automatically
placed into the first empty column after the last data column.

12.7.15 Paste to PowerPoint Slide

This macro creates PowerPoint slides from selected SigmaPlot graphs.

To create a PowerPoint slide:

1. Open PowerPoint and create a new presentation or open an existing one.

2. Select the slide where you want to place the SigmaPlot graph.
3. Select a slide background if so desired.
4. In SigmaPlot select the graph or multiple graphs that you want to paste into PowerPoint.
5. On the Toolbox tab, in the Tools group, click Paste to PowerPoint Slide.

459
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. Use the Property Browser to edit graph Plots, Axes, Grids and Planes, and Title and
Legend.

7. Select Bold textand Change the text color toto contrast with the PowerPoint background
color. Note that Transparent Graph Background selected. This allows the PowerPoint
background color to show through the graph.
8. Thicken the lines and change their color if so desired.
9. Click OK. PowerPoint opens, and the graph object appears centered in a new PowerPoint
slide.

To edit the graph object in PowerPoint:

10. Use the Property Browser to edit graph Plots, Axes, Grids and Planes, and Title and
Legend.

11. Open the PowerPoint presentation with the inserted SigmaPlot graph.
12. Use the Property Browser to edit graph Plots, Axes, Grids and Planes, and Title and
Legend.

12.7.16 Piper Plots

To create a Piper plot:

1. Make sure the values of your four cations and three anions are entered into seven columns.
2. Pick the units the data use. If the units used do not match any of the options (percentages,
mg/l, or mmol/l) then you will need to transform your data to one of these units.
3. Assign the column for each cation/anion as desired by selecting a worksheet column from
the Worksheet columns list, the cation/anion from the Assign to list, and clicking the
Assign button. You column assignments are listed under Assigned columns.
4. When finished, click OK.

About the Piper Diagram

The PIPER diagram (Piper, 1944) is a plot commonly used by hydrogeologists and
hydrologists to display water chemistry data. It has the advantage that many different
water samples can be plotted on one graph. The major dissolved ionic species in most
natural waters are Ca2+, Mg2+, Na+, K+, Cl-, HCO3- and SO42-. The PIPER diagram
displays the relative proportions of the major cations (positively charged ions) and

460
 12.7.16 Piper Plots

anions (negatively charged ions) on two adjacent triangular plots (Figure 1). For plotting
purposes, Na and K are grouped together. Each apex of the triangle represents 100% of
that component and mixtures of components plot either along the axes (for 2 components)
or within the triangle (for 3 components).

Figure 12.3 PIPER diagram showing how the relative proportions of cations
and anions are plotted.

The PIPER diagram above shows how the relative proportions of cations and anions are
plotted. The diamond shaped graph is used to represent the composition of water with
respect to both cations and anions. This graph has the advantage that mixing between
two waters plots as a straight line. The cation and anion points for each sample are
projected onto the diamond shaped field along a line parallel to the outer axes of each
triangular plot as shown on Figure 1 and the intersection of these points is plotted. The
PIPER diagram can be used to classify "hydrochemical facies" or "water-types" based on
the dominant ions.
The proportions of different elements provide information on the chemical history
of groundwaters and indicate the dominant chemical reactions that occur between
groundwater and the rocks through which it passes. Some data from a sandstone aquifer
in Yorkshire are shown on Figure 3 where it can be seen that the groundwaters generally
vary from a Ca-HCO3 type to a Ca SO4 type due to the dissolution of the minerals calcite
(CaCO3) and gypsum (CaSO4). Some samples also trend towards the Na and Cl apex
of the plots due to mixing with an old seawater component (dominated by Na and Cl).
Piper, A.M. 1944 A graphic procedure in the geochemical interpretation of water analysis.
Transactions, American Geophysical Union, 25, 914-923.

461
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.4 The distribution of water types from a sandstone aquifer in the Vale
of York displayed on a PIPER diagram.

The PIPER diagram above displays the distribution of water types from a sandstone
aquifer in the Vale of York.

12.7.17 Plotting Polar and Parametric Equations

This macro creates curves in either Cartesian or polar coordinate systems.

1. Select Rectangular or Polar as the Coordinate System.

2. Select Single Equation or Parametric as the Curve Description.

A curve description can be:

• A single equation relating the two coordinate variables (such as y=x^2 or r =
cos(2*theta)).
• A pair of equations that define the coordinate values of points on the curve in terms of a
third parameter variable (such as x = cos(t), y=sin(t), or r= t*sin(2*t), theta = t^2).
3. Click Close to close the dialog box.

4. Set the range of the independent variable and the number of sampled intervals within
that range.
5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

462
 12.7.18 Power Spectral Density

12.7.18 Power Spectral Density

Computes the power spectral density (psd) for a data column. Specify two columns: the data
column and the results column. In addition, define the sampling frequency and whether the
macro should employ a Hanning window.
The macro creates two plots:
• Amplitude versus Time
• PSD versus Frequency
Restrictions
To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.

12.7.19 Quick Re-Plot

This macro quickly re-assigns the columns that are plotted for the current curve in the current
two- or three-dimensional plot. Click Next Curve to change the plotted columns for several
curves simultaneously.
Restrictions
To run the macro, a graph must be open and in focus.

12.7.20 Rank and Percentile

Computes ranks and cumulative percentages for a specified data column. Specify the
following:
• Data Column. The data to be ranked. SigmaPlot also computes cumulative percentages
for this column.
• Percentile Column. A column containing percentiles. SigmaPlot returns the raw value
corresponding to these percentiles.
• Results Column. The worksheet column at which the results should begin.
• Percentile Type. One of two methods of computing percentiles must be selected.
• Numeric. No adjustment made to the values.
• Graphing. The Cleveland definition of percentiles described in The Elements of Graphing
Data by William S. Cleveland (1985), in which .5 is subtracted from the positions before
computing percentages.
The macro returns the sorted data, an index of the original positions, the ranks, and the
cumulative percentages. Specifying a column of percentiles yields the values corresponding
to those percentiles.
Restrictions
To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.

463
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12.7.21 ROC Curve Analysis

Receiver operating characteristic (ROC) curves are used in medicine to determine a cutoff
value for a clinical test (its origin, and the origin of its name, is from radar signal detection).
For example, the cutoff value of 4.0 ng/ml was determined for the prostate specific antigen
(PSA) test for prostate cancer. A test value below 4.0 is considered to be normal and above 4.0
to be abnormal. Clearly there will be patients with PSA values below 4.0 that are abnormal
(false negative) and those above 4.0 that are normal (false positive). The goal of an ROC
curve analysis is to determine the cutoff value.
Assume that there are two groups of men. By using a "gold standard" technique, one group is
known to be normal (negative), not to have prostate cancer, and the other is known to have
prostate cancer (positive). A blood measurement of prostate-specific antigen is made in all
men and used to test for the disease. The test will find some, but not all, abnormals to have
the disease. The ratio of the abnormals found by the test to the total number of abnormals
known to have the disease is the true positive rate (also known as sensitivity). The test
will find some, but not all, normals to not have the disease. The ratio of the normals found
by the test to the total number of normals (known from the ‘gold standard’ technique) is
the true negative rate (also known as specificity). The hope is that the ROC curve analysis
of the PSA test will find a cutoff value that will, in some way, minimize the number of false
positives and false negatives. Minimizing the false positives and false negatives is the same as
maximizing the sensitivity and specificity.
For the PSA test abnormal values are large (> 4) and normal values are small (<4). This is not
always the case, however, so the present module allows for both conditions of abnormal being
larger and abnormal being smaller.
The ROC curve is a graph of sensitivity (y-axis) versus 1 – specificity (x-axis). An example is
shown below. Maximizing sensitivity corresponds to some large y value on the ROC curve.
Maximizing specificity corresponds to a small x value on the ROC curve. Thus a good first
choice for a test cutoff value is that value which corresponds to a point on the ROC curve
nearest to the upper left corner of the ROC graph. This is not always true however. For
example, in some screening applications it is important not to miss detecting an abnormal
therefore it is more important to maximize sensitivity (minimize false negatives) than to
maximize specificity. In this case the optimal cutoff point on the ROC curve will move
from the vicinity of the upper left corner over toward the upper right corner. In prostate
cancer screening, however, because benign enlargement of the prostate can lead to abnormal
(high) PSA values, false positives are common and undesirable (expensive biopsy, emotional
impact). In this case maximizing specificity is important (moving toward the lower left corner
of the ROC curve).

464
 [Link] Data Entry

An important measure of the accuracy of the clinical test is the area under the ROC curve. If
this area is equal to 1.0 then the ROC curve consists of two straight lines, one vertical from 0,0
to 0,1 and the next horizontal from 0,1 to 1,1. This test is 100% accurate because both the
sensitivity and specificity are 1.0 so there are no false positives and no false negatives. On the
other hand a test that cannot discriminate between normal and abnormal corresponds to an
ROC curve that is the diagonal line from 0,0 to 1,1. The ROC area for this line is 0.5. ROC
curve areas are typically between 0.5 and 1.0 like shown in above.
Two or more tests can be compared by statistically comparing the ROC areas for each test.
The tests may be correlated because they occurred from multiple measurements on the
same individual. Or they may not be correlated because they resulted from measurements
on different individuals. The ROC Curves Analysis Module refers to this as "Paired" and
"Unpaired", respectively, and can analyze either situation.
The test measurements may contain missing values and two methods are provided to handle
missing values when comparing ROC areas- pair-wise deletion and case-wise deletion. This
is described in detail later.
Given a value for the probability that the patient has the disease (pre-test probability) the
probability that the patient has the disease, given the value of the test measurement, can be
computed. Also, given a value for the false-positive/false-negative cost ratio (for the screening
example above, the false-negative cost would be greater than the false-positive cost), an
optimal test value cutoff can be computed. The present module allows entry of the pre-test
probability and the false-positive/false-negative cost ratio.

[Link] Data Entry

You can enter data in two formats:

• Indexed. For more information, see page .
• Grouped. For more information, see page .

465
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link].1 Indexed Data Format

This is the format found in statistics programs such as Systat and SigmaStat. "Indexed" is
the terminology used in SigmaStat. It has one column that indexes another column (or
other columns). It is also the format of the output of logistic regression where ROC curves
are used to determine the ability of different logistic models to discriminate negative from
positive test results (normals from abnormals). Each data set consists of a pair of columns – a
classification variable and a test variable. The classification variable has a binary state that is
either negative (normal) or positive (abnormal). Many programs use a value of 1 for positive
and 0 for negative. The classification variable is required to be located in column 1 of the
worksheet. The test variable is a continuous numeric variable and contains the test results.
A single test variable will be located in column 2. Multiple test variables will be located
in multiple columns starting in column 2. There is no built-in limit for the number of test
variables. There is only one classification variable for multiple test variables and it is located
in column 1. The test variable columns must be left justified and contiguous. Therefore, no
empty columns to the left of or within the data are allowed.
The following example shows a few rows of data for two data sets. The first column is
the classification variable. It contains a column title "Thyroid Function", which is the
classification variable name. It also contains the two classification states "Hypothyroid" and
"Euthyroid" (normal thyroid function). Hypothyroid and Euthyroid are the abnormal and
normal classification states, respectively. T4 and T5 are the names of different blood tests
that will be used in the ROC analysis to discriminate between normal and abnormal and then
compared to determine which is the better test. The classification variable must be in column 1
and the two test variables in the two columns adjacent to it.
The classification variable name will be obtained from the column 1 column title if it exists.
The test names will be obtained from the column titles of the test variable columns if they
exist. The classification state names will be obtained from the entries in the cells of column 1.
If no column titles have been entered for the test variables then default names for the tests,
"Test 1", "Test 2", etc., will be used and displayed in the graphs and reports. The test variable
names should be unique but the program will subscript any identical names that are not.

466
 [Link].2 Grouped Data Format

Figure 12.5 Indexed data format for two tests. The test names are T4 and T5,
the classification states are Euthyroid and Hypothyroid and the Classification
variable name is Thyroid Function. The index column is always column 1 and
data columns must be left adjusted.

There must be two or more non-missing data points for each test for each classification state.
Missing values are handled automatically by the analysis. For data columns, missing values
are everything but numeric values (blank cells, the SigmaPlot double-dash missing value
symbol, "+inf", "-inf", "NaN", etc.). Missing values are ignored for all computations except
the Paired area comparison (see the Missing Value Method section) where they are handled
using one of two possible algorithms.

[Link].2 Grouped Data Format

The grouped data format consists of pairs of data columns - one pair for each test. One
column in a data pair consists of the negative (normal) data values and the other column for
positive (abnormal) values. So, for example, if two tests are to be compared, the worksheet
will contain four columns of data - the first two columns for the first test and the third and
fourth column for the second test.
A specific column title format is used to identify the test associated with the data column pair
and the classification states within each pair. The user is encouraged to use this format since it
clearly identifies the data in the data worksheet and will annotate all the graphs and reports
generated. It is not necessary to use column titles as the program will identify column pairs
starting in column 1 with the generated test names "Test 1", "Test 2", etc., and will arbitrarily
assign "1" and "0" classification state names to the first and second columns, respectively, but
this is clearly not the best way to organize the data. Since the test names and classification
states are numerical it is also more difficult to interpret the results.

Column Title Convention for Grouped Data

This column title convention is a simple way to identify worksheet data for the Grouped data
format. The following example shows a few rows for two data sets. The first two columns
contain the data for the T4 test. The first column “T4 - Euthyroid” is the column with the
normal data for test T4. The column title consists of the test name followed by a minus sign
followed by the classification state. Spaces on either side of the minus sign are ignored. The

467
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

second column “T4 - Hypothyroid” is the column with the abnormal data for test T4. The third
and fourth column titles are the same as the first two except the second test name T5 is used.

Figure 12.6 Grouped data format for two tests. This is the same data as in the
figure above. There are two tests T4 and T5. Each test consists of a pair of data
columns. In this case T4 is in columns 1 and 2 and T5 in columns 3 and 4. The
“Test-State” column title format is used to identify the two tests and the normal
(Euthyroid) and abnormal (Hypothyroid) states.

The test names in both columns of a column pair must be the same. Also there must be exactly
two classification states in the column titles.
Like Indexed format, missing values in the worksheet cells are ignored except for special
handling when comparing ROC areas (see the Missing Value Method section).

[Link] ROC Module Options

To run the ROC Curve Analysis:

1. On the Toolbox tab, in the Tools group, click ROC Curves.

[Link].1 Data Format

Data Format. In most case the program will identify the data format from the information in
the data worksheet. In the dialog above the format was identified as Indexed. You may select
from the two formats: Indexed and Grouped.
Data Type. If two or more data sets are selected then the Data Type option for correlated
tests is available.

468
 [Link].1 Data Format

You may select either Paired, for correlated tests, or Unpaired. If Paired is selected the ROC
areas and area comparisons are determined using the DeLong, Delong and Clarke-Pearson
method(2). If Unpaired is selected the areas are computed using the Hanley and McNeil
method(3) and the areas are compared using a Z test.
Missing Value Method. If missing values exist then two options are available for the pairwise
comparison of ROC areas - Pairwise Deletion and Casewise Deletion. This option is not
available if no missing values exist.
Pairwise deletion only deletes rows containing missing values for the particular pair being
analyzed – not for an entire row of data. Fewer data values are deleted using this method.
There are situations when pairwise deletion will fail but this is the option to use when it is
possible. Casewise deletion deletes all cells in any row of data containing a missing value.
Much more data may be deleted using this option. To better understand the difference,
consider a simple example of two data columns of equal length one of which has no missing
values and the other has one missing value. When ROC areas are being compared, certain
computations on these two columns will be done pairwise - the first column with itself, the first
column with the second column and the second column with itself. When the column without
a missing value is being compared with itself no row deletions occur for pairwise deletion.
For casewise deletion, however, the row that contains the missing value will be deleted from
both data sets. So, for casewise deletion, the computation involving the column without
a missing value with itself will be done with one row deleted (the row corresponding to the
missing value in the other data set). The module determines when pairwise deletion is not
valid and informs the user when this is the case.
Positive State Options - Classification State and Direction. The two classification states
are referred to as "Negative" (normal) or "Positive" (abnormal). The ROC analysis software
must be informed which state is "Positive" and whether the test measurement values for the
positive state are "High", meaning higher than those of the negative state, or "Low", meaning
lower than those of the negative state.
Accepted normal values for the PSA (prostate specific antigen) test are less than 4 ng/ml and
abnormal values are higher than this. Thus if the two classification states names are "positive"
and “negative” then the Positive state is "positive" and the Positive Direction is "High". In this
case you would select the radio button next to "positive" and "High".
On the other hand, for the T4 (thyroxine) test for hypothyroidism the T4 values are lower
in the abnormal state than for the normal state. In this case the abnormal Positive State is
"Hypothyroid" and the Positive Direction is "Low". So you would select the radio button
next to "Hypothyroid" and "Low".
What happens if you select the incorrect option? Sensitivity (specificity) is defined in terms of
the positive (negative) state. So if the positive state is incorrectly selected then sensitivity and
specificity will be incorrectly defined (switched) and the ROC curve will have the X and Y
axes switched. This will result in an ROC curve that appears below the diagonal unity line. It
will have an area less than 0.5. The module will detect this and give you the options.
It is possible that there is something wrong with the data so you can Abort the analysis and
correct the problem. More likely you have selected the incorrect positive state or direction so
you can Retry the analysis with correct selections. In rare occasions for multiple tests some
tests will have areas greater than 0.5 and one or more will have areas less than 0.5. In this case
you can Ignore this warning and continue with the analysis.
Available Data Sets - Selected Data Sets. Select one or more of the available data sets by
clicking on them in the Available Data Sets window and then clicking on the Add button. If
desired, you may then select a test name in the Selected Data Sets window and click Remove
to deselect the test.

469
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link].2 Reports

Confidence Intervals. Confidence intervals are computed for statistics in both the Sensitivity
and Specificity and Area Comparison reports. You can generate 90, 95 and 99% confidence
intervals.
Create Sensitivity and Specificity Report. Cutoff values are created between each test data
value in the (sorted) data set. If there are a large number of data points and several tests
then there will be a large number of cutoff values and the Sensitivity & Specificity Report
can be very long. If you clear this option then all report options in the dialog below this
are not required and are disabled.
Fractions/Percents. You may display sensitivities, specificities and probabilities in either
fraction or percent format. Selecting Percents also requires the pre-test probability to be
entered as a percent.
Create Post-Test Results. Selecting this option allows entry of the pre-test probability. It
also enables the possible entry of the false-positive/false-negative cost ratio. Given a pre-test
probability the program will create post-test probabilities, both the positive predictive value
(PV + = probability of disease given a positive test result) and the negative predictive value
(PV - = probability of no disease given a negative test result), for each cutoff value. If the cost
ratio option is selected then the optimal cutoff value will be computed. All of these results are
displayed for each test in the Sensitivity & Specificity report.
ROC Graph Options. All of the graph options in the dialog apply to the ROC graph. They
allow you to add a diagonal line to the graph, add grid lines, add symbols for sensitivity and
specificity at each cutoff point and change the ROC plot lines from solid to different line styles.

[Link] ROC Analysis Results

Typical results of the ROC analysis are shown in the following example from the Notebook
Manager.

[Link].1 ROC Curves Graph

The ROC curves graph for three data sets is shown below. These graphs are derived from
numerical results in the worksheet entitled Graph Data. The graph title is obtained from the
section name containing the raw data. The legend shows the test names and the ROC areas for
each curve. The diagonal line and grids options were selected for this graph.

470
 [Link].2 Dot Histogram Graph

Figure 12.7 The ROC curves graph for three tests

Of course, you can edit this graph in any way you wish. You might want to change the starting
color of the color scheme used for the line colors.

[Link].2 Dot Histogram Graph

Dot histograms for the data associated with the ROC curves are shown below.

471
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.8 Dot histogram pairs for each test. The horizontal lines and the
tables below the graph show the optimal cutoff values determined from the
pre-test probability and cost ratio.

The graph title is obtained from the title of the section containing the raw data. The x-axis tick
labels are obtained from the test names and the classification state names. The tick labels will
rotate if they are too long to fit horizontally. The symbol layout design allows for symbols to
touch horizontally and nest vertically.
If values for pre-test probability and false-positive/false-negative cost ratio are entered then
the optimal cutoff values for each test are computed and represented as a horizontal line across
the two dot histograms for each test. The numeric values for the optimal cutoff parameters are
shown as tables below the x-axis.

[Link].3 Sensitivity and Specificity Report

The sensitivity and specificity report contains results for all tests with additional tests results
placed in report rows below those of prior tests. The results for each test can be separated
into three parts:
• Optimal cutoff value.
• Sensitivity and specificity versus cutoff values.
• Likelihood ratios and post-test probabilities.
If values for both pre-test probability and cost ratio have been entered then the optimal cutoff
is calculated. A slope of the tangent to the ROC curve m is defined in terms of the two entered
values (P = pre-test probability).
false positivecost 1 P
m=
false negative cost P

472
 [Link].3 Sensitivity and Specificity Report

The optimal cutoff value is computed from sensitivity and specificity using the slope m by
finding the cutoff that maximizes the function
Sensitivity m (1 Specificity)

The results of this computation in the Sensitivity & Specificity report are shown below.

Figure 12.9 Optimal cutoff results in the Sensitivity and Specificity report.

For this data set, the optimal cutoff is 7.125 for a pre-test probability of 0.5 and cost ratio of 1.0.
Sensitivities, specificities and their confidence intervals are listed as a function of cutoff value
in the second part of the report. A portion of these results is shown in the table below. These
results can be expressed as fractions or percents by using the Fractions/Percents option.

473
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.10 Sensitivity and specificity results in the Sensitivity and Specificity
report.

The third part of the Sensitivity and Specificity report contains the likelihood ratios and
post-test probabilities.
The positive and negative likelihood ratios are defined respectively as
Probability of a positivetestgiven thepresenceof disease Sensitivity
LR + = =
Probability of a positivetestgiven theabsenceof disease 1 Specificity

Probability of a negativetestgiven thepresenceof disease 1 Sensitivity

LR = =
Probability of a negativetestgiven theabsenceof disease Specificity

A portion of the report showing the likelihood and post-test probabilities results is shown
below.

474
 [Link].4 ROC Areas Report

Figure 12.11 Positive and negative likelihood ratios, LR+ and LR-, and post-test
probabilities, PV+ and PV-, in the Sensitivity and Specificity report.

The positive likelihood ratio is not defined for some cutoff values since specificity = 1.

[Link].4 ROC Areas Report

The ROC Area report consists of two parts:

• ROC areas and their associated statistics.
• Pairwise comparison of ROC areas.
An example of a report is shown in below.

475
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.12 An example ROC Areas report. From top to bottom it shows the
type of analysis used together with the missing value method, the ROC areas
and associated statistics and a pairwise comparison of ROC areas.

In this case there are three correlated tests. Row two of the report shows that a Paired Analysis
was performed and, since there were missing values in the data, Pairwise Deletion of missing
values was selected to compare the areas.
The first section of the report shows the ROC curve areas for the three tests. This is followed
by the standard error of the area estimate, the 95% confidence interval (90% and 99% are also
available) and the P value that determines if the area value is significantly different from 0.5.
The sample size and the number of missing values for each classification state are given. The
number of missing values reflects only what is seen in the data and does not give the number
used for each computation-pair in the pairwise-deleted comparison of areas.
The second section shows the results of the pairwise comparison of areas. The method
of DeLong, DeLong and Clarke-Pearson(2) is used to compare areas when the Paired data
type option is selected. When the Unpaired data type is selected, areas are compared using
a Z test. The report shows results for all pairs of data sets. The difference of each area pair
and its standard error and 95% confidence interval are computed. This is followed by the
chi-square statistic for the area comparison (or Z statistic if Unpaired is selected) and its
associated P value.

Formatted Full Precision Display

This report presents the numeric results in a four significant digit format with full precision
available. Double click on any cell (except the confidence intervals) to display the number at
full precision.

Additional Graphs
Results data in both reports can be used to create additional graphs. Some examples seen in
the literature are shown here.

476
 Sensitivity and Specificity versus Cutoff

Sensitivity and Specificity versus Cutoff

The data for the graph in the graph below is from the Sensitivity & Specificity report in
columns 1, 2 and 4. Use the Data Sampling option in Graph Properties, Plots, Data to specify
the row range for the graph (you can also drag select the rows in the worksheet to do this).

Figure 12.13 Graph of sensitivity and specificity versus. cutoff for one test
using data from columns 1,2 and 4 of the Sensitivity & Specificity report.

Likelihood Ratios

The positive and negative likelihood ratios for three different imaging modalities are shown in
below (the data is artificial). The data is in columns 1, 6 and 7 of the Sensitivity & Specificity
report. The values associated with the optimal cutoff are shown as solid symbols. The largest
positive likelihood and smallest negative likelihood at the optimal cutoff is associated with
magnetic resonance imaging (MR).

477
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.14 Positive and negative likelihood ratios graphed from data in the
Sensitivity and Specificity report from columns 1, 6 and 7. The results for
three tests are shown together with values associated with the optimal cutoff
(solid symbols).

Optimal Cutoff versus Cost Ratio

Frequently it can be difficult to determine a value for the false-positive/false-negative cost
ratio. So it is worth performing a sensitivity analysis (sensitivity here means how much one
variable changes with changes in a second variable) to see whether the cutoff value changes
significantly in the range of cost-ratio values of interest. The ROC Curves Module was run
multiple times for different cost ratios and a graph of optimal cutoff vs. cost ratio for the
three imaging modality tests is shown below.

Figure 12.15 Optimal cutoff values obtained from multiple runs of the module.
Regions of insensitivity, or strong sensitivity, to cost ratio can be identified.

If the relative cost of a false-positive is much greater than that of a false-negative then the
cost ratio is greater than 1. But let’s assume that we don’t know exactly how much greater

478
 Post-Test Probability Versus Pre-Test Probability

it is but have some idea that it should be in the range of 2 to 5, say. Looking at the optimal
cutoff for the best imaging modality (MR, green line) we find that it doesn’t change for cost
ratios from 2 to 20. So the optimal cutoff is insensitive to cost ratio and, in this case, it is not
important to know a precise value for cost-ratio.

Post-Test Probability Versus Pre-Test Probability

Given values of sensitivity and specificity associated with the optimal cutoff a graph of
post-test probabilities as a function of pre-test probability can be created using equations (5)
and (6). The post-test probability of disease when the test is positive, blue lines in the graph
below, was obtained from equation (5) and the post-test probability of disease when the test
was negative, red lines, was obtained from 1.0 minus equation (6). A transform was written
in SigmaPlot implementing these two equations that generated the post-test probabilities for
a range of pre-test probabilities. The results for the best test, MR, and worst test, US, are
shown. The MR test is clearly better since the post-test probability range, from negative test to
positive test, is larger. Thus given a positive test the patient is more likely to have the disease
using the MR test rather than the US test. Similarly, given a negative test it is less likely that
the patient has the disease using the MR test.

Figure 12.16 Post-test probabilities of disease given positive and negative

test results. The MR test is based on sensitivity = 0.94 and specificity = 0.97
whereas the US test used sensitivity = 0.78 and specificity = 0.85.

12.7.22 Standard Curve

A standard curve is used to calibrate an instrument or assay. The Standard Curves macro
provides five equations that may be fit to your data. These range from a straight line equation
to two different five parameter logistic equations.
The X data may or may not be logarithmic and, if not, may still be graphed logarithmically.
Multiple Y replicate columns may be used.

479
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Predicted values may be obtained after the curve fit is performed: Y values from Xs, X values
from Ys, and ECxx values from xx percentages. These predicted values may be added to your
graph as symbols with drop-lines to the X and Y axes.
The Dynamic Curve Fitting algorithm may be used to help solve difficult curve fitting
problems involving local [Link] are typically encountered with the five parameter
logistic functions.

[Link] Using the Standard Curve Macro

To use the Standard Curve Macro:

1. Enter either X and Y columns or X and multiple replicate Y columns into your worksheet.
These columns must be adjacent. If you plan to compute predicted Xs or Ys from the
computed curve, you will also need to enter a column of the source values.
2. Select the equation from the Equation list to use to fit the curve. Your options are: straight
line or quadratic equation; four parameter logistic equation; five parameter logistic
equation; five parameter logistic equation – 2 slopes.
3. Select whether or not to plot the X axis using a common log scale
4. If you find that your data is difficult to fit, select the Dynamic curve fit. In this case 200
curve fits will be performed using initial starting values that span the parameter ranges.
The best fit will be selected from the 200 results.
5. Set the columns to use for the X and Y data. If your X data us already in a log format,
make sure you check the Log format X data option.
6. If you have replicate Y measurements for each X data point then select the Y replicates
and then select the Last Y replicate column.
7. Select Predict unknowns to compute results using the solution to the fit. You can
compute a column of new Y values from given Xs, or Xs from given Y values. If you are
using the four or five parameter logistic equations you can compute ECpercent values
for a specified range of percent values. You can also elect to plot the results of these
on your standard curve.
8. When finished, click OK. A standard curve appears, and if you elected to compute
additional values, they are also plotted using drop lines to indicate the X and Y values.

480
 [Link] Y Replicates

Figure 12.17 A Standard Curves Graph

[Link] Y Replicates

If you have multiple measurements for each X value, select Y replicates on the Standard
Curve dialog box, then select the Last Y replicate column from the drop-down list. The Y
replicate columns must begin to the right of the X data.

Figure 12.18 Y Replicate Data for the Standard Curves Macro

[Link] Log Data Format

If your X data uses simple integers, especially negative numbers, it is already in log format
and you should select the Log format X data option. The macro will automatically create a
new column of equivalent numeric data, and automatically plot X on a log axis scale.

481
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.19 Log Data Format for the Standard Curves Macro

[Link] Linear Equation

y = y0+ ax

A straight line, characterized by the slope a and the y-intercept y0.

[Link] Quadratic Equation

y = y0+ ax + bx 2

The standard parabolic equation with quadratic coefficient b, slope a and intercept y0.

[Link] Four Parameter Logistic Equation

m ax m in
y = m in + x
1 (EC50 ) H illslope

482
 [Link] Five Parameter Logistic Curve

Figure 12.20 A Dose-Response Curve with a Variable Slope Parameter

This is a typical dose-response curve with a variable slope parameter. Four parameters are
produced:
• Min, or bottom of the curve.
• Max, or top of the curve.
• EC50: Median effective concentration. That is, the concentration that can be expected to
cause a defined effect on 50% of a given population of organisms under defined conditions.
• Hillslope: Characterizes the slope of the curve at its midpoint.

[Link] Five Parameter Logistic Curve

(m ax m in)
y = m in +
1+
x H illslope 5
xb

where
1
1 log 2(s) 1
xb= EC 50 10 H illslope

483
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 12.21 Richard’s Formulation of the Five Parameter Logistic

This is the Richard’s formulation of the five parameter logistic. It adds an asymmetry
parameter ’s’ to the four parameter logistic. The asymmetry is shown above with large
changes in curvature with changes in s in the lower curve but relatively small changes in
the upper curve.
The additional algebraic equation for xb maintains EC50 as the half-maximum y value. The
equation has been written so that a positive Hillslope results in a curve that increases with x.
Four of the five parameters are the same as those in the four parameter logistic.
s – controls the [Link] s = 1 then this function is the same as the four parameter
logistic.s less than 1 decreases the overall slope of the curve whereas s greater than 1 increases
the overall slope.

[Link] Five Parameter Logistic – Two Slopes

m ax m in
y = m in +
1+ fX + (1 f x)
x Slope1 x Slope2
EC 50 ( )
EC 50

where
Slope2= Slope1SlopeCon,SlopeCon > 0
1
fx =
x Cf
1+
EC 50
2Slope1Slope2
C f=
Slope1+ Slope2

484
 [Link] References

Figure 12.22 Ricketts and Head Equation with Two "Slope” Parameters

This is the Ricketts and Head equation with two "slope" parameters (the parameters actually
better describe the two different curvatures). It has a different shape than Richard’s equation
and will fit some data sets better. The equation is written in terms of SlopeCon to force Slope1
and Slope2 to be the same [Link] this is not the case then in rare situations, error in the data
will result in a fit with slopes of opposite [Link] this case the function attempts to follow the
error which results in an irregularly shaped curve. The graph shows the increasing asymmetry
with increasing SlopeCon (and therefore increasing Slope2). If SlopeCon=1 then Slope1 =
Slope2 and the curve is symmetric and identical to the four parameter logistic curve.

[Link] References
1. Richards, F.J. A flexible growth function for empirical use. J. Exp. Botany 10. pp290-300.
2. Ricketts, J.H. and G. Head. A five-parameter logistic equation for investigating
asymmetry of curvature in baroreflex studies. Am. J. Physiol. 277 (Regulatory Integrative
Comp. Physiol. 46). R441-R454. 1999.

12.7.23 Survival Curve

This macro computes and graphs a Kaplan-Meier survival curve using the SurvlMod
transform. Specify the column containing the survival data, as well as the column indicating
censoring of cases. A value of 0 in the censoring column indicates that the case is censored,
whereas a value of 1 indicates an uncensored case.
Use the Graph Titles section of the Survival Curve dialog box to customize the graph title, the
X axis title and the Y axis title. Further customize the plot by selecting between a built-in
symbol and a half-line symbol for censored observations.
The macro writes the data underlying the plot in seven worksheet columns, beginning in the
specified location. The first three result columns contain the time, cumulative probability, and
standard error of the cumulative probability. The next two columns hold the coordinates of the
censored observations. The final two columns contain the coordinates of the half-lines used to
depict the censored observations.
Restrictions
• To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.
• The worksheet must be sorted by survival times.

485
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• If identical survival times occur for both censored and uncensored cases, place the censored
cases after the uncensored within the tied time value.

12.7.24 Vector Plot

This macro uses the vector transform to plot X,Y, angle and magnitude data as vectors with
arrowheads. The arrowheads have a user-specified length and angle. The vector starting point
may be selected as the point of the vector tail, midpoint or head. The vector plot consists of
three line plots. The data underlying these plots appears in the six columns of the worksheet
immediately to the right of the data as three XY pairs.
Restrictions
• To run the macro, a worksheet must be open and in focus.
• The four columns to be plotted must be contiguous and in the following order: X, Y,
Angle, and Magnitude (Length). Due to this restriction, only the first data column (X)
must be specified.
• Angle data must be in radians.

486
13 Using Transforms
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About Transforms
♦ Normalizing Ternary Data
♦ Smoothing 2D and 3D Data
♦ Using Statistical Transforms
♦ User-Defined Transforms
♦ Performing Quick Transforms
♦ Transform Operators
♦ Transform Examples

13.1 About Transforms

Transforms are sets of equations that manipulate and calculate data. Math transforms apply
math functions to existing data and also generate serial and random data. To perform a
transform, you enter variables and standard arithmetic and logic operators into a transform
dialog box. Your equations can specify that a transform access data from a worksheet as
well as save equation results to a worksheet.
You can save transforms as independent .xfm files for later opening or modification. Because
transforms are saved as plain text (ASCII) files, you can create and edit them using any word
processor that can edit and save text files.

13.2 Normalizing Ternary Data

To create a ternary graph using data whose sum is not 100% or 1, you need to convert the raw
XYZ data into normalized ternary triplet data by using the Normalize Ternary Data transform.
For more information, see page .

13.2.1 How to Normalize Ternary Data

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Normalize Ternary Data.

2. Click Finish.

3. In the Normalize Ternary Data Column Picker dialog box, select the column with the
original X data from the worksheet or the Data Source list. The selected column is
assigned as the X Source in the Selected Columns list.

487
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

4. Click Finish.

5. Select the Y data source.

6. Select the columns from the worksheet data.
7. Select the X, Y, and Z data destination columns in the worksheet.
8. Click Next.
9. Select the type of scale from the Scale Type drop-down list.

10. Click Finish.

13.3 Smoothing 2D and 3D Data

SigmaPlot smoothers are algorithms for smoothing sharp variations in dependent variable
values within 2D and 3D data sets. You can also use smoothers to resample data to a
rectangular grid of independent variable values.
You control the locations of the computed smoothed values. You can choose the raw data
values of the independent variable(s) as the smoothing locations. You can also specify
uniformly-spaced smoothing locations over the extent of the independent variable data.

488
 13.3.1 Smoothing 2D Data

Each smoothing method weights the data contained in a window surrounding the smoothing
location. The radius of this window is called the bandwidth radius. A linear or non-linear
technique is then applied to the weighted data to compute each smoothed value.
The weight assigned to each data value in the window is determined by its normalized distance
(u) from the smoothing location.
Choose one of the following smoothing methods:
• Loess. Applies the tricube weight function to weight the data. The smoother is polynomial
of degree 1, 2, or 3. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Running Average. Computes the average of the dependent values. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Running Median. Computes the median of the dependent variable. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Negative Exponential. Applies a Gaussian weight function to weight the data and a
quadratic fit. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Bisquare. Applies a bisquare weight function. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Inverse Square. Applies a Cauchy weight function. Use with 2D or 3D data.
• Inverse Distance. Applies the weight function to the (x,y) data. Use with 3D data only.
You can find smoother method guidelines in the 2D and 3D Smoothers sections of
[Link]. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information, see page .

13.3.1 Smoothing 2D Data

Use the Smooth 2D Data dialog box to remove undesired high-frequency data components,
such as data contamination.

Figure 13.1 An example of noisy data and then its conversion. Note that the
original noisy data points appear on the graph.

1. Select the worksheet columns by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Graph Analysis group, click Smoothers.

489
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click Smooth 2D Data

4. In the Smoother 2D - Select Data dialog box, click Next.

5. Select Predicted: First Empty from the Results list to compute a smoothed value for
each data point.

6. Select Residuals: First Empty to differentiate between the smoothed value and the
original Y value.
7. Accept First Next Empty as the standard default column in the Columns drop-down list.
8. Select Plot Results to create a grid of the computed smoothed values on the worksheet.
9. Click Next.
10. Accept First Empty as the default in the Curve Data Column list.

490
 13.3.1 Smoothing 2D Data

Figure 13.2 Selecting columns to display a grid of smoothed data on the

worksheet.

11. Select Create a new graph to create a line plot using the grid of data which appears
on the worksheet.
12. To create another plot type and style, clear Create new graph, and create the plot
manually. Creating 2D PlotsFor more information, see page 263.
13. Click Finish. The Smooth 2D Data dialog box appears.

Figure 13.3 Selecting Smoothers from the Smooth 3D Data drop-down list

14. To define smoothing parameters, select a smoother type from the Smoothers drop-down
list.
15. Set the Sampling Proportion to determine a fraction of the total number of data points
used to compute each smoothed value.

491
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note: The interpretation of the Sampling Proportion depends on the Bandwidth

Method.
16. Set the polynomial degree from the Polynomial Degree list, if applicable.
17. Select Reject Outliers to reduce the effects of outlier points on the smoothed values.
18. To set smoothing options, click Options. The Smoothed Curve Options dialog box
[Link] more information, see page .
19. To preview and create the graph, click Preview to see a preview of the graph.

If the preview is not satisfactory, adjust the Smoother settings and options and click
Preview again. Each time you preview, the settings are stored for subsequent review by
clicking the right and left arrows.
20. Click OK to accept the preview.

The graph appears with a line graph representing the smoothed data points. The original
noisy data points also remain. The worksheet now contains the results of all selected
computations.
Note: You can click the Stop button at the bottom of the Smooth 2D Data dialog box
if you want to stop the process.

[Link] Setting Smoothed Curve Options

Use the Smoothed Curve Options dialog box to set the options for smoothing a 2D Curve.

Figure 13.4 The Smooth Curve Options Dialog Box

1. Change the Minimum and Maximum for the X values to new beginning and ending
values for the X ranges. For 2D smoothing, the Y values are the smoothed values, and
therefore unavailable in the Smoothed Curve Options dialog box.

492
 13.3.2 Smoothing 3D Data

2. Set the Bandwidth method to either Fixed or Nearest Neighbors.

• Fixed. Sets the same bandwidth radius the same at every smoothing location. The
radius is computed by multiplying the Sampling Proportion value times half of the
difference between the set Minimum and Maximum independent variables (X values).

Select Fixed if the density of the observed data is relatively constant over the extent of
its defined region.
• Nearest Neighbors. Here the bandwidth radius depends on the smoothing location.
The radius is equal to the maximum distance between the smoothing location and its
nearest neighbors, as determined by the Sampling Proportion value.

Select Nearest Neighbors for data that is clustered in some areas and sparse in others.
For example, if there are 100 data points, enter .1 as the Sampling Proportion value to
choose ten data points nearest the smoothing location.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Smooth 2D Data dialog box.

13.3.2 Smoothing 3D Data

Use the Smoother 3D dialog box to smooth variations in 3D data. You can also re-sample 3D
data to rectangular grid locations to create mesh plots and 3D contour plots from irregularly
spaced data.

1. Select the worksheet columns by dragging the pointer over your data.
2. Click the Analysis tab, and then in the Graph Analysis group, select:
Smoothers→Smooth 3D Data
The Smoother 3D - Select Data dialog box appears.

Figure 13.5 Selecting the Data Columns to Smooth from the Smoother 3D
Dialog Box

3. Click Next.

493
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 13.6 Selecting the Data Columns to Smooth from the Smoother 3D
Dialog Box

4. To select worksheet columns for your results, select Predicted: First Empty from the
Results list to compute a smoothed value at each data point.
5. Select Residuals: First Empty to differentiate between the smoothed value and the
original Y value.
6. Accept First Empty as the standard default column in the Columns drop-down list.
7. Select Plot Results to create a grid of the computed data on the worksheet.
8. Click Next.
9. To select columns to graph, accept First Empty as the default in the Columns
drop-down list.

Figure 13.7 Selecting columns to display the grid of smoothed data

10. Select Create a new graph to create a mesh plot using the grid of data which appears on
the worksheet. If you are creating a contour plot, clear Create new graph, and create
the contour plot manually. Click Finish. Creating Contour Plots For more information,
see page 321.

494
 [Link] Setting Smoothed Surface Options

11. In the Smooth 3D Data dialog box that appears, select a smoother type from the
Smoother drop-down list.

Figure 13.8 Selecting Smoothers from the Smooth 3D Data drop-down list

12. Set the Sampling Proportion, a fraction of a total number of data points used to compute
each smoothed value.

Note: The Sampling Proportion depends on the Bandwidth Method.

13. Set the Polynomial Degree from the Polynomial Degree list, if applicable.
14. Select Reject Outliers to reduce the effects of outlier points on the smoothed values.
15. To set the smoothed surface options, click Options. The Smoothed Surface Options
dialog box appears.
16. To preview and then create the graph, click Preview to see a preview of the graph.

If the preview is not satisfactory, adjust the Smoother settings and options, and click
Preview again. Each time you preview, the settings are stored for subsequent review by
clicking the right and left arrows.
17. Click OK to accept the preview.

The graph appears, and the worksheet now contains the results of all selected
computations.
Note: You can click the red Stop button at the bottom of the Smooth 3D Data dialog
box to stop the process.

[Link] Setting Smoothed Surface Options

495
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Use the Smoothed Surface Options dialog box to set the options for smoothing a 3D Curve.

Figure 13.9 The Smooth Curve Options Dialog Box

1. Change the Minimum and Maximum for the X and Y values to new beginning and
ending values for the X and Y ranges.
2. Set the bandwidth method to either Fixed or Nearest Neighbors.

• Fixed. The bandwidth radius is the same at every smoothing location. The radius is
computed by multiplying the Sampling Proportion value times half of the difference
between the set Minimum and Maximum independent variables (X and Y values).

Select Fixed if the density of the observed data is relatively constant over the extent of
its defined region.
• Nearest Neighbors. Here the bandwidth radius depends on the smoothing location.
The radius is equal to the maximum distance between the smoothing location and its
nearest neighbors, as determined by the Sampling Proportion value.

Select Nearest Neighbors for data that is clustered in some areas and sparse in others.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Smooth 3D Data dialog box.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Smooth 3D Data dialog box.

13.4 Using Statistical Transforms

496
 13.4.1 Stacking Data

SigmaPlot now includes a complete array of general data transformations. To view these
statistical transforms:

1. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, click the Statisticaldrop-down arrow.

General data transformations are math functions and equations which are applied to
worksheet data which you can use these to transform data to better fit assumptions
of tests, or otherwise modify it before performing a statistical procedure. You can use
data transforms to:
• Generate random numbers.
• Define dummy variables, lagged variables, and variable interactions.
• Convert other missing values codes to the "–" double dash symbol for missing values
used by SigmaStat.

These commands all appear in the Transforms menu. Choosing these commands prompts
you to select the columns to transform, followed by a result column.

13.4.1 Stacking Data

You can merge the contents of two or more columns by stacking the column contents on top
of each other.

1. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Stack
The Stack Columns - Select Data dialog box appears.
2. Select the output column to place the stacked data by clicking the worksheet column.
3. Select the columns to stack, either by clicking the worksheet columns, or selecting the
column from the Data for Inputdrop-down list.
4. Click Finishto stack the contents of the selected input columns in the selected output
column.

Note that you cannot stack blocks of data, only entire columns.

13.4.2 Indexing Data

You can convert raw data to indexed data with one and two factors, and vice versa.
To create indexed data:

1. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Index→One Way or Two Way

497
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Tip: Select One Way to index by one factor, or Two Way to index for two factors.
2. In the Select Data dialog box that appears, select the output column to place the indexed
data by clicking the worksheet column. This should be an empty column with at least
one empty column to the right for a One Way ANOVA, or two empty columns for Two
Way ANOVA.
3. Select the columns to index, either by clicking the worksheet columns, or selecting the
column from the Data for Input drop-down list.
4. Click Finish to index the contents of the selected input columns in the selected output
column.

The indexed data is tabulated, with the indexes appearing in the left column(s), and the
data in the right column.

13.4.3 Unindexing Data

You can unindex data for graphing purposes using the Transforms menu Unindex command.

1. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Unindex→One Way or Two Way
Tip: Select One Way to unindex by one factor, or Two Way to unindex for two factors.
2. If you unindexed two ways, each column contains the data for one cell in the Two Way
ANOVA table, and the two factor levels appear as the column title, separated by a hyphen
(-).

3. Select the columns to unindex as prompted.

4. If you unindexed two ways, each column contains the data for one cell in the Two Way
ANOVA table, and the two factor levels appear as the column title, separated by a hyphen
(-).

13.4.4 Simple Transforms

SigmaPlot provides several commonly used transformations that are used to linearize or
normalize observations or stabilize the variance, particularly in regression and analysis of
variance problems.
• Subtract
• Divide
• Square
• Absolute Value
• Natural log ln(x)
• Log log(x)

498
 [Link] How to Use Simple Transforms

• Reciprocal
• Exponential
• Square Root
• Arcsin Square Root Transform

[Link] How to Use Simple Transforms

1. On the Analysistab, in the Transform group, select:
Statistical→Simple Transforms→[Desired Transform]
The Select Data dialog box for the specified transform appears and prompts you for an
input column.
Note: If you select a column in the worksheet before you choose the transform, the
selected column is automatically assigned as the input column, and you are prompted for
the output column.
2. Click Finish to run the transform on the specified input column.

3. Pick the data column you want to apply the transform to as the input column by clicking it
in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Input: drop-down list.

The number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted input row in the
Selected Columns list, and you are prompted for an output column.
4. Click Finish to run the transform on the specified input column.

5. Pick the column where you want the transform results to appear as the output column by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it form the drop-down list. The number or title of
the selected column appears in the highlighted output row.
6. Click Finish to run the transform on the specified input column.

13.4.5 Centering Data

The center transform subtracts the mean of a column from all values in that column and
places the result in a specified output column. You can often use the center transform on data
to eliminate or reduce multicollinearity. For more information on centering data, you can
reference any appropriate statistics reference. For more information, see page .
To center a variable:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Center
The Center Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you to select an
input column.

499
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Note:If you select a column in the worksheet before you choose the transform, the
selected column is automatically assigned as the input column, and you are prompted for
the output column.
2. Pick the worksheet column with the data you want to center as the input column by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Input drop-down list. The
number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted input row and you are
prompted for an output column
3. Pick the column where you want the centered variables to appear as the output column by
clicking it the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list. The
number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted output row.

To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or the drop-down list. You can also
double-click a column assignment to clear it.
4. Click Finish to run the transform on the specified input column.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the
input columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

13.4.6 Standardizing Data

Use this transform if you want to standardize variables before performing a statistical
procedure. By definition, standardized data has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of
one. The standardize transform subtracts the mean of a column from all values in that column,
then divides the centered values by the standard deviations.
To standardize a variable:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Standardize
The Standardize Transform - Select Data dialog box appears prompting you to select
an Input: column.
Note: If you select a column in the worksheet before you choose the transform,
the selected column is automatically assigned as the input column in the Selected
Columnslist, and you are prompted for the output column.
2. Pick the worksheet column with the data you want to standardize as the input column by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Inputdrop-down list. The
number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted input row, and you are
prompted for an output column.
3. Pick the column where you want the standardized variables to appear as the output
column by clicking it the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Outputdrop-down
list. The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row.

500
 13.4.7 Ranking Data

4. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
5. Click Finishto run the transform on the specified input column and place the results
in the specified output column.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwriteto replace the existing column contents with the transform results. Select
Insertto place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the input
columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

13.4.7 Ranking Data

Use the rank transform to assign integer rank values to data. Ranking data is useful if you
want know how the values are ranked, or to perform two way ANOVA on the ranks of data
that fails the normality or equal variance tests. The rank transform assigns rank values to
all observations in a column from smallest to largest. Equal values are tied in rank, and an
averaged rank is assigned to all tied values. This rank is the average of the ranks that would
have been assigned to all the tied values if they were not tied.
To rank a variable:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Rank
The Rank Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you to select an
input column.
Note: If you select a column in the worksheet before you choose the transform, the
selected column is automatically assigned as the input column, and you are prompted for
the output column.
2. Pick the column with the data you want to rank as the input column by clicking it in the
worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Input drop-down list. The number or title
of the selected column appears in the highlighted input row, and you are prompted for
an output column.
3. Pick the column where you want the ranked variables to appear as the output column by
clicking it the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list. The
number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row.
4. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
5. Click Finish to run the transform on the specified input column and place the results in
the specified output column

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.

501
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Click Overwriteto replace the existing column contents with the transform results. Select
Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the input
columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

13.4.8 Creating Interaction Variables

Use the interaction transform to when you want to introduce an interaction variable into a
multiple linear regression model, for example, a variable that takes into account the interaction
between two independent variables. The interaction transform computes the product of the
values in two data columns and places the results in an output column. For example, to
introduce an interaction factor into the general multiple linear regression model: y = b0 +
b1x1 + b2x2you could add another variable to the equation equal to x1x2, for example: y =
b0 + b1x1 + b2x2 + b3x1x2
Note: Adding an interaction variable to a multiple linear regression can induce
multicollinearity. To avoid or reduce this problem, use the Center transform on the original
variables, then use the centered variables to generate the interaction variable. For descriptions
of independent variable interactions in multiple linear regression, you can reference any
appropriate statistics reference. .
To generate an interaction variable:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Interactions
The Pick Columns for Interactions Transformdialog box appears and prompts you to
select an input column.
Note: If you selected columns before you ran the transform, the selected columns are
assigned as the input and output columns in the order they were selected in the worksheet.
2. Pick the first variable column with the data you want to factor into the interaction by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Input drop-down list, then
pick the second input column. The number or title of the selected column appears in the
input row of the Selected Columnslist.
3. Select the column where you want to place the interaction variable as the output column
by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list.
The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row.
4. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
5. Click Finishto run the transform on the specified input columns and place the results
in the specified output column.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwriteto replace the existing column contents with the transform results. Select
Insertto place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the input
columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

502
 13.4.9 Creating Dummy (Indicator) Variables

13.4.9 Creating Dummy (Indicator) Variables

Dummy, or indicator, variables can be used to determine if sets of data share the same constant
(intercept) value, by determining if the constant is affected by conditional changes specified by
the dummy variables. This can be used to determine if all the data in a simple linear regression
lie on the same line, or if there are conditional dependencies on the independent variable.
Dummy variables are generally computed from indexed data columns. They are assigned to
index variable data similarly to the way index values are assigned to raw data, but always
correspond to specific numeric values, as determined by the index variable values and by
the kind of dummy variable coding used. There are two ways to define dummy variables:
reference coding and effects coding.
If the index column contains numeric values, the dummy variable transform uses the nearest
whole number as the code value, and evaluates the data for the corresponding dummy variable
by rounding up to the nearest whole number.
For k number of different index variable values (conditions of possible dependencies), the
dummy variables transform creates k–1 dummy variables. If an index variable contains two
different index values, one dummy variable column is produced, and the other is used as the
reference or effect index value; if the index variable contains three different index values, two
dummy variable columns are produced, and the third is used as the reference or effect value.
To create a dummy variable column, the index column must contain at least two different
index values. For descriptions of how to use dummy variables to detect different slopes, you
can reference any appropriate statistics reference.

[Link] Reference Coding

Reference coding sets the value of all dummy variables to zero when the index variable
corresponds to the indexed condition used, and codes all other values of the index variable
with a [Link] referenced condition is always assigned a 0.
Note: Use reference coding when you want the constant to be the mean of the dependent
variable under a selected referenced condition, and the coefficients computed for the dummy
variable(s) to reflect the changes of the constant value from reference condition dependent
variable mean.
To create reference coded dummy variables:

1. If necessary, create an index column for your data. These data can consist of any numbers
or strings. Each dependent variable value that falls under a different condition is indexed
with a different label. Two factor and repeated measures data require additional index
columns.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:
Statistical→Dummy Variables→Reference Coding
The Reference Transform - Select Datadialog box appears and prompts you to select
input and output columns.
Note: If you selected columns before you ran the transform, the selected columns are
assigned as the input and output columns in the order they were selected in the worksheet.
3. Pick the column with the indexed data you want to create dummy variables for as the input
column by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Inputdrop-down

503
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

list. The number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted input row and
you are prompted for the output column.
4. Select the destination column for the dummy variables as the output column by clicking it
in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list. The number
or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row. There should be
enough empty columns to the right of the destination column to accommodate all the
dummy variable columns; the number of dummy variable columns produced is one less
than the number of index values (different groups).
5. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
6. Click Finishto run the transform. The Select Reference Indexdialog box appears.
7. Select the reference index value from the list to use as the reference condition; no dummy
variable is created using this value (this is the condition that determines the constant
value; the corresponding dummy variable values for this condition are always zero). All
other index values are evaluated for the corresponding dummy variable values.
8. Click OK. The reference coded dummy variables are placed in as many columns as
there are index values, less one. Index column values that match the condition used to
evaluate the column are assigned a zero; all other values are assigned a 1. One dummy
variable column is produced for each index value, except for the index value selected as
the reference condition.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwriteto replace the existing column contents with the transform results. Select
Insertto place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the input
columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

[Link] Effects Coding

In effects coding, the dummy variables are coded with -1, 0, and 1. The reference condition
is always coded with a -1. The value of other dummy variables is set to zero when the
index variable corresponds to the indexed condition used, and set to 1 for all other values of
the index variable.
Note: Use effects coding when you want the constant term to be computed using the value
of the dependent variable under all indexed conditions, and you want the coefficients of the
dummy variables to quantify the size of changes from this overall mean.
To create effects coded dummy variables:

1. If necessary, create an index column for your data. This data can consist of any numbers
or strings. Each dependent variable value that falls under a different condition is indexed
with a different label. Two factor and repeated measures data require additional index
columns.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:
Statistical→Dummy Variables→Effects Coding

504
 [Link] Performing a Regression Using Dummy Variables

The Effects Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you select an
input column.
3. If you selected columns before you ran the transform, the selected columns are assigned
as the input and output columns in the order they were selected in the worksheet.
4. Pick the column with the indexed data you want to create dummy variables for as the
input column by clicking it in the worksheet or by selecting it from the Data for Input
drop-down list. The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted
input row, and you are prompted for the output column.
5. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
6. Pick the destination column for the dummy variable column(s) as the output column by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list.
The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row of
the Selected Columns list. There should be enough empty columns to the right of the
destination column to accommodate all the dummy variable columns; the number of
dummy variable columns produced is one less than the number of index values (different
groups).
7. Click Finish to run the transform and open the Select Reference Index dialog box.
8. Select the reference index value from the list to use as the reference; no dummy variable
is created for this value, and the corresponding dummy variable values for this condition
are always -1. All other dummy variable values are set to 1 for the corresponding index
variable values.
9. Click OK. Values in the index column that match the index value used to evaluate the
column are assigned a zero. Index values that match the reference condition are assigned
-1. All other values are set to 1. One dummy variable column is produced for each index
value, except the index selected as the reference condition.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the
input columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.
If you are creating dummy variables for a two factor or repeated measures problem, create
dummy variables for all remaining index columns.

[Link] Performing a Regression Using Dummy Variables

The equation used to evaluate the effect of a condition on the regression model constant is:
y = b0+ b1x + b2d 1+ +b k 1d k 1

where y is the dependent variable, x is the independent variable, k is the number of conditions
that may affect the constant, d1, d2, dk-1 are the dummy variables, and b0,b1, b2, bk-1 are the
coefficients.
To perform a Multiple Linear Regression using dummy variables:

505
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Statistics group, select:

Tests→Regression→Multiple Linear Regression
The Multiple Linear Regression - Select Data dialog box appears.
2. Select the dependent variable column, then select the original independent variable and all
the dummy variables as the independent variables.
3. Click Finish to run the regression on the selected columns.
4. Compare the results to the original Simple Linear Regression. If the prediction is
significantly better, you should consider performing a simple linear regression on the
different conditions separately.

You can use dummy variables to convert analysis of variance problems into regression
problems. For more information on how to do this, you can reference any appropriate
statistics reference.
Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the
input columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

13.4.10 Creating Lagged Variables

The lagged variables transformation lags the observations in one column by one row, by
inserting a missing value to the first row of the data and removing the last value; the overall
column size remains constant.
Lagged variables are commonly used to create time series models, when the effect of an
independent variable on the dependent variable corresponds more appropriately to the value of
the dependent variable at a later time.
To create lagged variables:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Lagged Variables
The Lagged Variable Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you
to pick an input column.
2. Repeat this transform if you need to lag the data by additional rows.

3. Pick the column with the data you want to lag as the input column by clicking it in the
worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Inputdrop-down list. The number or title of
the selected column appears in the highlighted input row of the Selected Columnslist,
and you are prompted for an output column.
4. Pick the column where you want the lagged variables to appear as the output column by
clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Outputdrop-down list.

506
 13.4.11 Filtering Strings and Numbers

The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row of
the Selected Columnslist.

To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columnslist,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
5. Repeat this transform if you need to lag the data by additional rows.

6. Click Finishto run the transform on the specified input column and place the results
in the specified output column.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
7. Repeat this transform if you need to lag the data by additional rows.

8. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the
source column is lagged by one row and placed in the specified column.
9. Repeat this transform if you need to lag the data by additional rows.

13.4.11 Filtering Strings and Numbers

You can isolate specified groups of data using both numeric and text filters. The filter
transform operates by selecting only the rows that correspond to specified numbers or labels in
a key column, then placing these rows and the corresponding data in new columns.
You can sort data according to a numeric range of a key column or according to the text label
in a key column. These columns are usually factor or subject index columns for indexed data.
To sort numerically or using text:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Filter
The Filter Data Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you to pick
a key column.
Note: If you select columns before you choose the missing values transform, the selected
columns are assigned as the input and output column is the order they were selected in
the worksheet.
2. Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. Columns are
filtered according to the corresponding rows in the key column.

3. Pick the key column to filter by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data
for Key drop-down list. This is the column you want to apply the sorting filter to. The

507
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted key row, and you are
prompted for an output column
4. Pick the column where you want the results of the key column to appear as the output
column by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output
drop-down list. The number or title of the selected column appear in the highlighted
output row, and you are prompted for an input column.
5. Pick in the columns that contain the corresponding data to be filtered along with the key
column as the input columns, then pick their corresponding output columns by clicking
them in the worksheet or selecting them from the drop-down lists. You can pick as many
input columns as desired, and you must pick an output column for every input column.

To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
6. Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. Columns are
filtered according to the corresponding rows in the key column.

7. Click Finish to run the Filter transform.

The Set Filter dialog box appears.

8. Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. Columns are
filtered according to the corresponding rows in the key column.

9. Select Numeric Filter to sort the key column data according to a numeric range. Specify
the upper and lower bounds of the values to filter in the Upper Bound and Lower
Bound boxes.
10. Select Text Filter to sort the key column data according to a text label in the key column.
Enter the string exactly as it appears in the worksheet in the Key Label box and click OK
when you have specified the appropriate filter.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
11. Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. Columns are
filtered according to the corresponding rows in the key column.

12. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
13. Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. Columns are
filtered according to the corresponding rows in the key column.

13.4.12 Generating Random Numbers

You can generate either uniform or normally distributed random numbers. These commands
perform identically to the random and Gaussian user-defined transform functions.

508
 [Link] Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers

[Link] Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers

To generate uniformly distributed random numbers:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Random Numbers→Uniform
The Uniform Random Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you for
an output column.
Note: Input columns are not selected for the random number transform.
2. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

3. Pick the column where you want the random numbers to appear as the output column
by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list.
The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row of the
Selected Columns list.

To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
4. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

5. Click Finishto open the Random Number Generation dialog box. Enter the number of
random numbers you want to generate in the Quantity box.
6. Enter the lowest and highest numbers in the range of numbers in the Low and High boxes.
7. Enter the seed for the random generator. This is the number used to generate the random
numbers.
8. Select Random from the drop-down list to use a random seed number.
9. Click OK when finished. The random numbers are generated according to your
specifications and appear in the selected output column.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
10. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

11. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

509
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Normally Distributed Random Numbers

To generate random data that follows a normal "bell"shaped distribution curve:

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Random Numbers→Normal
The Normal Random Transform - Select Datadialog box appears and prompts you to
select an output column.
Note: Input numbers are not selected for the random number transform.
2. Pick the column where you want the random numbers to appear as the output column
by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Output drop-down list.
The number or title of the selected column appears in the highlighted output row of the
Selected Columns list.

To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
3. Click Finish to open the Normal Random Number Generator dialog box, and enter the
number of random numbers you want to generate in the Quantity box.
4. Enter the mean used for the numbers. This is the "middle" or "top" of the bell curve.
5. Enter the standard deviation for the data. The size of this value determines the amount of
variation about the mean of the data. A relatively large standard deviation distributes data
as a low, flat bell. A relatively small standard deviation creates a tall, skinny bell.
6. Enter the seed for the random number generator. This is the number used to generate
the random numbers. Select Random from the drop-down list to use a random seed
number. To automatically select a different seed each time the random number generator
is used, enter 0/0.
7. Click OK when finished. The random numbers are generated according to your
specifications and appear in the selected output.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
Click Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents. The data from the
input columns are factored together and placed in the specified output column.

13.4.13 Translating Missing Value Codes

The missing data transformation converts specified values in selected columns to the
SigmaPlot missing value double-dash indicator ("–"). Use this transform to translate bad or
missing value codes from other data formats to the SigmaPlot format. You can also use this
transform to convert all incidences of a bad observation to missing values.

510
 13.5 User-Defined Transforms

To convert all occurrences of a string to "–"

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, select:

Statistical→Missing Values
The Missing Values Transform - Select Data dialog box appears and prompts you to
select an input column.
Note: If you select columns before you choose the missing values transform, the selected
columns are assigned as the input and output columns in the order they were selected in
the worksheet.
2. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

3. Pick the columns with the strings you want convert to missing values as the input column
by clicking it in the worksheet or selecting it from the Data for Input drop-down list; then
the corresponding output column.

You must pick an output column for every input column you select. You can pick as many
input columns as desired. The number or title of the selected columns appear in the
highlighted input and output rows in the Selected Columns list.
4. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.
5. To change your selections, select the column assignment in the Selected Columns list,
then select the desired column from the worksheet or drop-down list. You can clear a
column assignment by double-clicking it.
6. Click Finish to run the transform and open the Missing Value Transform dialog box.
7. Specify the string to replace with missing value symbols. Enter the string exactly as it
appears in the worksheet, or select the string from the drop-down list.
8. Click OK when finished. The specified symbols are converted to missing values.

Note: If you specify an output column that contains data, a dialog box appears asking you
if you want to erase the column contents, push the contents down, or cancel the transform.
9. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

10. Select Overwrite to replace the existing column contents with the transform results.
Select Insert to place transform results above the existing cell contents.

13.5 User-Defined Transforms

Modify and manipulate worksheet data by entering SigmaPlot’s extensive mathematical
transformation language into the User-Defined Transform dialog box. Use transforms to
create new data by performing functions on existing data, or generate calculated or random
data, which can then be placed in worksheet columns.

511
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The first step to transform worksheet data is to enter the desired equations in the edit box of
the User-Defined Transform dialog box. For more information, see page . If no previously
entered transform equations exist, the edit box is empty; otherwise, the last transform entered
appears.
Select the edit box to begin entering transform instructions. As you enter text into the
transform edit box, the box scrolls down to accommodate additional [Link] more
information, see page .
You can enter up to 100 lines of equations, either on separate lines or on the same line.

13.5.1 How to Create a User-Defined Transform

1. View the worksheet.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Transform group, click User-Defined.

The User-Defined Transform dialog box appears.

Figure 13.10 User-Defined Transform Dialog Box

3. Type transform instructions into the Edit Transform field. You can enter up to 32,000
characters.
4. Click Run.

You can save the contents of the transform window to a file. Since this is a text file, you
can view or print these files using any word processor. You can open previously saved
transforms in the transform window for execution or modification.
All transform files have the extension of .xfm in the Transforms folder. To view these files,
click the Open button in the User-Defined Transforms dialog box and open a transform
file. A library of transform results is named [Link] in the Transform folder. These

512
 13.5.2 Transform Syntax and Structure

transform examples also include a sample SigmaPlot graph file displaying the results of
the transform. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information, see page .

13.5.2 Transform Syntax and Structure

Use standard syntax and equations when defining user-defined transforms. This section
discusses the basics and the details for entering transform equations.

[Link] Transform Syntax

Enter transforms as equations with the results placed to the left of the equal sign (=) and the
calculation placed to the right of the equal sign. Results can be defined as either variables
(which can be used in other equations), or as the worksheet column or cells where results
are to be placed.

[Link] Entering Transforms

To type an equation in the transform edit box, click in the edit box and begin typing. When
you complete a line, press Enter to move the cursor to the first position on the next line.
You can leave spaces between equation elements: x = a+b is the same as x = a + b. However,
you may find it necessary to conserve space by omitting spaces. Blank lines are ignored so
that you can use them to separate or group equations for easier reading.

Figure 13.11 Typing Equations into the Edit Window

If the equation requires more than one line, you may want to begin the second and any
subsequent lines indented a couple of spaces (press the space bar before typing the line).
Although this is not necessary, indenting helps distinguish a continuing equation from a
new one.
Note: You can resize the transform dialog box to enlarge the edit box. You can press Ctrl+X,
Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V to cut, copy, and paste text in the edit window.

513
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Transforms are limited to a maximum of 100 lines. Note that you can enter more than one
transform statement on a line; however, this is only recommended if space is a premium.
Note: Use only parentheses to enclose expressions. Curly brackets and square brackets are
reserved for other uses.

[Link] Commenting on Equations

To enter a comment, type an apostrophe (’) or a semicolon (;), then type the comment to the
right of the apostrophe or semicolon. If the comment requires more than one line, repeat the
apostrophe or semicolon on each line before continuing the comment.

[Link] Sequence of Expression

SigmaPlot and SigmaStat generally solve equations regardless of their sequence in the
transform edit box; however, the col function (which returns the values in a worksheet column)
depends on the sequence of the equations, as shown in the following example.
Example
The sequence of the equations:
col(1)=col(4)^alpha
col(2)=col(1)*theta
must occur as shown. The second equation depends on the data produced by the first.
Reversing the order produces different results. To avoid this sequence problem, assign
variables to the results of the computation, then equate the variables to columns:
x=col(4)
y=x^alpha
z=y*theta
col(1)=y
col(2)=z
The sequence of the equations is now unimportant.

13.5.3 Transform Components

Transform equations consist of variables and functions. Operators are used to define variables
or apply functions to scalars and ranges. A scalar is a single worksheet cell, number, missing
value, or text string. A range is a worksheet column or group of scalars.

514
 [Link] Variables

Figure 13.12 Examples of the Transform Equation Elements Typed into the
Transform Window

[Link] Variables
You can define variables for use in other equations within a transform. Variable definition
uses the following form:
variable = expression
Variable names must begin with a letter. After that, they can include any letter or number, or
the underscore character ( _ ). Variable names are case sensitive—an "A" is not the equivalent
of an "a." Once a variable has been defined by means of an expression, that variable cannot be
redefined within the same transform.

[Link] Functions
A function is similar to a variable, except that it refers to a general expression, not a specific
one, and thus requires arguments. The syntax for a function declaration is
function(argument 1,argument 2,...) = expression
where function is the name of the function, and one or more argument names are enclosed in
parentheses. Function and argument names must follow the same rules as variable names.
User-Defined Functions. Frequently used functions can be copied to the Clipboard and
pasted into the transform window.

[Link] Constructs
Transform constructs are special structures that allow more complex procedures than
functions. Constructs begin with an opening condition statement, followed by one or more
transform equations, and end with a closing statement. The available constructs are for loops
and if...then...else statements.

515
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Operators
A complete set of arithmetic, relational, and logic operators are provided. Arithmetic
operators perform simple math between numbers. Relational operators define limits and
conditions between numbers, variables, and equations. Logic operators set simple conditions
for if statements.

[Link] Numbers
You can enter numbers as integers, in floating point style, or in scientific notation. All
numbers are stored with 15 figures of significance. Use a minus sign in front of the number to
signify a negative value.
Missing values, represented in the worksheet as a pair of dashes, are considered non-numeric.
All arithmetic operations which include a missing value result in another missing value.
To generate a missing value, divide zero by zero.
Example
If you define:
missing = 0/0
the operation:
size({1,2,3,missing})
returns a value of 4.0. (The size function returns the number of elements in a range, including
labels and missing values.)
The transform language does not recognize two successive dashes; for example, the string
{1,2,3,–} is not recognized as a valid range. Dashes are used to represent missing values in
the worksheet only.
Strings, such as text labels placed in worksheet cells, are also non-numeric information. To
define a text string in a transform, enclose it with double quotation marks.
As with missing values, strings may not be operated upon, but are propagated through an
operation. The exception is for relational operators, which make a lexical comparison of the
strings, and return true or false results accordingly.

[Link] Scalars and Ranges

The transform language recognizes two kinds of elements: scalars and ranges. A scalar is any
single number, string, or missing value. Anything that can be placed in a single worksheet
cell is a scalar.
A range (sometimes called a vector or list) is a one-dimensional array of one or more scalars.
Columns in the worksheet are considered ranges.
Ranges can also be defined using curly bracket ({}) notation. The range elements are listed
in sequence inside the brackets, separated by commas. Most functions which accept scalars
also accept ranges, unless specifically restricted. Typically, whatever a function does with a
scalar, it does repeatedly for each entry in a range. A single function can operate on either a
cell or an entire column.
Example 1
The entry:
{1,2,3,4,5}

516
 [Link] Array References

produces a range of five values, from 1 through 5.

Example 2
The operation:
{col(1), col(2)}
concatenates columns 1 and 2 into a single range. Note that elements constituting a range need
not be of the same type, i.e., numbers, labels and missing values.
Example 3
The entry:
{x,col(4)*3,1,sin(col(3))}
also produces a range.

[Link] Array References

Individual scalars can be accessed within a range by means of the square bracket ([ ])
constructor notation. If the bracket notation encloses a range, each entry in the enclosed range
is used to access a scalar, resulting in a new range with the elements rearranged.
Example
For the range:
x = {1.4,3.7,3.3,4.8}
the notation:
x[3]
returns 3.3, the third element in the range. The notation:
x[{4,1,2}]
produces the range {4.8,1.4,3.7}. The constructor notation is not restricted to variables: any
expression that produces a range can use this notation.
Example
The operation:
col(3)[2]
produces the same result as col(3,2,2), or cell(3,2). The notation:
{2,4,6,8}[3]
produces 6. If the value enclosed in the square brackets is also a range, a range consisting of
the specified values is produced.
Example
The operation:
col(1)[{1,3,5}]
produces the first, third, and fifth elements of column 1.

517
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 13.13 Range and Array Reference Operations Typed into the User
Defined Transform Window

13.6 Performing Quick Transforms

Using the Quick Transform dialog box and the Functions palette, you can execute simple,
one-line mathematical functions to modify one or more columns of [Link] more information,
see page . No knowledge of complex programming is required.
You can run Quick Transforms on an individual cell, an entire column, or a block of data.
To run a Quick Transform:

1. On the Analysis tab, click Quick Transform.

518
 13.6.1 Automatic Updating of Transforms

Figure 13.14 The transform in this example applies the sine function to each
entry in Column 2 and then adds the results row-wise to the entries of Column
1. The final results will appear in Column 3.

The Quick Transform dialog box appears with the Functions palette, which provides
immediate access to frequently used transforms, below it.

2. In the edit box on the left, specify the column or block of cells of the worksheet in which
you want the results of the transform to appear.
3. In the edit box on the right, enter a one-line transform using any functions defined in
the transform language.

Note: You can close the Functions palette by clicking the f(x) button to the right.
4. You cannot edit these equations. To delete an equation, select it from the list and then
click the Delete button to the right of the list.

Note: You cannot run transforms on date and time columns. To use date and time data,
you must first convert the data to numeric data, run the transform, and then convert the
column back to date and time data. Switching Between Date and Time and Numeric
DisplayFor more information, see page 238.

13.6.1 Automatic Updating of Transforms

By default, each equation that you run using the Quick Transform dialog box is automatically
saved to the worksheet, and subsequently saved to the Transforms list. When you open

519
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

this worksheet and the Quick Transform dialog box again, all the transforms saved in the
worksheet appear in the Transforms list. When your data changes, the equation is run again.
If you do not want the transforms automatically updated, you will need to turn this feature off.
To turn off automatic updating of transforms:

1. Click Options on the Quick Transforms dialog box.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Clear Enable automatic updating of transforms.
3. Click OK to save this setting and to close the dialog box.

Note: The above instructions explain how to turn off or on automatic updating of
transforms specific to a particular worksheet. If you would like to turn this feature on or
off globally (the default is set to "on"), you will need to use the main SigmaPlot Options
dialog box. Setting Program OptionsFor more information, see page .

13.6.2 Setting Trigonometric Units for Quick

Transforms

You can quickly set trigonometric units in the Quick Transforms Options dialog box.

1. Make sure that you have a worksheet in view. .

2. On the Analysis tab, click Quick Transform.
3. On the Quick Transform dialog box, click Options.

Figure 13.15 Click the Options button to set Trigonometric units.

4. Select the appropriate trigonometric units for calculating trigonometric functions.

520
 13.6.3 Setting a Quick Transform as a Column Title

5. Select the appropriate trigonometric units for calculating trigonometric functions.

13.6.3 Setting a Quick Transform as a Column Title

When you run either a User-Defined or Quick Transform, its results will create or overwrite
data. When running a Quick Transform, you can apply the name of the transform as a column
title to reflect its type of results.

1. Make sure that you have a worksheet in view. .

2. On the Analysis tab, click Quick Transform.
3. On the Quick Transform dialog box, click Options.
4. Select Use transform as the title of the output column.
5. Click OK to accept these options and close the dialog box.

Here are some examples of column title possibilities:

• Using a Quick Transform of col(3) = col(1)+col(2), results in the column
title for column 3 of: col(1)+col(2).
• Using a Quick Transform of col(4) = col(2)+col(3), results in the column
title for column 4 of: col(2)+col(3).
6. Click Run to run the transform. Results appear in the cell, block of data, or column
specified in the left drop-down list.

7. Click Run to run the transform. Results appear in the cell, block of data, or column
specified in the left drop-down list.

13.7 Transform Operators

Transforms use operators to define variables and apply functions. A complete set of arithmetic,
relational, and logical operators are provided.

13.7.1 Order of Operation

The order of precedence is consistent with P.E.M.A. (Parentheses, Exponentiation,
Multiplication, and Addition) and proceeds as follows, except that parentheses override any
other rule:
• Exponentiation, associating from right to left.
• Unary minus.
• Multiplication and division, associating from left to right.
• Addition and subtraction, associating from left to right.

521
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Relational operators.
• Logical negation.
• Logical and, associating from left to right.
• Logical or, associating from left to right.
This list permits complicated expressions to be written without requiring too many parentheses.

Figure 13.16 Examples of Transform Operators

Example
The statement:
a<10 and b<5
groups to (a<10) and (b<5), not to (a<(10 and b))<5.
Note: Only parentheses can group terms for processing. Curly and square brackets are
reserved for other uses.

13.7.2 Operations on Ranges

The standard arithmetic operators—addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and
exponentiation—follow basic rules when used with scalars. For operations involving two
ranges corresponding entries are added, subtracted, etc., resulting in a range representing the
sums, differences, etc., of the two ranges.
If one range is shorter than the other, the operation continues to the length of the longer range,
and missing value symbols are used where the shorter range ends.
For operations involving a range and a scalar, the scalar is used against each entry in the range.
Example: The operation:
col(4)*2

522
 13.7.3 Arithmetic Operators

produces a range of values, with each entry twice the value of the corresponding value in
column 4.

13.7.3 Arithmetic Operators

Arithmetic operators perform arithmetic between a scalar or range and return the result.
+ Add
- Subtract (also signifies unary minus)
* Multiply
/ Divide
^ or ** Exponentiate

Multiplication must be explicitly noted with the asterisk. Adjacent parenthetical terms such as
(a+b) (c-4) are not automatically multiplied.

Figure 13.17 Examples of arithmetic operators

13.7.4 Relational Operators

Relational operators specify the relation between variables and scalars, ranges or equations,
or between user-defined functions and equations, establishing definitions, limits and/or
conditions.
= or .EQ. Equal to
> or .GT. Greater than
>= or .GE. Greater than or equal to
< or .LT. Less than

523
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

<= or .LE. Less than or equal to

<>, !=, #, or .NE. Not equal to

The alphabetic characters can be entered in upper or lower case.

Figure 13.18 Examples of rational and logical operators.

13.7.5 Logical Operators

Logical operators are used to set the conditions for if function statements.
and, & Intersection
or, | Union
not, ~ Negation

13.8 Transform Examples

Many mathematical transform examples, along with appropriate graphs and worksheets are
included with SigmaPlot. This chapter is describes the data transform examples and the
graphing transform examples provided. Each description contains the text of the transform
and, where applicable, a graph displaying the possible results of the transform. All of these
examples are available in the Transforms directory that was installed when you installed
SigmaPlot.
To find the Transforms directory:

1. Click the Main Button, and then click Open.

524
 13.8.1 Data Transform Examples

2. Navigate to:
Local Disk (C:)→Program Files→SigmaPlot→SPW12→Transforms
About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information, see page .

13.8.1 Data Transform Examples

The data transform examples are provided to show you how transform equations can
manipulate and calculate data.

[Link] One Way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA)

A One Way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) table can be created from the results of a
regression or nonlinear regression. The original Y values, the Y data from the fitted curve, and
the parameters are used to generate the table.
The transform assumes you have placed the original Y data in column 2, the fitted Y data in
column 3, and the regression coefficients or function parameters in column 4. You can either
place this data in these columns, or change the column numbers used by the transform.
The One Way ANOVA transform contains examples of the following transform functions:
• Count
• If
• Total
• Mean
• {...} (constructor notation)

To use the One Way ANOVA transform:

1. Make sure your original Y data is in column 2. Perform the desired regression using the
Regression Wizard, and save your Predicted values (fitted Y data) in column 3, and
Parameters (the regression coefficients) in column 4.

What is Regression?For more information, see page 625.

2. Click Run. The ANOVA results are placed in columns 5 through 9, or beginning at the
column specified with the anova variable.

3. Press F10to open the User-Defined Transformdialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The ANOVA transform appears
in the edit window.
4. Click Run. The ANOVA results are placed in columns 5 through 9, or beginning at the
column specified with the anova variable.

[Link] Area Beneath a Curve Using Trapezoidal Rule

525
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

This transform computes the area beneath a curve from X and Y data columns using the
trapezoidal rule for unequally spaced X values. The algorithm applies equally well to equally
spaced X values.
This transform uses an example of the diff function.
To use the Area Under Curve transform:

1. Place your X data in column 1 and your Y data in column 2. If your data has been placed
in other columns, you can specify these columns after you open the [Link] file.
You can use an existing or new worksheet.
2. Click Run. The area is placed in column 3 or in the column specified with the res variable.

[Link] Bivariate Statistics

This transform takes two data columns of equal length and computes their means, standard
deviations, covariance, and correlation coefficient. The columns must be of equal length.
The Bivariate transform uses examples of these transform functions
• mean
• stddev
• total

To use the Bivariate transform:

1. Place your X data in column 1 and your Y data in column 2. If your data has been placed
in other columns, you can specify these columns after you open the [Link]
transform file. You can enter data into an existing worksheet or a new worksheet.
2. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 3 and 4, or beginning in the column
specified with the res variable.

[Link] Differential Equation Solving

This transform can be used to solve user-defined differential equations. You can define up
to four first order equations, named fp1(x1,y1,y2,y3,y4) through fp4(x1,y1,y2,y3,y4). Set any
unused equations = 0.
To solve a first order differential equation:

1. Open a new worksheet; this transform requires a clean worksheet to work correctly. For
more information, see page 197.
2. Open the User-Defined Transforms dialog box. For more information, see page .
3. Open the [Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Differential
Equation Solving transform appears in the edit window.
4. Scroll to the Number of Equations section and enter a value for the neqn variable. This
is the number of equations you want to solve, up to four.

526
 [Link] Differential Equation Solving

5. Scroll down to the Differential Equations section, and set the fp1 through fp4 functions to
the desired functions. Set any unused equations = 0. If only one first order differential
equation is used, then only the fp1 transform equation is used and fp2, fp3, and fp4 are set
to 0. For example, if you only wanted to solve the differential equation:
d y1
= ay1
dt

you would enter:

fp1(x,y1,y2,y3,y4) = -a*y1
fp2(x,y1,y2,y3,y4) = 0
fp3(x,y1,y2,y3,y4) = 0
fp4(x,y1,y2,y3,y4) = 0
6. Scroll down to the Initial Values heading and set the nstep variable to the number of
integration (X variable) steps you want to use. The more steps you set, the longer the
transform takes.
7. Set the initial X value x0, final X value x1, and the Y1 through Y4 values (placed in
cells (2,1) through (5,1)). If you are not using a y1 value, set that value to zero (0). For
example, for the single equation example above, you could enter:

x0 = 0 ;initial x
x1 = 1 ;final x
cell(2,1) = 1 ;y1 initial value
cell(3,1) = 0 ;y2 initial value
cell(4,1) = 0 ;y3 initial value
cell(5,1) = 0 ;y4 initial value

8. Click Run. The results output is placed in columns 1 through neqn+1.

9. To graph your results, create a Line Plot graphing column 1 as your X data and columns 2
through 5 as your Y data. Creating 2D Plots with Multiple CurvesFor more information,
see page 264.

527
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 13.19 Differential Equation Graph

[Link] F-test to Determine Statistical Improvement in Regressions

This transform compares two equations from the same family to determine if the higher
order provides a statistical improvement in fit.
Often it is unclear whether a higher order model fits the data better than a lower order.
Equations where higher orders may produce better fits include: simple polynomials of different
order, the sums of exponentials for transient response data, and the sums of hyperbolic
functions for saturation ligand binding data.
F_TEST.XFM uses the residuals from two regressions to compute the sums of squares of the
residuals, then creates the F statistic and computes an approximate P value for the significance
level.
You can try this transform out on the provided sample graph, or run it on the residuals
produced by your own regression sessions. Residuals are saved to the worksheet by the
Regression Wizard.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the F-test worksheet and graph in the
[Link] notebook. The worksheet contains raw data in columns 1 and 2, and curve
fit results for the two competitive binding models in columns 3-5 and 6-8. The graph
plots the raw data and the two curve fits.
2. To use your own data, enter the XY data to be curve fit in columns 1 and 2, respectively.
Select the first curve fit equation and use it to fit the data, place the parameters, fit results
and residuals in the first empty columns (3-5). Run the second curve fit and place the
results in columns 6-8 (the default). If desired, create graphs of these results using the
wizard.

528
 [Link] R Squared for Nonlinear Regressions

3. Press F10to open the User-Defined Transformdialog box, then open the F_TEST.XFM
transform file. Specify n1 and n2, the number of parameters in the lower and higher order
functions. In the example provided, these are 3 and 5, respectively.

If necessary, specify cs1 and cs2, the column locations for the residuals of each curve
fit, and cres, the first column for the two column output.
4. Click Run. The F-test value and corresponding P value are placed into the worksheet. If
P < 0.05, you can predict that the higher order equation provides a statistically better fit.

Figure 13.20 Comparing Two Curve Fits

[Link] R Squared for Nonlinear Regressions

You can use this transform to compute the coefficient of determination (R2) for the results
of a nonlinear regression. The original Y values and the Y data from the fitted curve are
used to calculate R2.
To save the fitted Y values of the nonlinear regression to the worksheet, use the Regression
Wizard to save the Function results to the appropriate column (for this transform, column 3).

1. Place your original Y data in column 2 of the worksheet and the fitted Y data in column 3.
If your data has been placed in other columns, you can specify these columns after you
open the [Link] transform file. You can enter data into an existing or a new worksheet.
2. Click Run. The R2 value is placed in column 4 of the worksheet, or in the column
specified with the res variable.

529
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Standard Deviation of Linear Regression Parameters

This transform computes linear 1st-order regression parameter values (slope and intercept)
and their standard deviations using X and Y data sets of equal length.
To calculate 1st-order regression parameters and their standard deviations for XY data points:

1. Place the X data in column 1 of the worksheet and the Y data in column 2. If your data is
in other columns, you can specify these columns after you open the STDV_REG.XFM
transform file. You can enter data into an existing worksheet or a new worksheet.
2. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 3 and 4, or in the columns specified
by the res variable.

13.8.2 Graphing Transform Examples

The graph transform examples are provided to show you how transform equations can
manipulate and calculate data to create complex graphs.
Each of the following descriptions provide instructions on how to use SigmaPlot to create
graphs. Most of these graphs, however, are already set up as sample graphs. If you use
the provided worksheet and graphs with the corresponding transform files, SigmaPlot
automatically creates the graphs after you run the transform.

[Link] Control Chart for Fractional Defectives with Unequal Sample

Sizes

This example computes the fraction of defectives p for a set of unequally sized samples using
their corresponding numbers of defects, the control limits for p, and data for the upper and
lower control lines. This transform contains examples of the following transform functions:
• stddev
• sqrt

To calculate and graph the fraction of defectives and control lines for given sample sizes
and number of defects per sample, you can either use the provided sample data and graph or
begin a new notebook, enter your own data and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the Control Chart worksheet and
graph in the Control Chart section of the Transform Examples notebook. The worksheet
appears with data in columns 1, 2, and 3. The graph page appears with an empty graph.
2. To use your own data, place the sample sizes in column 1 and the corresponding number
of defects data in column 2 of a new worksheet. If your data is in other columns, you can
specify these columns after you open the [Link] transform file. You can enter
your data in an existing or a new worksheet.
3. Press F10to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Control Chart transform
appears in the edit window.

530
 [Link] Cubic Spline Interpolation and Computation of First and Second Derivatives

4. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 4 through 5 of the worksheet.
5. If you opened the Control Chart graph, view the graph page. The graph plots the fraction
of defectives using a Line and Scatter plot with a Simple Straight Line style graphing
column 3 as Y data versus the row numbers. The control lines are plotted as a Simple
Horizontal Step Plot using columns 4 and 5 versus their row numbers. The mean line for
the fractional defectives is drawn with a reference line.
6. To create your own graph, create a Line and Scatter Plot, with a Simple Line style, then
plot column 3 as Y data against the row numbers. Add an additional Line Plot using the
Multiple Horizontal Step Plot style, plotting columns 4 and 5 versus their two numbers,
then add a reference line to plot the mean line for the fractional device.

Figure 13.21 Control Chart Graph

[Link] Cubic Spline Interpolation and Computation of First and Second

Derivatives

This example takes data with irregularly spaced X values and generates a cubic spline
interpolant. The [Link] transform takes X data which may be irregularly spaced
and generates the coefficients for a cubic spline interpolant. The [Link] transform
takes the coefficients and generates the spline interpolant and its two derivatives.
The values for the interpolant start at a specified minimum X which may be less than, equal
to, or greater than the X value of the original first data point. The interpolant has equally
spaced X values that end at a specified maximum which may be less than, equal to, or greater
than the largest X value of the original data.
Note that this is not the same algorithm that SigmaPlot uses; this algorithm does not handle
multiple valued functions, whereas SigmaPlot does.

531
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To use the transform to generate and graph a cubic spline interpolant, you can either
use the provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data and
create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the Cubic Spline worksheet and
graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Cubic Spline section of the Transform
Examples notebook. The worksheet appears with data in columns 1 and 2 and the graph
page appears with two graphs. The first graph plots the original XY data as a scatter plot.
The second graph appears empty.
2. To use your own data, enter the irregularly spaced XY data into the worksheet. The X
values must be sorted in strictly increasing values. The default X and Y data columns
used by the transform are columns 1 and 2, respectively.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The first Cubic Spline transform
appears in the edit window.
4. Move to the Input Variables heading. Set the X data column variable cx, the Y data
column cy, the beginning interpolated X value xbegin, the ending interpolated X value
xend, and the X increments for the interpolated points xstep. A larger X step results
in a smoother curve but takes longer to compute. Enter the end condition setting iend
for the interpolation.
5. Enter the end condition setting iend for the interpolation.

You can use first, second, or third order conditions.

If you have only a few data points, you should try different orders to see which one
you like the most. See the example for the effect of too low an order on the first and
second derivatives.
1 end spline segments approach straight lines asymptotically
2 end spline segments approach parabolas asymptotically
3 end spline segments approach cubics asymptotically
6. Move to the RESULTS heading and enter the first column number for the results cr. This
column for the beginning of the results block is specified in both transforms.
7. Click Run to run the transform. When it finishes, press F10 then open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. Make sure that the cr variable is
identical to the previous value, then click Run.
8. If you opened the Cubic Spline graph, view the page. The first graph plots the original
XY data as a scatter plot and the interpolated data as a second line plot by picking the
cr column as the X column and cr+1 as the Y column. The second graph plots the
derivatives as line plots using the cr column versus the cr+2 column and the cr column
versus the cr+3 column.
9. To create your own graphs using SigmaPlot, create a Scatter Plot using a Simple
Scatter style which plots the original data in columns 1 and 2 as XY pairs. Add an
additional Line Plot using a Simple Spline Curve, then plot the cr column as the X column
against the cr+1 column as the Y column.

532
 [Link] Fast Fourier Transform

[Link] Fast Fourier Transform

The Fast Fourier Transform converts data from the time domain to the frequency domain. It
can be used to remove noise from, or smooth data using frequency-based filtering. Use the
fft function to find the frequency domain representation of your data, then edit the results to
remove any frequency which may adversely affect the original data.
The Fast Fourier Transform uses the following transform functions:
• fft
• invfft
• real
• img
• complex
• mulcpx
• invcpx
The Fast Fourier Transform operates on a range of real values or a block of complex values.
For complex values there are two columns of data. The first column contains the real values
and the second column represents the imaginary values. The worksheet format of a block of
complex numbers is:
r1 i1
r2 i2
.... ....
rn in

where r values are real elements, and i values are imaginary elements. In transform language
syntax, the two columns {{r1, r2, ... rn},{i1, i2, ... in}} are written as:
block({r1, r2, ... rn},{i1, i2, ... in})
This function works on data sizes of size 2n numbers. If your data set is not 2n in length, the fft
function pads 0 at the beginning and end of the data range to make the length 2n.

533
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The fft function returns a range of complex numbers. The Fast Fourier Transform is usually
graphed with respect to frequency. To produce a frequency scale, use the relationship:
f=fs*(data(0,n/2)-1)/n
where fs is the sampling frequency. The example transform [Link]. includes the
automatic generation of a frequency scale.
The Fast Fourier Transform operates on data which is assumed to be periodic over the interval
being analyzed. If the data is not periodic, then unwanted high frequency components are
introduced. To prevent these high frequency components from occurring, windows can be
applied to the data before using the fft transform. The Hanning window is a cosine function
that drops to zero at each end of the data. The example transform [Link] includes
the option to implement the Hanning window.

[Link].1 Using the Block Function

To return the full fft data to the worksheet:

1. First assign the data you want to filter to column 1 of the worksheet. You can generate the
data using a transform, or use your own measurements.
2. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transforms dialog box, then click New to start a
new transform.
3. Type the following transform in the edit window:

x=col(1) ’real data

tx=fft(x) ’compute the fft
block(2)=tx ’place real fft data back in col(2)
’place imaginary fft data in col(3)
4. Click Run. The results are placed starting one column over from the original data.

5. Click Run. The results are placed starting one column over from the original data.

[Link].2 Computing Power Spectral Density

The example transform [Link] uses the Fast Fourier Transform function, then
computes the power spectral density, a frequency axis, and makes optional use of a Hanning
window.
To calculate and graph the power spectral density of a set of data, you can either use the
provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data and create
your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Power Spectral Density worksheet
and graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Power Spectral Density section
of the Transform Examples notebook. Data appears in column 1 of the worksheet, and

534
 [Link].2 Computing Power Spectral Density

two graphs appear on the graph page. The top graph shows data generated by the sum of
two sine waves plus Gaussian random noise. The data is represented by:

f(t)=sin(2*pi*f1*t)+0.3*sin(2*pi*f2*t)+g(t)
where f1=10 cycles/sec (cps), f2=100cps, and the Gaussian random noise has mean 0 and
standard deviation of 0.2. The lower graph is empty.
2. To use your own data, place your data in column 1. If your data is in a different column,
specify the new column after you open the [Link] transform file.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Power Spectral Density
transform appears in the edit window.

Note: To use this transform, the Trigonometric Units must be set to Radians.
4. Click Run.

Since the frequency sampling value (fs) is nonzero, a frequency axis is generated in
column 2 and the power spectral density data in column 3.
5. If you opened the Power Spectral Density graph, view the graph page. Two graphs appear
on the page. The top graph plots the data generated by the sum of two sine waves plus
Gaussian random noise using a Line Plot with Simple Straight Line style graphing column
1 versus row numbers. The lower graph plots the power spectral density using a Line
Plot with a Simple Straight Line style, graphing column 2 as the X data (frequency), and
column 3 as the Y data.
6. To plot your own data using SigmaPlot, click the Create Graph tab. Create a Line
Plot with a Simple Straight Line style plotting your original data versus row numbers by
choosing Single Y data format. If you set the frequency sampling value (fs) to nonzero,
create a Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style, graphing columns 2 and 3 using XY
Pair data format. Otherwise, create a Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style plotting
column 3 (power spectral density) versus row numbers by choosing Single Y data format.

The power spectral density plot of the signal f(t) shows two major peaks at the two
frequencies of the sine waves (10cps and 100cps), and a more or less constant noise
level in between.
About Creating and Modifying GraphsFor more information, see page 23.

Figure 13.22 Power Spectral Density Example Graph

The top graph shows f(t) data generated by the sum of two sine waves plus Gaussian random
noise. The bottom graph is the power spectral density of the signal f(t).

535
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link].3 Kernel Smoothing

The example transform [Link] smooths data by convolving the Fast Fourier
Transform of a triangular smoothing kernel together with the fft of the data. Smoothing data
using this transform is computationally very fast; the number of operations is greatly reduced
over traditional methods, and the results are comparable. To increase the smoothing, increase
the width of the triangular smoothing kernel.
To calculate and graph the smoothed data, you can either use the provided sample data and
graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Kernel Smoothing worksheet and
graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Kernel Smoothing section of the
Transform Examples notebook. Data appears in columns 1 through 4, 6, and 7 of the
worksheet, and two graphs appear on the graph page. The first graph has two plots, the
signal, and the signal with noise distortion. Column 1 contains the X data, column 2
contains the Y data for the signal, and column 3 contains the Y data for the signal and the
noise distortion. The lower graph is empty.
2. To use your own data, place your data in columns 1 through 2. If your data is in other
columns, specify the new columns after you open the [Link] transform file. If
necessary, specify a new column for the results.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transformdialog box, then click Open to open
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Kernel Smoothing transform
appears in the edit window.

536
 [Link].4 Smoothing with a Low Pass Filter

Note: To use this transform, make sure the Insert mode is turned off.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in column 5 unless you specified a different column in
the transform.
5. If you opened the Kernel Smoothing graph, view the graph page. Two graphs appear on
the page. The first graph has two plots, the signal, and the signal with noise distortion.
The Line Plot with a Multiple Straight Line style graphs column 1 as the X data, column 2
as the Y data for the signal, and column 3 as the Y data for the signal and the noise
distortion. The lower Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style plots column 1 as the X
data, and column 5 as the Y data using XY Pairs data format.
6. To plot your own data using SigmaPlot, click the Create Graph tab. Create a Line Plot
with a Multiple Straight Line style using X Many Y data format, plotting column 1 as the
X data, column 2 as the Y data for the signal, and column 3 as the Y data for the signal
and the noise distortion. Create a second Line Plot graph with a Simple Straight Line
style using the data in columns 1 and 5, graphing column 1 as the X data and column 5
as the Y data using XY Pairs data format.

About Creating and Modifying GraphsFor more information, see page 23.

Figure 13.23 Kernel Smoothing Graph

The top graph shows two plots: the signal, and the signal plus noise distortion. The bottom
graph is the kernel smoothing of the signal with smoothing set at 10%.

[Link].4 Smoothing with a Low Pass Filter

The Low Pass Filter transform smooths data by eliminating high frequencies. Use this
transform in contrast to the Kernel Smoothing transform which smooths data by augmenting

537
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

some frequencies while minimizing others. The transform statements describing how the
low pass filter works are:
x=col(1) ‘the data to smooth
f=5 ‘number of channels to eliminate

tx=fft(x) ‘fft of data

r=data(1,size(tx)/2) ‘total number of channels
mp=size(tx)/4 ‘get the midpoint
‘remove the frequencies
td=if( r<mp-f or r>mp+1+f,tx,0)
sd=invfft( td ) ‘convert back to time domain

col(2)=real(sd) ‘save smoothed data to worksheet

The [Link] transform expresses f as a percentage for ease of use. As the value of f
increases, more high frequency channels are removed. Note that this is a digital transform
which cuts data at a discrete boundary. In addition, this transform does not alter the phase
of the data, which makes it more accurate than analog filtering. A high pass or band pass
filter can be constructed in the same manner.
To calculate and graph the smoothing of a set of data using a low pass filter, you can either
use the provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and
create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph,open the Low Pass Smoothing worksheet and
graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Low Pass Smoothing section of the
Transform Examples notebook. Data appears in columns 1 through 4 of the worksheet,
and two graphs showing plots appear on the graph page. Column 1 contains the X data,
column 2 contains the Y data for the signal and the noise distortion, column 3 contains the
X data, and column 4 contains the Y data for the original signal. The top graph plots the
signal plus the noise distortion; the bottom graph plots the signal.
2. To use your own data,place your data in columns 1 through 2. If your data is in other
columns, specify the new columns after you open the [Link] transform file. If
necessary, specify a new column for the results.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Low Pass Filter transform
appears in the edit window.

Note: To use this transform, make sure Insert mode is turned off.
4. Click Run. The results are placed starting in column 5, unless you specified a different
column in the transform.
5. If you opened the Low Pass Smoothing graph, view the graph page. Two graphs appear.
The top graph plots the signal plus the noise distortion, using a Line Plot with a Simple
Straight Line style and XY Pairs data format graphing column 1 as the X data, column 2
as the Y data for the signal and the noise distortion. The bottom graph displays two plots.
A Scatter Plot with a Simple Scatter Style and XY Pairs data format, plots column 3 as
the X data, and column 4 as the Y data for the original signal. A second Line Plot with a
Simple Straight Line style using data in columns 1 and 5, plots column 1 as the X data
and column 5 as the Y data using XY Pairs data format.

538
 [Link].5 Gain Filter Smoothing

6. To plot your own data using SigmaPlot, click the Create Graph tab. Graph the signal
plus the noise distortion, using a Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style and XY Pairs
data format graphing column 1 as the X data, column 2 as the Y data for the signal and the
noise distortion. Create a second graph with two plots. Plot the original signal using a
Scatter Plot with a Simple Scatter Style and XY Pairs data format, plotting column 3 as
the X data, and column 4 as the Y data for the original signal. Add a second Line Plot
with a Simple Straight Line style using data in columns 1 and 5, plotting column 1 as the
X data and column 5 as the Y data using XY Pairs data format.

Figure 13.24 Low Pass Filter Smoothing Graph

The top graph shows the signal plus noise distortion. The bottom graph shows the signal and
the low pass filtering set at 88%.

[Link].5 Gain Filter Smoothing

The [Link] transform example demonstrates gain filter smoothing. This method
eliminates all frequencies with power spectral density levels below a specified threshold. The
transform statements describing how gain filter smoothing works are:
P=4000 ‘psd threshold
x=col(1) ‘data

tx=fft(x) ‘compute fft of data

md=real(tx)^2+img(tx)^2 ‘compute sd
kc=if(md>P,1,0) ‘remove frequencies with

539
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

‘psd<P
sd=mulcpx(complex(kc),tx) ‘remove frequency
‘components from x
td=real( invfft(sd) ) ‘convert back to time domain
col(2)=td ‘place results in worksheet
To calculate and graph the smoothing of a set of data using a gain filter, you can either use
the provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and
create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Gain Filter Smoothing worksheet and
graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Gain Filter Smoothing section of the
Transform Examples notebook. Data appears in columns 1 through 3 of the worksheet,
and two graphs showing plots, and one blank graph appear on the graph page. Column 1
contains the Y data for the signal plus noise, column 2 contains the X data and column 3
contains the Y data for the power spectral density graph. The top graph plots the signal
plus the noise distortion; the middle graph plots the power spectral density.
2. To use your own data, place your data in column 1. If your data is in a different column,
specify the new column after you open the [Link] transform file. If necessary,
specify a new column for the results.
3. Press F10to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Gain Filter transform appears
in the edit window.

Note: To use this transform, make sure Insert mode is turned off. Insertion and Overwrite
ModesFor more information, see page 203.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in column 5 unless you specified a different column in
the transform.
5. If you opened the Gain Filter Smoothing graph, view the graph page. Three graphs
appear. The top graph plots the signal plus the noise distortion using a Line Plot with a
Simple Straight line style and Single Y data format, plotting column 1 as the Y data for
the signal plus noise. The middle graph plots the power spectral density using a Line Plot
with a Simple Straight Line style and XY Pairs data format, plotting column 2 as the X
data and column 3 as the Y data for the power spectral density graph. The lower graph
is a plot of the gain filtered signal, using a Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style,
and single Y data format from column 5.
6. To plot your own data using SigmaPlot, click the Create Graph tab. Create two
graphs. Plot the signal plus the noise distortion using a Line Plot with a Simple Straight
line style and Single Y data format, plotting column 1 as the Y data for the signal plus
noise. Plot the gain filtered signal using a Line Plot with a Simple Straight Line style,
and single Y data format from column 5.

Figure 13.25 Gain Filter Smoothing Graph

The top graph shows the signal plus noise distortion. The middle graph shows the power
spectral density of the signal plus noise distortion. The lower graph shows the gain filter
smoothed data.

540
 [Link] Frequency Plot

[Link] Frequency Plot

This transform example creates a frequency plot showing the frequency of the occurrence of
data in the Y direction. Data is grouped in specified intervals, then horizontally plotted for a
specific Y value. Parameters can be set to display symbols that are displaced a specific distance
from each other or that touch or overlap. You can also plot the mean value of each data interval.
This transform example shows overlapping symbols which give the impression of data mass.
To calculate and graph the frequency of the occurrence of a set of data, you can either use the
provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data and create
your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Frequency Plot worksheet and graph
by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Frequency Plot section of the Transform
Examples notebook. Data appears in columns 1 through 3 of the worksheet, and an
empty graph appears on the graph page.

541
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

2. To use your own data, place your data in columns 1 through 3. You can put data in
as many or as few columns as desired, but if you use the sample transform you must
change the X locations of the Y values in the second line under the Input heading in the
transform file to reflect the number of data columns you are using. If your data is in
other columns or more than three columns, specify the new columns after you open the
[Link] transform file.

Enter the tick labels for the X axis in a separate column, and specify tick labels from a
column using the Tick Labels Type drop-down list in the Tick Labels panel in Graph
Properties Axis tab.
3. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a graph with three Scatter Plots with
Simple Scatter styles. Plot each consecutive result column pair as XY pair scatter plots. If
the mean line option is active in the transform, plot the last consecutive result column
pair as a XY pair Line Plot with Simple Straight Line style. Use labels typed into a
worksheet column as the X axis tick labels.

4. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Frequency Plot transform
appears in the edit window.
5. Click Run. The results are placed starting one column over from the original data.
6. If you opened the sample Frequency Plot graph, view the graph page. A Scatter Plot
appears plotting columns 5 and 6, 7 and 8, and 9 and 10 as three separate XY Pair plots.
The lines passing through each data interval is a fourth Line Plot with a Simple Straight
Line style plotting columns 11 and 12 as an XY pair, representing the mean value of each
data interval. The X axis tick marks are generated by the transform. The axis labels
are taken from column 13.

Figure 13.26 Frequency Plot Graph

542
 [Link] Gaussian Cumulative Distribution from the Error Function

7. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a graph with three Scatter Plots with
Simple Scatter styles. Plot each consecutive result column pair as XY pair scatter plots. If
the mean line option is active in the transform, plot the last consecutive result column
pair as a XY pair Line Plot with Simple Straight Line style. Use labels typed into a
worksheet column as the X axis tick labels.

8. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a graph with three Scatter Plots with
Simple Scatter styles. Plot each consecutive result column pair as XY pair scatter plots. If
the mean line option is active in the transform, plot the last consecutive result column
pair as a XY pair Line Plot with Simple Straight Line style. Use labels typed into a
worksheet column as the X axis tick labels.

[Link] Gaussian Cumulative Distribution from the Error Function

Rational approximations can be used to compute many special functions. This transform
demonstrates a polynomial approximation for the error function. The error function is then
used to generate the Gaussian cumulative distribution function. The absolute maximum error
for the error function approximation is less than 2.5 x 10-5 (M. Abramowitz and L.A. Stegun,
Handbook of Mathematical Functions, p. 299).
To calculate and graph the Gaussian cumulative distribution for given X values, you can
either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a new notebook, enter your own data
and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Gaussian worksheet and graph by
double-clicking the graph page icon in the Gaussian section of the Transform Examples
notebook. Data appears in column 1 of the worksheet and two empty graphs appear
on the graph page.
2. To use your own data, place the X data in column 1. If your data has been placed
in another column, you can specify the column after you open the [Link]
transform file.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open
the [Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Gaussian Cumulative
transform appears in the edit window.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in column 2, or in the column specified by the res
variable.
5. If you opened the sample Gaussian graph, view the graph page. A Line Plot appears
with a spline curve in the first graph with column 1 as the X data versus column 2 as
the distribution (Y) data.
6. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a Line Plot graph with a Simple
Spline Curve. The spline curve plots column 1 as the X data versus column 2 as the
distribution (Y) data.

[Link].1 Gaussian Cumulative Distribution on a Probability Scale

543
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The probability scale is the inverse of the Gaussian cumulative distribution function. When a
Gaussian cumulative distribution function is graphed using the probability scale, the result is
a straight line.

1. If you opened the sample Gaussian graph, view the graph page. A straight line plot appears
in the second graph plotting the distribution data in column 3 along a probability scale.
2. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, create a Line Plot with a Simple Straight
Line using column 1 as your X data and column 3 as your Y data, and set the Y axis
scale to Probability.

Figure 13.27 Gaussian Cumulative Distribution Graphs

[Link] Histogram with Gaussian Distribution

This transform calculates histogram data for a normally distributed sample, then uses the
sample mean and standard deviation of the histogram to compute and graph a Gaussian
distribution for the histogram data.
The Histogram Gaussian transform uses examples of the following functions:
• gaussian
• histogram
• size
• [...] (array reference)

To calculate and graph a histogram and Gaussian curve for a normally distributed sample, you
can either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a new notebook, enter your own
data, and create your own graph using the data.
To use the sample worksheet and graph:

544
 [Link] Histogram with Gaussian Distribution

1. Open the Histogram Gaussian worksheet and graph by double-clicking the graph page
icon in the Histogram Gaussian section of the Transform Examples notebook.

The Histogram worksheet with data in column 1 and an empty graph page appears. The
data in the Histogram Gaussian worksheet was generated using the transform:
col(1) = gaussian(100,0,325,2)
To use your own data:
2. Place the sample in column 1 of the worksheet. If your data has been placed in another
column, you can specify this column after you open the [Link] transform file.
You can enter the data into an existing or new worksheet.
3. Press F10to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Histogram with Gaussian
Distribution transform appears in the edit window.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 2 through 5 of the worksheet, or in the
columns specified by the res variable.
5. If you opened the Histogram Gaussian graph, view the graph page. A histogram appears
using column 2 as X data versus column 3 as the Y data. The curve plots the Gaussian
distribution using column 4 as X data versus column 5 as the Y data.
6. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, create a simple vertical bar chart and set the
bar widths as wide as possible. Add the Gaussian curve to the graph by creating another
plot using the data in column 4 as the X data and the data in column 5 as the Y data.

Figure 13.28 The Histogram Gaussian Graph

545
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Linear Regression with Confidence and Prediction Intervals

This transform computes the linear regression and upper and lower confidence and prediction
limits for X and Y columns of equal length. A rational polynomial approximation is used to
compute the t values used for these confidence limits.
The figure below displays the sample Linear Regression graph with the results of the
[Link] transform plotted.
The [Link] transform contains examples of these two functions:
• min
• max

To calculate and graph a linear regression and confidence and prediction limits for XY data
points, you can either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a new notebook, enter
your own data, and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the Linear Regression worksheet
and graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Linear Regression section of the
Transform Examples notebook. The worksheet appears with data in columns 1 and 2. The
graph page appears with a scatter graph plotting the original data in columns 1 and 2.
2. To use your own data, place the X data in column 1 and the Y data in column 2. If your
data has been placed in other columns, you can specify these columns after you open the
[Link] transform file. You can enter data into an existing or a new worksheet.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform in the XFMS directory. The Linear Regression transform
appears in the edit window. If necessary, change the x_col, y_col, and res variables to
the correct column numbers (this is not necessary for the example Linear Regression
worksheet data).
4. Change the Z variable to reflect the desired confidence level (this is not necessary for the
example Linear Regression worksheet data).
5. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 3 through 8, or in the columns specified
by the res variable.
6. If you opened the Linear Regression graph, view the graph page. The original data in
columns 1 and 2 is plotted as a scatter plot. The regression is plotted as a solid line plot
using column 3 as the X data versus column 4 as the Y data, the confidence limits are
plotted as dashed lines using column 3 as a single X column versus columns 7 and 8 as
many Y columns, and the prediction limits are plotted as dotted lines using column 3 as a
single X column versus columns 7 and 8 as many Y columns.
7. To create your own graph in SigmaPlot, create a Scatter Plot with a Simple Regression,
plotting column 1 against column 2 as the symbols and using column 3 plotted against
column 4 as the regression. Add confidence and prediction intervals using column 3 as
the X column and columns 7 and 8 as the Y columns.

546
 [Link] Low Pass Filter

Figure 13.29 Linear Regression Graph

[Link] Low Pass Filter

This transform is a smoothing filter which produces a data sequence with reduced high
frequency components. The resulting data can be graphed using the original X data.
To calculate and graph a data sequence with reduced high frequency components, you can
either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a new notebook, enter your own data,
and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, double-click the Low Pass Filter graph
page icon in the Low Pass Filter section of the Transform Examples notebook. The
worksheet appears with data in columns 1 and 2. The graph page appears with two
graphs. The first is a line graph plotting the raw data in columns 1 and 2. The second
graph is empty.
2. To use your own data, place your Y data (amplitude) in column 2 of the worksheet, and
the X data (time) in column 1. If your data is in other columns, you can specify these
columns after you open the [Link] file. You can enter your data in an existing
or new worksheet.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Low Pass Filter transform
appears in the edit window.
4. Set the sampling interval dt (the time interval between data points) and the half power
point fc values. The half power point is the frequency at which the squared magnitude of
the frequency response is reduced by half of its magnitude at zero frequency.
5. If necessary, change the cy1 source column value and cy2 filtered data results to the
correct column numbers.

547
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

6. Click Run to run the transform. Filtered data appears in column 3 in the worksheet, or
in the worksheet column you specified in the transform.
7. If you opened the Low Pass Filter graph, view the graph page. The second graph appears
as a line graph plotting the smoothed data in columns 1 and 3.
8. To create your own graphs in SigmaPlot, create the first graph as a Line Plot with a
Simple Spline Curve using the raw data in columns 1 and 2 as the X and Y data. Make
the second Line Plot graph with a Simple Spline Curve using the data in column1 as the
X data and the smoothed data in column 3 as the Y data.

Figure 13.30 Low Pass Filter Graph Plotting Raw Data and Filtered Data

[Link] Lowess Smoothing

Smoothing is used to elicit trends from noisy data. Lowess smoothing produces smooth curves
under a variety of conditions. "Lowess" means locally weighted regression. Each point along
the smooth curve is obtained from a regression of data points close to the curve point with
the closest points more heavily weighted.
The y value of the data point is replaced by the y value on the regression line. The amount of
smoothing, which affects the number of points in the regression, is specified by the user with
the parameter f. This parameter is the fraction of the total number of points that is used in
each regression. If there are 50 points along the smooth curve with f = 0.2 then 50 weighted
regressions are performed and each regression is performed using 10 points.
An example of the use of lowess smoothing for the U.S. wheat production from 1872 to 1958
is shown in the figures below. The smoothing parameter f was chosen to be 0.2 since this
produced a good tradeoff between noisy undersmoothing and oversmoothing which misses
some of the peak-and-valley details in the data.

548
 [Link] Lowess Smoothing

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the Lowess Smoothing worksheet
and graph in the Lowess Smoothing section of the Transform Examples notebook. The
worksheet appears with data in columns 1, 2, and 3.
2. To use your own data, enter the XY data for your curve in columns 1 and 2, respectively.
If your data has been placed in other columns, you can specify these columns after you
open the [Link] transform file. Enter data into an existing or a new worksheet.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open
the [Link] transform file in the Transforms directory. The Lowess transform
appears in the edit window.
4. Click Run . The results are placed in column 3 of the worksheet, or in the column
specified by the ouput variable.
5. If you opened the Lowess Smoothing graph, view the graph page. The smoothed curve
is plotted on the second graph and both the original and smoothed data are plotted on
the third.

Figure 13.31 U.S. Wheat data and the lowess smoothed curve (f = 0.2). Notice
the definite decreased production during World War II.

If you want to plot your own results, create a line plot of column 1 versus column 3.

549
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Normalized Histogram

This simple transform creates a histogram normalized to unit area. The resulting data can be
graphed as a bar chart. Histogram bar locations are shifted to be placed over the histogram box
locations. The resulting bar chart is an approximation to a probability density function.
To calculate and graph a normalized histogram sample, you can either use the provided
sample data and graph or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and create your own
graph using the data.

1. To use the provided sample data and graph, open the Normalized Histogram worksheet
and graph in the Normalized Histogram and Graph section of the Transform Examples
notebook. The worksheet appears with data in column 1. The data is made up of
exponentially distributed random numbers generated with the transform:

x = random(200,1,1.e-10,1)col(1) = -ln(x)
The graph page appears with an empty graph.
2. To use your own data, place your data in column 1 of the worksheet. If your data
has been placed in another column, you can specify this column after you open the
[Link] transform file. You can enter data into an existing or new worksheet.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform file in the XFMS directory. The Normalized Histogram
transform appears in the edit window.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 2 and 3 of the worksheet, or in the columns
specified by the res variable.
5. If you opened the Normalized Histogram graph, view the graph page. A histogram
appears using column 2 as X data versus column 3 as the Y data.
6. To create your own graph in SigmaPlot, create a Vertical Bar chart with simple bars,
then set the bar widths as wide as possible.

550
 [Link] Smooth Color Transition Transform

Figure 13.32 Normalized Histogram Graph

[Link] Smooth Color Transition Transform

This transform example creates a smooth color transition corresponding to the changes across
a range of values. The transform places color cells in a worksheet column that change from a
specified start color to a specified end color, each color cell incrementing an equivalent shade
for each data value in the range. This transform example shows how the color transform can
be set to display a "cool" (blue) color that corresponds to small residuals, and a "hot" (red)
color that corresponds to large residuals resulting from a nonlinear regression. Since residuals
vary positively and negatively about zero, the absolute values for the residuals are used in
the transform.
Note: It is unnecessary to sort the data before executing the smooth color transition transform.
To calculate and graph the smooth color transition of a set of data, you can either use the
provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and create
your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, open the Smooth Color Transition worksheet
and graph by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Smooth Color Transition section
of the Transform Examples notebook. Data appears in columns 1 and 2 of the worksheet,
and a scatter graph appears on the graph page.
2. To use your own data, place your data in columns 1 and 2. For the residuals example,
column 2 is the absolute value of the residuals in column 1. To obtain absolute values
of your data, use the abs transform function. For example, to obtain the absolute values
of the data set in column 1, type the following transform in the User-Defined Transform
dialog box:

col(2)=abs(col(1))
If your data is in a different column, specify the new column after you open the
[Link] transform file.

551
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a Scatter Plot graph with a Scatter
Plot with Simple Scatter style. Plot the data as Single Y data format. Use the color cells
produced by the transform by selecting the corresponding worksheet column from the
Symbol Fill Color drop-down list.

4. If your data is in a different column, specify the new column after you open the
[Link] transform file.
5. To create your own graph using SigmaPlot, make a Scatter Plot graph with a Scatter
Plot with Simple Scatter style. Plot the data as Single Y data format. Use the color cells
produced by the transform by selecting the corresponding worksheet column from the
Symbol Fill Color drop-down list.

[Link] Survival (Kaplan-Meier) Curves with Censored Data

This transform creates Kaplan-Meier survival curves with or without censored data. The
survival curve may be graphed alone or with the data.
To use the transform, you can either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a new
notebook, enter your own data, and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, double-click the graph page icon in the
Survival section of the Transforms Examples notebook. The Survival worksheet appears
with data in columns 1 and 2. The graph page appears with an empty graph.
2. To use your own data, enter survival times in column 1 of the worksheet. Ties (identical
survival times) are allowed. You can enter data into an existing or a new worksheet.
3. Enter the censoring identifier in column 2. This identifier should be 1 if the corresponding
data point in column 1 is a true response, and 0 if the data is censored.
4. If desired, save the unsorted data by copying the data to two other columns.
5. Select columns 1 and 2, then on the Worksheettab click Sort Selection. Specify the
key column in the Sort Selection dialog box as column 1, and the sort order option
as Ascending.
6. Check for any ties between true response and censored data. If any exist, make sure that
within the tied data, the censored data follows the true response data.
7. Click Runto run the file. The sorted time, cumulative survival probability, and the
standard error are placed in columns res, res+1, and res+2, respectively. For graphical
purposes a zero, one, and zero have been placed in the first rows of the sorted time,
cumulative survival curve probability and standard error columns.
8. If you opened the sample Survival graph, view the page. The Simple Horizontal Step
Plot graphs the survival curve data from columns res as the X data versus column res+1
as the Y data and a Scatter Plot graphs the data from the same columns. The first data
point of the Scatter Plot at (0,1) is not displayed by selecting rows 2 to end in the Portions
of Columns Plotted area of the Data section in the Plots tab of the Graph Properties
dialog box. As shown in the figure below, a tied censored data point has been incorrectly
placed; it should follow uncensored data.
9. To graph a survival curve, create a Line graph with a Simple Horizontal Step Plot
graphing column res as the X data versus column res+1 as the Y data. If desired, create an
additional Scatter plot, superimposing the survival data using the same columns for X data

552
 [Link] User-Defined Axis Scale

and Y data. To turn off the symbol drawn at x = 0 and y = 1, select Plot 2 and set Only
rows = 2 to end by 1 in the Plots tab and Data sections of the Graph Properties dialog box.

Figure 13.33 The Survival Graph

[Link] User-Defined Axis Scale

The [Link] transform is a specific example how to transform data to fit the
user-defined axis scale.
This transform:
• Transforms the data using the new axis scale
• Creates Y interval data for the new scale

To use this transform to graph data along a (log(log(100/Y)) Y axis, you can either use the
provided sample data and graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and create
your own graph using the data.

553
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, double-click the graph page icon in the User
Defined Axis Scale section of the Transforms Examples notebook. The User Defined Axis
Scale worksheet appears with data in columns 1 through 3. The graph page appears with
an empty graph with gridlines.
2. To use your own data, place your original X data in column 1, Y data in column 2, and
the Y axis tick interval values in column 3. If your data has been placed in other columns,
you can specify these columns after you open the [Link] file.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform. If necessary, change the y_col, tick_col, and res variables
to the correct column numbers.
4. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 4 and 5, or the columns specified by the res
variable.
5. If you opened the User Defined Axis Scale graph, view the page. The graph is already set
up to plot the data and grid lines.
6. To plot the transformed Y data, plot column 1 as the X values versus column 4 as
the Y values.

To plot the Y axis tick marks, on the Property Browserselect:

Page→[Graph Title]→Axes→[Axis Title]→Ticks→Major Tick Labels
7. On Object Properties, select Column 5 from the Major Tick Intervals drop-down list.

To draw the tick labels, use the Y tick interval data as the tick label source by selecting
Column 3 from the Tick Label Type drop-down list in the Tick Labels panel under the
Axes tab of the Graph Properties dialog box.

Figure 13.34 User-Defined Axis Scale Graph

554
 [Link] Vector Plot

[Link] Vector Plot

The [Link] transform creates a field of vectors (lines with arrow heads) from data
which specifies the X and Y position, length, and angle of each vector. The data is entered
into four columns. Executing the transform produces six columns of three XY pairs, which
describe the arrow body and the upper and lower components of the arrow head.
Other settings are:
• The length of the arrow head.
• The angle in degrees between the arrow head and the arrow body.
• The length of the vector (if you want to specify it as a constant).

To generate a vector plot, you can either use the provided sample data and graph or begin a
new notebook, enter your own data, and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, double-click the graph page icon in the Vector
section of the Transform Examples notebook. The Vector worksheet appears with data in
columns 1 through 4. The graph page appears with an empty graph.
2. To use your own data, enter the vector information into the worksheet. Data must be
entered in four column format, with the XY position of the vector starting in the first
column, the length of the vectors (which correspond to the axis units), and the angle of the
vector, in degrees. The default starting column for this block is column one.
3. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] file in the XFMS directory.
4. If necessary, change the starting worksheet column for your vector data block xc.
5. If desired, change the default arrowhead length L (in axis units) and the Angle used by the
arrowhead lines. This is the angle between the main line and each arrowhead line.
6. If you want to use vectors of constant length, set the l value to the desired length, then
uncomment the remaining two lines under the Constant Vector Length heading.
7. Make sure that Radiansare selected as the Trigonometric Units(they should be by
default.
8. Click Runto run the transform. The transform produces six columns of three XY pairs,
which describe the arrow body and the upper and lower components of the arrow head.
9. If you opened the Vector graph, view the page. The Line Plot with Multiple Straight Line
appears plotting columns 5 through 10 as XY pairs.
10. To plot the vector data using SigmaPlot, create a Line Plot with Multiple Straight Line
graph that plots columns 5 through 10 as three vector XY column pairs.

555
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 13.35 The Vector Graph

[Link] Z Plane Design Curves

The [Link] transform is a specific example of the use of transforms to generate data
for a unit circle and curves of constant damping ratio and natural frequency.
The root locus technique analyzes performance of a digital controller in the z plane using the
unit circle as the stability boundary and the curves of constant damping ratio and frequency for
a second order system to evaluate controller performance.
Root locus data is loaded from an external source and plotted in Cartesian coordinates along
with the design curves in order to determine performance.
Refer to Digital Control of Dynamic Systems, Gene. F. Franklin and J. David Powell,
Addison-Wesley, pp. 32 and 104 for the equations and graph.
To calculate the data for the design curves, you can either use the provided sample data and
graph, or begin a new notebook, enter your own data, and create your own graph using the data.

1. To use the sample worksheet and graph, double-click the graph page icon in the Z
Plane section of the Transform Examples notebook. The Z Plane worksheet appears with
data in columns 1 through 10. The Z Plane graph page appears with the design curve data
plotted over some sample root locus data. This plot uses columns 1 and 2 as the first curve
and columns 3 and 4 as the second curve.
2. To use your own data, place your root locus, zero, and pole data in columns 1 through
10. If your locus data has been placed in other columns, you can change the location of
the results columns after you open the [Link] file.
3. To plot the design curves of your data, create a Line Plot with Multiple Spline Curves,
then plot column 1 as the X data against column 2 as the Y data for the first curve and
column 3 as the X data against column 4 as the Y data as the second curve.

556
 [Link] Z Plane Design Curves

4. Press F10 to open the User-Defined Transform dialog box, then click Open to open the
[Link] transform in the XFMS directory. If necessary, change the res variable to
the correct column number.
5. Click Run. The results are placed in columns 11 through 20, or the columns specified
by the res variable.
6. If you opened the Z Plane graph, view the page. The circle, frequency trajectory, and
damping trajectory data is automatically plotted with the design data.
7. To plot the circle data using SigmaPlot, create Multiple Line Plots with Simple Spline
Curves. For the first plot use column 11 as the X values versus column 12 as the Y values.
8. To plot the frequency trajectory data (zeta), plot column 13 versus column 14 and
column 15 versus column 16 as the XY pairs.
9. To plot the damping trajectory data (omega), plot column 17 versus column 18 and
column 19 versus column 20 as the XY pairs.

Figure 13.36 Z Plane Graph

557
14 Transform Function
Reference
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ Transform Function Reference

14.1 Transform Function Reference

SigmaPlot 12 provides many predefined functions, including arithmetic, statistical,
trigonometric, and number-generating functions. In addition, you can define functions of
your own.

14.1.1 Function Arguments

Function arguments are placed in parentheses following the function name, separated by
commas. Arguments must be typed in the sequence shown for each function.
You must provide the required arguments for each function first, followed by any optional
arguments desired. Any omitted optional arguments are set to the default value. Optional
arguments are always omitted from right to left. If only one argument is omitted, it will be the
last argument. If two are omitted, the last two arguments are set to the default value.
You can use a missing value (i.e., 0/0) as a placeholder to omit an argument.
Example
The col function has three arguments: column, top, and bottom. Therefore, the syntax for
the col function is: col(column,top,bottom)
The column number argument is required, but the first (top) and last (bottom) rows are
optional, defaulting to row 1 as the first row and the last row with data for the last row.
col(2) returns the entirety of column 2.
col(2,5) returns column 2 from row 5 to the end of the column.
col(2,5,100) returns column 2 from row 5 to row 100.
col(2,0/0,50) returns column 2 from row 1 to the 50th row in the column.

14.1.2 User-Defined Functions

You can create any user-defined function, consisting of any expression in the transform
language, and then refer to it by name.
For example, the following transform defines the function dist2pts, which
returns the distance between two points dist2pts(x1,y1,x2,y2) =
sqrt((x2-x1)^2+(y2-y1)^2).
You can then use this custom-defined function, instead of the expression to the right of the
equal sign, in subsequent equations.

559
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

For example, to plot the distances between two sets of XY coordinates, with the first points
stored in columns 1 and 2, and the second in columns 3 and 4, enter:
col(5) = dist2pts(col(1),col(2),col(3),col(4))
The resulting distances are placed in column 5.

14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

You can modify and manipulate worksheet data by entering SigmaPlot’s extensive
mathematical transformation language into the User-Defined Transform dialog box. For
more information, see page .Type transform instructions into the Edit Transform [Link]
can modify and manipulate worksheet data by entering SigmaStat’s extensive mathematical
transformation language into the User-Defined Transform dialog box. For more information,
see page .Type transform instructions into the Edit Transform field. You can enter up to
32,000 characters. Entering TransformsFor more information, see page .
The following list groups transforms by function type. It is followed by an alphabetical
reference containing complete descriptions of all transform functions and their syntax, with
examples.
Worksheet Functions. These worksheet functions are used to specify cells and columns from
the worksheet, either to read data from the worksheet for transformation, or to specify a
destination for transform results.
Function Description
block The block function returns a specified block of cells from the
worksheet. For more information, see page .
blockheight, The blockheight and blockwidth functions return a specified block
blockwidth For more of cells or block dimension from the worksheet.
information, see page .
cell For more The cell function returns a specific cell from the worksheet.
information, see page .
col For more The col function returns a worksheet column or portion of a
information, see page . column.
put into For more The put into function places variable or equation results in a
information, see page . worksheet column.
subblock For more The subblock function returns a specified block of cells from
information, see page . within another block.

• block. The block function returns a specified block of cells from the worksheet.
• blockheight, blockwidth. The blockheight and blockwidth functions return a specified
block of cells or block dimension from the worksheet.
• cell. The cell function returns a specific cell from the worksheet.
• col. The col function returns a worksheet column or portion of a column.
• put into. The put into function places variable or equation results in a worksheet column.
• subblock. The subblock function returns a specified block of cells from within another
block.
Data Manipulation Functions. The data manipulation functions are used to generate
non-random data, and to sample, select, and sort data.

560
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

Function Description
data For The data function generates serial data.
more
information,
see page .
if For more The if function conditionally selects between two data sets.
information,
see page .
nth For The nth function returns an incremental sampling of data.
more
information,
see page .
sort For The sort function rearranges data in ascending order.
more
information,
see page .

• data. The data function generates serial data.

• if. The if function conditionally selects between two data sets.
• nth. The nth function returns an incremental sampling of data.
• sort. The sort function rearranges data in ascending order.
Trigonometric Functions. SigmaPlot and SigmaStat provide a complete set of trigonometric
functions.
Function Description
arccos This functions returns the arccosine, of the specified argument.
For more
information,
see page .
arcsin For more This functions returns the arcsine of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
arctan For more This functions returns the arctangent of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
cos For more This function returns the cosine of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
sin For more This function returns the sine of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
tan For more This function returns the tangent of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
cosh For more This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the specified argument.
information,
see page .

561
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

sinh For more This function returns the hyperbolic sine of the specified argument.
information,
see page .
tanh For more This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the specified argument.
information,
see page .

• arccos. This functions returns the arccosine, of the specified argument.

• arcsin. This functions returns the arcsine of the specified argument.
• arctan. This functions returns the arctangent of the specified argument.
• cos. This function returns the cosine of the specified argument.
• sin. This function returns the sine of the specified argument.
• tan. This function returns the tangent of the specified argument.
• cosh. This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the specified argument.
• sinh. This function returns the hyperbolic sine of the specified argument.
• tanh. This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the specified argument.
Numeric Functions. The numeric functions perform a specific type of calculation on a
number or range of numbers and returns the appropriate results.
Function Description
abs For more The abs function returns the absolute value.
information,
see page .
exp For more The exp function returns the values for e raised to the specified numbers.
information,
see page .
factorial The factorial function returns the factorial for each specified number.
For more
information,
see page .
mod For The mod function returns the modulus, or remainder of division, for
more specified numerators and divisors.
information,
see page .
ln For more The ln function returns the natural logarithm for the specified numbers.
information,
see page .
log For more The log function returns the base 10 logarithm for the specified numbers.
information,
see page .
sqrt For more The sqrt function returns the square root for the specified numbers.
information,
see page .

• abs. The abs function returns the absolute value.

• exp. The exp function returns the values for e raised to the specified numbers.

562
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

• factorial. The factorial function returns the factorial for each specified number.
• mod. The mod function returns the modulus, or remainder of division, for specified
numerators and divisors.
• ln. The ln function returns the natural logarithm for the specified numbers.
• log. The log function returns the base 10 logarithm for the specified numbers.
• sqrt. The sqrt function returns the square root for the specified numbers.
Range Functions. The following functions give information on ranges.
Function Description
count For more The count function returns the number of numeric values in a range.
information, see
page .
missing The missing function returns the number of missing values and text
For more strings in a range.
information, see
page .
size For more The size function returns the number of data points in a range, including
information, see all numbers, missing values, and text strings.
page .

• count. The count function returns the number of numeric values in a range.
• missing. The missing function returns the number of missing values and text strings in a
range.
• size. The size function returns the number of data points in a range, including all numbers,
missing values, and text strings.
Accumulation Functions. The accumulation functions return values equal to the accumulated
operation of the function.
Function Description
diff For The diff function returns the differences of the numbers in a range.
more
information,
see page .
sum For The sum function returns the cumulative sum of a range of numbers.
more
information,
see page .
total For The total function returns the value of the total sum of a range.
more
information,
see page .

• diff. The diff function returns the differences of the numbers in a range.
• sum. The sum function returns the cumulative sum of a range of numbers.
• total. The total function returns the value of the total sum of a range.
Random Generation Functions. The two “random” number generating functions can be used
to create a series of normally or uniformly distributed numbers.

563
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Function Description
gaussian The Gaussian function is used to generate a series of normally (Gaussian
For more or “bell” shaped) distributed numbers with a specified mean and standard
information, deviation.
see page .
random The random function is used to generate a series of uniformly distributed
For more numbers within a specified range.
information,
see page .

• gaussian. The Gaussian function is used to generate a series of normally (Gaussian or

“bell” shaped) distributed numbers with a specified mean and standard deviation.
• random. The random function is used to generate a series of uniformly distributed numbers
within a specified range.
Precision Functions. The precision functions are used to convert numbers to whole numbers
or to round off numbers.
Function Description
int For The int function converts numbers to integers.
more
information,
see page .
prec For The prec function rounds numbers off to a specified number of significant
more digits.
information,
see page .
round The round function rounds numbers off to a specified number of decimal
For more places.
information,
see page .

• int. The int function converts numbers to integers.

• prec. The prec function rounds numbers off to a specified number of significant digits.
• round. The round function rounds numbers off to a specified number of decimal places.
Statistical Functions. The statistical functions perform statistical calculations on a range or
ranges of numbers.
Function Description
avg For more The avg function calculates the averages of corresponding numbers across
information, ranges. It can be used to calculate the average across rows for worksheet
see page . columns.
max For more The max function returns the largest value in a range.
information,
see page .
min For more The min function returns the smallest value in a range.
information,
see page .

564
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

mean For more The meanFor more information, see page . function calculates the mean
information, of a range.
see page .
median The median function calculates the median of a range.
For more
information,
see page .
runavg The runavg function produces a range of running averages.
For more
information,
see page .
stddev The stddev function returns the standard deviation of a range. stderr The
For more stderr function calculates the standard error of a range.
information,
see page .

• avg. The avg function calculates the averages of corresponding numbers across ranges. It
can be used to calculate the average across rows for worksheet columns.
• max. The max function returns the largest value in a range.
• min. The min function returns the smallest value in a range.
• mean. The meanFor more information, see page . function calculates the mean of a range.
• runavg. The runavg function produces a range of running averages.
• stddev. The stddev function returns the standard deviation of a range. stderr The stderr
function calculates the standard error of a range.
Area and Distance Functions. These functions can be used to calculate the areas and
distances specified by X,Y coordinates. Units are based on the units used for X and Y.
Function Description
area For The area function finds the area of a polygon described in X,Y coordinates.
more
information,
see page .
dist For The distance function calculates the distance of a line whose segments are
more described in X,Y coordinates.
information,
see page .
partdist The partdist function calculates the distances from an initial X,Y coordinate
For more to successive X,Y coordinates in a cumulative fashion.
information,
see page .

• area. The area function finds the area of a polygon described in X,Y coordinates.
• distance. The distance function calculates the distance of a line whose segments are
described in X,Y coordinates.
• partdist. The partdist function calculates the distances from an initial X,Y coordinate to
successive X,Y coordinates in a cumulative fashion.
Curve Fitting Functions. These functions are designed to be used in conjunction with
SigmaPlot’s nonlinear curve fitter, to allow automatic determination of initial equation

565
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

parameter estimates from the source data. You can use these functions to develop your
own parameter determination function by using the functions provided with the Standard
Regression Equations library provided with SigmaP lot.
Function Description
ape For This function is used for the polynomials, rational polynomials and other
more functions which can be expressed as linear functions of the parameters. A
information, linear least squares estimation procedure is used to obtain the parameter
see page . estimates.
dsinp This function returns an estimate of the phase in radians of damped sine
For more functions.
information,
see page .
fwhm This function returns the x width of a peak at half the peak’s maximum value
For more for peak shaped functions.
information,
see page .
inv For The inv function generates the inverse matrix of an invertible square matrix
more provided as a block.
information,
see page .
lowess The lowess algorithm is used to smooth noisy data. “Lowess” means locally
For more weighted regression. Each point along the smooth curve is obtained from a
information, regression of data points close to the curve point with the closest points more
see page . heavily weighted.
lowpass The lowpass function returns smoothed y values from ranges of x and y
For more variables, using an optional user-defined smoothing factor that uses FFT and
information, IFFT.
see page .
sinp For This function returns an estimate of the phase in radians of sinusoidal
more functions.
information,
see page .
x25 For This function returns the x value for the y value 25% of the distance from the
more minimum to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
information,
see page .
x50 For This function returns the x value for the y value 50% of the distance from the
more minimum to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
information,
see page .
x75 For This function returns the x value for the y value 75% of the distance from the
more minimum to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
information,
see page .

566
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

xatymax This function returns the x value for the maximum y in the range of y
For more coordinates for peak shaped functions.
information,
see page .
xwtr For This function returns x75-x25 for sigmoidal shaped functions.
more
information,
see page .

• ape. This function is used for the polynomials, rational polynomials and other functions
which can be expressed as linear functions of the parameters. A linear least squares
estimation procedure is used to obtain the parameter estimates.
• dsinp. This function returns an estimate of the phase in radians of damped sine functions.
• fwhm. This function returns the x width of a peak at half the peak’s maximum value for
peak shaped functions.
• inv. The inv function generates the inverse matrix of an invertible square matrix provided
as a block.
• lowess. The lowess algorithm is used to smooth noisy data. “Lowess” means locally
weighted regression. Each point along the smooth curve is obtained from a regression of
data points close to the curve point with the closest points more heavily weighted.
• lowpass. The lowpass function returns smoothed y values from ranges of x and y variables,
using an optional user-defined smoothing factor that uses FFT and IFFT.
• sinp. This function returns an estimate of the phase in radians of sinusoidal functions.
• x25. This function returns the x value for the y value 25% of the distance from the minimum
to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
• x50. This function returns the x value for the y value 50% of the distance from the minimum
to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
• x75. This function returns the x value for the y value 75% of the distance from the minimum
to the maximum of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
• xatymax. This function returns the x value for the maximum y in the range of y coordinates
for peak shaped functions.
• xwtr. This function returns x75-x25 for sigmoidal shaped functions.
Miscellaneous Functions. These functions are specialized functions which perform a variety
of operations.
Function Description
choose The choose function is the mathematical “n choose r” function.
For more
information,
see page .
histogram The histogram function generates a histogram from a range or column of data.
For more
information,
see page .
interpolate The interpolate function performs linear interpolation between X,Y
For more coordinates.
information,
see page .

567
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

lookup The lookup function compares values with a specified table of boundaries
For more and returns either a corresponding index from a one-dimensional table, or a
information, corresponding value from a two-dimensional table.
see page .
polynomial The polynomial function returns results for specified independent variables
For more for a specified polynomial equation.
information,
see page .
rgbcolor The rgbcolor(r,g,b) color function takes arguments r,g, and b between 0 and
For more 255 and returns color to cells in the worksheet.
information,
see page .

• choose. The choose function is the mathematical “n choose r” function.

• histogram. The histogram function generates a histogram from a range or column of data.
• interpolate. The interpolate function performs linear interpolation between X,Y
coordinates.
• lookup. The lookup function compares values with a specified table of boundaries and
returns either a corresponding index from a one-dimensional table, or a corresponding
value from a two-dimensional table.
• polynomial. The polynomial function returns results for specified independent variables for
a specified polynomial equation.
• rgbcolor. The rgbcolor(r,g,b) color function takes arguments r,g, and b between 0 and 255
and returns color to cells in the worksheet.
Special Constructs. Transform constructs are special structures that allow more complex
procedures than functions.
Function Description
for For more The for statement is a looping construct used for iterative processing.
information,
see page .
if...then...else The if...then...else construct proceeds along one of two possible series of
For more procedures based on the results of a specified condition.
information,
see page .

• for. The for statement is a looping construct used for iterative processing.
• if...then...else. The if...then...else construct proceeds along one of two possible series of
procedures based on the results of a specified condition.
Fast Fourier Transform Functions. Use these functions to remove noise from and smooth
data using frequency-based filtering.
Function Description
fft For more The fft function finds the frequency domain representation of your
information, see data.
page .

568
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

invfft For more The invfft function takes the inverse fft of the data produced by the
information, see fft to restore the data to its new filtered form.
page .
real For more The real function strips the real numbers out of a range of complex
information, see numbers.
page .
img For more The img function strips the imaginary numbers out of a range of
information, see complex numbers.
page .
complex For more The complex function converts a block of real and/or imaginary
information, see numbers into a range of complex numbers.
page .
mulcpx For more The mulcpx function multiplies two ranges of complex numbers
information, see together.
page .
invcpx For more The invcpx takes the reciprocal of a range of complex numbers.
information, see
page .

• fft. The fft function finds the frequency domain representation of your data.
• invfft. The invfft function takes the inverse fft of the data produced by the fft to restore
the data to its new filtered form.
• real. The real function strips the real numbers out of a range of complex numbers.
• img. The img function strips the imaginary numbers out of a range of complex numbers.
• complex. The complex function converts a block of real and/or imaginary numbers into a
range of complex numbers.
• mulcpx. The mulcpx function multiplies two ranges of complex numbers together.
• invcpx. The invcpx takes the reciprocal of a range of complex numbers.
Probability Functions. Use these functions to compute and verify statistical measures such
as significant probabilities, critical values of statistics, confidence intervals and histogram
comparisons.
Function Description
normdist For more information, This function is the cumulative normal (or Gaussian)
see page . distribution function. It returns the probability that
a normal random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.
norminv For more information, This function is the inverse cumulative normal (or
see page . Gaussian) distribution function. The probability that a
normally distributed random variable is less than the return
value is equal to the argument you specify.
normden For more information, This function is the normal (or Gaussian) probability
see page . density function. The graph of this function is the familiar
“bell curve”. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.

569
SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

chisquaredist For more This function is the cumulative chi-square distribution

information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a chi-square
distributed random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.
chisquareinv For more This function is the inverse cumulative chi-square
information, see page . distribution function. The probability that a chi-square
distributed random variable is less than the return value is
equal to the argument you specify.
chisquareden For more This function is the chi-square probability density
information, see page . function. It returns the value of the slope of the cumulative
distribution function at the specified argument value.
tdist For more information, see This function is Student’s T-distribution function. It
page . returns the probability that a T-distributed random variable
is less than a specified independent variable value.
tinv For more information, see This function is the inverse of Student’s T-distribution
page . function. The probability that a T-distributed random
variable is less than the return value is equal to the
argument you specify.
tden For more information, see This function is the T-distribution’s probability density
page . function. It returns the value of the slope of the cumulative
distribution function at the specified argument value.
fdist For more information, see This function is the F-distribution function. It returns the
page . probability that an F distributed random variable is less
than a specified independent variable value.
finv For more information, see This function is the inverse F-distribution function. The
page . probability that an F-distributed random variable is less
than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
fden For more information, see This function is the F-distribution’s probability density
page . function. It returns the value of the slope of the cumulative
distribution function at the specified argument value.
gammadist For more This function is the cumulative gamma distribution
information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a gamma
distributed random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.
gammainv For more This function is the inverse cumulative gamma distribution
information, see page . function. The probability that a gamma distributed random
variable is less than the return value is equal to the
argument you specify.
gammaden For more This function is the gamma distribution’s probability
information, see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
weibulldist For more This function is the cumulative Weibull distribution
information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a Weibull
distributed random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.

570
 14.1.3 Transform Function Descriptions

weibullinv For more This function is the inverse cumulative Weibull distribution
information, see page . function. The probability that a Weibull distributed
random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.
weibullden For more This function is the Weibull distribution’s probability
information, see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
cauchydist For more This function is the cumulative Cauchy distribution
information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a Cauchy
distributed random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.
cauchyinv For more This function is the inverse cumulative Cauchy distribution
information, see page . function. The probability that a Cauchy distributed
random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.
cauchyden For more This function is the Cauchy distribution’s probability
information, see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
erf For more information, see This function is the error function. It is related to the
page . cumulative normal distribution function by scaling and
translation.
erfc For more information, see This function is the complementary error function. It
page . returns one minus the return value of the error function.
lognormdist For more This function is the cumulative log-normal distribution
information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a log-normal
random variable is less than a specified independent
variable value.
lognorminv For more This function is the inverse cumulative log-normal
information, see page . distribution function. The probability that a log-normal
random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.
lognormden For more This function is the log-normal distribution’s probability
information, see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
expdist For more information, This function is the cumulative exponential distribution
see page . function. It returns the probability that an exponential
random variable is less than a specified independent
variable value.
expinv For more information, This function is the inverse cumulative exponential
see page . distribution function. The probability that an exponential
random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.

571
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

expden For more information, This function is the exponential distribution’s probability
see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
logisdist For more information, This function is the cumulative logistic distribution
see page . function. It returns the probability that a logistic random
variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
logisinv For more information, This function is the inverse cumulative logistic distribution
see page . function. The probability that a logistic random variable
is less than the return value is equal to the argument you
specify.
logisden For more information, This function is the logistic distribution’s probability
see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.
loglogisdist For more This function is the cumulative log-logistic distribution
information, see page . function. It returns the probability that a log-logistic
random variable is less than a specified independent
variable value.
loglogisinv For more This function is the inverse cumulative log-logistic
information, see page . distribution function. The probability that a log-logistic
random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.
loglogisden For more This function is the log-logistic distribution’s probability
information, see page . density function. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument
value.

• normdist. This function is the cumulative normal (or Gaussian) distribution function. It
returns the probability that a normal random variable is less than a specified independent
variable value.
• norminv. This function is the inverse cumulative normal (or Gaussian) distribution
function. The probability that a normally distributed random variable is less than the return
value is equal to the argument you specify.
• normden. This function is the normal (or Gaussian) probability density function. The
graph of this function is the familiar “bell curve”. It returns the value of the slope of the
cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
• chisquaredist. This function is the cumulative chi-square distribution function. It returns
the probability that a chi-square distributed random variable is less than a specified
independent variable value.
• chisquareinv. This function is the inverse cumulative chi-square distribution function. The
probability that a chi-square distributed random variable is less than the return value is
equal to the argument you specify.
• chisquareden. This function is the chi-square probability density function. It returns the
value of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
• tdist. This function is Student’s T-distribution function. It returns the probability that a
T-distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.

572
 [Link] abs

• tinv. This function is the inverse of Student’s T-distribution function. The probability
that a T-distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
• tden. This function is the T-distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value
of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
• fdist. This function is the F-distribution function. It returns the probability that an F
distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
• finv. This function is the inverse F-distribution function. The probability that an
F-distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you
specify.
• fden. This function is the F-distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value
of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.

[Link] abs

The abs function returns the absolute value for each number in the specified range.
Syntax
abs(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
The operation col(2) = abs(col(1)) places the absolute values of the data in column 1 in
column 2.

[Link] ape

The ape function is used for the polynomials, rational polynomials and other functions which
can be expressed as linear functions of the parameters. A linear least squares estimation
procedure is used to obtain the parameter estimates. The ape function is used to automatically
generate the initial parameter estimates for SigmaPlot’s nonlinear curve fitter from the
equation provided.
Syntax
ape(x range,y range,n,m,s,f)
The x range and y range arguments specify the independent and dependent variables, or
functions of them (e.g., ln(x)). Any missing value or text string contained within one of
the ranges is ignored and will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must be
the same size.
The n argument specifies the order of the numerator of the equation. The m argument specifies
the order of the denominator of the equation. n and m must be greater than or equal to 0 (n, m,
≥ 0). If m is greater than 0 then n must be less than or equal to m (if m > 0, n ≤ m).
The s argument specifies whether or not a constant is used. s=0 specifies no constant term y0
in the numerator, s=1 specifies a constant term y0 in the numerator. s must be either 0 or 1. If n
= 0, s cannot be 0 (there must be a constant).
The number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to n = m = s.

573
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. 0 ≤ f ≤ 1. If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation col(1)=ape(x,y,1,1,1,0.5] ) places the 3 parameter
estimates for the equation
a + bx
f(x) =
1 + cx

as the values {5.32907052e-15, 0.66666667, -0.33333333} in column 1.

[Link] arccos
This function returns the inverse of the corresponding trigonometric function.
Syntax
arccos(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range. You can also use the abbreviated function
name acos.
The values for the numbers argument must be within -1 and 1, inclusive. Results are
returned in degrees, radians, or grads, depending on the Trigonometric Units selected in the
User-Defined Transform dialog box. Any missing value or text string contained within a range
is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
The function range (in radians) is
arccose 0 to Π
Example
The operation col(2) = acos(col(1)) places the arccosine of all column 1 data points in column
2.

[Link] arcsin
This function returns the inverse of the corresponding trigonometric function.
Syntax
arcsin(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range. You can also use the abbreviated function
name asin.
The values for the numbers argument must be within -1 and 1, inclusive. Results are
returned in degrees, radians, or grads, depending on the Trigonometric Units selected in the
User-Defined Transform dialog box. Any missing value or text string contained within a range
is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
The function range (in radians) is:

arcsin - to
2 2

Example

574
 [Link] arctan

The operation col(2) = asin(col(1)) places the arcsine of all column 1 data points in column 2.

[Link] arctan
This function returns the inverse of the corresponding trigonometric function.
Syntax
arctan(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range. You can also use the abbreviated function
name atan.
The numbers argument can be any value. Results are returned in degrees, radians, or grads,
depending on the Trigonometric Units selected in the User-Defined Transform dialog box.
The function range (in radians) is:

arctan - to
2 2

Example
The operation col(2) = atan(col(1)) places the arctangent of all column 1 data points in
column 2.
Note: A convenient way of obtaining the value of Π is Π = 4 + atan(1).

[Link] area
The area function returns the area of a simple polygon. The outline of the polygon is formed
by the xy pairs specified in an x range and a y range. The list of points does not need to be
closed. If the last xy pair does not equal the first xy pair, the polygon is closed from the last
xy pair to the first. The area function only works with simple non-overlapping polygons. If
line segments in the polygon cross, the overlapping portion is considered a negative area, and
results are unpredictable.
Syntax
area(x range,y range)
The x range argument contains the x coordinates, and the y range argument contains the y
coordinates. Corresponding values in these ranges form xy pairs.
If the ranges are uneven in size, excess x or y points are ignored.
Example
For the ranges x = {0,1,1,0} and y = {0,0,1,1}, the operation area (x,y) returns a value of 1.
The x and y coordinates provided describe a square of 1 unit.

[Link] avg
The avg function averages the numbers across corresponding ranges, instead of within ranges.
The resulting range is the row-wise average of the range arguments. Unlike the mean function,
avg returns a range, not a scalar.
The avg function calculates the arithmetic mean, defined as:
1 n
x= xi
n i=1

575
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The avg function can be used to calculate averages of worksheet data across rows rather
than within columns.
Syntax
avg({x1,x2...},{y1,y2...},{z1,z2...})
The x1, y1, and z1 are corresponding numbers within ranges. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range returns the string or missing value as the result.
Example
The operation avg({1,2,3},{3,4,5}) returns {2,3,4}. 1 from the first range is averaged with 3
from the second range, 2 is averaged with 4, and 3 is averaged with 5. The result is returned
as a range.

[Link] block
The block function returns a block of cells from the worksheet, using a range specified by the
upper left and lower right cell row and column coordinates.
Syntax
block(column 1,row 1,column 2,row 2)
The column 1 and row 1 arguments are the coordinates for the upper left cell of the block; the
column 2 and row 2 arguments are the coordinates for the lower right cell of the block. All
values within this range are returned. Operations performed on a block always return a block.
If column 2 and row 2 are omitted, then the last row and/or column is assumed to be the last
row and column of the data in the worksheet. If you are equating a block to another block,
then the last row and/or column is assumed to be the last row and column of the equated
block (see the following example).
All column and row arguments must be scalar (not ranges). To use a column title for the
column argument, enclose the column title in quotes; block uses the column in the worksheet
whose title matches the string.
Example
The command block(5,1) = -block(1,1,3,24) reverses the sign for the values in the range from
cell (1,1) to cell (3,24) and places them in a block beginning in cell (5,1).

[Link] blockheight, blockwidth

The blockheight and blockwidth functions return the number of rows or columns, respectively,
of a defined block of cells from the worksheet.
Syntax
blockheight(block) blockwidth(block)
The block argument can be a variable defined as a block, or a block function statement.
Example
For the statement x = block(2,1,12,10)
The operation cell(1,1) = blockheight(x) places the number 10 in column 1, row 1 of the
worksheet.
The operation cell(1,2) = blockwidth(x) places the number 11 in column 1, row 2 of the
worksheet.

576
 [Link] cauchyden

[Link] cauchyden
This function is the Cauchy distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of
the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
cauchyden(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter, equal to the location of the density function’s peak. The b argument is
any positive number and is the scale parameter, equal to the half-width at half-maximum of
the density function’s peak.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a Cauchy
distributed random variable C lie in a small interval. If C has a peak location equal to 3 and a
half-width at half-maximum equal to 2, then to estimate the probability that the values of C lie
between 2 and 2.1, multiply the density of C at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
cauchyden(2,3,2) * .1 = .012732

[Link] cauchydist
This function is the cumulative Cauchy distribution function. It returns the probability that a
Cauchy distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
A Cauchy distributed random variable is the distribution of the ratio of a two normal random
variables. It is also the distribution of the random variable Y = tan(X), where X is uniformly
distributed.
This distribution is used to describe forced resonance behavior and the shape of spectral lines
subject to homogenous broadening.
Syntax
cauchydist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the shape parameter.
Example
Suppose a Cauchy distributed random variable C has a location parameter equal to 3 and a
shape parameter equal to 3. To compute the probability that the values of C exceed 2, we
calculate:
P( C > 2 ) = 1 – P( C < 2 ) = 1 – cauchydist(2,3,2) = .64758

[Link] cauchyinv
This function is the inverse cumulative Cauchy distribution function. The probability that a
Cauchy distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
Syntax

577
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

cauchyinv(x,a,b)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value
for x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any real
number and is the location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the
shape parameter.
Example
Suppose a Cauchy distributed random variable C has a location parameter equal to 3 and a
shape parameter equal to 2. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05,
we need to find a number c such that P( C > c ) = .05. This is the same as finding c such
that P( C < c) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
cauchyinv(.95, 3, 2) = 15.62750

[Link] cell
The cell function returns the contents of a cell in the worksheet, and can specify a cell
destination for transform results.
Syntax
cell (column,row)
Both column and row arguments must be scalar (not ranges). To use a column title for the
column argument, enclose the column title in quotes; cell uses the column in the worksheet
whose title matches the string.
Data placed in a cell inserts or overwrites according to the current insert mode.
Example
This example shows how you can use the cell function to label column and row titles with
the results of a transform.
For example, take cell (2,3)= dog. In this case, the function places the text string "dog"
(without quotes) into the second column, third row of the worksheet.
But if you were to replace the 2 with a 0, as in cell (0,3)= cat, this changes the title of the
third row of the worksheet to "cat".
Likewise, if you were to change the 3 to 0, as in cell (2,0)= parrot, this changes the title
of the second column to "parrot."

[Link] chisquareden
This function is the chi-square probability density function. It returns the value of the slope of
the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
chisquareden(x,n)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be non-negative. The n argument can be any positive
integer and equals the degrees of freedom.
Example

578
 [Link] chisquaredist

The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a chi-square
distributed random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has 8 degrees of freedom, then to
estimate the probability that the values of X lie between 5 and 5.1, multiply the density of X at
5 by the length of the interval .1:
chisquareden(5,8) * .1 = .10688

[Link] chisquaredist
This function is the cumulative chi-square distribution function. It returns the probability that
a chi-square distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
A chi-square random variable is defined as a sum of squares of independent standard normal
distribution variables. The number of normal variables in the sum is called the degrees of
freedom.
This distribution is used in goodness-of-fit measures. It describes the distribution of sample
variance for a set of normally distributed observations and describes the distribution of the
residual sum of squares in regression.
Syntax
chisquaredist(x,n)
Example
Suppose a random variable X is chi-square distributed with 11 degrees of freedom. To
compute the probability that the values of this variable are less than 5, we calculate:
chisquaredist(5,11) = .06883

[Link] chisquareinv
This function is the inverse cumulative chi-square distribution function. The probability that a
chi-square distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
Syntax
chisquareinv(x,n)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for x
represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The n argument can be any positive
integer and equals the degrees of freedom.
Example
Suppose a chi-square distributed random variable X has 19 degrees of freedom. To compute
the median of X, we calculate:
chisquareinv(.5,19) = 18.33765

[Link] choose
The choose function determines the number of ways of choosing r objects from n distinct
objects without regard to order.
Syntax
choose(n,r)

579
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

For the arguments n and r, r < n and “n choose r” is defined as:

( nr )= r!(nn-!r)!
Example
To create a function for the binomial distribution, enter the equation:
binomial(p,n,r) = choose(n,r) * (p^r) * (1-p) ^ (n-r)

[Link] col
The col function returns all or a portion of a worksheet column, and can specify a column
destination for transform results.
Syntax
col (column,top,bottom)
The column argument is the column number or title. To use a column title for the column
argument, enclose the title in quotation marks. The top and bottom arguments specify the first
and last row numbers, and can be omitted. The default row numbers are 1 and the end of the
column, respectively; if both are omitted, the entire column is used. All parameters must be
scalar. Data placed in a column inserts or overwrites according to the current insert mode.
Example 1
For the worksheet below, the operation col(3) returns the entire range of five values, the
operation col(3,4) returns {8.9, 9.1}, and the operation col("data2",2,3) returns {7.9,8.4}.
Example 2
For the worksheet shown below, the operation col(4) = col(3)*2 multiples all the values in
column 3 and places the results in column 4.

[Link] complex
Converts a block of real and imaginary numbers into a range of complex numbers.

580
 [Link] cos

Syntax
complex (range,range)
The first range contains the real values, the second range contains the imaginary values and
is optional. If you do not specify the second range, the complex transform returns zeros
for the imaginary numbers. If you do specify an imaginary range, it must contain the same
number of values as the real value range.
Example
If x = {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}, the operation complex(x) returns {{1,2,3,4,....,9,10},
{0,0,0,0,....,0,0}}.
If x = {1.0,-0.75,3.1} and y = {1.2,2.1,-1.1}, the operation complex(x,y) returns
{{1.0,-0.75,3.1}, {1.2,2.1,-1.1}}.

[Link] cos
This function returns ranges consisting of the cosine of each value in the argument given.
This and other trigonometric functions can take values in radians, degrees, or grads. This is
determined by the Trigonometric Units selected in the User-Defined Transform dialog box.
Syntax
cos(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
If you regularly use values outside of the usual -2p to 2p (or equivalent) range, use the mod
function to prevent loss of precision. Any missing value or text string contained within a range
is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
If you choose Degrees as your Trigonometric Units in the User-Defined Transform dialog box,
the operation cos({0,60,90,120,180}) returns values of {1,0.5,0,-0.5,-1}.

[Link] cosh
This function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the specified argument.
Syntax
cosh(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored and returned as the
string or missing value.
Example
The operation x = cosh(col(2)) sets the variable x to be the hyperbolic cosine of all data in
column 2.

[Link] count
The count function returns the value or range of values equal to the number of non-missing
numeric values in a range. Missing values and text strings are not counted.
Syntax

581
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

count(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column.
Example
For the worksheet below:
the operation count(col(1)) returns a value of 5,
the operation count(col(2)) returns a value of 6, and
the operation count(col(3)) returns a value of 0.

[Link] data

The data function generates a range of numbers from a starting number to an end number, in
specified increments.
Syntax
data(start,stop,step)
All arguments must be scalar. The start argument specifies the beginning number and the end
argument sets the last number. If the step parameter is omitted, it defaults to 1. The start
parameter can be more than or less than the stop parameter. In either case, data steps in the
correct direction. Remainders are ignored.
Example
The operation data(1,5) returns the range of values {1,2,3,4,5}.
The operation data(10,1,2) returns the values {10,8,6,4,2}.
Note: If start and stop are equal, this function produces a number of copies of start equal to
step. For example, the operation data(1,1,4) returns {1,1,1,1}.

582
 [Link] diff

[Link] diff
The diff function returns a range or ranges of numbers which are the differences between a
given number in a range and the preceding number. The value of the preceding number is
subtracted from the value of the following number.
Because there is no preceding number for the first number in a range, the value of the first
number in the result is always the same as the first number in the argument range.
Syntax
diff(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within the range is returned as the string or
missing value.
Example
For x = {9,16,7}, the operation diff(x) returns a value of {9,7,-9}.
For y = {4,-6,12}, the operation diff(y) returns a value of {4,-10,18}.

[Link] dist
The dist function returns a scalar representing the distance along a line. The line is described
in segments defined by the X,Y pairs specified in an x range and a y range.
Syntax
dist(x range,y range)
The x range argument contains the X coordinates, and the y range argument contains the Y
coordinates. Corresponding values in these ranges form X,Y pairs. If the ranges are uneven
in size, excess X or Y points are ignored.
Example
For the ranges x ={0,1,1,0,0} and y = {0,0,1,1,0}, the operation dist(x,y) returns 4.0. The X
and Y coordinates provided describe a square of 1 unit x by 1 unit y.

[Link] dsinp
The dsinp function automatically generates the initial parameter estimates for a damped
sinusoidal functions using the FFT method. The four parameter estimates are returned as
a vector.
Syntax
dsinp(x range, y range)
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must be the same size, and the number
of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
Note: dsinp is especially used to estimate parameters on waveform functions. This is only
useful when this function is used in conjunction with nonlinear regression.

[Link] erf
This function is the Gauss error function, defined as:

583
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

x
2 2
erf(x)= e t dt.

Syntax
erf(x)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real.
Example
If a series of measurements is described by a normal distribution with standard deviation and
expected value 0, then the probability that the error of a single measurement is between -.2
and +.2 is given by:
erf(.2/(2*sqrt(2)) = .079656

[Link] erfc
This function is the complementary error function, equal to 1 minus the Gauss error function:
erf(x)= 1 erf(x)
2 2
= e t dt.
x

Syntax
erfc(x)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real.
Example
If a series of measurements is described by a normal distribution with standard deviation and
expected value 0, then the probability that the error of a single measurement is less than
-.2 or greater than +.2 is given by:
erfc(.2/(2*sqrt(2)) = .920344

[Link] exp
The exp function returns a range of values consisting of the number e raised to each number in
the specified range. This is numerically identical to the expression e^(numbers).
Syntax
exp(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
The operation exp(1) returns a value of 2.718281828459045.

584
 [Link] expden

[Link] expden
This function is the exponential distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value
of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
expden(x,a)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number
and is the scale parameter.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of an exponentially
distributed random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has scale parameter equal to 3, then
to estimate the probability that the values of X lie between 1 and 1.1, multiply the density of X
at 1 by the length of the interval .1:
expden(1,3) * .1 = .014936

[Link] expdist
This function is the cumulative exponential distribution function. It returns the probability that
an exponential random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
An exponential distribution is the distribution of time until the first occurrence in a Poisson
process, in which events occur continuously and independently at a constant average rate. It is
a special case of the Gamma distribution.
Syntax
expdist(x,a)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number
and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose an exponential random variable X has scale parameter equal to 3. To compute the
probability that the values of X exceed 1, we calculate:
P( X > 1 ) = 1 – P( X < 1 ) = 1 – expdist(1,3) = .049787

[Link] expinv
This function is the inverse cumulative exponential distribution function. The probability
that an exponential random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
Syntax
expinv(x,a)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for
x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any positive
number and is the scale parameter.

585
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Example
Suppose an exponential random variable X has scale parameter equal to 2. To calculate the tail
of this distribution whose probability is .05, we need to find a number x such that P( X > x ) =
.05. This is the same as finding x such that P( X < x) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
expinv(.95, 2) = 1.49787

[Link] factorial
The factorial function returns the factorial of a specified range.
Syntax
factorial({range})
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored and returned
as the string or missing value. Non-integers are rounded down to the nearest integer or 1,
whichever is larger.
For factorial(x):
x < 0 returns a missing value,
0 ≤ x < 180 returns x!, and
x ≥170 returns +∞
Example 1
The operation factorial({1,2,3,4,5}) returns {1,2,6,24,120}.
Example 2
To create a transform equation function for the Poisson distribution, you can type:
Poisson(m,x)=(m^x)*exp(-m)/factorial(x)

[Link] fden
This function is the F-distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of the
slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
fden(x,m,n)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be non-negative. The m argument is any positive
integer and equals the numerator degrees of freedom. The n argument is any positive integer
and equals the denominator degrees of freedom.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of an F-distributed
random variable F lie in a small interval. If F has a numerator degrees of freedom equal to 3
and a denominator degrees of freedom equal to 14, then to estimate the probability that the
values of F lie between 2 and 2.1, multiply the density of F at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
fden(2,3,14) * .1 = .014882

586
 [Link] fdist

[Link] fdist
This function is the F-distribution function. It returns the probability that an F distributed
random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
An F-distributed random variable is defined as a scaled ratio of a two chi-square variables.
The numerator and denominator degrees of freedom of an F-distributed variable equal the
degrees of freedom of the corresponding chi-square variables.
This distribution is used to test goodness-of-fit in regression problems and for testing the
homogeneity of populations for many groups of normally distributed observations.
Syntax
fdist(x,m,n)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be non-negative. The m argument is any positive
integer and equals the numerator degrees of freedom. The n argument is any positive integer
and equals the denominator degrees of freedom.
Example
Suppose an F-distributed random variable F has a numerator degrees of freedom equal to 3
and a denominator degrees of freedom equal to 14. To compute the probability that the values
of F exceed 2, we calculate:
P( F > 2 ) = 1 – P( F < 2 ) = 1 – fdist(2,3,14) = .16035

[Link] fft
The fft function finds the frequency domain representation of your data using the Fast Fourier
Transform.
Syntax
fft(range)
The parameter can be a range of real values or a block of complex values. For complex
values there are two columns of data. The first column contains the real values and the second
column represents the imaginary values. This function works on data sizes of size 2n numbers.
If your data set is not 2n in length, the fft function pads 0 at the beginning and end of the
data range to make the length 2n.
The fft function returns a range of complex numbers.
Example
For x = {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}, the operation fft(x) takes the Fourier transform of the ramp
function with real data from 1 to 10 with 3 zeros padded on the front and back and returns a 2
by 16 block of complex numbers.

[Link] finv
This function is the inverse F-distribution function. The probability that an F-distributed
random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
Syntax
finv(x,m,n)

587
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for
x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The m argument is any positive
integer and equals the numerator degrees of freedom. The n argument is any positive integer
and equals the denominator degrees of freedom.
Example
Suppose an F-distributed random variable F has a numerator degrees of freedom equal to 3
and a denominator degrees of freedom equal to 14. To calculate the tail of this distribution
whose probability is .05, we need to find a number f such that P( F > f ) = .05. This is the same
as finding f such that P( F < f) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
finv(.95, 3, 14) = 3.34389

[Link] for
The for statement is a looping construct used for iterative processing.
Syntax
for loop variable = initial value to end value step increment do
equation
equation
.
.
.
end for
Transform equation statements are evaluated iteratively within the for loop. When a for
statement is encountered, all functions within the loop are evaluated separately from the
rest of the transform.
The loop variable can be any previously undeclared variable name. The initial value for the
loop is the beginning value to be used in the loop statements. The end value for the loop
variable specifies the last value to be processed by the for statement. After the end value is
processed, the loop is terminated. In addition, you can specify a loop variable step increment,
which is used to “skip” values when proceeding from the initial value to end value. If no
increment is specified, an increment of 1 is assumed.
Note: You must separate for, to, step, do, end for, and all condition statement operators,
variables and values with spaces. The for loop statement is followed by a series of one or more
transform equations which process the loop variable values.
Inside for loops, you can:
• Indent equations.
• Nest for loops.
Note that these conditions are allowed only within for loops. You cannot redefine variable
names within for loops.
Example 1
The operation:
for i = 1 to size(col(1)) do
cell(2,i) = cell(1,i)*i
end for
multiplies all the values in column 1 by their row number and places them in column 2.

588
 [Link] fwhm

Example 2
The operation:
for j = cell(1,1) to
cell (1,64) step 2 do col(10) = col(9)^j
end for
takes the value from cell (1,1) and increments by 2 until the value in cell (1,64) is reached,
raises the data in column 9 to that power, and places the results in column 10.

[Link] fwhm
The fwhm function returns value of the x width at half-maxima in the ranges of coordinates
provided, with optional Lowess smoothing.
Syntax
fwhm(x range, y range,f)
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. 0 ≤ f ≤ 1. If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=fwhm(x,y)
places the x width at half-maxima 1.00 into column 1.

[Link] gammaden
This function is the gamma distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of
the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
The Gamma and Beta functions occur frequently in many applications. You can compute their
values by writing simple transforms expressed in terms of the gamma density function.
The Gamma function can be defined by:
Gamma(x) = 1/(exp(1.0)*gammaden(1,x,1))
and then the Beta can be defined by:
Beta(x,y) = Gamma(x)*Gamma(y)/Gamma(x+y)
Syntax
gammaden(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number and
is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example

589
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a gamma
distributed random variable G lie in a small interval. If G has shape parameter equal to 3 and
scale parameter equal to 1, then to estimate the probability that the values of G lie between 2
and 2.1, multiply the density of G at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
gammaden(2,3,1) * .1 = .027067

[Link] gammadist
This function is the cumulative gamma distribution function. It returns the probability that a
gamma distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
A gamma distribution is the distribution of time until the nth occurrence in a Poisson process,
in which events occur continuously and independently at a constant average rate.
Syntax
gammadist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number and
is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a gamma distributed random variable G has shape parameter equal to 3 and scale
parameter equal to 1. To compute the probability that the values of G exceed 2, we calculate:
P( G > 2 ) = 1 – P( G < 2 ) = 1 – gammadist(2,3,1) = .67668

[Link] gammainv
This function is the inverse cumulative gamma distribution function. The probability that a
gamma distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
Syntax
gammainv(x,a,b)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for
x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any positive
number and is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale
parameter.
Example
Suppose a gamma distributed random variable G has shape parameter equal to 3 and scale
parameter equal to 1. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05, we
need to find a number g such that P( G > g ) = .05. This is the same as finding g such that
P( G < g) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
gammainv(.95, 3, 1) = 6.29579

[Link] gaussian
This function generates a specified number of normally (Gaussian or “bell” shaped) distributed
numbers from a seed number, using a supplied mean and standard deviation.

590
 [Link] histogram

Syntax
gaussian(number,seed,mean,stddev)
The number argument specifies how many random numbers to generate.
The seed argument is the random number generation seed to be used by the function. If you
want to generate a different random number sequence each time the function is used, enter 0/0
for the seed. Enter the same number to generate an identical random number sequence. If the
seed argument is omitted, a randomly selected seed is used.
The mean and stddev arguments are the mean and standard deviation of the normal distribution
curve, respectively. If mean and stddev are omitted, they default to 0 and 1.
Note that function arguments are omitted from right to left. If you want to specify a stddev,
you must either specify the mean argument or omit it by using 0/0.
Example
The operation gaussian(100) uses a seed of 0 to produce 100 normally distributed random
numbers, with a mean of 0.0 and a standard deviation of 1.0.

[Link] histogram
The histogram function produces a histogram of the values range in a specified range, using a
defined interval set.
Syntax
histogram(range,buckets)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
The buckets argument is used to specify either the number of evenly incremented histogram
intervals, or both the number and ranges of the intervals. This value can be scalar or a range.
In both versions, missing values and strings are ignored.
If the buckets parameter is a scalar, it must be a positive integer. A scalar buckets argument
generates a number of intervals equal to the buckets value. The histogram intervals are evenly
sized; the range is the minimum value to the maximum value of the specified range.
If the buckets argument is specified as a range, each number in the range becomes the upper
bound (inclusive) of an interval. Values from -∞ to ≤ the first bucket fall in the first histogram
interval, values from > first bucket to ≤ second bucket fall in the second interval, etc. The
buckets range must be strictly increasing in value. An additional interval is defined to catch
any value which does not fall into the defined ranges. The number of values occurring in this
extra interval (including 0, or no values outside the range) becomes the last entry of the range
produced by histogram function.
Example 1
For col(1) = {1,20,30,35,40,50,60}, the operation col(2) = histogram(col(1),3) places the range
{2,3,2} in column 2. The bucket intervals are automatically set to 20, 40, and 60, so that two
of the values in column 1 fall under 20, three fall under 40, and two fall under 60.
Example 2
For buckets = {25,50,75}, the operation col(3) = histogram(col(1),buckets)places {2,4,1,0}
in col(3). Two of the values in column 1 fall under 25, four fall under 50, one under 75, and
no values fall outside the range.

591
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] if
The if function either selects one of two values based on a specified condition, or proceeds
along a series of calculations bases on a specified condition.
Syntax
if(condition,true value,false value)
The true value and false value arguments can be any scalar or range. For a true condition, the
true value is returned; for a false condition, the false value is returned.
If the false value argument is omitted, a false condition returns a missing value. If the
condition argument is scalar, then the entire true value or false value argument is returned.
If the condition argument contains a range, the result is a new range. For each true entry in the
condition range, the corresponding entry in the true value argument is returned. For a false
entry in the condition range, the corresponding entry in false value is returned.
If the false value is omitted and the condition entry is false, the corresponding entry in the true
value range is omitted. This can be used to conditionally extract data from a range.
Example 1
The operation col(2) = if(col(1)< 75,”FAIL","PASS") reads in the values from column 1, and
places the word “FAIL” in column 2 if the column 1 value is less than 75, and the word
“PASS” if the value is 75 or greater.
Example 2
For the operation y = if(x < 2 or x > 4,99,x), an x value less than 2 or greater than 4 returns a y
value of 99, and all other x values return a y value equal to the corresponding x value.
If you set x = {1,2,3,4,5}, then y is returned as {99,2,3,4,99}. The condition was true for the
first and last x range entries, so 99 was returned. The condition was false for x = 2, 3, and 4, so
the x value was returned for the second, third, and fourth x values.

[Link] if...then...else
The if...then...else function proceeds along one of two possible series of calculations based
on a specified condition.
Syntax
if condition then
statement
statement...
else
statement
statement...
end if
To use the if...then...else construct, follow the if condition then statement by one or more
transform equation statements, then specify the else statement(s). When an if...then...else
statement is encountered, all functions within the statement are evaluated separately from
the rest of the transform.
Note: You must separate if, then, and all condition statement operators, variables, and values
with spaces.
Inside if...then...else constructs, you can:

592
 [Link] imaginary (img)

• Type more than one equation on a line

• Indent equations.
• Nest additional if constructs.
Note that these conditions are allowed only within if...else statements. You cannot redefine
variable names within an if...then...else construct.
Example
The operations:
i = cell(1,1)
j = cell(1,2
If i < 1 and j > 1 then x = col(3)
else x = col(4)
end if
sets x equal to column 3 if i is less than 1 and j is greater than 1; otherwise, x is equal to
column 4.

[Link] imaginary (img)

The imaginary function strips the imaginary values out of a range of complex numbers.
Syntax
img(block)
The range is made up of complex numbers.
Example
If x = {{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}, {0,0,0,....0,0}}, the operation img(x) returns
{0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0}.
If x = {{1.0,-0.75, 3.1}, {1.2,2.1,-1.1}}, the operation img(x) returns {1.2,2.1,-1.1}.

[Link] implicit
In applications, a function is often defined implicitly by an equation involving a dependent
variable and one or more independent variables. Use the implicit function to solve the equation
for the dependent variable when a value for each independent variable has been specified.
Syntax
rv = implicit(expr, a, b, indvar, maxroots)
The expression expr contains the dependent variable and the independent variables. The
equation is defined by setting this expression equal to zero. The expression must be a
user-defined function. For example, the user-defined function might be:
k(u,v) = u^2 – 3*u*v + v^2
and the equation being solved becomes k(u,v) = 0. In this case, you would set the first
argument in the implicit function to k(u,v).
It is assumed that the dependent variable (the solution variable) is always the first variable in
the argument list of the user-defined function. In the above example, this variable is u.
The argument list can have any number of independent variables, such as:
r(u,v,w) = (u+v*w)*exp(u*w)

593
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

In this case, u is the dependent variable with v and w as the independent variables.
The user-defined function may contain other variables than those in its argument list. These
parameters are assumed to have assigned values when the function is defined. It is important
that each parameter be a scalar quantity defined by a single numeric value. If any parameter is
a range, then only the first value in that range is used.
a and b are the left and right endpoints, respectively, of the interval over which the solution
search for the dependent variable takes place.
indvar is an expression or symbol that defines the values of the independent variables that
are used to solve the equation. It is usually defined by some range. For example, suppose
we have transform:
x=col(1)
f=implicit(k(u,v),-10,10,x)

Then this transform takes a value from column 1, assigns it to the variable v, and solves the
equation k(u,v)=0 for the variable u. This is then repeated until all values in column 1 have
been used. The results are then assigned to the variable f.
If more than one independent variable is listed in the user-defined function, then the values of
the independent variables are concatenated in the order they appear in the function and the
result is assigned to indvar. For example, in the transform below we have the implicit function
used with two independent variables:
x=col(1)
y=col(2)
k(u,v,w)=u^2+v^2+w
col(4)=implicit(k(u,v,w),-10,10,{x,y})

In this example, a value from column 1 is assigned to the variable v and a value for column 2,
in the same row, is assigned to variable w. The equation k(u,v,w) is then solved for the variable
u. This process is repeated until there are no more entries in columns 1 and 2.
It is important to note that when a range of data is provided to the argument indvar, then that
data is divided equally among the independent variables in the equation. The data will be
partitioned this way, beginning with the first independent variable, and the implicit function
will ignore the remainder. For example, if indvar is provided a range of 14 values and there
are 3 independent variables in the problem, then the values 1-4 will be assigned to the first
variable, values 5-8 will be assigned to the second variable, and values 9-12 will be assigned
to the third variable. The last two values will be ignored.
maxroots is an optional argument, representing the maximum number of dependent variable
values to compute for each specified set of values of the independent variables. The default
value is 1.
The Return Value, or rv, is the list or range of all of the solutions that were found. The number
of values returned will always be equal to maxroots for each set of independent variable
values. If fewer roots than maxroots are found, then the remaining values returned will be
missing values. The reason for inserting the missing values is so the output of the different
functions can be distinguished.
Helpful Tips
• Increasing the value of maxroots increases the chances of finding all of the solutions of the
equation in the prescribed interval. It also increases the time required to complete the
processing of the implicit function.

594
 [Link] implicit

• When searching for multiple solutions to an equation, the implicit function partitions the
interval that you specify into maxroots equally-spaced subintervals. It then searches each
subinterval for exactly one solution. As a consequence, the implicit function may return
fewer than maxroots solutions, even though the equation actually has maxroots or more
solutions in the supplied interval. Ideally, to find all of the solutions to the equation over the
interval from a to b, set maxroots to a value greater than (b -a)/delta, where delta estimates
the closest distance between any solutions.
• The output of the implicit function is always sorted to give the roots in ascending order
for each function in expr.

Example 1
This first example finds a solution of the equation a*u^b/(c^b+u^b) - v =0 for each value of v
in the sampled data from the interval from 0 to 10. The results are written to column 1.
a=95
b=3
c=1.5
x=data(0,10,.025)
k(u,v)=a*u^b/(c^b+u^b) - v
col(1)=implicit(k(u,v),0,10,x)

Example 2
Graphing an implicit equation with two variables can be difficult. The obvious way is to select
several values of one variable, which will be referred to as the independent variable, and solve
the equation for the remaining variable, which will be the dependent variable. In order to get
the complete graph of the equation over a given range of values for the independent variable,
we need to obtain all of the solutions of the equation for the dependent variable.
Suppose we wish to graph the equation sin(x)^2 = y*(y-1)*(y-2) for values of x between -5
and 5. It is clear that the y values for this equation must be greater than 0, otherwise sin(x)^2
would be negative, which is impossible. Also, any y value must be less than 3, otherwise the
right side of the equation would be greater than 1, which is the largest value of sin(x)^2. Thus,
we will choose our search interval for y between 0 and 3. Looking at the equation, we see that
for each value of x there are at most 3 values of y since the right side of the equation is a cubic
polynomial. Knowing this, we could set maxroots equal to 3. However, from the discussion in
the remarks above, since we don’t know how close the solutions are for a given x value, we
will set this value higher to maxroots = 10.
The transform below generates the data that will be used to obtain the graph.
x=data(-5,5,.005)
k(u,v)=u*(u-1)*(u-2)-sin(v)^2
col(2)=implicit(k(u,v),0,3,x,10)
for i=1 to size(x) do
for j = 1 to 10 do
cell(1,10*(i-1) + j) = x[i]
end for
end for

The first line samples several values of the independent variable over the interval from -5 to 5.
The second line defines the expression that will be set to zero to give us the equation. The call
to the implicit function in the third line contains our information for the search interval and

595
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

maxroots. Because of how the implicit function arranges the output, with all solutions for each
x-value displayed consecutively, the remaining lines of the transform arrange our x-data in the
worksheet by repeating a value for the 10 corresponding solutions. Note that there will be
many missing values in the output of the implicit function since we know that a maximum of
three values is all we expect. When graphing, these missing values will simply be ignored.
Before running the transform, make sure that radians is selected as the angular units.
After running the transform, create a simple scatter plot with columns 1 and 2 selected for the
XY Pair data format. The resulting graph is:

The three nearly closed curves below the undulating curve should indeed be closed, but more
sampled points are needed.
Example 3 (Implicit Curve Fitting)
This example shows the equation text for a curve fit in which the fit model is defined implicitly.
In this particular example, the data in the table is fit by an ellipse that is defined implicitly.
-2.0000 0.1000 [Variables]
-1.5000 0.3000 x=col(1)
-1.0000 0.4000 y=col(2)
-0.5000 0.6000 [Parameters]

596
 [Link] int

0.0000 0.5000 a = .01

0.5000 0.6000 b = .01
1.0000 0.5000 [Equation]
1.5000 0.2500 k(u,v)=a*v^2+b*u^2-1
2.0000 0.1000 f=implicit(k(u,v),0,10,x)
fit f to y [Constraints]
a>0 b>0 [Options]
tolerance=1e-010
stepsize=1
iterations=200

[Link] int

The int function returns a number or range of numbers equal to the largest integer less than
or equal to each corresponding number in the specified range. All numbers are rounded
down to the nearest integer.
Syntax
int(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
The operation int({.9,1.2,2.2,-3.8}) returns a range of {0.0,1.0,2.0,-4.0}.

[Link] interpolate

The interpolate function performs linear interpolation on a set of X,Y pairs defined by an x
range and a y range. The function returns a range of interpolated y values from a range of
values between the minimum and maximum of the x range.
Syntax
interpolate(x range,y range,range)
Values in the x range argument must be strictly increasing or strictly decreasing.
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Missing values and text strings are not allowed in the x range and y range. Text
strings in range are replaced by missing values.
Extrapolation is not possible; missing value symbols are returned for range argument values
less than the lowest x range value or greater than the highest x range value.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y = {0,1,4}, and range = data(0,2,.5) (this data operation returns numbers
from 0 to 2 at increments of 0.5), the operation col(1) = interpolate(x,y,range) places the
range {0.0,0.5,1.0,2.5,4.0} into column 1.
If range had included values outside the range for x, missing values would have been returned
for those out-of-range values.

597
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] inv
The inv function generates the inverse matrix of an invertible square matrix provided as a
block.
Syntax
inv(block)
The block argument is a block of numbers with real values in the form of a square matrix. The
number of rows must equal the number of columns. The function returns a block of numbers
with real values in the form of the inverse of the square matrix provided.
Example
For the matrix:
1.00 3.00 4.00
2.00 1.00 3.00
3.00 4.00 2.00

in block(2,3,4,5) the operation block(2,7)=inv(block(2,3,4,5)) generates the inverse matrix:

-0.40 0.40 0.20
0.20 -0.40 0.20
0.20 0.20 -0.20

in block (2,7,4,9).

[Link] invcpx
This function takes the reciprocal of a range of complex numbers.
Syntax
invcp(block)
The input and output are blocks of complex numbers. The invcpx function returns the range
1/c for each complex number in the input block.
Example
If x = complex ({3,0,1}, {0,1,1}), the operation invcpx(x) returns {{0.33333, 0.0, 0.5},
{0.0,-1.0,-0.5}}.

[Link] invfft
The inverse fft function (invfft) takes the inverse Fast Fourier Transform (fft) of the data
produced by the fft to restore the data to its new filtered form.
Syntax
invfft(block)
The parameter is a complex block of spectral numbers with the real values in the first column
and the imaginary values in the second column. This data is usually generated from the fft
function. The invfft function works on data sizes of size 2n numbers. If your data set is not 2n
in length, the invfft function pads 0 at the beginning and end of the data range to make the
length 2n.

598
 [Link] ln

The function returns a complex block of numbers.

Example
If x = {{1,2,3,...,9,10}, {0,0,0,...,0,0}}, the operation invfft(fft(x)) returns
{{0,0,0,1,2,3,...,9,10,0,0,0}, {0,0,0,...0,0}.

[Link] ln
The ln function returns a value or range of values consisting of the natural logarithm (base e)
of each number in the specified range.
Syntax
ln(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
For ln(x):
x < 0 returns an error message, and
x = 0 returns -∞
The largest value allowed is approximately x < 10309.
Example
The operation ln(2.71828) returns a value ≈ 1.0.

[Link] log
The log function returns a value or range of values consisting of the base 10 logarithm of
each number in the specified range.
Syntax
log(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
For log(x):
x < 0 returns an error message,
x = 0 returns -∞
The largest value allowed is approximately x < 10309.
Example
The operation log(100) returns a value of 2.

[Link] logisden
This function is the logistic distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of
the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
logisden(x,a,b)

599
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter, equal to the location of the density function’s peak. The b argument is any
positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a logistic
random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has a location parameter equal to 3 and a shape
parameter equal to 4, then to estimate the probability that the values of X lie between 2 and
2.1, multiply the density of X at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
logisden(2,3,1) * .1 = .019661

[Link] logisdist
This function is the cumulative logistic distribution function. It returns the probability that a
logistic random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
The distribution of a logistic random variable is similar in shape to the normal distribution, but
with wider tails (higher kurtosis).
Syntax
logisdist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter, equal to the location of the density function’s peak. The b argument is any
positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a logistic random variable X has location parameter equal to 3 and shape parameter
equal to 1. To compute the probability that the values of X exceed 2, we calculate:
P( X > 2 ) = 1 – P( X < 2 ) = 1 – logisdist(2,3,1) = .73106

[Link] logisinv
This function is the inverse cumulative logistic distribution function. The probability that a
logistic random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
Syntax
logisinv(x,a,b)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for x
represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any real number
and is the location parameter, equal to the location of the density function’s peak. The b
argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a logistic random variable X has location parameter equal to 3 and shape parameter
equal to 1. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05, we need to find a
number x such that P( X > x ) = .05. This is the same as finding x such that P( X < x) = .95.
Therefore, we calculate:

600
 [Link] loglogisden

logisinv(.95, 3, 1) = 5.94444

[Link] loglogisden
This function is the log-logistic distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value
of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
loglogisden(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a log-logistic
random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has location parameter equal to 1 and shape
parameter equal to 1, then to estimate the probability that the values of X lie between 2 and
2.1, multiply the density of X at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
loglogisden(2,1,1) * .1 = .012210

[Link] loglogisdist
This function is the cumulative log-logistic distribution function. It returns the probability that
a log-logistic random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
The log-logistic distribution function gives the distribution of the random variable Y = exp(X),
where X has a logistic distribution.
Syntax
loglogisdist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a log-logistic random variable X has location parameter equal to 1 and shape
parameter equal to 1. To compute the probability that the values of X exceed 2, we calculate:
P( X > 2 ) = 1 – P( X < 2 ) = 1 – loglogisdist(2,1,1) = .57612

[Link] loglogisinv
This function is the inverse cumulative log-logistic distribution function. The probability that
a log-logistic random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
Syntax
loglogisinv(x,a,b)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value
for x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any real

601
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

number and is the location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the
scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a log-logistic random variable X has location parameter equal to 1 and scale
parameter equal to .5. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05, we
need to find a number x such that P( X > x ) = .05. This is the same as finding x such that
P( X < x) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
loglogisinv(.95, 1, .5) = 11.84872

[Link] lognormden

This function is the log-normal distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value
of the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
lognormden(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a log-normal
random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has location parameter equal to 1 and shape
parameter equal to 1, then to estimate the probability that the values of X lie between 2 and
2.1, multiply the density of X at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
lognormden(2,1,1) * .1 = .019030

[Link] lognormdist

This function is the cumulative log-normal distribution function. It returns the probability that
a log-normal random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
The log-normal distribution function gives the distribution of the random variable Y = exp(X),
where X has a normal distribution.
Syntax
lognormdist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any real number and is the
location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a log-normal random variable X has location parameter equal to 1 and shape
parameter equal to 1. To compute the probability that the values of X exceed 2, we calculate:
P( X > 2 ) = 1 – P( X < 2 ) = 1 – lognormdist(2,1,1) = .62052

602
 [Link] lognorminv

[Link] lognorminv

This function is the inverse cumulative log-normal distribution function. The probability that
a log-normal random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
Syntax
lognorminv(x,a,b)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value
for x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any real
number and is the location parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the
scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a log-normal random variable X has location parameter equal to 1 and scale
parameter equal to .5. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05, we
need to find a number x such that P( X > x ) = .05. This is the same as finding x such that
P( X < x) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
lognorminv(.95, 1, .5) = 6.18686

[Link] lookup

The lookup function compares values with a specified table of boundaries and returns
either a corresponding index from a one-dimensional table, or a corresponding value from
a two-dimensional table.
Syntax
lookup(numbers,x table,y table)
The numbers argument is the range of values looked up in the specified x table. The x table
argument consists of the upper bounds (inclusive) of the x intervals within the table and must
be ascending in value. The lower bounds are the values of the previous numbers in the table
(-∞ for the first interval).
You must specify numbers and an x table. If only the numbers and x table arguments are
specified, the lookup function returns an index number corresponding to the x table interval;
the interval from -∞ to the first boundary corresponds to an index of 1, the second to 2, etc.
If a number value is larger than the last entry in x table, lookup will return a missing value
as the index. You can avoid missing value results by specifying 1/0 (infinity) as the last
value in x table.
The optional y table argument is used to assign y values to the x index numbers. The y table
argument must be the same size as the x table argument, but the elements do not need to be in
any particular order. If y table is specified, lookup returns the y table value corresponding
to the x table index value, i.e., the first y table value for an index of 1, the second y table
value for an index of 2, etc.
Note: The x table and y table ranges correspond to what is normally called a “lookup table.”
Example 1
For n={-4,11,31} and x={1,10,30}, col(1)=lookup(n,x)places the index values of 1, 3, and –
(missing value) in column 1.

603
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

-4 falls beneath 1, or the first x boundary; 11 falls beyond 10 but below 30, and 31 lies
beyond 30.
Example 2
To generate triplet values for the range {9,6,5}, you can use the expression
lookup(data(1/3,3,1/3),data(1,3),{9,6,5}) to return {9,9,9,6,6,6,5,5,5}. This looks up the
numbers 1/3, 2/3, 1, 1 1/3, 1 2/3, 2, 2 1/3, 2 2/3, and 3 using x table boundaries 1, 2, and 3
and corresponding y table values 9, 6, and 5.

[Link] lowess

The lowess function returns smoothed y values as a range from the ranges of x and y variables
provided, using a user-defined smoothing factor. "Lowess" means locally weighted regression.
Each point along the smooth curve is obtained from a regression of data points close to the
curve point with the closest points more heavily weighted.
Syntax
lowess(x range, y range, f )

604
 [Link] lowpass

The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must be the same size, and the number
of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the fraction of
data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal
to 1. 0 ≤ f ≤ 1. Note that unlike lowpass, lowess requires an f argument.
Example
For x = {1,2,3,4}, y={0.13, 0.17, 0.50, 0.60}, the operation
col(1)=lowess(x,y,1)
places the smoothed y data 0.10, 0.25, 0.43, 0.63 into column 1.

[Link] lowpass

The lowpass function returns smoothed y values from ranges of x and y variables, using an
optional user-defined smoothing factor that uses FFT and IFFT.
Syntax
lowpass(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must be the same size, and the number
of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines whether FFT and IFFT are used. f must be greater than or
equal to 0 and less than or equal to 100 . If f is omitted, no Fourier transformation is used.
Note: lowpass is especially designed to perform smoothing on waveform functions as a
part of nonlinear regression.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=lowpass(x,y,88)
places the newly smoothed data 0.25, 1.50, 2.25 into column 1.

[Link] max

The max function returns the largest number found in the range specified.
Syntax
max(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
For x = {7,4,-4,5}, the operation max(x) returns a value of 7, and the operation min(x)
returns a value of -4.

605
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] mean
The mean function returns the average of the range specified. Use this function to calculate
column averages (as opposed to using the avg function to calculate row averages).
The mean function calculates the arithmetic mean, defined as:
1 n
x= xi
n i=1

Syntax
mean(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
The operation mean({1,2,3,4}) returns a value of 2.5.

[Link] median
The median function returns the median of the range specified. The median is a number that is
both less than or equal to half and greater than or equal to half of the values in the data set.
The median of a set with an odd number of elements is simply the middle value when the
elements are sorted by value. For an even number of elements, the median returns the mean of
the two middle values when the elements are sorted by value.
Syntax
median(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
The operation median({1,2,3,5}) returns a value of 2.5.

[Link] min
The min function returns the smallest number in the range specified.
Syntax
min(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
For x = {7,4,-4,5}, the operation max(x) returns a value of 7, and the operation min(x)returns a
value of -4.

[Link] missing
The missing function returns a value or range of values equal to the number of missing values
and text strings in the specified range.

606
 [Link] mod

Syntax
missing(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column.
Example
In the worksheet below, the operation missing(col(1)) returns a value of 1, the operation
missing(col(2)) returns a value of 0, and the operation missing(col(3)) returns a value of 4.

[Link] mod
The mod function returns the modulus (the remainder from division) for corresponding
numbers in numerator and divisor arguments. This is the real (not integral) modulus, so both
ranges may be nonintegral values.
Syntax
mod(numerator,divisor)
The numerator and divisor arguments can be scalars or ranges. Any missing value or text
string contained within a range is returned as the string or missing value.
For any divisor ≠ 0, the mod function returns the remainder of
num erator
divisor

For mod(x,0), that is, for divisor = 0,

x > 0 returns + ∞
x = 0 returns + ∞
x < 0 returns - ∞
Example
The operation mod({4,5,4,5},{2,2,3,3}) returns the range {0,1,1,2}. These are the remainders
for 4÷2, 5÷2, 4÷3, and 5÷3.

607
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] mulcpx
The mulcpx function multiplies two blocks of complex numbers together.
Syntax
mulcpx(block, block)
Both input blocks should be the same length. The mulcpx function returns a block that
contains the complex multiplication of the two ranges.
Example
If u = {{1,1,0},{0,1,1}}, the operation mulcpx(u,u) returns {{1,0,-1}, {0,2,0}}.

[Link] normden
This function is the normal (or Gaussian) probability density function. The graph of this
function is the familiar "bell curve". It returns the value of the slope of the cumulative
distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
normden(x,m,s)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. The m argument can be any number and equals the mean of the
distribution. The s argument can be any positive number and equals the standard deviation
of the distribution.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a normally
distributed random variable X lie in a small interval. If X has mean 0 and standard deviation 1,
then to estimate the probability that the values of X lie between .5 and .6, multiply the density
of X at .5 by the length of the interval .1:
normden(.5,0,1) * .1 = .03521

[Link] normdist
This function is the cumulative normal (or Gaussian) distribution function. It returns the
probability that a normal random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
Syntax
normdist(x,m,s)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. The m argument can be any number and equals the mean of the
distribution. The s argument can be any positive number and equals the standard deviation
of the distribution.
A normal distribution is called standard if the mean is 0 and the standard deviation is 1.
Example
Suppose a random variable X is normally distributed withmean .5 and standard deviation 2.
Then to compute the probability that its values lie between -1 and 1, we calculate:
P(-1 < X < 1) = P(X < 1) – P(X < -1) = normdist(1,.5,2) – normdist(-1,.5,2

608
 [Link] norminv

[Link] norminv

This function is the inverse cumulative normal (or Gaussian) distribution function. The
probability that a normally distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to
the argument you specify.
Syntax
norminv(x,m,s)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for x
represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The m argument can be any number
and equals the mean of the distribution. The s argument can be any positive number and equals
the standard deviation of the distribution.
Example
Suppose a random variable X is normally distributed with mean .5 and standard deviation 2.
To compute the .25 quartile of X, we calculate:
norminv(.25,.5,2) = -.84898

[Link] nth

The nth function returns a sampling of a provided range, with the frequency indicated by a
scalar number. The result always begins with the first entry in the specified range.
Syntax
nth(range,increment)
The range argument is either a specified range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. The increment argument must be a positive integer.
Example
The operation col(1)=nth({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},3) places the range {1,4,7,10} in column 1.
Every third value of the range is returned, beginning with 1.

[Link] partdist

The partdist function returns a range representing the distance from the first X,Y pair to
each other successive pair. The line segment X,Y pairs are specified by an x range and a y
range. The last value in this range is numerically the same as that returned by dist, assuming
the same x and y ranges.
Syntax
partdist(x range,y range)
The x range argument specifies the x coordinates, and the y range argument specifies the y
coordinates. Corresponding values in these ranges form xy pairs.
If the ranges are uneven in size, excess x or y points are ignored.
Example
For the ranges x = {0,1,1,0,0} and y = {0,0,1,1,0}, the operation partdist(x,y) returns a range
of {0,1,2,3,4}. The X and Y coordinates provided describe a square of 1 unit x by 1 unit y.

609
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] polynomial

The polynomial function returns the results for independent variable values in polynomials.
Given the coefficients, this function produces a range of y values for the corresponding x
values in range.
The function takes one of two forms. The first form has two arguments, both of which are
ranges. Values in the first range are the independent variable values. The second range
represents the coefficients of the polynomial, with the constant coefficient listed first, and the
highest order coefficient listed last.
The second form accepts two or more arguments. The first argument is a range consisting
of the independent variable values. All successive arguments are scalar and represent the
coefficients of a polynomial, with the constant coefficient listed first and the highest order
coefficient listed last.
Syntax
polynomial(range,coefficents) or
polynomial(range,a0,a1,...,an)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Text strings contained within a range are returned as a missing value.
The coefficients argument is a range consisting of the polynomial coefficient values, from
lowest to highest. Alternately, the coefficients can be listed individually as scalars.
Example
To evaluate the polynomial y = x2 + x + 1 for x values of 0, 1, and 2, type the
equation polynomial({0,1,2},1,1,1). Alternately, you could set x ={1,1,1}, then enter
polynomial({0,1,2},x). Both operations return a range of {1,3,7}.

[Link] prec

The prec function rounds a number or range of numbers to the specified number of significant
digits, or places of significance. Values are rounded to the nearest integer; values of exactly
0.5 are rounded up.
Syntax
prec(numbers,digits)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
If the digits argument is a scalar, all numbers in the range have the same number of places
of significance.
If the digits argument is a range, the number of places of significance vary according to the
corresponding range values. If the size of the digits range is smaller than the numbers range,
the function returns missing values for all numbers with no corresponding digits.
Example
For x = {13570,3.141,.0155,999,1.92}, the operation prec(x,2) returns
{14000,3.100,.0160,1000,1.90}.
For y = {123.5,123.5,123.5,123.5}, the operation prec(y,{1,2,3,4}) returns {100.0,
120.0,124.0,123.5}.

610
 [Link] put into

[Link] put into

The put into function places calculation results in a designated column on the worksheet. It
operates faster than the equivalent equality relationship.
Syntax
put results into col(column)
The results argument can be either the result of an equation, function or variable. The column
argument is either the column number of the destination column, or the column title, enclosed
in quotes.
Data put into columns inserts or overwrites according to the current insert mode.
Example
To place the results of the equation y = data(1,100) in column 1, you can type col(1) = y.
However, entering put y into col(1) runs faster.

[Link] random
This function generates a specified number of uniformly distributed numbers within the range.
Rand and rnd are synonyms for the random function.
Syntax
random(number,seed,low,high)
The number argument specifies how many random numbers to generate.
The seed argument is the random number generation seed to be used by the function. If you
want to generate a different random number sequence each time the function is used, enter 0/0
for the seed. If the seed argument is omitted, a randomly selected seed is used.
The low and high arguments specify the beginning and end of the random number distribution
range. The low boundary is included in the range. If low and high are omitted, they default to
0 and 1, respectively.
Note: Function arguments are omitted from right to left. If you want to specify a high
boundary, you must specify the low boundary argument first.
Example
The operation random(50,0/0,1,7) produces 50 uniformly distributed random numbers
between 1 and 7. The sequence is different each time this random function is used.

[Link] real
The real function strips the real values from a complex block of numbers.
Syntax
real (range)
The range argument consists of complex numbers.
Example
If x = complex ({1,2,3,...,9,10}, {0,0,...,0}), the operation real(x)returns {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},
leaving the imaginary values out.

611
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] rgbcolor
The transform function rgbcolor takes arguments r, g, and b between 0 and 255 and returns
the corresponding color to cells in the worksheet. This function can be used to apply custom
colors to any element of a graph or plot that can use colors chosen from a worksheet column.
Syntax
rgbcolor(r,g,b)
The r,g,b arguments define the red, green, and blue intensity portions of the color. These
values must be scalars between 0 and 255. Numbers for the arguments less than 0 or greater
than 255 are truncated to these values.
Example
The operation rgbcolor(255,0,0) returns red.
The operation rgbcolor(0,255,0) returns green.
The operation rgbcolor(0,0,255) returns blue.
The following statements place the secondary colors yellow, magenta, and cyan into rows
1, 2, and 3 into column 1:
cell(1,1)=rgbcolor(255,255,0)
cell(1,2)=rgbcolor(255,0,255)
cell(1,3)=rgbcolor(0,255,255)
Shades of gray are generated using equal arguments. To place black, gray, and white in the
first three rows of column 1:
cell(1,1)=rgbcolor(0,0,0)
cell(1,3)=rgbcolor(255,255,255)cell(1,2)=rgbcolor(127,127,127)

[Link] root
Use the root function to find the roots of a function of one variable over a finite interval. In
other words, the root function solves equations of the form f(x) = 0, where x is restricted to
lie in a finite interval. This function also has the capability of finding certain values of the
independent variable where the function is undefined, known as isolated singularities.
Syntax
rv = root(expr, variable, a, b, maxroots, type)
The expr argument defines the equations to solve. The expression can specify a range or list of
functions so that more than one equation can be solved at a time. The equations are defined by
setting each function in the expression list equal to zero. The variable argument is the symbol
for the variable you are solving for in each specified equation. The same variable is used for
all equations. The a and b arguments are the left and right endpoints, respectively, of the
interval over which the root search takes place.
The maxroots and type arguments are optional. Maxroots is the maximum number of roots to
compute for each specified function in the first argument. The default value is 1. Type is a
number that specifies one of two types of output. If type = 0, then only roots will be returned.
If type = 1, then only singularities will be returned. The default value is 0.
The Return Value, or rv, is the list or range of all of the roots that were found. The number
of values returned will always be equal to maxroots for each function specified in the first
argument. If fewer roots than maxroots are found, then the remaining values returned will be

612
 [Link] root

missing values. The reason for inserting the missing values is so the output of the different
functions can be distinguished.
Helpful Tips
• Increasing the value of maxroots increases the chances of finding all of the solutions of the
equation in the prescribed interval. It also increases the time required to complete the
processing of the implicit function.
• When searching for multiple solutions to an equation, the implicit function partitions the
interval that you specify into maxroots equally-spaced subintervals. It then searches each
subinterval for exactly one solution. As a consequence, the implicit function may return
fewer than maxroots solutions, even though the equation actually has maxroots or more
solutions in the supplied interval. Ideally, to find all of the solutions to the equation over the
interval from a to b, set maxroots to a value greater than (b -a)/delta, where delta estimates
the closest distance between any solutions.
• The output of the implicit function is always sorted to give the roots in ascending order
for each function in expr.

Example 1
This example uses a range of values to create a list of slightly modified equations. Two roots
are found for each of the equations and the values are returned to the worksheet. Since v is a
formal argument to a user-defined function, its value need not be initialized.
a=1
b=0
c=1
x= data(.1,.9,.1)
k(v)=a*x^2+b*x*v+c*v^2-1
col(2)=root(k(v),v,-10,10,2)
Example 2
Finds the two roots of the equation x^2+3*x-7=0. Note that x is initially set to 1 since each
variable that is used in the transform language must be initialized unless it is a formal
argument in a user-defined function as in the example above. The value that x is initially
set to doesn’t matter.
x=1
f=x^2+3*x-7
col(1)=root(f,x,-10,10,2)

Example 3
This third example is the same as above, but more direct.
x=1
col(2)=root(x^2+3*x-7,x,-10,10,2)

Example 4
This example uses range notation to enter multiple functions in the first argument of the root
function. In this case, two roots are computed for each of three functions and the six values are
returned to the worksheet.
x=1

613
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

f=x^2+3*x-7
g= cos((x+1)/5)
h=x*arctan(x)+.5*ln(x^2+1)-2
col(1)=root({f,g,h},x,-10,10,2)

It is assumed that the angular unit for this transform has been set to radians so that the value
of x is interpreted in units of radians when finding the roots of g. In the output, the roots of
function f are listed first, followed by the roots of the other two functions according to the
order in which they appear in the list.

[Link] round

The round function rounds a number or range of numbers to the specified decimal places
of accuracy. Values are rounded up or down to the nearest integer; values of exactly 0.5
are rounded up.
Syntax
round(numbers,places)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
If the places argument is negative, rounding occurs to the left of the decimal point. To round
to the nearest whole number, use a places argument of 0.
Example
The operation round(92.1541,2) returns a value of 92.15. The operation round(0.19112,1)
returns a value of 0.2. The operation round(92.1541,-2) returns a value of 100.0.

[Link] runavg

The runavg function produces a range of running averages, using a window of a specified
size as the size of the range to be averaged. The resulting range is the same length as the
argument range.
Syntax
runavg(range,window)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is replaced with 0.
If the window argument is even, the next highest odd number is used. The tails of the running
average are computed by appending
(window 1)
2

additional initial and final values to their respective ends of range.

Example
The operation runavg({1,2,3,4,5},3) returns {1.33,2,3,4,4.67}. The value of the window
argument is 3, so the first result value is calculated as:

614
 [Link] sin

+ 1+ 2
(3 1)
2
3

The second value is calculated as:

1+ 2+ 3
3

[Link] sin
This function returns ranges consisting of the sine of each value in the argument given.
This and other trigonometric functions can take values in radians, degrees, or grads. This is
determined by the Trigonometric Units selected in the User-Defined Transform dialog box.
Syntax
sin(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
If you regularly use values outside of the usual -2π to 2π (or equivalent) range, use the mod
function to prevent loss of precision. Any missing value or text string contained within a range
is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
If you choose Degrees as your Trigonometric Units in the Transform dialog box, the operation
sin({0,30,90,180,270}) returns values of {0,0.5,1,0,-1}.

[Link] sinh
This function returns the hyperbolic sine of the specified argument.
Syntax
sinh(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
Like the circular trig functions, this function also accepts numbers in degrees, radians, or
grads, depending on the units selected in the User-Defined Transform dialog box.
Example
The operation x = sinh(col(3)) sets the variable x to be the hyperbolic sine of all data in
column 3.

[Link] sinp
The sinp function automatically generates the initial parameter estimates for a sinusoidal
functions using the FFT method. The three parameter estimates are returned as a vector.
Syntax
sinp(x range, y range)
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and

615
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must be the same size, and the number
of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
Tip: sinp is especially used to perform smoothing on waveform functions, used in
determination of initial parameter estimates for nonlinear regression.

[Link] size
The size function returns a value equal to the total number of elements in the specified range,
including all numbers, missing values, and text strings. Note that size (X) 1/2 count (X)
+ missing (X).
Syntax
size(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column.
Example
In the figure below:

the operation size(col(1)) returns a value of 6,

the operation size(col(2)) returns a value of 6, and
the operation size(col(3)) returns a value of 4.

[Link] sort
This function can be used to sort a range of numbers in ascending order, or a range of numbers
in ascending order together with a block of data.
Syntax
sort(block,range)
The range argument can be either a specified range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a
worksheet column. If the block argument is omitted, the data in range is sorted in ascending
order.

616
 [Link] sqrt

Example 1
The operation col(2) = sort(col(1)) returns the contents of column 1 arranged in ascending
order and places it in column 2. To reverse the order of the sort, you can create a custom
function:
reverse(x) = x[data(size(x),1)]
then apply it to the results of the sort. For example, reverse(sort(x)) sorts range x in descending
order.
Example 2
The operation:
block(3,1) = sort(block(1,1,2,size(col(2))),col(2))
sorts data in columns 1 and 2 using column 2 as the key column and places the sorted data
in columns 3 and 4.

[Link] sqrt
The sqrt function returns a value or range of values consisting of the square root of each
value in the specified range. Numerically, this is the same as {numbers}^0.5, but uses a
faster algorithm.
Syntax
sqrt(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range of numbers. Any missing value or text string
contained within a range is ignored and returned as the string or missing value. For numbers <
0, sqrt generates a missing value.
Example
The operation sqrt({-1,0,1,2}) returns the range {–,0,1,1.414}.

[Link] stddev
The stddev function returns the standard deviation of the specified range, as defined by:
1
n
1 2 2
s= (xi x)
n 1i1

Syntax
stddev(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the {} brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
For the range x = {1,2}, the operation stddev(x) returns a value of .70711.

[Link] stderr
The stderr function returns the standard error of the mean of the specified range, as defined by

617
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

s
n

where s is the standard deviation.

Syntax
stderr(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any missing value or text string contained within a range is ignored.
Example
For the range x = {1,2}, the operation stderr(x) returns a value of 0.5.

[Link] subblock
The subblock function returns a block of cells from within another previously defined block of
cells from the worksheet. The subblock is defined using the upper left and lower right cells of
the subblock, relative to the range defined by the source block.
Syntax
subblock (block, column 1, row 1, column 2, row 2)
The block argument can be a variable defined as a block, or a block function statement.
The column 1 and row 1 arguments are the relative coordinates for the upper left cell of the
subblock with respect to the source block. The column 2 and row 2 arguments are the relative
coordinates for the lower right cell of the subblock. All values within this range are returned.
Operations performed on a block always return a block. If column 2 and row 2 are omitted,
then the last row and/or column is assumed to be the last row and column of the source block.
All column and row arguments must be scalar (not ranges).
Example
For x = block (3,1,20,42) the operation subblock (x,1,1,1,1) returns cell (3,1) and the operation
subblock (x,5,5) returns the block from cell (7, 5) to cell (20, 42).

[Link] sum
The function sum returns a range of numbers representing the accumulated sums along the list.
The value of the number is added to the value of the preceding cumulative sum.
Because there is no preceding number for the first number in a range, the value of the first
number in the result is always the same as the first number in the argument range.
Syntax
sum(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Any text string or missing value contained within the range is returned as the string or
missing value.
Example
For x = {2,6,7}, the operation sum(x) returns a value of {2,8,15}.
For y = {4,12,-6}, the operation sum(y) returns a value of {4,16,10}.

618
 [Link] tan

[Link] tan
This function returns ranges consisting of the tangent of each value in the argument given.
This and other trigonometric functions can take values in radians, degrees, or grads. This is
determined by the Trigonometric Units selected in the User-Defined Transform dialog box.
Syntax
tan(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
If you regularly use values outside of the usual -2π to 2π (or equivalent) range, use the mod
function to prevent loss of precision. Any missing value or text string contained within a range
is ignored and returned as the string or missing value.
Example
If you choose Degrees as your Trigonometric Units in the transform dialog box, the operation
tan({0,45,135,180}) returns values of {0,1,-1,0}.

[Link] tanh
This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the specified argument.
Syntax
tanh(numbers)
The numbers argument can be a scalar or range.
Example
The operation x = tanh(col(3)) sets the variable x to be the hyperbolic tangent of all data in
column 3.

[Link] tden
This function is the T-distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of the
slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
tden(x,n)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. The n argument can be any positive integer and equals the degrees of
freedom.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a T-distributed
random variable T lie in a small interval. If T has 16 degrees of freedom, then to estimate the
probability that the values of T lie between 1 and 1.1, multiply the density of T at 1 by the
length of the interval .1:
tden(1,16) * .1 = .02346

[Link] tdist
This function is Student’s T-distribution function. It returns the probability that a T-distributed
random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.

619
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

A T-distributed random variable is defined as a scaled ratio of a standard normal variable and a
chi-square variable. The degrees of freedom of a T-distributed variable is defined to be the
degrees of freedom of the chi-square variable in the denominator.
This distribution is used in computing confidence intervals and for testing the homogeneity of
populations for two groups of normally distributed observations.
Syntax
tdist(x,n)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying
a worksheet column. The n argument can be any positive integer and equals the degrees of
freedom.
Example
Suppose T is a T-distributed random variable with 14 degrees of freedom. To compute the
probability that the absolute values of T exceed 2, we calculate:
P( |T| > 2 ) = P( T > 2) + P( T < -2) = 2*P( T > 2) = 2*
This is a typical calculation that is used to test whether two normally distributed groups of
observations have the same mean. In this context, the value 2 in our example is called the
critical value and is equal to the absolute difference in the sample means of the two groups
divided by the pooled standard deviation of the groups. The resulting probability, .06529, is
called the probability of significance.

[Link] tinv
This function is the inverse of Student’s T-distribution function. The probability that a
T-distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument you specify.
Syntax
tinv(x,n)
The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for x
represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The n argument can be any positive
integer and equals the degrees of freedom.
Example
Suppose a T-distributed random variable T has 23 degrees of freedom. .75 quartile of T, we
calculate:
tinv(.75,23) = .68531

[Link] total
The function total returns a single value equal to the total sum of all numbers in a specified
range. Numerically, this is the same as the last number returned by the sum function.
Syntax
total(range)
The range argument must be a single range (indicated with the { } brackets) or a worksheet
column. Missing values and text strings contained within the range are ignored.
Example

620
 [Link] weibullden

For x = {9,16,7}, the operation total(x) returns a value of 32.

For y = {4,12,-6}, the operation total(y) returns a value of 10.

[Link] weibullden
This function is the Weibull distribution’s probability density function. It returns the value of
the slope of the cumulative distribution function at the specified argument value.
Syntax
weibullden(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number and
is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
The density function can be used to estimate the probability that the values of a Weibull
distributed random variable W lie in a small interval. If W has shape parameter equal to 1 and
scale parameter equal to 1, then to estimate the probability that the values of W lie between 2
and 2.1, multiply the density of W at 2 by the length of the interval .1:
weibullden(2,1,1) * .1 = .013534

[Link] weibulldist
This function is the cumulative Weibull distribution function. It returns the probability that a
Weibull distributed random variable is less than a specified independent variable value.
The Weibull distribution function describes the failure time distributions when the failure
rate is assumed to increase as some power.
Syntax
weibulldist(x,a,b)
The x argument represents the independent variable and can either be a scalar or a range of
numbers. If x is a range, then it must be defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a
worksheet column. Any value for x must be real. The a argument is any positive number and
is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale parameter.
Example
Suppose a Weibull distributed random variable W has shape parameter equal to 1 and scale
parameter equal to 1. To compute the probability that the values of W exceed 2, we calculate:
P( W > 2 ) = 1 – P( W < 2 ) = 1 – weibulldist(2,1,1) = .13534

[Link] weibullinv
This function is the inverse cumulative Weibull distribution function. The probability that
a Weibull distributed random variable is less than the return value is equal to the argument
you specify.
Syntax
weibullinv(x,a,b)

621
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The x argument can either be a scalar or a range of numbers. If x is a range, then it must be
defined by either using braces { } or by specifying a worksheet column. Any scalar value for
x represents a probability and so must be between 0 and 1. The a argument is any positive
number and is the shape parameter. The b argument is any positive number and is the scale
parameter.
Example
Suppose a Weibull distributed random variable W has has shape parameter equal to 1 and scale
parameter equal to 1. To calculate the tail of this distribution whose probability is .05, we
need to find a number w such that P( W > w ) = .05. This is the same as finding w such that
P( W < w) = .95. Therefore, we calculate:
weibullinv(.95, 1, 1) = 2.99573

[Link] x25
The x25 function returns an interpolated value of the x data at:
r
range
ym in +
4

in the ranges of coordinates provided, with optional Lowess smoothing. This is typically used
to return the x value for the y value at 25% of the distance from the minimum to the maximum
of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
Syntax
x25(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. (0 ≤ f ≤ 1). If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=x25(x,y)
places the x at
r
range
ym in +
4

as 1.00 into column 1.

[Link] x50
The x50 function returns an interpolated value of the x data at:
r
range
ym in +
2

622
 [Link] x75

in the ranges of coordinates provided, with optional Lowess smoothing. This is typically used
to return the x value for the y value at 50% of the distance from the minimum to the maximum
of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
Syntax
x50(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. (0 ≤ f ≤ 1). If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=x50(x,y)
places the x at
r
range
ym in +
2

as 1.00 into column 1.

[Link] x75
The x75 function returns an interpolated value of the x data at:
3r
range
ym in +
4

in the ranges of coordinates provided, with optional Lowess smoothing. This is typically used
to return the x value for the y value at 75% of the distance from the minimum to the maximum
of smoothed data for sigmoidal shaped functions.
Syntax
x75(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. (0 ≤ f ≤ 1). If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=x75(x,y)
places the x at

623
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3r
range
ym in +
4

as 2.00 into column 1.

[Link] xatymax

The xatymax function returns the interpolated x value at the maximum y value found, with
optional Lowess smoothing.
Syntax
xatymax(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored and
will not be treated as a data point. x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3. The optional f argument
defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the fraction of data points used
for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1. 0 ≤ f ≤
1. If f is not defined, no smoothing is used.
Note: If duplicate y maximums are found xatymax will return the average value of all the x at
y maximums.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=xatymax(x,y)
places the x at the y maximum as 2.00 into column 1.

[Link] xwtr

The xwtr function returns value of x75-x25 in the ranges of coordinates provided, with
optional Lowess smoothing.
Syntax
xwtr(x range, y range, f )
The x range argument specifies the x variable, and the y range argument specifies the y
variable. Any missing value or text string contained within one of the ranges is ignored
and will not be treated as a data point.x range and y range must have the same size, and the
number of valid data points must be greater than or equal to 3.
The optional f argument defines the amount of Lowess smoothing, and corresponds to the
fraction of data points used for each regression. f must be greater than or equal to 0 and less
than or equal to 1. 0 ≤ f ≤ 1. If f is omitted, no smoothing is used.
Example
For x = {0,1,2}, y={0,1,4}, the operation
col(1)=xwtr(x,y)
places the x75-x25 as double 1.00 into column 1.

624
15 Nonlinear Regression
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ What is Regression?
♦ Dynamic Curve Fitting
♦ Global Curve Fitting
♦ Regression Lessons

15.1 What is Regression?

Regression is most often used by scientists and engineers to visualize and plot the curve that
best describes the shape and behavior of their data.
Regression procedures find an association between independent and dependent variables that,
when graphed on a Cartesian coordinate system, produces a straight line, plane or curve. This
is also commonly known as curve fitting.
The independent variables are the known, or predictor, variables. These are most often your
X-axis values. When the independent variables are varied, they result in corresponding values
for the dependent, or response, variables, most often assigned to the Y-axis.
Regression finds the equation that most closely describes, or fits, the actual data, using the
values of one or more independent variables to predict the value of a dependent variable. The
resulting equation can then be plotted over the original data to produce a curve that fits the data.

15.1.1 About the Regression Wizard

SigmaStat uses the Regression Wizard to perform regression and curve fitting. The Regression
Wizard provides a step-by step guide through the procedures that let you fit a known function
to your data and then automatically plot the best-fit curve and produce statistical results.
SigmaPlot uses the Regression Wizard to perform regression and curve fitting. The Regression
Wizard provides a step-by step guide through the procedures that let you fit a known function
to your data and then automatically plot the best-fit curve and produce statistical results.
The Regression Wizard simplifies curve fitting. There is no need to be familiar with
programming or higher mathematics. The large library of built-in equations are graphically
presented and organized by different categories, making selection of your models
straightforward. Built-in shortcuts let you bypass all but the simplest procedures; fitting a
curve to your data can be as simple as picking the equation to use, then clicking a button.
Note: For more complicated curve fitting, try using the Dynamic Fit Wizard. For more
information, see page 670.
Use the Regression Wizard to:
• Select the function describing the shape of your data. SigmaPlot provides over 100
built-in equations. You can also create your own custom regression [Link] the
Regression Equation LibraryFor more information, see page 713.
• Select the variables to fit to the function. You can select your variables from either
a graph or a worksheet.

625
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Evaluate and save your results. You can automatically plot the resulting curves on a
graph, and save statistical results to the worksheet and text reports.
The Regression Wizard is also compatible with older .FIT files.

Figure 15.1 Selecting an Equation from the Regression Wizard

15.1.2 About the Curve Fitter

The curve fitter works by varying the parameters (coefficients) of an equation, and finds the
parameters which cause the equation to most closely fit your data. Both the equation and
initial parameter values must be provided. All built-in equations have the curve equation
and initial parameters predefined.
The curve fitter accepts up to 25 equation parameters and ten independent equation variables.
You can also specify up to 25 parameter constraints, which limit the search area of the curve
fitter when checking for parameter values.
The regression curve fitter can also use weighted least squares for greater accuracy.

[Link] Curve-fitting Algorithm

The SigmaStat curve fitter uses the Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm to find the coefficients
(parameters) of the independent variable(s) that give the best fit between the equation and
the data.
The SigmaPlot curve fitter uses the Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm to find the coefficients
(parameters) of the independent variable(s) that give the best fit between the equation and
the data.
This algorithm seeks the values of the parameters that minimize the sum of the squared
differences between the values of the observed and predicted values of the dependent variable

=
SS = w i(yi y2)2
i

626
 [Link] References for the Marquardt-Levenberg Algorithm

Where y2 is the observed and y2 is the observed and the predicted value of the dependent
variable.
This process is iterative—the curve fitter begins with a guess at the parameters, checks to
see how well the equation fits, then continues to make better guesses until the differences
between the residual sum of squares no longer decreases significantly. This condition is
known as convergence.
References for the Marquardt-Levenberg Algorithm For more information, see page 627.

[Link] References for the Marquardt-Levenberg Algorithm

Press, W. H., Flannery, B. P., Teukolsky, S. A., and Vetterling, W. T. (1986). Numerical
Recipes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Marquardt, D.W. (1963). An Algorithm for Least Squares Estimation of Parameters. Journal
of the Society of Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 11, 431-441.
Nash, J.C. (1979). Compact Numerical Methods for Computers: Linear Algebra and Function
Minimization. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Shrager, R.I. (1970). Regression with Linear Constraints: An Extension of the Magnified
Diagonal Method. Journal of the Association for Computing Machinery, 17, 446-452.
Shrager, R.I. (1972). Quadratic Programming for N. Communications of the ACM, 15, 41-45.

15.1.3 Opening .FIT Files

To open old curve fit (.fit) files:

1. Click the Main Button and then click New.

Select SigmaPlot Curve Fit as the file type. .fit files are opened as a single equation
in a notebook.
You can also open .fit files from the Library panel of the Regression Wizard.
You can also open .fit files from the Library panel of both the Regression Wizard and
the Dynamic Fit Wizard. For more information, see page 670.

[Link] Adding .FIT Files to a Library or Notebook

Add these equations to other notebooks by copying and pasting. To add them to your
regression library, open the library notebook ([Link]), then copy the equation and paste
it into the desired section of the library notebook. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program
FilesFor more information, see page .
You can also create your own library by simply combining all your old .fit files into a single
notebook, then setting this notebook to be your default equation library.
Note: Sections appear as categories in the library, so create a new section to create a new
equation category.
.FIT files as well as new equations do not have graphic previews of the equation.

627
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

15.1.4 Using the Regression Wizard

Selecting the Data Source

1. View the page or worksheet with the data you want to fit.
2. If you select a graph, right-click the curve you want fitted, and on the shortcut menu,
click Fit Curve.

Note: If you are running a regression from the graph page, make sure you select the plot
itself, not the graph, or Fit Curve will not appear on the shortcut menu.
3. If you are using a worksheet, select the variables in the worksheet you want to fit, then
on the Analysis tab, in the Nonlinear Regression group, click Nonlinear Regression.

Next. For more information, see page .

[Link] Selecting the Equation to Use

1. Select an equation from the Equation Category and Equation Name drop-down lists.
You can view different equations by selecting different categories and names. The
equation’s mathematical expression and shape appear to the left. About the Regression
Equation LibraryFor more information, see page 713.

Figure 15.2 Selecting an Equation Category and Equation Name

628
 [Link] Selecting the Variables to Fit

If the equation you want to use isn’t on this list, you can create a new equation. For more
information, see page .You can also browse other notebooks and regression equation
libraries for other equations. For more information, see page 713.
Note: SigmaPlot remembers the equation for the next time you open the Regression
Wizard.
If the Finish button is available, you can click it to complete your regression. If it is not
available, or if you want to further specify your results, click Next.
If the Finish button is available, you can click it to complete your regression. If it is not
available, or if you want to further specify your results, click Next. For more information,
see page .

[Link] Selecting the Variables to Fit

1. Click Next to open the Variables panel. From here, you can select or re-select your
variables.
2. If you pick variables from a worksheet column, you can also set the data format. For more
information, see page [Link] you have selected your variables, you can either click
Finish, or click Nextto view the Initial Results.

[Link] Viewing Fit Results

The fit results also appear if you receive a warning or error message about your fit. If you wish
to modify the remainder of the results that are automatically saved, click Next. Otherwise,
click Finish. The subsequent panels provide options for the output data.

[Link] Setting Numeric Output Options

Use the Regression Wizard - Numeric Output Options panel to:

• Decide which results are saved to the worksheet.
• Generate a text report of the regression. For more information, see page .
• Save a copy of the regression equation to the notebook.

1. Select which results you want to keep from the Results list. These settings are
remembered between regression sessions.
2. To set the options for the report, click Report.
3. To set the options for the report, click Report.
4. To set the options for the report, click [Link] more information, see page .
5. Click Next to set the graph options. For more information, see page .
6. Click Finish. A nonlinear regression report appears.

[Link] Setting Graph Options

This panel is only available if your fit equation has at most two independent variables.

629
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

1. If you selected your variables from a graph, select Add curve to to automatically add
the equation curve to that graph.

You can also plot the equation on any other graph on that page by selecting one from
the drop-down list.
2. Select Create new graph to create a new graph of the original data and fitted curve.

Figure 15.3 Selecting the results to graph. These settings are retained between
sessions.

3. Select Add to graph to create a plot of the regression equation for the graph specified
by the drop-down list. This option on appears if you ran the regression using a graph
curve as a data source.
4. Select 95% Confidence and prediction bands to display confidence and prediction
bands on the graph.

Note: This option only appears if you select either Create new graph or Add to graph.

5. Select Extend fit to axes to extend the equation curve to intersect the Y-axis.

6. Select Add equation to graph title to insert the equation of the curve fit under the title of
the graph.

7. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

Click Next only if you want to select the specific columns used to contain the data for
the fitted curve.
Click Next only if you want to select the specific columns used to contain the data for the
fitted curve. For more information, see page .

630
 [Link] Selecting Columns for Graph Data

[Link] Selecting Columns for Graph Data

1. To select the specific columns to use for the plotted results, click the columns in the
worksheet where you want the results to always appear.

Tip: Remember, these settings are reused each time you perform a regression and
overwrite data if it exists in these columns in subsequent worksheets. To avoid overwriting
data, use First Empty to place the fitted curve results in empty columns.

Figure 15.4 Selecting the graph results columns. These settings are retained
between sessions.

2. Click Finish.

[Link] Finishing the Regression

After clicking Finish, all your results are displayed in the worksheet, report, and graph.
The initial defaults are to save parameter and computed dependent variable values to the
worksheet, to create a statistical report, and to graph the results.

1. To change the results that are saved, click Next to go through the entire wizard,
changing your settings as desired.

15.1.5 Setting Nonlinear Regression Report Options

Use the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box to:
• Set assumption checking options. For more information, see page .
• Specify the residuals to display and save them to the worksheet. For more information,
see page .

631
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

• Display confidence and prediction intervals and save them to the worksheet. For more
information, see page .
• Display the PRESS Prediction Factor. For more information, see page .
• Specify tests to identify outlying or influential data points. For more information,
see page .
• Display power. For more information, see page .
Note: To open the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box, click Report on
the Regression Wizard - Numeric Output Options panel.

[Link] Assumption Checking

Select the Assumption Checking tab from the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression
to view the Normality, Constant Variance, and Durbin-Watson options. These options test
your data for its suitability for regression analysis by checking three assumptions that a linear
regression makes about the data. A nonlinear regression assumes:
• That the source population is normally distributed about the regression.
• The variance of the dependent variable in the source population is constant regardless of
the value of the independent variable(s).
• That the residuals are independent of each other.
All assumption checking options are selected by default. Only disable these options if you are
certain that the data was sampled from normal populations with constant variance and that
the residuals are independent of each other.
Normality Testing. SigmaPlot uses the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test to test for a normally
distributed population.
Constant Variance Testing. SigmaPlot tests for constant variance by computing the
Spearman rank correlation between the absolute values of the residuals and the observed
value of the dependent variable. When this correlation is significant, the constant variance
assumption may be violated, and you should consider trying a different model (i.e., one that
more closely follows the pattern of the data), or transforming one or more of the independent
variables to stabilize the variance.
P Values for Normality and Constant Variance. The P value determines the probability of
being incorrect in concluding that the data is not normally distributed (P value is the risk of
falsely rejecting the null hypothesis that the data is normally distributed). If the P computed by
the test is greater than the P set here, the test passes.
To require a stricter adherence to normality and/or constant variance, increase the P
value. Because the parametric statistical methods are relatively robust in terms of detecting
violations of the assumptions, the suggested value in SigmaPlot is 0.05. Larger values of P
(for example, 0.10) require less evidence to conclude that the residuals are not normally
distributed or the constant variance assumption is violated.
To relax the requirement of normality and/or constant variance, decrease P. Requiring
smaller values of P to reject the normality assumption means that you are willing to accept
greater deviations from the theoretical normal distribution before you flag the data as
non-normal. For example, a P value of 0.01 for the normality test requires greater deviations
from normality to flag the data as non-normal than a value of 0.05.
Note: Although the assumption tests are robust in detecting data from populations that are
non-normal or with non-constant variances, there are extreme conditions of data distribution

632
 [Link] Residuals

that these tests cannot detect. However, these conditions should be easily detected by visually
examining the data without resorting to the automatic assumption tests.
Durbin-Watson Statistic. SigmaPlot uses the Durbin-Watson statistic to test residuals
for their independence of each other. The Durbin-Watson statistic is a measure of serial
correlation between the residuals. The residuals are often correlated when the independent
variable is time, and the deviation between the observation and the regression line at one
time are related to the deviation at the previous time. If the residuals are not correlated, the
Durbin-Watson statistic will be 2.
Difference from 2 Value. Enter the acceptable deviation from 2.0 that you consider as
evidence of a serial correlation in the Difference for 2.0 box. If the computed Durbin-Watson
statistic deviates from 2.0 more than the entered value, SigmaPlot warns you that the residuals
may not be independent. The suggested deviation value is 0.50, i.e., Durbin-Watson Statistic
values greater than 2.5 or less than 1.5 flag the residuals as correlated.
To require a stricter adherence to independence, decrease the acceptable difference from
2.0.
To relax the requirement of independence, increase the acceptable difference from 2.0.

[Link] Residuals

Click the Residuals tab in the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box to
view the Predicted Values, Raw, Standardized, Studentized, Studentized Deleted, and Report
Flagged Values Only options.
Studentized Residuals. Studentized residuals scale the standardized residuals by taking
into account the greater precision of the regression line near the middle of the data versus
the extremes. The Studentized residuals tend to be distributed according to the Student t
distribution, so the t distribution can be used to define "large" values of the Studentized
residuals. SigmaPlot automatically flags data points with "large" values of the Studentized
residuals, i.e., outlying data points; the suggested data points flagged lie outside the 95%
confidence interval for the regression population.
To include studentized residuals in the report, make sure this check box is selected. Click the
selected check box if you do not want to include studentized residuals in the worksheet.
Studentized Deleted Residuals. Studentized deleted residuals are similar to the Studentized
residual, except that the residual values are obtained by computing the regression equation
without using the data point in question.
To include Studentized deleted residuals in the report, make sure this check box is selected.
Click the selected check box if you do not want to include studentized deleted residuals in
the worksheet.
SigmaPlot can automatically flag data points with "large" values of the studentized deleted
residual, i.e., outlying data points; the suggested data points flagged lie outside the 95%
confidence interval for the regression population.
Note: Both Studentized and Studentized deleted residuals use the same confidence interval
setting to determine outlying points.
Raw Residuals. The raw residuals are the differences between the predicted and observed
values of the dependent variables. To include raw residuals in the report, make sure this check
box is selected. Click the selected check box if you do not want to include raw residuals in
the worksheet.

633
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To assign the raw residuals to a worksheet column, select the number of the desired column
from the corresponding drop-down list. If you select none from the drop-down list and the Raw
check box is selected, the values appear in the report but are not assigned to the worksheet.
Predicted Values. Use this option to calculate the predicted value of the dependent variable
for each observed value of the independent variable(s), then save the results to the worksheet.
Click the selected check box if you do not want to include raw residuals in the worksheet.
To assign predicted values to a worksheet column, select the worksheet column you want to
save the predicted values to from the corresponding drop-down list. If you select none and the
Predicted Values check box is selected, the values appear in the report but are not assigned to
the worksheet.
Standardized Residuals. The standardized residual is the residual divided by the standard
error of the estimate. The standard error of the residuals is essentially the standard deviation
of the residuals, and is a measure of variability around the regression line. To include
standardized residuals in the report, make sure this check box is selected. Click the selected
check box if you do not want to include raw residuals in the worksheet.
Flag Values >. SigmaPlot automatically flags data points lying outside of the confidence
interval specified in the corresponding box. These data points are considered to have "large"
standardized residuals, i.e., outlying data points. You can change which data points are flagged
by editing the value in the Flag Values > edit box. The suggested residual value is 2.5.
Report Flagged Values Only. To include only the flagged standardized and Studentized
deleted residuals in the report, make sure the Report Flagged Values Only check box is
selected. Clear this option to include all standardized and Studentized residuals in the report.

[Link] More Statistics

Click the More Statistics tab in the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box to
view options for Confidence and Prediction Intervals and PRESS Prediction Error.
Confidence Intervals. You can set the confidence interval for the population, regression, or
both and then save them to the worksheet.
• Prediction Interval. The confidence interval for the population gives the range of values
that define the region that contains the population from which the observations were drawn.
To include confidence intervals for the population in the report, make sure the Population
check box is selected. Click the selected check box if you do not want to include the
confidence intervals for the population in the report.
• Confidence Interval. The confidence interval for the regression line gives the range of
values that defines the region containing the true mean relationship between the dependent
and independent variables, with the specified level of confidence.
To include confidence intervals for the regression in the report, make sure the Regression
check box is selected, then specify a confidence level by entering a value in the percentage
box. The confidence level can be any value from 1 to 99. The suggested confidence level for
all intervals is 95%.
Click the selected check box if you do not want to include the confidence intervals for the
population in the report. Click the selected check box if you do not want to include the
confidence intervals for the population in the report.
• Saving Confidence Intervals to the Worksheet. To save the confidence intervals to the
worksheet, select the column number of the first column you want to save the intervals
to from the Starting in Column drop-down list. The selected intervals are saved to the

634
 [Link] Other Diagnostics

worksheet starting with the specified column and continuing with successive columns in
the worksheet.
PRESS Prediction Error. The PRESS Prediction Error is a measure of how well the
regression equation fits the data. Leave this check box selected to evaluate the fit of the
equation using the PRESS statistic. Click the selected check box if you do not want to include
the PRESS statistic in the report.

[Link] Other Diagnostics

Click the Other Diagnostics tab in the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box
to view options Influence, DFFITS, leverage, Cook’s Distance and power.
Influence. Influence options automatically detect instances of influential data points. Most
influential points are data points which are outliers, that is, they do not do not "line up" with
the rest of the data points. These points can have a potentially disproportionately strong
influence on the calculation of the regression line. You can use several influence tests to
identify and quantify influential points.
• DFFITS. DFFITS is the number of estimated standard errors that the predicted value
changes for the ith data point when it is removed from the data set. It is another measure of
the influence of a data point on the prediction used to compute the regression coefficients.
Predicted values that change by more than two standard errors when the data point is removed
are considered to be influential.
Select DFFITS to compute this value for all points and flag influential points, i.e. those
with DFFITS greater than the value specified in the Flag Values > edit box. The suggested
value is 2.0 standard errors, which indicates that the point has a strong influence on the data.
To avoid flagging more influential points, increase this value; to flag less influential points,
decrease this value.
• Leverage. Leverage is used to identify the potential influence of a point on the results of the
regression equation. Leverage depends only on the value of the independent variable(s).
Observations with high leverage tend to be at the extremes of the independent variables,
where small changes in the independent variables can have large effects on the predicted
values of the dependent variable.
Select Leverage to compute the leverage for each point and automatically flag potentially
influential points, i.e., those points that could have leverages greater than the specified value
times the expected leverage. The suggested value is 2.0 times the expected leverage for the
regression. To avoid flagging more potentially influential points, increase this value; to flag
points with less potential influence, lower this value.
• Cook’s Distance. Cook’s distance is a measure of how great an effect each point has on
the estimates of the parameters in the regression equation. Cook’s distance assesses how
much the values of the regression coefficients change if a point is deleted from the analysis.
Cook’s distance depends on both the values of the independent and dependent variables.
Select Cook’s Distance to compute this value for all points and flag influential points, i.e.,
those with a Cook’s distance greater than the specified value. The suggested value is 4.0.
Cook’s distances above 1 indicate that a point is possibly influential. Cook’s distances
exceeding 4 indicate that the point has a major effect on the values of the parameter estimates.
To avoid flagging more influential points, increase this value: to flag less influential points,
lower this value.
Power. The power of a regression is the power to detect the observed relationship in the data.
The alpha is the acceptable probability of incorrectly concluding there is a relationship.

635
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Select Power to compute the power for the linear regression data. Change the alpha value
by editing the number in the Alpha Value edit box. The suggested value is α = 0.05. This
indicates that a one in twenty chance of error is acceptable, or that you are willing to conclude
there is a significant relationship when P < 0.05.
Report Flagged Values Only. To only include only the influential points flagged by the
influential point tests in the report, select Report Flagged Values Only. Clear this option to
include all influential points in the report.

15.1.6 Running a Regression From a Notebook

Because regression equations can be treated like any other notebook item, you can select and
open regression equations directly from a notebook. This is particularly convenient if you
have created or stored equations along with the rest of your graphs and data.

1. In the Notebook Manager, view the notebook with the equation you want to use, and
double-click the equation. The Regression Wizard appears with the equation selected.
2. Select the variables as prompted by clicking a curve or worksheet columns. Note that
at this point you can open and view any notebook, worksheet or page you would like,
and pick your variables from that source.

636
 15.1.7 Creating New Regression Equations

Figure 15.5 Selecting a regression equation from a Notebook to Start the

Regression Wizard

3. Click Finish to complete the regression, or click Next if you want to view initial results
or change your results options.

4. Click Finish to complete the regression, or click Next if you want to view initial results
or change your results options.

15.1.7 Creating New Regression Equations

You can create new equations by using the Function dialog box. Here you can set the
equations, variables, initial parameters, constraints and other options. You can create new
regression equations two different ways:
• On either the Regression Wizard, the Dynamic Fit Wizard, or the Global Fit Wizard,
click New or Edit Code, or
• Right-click in a notebook section, and on the shortcut menu, click Equation.
When you create a new equation, the Function dialog box appears with blank headings.

637
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

15.1.8 Viewing and Editing Code

To view the code for the current equation document, clickEdit Code in the Regression
Wizard, Dynamic Fit Wizard, or Global Fit Wizard.
You can click the Edit Code button from the equation or variables panels. The Edit Code
button opens the Function dialog box. All settings for the equation are displayed.

Figure 15.6 Viewing the code for a built-in equation in the Function dialog box.

Note: You cannot edit the Equations, Parameters, and Variables for built-in SigmaPlot
equations; however, you can edit and save built-in equations as new equations. Click Add As,
add the equation to the desired section, and then edit the Equations, Variables and Parameters
as desired.
You can also copy and paste equations from notebook to notebook like any other notebook
item. You can also edit pasted built-in equations.

15.1.9 Saving Regression Equation Changes

When you edit an equation using the Equation Options or Function dialog boxes, or when
you add an equation, all changes are updated to the equation in the library or notebook.
However, just like other notebook items, these changes are not saved to the file until the
notebook is saved. Changes made to regression libraries are automatically saved when you
close the Regression, Dynamic Fit, or Global Fit Wizard.
You can also save changes to regression libraries using the Save or Save As buttons in the
Regression Wizard. This saves the current regression library notebook to disk. Save As
allows you to save the regression library to a new file.

638
 15.1.10 Variable Options

If you have a regression library open as a notebook, you can also save changes by saving the
notebook. To save the notebook, press Ctrl + S.

15.1.10 Variable Options

Data Format Options. If you use data columns from the worksheet, you can specify the data
format to use in the variables panel of the Regression Wizard. By default, the data format
when assigning columns from the worksheet is XY Pair.
The data format options are:
• XY pair. Select an x and a y variable.
• Y only. Select only a y variable column.
• XY column means. Pick one x column, then multiple y columns; the y columns will be
graphed as means.
• Y column means only. Pick multiple y columns; the columns will be graphed as means.
• From Code. Uses the current settings as shown when editing code.
• XY Replicate. Select X and multiple Y columns. Rows of the Y columns are replicate
measurements.
• Y Replicates. Select multiple Y columns. Rows of the Y column are replicate
measurements.
When you use an existing graph as your data source, the Regression Wizard displays a format
reflecting the data format of the graph. You cannot change this format unless you switch to
using the worksheet as your data source, or run the regression directly from editing the code.

[Link] Multiple Independent Variables

Although the Standard Regression Library only supports up to two independent variables, the
curve fitter can accept up to ten. To use models that have more than two independent variables,
simply create or open a model with the desired equation and variables. The Regression Wizard
prompts to select columns for each defined variable

15.1.11 Equation Options

If the curve fitter fails to find a good fit for the curve, you can try changing the equation
options to see if you can improve the fit. To set options for a regression, click the Options
button in the Variables panel of the Regression, Dynamic Fit, or Global Fit Wizard.
Note: If you want to edit the settings in the equation document manually, click the Edit
Code button.
Use the Equation Optionsdialog box to:
• Change initial parameter values.
• Add or change constraints.
• Change constant values.
• Use weighted fitting, if it is available.
• Change convergence options.

639
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Parameters

The default setting for the initial parameter value is shown Automatic. The Automatic
setting available with the built-in SigmaPlot equations uses algorithms that analyze your data
to predict initial parameter estimates. These do not work in all cases, so you may need to
enter a different value. Just click the parameter you want to change, and make the change
in the edit box.
The values that appear in the Initial Parameters drop-down list were previously entered as
parameter values. Any parameter values you enter will also be retained between sessions.

Figure 15.7 Selecting Numeric Initial Parameters in the Equation Options dialog
box.

Parameters can be either a numeric value or a function. The value of the parameter should
approximate the final result, in order to help the curve fitter reach a valid result, but this
depends on the complexity and number of parameters of the equation. Often an initial
parameter nowhere near the final result will still work. However, a good initial estimate helps
guarantee better and faster results.

[Link] Constraints

Use constraints to set limits and conditions for parameter values, restricting the regression
search range and improving curve fitter speed and accuracy. Constraints are often unnecessary,
but should always be used whenever appropriate for your model.
Constraints are also useful to prevent the curve fitter from testing unrealistic parameter
values. For example, if you know that a parameter should always be negative, you can enter a
constraint defining the parameter to be always less than 0.

640
 [Link] Entering Parameter Constraints

You can also use constraints if the regression produces parameter values that you know are
inaccurate. Simply click Back from the initial results panel, click the Options button, and
enter constraint(s) that prevent the wrong parameter results.
Note that a parameter equals a constraint value at the completion of the fit, the constraint
is called active. You can view these constraints from the initial results panel by clicking
View Constraints.

[Link] Entering Parameter Constraints

To enter constraints, click the Constraints edit box, and type the desired constraint(s), using
the transform language operators.
A constraint must be a linear equation of the equation parameters, using an equal (=) or
inequality (< or >) sign. For example, you could enter the following constraints for the
parameters a, b, c, d, and e:
a<1
10*b+c/20>2
d-e=15
a>b+c+d+e
However, the constraint
a*x<1
is illegal, since x is a variable, not a parameter, and the constraints
b+ c^2> 4
d*e=1
are illegal because they are nonlinear. Inconsistent and conflicting constraints are
automatically rejected by the curve fitter.

[Link] Defining Constants

Constants that appear in the Constants edit window have been previously defined as a
constant, rather than a parameter to be determined by the regression. To edit a constant value,

641
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

or define new constant values, click Edit Code on the Regression Wizard, Dynamic Fit
Wizard or Global Fit Wizarddialog box.
Constants are defined when an equation is created. Currently, you can only define new
constants by editing the regression equation code. However, you can redefine any existing
constants.
Change only the value of the constant. Do not add new constant values; constant variables
must exist in the equation and not be defined already under variables or parameters, so they
can only be defined within the code of an equation.

[Link] Fit with Weight

You can select from any of the weights listed. Some built-in equations have some predefined
values, although most do not. If no weighting options are available for your equation, only
the None option will be available.
Weighting options appear in the Fit with Weight drop-down list. By default, the weighting
applied to the fit is (none). To apply a different weighting setting, select a weighting option
from the drop-down list.

Weight variables must be defined by editing the regression code.

[Link] Iterations

The Iterations option sets the maximum number of repeated fit attempts before failure. Each
iteration of the curve fitter is an attempt to find the parameters that best fit the model. With
each iteration, the curve fitter varies the parameter values incrementally, and tests the fit
of that model to your data. When the improvement in the fit from one iteration to the next
is smaller than the setting determined by the Tolerance option, the curve fitter stops and
displays the results.

642
 [Link] Step Size

Figure 15.8 Changing iterations

Change the number of iterations to speed up or improve the regression process, especially
if a complex fit requires more than the default of 100 iterations. You can also reduce the
number of iterations if you want to end a fit to check on its interim progress before it takes
too many iterations.
Setting Iterations to 0 will simply evaluate the dependent variable of the fit equation using
the initial parameter values.
To change the maximum number of iterations, enter the number of iterations to use, or select a
previously used number of iterations from the drop down list.
When the maximum number of iterations is reached, the regression stops and the current
results are displayed in the initial parameters panel. If you want to continue with more
iterations, you can click More Iterations on the Regression Wizard.

[Link] Step Size

Step size, or the limit of the initial change in parameter values used by the curve fitter as it
tries, or iterates, different parameter values, is a setting that can be changed to speed up or
improve the regression process.

643
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

A large step size can cause the curve fitter to wander too far away from the best parameter
values, whereas a step size that is too small will result in slow convergence to the best
parameters.
For most functions, the default step size value is 1. To change the Step Size value, type
the desired step size in the Step Size edit box, or select a previously defined value from
the drop-down list.

[Link] Tolerance
The Tolerance option controls the condition that must be met in order to end the regression
process. When the absolute value of the difference between the sum of squares of the residuals
(square root of the sum of squares of the residuals), from one iteration to the next, is less
than the tolerance value, the iteration stops.
When the tolerance condition has been met, a minimum of the sum of squares has usually
been found, which indicates a correct solution. However, local minima in the sum of squares
can also cause the curve fitter to find an incorrect solution.
Decreasing the value of the tolerance makes the requirement for finding an acceptable solution
more strict; increasing the tolerance relaxes this requirement.
The default tolerance setting is1e-10. To change the tolerance value, type the desired value in
the Tolerance edit box, or select a previously defined value from the drop-down list.

15.1.12 Watching The Fit Progress

During the regression process, the Regression fit progress dialog box displays the number of
iterations completed, the norm value for each iteration, and a progress bar indicating the
percent complete of the maximum iterations.

[Link] Cancelling a Regression

To stop a regression while it is running, click Cancel. The initial results appear, displaying the
most recent parameter values, and the sum of square value. You can continue the regression
process by clicking More Iterations on the Regression Wizard.

644
 15.1.13 Interpreting Fit Results

15.1.13 Interpreting Fit Results

When you click Next from the variables panel, the regression process completes by either
converging, reaching the maximum number of iterations, or encountering an error. When
any of these conditions are met, or whenever there is an error or warning, the initial results
panel is displayed.

[Link] Completion Status Messages

A message displaying the condition under which the regression completed is displayed in the
upper left corner of the Regression Wizard. If the regression completed with convergence, the
message:
Converged, tolerance satisfied
is displayed.
Otherwise, another status or error message is displayed.

[Link] Rsqr
R2 is the coefficient of determination, the most common measure of how well a regression
model describes the data. The closer R2 is to one, the better the independent variables predict
the dependent variable.
R2 equals 0 when the values of the independent variable does not allow any prediction of the
dependent variables, and equals 1 when you can perfectly predict the dependent variables from
the independent variables.

[Link] Fit Results

The initial results are displayed in the results window, in five columns.
• Parameter. The parameter names are shown in the first column. These parameters are
derived from the original equation.
• Value. The calculated parameter values are shown in the second column.
• StdErr. The asymptotic standard errors of the parameters are displayed in column three.
The standard errors and coefficients of variation can be used as a gauge of the fitted curve’s
accuracy.
• CV(%). The parameter coefficients of variation, expressed as a percentage, are displayed in
column four. This is the normalized version of the standard errors:

CV = standard error × 100 /param eter value

The coefficient of variation values and standard errors can be used as a gauge of the accuracy
of the fitted curve.
• Dependency. The last column shows the parameter dependencies. The dependence of a
parameter is defined to be

variance of the param eter,otherparam etersconstant

dependence = 1
variance of the param eter,other param eterschanging

645
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Parameters with dependencies near 1 are strongly dependent on one another. This may indicate
that the equation(s) used are too complicated and over-parameterized—too many parameters
are being used, and using a model with fewer parameters may be better.

[Link] Changing the Regression Equation or Variables

To go back to any of the previous panels, click Back. This is especially useful if you need
to change the model (equation) used, or if you need to modify any of the equation options
and try the curve fit again.

[Link] More Iterations

If the maximum number of iterations was reached before convergence, or if you canceled the
regression, the More Iterations button is available. Click More Iterations to continue for as
many iterations as specified by the Iterations option, or until completion of the regression.

[Link] Checking Use of Constraints

If you used parameter constraints, you can determine if the regression results involved any
constraints by clicking View Constraints. This button is dimmed if no constraints were
entered.

The Constraints dialog box displays all constraints, and flags the ones encountered with
the word (active). A constraint is flagged as active when the parameter values lie on the
constraint boundary. For example, the constraint a+b<1 is active when the parameters satisfy
the condition a+b=1, but if a+b<1, the constraint is inactive.
Note that an equality constraint is always active (unless there are constraint inconsistencies).

[Link] Quitting the Regression

If the regression results are unsatisfactory, you can click Back and change the equation or
other options, or you can select Cancel to close the wizard.
If you want to keep your results, click Finish. You can also click Next to specify which
results you want to keep.

15.1.14 Saving Regression Results

Regression reports and other data results are saved using the Regression Wizard - Numeric
Options panel, which appears after the Fit Results panel. Settings made here are retained
from session to session. The type of data results that can be saved to the current notebook
for each regression procedure are:
• The function results, saved to the worksheet.

646
 [Link] Saving the Results using Default Settings

• A statistical report.
• A copy of the regression equation.

[Link] Saving the Results using Default Settings

To save the regression results using the default save setting, click Finish at any point the
Finish button is active. If you want to see or modify the results that are produced, you can
use the Next button to advance to the results options panel.

[Link] Saving Results to the Worksheet

You can save function results to the current worksheet. These are:
• Equation parameter values.
• Predicted values of the dependent variable for each independent variable value.
• Residuals, or the difference between the predicted and observed dependent variable values.
To place any of these values in a column in the worksheet, simply check the results you want
to keep. If you want to set a specific column in which to always place these values, you can
click a column on a worksheet for each result.

Figure 15.9 Generating and Saving a Report from the Regression Wizard

Create Report. Select to save regression reports to the current notebook section.
Adding Equation to Notebook. To add the current regression equation to the current
notebook, select Add Equation to Notebook. If this option is selected, a copy of the equation
is added to the current section of your notebook.

15.1.15 Graphing Regression Equations

SigmaPlot graphs the results of a regression as a fitted curve and creates a curve or graph by
default. If you want to disable graphed results, you can change the options in the Regression
Wizard - Graph Options panel. Note that SigmaPlot retains these settings from session
to session.

647
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

From the graph panel, you can choose to plot the results either by:
• Adding a plot to an existing graph. This option is only available if the fitted variables were
assigned by selecting them from a graph.
• Creating a new graph of the original data and fitted curve.
To add a plot to an existing graph, select Add Curve to, then select the graph to which you
want to add a plot from the drop-down list. The drop-down list includes all the graphs on the
current page. If there is no existing graph, this option is dimmed.
If you want to specify the columns used to plot the fitted curve, click Next. Otherwise, the
data is placed in the first available columns.

Figure 15.10 A Fitted Curve Added to the Graph

To create a new graph, select Create New Graph. Click Finish to create a new notebook
section containing a worksheet of the plotted data and graph page.

[Link] Data Plotted for Regression Curves

You can specify the worksheet columns used to add a fitted curve to an existing graph, or to
create a new graph, by clicking Next from the graph panel.

648
 15.1.16 Confidence and Prediction Bands

Figure 15.11 The Regression Wizard Pick Output Dialog Box

From this panel you can select worksheet columns for X, Y, (and Z data for 3D graphs) by
clicking worksheet columns. The default of First Empty places the results in the first available
column after the last filled cell.

15.1.16 Confidence and Prediction Bands

The term confidence band refers to the region of uncertainties in the predicted values over a
range of values for the independent variable. The term prediction band refers to the region of
uncertainties in predicting the response for a single additional observation at each point within
a range of independent variable values. Prediction bands are always wider than confidence
bands. Each band appears on the graph as a multiple line plot with two curves. One represents
the upper limits of the confidence intervals and the other represents the lower limits of the
confidence intervals. The independent variable values used to compute the confidence bands
are the same values used to create the fit curve.

649
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.12 A 2D Graph with Confidence and Prediction Bands

[Link] Confidence and Prediction Band Computational Formulas

Calculation of the limits of both bands is based upon a quantity that generalizes the notion of
leverage at a data point. At a given value x of the independent variable, define

c = (gradF )T·Cov·(gradF )

where gradF is the (parameter) gradient of the model F, evaluated at x and at the best-fit
parameter values, and Cov is the covariance matrix computed at the final iteration of the
regression.
After computing c, the upper and lower limits of both bands are given by:

Confidence Band = y(x)± c M S resCriticalT ([Link]% ,D F )

Prediction Band = y(x)± c + 1 M S resCriticalT ([Link]% , D F )

650
 [Link] Changing Confidence and Prediction Band Percentage Values

where y(x) is the predicted value at x, MSres MSres is the mean residual sum of squares,
[Link]% is the percent confidence level, DF is the residual degree of freedom (number
of data points - number of parameters), and CriticalT([Link]%,DF) is the inverse
T-Distribution with DF degrees of freedom evaluated 1-α/2, where α satisfies [Link]%
= 100(1-α)%.

[Link] Changing Confidence and Prediction Band Percentage Values

You add confidence and prediction bands on the Graph Options panel of the Regression
Wizard. This value should agree with any confidence interval results in a report.

Figure 15.13 Selecting to Add Confidence and Prediction Bands to a graph

While the default confidence level for confidence and prediction bands is 95%, you can change
this value in the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box.

1. Click Back if you are viewing the Regression Wizard - Graph Options dialog box
to the Numeric Output Options panel.

651
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.14 Click Report to open the Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog
box.

2. Click Report to open the Options for Nonlinear Regressions dialog box. Here is where
you control what you would like to appear in the report.

Figure 15.15 Selecting the Report Options

3. Click the More Statistics tab.

4. Under Confidence Intervals, select the Prediction and Confidence intervals you would
like to appear in the report.
5. Set the percentage for the confidence level in the Confidence Level box.
6. In the Starting in Column drop-down list, select First Available Column or select
(None) if you don’t want the confidence and prediction intervals to appear in the
worksheet,
7. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.

652
 [Link] Changing Confidence and Prediction Band Percentage Values

8. Click Next in the Regression Wizard.

The Regression Wizard - Graph Options panel appears with the new percentage for the
confidence and prediction bands.

Figure 15.16 Selecting Confidence and Prediction Bands

When you click Finish in the Regression Wizard, the confidence and prediction bands
appear on the graph. If you selected First Available Column in the More Statistics tab
of the Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box, beginning in the first empty
column, four columns of graph data appear in the worksheet which represent the upper
and lower limits of the confidence and prediction bands.

Figure 15.17 Worksheet Columns Representing Data for the Confidence and
Prediction Bands

These results also appear in the report.

653
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

15.1.17 Interpreting Regression Reports

The Regression Wizard can automatically generate reports for each curve fitting session. The
statistical results are displayed to four decimal places of precision by default.
Reports are displayed using the SigmaPlot report editor. About the Report EditorFor more
information, see page 409.

[Link] Equation Code

This is a printout of the code used to generate the regression results.

Figure 15.18 Regression Report

[Link] R and R Squared

The multiple correlation coefficient, R, and the coefficient of determination, R2, are both
measures of how well the regression model describes the data. R values near 1 indicate that
the equation is a good description of the relation between the independent and dependent
variables. R equals 0 when the values of the independent variable does not allow any

654
 [Link] Adjusted R Squared

prediction of the dependent variables, and equals 1 when you can perfectly predict the
dependent variables from the independent variables R2

[Link] Adjusted R Squared

The adjusted R2, R2adj, is also a measure of how well the regression model describes the data,
but takes into account the number of independent variables, which reflects the degrees of
freedom. Larger R2adj values (nearer to 1) indicate that the equation is a good description of
the relation between the independent and dependent variables.

[Link] Standard Error of the Estimate

The standard error of the estimate Sy|x is a measure of regression plane of the actual variability
about the regression plane of the underlying population. The underlying population generally
falls within about two standard errors of the observed sample.

[Link] Statistical Summary Table

The standard error, t and P values are approximations computed at the final iteration of the
regression.
Estimate. The value for the constant and coefficients of the independent variables for the
regression model are listed.
Standard Error. The asymptotic standard errors measure the uncertainties in the estimates of
the regression coefficients (analogous to the standard error of the mean). The true regression
coefficients of the underlying population are generally within about two standard errors of
the predicted coefficients. Large standard errors may indicate multicollinearity. The default
procedure for computing standard errors is based on whether or not the regression problem is
weighted. In an unweighted problem, the standard error for each parameter includes a factor
that estimates the standard deviation of the observed data. In this case, it is assumed that the
errors for all data points have the same variance.
In a weighted problem, there are two options for computing standard errors. One option
includes the factor that estimates the standard deviation of the observed data. This option is
called reduced chi-square. The other option omits this factor in the computation. To select
the option for standard errors, go to the Equation Options dialog box. For more information,
see page .
t statistic. The t statistic tests the null hypothesis that the coefficient of the independent
variable is zero, that is, the independent variable does not contribute to predicting the
dependent variable. t is the ratio of the regression coefficient to its standard error, or

regression coefficient
t=
standard error of regression coefficient

You can conclude from large t values that the independent variable can be used to predict the
dependent variable (for example., that the coefficient is not zero).
P value. P is the P value calculated for t. The P value is the probability of being wrong in
concluding that the coefficient is not zero (i.e., the probability of falsely rejecting the null
hypothesis, or committing a Type I error, based on t). The smaller the P value, the greater the
probability that the coefficient is not zero.

655
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Traditionally, you can conclude that the independent variable can be used to predict the
dependent variable when P < 0.05.

[Link] Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) Table

The ANOVA (analysis of variance) table lists the ANOVA statistics for the regression and the
corresponding F value for each step.
SS (Sum of Squares). The sum of squares are measures of variability of the dependent
variable.
• The sum of squares due to regression measures the difference of the regression plane from
the mean of the dependent variable.
• The residual sum of squares is a measure of the size of the residuals, which are the
differences between the observed values of the dependent variable and the values predicted
by the regression model.
DF (Degrees of Freedom). Degrees of freedom represent the number of observations and
variables in the regression equation.
• The regression degrees of freedom is a measure of the number of independent variables.
• The residual degrees of freedom is a measure of the number of observations less the number
of parameters in the equation.
MS (Mean Square). The mean square provides two estimates of the population variances.
Comparing these variance estimates is the basis of analysis of variance.
The mean square regression is a measure of the variation of the regression from the mean of
the dependent variable, or

sum of squares due to regression SS res

= = M S res
regression degrees of freedom D F res

The residual mean square is a measure of the variation of the residuals about the regression
plane, or

residualsum of squares SS res

= = M S res
residualdegrees of freedom D F res

The residual mean square is also equal to S2y|x.

F statistic
The F test statistic gauges the contribution of the independent variables in predicting the
dependent variable. It is the ratio

regression variation from the dependentvariable m ean M S reg

= =F
residualvariation aboutthe regression M S res

656
 [Link] PRESS Statistic

If F is a large number, you can conclude that the independent variables contribute to the
prediction of the dependent variable (i.e., at least one of the coefficients is different from
zero, and the unexplained variability is smaller than what is expected from random sampling
variability of the dependent variable about its mean). If the F ratio is around 1, you can
conclude that there is no association between the variables (i.e., the data is consistent with the
null hypothesis that all the samples are just randomly distributed).
P value. The P value is the probability of being wrong in concluding that there is an
association between the dependent and independent variables (i.e., the probability of falsely
rejecting the null hypothesis, or committing a Type I error, based on F ). The smaller the P
value, the greater the probability that there is an association.
Traditionally, you can conclude that the independent variable can be used to predict the
dependent variable when P < 0.05.

[Link] PRESS Statistic

PRESS, the Predicted Residual Error Sum of Squares, is a gauge of how well a regression
model predicts new data. The smaller the PRESS statistic, the better the predictive ability of
the model.
The PRESS statistic is computed by summing the squares of the prediction errors (the
differences between predicted and observed values) for each observation, with that point
deleted from the computation of the regression equation.

[Link] Durbin-Watson Statistic

The Durbin-Watson statistic is a measure of correlation between the residuals. If the residuals
are not correlated, the Durbin-Watson statistic will be 2; the more this value differs from 2,
the greater the likelihood that the residuals are correlated.
Regression assumes that the residuals are independent of each other; the Durbin-Watson test is
used to check this assumption. If the Durbin-Watson value deviates from 2 by more than 0.50,
a warning appears in the report, i.e., if the Durbin-Watson statistic is below 1.50 or above 2.50.

[Link] Normality Test

The normality test results display whether the data passed or failed the test of the assumption
that the source population is normally distributed around the regression, and the P value
calculated by the test. All regressions assume a source population to be normally distributed
about the regression line. If the normality test fails, a warning appears in the report.
Failure of the normality test can indicate the presence of outlying influential points or an
incorrect regression model.

657
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.19 Regression Report Showing Normality Test Results

[Link] Constant Variance Test

The constant variance test results displays whether or not the data passed or failed the test of
the assumption that the variance of the dependent variable in the source population is constant
regardless of the value of the independent variable, and the P value calculated by the test.
When the constant variance test fails, a warning appears in the report.
If the constant variance test fails, you should consider trying a different model (for example,
one that more closely follows the pattern of the data) using a weighted regression, or
transforming the independent variable to stabilize the variance and obtain more accurate
estimates of the parameters in the regression equation.
If you perform a weighted regression, the normality and equal variance tests use the weighted
residuals wi(yi-yi) instead of the raw residuals yi-yi.

[Link] Power
The power, or sensitivity, of a regression is the probability that the model correctly describes
the relationship of the variables, if there is a relationship.
Regression power is affected by the number of observations, the chance of erroneously
reporting a difference a (alpha), and the slope of the regression.
Alpha. Alpha (a) is the acceptable probability of incorrectly concluding that the model is
correct. An a error is also called a Type I error (a Type I error is when you reject the hypothesis
of no association when this hypothesis is true).
Smaller values of a result in stricter requirements before concluding the model is correct, but
a greater possibility of concluding the model is incorrect when it is really correct (a Type
II error). Larger values of a make it easier to conclude that the model is correct, but also
increase the risk of accepting an incorrect model (a Type I error).

[Link] Regression Diagnostics

The regression diagnostic results display the values for the predicted values, residuals, and
other diagnostic results.
Row. This is the row number of the observation.

658
 [Link] Influence Diagnostics

Predicted Values. This is the value for the dependent variable predicted by the regression
model for each observation.
Residuals. These are the unweighted raw residuals, the difference between the observed and
predicted values for the dependent variables.
Standardized Residuals. The standardized residual is the raw residual divided by the
standard error of the estimate Sy|x.
If the residuals are normally distributed about the regression, about 66% of the standardized
residuals have values between -1 and +1, and about 95% of the standardized residuals have
values between -2 and +2. A larger standardized residual indicates that the point is far from
the regression. Values less than -2.5 or larger than 2.5 may indicate outlying cases.
Studentized Residuals. The Studentized residual is a standardized residual that also takes into
account the greater confidence of the predicted values of the dependent variable in the middle
of the data set. By weighting the values of the residuals of the extreme data points (those with
the lowest and highest independent variable values), the Studentized residual is more sensitive
than the standardized residual in detecting outliers. This residual is also known as the internally
Studentized residual, because the standard error of the estimate is computed using all data.
Studentized Deleted Residuals. The Studentized deleted residual, or externally Studentized
residual, is a Studentized residual which uses the standard error of the estimate Sy|x(-i),
computed after deleting the data point associated with the residual. This reflects the greater
effect of outlying points by deleting the data point from the variance computation.
The Studentized deleted residual is more sensitive than the Studentized residual in detecting
outliers, since the Studentized deleted residual results in much larger values for outliers than
the Studentized residual.

[Link] Influence Diagnostics

Row. This is the row number of the observation.

Cook’s Distance. Cook’s distance is a measure of how great an effect each point has on the
estimates of the parameters in the regression equation. It is a measure of how much the values
of the regression coefficients would change if that point is deleted from the analysis.
Values above 1 indicate that a point is possibly influential. Cook’s distances exceeding 4
indicate that the point has a major effect on the values of the parameter estimates.
Leverage. Leverage values identify potentially influential points. Observations with leverages
two times greater than the expected leverages are potentially influential points.
The expected leverage of a data point is p/n where there are p parameters and n data points.
Because leverage is calculated using only the dependent variable, high leverage points tend
to be at the extremes of the independent variables (large and small values), where small
changes in the independent variables can have large effects on the predicted values of the
dependent variable.
DFFITS. The DFFITSi statistic is a measure of the influence of a data point on regression
prediction. It is the number of estimated standard errors the predicted value for a data
point changes when the observed value is removed from the data set before computing the
regression coefficients. Predicted values that change by more than 2.0 standard errors when
the data point is removed are potentially influential.

659
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.20 Regression Report Showing the Influence Diagnostics

[Link] Confidence and Prediction Intervals

The confidence level for both intervals has a default value of 95%. You can change it in the
Report Options for Nonlinear Regression dialog box. For more information, see page .
Confidence intervals about the predicted values define a range of values where the population
mean at the dependent variable is located with a certain probability. This probability is called
the confidence level.

Figure 15.21 The 95% Confidence Section of the Report

Row. This is the row number of the observation.

Predicted. This column shows the value for the dependent variable predicted by the regression
model for each observation.
Confidence. The confidence interval for the regression gives the range of variable values
computed for the region containing the true relationship between the dependent and
independent variables, for the specified level of confidence. The 95% Conf-L values are lower
limits and the 95% Conf-U values are the upper limits.
Prediction. The confidence interval for the population gives the range of variable values
computed for the region containing the population from which the observations were drawn,
for the specified level of confidence. The 95% Pred-L values are lower limits and the 95%
Pred-U values are the upper limits.

15.1.18 Regression Equation Libraries and Notebooks

Regression equations are stored in notebook files just as other SigmaPlot documents.
Notebooks that are used to organize and contain only regression equations are referred to as

660
 15.1.18 Regression Equation Libraries and Notebooks

libraries, and distinguished from ordinary notebooks with a file extension of .sfl. These library
notebooks can be opened and modified like any other notebook file. You can also use ordinary
SigmaPlot notebooks (.jnb) as equation libraries, as well as save any notebook as a .jfl file.
Regression equations within notebooks are indicated with a regression symbol icon that
appears next to the equation name.
The equations that appear in the Regression Wizard are read from a default regression library.
The way the equations are named and organized in the equations panel is by using the section
name as the category name, and the entry name as the equation name.

Figure 15.22 The Standard Regression Equation Library

For example, the [Link] regression library supplied with SigmaPlot has twelve
categories of built-in equations:
• Polynomial
• Peak
• Sigmoidal
• Exponential Decay
• Exponential Rise to Maximum
• Exponential Growth
• Hyperbola
• Waveform
• Power
• Rational
• Logarithm
• 3D
• Standard Curves
• Ligand Binding

661
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

These categories correspond to the section names within the [Link]. About the
Regression Equation LibraryFor more information, see page 713.
To see the library currently in use, click Back in the Regression Wizard equation panel.
Previously selected libraries and open notebooks can be selected from the Library drop-down
list.

[Link] Opening an Equation Library

You can open, view, and modify a regression equation library as you would any ordinary
notebook. To open a regression library:

1. Click the Main Button and then click Open, select *.jfl as the file type from the File
Type drop-down list, then select the library to open, or
2. Click the Open button in the Regression Wizard library panel to open the current library.
You can reach the library panel by clicking Back on the Equations panel.

You can copy, paste, rename and delete regression equations as any other notebook item.
Opening a regression equation directly from a notebook automatically launches the
Regression Wizard with the variables panel selected.

[Link] Using a Different Library for the Regression Wizard

You can also select another notebook or library as the source for the equations in the
Regression Wizard. Selecting a different equation library changes the categories and equations
listed in the Regression Wizard equations panel.
To change the library:

1. Start the Regression Wizard by pressing F5 or on the Analysis tab, in the Nonlinear
Regression group, click Regression Wizard.

2. Click Back to view the library panel.

662
 15.1.19 Curve Fitting Date And Time Data

3. To change the library, enter the new library path and name, or click Browse.
4. In the File Open dialog box, change the path and select the file to use as your regression
library. When you start the Regression Wizard next, it will continue to use the equation
library selected in the library panel.

Note: Opening a regression equation directly from a notebook does not reset the equation
library.

15.1.19 Curve Fitting Date And Time Data

You can run the Regression wizard on data plotted versus calendar times and dates. Dates
within and near the twentieth century are stored internally as very large numbers. However,
you can convert these dates to relatively small numbers by setting Day Zero to the first date
of your data, then converting the date data to numbers. After curve fitting the data, you can
switch the numbers back to dates. Setting Day ZeroFor more information, see page 233.

663
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.23 You can curve fit dates, but you must convert the dates to numbers
first. Time only data (as shown in column 1) does not require a conversion.

Note: If you have entered clock times only, then you can directly curve fit those time without
having to convert these to numbers. Time only entries assume the internal start date of 4713
B.C. (the start of the Julian calendar). However, if you have entered times using a more recent
calendar date, you must convert these times to numbers as well.

[Link] Converting Dates to Numbers

1. Click the Main Button.

2. Click Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

3. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

4. In the Options dialog box, click the Worksheet tab.

5. Select Date and Time from the Settings for list.

664
 [Link] Converting Dates to Numbers

6. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

7. Set Day Zero to be the first date of your data, or to begin very close to the starting date of
your data. You must include the year as well as month and day.
8. Click OK, then view the worksheet and select your data column.
9. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format Cells.

10. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

11. In the Format Cells dialog box, under Type, click Numeric.

665
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

12. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

13. Click OK.

Your dates are converted to numbers. These numbers should be relatively small numbers.
If the numbers are large, you did not select a Day Zero near your data starting date.
14. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

15. If the axis range of you graph is manual, convert it back to automatic. Select the axis, then
using the PrProperty Browser, change the range to Automatic.
16. Click you curve and run your regression. When you are finished, you must convert the
original and fitted curve x variable columns back to dates.

[Link] Converting Numbers Back to Dates

1. Select each column.
2. On the Worksheet tab, in the Cells group, click Format Cells.

3. In the Format Cells dialog box, under Type, click Numeric.

666
 [Link] Converting Numbers Back to Dates

The Format Cells dialog box appears.

4. In the Format Cells dialog box, click the Data tab.
5. Under Types, select Date and Time.
6. On the Date drop-down list, click a date format.

Figure 15.24 Converting Numeric Data back to Date and Time Data

7. Click OK.

When the columns are converted back to dates, the graph re-scales and you have
completed your date and time curve fit.

667
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.25 The Data and Fitted Curve X Variables Converted Back to Dates
and Graphed

15.1.20 Regression Results Messages

When the initial results of a regression are displayed, a message about the completion status
appears. Explanations of the different messages are found below.

[Link] Completion Status Messages

Converged, tolerance satisfied. This message appears when the convergence criterion, which
compares the relative change in the norm to the specified tolerance, is satisfied. Note that this
result may still be false, caused by a local minimum in the sum of squares.
Converged, zero parameter changes. The changes in all parameters between the last two
iterations are less than the computer’s precision.
Did not converge, exceeded maximum number of iterations. More iterations were required
to satisfy the convergence criteria. Select More Iterations to continue for the same number
of iterations or increase the number of iterations specified in the Options dialog box and
rerun the regression.
Did not converge, inner loop failure. There are two nested iterative loops in the Marquardt
algorithm. This diagnostic occurs after 50 sequential iterations in the inner loop. The use
of constraints may cause this to happen due to a lack of convergence. In some cases, the
parameter values obtained with constraints are still valid, in the sense that they result in good
estimates of the regression parameters.
Terminated by user. You pressed Esc, or selected the Cancel button and terminated the
regression process.

668
 [Link] Error Status Messages

Function overflow using initial parameter values. The regression iteration process could
not get started since the first function evaluation resulted in a math error. For example, if
you used f = sqrt(-a*x), and the initial a value and all x values are positive, a math error
occurs. Examine your equation, parameter values and independent variable values, and make
the appropriate changes.
Parameters may not be valid. Array ill conditioned on final iteration. During the
regression iteration process the inverse of an array (the product of the transpose of the Jacobian
matrix with itself) is required. Sometimes this array is nearly singular (has a nearly zero
determinant) for which very poor parameter estimates would be obtained.
SigmaPlot uses an estimate of the "condition" of the array (ill conditioned means nearly
singular) to generate this message (see Dongarra, J.J., Bunch, J.R., Moler, C.B., and Stewart,
G.W., Linpack User’s Guide, SIAM, Philadelphia, 1979 for the computation of condition
numbers).
Usually this message should be taken seriously, as something is usually very wrong. For
example, if an exponential underflow has occurred for all x values, part of the equation is
essentially eliminated. SigmaPlot still tries to estimate the parameters associated with this
phantom part of the equation, which can result in invalid parameter estimates.
A minority of the time the "correct," though poorly conditioned, parameters are obtained. This
situation may occur, for example, when fitting polynomial or other linear equations.
Parameters may not be valid. Array numerically singular on final iteration. This is the
limiting case of the above condition where the array cannot be inverted and the condition
number is infinite. In this case, the parameter values are not well specified and their standard
errors cannont be properly interpreted.
Parameters may not be valid. Overflow in partial derivatives. The partial derivatives
of the function to be fit, with respect to the parameters, are computed numerically using
first order differences.
Math errors from various sources can cause errors in this computation. For example if your
model contains exponentials and the parameters and independent variable values cause
exponential underflows, then the numerical computation of the partial derivative will be
independent of the parameter(s). SigmaPlot checks for this independence.
Check the parameter values in the results screen, the range of the independent variable(s)
and your equation to determine the problem.
There may be inconsistent constraints. Check constraint equations. This occurs if you
have defined constraints like a>0 and a<-1.

[Link] Error Status Messages

Bad constraint. The regression cannot proceed because a constraint you defined either was
not linear or contained syntax errors.
Invalid or missing ’fit to’ statement. The regression lacks a fit to statement, or the fit to
statement contains one or more syntax errors.
No observations to fit. The regression cannot proceed unless at least one x,y data pair
(observation) is included. Check to be sure that the data columns referenced in the regression
specifications contain data.
No parameters to fit. The regression specifications do not include any parameter definitions.
To add parameter definitions, return to the Equation Options dialog box and type the parameter
definitions in the Parameters edit window.

669
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

No weight statement. The regression specifications include a fit to statement with an

unknown weight variable. Check the Variables edit window to see if a weight variable has
been defined and that this corresponds to the variable in the regression statement.
Not enough or bad number of observations. In regression, the x and y data sets must be
of the same size. The data sets (x and y columns) you specified contain unequal numbers
of values.
Problem loading the file [Filename]. File too long; truncated. The fit file you tried to load
is too long. Regression files can be up to 50 characters wide and 80 lines long. Any additional
characters or lines were truncated when the file was loaded into the Edit Window.
Section has already been submitted. This regression section has already been defined.
Symbol [Variable or Function] has not been defined. The fit to statement in the regression
definition contains an observed variable which is undefined, or the fit to statement in the
regression definition contains an undefined function. Examine the regression specifications
you have defined and be sure that the dependent variable listed in the regression statement
exists and corresponds to the variable defined in the Variables edit window and that the
function listed in the regression statement exists and corresponds to the function you defined
in the Equations edit window.
Unreferenced variable. The regression specifications define a parameter that is not referenced
in any other statements. Either delete the parameter definition, or reference it in another
statement.

15.2 Dynamic Curve Fitting

Nonlinear curve fitting is an iterative process that may converge to find a best possible
solution. It begins with a guess at the parameters, checks to see how well the equation fits,
then continues to make better guesses until the differences between the residual sum of squares
no longer decreases significantly.
For complicated curve fitting problems, use SigmaPlot’s new Dynamic Fit Wizard to find the
best the solution. The Dynamic Fit Wizard automates the search for initial parameter values
that lead to convergence to the best possible solution. For example, typically for a user-defined
function, you would need to edit the code to manually enter the initial parameter values,
possibly repeatedly, until you find the best fit.
The Dynamic Fit Wizard takes away the guesswork of estimating the initial parameters. You
enter a range for the minimum and maximum initial parameter values, and the Dynamic Fit
Wizard does the rest, giving you the confidence that you’ll find the best fit.

15.2.1 Using the Dynamic Fit Wizard

Like the Regression Wizard, the Dynamic Fit Wizard is a step-by-step guide through the curve
fitting procedures, but with an additional panel in which you set the search options.
Note that the Dynamic Fit Wizard is especially useful for more difficult curve fitting problems
with three or more parameters and possibly a large amount of variability in the data points.
For linear regressions or less difficult problems, such as simple exponential two parameter fits,
the Dynamic Fit Wizard is overkill and you should use the Regression Wizard.

670
 [Link] Selecting the Data Source

[Link] Selecting the Data Source

1. View the page or worksheet with the data you want to fit.

If you select a graph, right-click the curve you want fitted, and on the shortcut menu,
click Dynamic Fit Curve.
Note: If you are running a regression from the graph page, make sure you select the plot
itself, not the graph, or Dynamic Fit Curve will not appear on the shortcut menu.
If you are using a worksheet, select the variables in the worksheet you want to fit, then:
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Nonlinear Regression group, click Dynamic Fit Wizard.

[Link] Selecting the Equation to Use

1. Select an equation from the Equation Category and Equation Name drop-down lists.
You can view different equations by selecting different categories and names. The
equation’s mathematical expression and shape appear to the left. About the Regression
Equation LibraryFor more information, see page 713.

Figure 15.26 Selecting an Equation Category and Equation Name

If the equation you want to use isn’t on this list, you can create a new equation. For more
information, see page .You can also browse other notebooks and regression equation
libraries for other equations. For more information, see page 713.
Note: SigmaPlot remembers the equation for the next time you open the Dynamic Fit
Wizard.
If the Finish button is available, click it to complete your regression. If it is not available,
or if you want to further specify your results, click Next.
If the Finish button is available, click it to complete your regression. If it is not available,
or if you want to further specify your results, click Next. For more information, see page .

671
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

[Link] Selecting the Variables to Fit

1. Click Next to open the variables panel. From here, you can select or re-select your
variables. There are three ways to select variables:

• Selecting a curve on a graph.

• Selecting a column in a worksheet.
• Selecting the variable from the Variable Columns drop-down list in the Dynamic Fit
Wizard. The equation picture to the left prompts you for which variable to select.

Figure 15.28 Selecting a plot as the data source for the Dynamic Fit Wizard.

You can also modify other equation settings and options from this panel by clicking
Options, which opens the Equations Options dialog box. These options include
changing initial parameter estimates, parameter constraints, weighting, and other related
settings. Equation OptionsFor more information, see page 639.

If you pick variables from a worksheet column, you can also set the data format. Variable
OptionsFor more information, see page 639.

672
 [Link] Setting the Dynamic Curve Fit Options

2. When you have selected your variables, you can either click Finish, or click Next to view
the Search [Link] more information, see page .

[Link] Setting the Dynamic Curve Fit Options

Unlike in the Regression Wizard, in the Dynamic Fit Wizard you can set the minimum and
maximum ranges to search for initial parameter values. These are the values where, if you
were to do this manually for a user-defined function, you would click Edit Code on the
Variables panel of the Dynamic Fit Wizard (or Regression Wizard). The parameters appear
under Initial Parameters.
Using the Regression Wizard, you would have to repeatedly enter the values until you found
the best fit. Here, the Dynamic Fit Wizard does this for you. It selects a sequence of parameter
estimates that are maximally distant from one another and in this way attempts to span the
parameter ranges specified.

Figure 15.29 Setting the Search Options in the Dynamic Fit Wizard

The values under the Parameter, Initial Estimate, Minimum and Maximum columns
contain the range information and the initial parameter estimates for each parameter in the
equation file.
To set the number of fits and maximum number of iterations:

1. Enter or select a number from the Number of fits drop-down list. The default value is
200. This is a good value to start with through for more difficult problems, you may
want to increase it.
2. Set the Marquadt-Levenberg algorithm from the Maximum number of iterations
drop-down list. Again, more difficult problems may require a larger value. Check the
“Iterations exceeding” percentage in the Dynamic Fit report. If this is greater than 50%
then increase the Maximum number of iterations.

Once the process exceeds this limit for a fit, then there is "no convergence" for this fit.
The process continues with the next set of starting parameter values.

673
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

To change a parameter range:

3. Under Select range method select User-defined.
4. Select a parameter listing under Select a parameter to modify its range.
5. Enter the ranges into the Minimum and Maximum boxes.
6. Click Modify.

These new values appear under the Minimum and Maximum columns.
7. Click Next. As the dynamic curve fit procedure begins, a progress bar appears in the
status bar in the lower left corner of SigmaPlot, indicating the proportion of fits as they
are analyzed over time. Once the set Number of Fits has been reached, the Dynamic Fit
Wizard - Fit Results panel appears. For more information, see page .

[Link] Viewing Fit Results

The fit results also appear if you receive a warning or error message about your fit.

Figure 15.30 The Dynamic Fit Results for a Regression

Interpreting Fit ResultsFor more information, see page 645.

1. If you wish to modify the remainder of the results that are automatically saved, click Next.
Otherwise, click [Link] more information, see page .
The subsequent panels provide options for the output data.

[Link] Setting Numeric Output Options

The Numeric Output Options panel lists:

• Which results are saved to the worksheet.
• Whether or not to generate a text report of the regression. For more information, see page .
• Whether or not a copy of the regression equation is saved to the section to the notebook that
contains the data that was fitted.

674
 [Link].1 Worksheet Result Options

Figure 15.31 Selecting the results to save.

1. Select which results you want to keep from the Results for best-fit solution list. These
settings are remembered between regression sessions.
2. To select worksheet results options for all converged fits,click More worksheet
results. The Result Worksheet Options dialog box appears.
3. To set the options for the report, click Report.
4. Click Next to set the graph options. For more information, see page .
5. To select worksheet results options for all converged fits,click More worksheet results.
The Result Worksheet Options dialog box appears. For more information, see page .

[Link].1 Worksheet Result Options

This dialog box appears by clicking More worksheet results on the Dynamic Fit Wizard -
Numeric Output Options panel. For more information, see page .You can select several types
of calculations to compare and study fit results obtained from the Dynamic Fit Wizard. These
results of these calculations appear in the worksheet for every (convergent) solution.
Basic results - sum of squares, iteration counts, final parameters. Selected by default.
Select this option to create one column for sum of squares, titled "SumSq", one column for the
number of iterations needed for convergence, titled "Iterations", and p columns of the final, or
best-fit, parameter values, where p is the number of parameters in the fit model. The column
title for this is "<parameter value name>-Final".
All worksheet results are linked to the values in the sum of squares column. Its values are
ordered from smallest to largest. Each row of data refers to a particular fit.
Clearing this option disables the Additional options.
Additional options. Select to place any of the following options below into the worksheet.
To better distinguish columns of data, single blank columns are inserted into the worksheet
between the groups of data specified by the options below.
• Condition number. Select to create a worksheet column called "Condition Number".
This is the condition number of the covariance matrix obtained at the final iteration. For a
positive-definite matrix, the condition number is computed as the ratio of the maximum and

675
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

minimum eigenvalues. It is a measure of the sensitivity of the sum of squares value to a

change in parameter values at the final iteration. Larger condition numbers indicate more
uncertainty in specifying the best-fit parameters. The values in this column use E notation,
with three decimal points of precision. For more information, see page 217.
• Starting parameters. These are the initial parameter estimates used to start the fit
algorithm. These values are selected from the parameter ranges that you’ve specified. The
title for this column is "<parameter-name>-Start".
• Parameter standard errors. These are the asymptotic standard errors for the parameters
computed at the final iteration. They measure the range of uncertainty in specifying the
best-fit parameters. The title of the Parameter standard errors columns is "<parameter
name>-StdErr".
• Coefficients of variation. For each parameter value in the best-fit solution, this is the
percent value of the ratio of the parameter’s standard error to the parameter’s absolute
value. The title for this column is "<parameter name>-CV%".
• Dependencies. Given a parameter value in the best-fit solution, this is a number between
0 and 1 that measures the dependency of the rate of change of the predicted values with
respect to the parameter on the rates of changes with respect to the other parameters. A
value close to 1 indicates uncertainty in specifying the given parameter value in the best-fit
solution. The title for this column is "<parameter name>-Dep".

[Link] Setting Graph Options

1. If you selected your variables from a graph, select Add curve to to automatically add
the equation curve to that graph.

You can also plot the equation on any other graph on that page by selecting one from
the drop-down list.
2. Select Create new graph to create a new graph of the original data and fitted curve.

Figure 15.32 Selecting the results to graph. These settings are retained between
sessions.

676
 [Link] Selecting Columns for Graph Data

3. Select Add to graph to create a plot of the regression equation for the graph specified
by the drop-down list. This option on appears if you ran the regression using a graph
curve as a data source.
4. Select Confidence and prediction bands to display confidence and prediction bands
on the graph.

Note: This option only appears if you select either Create new graph or Add to graph.

5. Select Extend fit to axes to extend the equation curve to intersect the Y-axis.

6. Select Add equation to graph title to insert the equation of the curve fit under the title of
the graph.

7. Select Create a dynamic fit profile graph to create a separate graph that plots the
base-10 logarithm of the minimum sum of squares of each fit versus the fit index.
8. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

Click Next only if you want to select the specific columns used to contain the data for the
fitted curve. For more information, see page .

[Link] Selecting Columns for Graph Data

1. To select the specific columns to use for the plotted results, click the columns in the
worksheet where you want the curve fit data to appear.

Tip: Remember, these settings are reused each time you perform a regression and
overwrite data if it exists in these columns in subsequent worksheets. To avoid overwriting
data, use First Empty to place the fitted curve results in empty columns.
2. Click Finish. For more information, see page .

677
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.33 Selecting the graph results columns. These settings are retained
between sessions.

3. Click Finish. For more information, see page .

[Link] Finishing the Dynamic Fit

After clicking Finish, all your results are displayed in the worksheet, report, and graph.
The initial defaults are to save parameter and computed dependent variable values to the
worksheet, to create a statistical report, and to graph the results.

1. To change the results that are saved, click Next to go through the entire wizard,
changing your settings as desired.

15.2.2 Dynamic Curve Fit Reports

To create a Dynamic Curve Fit report, make sure you select Create Report on the Numeric
Output Options panel of the Dynamic Fit Wizard. For more information, see page .
When you click Finish in the Dynamic Fit Wizard, a report appears, divided into the
following sections:
Dynamic Fit Options. This section displays the dynamic fit options that you chose on the
Search Options panel of the Dynamic Fit Wizard. These include the total number of fits,
the maximum number of iterations, and the search ranges for each parameter. For more
information, see page .
Summary of Fit Results. This section displays a summary of the outcomes from all of the
fits that were executed. As a percent of the total number of fits, the following conditions are
reported:
• Converged. Those fits that satisfied the convergence criterion.
• Singular Solutions. Those convergent fits whose covariance matrix is singular.

678
 15.2.3 Dynamic Fit Profile Graph

• Ill-Conditioned Solutions. Those convergent fits whose covariance matrix is

ill-conditioned (to machine precision).
• Evaluation Failures. Fits that failed to converge due to an evaluation error of the fit
equation induced by certain (out of domain) parameter values.
• Iterations Exceeding <Iterations Exceeding>. Fits that failed to converge after the
iteration limit was reached. This user specified limit is inserted into the brackets above.
• Inner-Loop Failures. Fits where the Levenberg-Marquardt parameter has increased above
a prescribed value when searching for a parameter direction to decrease the residual sum
of squares.
The precision of the percentage value that is displayed for each above condition is determined
by the total number of fits specified by the user. This precision (number of places to the
right of the decimal point) equals the order of magnitude of the total number of fits minus
one. Also, a condition is only listed in the report if there was at least one fit that satisfied
it - no zeroes are entered.
Results for the Overall Best-Fit Solution. This section is a detailed analysis of the best
solution that was found out of the total number of fits. This section mimics the output of an
ordinary nonlinear regression report.
The fits that were performed either converged or did not converge. Of those that converged,
some may be singular and some may be ill-conditioned. Therefore, the combined percentage
of singular and ill-conditioned solutions is less than or equal to the percentage of convergent
solutions. Also, he combined percentages of convergent solutions, evaluation failures, fits
exceeding maximum number of iterations and inner loop failures equaling 100.

15.2.3 Dynamic Fit Profile Graph

To create a dynamic fit profile graph, make sure to select Create dynamic fit profile graph on
the Graph Options panel of the Dynamic Fit Wizard before you click Finish. The graph that
appears contains one plot of the base-10 logarithm of the minimum sum of squares of each fit
versus the fit index. For this graph, the sum of squares data has been sorted from smallest to
largest. The data only represents convergent [Link] more information, see page .
A single column of the graph data for this graph is entered into the worksheet. Missing values
in this data column indicate that the corresponding fit is perfect and so are not represented
in the graph. In the rare event that all fits are perfect, the graph page is not produced and a
message is displayed to explain the situation.

679
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.34 Example of a Dynamic Fit Profile graph.

The reason for using logarithmic values is because sum-of-squares values typically differ over
several orders of magnitude. This graph provides information on the complexity of the sum
of squares surface in proceeding from the various starting parameters in the search ranges to
obtaining the final parameters in the solution.

15.2.4 Dynamic Curve Fitting Examples

[Link] Local Minima - Five-Parameter Logistic Function
The five-parameter logistic function (5PL) created by Ricketts and Head accounts for
asymmetric dose-response curves through the use of the two slope parameters Slope1 and
Slope2 (the symmetric four-parameter logistic function has one slope parameter).
The 5PL equation has the form:

m ax m in
y = m in +
1 + f1010Slope1(log EC 50 x)
+ (1 f x)10Slope2(log EC 40 x)

1
f x=
1 + 10 C F(log EC 50 x)
2 * Slope1* Slope2
C f=
Slope1+ Slope2

The parameters are:

• min = asymptotic minimum of the equation.
• max = asymptotic maximum of the equation.
• logEC50 = the x value for 50% of the y range (assumes x is a logarithmic scale).

680
 [Link] Local Minima - Five-Parameter Logistic Function

• Slope1 = first slope parameter.

• Slope2 = second slope parameter.
The dose response curve decreases with x if the two slopes are negative. The slope of the
curve at x = logEC50 is (max – min)*(Slope1 + Slope2)*ln(10)/8 which is proportional to
the sum of the two slopes. Ricketts and Head call these two parameters curvature parameters
since they affect the curvature of the upper and lower portions of the curve, as shown below

Figure 15.35 Effect of slope parameters on curve asymmetry. Fixing Slope

1 and increasing Slope 2 shows little change in the upper curvature and a
dramatic increase in the lower curvature.

This equation was implemented in SigmaPlot with preliminary but reasonable initial parameter
estimate functions. Experimental blood pressure and heart rate data from the Appendix in the
Ricketts and Head paper (1) was fit with this equation. A single curve fit was performed first
and this was then followed by a dynamic fit using 500 fits. The dynamic fit found a presumed
global minimum and a local minimum. The single fit, using the simple initial parameter
estimate functions, found the local minimum but not the presumed global minimum. The
dynamic fit profile, shown below, shows the logarithm of the residual sum of squares values,
from smallest to largest, for the results of the dynamic [Link] more information, see page .

681
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.36 The dynamic fit profile plot for sample data from Ricketts and
Head. This is a graph of the logarithm of the residual sum of squares for all fits
sorted from smallest to largest. Two different fit solutions are seen as the two
step levels for the fit numbers from 1 to 32 (insert).

The two steps in the insert graph show the values for the presumed global minimum and
the first local minimum. The majority of the results (fit numbers between about 30 to 475)
corresponded to a straight horizontal line fit at the mean of the y data. The data and the two
fit solutions corresponding to the sum of squares values shown in the insert graph are shown
below.

Figure 15.37 The first two fit solutions corresponding to the two lowest residual
sum of squares values (SS).

The parameter values for each of these two solutions are displayed below.

682
 [Link] Local Minima - Five-Parameter Logistic Function

Solution RSS min max logEC50 Slope1 Slope2

global minimum 676 150.3 353.6 75.5 -0.066 -0.251
local minimum 767 150.0 355.6 75.2 -0.279 -0.019

Residual sum of squares and parameter values for the first two fit solutions.
Notice how the magnitude of Slope1 and Slope2 values switches between the two fit solutions
with Slope1 being the smallest magnitude (in absolute value) for the global minimum and
the largest magnitude for the local minimum. This is not the artificial “switch” that occurs
for the parameters in the exponents of sums of exponentials (the two exponential terms
switching places) since the residual sums of squares values are different for the two solutions.
This behavior seems to be a characteristic of this particular 5PL equation as the following
example shows.
This 5PL equation was investigated further using simulated data. A single fit to the data was
performed followed by a dynamic fit using 500 fits. The dynamic fit profile insert graph shows
the presumed global minimum and three local minima.

Figure 15.38 The four steps in the insert graph for fit numbers from 1 to 155
show four unique fit solutions. The other solutions for larger fit numbers are
either singular or ill conditioned.

The data and fit lines for these four solutions are shown below.

683
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.39 Simulated data and the first four fit solutions.

The four fit solutions appear in pairs with each pair nearly coinciding with each other. The first
pair has nearly a zero slope for small x (dose) values where the second pair does not. The
parameter values for these fits are shown in below.
Solution RSS min max logEC50 Slope1 Slope2
global 753 4.8 97.3 -6.0 -2.620 -0.290
minimum
local 767 4.7 96.7 -6.0 -0.962 -1.941
minimum 1
local 782 4.6 130.3 -6.2 -1.800 -0.022
minimum 2
local 801 4.5 135.2 -6.3 -0.082 -1.604
minimum 3

Residual sum of squares and parameter values for the first four fit solutions of the simulated
5PL data.
The large and small magnitude slopes again switched from Slope1 to Slope 2 in the first pair
(global minimum and local minimum 1) and also for the second pair (local minimum 2 and
local minimum 3). As previously mentioned the slope of the 5PL curve at x = logEC50 is
proportional to the sum of the two slopes. For the first pair of solutions this sum, Slope 1 +
Slope 2, is –2.90 and –2.90 showing how similar are the two curves. This sum for the second
pair is also close, –1.82 and –1.68.
This example shows:
• The existence of a local minimum for the 5PL model and actual experimental data.
• The apparent "pairing" of fit solutions for this 5PL model.
• The creation of additional local minima with increased data error.

684
 [Link] Lack of Convergence - Two Site Saturation Binding

[Link] Lack of Convergence - Two Site Saturation Binding

Sometimes a nonlinear curve fit will not converge to a minimum residual sum of squares
value. You will receive a message like

Or

Many times this occurs for equations that are too complex for the data. For example, you
might be fitting saturation binding data with one and two-site equations and want to compare
the fit results to determine which equation is best. If the data is essentially one-site in nature
then the two-site equation may or may not converge. If it doesn’t, then you can’t compare it
with the one-site equation to determine which is best. So you are stuck with saying something
like, "The one site binding parameters were … and the two site model did not converge"
(2) and, even though it might be obvious visually that the data does not support a two-site
equation, you simply cannot state this and you cannot compare the fit to a one-site fit. A
dynamic fit does not display any results for which convergence did not occur. So if you obtain
any results at all then convergence occurred. You still have to be careful about fits that are
invalid because underflows occurred but very likely there is a valid fit in the dynamic fit
results and you can then make a statistical comparison of the one and two-site fit [Link]
more information, see page .
Here is a saturation-binding example where a single fit of the two-site binding equation in
SigmaPlot did not converge. Just due to bad luck, the single set of initial parameter values led
to a non-convergent solution for this particular data set. This type of behavior will happen
with any curve fitter. A dynamic fit was performed (which uses many different "maximally
distant" starting parameter sets) and most of the solutions converged. The fit, which converged
with the lowest residual sum of squares 50.03, is shown below.

685
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

So a dynamic fit can be used to side step a non-convergent single-fit solution.

Since we now have a two-site fit that converged, a comparison can be made with the one-site
fit. The table below shows the residual sums of squares, the Akaike information criteria and
probabilities that the two models are correct for both the one and two-site fits.
Equation RSS AICc Delta AICc Probability (%)
one-site 67.3 28.9 0.0 99.97
two-site 50.0 45.4 16.5 0.03

The residual sum of squares decreased as expected for the two-site fit but Akaike’s AICc
value was so much larger than for the one-site fit that the probability that the one-site fit is
correct is an overwhelming 99.97%.

[Link] Fit Results Summary - The Bennet5 Equation from NIST

The second section of the dynamic fit report, “Summary of Fit Results”, shows a summary
of the types of fit results obtained. The following conditions are detected and expressed
as a percentage of the total number of fits.
• Convergence
• Singular Solutions
• Ill-Conditioned Solutions
• Evaluation Failure
• Iterations Exceeding the Maximum Specified
• Inner Loop Failures
This section of the report can be used to characterize the difficulty of the particular problem
being studied. For example, a 200 dynamic fit of a simple exponential to a reasonable set of
data produced
Summary of Fit Results:
Converged 100.0%

686
 [Link] Determine Initial Parameter Estimates - Kinematic Viscosity

Singular Solutions 0.5%

All 200 fits converged with only one being singular. It is clear that a dynamic fit was not
required for this simple problem. Also see Example 5 for a much more complicated problem
for which the fit results summary had very few failures.
On the other hand fitting the Bennett5 equation to the data provided at the NIST web site (4)
using the "higher level of difficulty" set of starting parameter values results in:
Summary of Fit Results:
Converged 44.5%
Singular Solutions 6.0%
Ill-Conditioned Solutions 31.5%
Evaluation Failure 0.5%
Iterations Exceeding 2000 33.0%
Inner-Loop Failures 22.0%
This example demonstrates the entire set of dynamic fit result conditions. Only 44.5% of the
200 fits converged. 6% of the total were singular and 31.5% were ill conditioned. Thus
37.5% of the fits were of "low quality"; i.e., either invalid or extremely variable parameter
estimates will be obtained in these cases. So only 44.5% - 37.5% = 7% of the 200 fits would
enable valid parameter estimates to be obtained.
Of the 55.5% that did not converge 0.5% (1 fit) had an evaluation failure (e.g, zero divide,
exponential overflow, square root of negative number), 33% exceeded the maximum number
of iterations specified (2000 in this case) and 22% had inner loop failures (the number of
iterations in the Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm inner loop exceeded 50).
This is clearly a difficult curve fitting problem and it shows by using the "higher level of
difficulty" initial parameter values how important good initial starting values can be.

[Link] Determine Initial Parameter Estimates - Kinematic Viscosity

A dynamic fit can be used as a substitute for determining good initial parameter estimates.
This can be very useful for complicated equations where initial parameter estimate functions,
or even good initial numeric values for the parameters, are not easy to generate. An example of
this is the kinematic viscosity problem presented in Bates and Watts (3).For more information,
see page .
The data for kinematic viscosity measured as a function of temperature and pressure is
shown below.

687
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.40 The logarithm of kinematic viscosity plotted as a function of

pressure for four temperatures.

The equation used to fit to this data is

x1
f(x, )= + 3x 2+ 4x 2+
2
( 6+
2
)
7x 2 x2exp
2+ x1 8+
2
9x 2

where f represents ln(viscosity), x1 is temperature and x2 is pressure.

For each temperature the data has a roughly linear behavior with pressure (x2). The slope of
the pressure data at zero temperature is about 1.5. From the equation for x1 = 0 the slope is
approximately θ3 + θ6 (we assume that the higher order terms in x2 are small corrections since
the data is nearly linear). This gives a rough estimate for θ3 + θ6= 1.5. We don’t know how to
partition this sum so we will just use as initial estimates θ3= 1.0 and θ6= 1.0 (rounded up for
clarity). A dynamic fit requires a numeric range to be specified for each parameter. We use a
rule-of-thumb for the lower and upper limits of the parameter range of the parameter value
plus and minus two times the parameter value. So the range for θ3and θ6 = [-1, 3]. We see
from graph above that the data really isn’t truly linear with pressure but has some curvature.
The θ4and θ5 terms help account for this. Since this curvature is not very dramatic we will
use initial estimates for θ4 and θ5 that are approximately one tenth and one hundredth of θ3,
respectively. Since we don’t know what the signs of these two parameters should be we let
|θ4| = 0.1 and |θ5| = 0.01 and let the ranges be symmetric about zero from minus twice to plus
twice these values. Therefore the ranges are θ4 = [-0.2, 0.2] and θ5 = [-0.02, 0.02].
The remaining parameters characterize the behavior with temperature and a coupled behavior
with temperature and pressure. If we look at the data in the graph for zero pressure, x1 = 0,
we can get estimates for θ1 and θ2. The function θ1/(θ2 + x1) is a hyperbolic function that
decreases with increasing temperature (x1). When x1 = θ2 this function decreases to half
its original value. The data for zero pressure decreases from its initial value of over 5.0 to
less than 2.5 for some temperature greater than 98.9. So let’s use θ2 = 100 as a rough initial
estimate. The ln(viscosity) is about 5.0 for zero temperature and pressure so we can use θ1/θ2

688
 [Link] Determine Initial Parameter Estimates - Kinematic Viscosity

= 5.0 and get a rough initial estimate θ1 = (5.0)*(100) = 500. This gives the ranges for θ1 and
θ2 of [-500, 1500] and [-100, 300], respectively.
For the coupled term we don’t know what the temperature parameter θ8 should be so we
will just guess that it is roughly the same as the other temperature parameter θ2 = 100 in the
hyperbolic function. So the range is θ8 = [-100, 300]. The remaining two parameters, θ7 and
θ9, are assumed to be small corrections so we will let them be one tenth of the other parameters
in their respective sums and, since we don’t know their signs, we will let their ranges be
symmetric about zero. So θ7 will be 0.1*θ6 or θ7 = 0.1 and likewise θ9 = 0.1*θ8 or θ9 = 10 and
the corresponding ranges are θ7 = [-0.2, 0.2] and = [-20, 20].
To summarize, the very rough estimates of initial parameter ranges are:
• θ1 = [-500, 1500]
• θ2 = [-100, 300]
• θ3 = [-1, 3]
• θ4 = [-0.2, 0.2]
• θ5 = [-0.02, 0.02]
• θ6 = [-1, 3]
• θ7 = [-0.2, 0.2]
• θ8 = [-100, 300]
• θ9 = [-20, 20]
These ranges were entered into the dynamic fit dialog and 500 fits obtained using a maximum
number of iterations equal to 200. The presumed global minimum was found for 14% of the
500 fits. So the technique of using a dynamic fit as a substitute for good initial parameter
estimates was successful.
The solution found by SigmaPlot was essentially the same as that found by Bates and
Watts. SigmaPlot obtained a slightly lower residual sum of squares (0.08738 SigmaPlot vs
0.08996 Bates and Watts). This difference is probably due to the use of different convergence
tolerances by the two programs. The dynamic fit profile graph is shown below.

689
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.41 Dynamic fit profile for the kinematic viscosity problem using
user-defined parameter intervals. The insert graph shows the global minimum
and two local minima.

The insert graph shows the 69 fit solutions in the first step level that converged to the presumed
global minimum. The summary of fit results report is
Summary of Fit Results:
Converged 89.2%
Singular Solutions 31.4%
Ill-Conditioned Solutions 21.4%
Evaluation Failure 0.4%
Iterations Exceeding 200 10.0%
Inner-Loop Failures 0.4%
This shows that nearly 90% of the fits converged and that 36% were well conditioned (89.2
– (31.4 + 21.4) = 36.4). Also, there were relatively few failures. Even though this is a
complicated equation with nine parameters, the data quality was high enough that good
dynamic fit results were obtained. A short transform was written to generate fit curves for each
temperature plot in the graph above and this is shown below. The fit is excellent as would be
expected from the small residual sum of squares.

690
 [Link] Confidence in the Fit Solution - Atmospheric Pressure Cycles

Figure 15.42 Fit solutions for the presumed global minimum.

[Link] Confidence in the Fit Solution - Atmospheric Pressure Cycles

Sums of sinusoidal functions were fit to atmospheric pressure data to characterize the three
cycles known to exist in the data (4). The results are shown below. For more information,
see page .

Figure 15.43 Monthly averaged atmospheric pressure differences between

Easter Island and Darwin, Australia. The line is the fit of the sum of sinusoids
equation using the SigmaPlot regression wizard.

SigmaPlot found the presumed global minimum, as documented in reference (4), using the one
fit from the regression wizard and this is shown in the first graph. Fitting sums of sinusoids to
data is known to result in many fit solutions that are local minima. So if you don’t have the

691
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

answer available, how do you know if the solution obtained is the best solution? The answer is
that you never do know for sure. For more information, see page .
Using a dynamic fit, however, can give you additional confidence that you do have the best
solution. A dynamic fit of the sums of sinusoids equation

y = b1+ b 2cos(2 x /12)+ b3sin(2 x /12)

+b5cos(2 x /b 4)+ b 6sin(2 x /b4)
+b8cos(2 x /b7)+ b 9sin(2 x /b7)

was performed using 200 fits and the most difficult starting parameter values listed in reference
(4). The dynamic fit profile obtained is shown in the figure [Link] more information,
see page .

Figure 15.44 The dynamic fit profile showing the first four step levels
representing the presumed global minimum and three additional local minima.

The multiple fits at each of the first four step levels in the graph above suggest the existence
of at least three local minima and the presumed global minimum (at the lowest log sum of
squares value). The log sum of squares values for the first four minima are nearly the same,
ranging from about 2.90 to 2.98, which suggests that the fit lines corresponding to each
solution will be relatively close together.
Even though there are nine parameters the dynamic fit report shows this problem to be
relatively insensitive to different initial parameter values. All fits converged and relatively few
were singular or ill-conditioned.
Summary of Fit Results:
Converged 100.0%
Singular Solutions 3.5%
Ill-Conditioned Solutions 4.5%

692
 [Link] References

The fit solutions corresponding to the four minima are shown in Figure 11.

Figure 15.45 Fit solutions for the presumed global minimum and the three local
minima. The corresponding residual sums of squares are shown in the legend.

These solutions are relatively close to one another as the residual sum of squares suggests.
The 12 month cycle is obvious in these solutions with two other cycles at about 26 and 44
months also present in the first three fits. The fourth fit solution had an 85 month cycle (about
twice the 44 month cycle). This latter solution is one example of cycle doubling (tripling, etc.)
as a cause of local minima for sums of sinusoid solutions.
At first glance at the results, the investigator should have no faith that the best fit was found.
But after performing a dynamic fit where 1) multiple fit solutions were found to occur at the
lowest residual sums of squares when starting from different initial parameter values, 2) all
fits converged and 3) a collection of relative minima were found that were not the solution
found by the curve fitter originally, one’s confidence that the fit shown is in fact the best
solution is raised considerably.
Though specifying a 12-month cycle parameter does not need justification, a dynamic fit with
a 10th parameter corresponding to the 12-cycle period was performed and essentially the same
presumed global minimum was found. The residual sum of squares was slightly lower at 773
and the 12-month cycle time was estimated to be 11.9 months.

[Link] References
(1) Ricketts, J.H. and Head, G.A. A five-parameter logistic equation for investigating
asymmetry of curvature in baroreflex studies. Am. J. Physiol.277 (Regulatory Integrative
Comp. Physiol. 46); R441-R454, 1999.
(2) Aymerich, M.S., Alberdi, E.M., Martinez, A. And Becerra, S.P. Evidence for Pigment
Epithelium-Derived Factor Receptors in the Neural Retina. Invest. Ophthal. & Visual Science,
Vol 42, No. 13, 3287-3293, 2001.
(3) Bates, D.M, and Watts, D.G. Nonlinear Regression Analysis and its Applications. Wiley,
New York, 1988, pp 87-89.

693
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

(4) The NIST Statistical Reference Datasets for Nonlinear Regression,

[Link] dataset ENSO.

15.3 Global Curve Fitting

Use the Global Curve Fit Wizard when you want to fit an equation to several data sets
simultaneously. The selected equation must have exactly one independent variable. The data
sets can be selected from a worksheet or a graph using a variety of data formats. You can also
specify the behavior of each equation parameter with respect to the data sets. A parameter
can be localized to have a separate value for each data set, or a parameter can be shared to
have the same value for all data sets.
For example, suppose your global curve fitting problem is based upon the three-parameter
equation family y=a*x^2+b*x+c. If you select three data sets, then there will be at most
nine different parameters, three for each data set. Suppose you decide to share parameter a,
but allow parameters b and c to vary independently among the data sets. With one shared
parameter and two local parameters, the total number of parameters drops to seven. The
model for this problem takes the form:

a1* x2+ b1 * x + c1if(x,y)isin data set 21

y = a1 * x2+ b2 * x + c2 if(x,y)isin data set2
a1 * x2+ b3 * x + c3 if(x,y)isin data set2

The Global Curve Fit Wizard is very similar to the Regression and Dynamic Fit Wizards
in design and operation. The main difference is the extra panel for determining the shared
parameters.

15.3.1 Using the Global Fit Wizard

Like the Regression and Dynamic Fit Wizards, the Global Fit Wizard provides a step-by-step
guide through the curve fitting procedures, but with an additional panel in which you set
shared parameters for multiple data sets with one equation model.

[Link] Selecting the Data Source

1. View the page or worksheet with the data you want to fit.

If you select a graph, right-click the curve you want fitted, and on the shortcut menu,
click Global Fit Curve.
Note: If you are running a regression from the graph page, make sure you select the plot
itself, not the graph, or Global Fit Curve will not appear on the shortcut menu.
If you are using a worksheet, select the variables in the worksheet you want to fit, then:
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Nonlinear Regression group, click Global Curve Fit Wizard.

694
 [Link] Selecting the Equation to Use

In the Global Fit Wizard, click Next. For more information, see page .

[Link] Selecting the Equation to Use

1. Select an equation from the Equation Category and Equation Name drop-down lists.
You can view different equations by selecting different categories and names. The
equation’s mathematical expression and shape appear to the left. About the Regression
Equation LibraryFor more information, see page 713.

Note: When selecting an equation, bear in mind that the Global Curve Fit Wizard only
supports equations with one independent variable.

Figure 15.46 Selecting an Equation Category and Equation Name

If the equation you want to use isn’t on this list, you can create a new equation. For more
information, see page .You can also browse other notebooks and regression equation
libraries for other equations. For more information, see page 713.
Note: SigmaPlot remembers the equation for the next time you open the Global Fit
Wizard.
If the Finish button is available, click it to complete your regression. If it is not available,
or if you want to further specify your results, click Next to open the Shared Parameters
panel. For more information, see page .

[Link] Selecting the Parameters to Share

695
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

In Shared Parameters panel, you select the parameter variables that you’d like to share across
the data sets. The equation you selected in the previous panel appears to the left.

Figure 15.47 Select the parameters you’d like to share from the Shared
Parameters list.

1. Modify other equation settings and options from this panel by clicking Options, which
opens the Equations Options dialog box. These options include changing initial
parameter estimates, parameter constraints, weighting, and other related settings.
Equation OptionsFor more information, see page 639.
2. Click Edit Code if you want to view and edit the fit text.

3. When you have selected the parameters you want to share, you can either click Finish, or
click Next to select the variables to [Link] more information, see page .

[Link] Selecting the Variables to Fit

In the Variables panel, you can select or re-select your the data for your dependent and
independent variables. There are three ways to select variables:
• Selecting a curve on a graph.
• Selecting a column in a worksheet.
• Selecting the variable from the Variables drop-down list.

696
 [Link] Viewing Fit Results

Figure 15.48 Selecting the Variables to Fit.

If you pick variables from a worksheet column, you can also set the data format.
1. When you have selected your variables, you can either click Finish, or click Nextto
view the Fit Results.
2. When you have selected your variables, you can either click Finish, or click Next to view
the Fit [Link] more information, see page .

[Link] Viewing Fit Results

The fit results also appear if you receive a warning or error message about your fit.

Figure 15.49 The Global Fit Results for a Regression

Interpreting Fit ResultsFor more information, see page 645.

1. If you wish to modify the remainder of the results that are automatically saved, click
Next. Otherwise, click [Link] more information, see page .

697
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The subsequent panels provide options for the output data.

[Link] Setting Numeric Output Options

The Numeric Output Options panel lists:

• Which results are saved to the worksheet.
• Whether or not to generate a detailed statistical report of the regression. For more
information, see page .
• Whether or not a copy of the regression equation is saved to the section to the notebook that
contains the data that was fitted.

Figure 15.50 Selecting the results to save.

1. Select which results you want to keep from the Results list. These settings are
remembered between regression sessions.
2. To set the options for the report, click Report. For more information, see page .
3. Click Next to set the graph options. For more information, see page .

[Link].1 Worksheet Result Options

This dialog box appears by clicking More worksheet results on the Global Fit Wizard -
Numeric Output Options panel. You can select several types of calculations to compare and
study fit results obtained from the Global Fit Wizard. These results of these calculations
appear in the worksheet for every (convergent) solution. For more information, see page .
Basic results - sum of squares, iteration counts, final parameters. Selected by default.
Select this option to create one column for sum of squares, titled "SumSq", one column for the
number of iterations needed for convergence, titled "Iterations", and p columns of the final, or
best-fit, parameter values, where p is the number of parameters in the fit model. The column
title for this is "<parameter value name>-Final".
All worksheet results are linked to the values in the sum of squares column. Its values are
ordered from smallest to largest. Each row of data refers to a particular fit.

698
 [Link] Setting Graph Options

Clearing this option disables the Additional options.

Additional options. Select to place any of the following options below into the worksheet.
To better distinguish columns of data, single blank columns are inserted into the worksheet
between the groups of data specified by the options below.
• Condition number. Select to create a worksheet column called "Condition Number".
This is the condition number of the covariance matrix obtained at the final iteration. For a
positive-definite matrix, the condition number is computed as the ratio of the maximum and
minimum eigenvalues. It is a measure of the sensitivity of the sum of squares value to a
change in parameter values at the final iteration. Larger condition numbers indicate more
uncertainty in specifying the best-fit parameters. The values in this column use E notation,
with three decimal points of precision. For more information, see page 217.
• Starting parameters. These are the initial parameter estimates used to start the fit
algorithm. These values are selected from the parameter ranges that you’ve specified. The
title for this column is "<parameter-name>-Start".
• Parameter standard errors. These are the asymptotic standard errors for the parameters
computed at the final iteration. They measure the range of uncertainty in specifying the
best-fit parameters. The title of the Parameter standard errors columns is "<parameter
name>-StdErr".
• Coefficients of variation. For each parameter value in the best-fit solution, this is the
percent value of the ratio of the parameter’s standard error to the parameter’s absolute
value. The title for this column is "<parameter name>-CV%".
• Dependencies. Given a parameter value in the best-fit solution, this is a number between
0 and 1 that measures the dependency of the rate of change of the predicted values with
respect to the parameter on the rates of changes with respect to the other parameters. A
value close to 1 indicates uncertainty in specifying the given parameter value in the best-fit
solution. The title for this column is "<parameter name>-Dep".

[Link] Setting Graph Options

1. If you selected your variables from a graph, select Add curve to to automatically add
the equation curve to that graph. This option on appears if you ran the regression using
a graph curve as a data source.

You can also plot the equation on any other graph on that page by selecting one from
the drop-down list.
2. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

3. Select Create new graph to create a new graph of the original data and fitted curve.

699
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Figure 15.51 Selecting the results to graph. These settings are retained between
sessions.

4. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

5. Select Extend fit to axes to extend the equation curve to intersect the Y-axes.

6. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

7. Select Add equation to graph title to insert the equation of the curve fit under the title of
the graph.

8. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

9. After selecting the graphed results you want, click Finish.

[Link] Finishing the Global Fit

After clicking Finish, all your results are displayed in the worksheet, report, and graph.
The initial defaults are to save parameter and computed dependent variable values to the
worksheet, to create a statistical report, and to graph the results.

15.3.2 Global Curve Fit Reports

To create a Global Curve Fit report, make sure you select Create Report on the Numeric
Output Options panel of the Global Fit Wizard. For more information, see page .
When you click Finish in the Global Fit Wizard, a report appears. The report content
depends on the report options that you have selected. The following sections are displayed
when all options are selected:

700
 15.4 Regression Lessons

Data Source and Equation Used. The notebook and worksheet names containing the data are
displayed followed by the equation name and its functional form.
Data Set Specifications. The independent and dependent variable worksheet columns for
each data set are tabulated.
Global Parameters. The equation parameters that have been selected to be shared (if any)
are listed.
Global Goodness of Fit. Four goodness of fit statistics for the overall (global) fit are listed: R,
R2, Adjusted R2 and the standard error of the estimate.
Analysis of Variance. Two ANOVA tables are displayed, without and with correction for the
mean of the observations.
Statistical Tests. The results of the PRESS, Durbin-Watson, Normality, Constant Variance
and (retrospective) Power statistics are displayed.
Individual Data Set Fit Results. This consists of the number of observations in each data
set, two goodness of fit criteria (R2 and residual sum of squares), the parameter estimates and
their statistics (std err, t, P and VIF.
Individual Data Set Regression Diagnostics. Predicted values, raw residuals, standardized
residuals, Studentized residuals, Studentized deleted residuals are displayed if selected.
Individual Data Set Influence Diagnostics. Cooks distance, leverage, and DFFITS are
displayed.
Individual Data Set Confidence Limits. Upper and lower confidence and prediction limits
are listed. The percentage confidence is typically 95% but any value between 1 and 99 may be
used.
Fit Equation Description. The global curve fit algorithm generates a set of equations, one
for each data set, that are used to fit to the multiple data sets. These equations, their initial
parameter estimates, and other options are displayed here.

15.4 Regression Lessons

This tutorial lesson is designed to familiarize you with regression fundamentals. The sample
graph and worksheet files for the tutorials are located in the [Link] Regression Examples
notebook provided. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information, see
page .

15.4.1 Lesson 1: Linear Curve Fit

In this lesson, you will fit a straight line to existing data points.

1. Open the Tutorial 1 Graph in the [Link] notebook and examine the graph. The
points appear to nearly follow a straight [Link] SigmaPlot’s User and Program
FilesFor more information, see page .
2. Open the Regression Wizard. The Regression Wizard displays lists of equations by
category. If the Linear equation is not already selected, select the Polynomial category
and select Linear as the equation name.

701
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

3. Click Next to proceed. The next panel prompts you to pick your x, or independent
variable.
4. Click the curve on the page to select it. Note that clicking the curve selects both the x
and y variables for you.
5. Click Next. The Iterations dialog box appears, displaying the progress of the fitting
process. When the process is completed, the initial regression results are displayed.
6. Examine the results. The first result column is the parameter values; the intercept is
-.94 and the slope is 1.24.

The next column is an estimate of the standard error for each parameter. The intercept
has a standard error of about 0.36—not that good—and the slope has a standard error
of about 0.10, which isn’t bad.
The third column is the coefficient of variation (CV%) for each parameter. This is defined
as the standard error divided by the parameter value, expressed as a percentage. The
CV% for the intercept is about 38.2%, which is large in comparison to the CV% for
the slope (about 8.7%).
The dependencies are shown in the last column. If these numbers are very close to 1.0,
they indicate a dependency between two or more parameters, and you can probably
remove one of them from your model.
Adding a Parameter Constraint
To make y always positive when x is positive, you cannot have a negative y intercept.
You can recalculate the regression with this condition by constraining the parameter y0 to
be positive. That way y will never be negative when x>0.
7. On the initial results panel, click Back. The variables panel appears.
8. Click Options. The Options dialog box is appears. Enter a value of y0>0 into the
Constraints edit box. This defines the constraint y0>0, which forces the y intercept
to be positive.
9. Click OK, then click Next to refit the data with a straight line, this time subject to the
constraint y0>0. When the initial results are displayed, the value for y0 is now about 9.3 Ґ
10 -9, very close to zero, and the slope has slightly decreased to a value of approximately
0.98.
10. Click View Constraints; the Constraints dialog box appears with the constraint y0>0
flagged with the label "(active)" indicating that it was used in the nonlinear regression.

Note: Nonlinear regressions may find parameters that satisfy the constraints without
having to activate some or all of the constraints. Constraints that are not used are not
flagged as (active).
Click OK to return to the Nonlinear Regression Results dialog box, then click Next to
proceed.
Saving Results
You can select the results to save for a regression. These results are destroyed by default
each time you run another regression equation.
You can save some of your results to a worksheet, and other results to a text report. To
save worksheet results, make sure the results you want saved are checked in the results
list. You have the option to save parameter values, predicted dependent (y) variable

702
 15.4.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit

values for the original independent (x) variable, and the residuals about the regression for
each original dependent variable.
11. To save a text report, select the Report option. The report for a nonlinear regression lists
all the settings entered into the nonlinear regression dialog box, a table of the values and
statistics for the regression parameters, and some regression diagnostics.
12. You can also save a copy of the regression equation you used to the same section as the
page or worksheet on which you ran the regression. Select Add Equation to Notebook
to save a copy of your equation.
13. Click Next to proceed.

Graphing Results
To plot the regression function on the existing graph:
14. Select Add curve to Graph #1.
15. Click Finish display your report and graphed results.

Comparing Regression Wizard Results with Linear Regression Results

The original data for this graph could have been fitted automatically in SigmaPlot with a
linear regression using the Statistics menu Linear Regression command. However,
because you cannot specify constraints for the regression coefficients, a first order
regression gives different results. To add a linear regression to your original data plot:
16. Select the plot of your original data by clicking it on the graph, then on the Statistics
menu, click Linear Regression.
17. Select to draw a 1st order regression and pick a dotted line type for the regression line.
18. Click OK to accept the regression settings, then view the graph. Note the difference
between the regression and the fitted line (use the View menu to zoom in on the graph
if necessary).

Note: If you had not used a parameter constraint, the result of the nonlinear regression
would have been identical to the linear regression. Save the graph and worksheet to a file.

15.4.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit

This tutorial leads you through the steps involved in solving a typical nonlinear function
for a “real world” scenario.
Examining and Analyzing the Data
The data used for this tutorial represents blood pressure measurements made in the neck
(carotid sinus pressure), and near the outlet of the heart (the mean arterial pressure).
These pressures are inversely related. If the blood pressure in your neck goes down, your
heart needs to pump harder to provide blood flow to your brain. Without this immediate
compensation, you could pass out every time you stood up.
Sensors in your neck detect changes in blood pressure, sending feedback signals to the heart.
For example, when you first get out of bed in the morning, your blood tends to drain down

703
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

toward your legs. This decreases the blood pressure in your neck, so the sensors tell the heart
to pump harder, preventing a decrease in blood flow to the brain.
You can do an interesting experiment to demonstrate this effect. Stand up and relax for a
minute, then take your pulse rate. Count the number of pulses in 30 seconds, then lie down
and immediately take your pulse rate again. Your pulse rate will decrease as much as 25%.
(Your heart doesn’t have to pump as hard to get blood to the brain when you are lying down.)

1. Open the Tutorial 2 graph file by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Tutorial 2
section in the [Link] notebook. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more
information, see page .
2. Examine the graph. The two pressures are clearly inversely related. As one rises, the
other decreases. The shape appears to be a reverse sigmoid, suggesting the use of a
sigmoidal equation.

A sigmoid shaped curve looks like an S that has had its upper right and lower left corners
stretched. In this case, the S is backwards, since it starts at a large value, then decreases
to a smaller value.
Various forms of the sigmoid function are commonly used to describe sigmoids. In
this case, you will use the four parameter sigmoid function provided in the standard
regression library.
3. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

4. Right-click the curve and choose Fit Curve. The Regression Wizard appears.
5. Select Sigmoidal as your equation category, and Sigmoid, 4 Parameter as your equation.
6. Click Next twice. If you have correctly selected the curve, the Iterations dialog box
appears, displaying the value for each parameter and the norm for each iteration.

Note: The iterations proceed more slowly than those for the linear fit. This is because the
equation is much more complex and there are more parameters. Watch the norm value
decrease—this number is an index of the fit closeness, and decreases as the fit improves.
When the fit condition is satisfied, the initial results are displayed.
7. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

8. Examine the results. The first column displays the parameter value, and the next column
displays the estimated standard error. The third column is the coefficient of variation
(CV%) for each parameter. (Note that these CV% values are unrealistically good—the
largest is about 3.9%. Generally, CV% values for physiological measurements are greater
than 5%.)

True nonlinear regression problems (like this sigmoidal fit, but unlike a linear fit) have
CV% values that are not absolutely correct. However, they still can be used to compare
the relative variability of parameters. For example, b (3.9) is more than eight times as
variable as c (0.45).

704
 15.4.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit

None of the dependencies shown in the last column are close to 1.0, suggesting that the
model is not over-parameterized.
9. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

10. To save the regression results and graph the curve, click Finish. A report along with
worksheet data and a fitted curve are added to your notebook, worksheet and graph.

Fitting with a Different Equation

More than a single regression can be run and plotted on a graph. Typically, this is done to
gauge the effects of changes to parameter values, or to compare the effect of a different fit
equation.
In this case, try a five parameter logistic function instead of the four parameter version.
Press F5. The Regression Wizard appears. Select Sigmoid, 5 Parameter as your
equation.
11. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

12. Click Next, then click Options. Enter a value of 5 into the Iterations box.

The iterations option specifies the maximum number of iterations to perform before
displaying the current results. You can see if a long regression is working correctly by
limiting the number of iterations to perform. If the regression does not complete within
the number of iterations specified, you can continue by clicking the More Iterations
option in the initial results panel.
13. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

14. Click OK.

15. Click Next to calculate the new fit. Note that the Iteration dialog box now says "Iteration
n of 5." Each iteration also requires much more time to calculate, and more iterations
are required to produce a result.
16. After five iterations, the initial results panel appears. Note that the More Iterations
option is no longer dimmed. Click More Iterations for five more iterations.

The regression continues to completion, converging after four more iterations.

17. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

18. Examine the results. The norm value, standard deviations and CV% values are smaller
than for the four parameter fit, indicating that this may be a better fit. However, two
of the dependencies are close to 1.0, suggesting that the fifth parameter may not have
been needed.

705
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

19. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

706
16 Regression Lessons
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ Regression Lessons

16.1 Regression Lessons

This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with regression fundamentals. The sample graph
and worksheet files for the tutorials are located in the Regression Examples ([Link])
notebook provided with SigmaPlot .

16.1.1 Lesson 1: Linear Curve Fit

In this lesson, you will fit a straight line to existing data points.

1. Open the Tutorial 1 Graph in the Regression Examples ([Link]) notebook and
examine the graph. About SigmaPlot’s User and Program FilesFor more information, see
page .The points appear to nearly follow a straight line.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Nonlinear Regression group, click Regression Wizard.

The Regression Wizard displays lists of equations by category. If the Linear equation is
not already selected, select the Polynomial category and select Linear as the equation
name.
3. Click Next to proceed. The next panel prompts you to pick your x, or independent
variable.
4. Click the curve on the page to select it. Note that clicking the curve selects both the x
and y variables for you.
5. Click Next. The Fit Results dialog box appears, displaying the progress of the fitting
process. When the process is completed, the initial regression results are displayed.
6. Examine the results. The first result column is the parameter values; the intercept is
-.94 and the slope is 1.24.

The next column is an estimate of the standard error for each parameter. The intercept
has a standard error of about 0.36—not that good—and the slope has a standard error
of about 0.10, which isn’t bad.

707
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

The third column is the coefficient of variation (CV%) for each parameter. This is defined
as the standard error divided by the parameter value, expressed as a percentage. The
CV% for the intercept is about 38.2%, which is large in comparison to the CV% for
the slope (about 8.7%).
The dependencies are shown in the last column. If these numbers are very close to 1.0,
they indicate a dependency between two or more parameters, and you can probably
remove one of them from your model.

[Link] Adding a Parameter Constraint

To make y always positive when x is positive, you cannot have a negative y intercept. You can
recalculate the regression with this condition by constraining the parameter y0 to be positive.
That way y will never be negative when x>0.

1. On the Fit Results panel, click Back. The Variables panel appears.
2. Click Edit Code. The Functions - Linear dialog box is appears. Enter a value of y0>0
into the Parameter Constraints edit box. This defines the constraint y0>0, which forces
the y intercept to be positive.
3. Click OK, then click Next to refit the data with a straight line, this time subject to the
constraint y0>0. When the fit results are displayed, the value for y0 is now very close to
zero, and the slope has slightly decreased to a value of approximately 0.98.
4. Click View Constraints; the Constraints dialog box appears with the constraint y0>0
flagged with the label "(active)" indicating that the value of y0 is very close to the
boundary value of the constraint which is zero.

Note: Nonlinear regressions may find parameters that satisfy the constraints without
having to activate some or all of the constraints. Constraints that are not used are not
flagged as (active).
Click OK to return to the Fit Results panel, then click Next to proceed.
Click OK to return to the Fit Results panel, then click Next to proceed. For more
information, see page .

5. Click OK to return to the Fit Results panel, then click Next to proceed.
6. Click OK to return to the Fit Results panel, then click Next to proceed. For more
information, see page .

[Link] Saving Results

You can select the results to save for a regression. These results are destroyed by default each
time you run another regression equation.
You can save some of your results to a worksheet, and other results to a text report. To
save worksheet results, make sure the results you want saved are checked in the Results
list on the Numeric Output Optionspanel. You have the option to save parameter values,
predicted dependent (y) variable values for the original independent (x) variable values, and
the residuals about the regression for each original dependent variable value.

708
 [Link] Graphing Results

1. To save a text report, select the Create Report option. The report for a nonlinear
regression lists all the settings entered into the Function dialog box, a table of the values
and statistics for the regression parameters, and some regression diagnostics.
2. You can also save a copy of the regression equation you used to the same notebook
section as the page or worksheet on which you ran the regression. Select Add Equation
to Notebook to save a copy of your equation.

Click Next to proceed.

Click Next to proceed. For more information, see page .

3. Click Next to proceed. For more information, see page .

[Link] Graphing Results

To plot the regression fit on the existing graph:

1. Select Add curve to Graph #1 on the Graph Options panel.

2. Click Finish to display your report and graphed results.

[Link] more information, see page .

[Link] Comparing Regression Wizard Results with Linear Regression

Results

The original data for this graph could have been fitted automatically in SigmaPlot with a
linear regression using the Linear test. However, because you cannot specify constraints for
the regression coefficients, a first order regression gives different results. To add a linear
regression to your original data plot:

1. Select the plot of your original data by clicking it on the graph.

2. On the Analysis tab, in the Statistics group, click the Tests drop-down list.

3. Click Regression and then click Linear.

4. Select either the Each Curve or All data in plot option and pick a dotted line type for
the regression line.

709
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Click OK to accept the regression settings, then view the graph. Note the difference
between the regression and the fitted line.

Note: If you had not used a parameter constraint, the result of the nonlinear regression
would have been identical to the linear regression. Save the graph and worksheet to a file.

16.1.2 Lesson 2: Sigmoidal Function Fit

This tutorial leads you through the steps involved in a typical nonlinear regression for a
"real world" scenario.

[Link] Examining and Analyzing the Data

The data used for this tutorial represents blood pressure measurements made in the neck
(carotid sinus pressure), and near the outlet of the heart (the mean arterial pressure).
These pressures are inversely related. If the blood pressure in your neck goes down, your
heart needs to pump harder to provide blood flow to your brain. Without this immediate
compensation, you could pass out every time you stood up.
Sensors in your neck detect changes in blood pressure, sending feedback signals to the heart.
For example, when you first get out of bed in the morning, your blood tends to drain down
toward your legs. This decreases the blood pressure in your neck, so the sensors tell the heart
to pump harder, preventing a decrease in blood flow to the brain.
You can do an interesting experiment to demonstrate this effect. Stand up and relax for a
minute, then take your pulse rate. Count the number of pulses in 30 seconds, then lie down
and immediately take your pulse rate again. Your pulse rate will decrease as much as 25%.
(Your heart doesn’t have to pump as hard to get blood to the brain when you are lying down.)

1. Open the Tutorial 2 graph file by double-clicking the graph page icon in the Tutorial 2
section in the Regression Examples ([Link]) notebook. About SigmaPlot’s User
and Program FilesFor more information, see page .
2. Examine the graph. The two pressures are clearly inversely related. As one rises, the
other decreases. The shape appears to be a reverse sigmoid, suggesting the use of a
sigmoidal equation.

A sigmoid shaped curve looks like an S that has had its upper right and lower left corners
stretched. In this case, the S is backwards, since it starts at a large value, then decreases
to a smaller value.
Various forms of the sigmoid function are commonly used to describe sigmoids. In
this case, you will use the four parameter sigmoid function provided in the standard
regression library.
3. Right-click the curve and choose Curve Fit. The Regression Wizard appears.
4. Select Sigmoidal as your equation category, and Sigmoid, 4 Parameter as your equation.
5. Click Next twice. If you have correctly selected the curve, the Iterations dialog box
appears, displaying the value for each parameter and the Sum of Squares for each iteration.

710
 [Link] Fitting with a Different Equation

Note: The iterations proceed more slowly than those for the linear fit. This is because
the equation is much more complex and there are more parameters. Watch the Sum
of Squares value decrease—this number is an index of the fit closeness, and decreases
as the fit improves.
When the fit condition is satisfied, the fit results are displayed.
6. Examine the results. The first column displays the parameter value, and the next column
displays the estimated standard error. The third column is the coefficient of variation
(CV%) for each parameter. (Note that these CV% values are unrealistically good—the
largest is about 3.9%. Generally, CV% values for physiological measurements are greater
than 5%.)

True nonlinear regression problems (like this sigmoidal fit, but unlike a linear fit) have
CV% values that are not absolutely correct. However, they still can be used to compare
the relative variability of parameters. For example, b (3.9) is more than eight times as
variable as c (0.45).
None of the dependencies shown in the last column are close to 1.0, suggesting that the
model is not over-parameterized.
7. To save the regression results and graph the curve, click Finish. A report along with
worksheet data and a fitted curve are added to your notebook, worksheet and graph.

[Link] more information, see page .

[Link] Fitting with a Different Equation

More than a single regression can be run and plotted on a graph. Typically, this is done to gauge
the effects of changes to parameter values, or to compare the effect of a different fit equation.
In this case, try a five parameter logistic function instead of the four parameter version.

1. Press F5. The Regression Wizard appears. Select Sigmoid, 5 Parameter as your
equation.
2. Click Next, then click Options. Enter a value of 5 into the Iterations box.

The iterations option specifies the maximum number of iterations to perform before
displaying the current results. You can see if a long regression is working correctly by
limiting the number of iterations to perform. If the regression does not complete within
the number of iterations specified, you can continue by clicking the More Iterations
button in the Fit Results panel.
3. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

4. Click OK.

711
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

5. Click Next to calculate the new fit. The Fit Results panel appears and says “Did not
converge, exceeded maximum number of iterations.”
6. Note that the More Iterations option is enabled. Click More Iterations twice.

The regression continues to completion, converging in 14 iterations.

7. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

8. Examine the results. The Sum of Squares value, standard deviations and CV% values are
smaller than for the four parameter fit, indicating that this may be a better fit. However,
two of the dependencies are close to 1.0, suggesting that the additional parameter may not
have been needed.
9. Compare the curve fits visually. As expected, the five parameter function appears to fit
slightly better.

712
17 Regression Equation Library
Topics Covered in this Chapter
♦ About the Regression Equation Library
♦ Standard Curves
♦ Ligand Binding
♦ Piecewise

17.1 About the Regression Equation Library

This appendix lists the equations found in the Regression Equation Library.

17.1.1 Polynomial
Linear

Quadratic

Cubic

Inverse First Order

Inverse Second Order

Inverse Third Order

713
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

17.1.2 Peak
Four Parameter Gaussian

Five Parameter Gaussian

Three Parameter Modified Gaussian

Four Parameter Modified Gaussian

Three Parameter Lorentzian

Four Parameter Lorentzian

Four Parameter Pseudo-Voigt

Five Parameter Pseudo-Voigt

714
 17.1.3 Sigmoidal

Three Parameter Log Normal

Four Parameter Log Normal

Four Parameter Weibull

Five Parameter Weibull

17.1.3 Sigmoidal
Three Parameter Sigmoid

Four Parameter Sigmoid

Five Parameter Sigmoid

Three Parameter Logistic

715
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Four Parameter Logistic

Four Parameter Weibull

Five Parameter Weibull

Three Parameter Gompertz Growth Model

Four Parameter Gompertz Growth Model

Three Parameter Hill Function

Four Parameter Hill Function

Three Parameter Chapman Model

716
 17.1.4 Exponential Decay

Four Parameter Chapman Model

17.1.4 Exponential Decay

Two Parameter Single Exponential Decay

Three Parameter Single Exponential Decay

Four Parameter Double Exponential Decay

Five Parameter Double Exponential Decay

Six Parameter Triple Exponential Decay

Seven Parameter Triple Exponential Decay

Modified Three Parameter Single Exponential Decay

717
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Exponential Linear Combination

17.1.5 Exponential Rise to Maximum

Two Parameter Single Exponential Rise to Maximum

Three Parameter Single Exponential Rise to Maximum

Four Parameter Double Exponential Rise to Maximum

Five Parameter Double Exponential Rise to Maximum

Two Parameter Simple Exponent Rise to Maximum

Three Parameter Simple Exponent Rise to Maximum

17.1.6 Exponential Growth

One Parameter Single Exponential Growth

Two Parameter Single Exponential Growth

718
 17.1.6 Exponential Growth

Three Parameter Single Exponential Growth

Four Parameter Double Exponential Growth

Five Parameter Double Exponential Growth

Modified One Parameter Single Exponential Growth

Modified Two Parameter Single Exponential Growth

Stirling Model

Two Parameter Simple Exponent

Three Parameter Simple Exponent

Modified Two Parameter Simple Exponent

719
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

17.1.7 Hyperbola Library

Two Parameter Rectangular Hyperbola

Three Parameter Rectangular Hyperbola I

Three Parameter Rectangular Hyperbola II

Four Parameter Double Rectangular Hyperbola

Five Parameter Double Rectangular Hyperbola

Two Parameter Hyperbolic Decay

Three Parameter Hyperbolic Decay

Modified Hyperbola I

Modified Hyperbola II

720
 17.1.8 Waveform

Modified Hyperbola III

17.1.8 Waveform
Three Parameter Sine

Four Parameter Sine

Three Parameter Sine Squared

Four Parameter Sine Squared

Four Parameter Damped Sine

Five Parameter Damped Sine

Modified Sin

Modified Sine Squared

721
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Modified Damped Sine

17.1.9 Power
Two Parameter

Three Parameter

Pareto Function

Three Parameter Symmetric

Four Parameter Symmetric

Modified Two Parameter I

Modified Two Parameter II

722
 17.1.10 Rational

Modified Pareto

17.1.10 Rational
One Parameter Rational I

One Parameter Rational II

Two Parameter Rational I

Two Parameter Rational II

Three Parameter Rational I

Three Parameter Rational II

Three Parameter Rational III

Three Parameter Rational IV

723
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Four Parameter Rational

Five Parameter Rational

Six Parameter Rational

Seven Parameter Rational

Eight Parameter Rational

Nine Parameter Rational

Ten Parameter Rational

Eleven Parameter Rational

724
 17.1.11 Logarithm

17.1.11 Logarithm
Two Parameter I

Two Parameter II

Two Parameter III

Second Order

Third Order

17.1.12 3 Dimensional
Plane

Paraboloid

Gaussian

725
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Lorentzian

17.2 Standard Curves

Linear Curve

Four Parameter Logistic Curve

17.3 Ligand Binding

One Site Saturation

Two Site Saturation

One Site Saturation + Nonspecific

726
 17.3 Ligand Binding

Two Site Saturation + Nonspecific

Sigmoidal Dose Response

Sigmoidal Dose Response (Variable Slope)

One Site Competition

Two Site Competition

Four-Parameter Logistic Function

Four-Parameter Logistic Function (Linear)

One Site Competition, Max = 100

One Site Competition, Min = 0, Max = 100

727
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

17.4 Piecewise
Two Segment Linear

Three Segment Linear

Four Segment Linear

Five Segment Linear

728
Index
10th/90th percentiles creating ..................................... 309–311
box plots .......................................... 281 creating mesh ................................... 313
1st derivative data format ......................................... 24
computing ........................................ 454 examples .......................................15, 17
21CFR ................................................. 189 generating mesh data............................. 4
2D graphs light source....................................... 315
adding plots........................................ 67 lighting ............................................ 315
area plots............................262, 283, 290 line data format................................... 24
arranging data..................................... 42 mesh ................................................ 306
asymmetric error bar plots ................... 42 mesh data format ................................ 24
asymmetric error bars........................ 270 mesh lines/fills.................................. 314
bar charts ......................................... 262 mesh plots ........................................ 313
box plots ................................... 262, 281 modifying mesh lines and fill
column averaged error bar plots ........... 42 color .............................................. 314
creating ............................................ 263 origin axes........................................ 315
creating multiple axes for single perspective ....................................... 315
plot ................................................ 302 plotting data ....................................... 48
creating plots with asymmetric error positioning axes ................................ 319
bars ................................................ 270 rotation ............................................ 315
creating plots with error bars ............. 266 Scatter and line ................................. 305
error bars.......................................... 266 scatter data format............................... 24
examples .......................................11, 15 smoothing mesh data............................. 4
grouped bar charts...................... 275–276 trajectory.......................................... 310
grouped bar charts with error waterfall plots............................ 308, 311
bars ................................................ 275 3D line plot data formats
linear regression lines................. 112, 114 3D trajectory ...................................... 38
modifying plots.......................... 112, 118 3D waterfall ....................................... 38
multiple axes .................................... 302 3D mesh plots
multiple plots...................................... 67 data format ......................................... 24
plotting data ................. 42, 261–262, 280 3D scatter plots
plotting multiple curves....................... 41 adding drop lines .........................99, 102
plotting mutiple curves, same X or symbols.........................................76, 82
Y ..................................................... 41 95% confidence interval........................ 660
plotting X or Y using row 95% confidence intervals ...................... 660
numbers ........................................... 42 95% prediction interval ......................... 660
polar axes......................................... 394
quartile plots .................................... 271
range plots........................................ 269 A
reference lines .................................. 281 abs function ......................................... 573
stacked bar chart ................................. 43 accumulation functions ......................... 560
vector plot .......................................... 44 Add Procedure dialog box ..................... 445
3D bar charts adding
data format ......................................... 24 axes ................................................. 302
fills .................................................... 91 axis breaks ....................................... 360
3D graphs contour fills ...................................... 324
adding plots........................................ 67 contour labels ............................ 328, 330
axes placement during rotation........... 319 exploding slices to pie
bar chart data format ........................... 24 charts ...................................... 339–340
bar charts ......................................... 307 frame lines ....................................... 319
changing view .................................. 315 graphs to pages ................................. 130

729
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

labels to page.................................... 165 Area Below Curves............................... 451

macros to macros .............................. 444 area beneath a curve
multiple axes for single plot............... 302 transform.......................................... 525
plots to graphs .................................... 67 area function ........................................ 575
prefix/suffix to tick labels .................. 380 area plot data formats
procedures to macros ........................ 445 multiple area plot ................................ 33
reference lines .................................. 281 multiple vertical area plot .................... 33
regression equations to graph simple area plot .................................. 33
pages.............................. 629–630, vertical area plot ................................. 33
676–677, 699–700 area plots ............................................. 283
styles to Graph Style Gallery ............... 58 changing area fill direction ................ 289
suffixes/prefixes................................ 328 changing fill color ............................. 290
text to page....................................... 165 climographs...................................... 291
algorithm converting multiple into
Marquardt-Levenberg................. 626, 643 complex ......................................... 288
aligning creating complex area plots ............... 287
axis titles .......................................... 364 creating multiple and multiple
objects/graphs/labels ......................2, 163 vertical area plots ............................ 286
snap-to grids..................................... 164 creating simple straight line area
text .................................................. 165 plots ............................................... 284
using crosshairs ................................ 164 creating vertical area plots ................. 284
using snap-to .................................... 164 examples .......................................... 262
with grids ......................................... 163 identifying regions ............................ 288
with rulers ........................................ 163 shading between two curves .............. 291
alpha value........................................... 658 arguments, transform ............................ 559
alphanumeric symbols ............................ 80 arithmetic mean.................................... 214
angular axes arithmetic operators
about................................................ 388 transforms ........................................ 523
arc ................................................... 389 arranging
modifying......................................... 394 data for 2D graphs .............................. 42
range................................................ 389 data for 3D graphs .............................. 48
rotation ............................................ 389 data for bubble plots............................ 46
scale................................................. 389 data for contour plots .......................... 48
angular values ........................................ 44 data for polar plots .............................. 44
ANOVA graphs .............................................. 162
one way ANOVA transform............... 525 graphs on a page ............................... 158
ANOVA table radial and angular values for polar
regression results .............................. 656 plots ................................................. 44
ape function ......................................... 573 XY data for polar plots........................ 44
apex arranging data ...................................39, 47
dragging to modify ternary axis asymmetric error bar plots ................... 42
ranges ............................................ 398 column averaged error bar plots ........... 42
applying column means..................................... 42
data transforms ..................................... 4 polar plots .......................................... 44
graph styles using the Graph Style stacked bar chart ................................. 43
Gallery ............................................. 58 vector plot .......................................... 44
arc Arrhenius plot ...................................... 350
angular axis ...................................... 389 Arrhenius scale..................................... 356
arccos function ..................................... 574 arrow keys
arcsin function...................................... 574 moving graphs and objects
arctan function ..................................... 575 using .............................................. 156
area and distance arrowheads
functions .......................................... 560 modifying for vector plots ................. 301

730
 Piecewise

arrows adding.............................................. 302

drawing............................................ 149 additional for multiple plots............... 301
modifying arrow heads...................... 152 angular............................................. 394
.ASC files breaks ...........................................3, 360
opening ..................................... 193–194 category scale ............................ 349, 354
ASCII files ........................................... 210 changing scale ........................... 348–350
assumption checking changing scale types .................. 353, 356
options ............................................. 632 common log ..................................... 348
asymmetric error bar plots....................... 42 contour range values ......................... 326
asymmetric error bars creating multiple for single plot.......... 302
creating 2D plots with ....................... 270 custom scale ..................................... 356
asymmetrical error bars date/time .......................................... 350
quartile plots..................................... 271 dragging to modify ternary
attributes.............................................. 134 ranges ............................................ 398
changing line ............................. 357–358 Extreme Value Distribution axis
text formatting .................................. 167 scale............................................... 356
audit trails ............................................ 189 labels ............................................... 364
automatic legend updating..................... 170 line attributes............................. 357–358
automatic legends ........................ 3, 10, 168 linear scale ....................................... 348
displaying.................................. 169–170 logit scale......................................... 349
editing.............................................. 169 modifying......................................... 319
locking............................................. 170 modifying range by dragging ............. 398
restoring to default settings................ 169 moving 2D ....................................... 359
automation ........................................... 441 multiple................................................ 3
Add Procedure dialog box ................. 445 multiple pairs.................................... 302
adding macros to macros ................... 444 natural log scale................................ 348
creating custom dialog boxes ............. 444 origin axes........................................ 315
creating menu commands .................. 449 polar ................................................ 394
creating user-defined functions .......... 446 positioning 3D .................................. 319
Debug Window................................. 446 positioning using the Property
editing macro code............................ 443 Browser.......................................... 359
editing macros .................................. 439 probability scale ............................... 348
macro window .................................. 442 probit scale....................................... 349
Macro Window toolbar...................... 440 radial ............................................... 394
Object Browser................................. 445 radial tick labels................................ 394
parts of macro programming range values ..................................... 352
language......................................... 443 range, changing ................................ 352
running macros ................................. 449 reciprocal ......................................... 350
user-defined functions ....................... 445 scale types.................. 348–350, 353, 356
available statistics................................. 214 scale values ...................................... 380
averaging ............................................. 214 tick labels......................................... 380
avg function ......................................... 575 tick marks ................................. 370, 405
axes titles................................................. 364
displaying......................................... 356 types ......................................... 348–350
engineering notation.......................... 376 using drawing tools, using formatting
hiding .............................................. 356 commands .......................................... 4
modifying......................................... 356 using Object Properties dialog ........... 358
polar plots ........................................ 388 x and y ................................................. 3
turning on/off ................................... 356 axis breaks
viewing ............................................ 356 creating ............................................ 360
axis axis range
3D placement during rotation............. 319 scale................................................. 352
about................................................ 301 values .............................................. 352

731
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

axis scale variable .............................................. 99

Arrhenius ......................................... 356 bars
Extreme Value Distribution ............... 356 edges ............................................... 151
switching to category ........................ 354 fills .............................................91, 151
switching to custom .......................... 356 spacing.................................. 95, 99, 278
axis titles base
editing.............................................. 363 using as tick labels ............................ 376
hiding .............................................. 364 Base
moving............................................. 364 using as tick labels ............................ 330
rotating ............................................ 363 Batch Process Excel Files...................... 451
viewing ............................................ 364 bidirectional error bars
axis, range data format ......................................... 25
contour plots..................................... 326 bin values
Axon files histograms........................................ 120
importing ......................................... 211 bivariate statistics transform .................. 526
Bland-Altman Analysis......................... 452
block function ...................................... 576
B blockheight .......................................... 576
back planes blocks, data
color ................................................ 385 deleting ............................................ 244
grid lines .......................................... 387 inserting ........................................... 243
backup files ............................................ 10 sorting.............................................. 240
bar chart data formats blockwidth ........................................... 576
grouped horizontal bar chart ................ 37 Border Plots ......................................... 453
grouped horizontal bar chart with box plot data formats
error bars.......................................... 37 horizontal bar plot............................... 38
grouped vertical bar chart .................... 35 vertical box plot.................................. 38
grouped vertical bar chart with error box plots
bars .................................................. 35 10th/90th percentiles ......................... 281
horizontal bar chart with error box fills/color ................................... 282
bars .................................................. 37 box widths........................................ 282
simple horizontal bar chart .................. 37 Cleveland percentile method.............. 283
simple vertical bar chart ...................... 35 computing percentile methods ........... 283
stacked horizontal bar chart ................. 37 computing percentile values .............. 280
stacked vertical bar chart ..................... 35 creating ..................................... 263, 280
vertical bar chart with error bars .......... 35 data format ......................................... 24
bar charts edges ............................................... 151
automatic reference lines ................... 117 examples .......................................... 262
creating ............................................ 263 fills .............................................91, 151
edges ............................................... 151 macro for creating............................. 453
error bars.......................................... 275 mean lines ........................................ 282
examples .......................................... 262 modifying.................................. 281–282
fills .............................................91, 151 outliers............................................. 281
grouped bars with error bars .............. 278 Standard percentile method................ 283
histograms................................. 120, 123 symbols................................. 76, 82, 282
horizontal data format ......................... 24 whisker cap widths............................ 281
needle .............................................. 120 boxes
needle plot.......................................... 95 drawing............................................ 149
spacing bars........................... 95, 99, 278 edges ............................................... 151
step .................................................. 120 fills .............................................91, 151
bar charts, 3D breaks .................................................. 360
creating ..................................... 309–310 bubble plots ........................................... 76
examples .......................................... 307 2D ................................................... 297
bar widths

732
 Piecewise

applications ...................................... 297 fills .................................................... 88

arranging data..................................... 46 gap color .......................................... 151
arranging data for size ......................... 46 grids ................................................ 385
converting area data to diameters .......... 46 inserted object icons.......................... 145
plotting data ....................................... 46 line end attributes.............................. 152
transforms dialog box.......................... 46 line types.....................................85, 151
X, Y values ........................................ 46 multiple selected objects.................... 154
By Group Data Split ............................. 454 object background fills ...................... 151
objects fills ....................................... 151
page color ........................................ 174
C pasted object icons ............................ 143
calculating pattern and edge line thickness........... 151
confidence intervals .......................... 115 pattern density of plot fills ................... 88
error bar mean .................................. 275 patterns .............................................. 88
error bars.......................................... 275 pie charts.......................................... 340
linear regressions .............................. 115 polar plot axes .................................. 388
prediction intervals ........................... 115 polar plots .......................................... 44
cancelling a regression .......................... 644 radial axes ................................. 391, 394
category axis scale................................ 349 radial axes tick labels ........................ 394
category data.......................................... 39 range direction.................................. 401
creating graphs using ........................ 264 scale direction................................... 401
using to create plots .......................... 271 slice fills........................................... 151
category scale symbol fills....................................... 151
creating ............................................ 354 ternary axis direction......................... 401
modifying......................................... 354 ternary graphs................................... 345
cauchyden............................................ 577 ternary range .................................... 401
cauchydist............................................ 577 ternary scale type .............................. 399
cauchyinv ............................................ 577 text formatting .................................. 167
cell ...................................................... 578 tick label text .................................... 376
cells tick values ........................................ 380
engineering notation.......................... 236 units of measurement ........................ 173
formatting in worksheets ................... 236 Changing
moving to......................................... 201 axis color ......................................... 357
setting decimal places in axis thickness ................................... 357
worksheets...................................... 236 characters
using as column or row titles ............. 249 non-keyboard ................................... 165
wrapping text.................................... 236 using as symbols................................. 80
centering chart fills
axis titles .......................................... 364 color incrementing .............................. 91
changing charts
3D graph view .................................. 315 creating pie charts ............................... 39
area plot fill color.............................. 290 chi-square
axis range......................................... 352 reduced ............................................ 655
axis scale types .......................... 353, 356 chisquareden function ........................... 578
bar/box fills ...................................... 151 chisquaredist function ........................... 579
color of fill pattern lines and edge chisquareinv function............................ 579
lines ............................................... 151 Cholesky decomposition ....................... 115
colors ................................................. 88 choose ................................................. 579
column width............................. 219, 225 clearing................................................ 243
contour labels ............................ 328, 330 graph titles ....................................... 148
contour plots.............................. 323, 330 graphs/objects................................... 148
contour range values ......................... 326 legends............................................. 148
default layout template file ................ 162 Cleveland percentile method
fill patterns ....................................... 151

733
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

using for box plots ............................ 283 column picker dialog box
using for quartile box plots ................ 283 normalizing ternary data.................... 487
climographs ......................................... 291 Column picker dialog box
Clipboard Graph Wizard ..................................... 63
cutting and copying data............. 136, 236 column statistics
using ................................................ 136 maximum value ................................ 214
clockwise angular units mean ................................................ 214
setting for polar plots ........................ 342 minimum positive value .................... 214
coefficient of determination minimum value................................. 214
stepwise regression missing values .................................. 214
results ..................................... 645, 654 other values ...................................... 214
coefficient of determination (R printing ..................................... 256, 258
Squared) transform ............................. 529 setting Options.................................... 10
coefficient of variation size of sample................................... 214
parameters........................................ 645 standard deviation............................. 214
coefficients standard error ................................... 214
regression results .............................. 655 sum of sample .................................. 214
col ....................................................... 580 viewing .........................................3, 213
col function .......................................... 559 column titles
color duplicate .......................................... 198
axis lines ................................... 357–358 using transforms as .................... 521, 578
bars.................................................... 91 column width
box plots .....................................91, 282 changing ................................... 219, 225
changing ............................................ 88 columns
contour fills ...................................... 324 asymmetric error bar plots ................... 42
contour lines..................................... 323 averaging ......................................... 214
custom incrementing schemes.............. 92 column and row titles dialog
custom, using ................................... 175 box ................................................ 245
error bars.......................................... 272 column averaged error bar plots ........... 42
frame lines ....................................... 319 deleting ............................................ 244
gap color .......................................... 151 inserting empty ................................. 243
graph back planes ............................. 385 inserting graphic cells ..................92, 291
grids ................................................ 385 inserting symbol size values ................ 82
incrementing chart fills........................ 91 key................................................... 240
line .................................................. 151 merging............................................ 459
lines ................................................... 85 multiple Z .......................................... 47
mesh lines/fills.................................. 314 picking different data for current
page ................................................. 174 plot .................................................. 63
radial axes ........................................ 393 plotting multiple curves, same X or
reference lines .................................. 118 Y ..................................................... 41
tick marks ................................. 372, 405 plotting X or Y using row numbers
color incrementing ........................................................ 42
assigning to worksheet ........................ 92 plotting XYZ ...................................... 48
customizing ...................................92, 99 selecting........................................... 241
symbols.............................................. 78 sizing ........................................ 219, 237
Color Transition Values......................... 454 sorting data....................................... 240
colors stacked bar chart ................................. 43
creating gradients.............................. 454 statistics ........................................... 213
column averaged error bar plots............... 42 switching from rows to
arranging data..................................... 42 columns.......................................... 244
column averaging tick labels.................................. 330, 383
grouped bar chart .............................. 278 titles.......................................... 244, 249
column means ........................................ 42 type labels ........................................ 383

734
 Piecewise

using as row titles ............................. 247 Constraints, parameter

vector plot .......................................... 44 defining............................................ 641
Comma Delimited (.CSV) constructor notation
importing ......................................... 204 example of use.................................. 525
command prompt contour fills
using to run SigmaPlot macros........... 448 color ................................................ 324
commands modifying......................................... 325
creating using macros........................ 449 contour labels
common logarithmic axis scale.............. 348 changing frequency........................... 328
comparing groups ................................. 452 numeric............................................ 330
completion status messages rotating ............................................ 328
regression results .............................. 668 skipping ........................................... 383
complex ............................................... 580 suffixes/prefixes................................ 328
complex area plots......................... 287–288 text attributes.................................... 334
Compute 1st Derivative ........................ 454 turning on/off ................................... 328
computing............................................ 115 contour lines
1st derivative .................................... 454 color ................................................ 323
computing percentile methods ........... 283 line types.......................................... 323
cumulative percentages ..................... 463 modifying......................................... 323
power spectral density....................... 463 showing/hiding ................................. 323
quartiles ........................................... 283 thickness .......................................... 323
rank and percentile............................ 463 contour plot............................................ 15
confidence and prediction contour plot data formats
bands ........................... 629–630, 676–677 contour plot ........................................ 38
confidence bands .................................. 649 filled contour plot................................ 38
nonlinear regression .......................... 634 contour plots
confidence interval ............................... 660 adding fills ....................................... 324
95% ................................................. 660 adding labels ............................. 328, 330
regression results .............................. 660 creating ............................................ 321
confidence intervals data format ......................................... 24
adding to 2D graphs .......................... 114 editing contour labels ........................ 334
calculating........................................ 115 example ............................................. 15
linear regressions .............................. 114 frequency of contour labels................ 328
view in nonlinear regression line types.......................................... 323
reports............................................ 634 modifying.................................. 323, 330
confidence lines modifying contour lines..................... 323
95% and 99% confidence modifying fills .................................. 325
interval........................................... 214 modifying labels ........................ 328, 330
defined ............................................. 115 modifying Z data range/scale ............. 326
configuring plotting data ................................48, 321
printer settings ....................256, 259–260 setting line intervals .......................... 327
constant variance .................................. 632 setting the direction of fills ................ 324
P values............................................ 632 X,Y,Z values....................................... 48
testing .............................................. 632 converting
constant variance test area data to diameters for bubble
regression results .............................. 658 plots ................................................. 46
constraints date and time data to numbers............ 664
entering............................................ 641 numeric and date and time data .......... 238
in Regression Wizard ........................ 640 numeric data to date and time
parameter ......................................... 640 data ................................................ 666
constraints, parameter Cook’s Distance ................................... 635
badly formed .................................... 669 Cook’s Distance test
viewing; ........................................... 646 results .............................................. 659

735
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

copy and Paste...................................... 210 plots with date and time scale ............ 355
Copy shortcut....................................... 202 polar plots ...................................44, 341
copying reports.............................................. 192
data........................................... 205, 242 sections ............................................ 192
graphs .............................................. 130 simple straight line area plots............. 284
notebook items between survival curves.................................. 485
notebooks ................................ 193, 195 ternary graphs................................... 343
objects/graphs................................... 136 text labels, legends............................ 165
correlation coefficient user-defined functions ....................... 446
regression results ....................... 645, 654 vector plots....................................... 486
cos....................................................... 581 vertical area plots.............................. 284
cosh..................................................... 581 worksheets ....................................... 192
count ................................................... 581 crosshairs............................................. 164
COUNT function.................................. 525 cumulative percentages
creating computing ........................................ 463
additional axes for multiple curve fitter
plots ............................................... 301 introduction ...................................... 626
additional plots ................................... 67 curve fitting
axis breaks ....................................... 360 date and time data ............................. 663
category scale ................................... 354 curves
complex area plots ............................ 287 coefficient of determination ............... 529
contour plots..................................... 321 column averaged error bar plots ........... 42
creating pie charts ............................... 39 fitting date and time data ................... 663
custom dialog boxes.......................... 444 multiple for polar plots ........................ 44
custom graph page layout .................. 161 multiple in graph............................... 264
custom scale ..................................... 356 multiple, same X or Y ......................... 41
embedded graphs ................................ 74 plotting multiple ..........................41, 264
equation ........................................... 192 plotting X or Y using row
equations to plot ............................... 103 numbers ........................................... 42
Excel worksheets .............................. 192 transform for integrating under a
files for figure submission to curve.............................................. 525
journals .......................................... 431 using category data ........................... 264
filled contour plots ............................ 321 custom color ........................................ 175
graph pages ...................................... 192 custom dialog boxes ............................. 444
graphs ................................................ 50 custom error bars.................................. 274
graphs using Excel worksheets........... 256 custom graph styles
graphs using the Graph Style Graph Style Gallery .......................57–58
Gallery ........................................57–58 saving ...........................................57–58
graphs with Graph Wizard ................... 52 custom scale
histograms................................. 120, 123 creating ............................................ 356
labels ........................................ 165, 167 custom tick mark intervals .................... 370
legends...................................... 165, 167 customer service................................19–20
macros ...................................... 192, 438 customizing
menu commands using macros........... 449 color increments ............................92, 99
multiple area plots............................. 286 error bar directions............................ 274
multiple axes for single plot............... 302 fill increments................................92, 99
multiple curves ................................... 41 graph styles ...................................57–58
new graph for current page ................ 130 line increments ..............................92, 99
new notebook files and items ............. 192 symbol increments .........................92, 99
new object to insert ........................... 145 tick labels.................................. 330, 383
page templates ........................... 133, 147 tick mark intervals ............................ 370
pie charts............................................ 39 Cut shortcut ......................................... 202
plots using category data ................... 271 cutting

736
 Piecewise

data.................................................. 242 plotting X or Y using row

notebook items between numbers ........................................... 42
notebooks ................................ 193, 195 polar plots .......................................... 44
objects/graphs................................... 136 previewing before printing................. 257
.CVS files printing ..................................... 256–257
opening ..................................... 193–194 protecting data on the Web ................ 428
radial and angular values ..................... 44
rearranging ....................................... 244
D regression............................................. 4
data ..................................................... 582 removing outlying data...................... 250
2D graphs......................................... 280 sampling ............................................ 70
applying transforms .............................. 4 saving .............................................. 181
arranging for 2D graphs....................... 42 selecting........................................... 241
arranging for 3D graphs....................... 48 selecting for ternary graphs................ 343
arranging for bubble plots.................... 46 single-curve plot (ternary
arranging for contour plots .................. 48 triplets)............................................. 45
arranging for polar plots ...................... 44 smoothing ............................................ 4
column statistics ............................... 213 smoothing 2D high-frequency
contour plots................................48, 321 data ................................................ 489
converting bubble plot area.................. 46 smoothing 3D mesh data ................... 493
converting data to diameters for sorting.............................................. 240
bubble plots ...................................... 46 stacking............................................ 497
converting date and time data to ternary graphs................................... 343
numeric data ................................... 664 transposing ....................................... 244
converting numeric data to date and unindexing ................................ 254, 498
time data ........................................ 666 using transform language................... 511
converting to mesh format ..................... 4 viewing for embedded graphs .............. 75
copying and pasting from other X,Y, many Z for contour and mesh
applications .................................... 205 plots ................................................. 48
curve fitting date and time data .......... 663 XY values for polar plots..................... 44
cutting.............................................. 242 data brushing..........................223, 250, 252
deleting ..................................... 242–243 data feedback
entering............................................ 256 set colors on worksheet ..................... 223
entering into a worksheet................... 202 data format
exporting.......................................... 211 3D bar chart........................................ 24
generating random data ..................... 511 3D graphs........................................... 24
highlighting outliers .......................... 252 3D line plot ........................................ 24
importing ................... 204–205, 210, 250 3D mesh plot ...................................... 24
indexing .................................... 254, 497 3D scatter plot .................................... 24
inserting ........................................... 203 3D trajectory ...................................... 38
long form mesh format ........................ 48 3D waterfall ....................................... 38
mesh, converting to............................... 4 arrow line radar plot............................ 34
moving............................................. 242 box plots ............................................ 24
multiple-curve plots (ternary contour plot ...................................24, 38
triplets)............................................. 45 error and radio band radar plot ............. 34
normalizing for ternary graphs ........... 487 filled contour plot................................ 38
one column for multiple curves in graph styles ........................................ 25
polar plot.......................................... 44 graph types......................................... 24
pasting ............................................. 242 grouped horizontal bar chart ................ 37
plotting additional............................... 67 grouped horizontal bar chart with
plotting different data for current error bars.......................................... 37
plot .................................................. 63 grouped vertical bar chart .................... 35
plotting portion of ............................... 70

737
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

grouped vertical bar chart with error databases

bars .................................................. 35 importing ......................................... 205
horizontal bar chart ............................. 24 date and time
horizontal bar chart with error Options .............................................. 10
bars .................................................. 37 tick intervals..................................... 369
horizontal bar plot............................... 38 date and time axis scale
horizontal dot plot............................... 25 tick labels......................................... 381
line and scatter plot ............................. 24 tick labels for contour plots................ 332
line plot.............................................. 24 tick marks ........................................ 369
line plus radar plot .............................. 34 date and time data
long form mesh................................... 48 converting to numeric ....................... 238
multiple area plot ................................ 33 converting to numeric data ................ 664
multiple horizontal step plot ................ 29 curve fitting ...................................... 663
multiple regressions ............................ 25 formatting in worksheets ................... 236
multiple scatter plot ............................ 25 date and time format
multiple spline curves ......................... 29 date delimiters .................................. 233
multiple straight line ........................... 31 entering............................................ 203
multiple vertical area plot .................... 33 regional settings................................ 233
multiple vertical step plot .................... 29 using with Excel ............................... 236
pie chart ............................................. 24 worksheet display ...................... 230, 236
polar line plot ..................................... 34 date and time scales
polar plot............................................ 24 creating plots with............................. 355
polar scatter line plot........................... 34 date delimiters
polar scatter plot ................................. 34 date and time formats ........................ 233
radar line plot ..................................... 34 date/time axis scale............................... 350
radar scatter line plot........................... 34 Day Zero
radar scatter plot ................................. 34 leap years ......................................... 233
scatter plot.......................................... 24 setting in worksheets ......................... 233
simple area plot .................................. 33 dBase (.DBF)
simple horizontal bar chart .................. 37 importing ......................................... 204
simple scatter plot ............................... 25 .DBF files
simple spline curve ............................. 31 opening ..................................... 193–194
simple straight line.............................. 31 Debug Window .................................... 446
simple vertical bar chart ...................... 35 Intermediate tab ................................ 447
simple vertical plot.............................. 29 Stack tab .......................................... 447
stacked horizontal bar chart ................. 37 tabs .................................................. 447
stacked vertical bar chart ..................... 35 toolbar buttons.................................. 446
ternary ............................................... 24 Watch tab ......................................... 447
ternary line plot .................................. 35 decimal places
ternary scatter line plot ........................ 35 setting in worksheets ......................... 225
ternary scatter plot .............................. 35 degrees ................................................ 520
vector plot .......................................... 24 degrees of freedom
vertical area plot ................................. 33 regression results .............................. 656
vertical bar chart ................................. 24 Delete Cells... command ....................... 202
vertical bar chart with error bars .......... 35 Delete shortcut ..................................... 202
vertical box plot.................................. 38 deleting................................................ 242
vertical dot plot................................... 25 columns and rows ............................. 244
data format options data........................................... 242–243
Regression Wizard ............................ 639 graph titles ....................................... 148
data formats ......................................39, 47 legends............................................. 148
pie charts............................................ 39 objects ............................................. 148
polar plots .......................................... 44 density
data manipulation functions................... 560 changing pattern of plot fills ................ 88

738
 Piecewise

dependencies dot plot

parameter ......................................... 645 horizontal data format ......................... 25
derivatives vertical data format ............................. 25
computing ........................................ 454 dpi....................................................... 432
descriptions dragging
of transform functions ....................... 560 2D axes ............................................ 359
design Notebook Manager ........................... 181
graphing references............................. 21 objects ............................................. 154
principles of graphing ......................... 21 radial axes ........................................ 391
suggested reading ............................... 21 ternary axes ...................................... 398
DFFITS ............................................... 635 drawing
DFFITS test arrows.............................................. 149
regression results .............................. 659 ellipses............................................. 149
diagnostics lines ................................................. 149
influence .......................................... 659 objects ..........................................4, 149
regression results .............................. 658 Page toolbar ..................................... 149
dialog boxes drawing speed ........................................ 70
creating in SigmaPlot ........................ 444 drop lines
.DIF files adding to plots .............................99, 102
opening ..................................... 193–194 attributes ............................................ 99
diff ...................................................... 583 for single point ................................. 102
DIFF function ...................................... 525 modifying........................................... 99
differential equation dsinp.................................................... 583
solving ............................................. 526 duplicate column titles .......................... 198
digital pre-press Durbin-Watson ..................................... 632
preparing graphs ............................... 430 dynamic curve fitting ............................ 670
direction Dynamic Fit Wizard ............................. 670
customized error bars ........................ 274 creating new equations ...................... 637
error bars.......................................... 273 Equation Library............................... 671
reference lines .................................. 118 equation options ............................... 639
display formats examples .......................................... 680
date and time format .................. 230, 236 finishing the fit.................................. 678
numbers ........................................... 227 graphs .............................................. 679
displaying reports.............................................. 678
automatic legends ...................... 169–170 selecting data.................................... 671
axes ................................................. 356 selecting the equation........................ 671
contour fills ...................................... 324 selecting variables............................. 672
contour labels ............................ 328, 330 setting curve fit options ..................... 673
contour lines..................................... 323 setting graph options ......................... 676
grid lines .......................................... 387 setting numeric output options ........... 674
outlying data..................................... 252 setting results options........................ 675
page margins .................................... 171 using to add equations to graph
reference lines .................................. 118 pages....................................... 676–677
dist ...................................................... 583 viewing and editing code................... 638
distance viewing initial results ........................ 674
functions .......................................... 560
dividing
data into multiple columns................. 454 E
docking E notation ............................................ 217
Notebook Manager ........................... 181 E Notation Always
DOS files display ............................................. 227
importing ......................................... 204 E Notation When Needed
Dot Density Plot................................... 455 display ............................................. 227
edge lines............................................... 88

739
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

setting the color ................................ 151 row titles ................................... 244, 249
setting thickness ............................... 151 step size ........................................... 643
edges symbols in legends............................ 165
bar/box............................................. 151 text ........................................... 165, 167
plot line thickness ............................... 88 tolerance .......................................... 644
slice ................................................. 151 EPS files .............................................. 432
editing equation curves
automatic legends ............................. 169 extending to axes .............. 629–630,
axis tick labels .................................. 374 676–677, 699–700
axis titles ................................... 363–364 equations
contour labels ............................ 328, 334 adding to graph
embedded graphs ...........................74–75 pages.............................. 629–630,
equations.......................................... 638 676–677, 699–700
Graph Style Gallery graphs.................. 59 confidence intervals .......................... 115
macros ...................................... 439, 443 creating ............................................ 103
notebook items ................................. 193 creating within Notebook
notebook sections ............................. 193 Manager ......................................... 192
page format ...................................... 170 editing.............................................. 638
pasted graphs in other applications linear regression ............................... 115
using OLE2 .................................... 137 manually entering ............................. 103
radial axes tick labels ........................ 394 plotting ..................................... 103, 111
text .................................................. 167 prediction intervals ........................... 115
tick labels......................................... 376 setting options in the Dynamic Fit
ellipses Wizard ........................................... 672
drawing............................................ 149 setting options in the Global Fit
embedded graphs.................................... 74 Wizard .................................... 695–696
editing...........................................74–75 setting options in the Regression
opening inside SigmaPlot .................... 75 Wizard ........................................... 629
viewind data ....................................... 75 setting parameters ...................... 103, 106
viewing data ....................................... 75 solving ............................................. 108
Embedded graphs solving guidelines ..............................111
resizing .............................................. 75 equations, regression
embedding iterations .......................................... 642
objects ...................................... 138, 146 regression statements ........................ 669
Reports ............................................ 138 results .............................................. 645
embedding objects in graphs results messages ............................... 668
viewing as an icon ............................ 139 running again.................................... 646
engineering notation ............................. 227 saving results.................................... 646
as used in SigmaPlot ......................... 217 step size ........................................... 643
as used in SigmaStat ......................... 217 tolerance .......................................... 644
scientific notation.............................. 217 equations, transform
setting in worksheets ......................... 236 variables........................................... 523
tick labels......................................... 376 erf ....................................................... 583
using as axis values........................... 376 erfc...................................................... 584
entering error bar direction.......................... 273–274
column titles.............................. 244, 249 error bar plots
constraints ........................................ 641 arranging data..................................... 42
data.................................................. 256 error bars
data into worksheets.......................... 202 asymmetric....................................... 270
equations.......................................... 103 bidirectional data format...................... 25
Greek symbols.................................. 165 bidirectional error bars ........................ 25
iterations .......................................... 642 calculating........................................ 275
labels ............................................... 165 cap width ......................................... 272

740
 Piecewise

color ................................................ 272 limitations ........................................ 255

creating 2D plots with ....................... 266 opening ............................................ 255
creating grouped bar charts regression......................................... 256
with ............................................... 275 statistics ........................................... 255
custom directions.............................. 274 system requirements.............................. 5
direction........................................... 273 transforms ........................................ 256
generating ........................................ 275 using ......................................... 255–256
grouped bar charts............................. 278 using date and time format................. 236
horizontal data format ......................... 25 workbooks............................................ 3
line thickness.................................... 272 executing
mean computation method................. 275 one-line functions ............................. 518
methods for generating...................... 275 exp ...................................................... 584
modifying......................................... 272 expden ................................................. 585
modifying appearance ....................... 272 expdist ................................................. 585
multiple and regressions data expinv.................................................. 585
format .............................................. 25 exploding pie chart slices ............... 339–340
multiple data format ............................ 25 exponents
plot types ......................................... 266 numeric tick labels ..................... 330, 376
quartile plots..................................... 271 exporting
range plots........................................ 269 data associated with graph ................. 429
relative direction ............................... 273 data only, not the graph ..................... 429
simple and regression data graphs and pages............................... 126
format .............................................. 25 graphs as webpages........................... 429
simple data format .............................. 25 into HTML....................................... 427
vertical point plot................................ 25 reports.............................................. 415
error status messages to Systat ........................................... 213
regression results .............................. 669 worksheet data........................... 211, 256
European address and phone worksheets ....................................... 211
number ................................................ 20 worksheets as text files ...................... 213
evaluating extended transforms.............................. 518
F at .................................................. 108 extending
mathematical expresions ....................111 equation curves to
mathematical expressions .................. 108 axes ...........629–630, 676–677, 699–700
examples.........................................15, 701 Extreme Value Distribution scale ........... 356
2D graphs......................................11, 15
3D graphs......................................15, 17
dynamic curve fitting ........................ 680 F
of macro uses ................................... 447 F statistic
pie charts............................................ 11 regression results .............................. 656
polar plot............................................ 14 factor
transforms ........................................ 524 axis tick labels .................................. 376
Excel factorial ............................................... 586
importing ......................................... 208 FAQs ..................................................... 19
Excel 2007 files fast Fourier functions ............................ 560
importing ......................................... 204 fast page open ........................................ 10
Excel files fden function........................................ 586
batch processing ............................... 451 fdist function........................................ 587
Excel workbooks feedback
options ............................................... 10 mouse-over....................................... 130
Excel worksheets.................................. 256 fft ........................................................ 587
creating graphs ................................. 256 file formats........................................... 204
creating within Notebook File menu commands
Manager ......................................... 192 Page Setup ....................................... 171
files

741
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

as objects to insert............................. 145 date and time tick labels .................... 381
embedding objects ..................... 138, 146 labels ................................................... 3
exporting as non-notebook files.......... 126 numeric data in worksheets................ 236
importing data from ............204, 210, 250 text .................................................. 167
linking objects ........................... 138, 146 text in cells ....................................... 236
notebook templates .................... 133, 147 fractional defective control chart
opening non-notebook................ 193–194 transform ........................................... 530
saving .............................................. 181 frame lines
saving notebook................................ 181 color ................................................ 319
text .................................................. 210 line type ........................................... 319
fill color modifying......................................... 319
modifying......................................... 314 relative to origin ............................... 319
filled contour plots relative to viewer .............................. 319
creating ............................................ 321 freezing panes ...................................... 201
modifying......................................... 325 frequency
fills contour labels ................................... 328
area plots................................... 289–290 frequency plots
bar chart ........................................... 151 creating ............................................ 456
box plot............................................ 151 frequently asked questions ...................... 19
box plots .......................................... 282 function arguments ............................... 559
change color of pattern lines and Function dialog box .............................. 638
edge lines ....................................... 151 functions
change object fill background abs ................................................... 573
color .............................................. 151 accumulation .................................... 560
change object fill pattern ................... 151 ape................................................... 573
changing ............................................ 88 arccos .............................................. 574
contour plots..................................... 325 arcsin ............................................... 574
custom incrementing schemes.............. 92 arctan ............................................... 575
increment customizing ...................92, 99 area.................................................. 575
mesh plots ........................................ 314 area and distance............................... 560
modifying........................................... 91 avg................................................... 575
object ............................................... 151 block................................................ 576
pie chart ........................................... 151 blockheight....................................... 576
symbol ............................................. 151 blockwidth ....................................... 576
finv function......................................... 587 cauchyden ........................................ 577
.FIT files .............................................. 627 cauchydist ........................................ 577
Adding to library or notebook............ 627 cauchyinv......................................... 577
fit with weight ...................................... 642 cell................................................... 578
Fixed Decimal chisquareden .................................... 578
display ............................................. 227 chisquaredist .................................... 579
fonts chisquareinv ..................................... 579
Greek ............................................... 165 choose.............................................. 579
PostScript......................................... 165 col ................................................... 580
symbols............................................ 165 colL ................................................. 559
TrueType.......................................... 165 complex ........................................... 580
for ....................................................... 588 cos ................................................... 581
formats cosh ................................................. 581
submitting graphs for count......................................... 525, 581
publication ..................................... 430 curve fitting ...................................... 560
formatted worksheets.............................. 51 data.................................................. 582
formatting data manipulation ............................. 560
cells ................................................. 236 descriptions ...................................... 560
date and time data ............................. 236 diff............................................ 525, 583

742
 Piecewise

dist................................................... 583 normden........................................... 608

distance............................................ 560 normdist........................................... 608
dsinp ................................................ 583 norminv ........................................... 609
erf.................................................... 583 nth ................................................... 609
erfc .................................................. 584 numeric............................................ 560
exp................................................... 584 one-line............................................ 518
expden ............................................. 585 partdist............................................. 609
expdist ............................................. 585 polynomial ....................................... 610
expinv.............................................. 585 prec.................................................. 610
factorial............................................ 586 precision .......................................... 560
fast Fourier....................................... 560 put into............................................. 611
fden ................................................. 586 random............................................. 611
fdist ................................................. 587 random number................................. 560
fft .................................................... 587 range................................................ 560
finv .................................................. 587 real .................................................. 611
for.................................................... 588 rgbcolor ........................................... 612
fwhm ............................................... 589 round ............................................... 614
gammaden........................................ 589 runavg.............................................. 614
gammadist........................................ 590 sin.................................................... 615
gammainv ........................................ 590 sinh.................................................. 615
gaussian ........................................... 590 sinp.................................................. 615
histogram ......................................... 591 size .................................................. 616
if............................................... 525, 592 solving ...................................... 108, 111
IF..................................................... 524 sort .................................................. 616
if...then...else .................................... 592 special constructs.............................. 560
imaginary (img) ................................ 593 sqrt ........................................... 530, 617
int .................................................... 597 statistical .......................................... 560
interpolate ........................................ 597 stddev ................................526, 530, 617
inv ................................................... 598 stderr ............................................... 617
invcpx.............................................. 598 subblock........................................... 618
invfft................................................ 598 sum.................................................. 618
ln ..................................................... 599 tan ................................................... 619
log ................................................... 599 tanh.................................................. 619
logisden ........................................... 599 tden.................................................. 619
logisdist ........................................... 600 tdist.................................................. 619
logisinv ............................................ 600 tinv .................................................. 620
loglogisden....................................... 601 total ...................................525–526, 620
loglogisdist....................................... 601 trigonometric .................................... 560
loglogisinv ....................................... 601 weibullden........................................ 621
lognormden ...................................... 602 weibulldist........................................ 621
lognormdist ...................................... 602 weibullinv ........................................ 621
lognorminv....................................... 603 worksheet......................................... 560
lookup.............................................. 603 x25 .................................................. 622
lowess.............................................. 604 x50 .................................................. 622
lowpass ............................................ 605 x75 .................................................. 623
max.................................................. 605 xatymax ........................................... 624
mean ..................................525–526, 606 xwtr ................................................. 624
median ............................................. 606 fwhm ................................................... 589
min .................................................. 606
miscellaneous ................................... 560
missing ............................................ 606 G
mod ................................................. 607 galleries
mulcpx............................................. 608 graph style.......................................... 57
gammaden ........................................... 589

743
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

gammadist ........................................... 590 contour plot ........................................ 38

gammainv ............................................ 590 error and radio band radar plot ............. 34
gap color.............................................. 151 filled contour plot................................ 38
gap colors in line .................................... 85 grouped horizontal bar chart ................ 37
gaussian ............................................... 590 grouped horizontal bar chart with
Gaussian Cumulative Distribution.......... 458 error bars.......................................... 37
generating grouped vertical bar chart .................... 35
error bars.......................................... 275 grouped vertical bar chart with error
linear regression lines................. 112, 114 bars .................................................. 35
mesh data ............................................. 4 horizontal bar chart with error
global bars .................................................. 37
changing multiple page objects .......... 154 horizontal bar plot............................... 38
global curve fitting................................ 694 Horizontal dot plot .............................. 25
Global Fit Wizard ................................. 694 horizontal point plot ............................ 25
creating new equations ...................... 637 hortizontal error bars ........................... 25
Equation Library............................... 695 line plus radar plot .............................. 34
equation options ............................... 639 multiple area plot ................................ 33
finishing the fit.................................. 700 multiple error bars............................... 25
reports.............................................. 700 multiple error bars and
selecting data.................................... 694 regressions........................................ 25
selecting parameters to share ............. 695 multiple horizontal step plot ................ 29
selecting the equation........................ 695 multiple regressions ............................ 25
selecting variables............................. 696 multiple scatter plot ............................ 25
setting graph options ......................... 699 multiple spline curves ......................... 29
setting numeric output options ........... 698 multiple straight line ........................... 31
setting results options........................ 698 multiple vertical area plot .................... 33
using to add equations to graph multiple vertical step plot .................... 29
pages....................................... 699–700 polar line plot ..................................... 34
viewing and editing code................... 638 polar scatter line plot........................... 34
viewing initial results ........................ 697 polar scatter plot ................................. 34
global text changes ............................... 167 radar line plot ..................................... 34
Go to... radar scatter line plot........................... 34
worksheet cell................................... 201 radar scatter plot ................................. 34
gradient colors simple area plot .................................. 33
creating ............................................ 454 simple error bars ................................. 25
grads.................................................... 520 simple error bars and regression........... 25
graph defaults..................................... 2, 10 simple horizontal bar chart .................. 37
graph pages simple horizontal step plot................... 29
creating within Notebook simple regression ................................ 25
Manager ......................................... 192 simple scatter plot ............................... 25
naming............................................. 192 simple spline curve ........................29, 31
printing ............................................ 127 simple straight line.............................. 31
selecting objects ............................... 128 simple vertical bar chart ...................... 35
graph style simple vertical step plot....................... 29
custom ............................................... 57 stacked horizontal bar chart ................. 37
Graph Style Gallery ............................ 57 stacked vertical bar chart ..................... 35
multiple straight lines.......................... 29 ternary line plot .................................. 35
saving ................................................ 57 ternary scatter line plot ........................ 35
simple straight line.............................. 29 ternary scatter plot .............................. 35
graph style data format vertical area plot ................................. 33
3D trajectory ...................................... 38 vertical bar chart with error bars .......... 35
3D waterfall ....................................... 38 vertical box plot.................................. 38
arrow line radar plot............................ 34 vertical dot plot................................... 25

744
 Piecewise

Graph Style Gallery box plots .......................................... 281

adding styles....................................... 58 centering .......................................... 163
applying graph styles .......................... 58 column averaged error bar plots ........... 42
creating graphs ..............................57–58 contour plots....................................... 15
editing graphs ..................................... 59 copying ............................................ 136
using .................................................. 57 creating .............................................. 50
graph styles cutting.............................................. 136
custom graph styles............................. 58 data format for graph styles ................. 25
Graph Style Gallery ............................ 58 data format for graph types .................. 24
using the Graph Style displaying automatic
Gallery ........................................57–58 legends.................................... 169–170
graph titles editing in Graph Style Gallery ............. 59
deleting ............................................ 148 editing in other applications using
graph toolbars OLE2 ............................................. 137
2D, 3D ............................................. 130 grid lines .......................................... 387
graph type data format grouped bar charts...................... 275–276
3D bar chart........................................ 24 grouping/ungrouping
3D line plot ........................................ 24 objects/text ..................................... 157
3D mesh plot ...................................... 24 hiding .............................................. 147
3D scatter plot .................................... 24 hiding automatic legend ............. 169–170
box plots ............................................ 24 hiding graph titles ............................. 148
contour plot ........................................ 24 hiding on page .................................. 147
horizontal bar chart ............................. 24 hiding using shortcut menu................ 147
line and scatter plot ............................. 24 legends............................................. 165
line plot.............................................. 24 modifying 2D plots .................... 112, 118
pie chart ............................................. 24 modifying type/style ........................... 65
polar plot............................................ 24 modifying using Property
scatter plot.......................................... 24 Browser............................................ 61
ternary ............................................... 24 moving...................................... 154–155
vector plot .......................................... 24 multiple curves, same X or Y............... 41
vertical bar chart ................................. 24 pasting without data .......................... 141
Graph Wizard picking different data for current
additional axes.................................. 301 plot .................................................. 63
area plots.......................................... 284 pie charts............................................ 11
bubble plots...................................... 297 plotting data ....................................... 42
changing graph type/style .................... 65 plotting multiple curves....................... 41
creating 3D graphs ..................... 309–311 plotting X or Y using row
creating graphs ................................... 52 numbers ........................................... 42
creating mesh plots ........................... 313 polar plots .......................................... 14
multiple plots.................................... 301 references for design ........................... 21
vector plots....................................... 298 saving .............................................. 181
graphs scaling ...................................... 154–155
2D example ........................................ 11 scatter, 3D .......................................... 48
3D example ...................................15, 17 selecting............................................. 62
adding drop lines .........................99, 102 selecting style ................................25, 50
adding plots........................................ 67 selecting type...................................... 24
adding to page .................................. 130 sizing ........................................ 154–155
aligning............................................ 163 stacked bar chart ................................. 43
anatomy of ......................................... 10 styles ................................................. 25
arranging on a page.................... 158, 162 symbols.........................................76, 82
asymmetric error bar plots ................... 42 types .................................................. 24
automatic legends ............................. 168 using Paste Special............................ 137
axes ................................................. 319 vector plot .......................................... 44

745
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

viewing on page................................ 147 notebooks in Notebook

working on pages.............. 146–147, Manager ......................................... 180
150, 154, 175 radial axis labels ............................... 394
zooming in/out.................................. 131 statistics ........................................... 215
graphs, 2D ........................................... 263 tick marks ........................................ 364
Greek symbols high-frequency data
entering............................................ 165 smoothing ........................................ 489
Gregorian calender ............................... 233 highlighting
grid outliers............................................. 252
changing colors................................. 221 histogram............................................. 591
grids Histogram Wizard
aligning graphs and objects................ 163 using ................................................ 120
color ................................................ 385 histograms
displaying in front/behind.................. 385 bin values......................................... 120
graph back planes ............................. 387 creating ..................................... 120, 123
hiding .............................................. 387 histogram transform function............. 120
line types.......................................... 385 Histogram Wizard...................... 120, 123
mesh graphs ......................................... 4 [Link] transform ................... 123
modifying......................................... 319 macro for creating............................. 453
snap-to ............................................. 164 homoscedasticity
turning on/off ................................... 387 constant variance test ........................ 658
grouped bar charts horizontal bar chart
column averages ............................... 278 data format ......................................... 24
creating ..................................... 275–276 horizontal dot plot
creating with error bars...................... 275 data format ......................................... 25
error bars.......................................... 278 horizontal error bars
examples .......................................... 275 data format ......................................... 25
spacing bars...................................95, 99 horizontal point plot
grouped data ........................................ 264 data format ......................................... 25
grouping HTML
objects/text ....................................... 157 exporting graphs into ........................ 427
guidelines
equation solving ................................111
for submitting graphs for I
publication ..................................... 430 icons
changing display for inserted
objects............................................ 145
H changing display for pasted
halting ................................................. 170 objects............................................ 143
hardware displaying inserted objects as............. 145
system requirements.............................. 5 displaying pasted objects as ............... 143
Help system on graph pages.................................. 139
using .................................................. 19 identifying
hiding area plot intersections........................ 288
automatic legends ...................... 169–170 if ......................................................... 592
axes ................................................. 356 IF function ........................................... 525
axis titles .......................................... 364 logical operators ............................... 524
contour lines..................................... 323 if...then...else........................................ 592
graph titles ....................................... 148 ignoring
graphs on page.................................. 147 outliers............................................. 250
graphs using shortcut menu ............... 147 imaginary (img).................................... 593
grid lines .......................................... 387 importing
legends............................................. 148 Axon files......................................... 211
data by copying and pasting............... 205

746
 Piecewise

data files.............................204, 210, 250 integrating under curve transform .......... 525
data from multiple Excel files ............ 451 interpolate............................................ 597
databases.......................................... 205 Interpolating data
Excel files ........................................ 208 setting mesh range values .................. 493
Lotus 1–2–3 files .............................. 209 interpreting results
MicroSoft Excel files ........................ 209 regression.................................. 645–646
ODBC databases............................... 205 intersections
Quattro files...................................... 209 identifying in area plots ..................... 288
SPSS files......................................... 211 intervals
text files ........................................... 210 confidence/prediction ................. 114, 214
Importing setting for contour plots..................... 327
SigmaPlot files.................................. 209 tick mark values assigned to a
SigmaScan files ................................ 209 worksheet ....................................... 370
SigmaStat files.................................. 209 inv....................................................... 598
inches invcpx.................................................. 598
page units......................................... 173 invfft ................................................... 598
incrementing iterations
lines ................................................... 86 convergence ..................................... 626
symbol color....................................... 78 entering............................................ 642
incrementing colors exceed maximum numbers ................ 668
chart fills ............................................ 91 more iterations.................................. 668
incrementing line types ........................... 85
incrementing schemes
customized ......................................... 92 J
independent graph pages ....................... 193 .jfl files .................................................... 6
indexed data....................................39, 264 .jgg files ................................................... 6
indexing data................................. 254, 497 .jnb files
creating ............................................ 254 saving .............................................. 181
unindexing data ................................ 254 .JNB files
influence .............................................. 635 exporting as non-notebook files.......... 126
influence diagnostics .jnt files.................................................... 6
regression results .............................. 659 JNT files .............................................. 158
influential point tests............................. 659 .JNT files
.ini files.................................................... 6 defined ................................................. 2
Insert Cells shortcut .............................. 202 journals
Insert Date and Time command preparing graphs for
for reports ........................................ 420 publication ..................................... 432
inserting
columns and rows ............................. 243
data.................................................. 203 K
displaying inserted objects as Kaplan-Meier survival curve ................. 485
icons .............................................. 145 key column .......................................... 240
graphs into Microsoft Word ............... 458 keyboard
linked objects ................................... 145 moving around worksheet.................. 201
modifying inserted object icons.......... 145 moving graphs and objects using
new object........................................ 145 arrow keys...................................... 156
objects from file................................ 145 keystrokes
Insertion mode functions .......................................... 201
turning on/off ................................... 203 Kolmogorov-Smirnov test ..................... 632
installing SigmaPlot
serial numbers ...................................... 6
types of folders ..................................... 6
L
int........................................................ 597 label notation ....................................... 376
labeling

747
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

with symbols, text from column.......... 459 light source

labels 3D graphs......................................... 315
adding to page .................................. 165 line and scatter plot
aligning.........................................3, 163 multiple straight line data format .......... 31
axis titles .......................................... 364 simple straight line data format ............ 31
axis values........................................ 380 line and scatter plots
column titles.............................. 244, 249 adding drop lines .........................99, 102
column type...................................... 383 creating ............................................ 263
contour...................................... 328, 330 data format ......................................... 24
creating ..................................... 165, 167 examples .......................................... 261
editing tick ....................................... 376 line plot data formats
entering non-keyboard multiple horizontal step plot ................ 29
characters ....................................... 165 multiple spline curves ......................... 29
formatting ............................................ 3 multiple vertical step plot .................... 29
frequency of contour ......................... 328 simple horizontal step plot................... 29
grouping/ungrouping......................... 157 simple spline curve ............................. 29
numeric tick ..................................... 330 vertical step plot ................................. 29
radial axes ........................................ 394 line plots
reference lines .................................. 118 3D data format.................................... 24
rotating ............................................ 165 adding drop lines .............................. 102
rotating contour ................................ 328 adding drop lines to......................99, 102
row titles ................................... 244, 249 color .................................................. 85
suffixes/prefixes................................ 328 creating ............................................ 263
tick mark .......................................... 380 data format ......................................... 24
using column and row title dialog examples .......................................... 261
box ................................................ 245 midpoint step...................................... 85
using for column titles....................... 246 multiple straight lines.......................... 29
using for row titles ............................ 247 step .................................................... 85
landscape straight............................................... 85
page orientation ................................ 172 symbols.........................................76, 82
layering in front/behind line type
grid lines .......................................... 385 frame lines ....................................... 319
reference lines .................................. 118 modifying......................................... 151
layout reference lines .................................. 118
graph design references ....................... 21 line/scatter graphs
layout files ............................................. 10 asymmetric error bars........................ 270
leap years............................................. 233 error bars.......................................... 266
legends ................................................ 148 quartile plots..................................... 271
adding symbols................................. 165 range plots........................................ 269
adding to page .................................. 165 symbols.........................................76, 82
automatic ......................................3, 168 linear axis scale ............................. 348, 376
creating ..................................... 165, 167 linear interpolation
deleting ............................................ 148 for computing percentile
editing.............................................. 169 methods.......................................... 283
hiding .............................................. 169 linear regression dialog box
locking............................................. 170 parameter values transform................ 530
restoring to default settings................ 169 standard deviation...................... 529–530
showing ........................................... 169 linear regressions
lessons calculating........................................ 115
regression......................................... 701 confidence/prediction intervals........... 114
leverage ............................................... 635 defined ............................................. 115
leverage test generating ................................. 112, 114
regression results .............................. 659 multiple curves ................................. 112

748
 Piecewise

polynomial order .............................. 112 loglogisdist .......................................... 601

results .............................................. 114 loglogisinv ........................................... 601
lines lognormden.......................................... 602
adding arrow heads ........................... 152 lognormdist.......................................... 602
alternating colors in lines..................... 85 lognorminv .......................................... 603
assigning to worksheet ........................ 92 lookup ................................................. 603
attributes ................................... 357–358 Lotus 1-2-3 (WK*)
axis ........................................... 357–358 importing ......................................... 204
changing end attributes...................... 152 lournals
changing thickness.............................. 85 preparing graphs for
changing type ..................................... 85 publication ..................................... 430
color .................................................. 85 lowess.................................................. 604
contour............................................. 323 lowpass................................................ 605
custom incrementing schemes.............. 92
drawing............................................ 149
drop ............................................99, 102 M
error bars.......................................... 272 macro language
frame ............................................... 319 creating macros using........................ 438
grid .................................................. 387 macro programming language ............... 443
grid line types................................... 385 macro window
increment customizing ...................92, 99 appearance ....................................... 442
incrementing .................................85–86 Macro Window..................................... 441
layering in front/behind symbols .......... 85 opening ............................................ 438
linear regression ........................ 112, 114 options ............................................. 442
mesh plots ........................................ 314 Macro Window toolbar ......................... 440
midpoint step plots.............................. 85 macros ..........................441, 451–456,
modifying properties ......................... 151 458–460, 462–464, 479, 485–486
radial axes ................................. 391, 394 adding macros to macros ................... 444
reference .......................................... 281 adding procedures............................. 445
setting intervals for contour creating ............................................ 438
plots ............................................... 327 creating as menu commands .............. 449
smoothed............................................ 85 creating custom dialog boxes ............. 444
spline curves....................................... 85 creating user-defined functions .......... 446
step plots ............................................ 85 creating within Notebook
type.................................................... 85 Manager ......................................... 192
linking editing....................................... 439, 443
objects ...................................... 138, 146 examples .......................................... 447
Reports ............................................ 138 for Microsoft Word/Excel.................. 448
links included with SigmaPlot.................... 449
viewing object links .......................... 146 list of ............................................... 450
ln......................................................... 599 programming language...................... 443
locking running ............................................ 449
legends............................................. 170 running from a command line ............ 448
log....................................................... 599 setting options .................................. 442
log axes ............................................... 376 user-defined functions ....................... 445
logarithmic axis scale..................... 348, 376 using Macro Window toolbar............. 440
logical operators using the Add Procedure dialog
transforms ........................................ 524 box ................................................ 445
logisden ............................................... 599 using the Debug Window .................. 446
logisdist ............................................... 600 using the Object Browser .................. 445
logisinv................................................ 600 window options ................................ 442
logit axis scale...................................... 349 magnitude data
loglogisden .......................................... 601 plotting as vector .............................. 486
Main Button............................................. 8

749
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

major ticks opening SigmaPlot within.................. 448

date and time axis scale ..................... 369 Microsoft Excel (.XLS)
Marquardt-Levenberg importing ......................................... 204
algorithm .................................... 626, 643 Microsoft Word
Marquardt-Levenberg Algorithm inserting graphs ................................ 458
references......................................... 627 opening SigmaPlot within.................. 448
max ..................................................... 605 millimeters
maximum value (max) page units......................................... 173
column statistics ............................... 214 min...................................................... 606
mean.................................................... 606 minimum positive value (min pos)
column statistics ............................... 214 column statistics ............................... 214
error bar computation method ............ 275 minimum value (min)
mean computation method .................... 275 column statistics ............................... 214
MEAN function............................. 525–526 Minitab
mean lines............................................ 281 importing ......................................... 204
box plots .......................................... 282 minor ticks
mean squares date and time axes............................. 369
regression results .............................. 656 modifying......................................... 369
median................................................. 606 missing ................................................ 606
median lines......................................... 281 missing values
menu commands column statistics ............................... 214
creating using macros........................ 449 .MOC files
menus opening ..................................... 193–194
creating menu commands using Mocha worksheets ................................ 209
macros ........................................... 449 Mocha Worksheets
merging importing ......................................... 204
columns ........................................... 459 mod ..................................................... 607
mesh data modifying
converting ............................................ 4 2D plots .................................... 112, 118
generating ............................................ 4 3D graph view .................................. 315
interpolating ......................................... 4 adding plots........................................ 67
mesh lines area plots................................... 289–290
modifying......................................... 314 attributes for new pages..................... 134
mesh plots automatic legends ............................. 168
3D data format.................................... 24 axes .......................................... 319, 356
creating ............................................ 313 axis range by dragging ...................... 398
examples .......................................... 306 axis scale types .......................... 353, 356
fills/color.......................................... 314 background colors............................... 91
light source....................................... 315 box fills/color ................................... 282
mesh data ............................................. 4 box plots .......................................... 281
mesh lines ........................................ 314 box widths........................................ 282
modifying lines/fills .......................... 314 category scales.................................. 354
plotting data ....................................... 48 contour labels ............................ 328, 330
smoothing data ..................................... 4 contour lines..................................... 323
transparent........................................ 313 contour plots.............................. 323, 330
X,Y,Z values....................................... 48 drawn objects ............................ 150, 154
messages drop lines ....................................99, 102
completion status .............................. 668 edges ................................................. 88
error status ....................................... 669 embedded graphs ...........................74–75
regression results .............................. 668 error bar appearance.......................... 272
regression status ............................... 645 error bar computation method ............ 275
metafiles .............................................. 137 error bar direction ............................. 273
Microsoft Excel error bars.......................................... 272

750
 Piecewise

fill color ........................................... 314 2D axes ............................................ 359

fills .................................................... 91 2D axes manually ............................. 359
frame lines ....................................... 319 2D axes with mouse .......................... 359
gap color .......................................... 151 around the worksheet ........................ 201
graph lighting ................................... 315 axes to precise location...................... 359
graph perspective .............................. 315 axes with the Property Browser.......... 359
graph rotation ................................... 315 axis titles .......................................... 364
graph styles ........................................ 65 data.................................................. 242
graph types......................................... 65 graphs ....................................... 154–155
graphs using Property Browser ............ 61 graphs and objects using arrow
grid lines .......................................... 319 keys ............................................... 156
grids ...........................................61, 385 notebook items between
inserted object ico?s .......................... 145 notebooks ................................ 193, 195
line color .......................................... 151 objects ...................................... 154–155
line end attributes.............................. 152 objects to back/front.......................... 157
line thickness.................................... 151 radial axis.................................. 391, 394
line type ........................................... 151 to worksheet cell............................... 201
mesh lines ........................................ 314 moving objects ..................................... 154
mesh plots ........................................ 314 mulcpx ................................................ 608
modifying........................................... 91 multiple area plots
multiple selected objects.................... 154 creating ............................................ 286
multiple text labels............................ 167 multiple axes
object fills ........................................ 151 creating ............................................ 302
object links....................................... 146 multiple curves
page color ........................................ 174 creating ............................................ 264
page view......................................... 131 plotting data ..................................... 264
pasted object icon ............................. 143 regression options ............................. 112
patterns .............................................. 91 using category data ........................... 264
pie charts.......................................... 340 multiple error bars
plot pattern line thickness .................... 88 data format ......................................... 25
polar axes......................................... 394 multiple error bars and regressions
polar plot axes .................................. 388 data format ......................................... 25
polar plots .......................................... 44 multiple independent variables .............. 639
radial axes ........................................ 394 multiple plots ......................................... 67
radial axes arc............................ 391, 394 additional axes.................................. 301
radial axes tick labels ........................ 394 multiple regressions
symbol attributes ................................ 76 data format ......................................... 25
symbols.........................................76, 82 multiple scatter plot
ternary axis direction......................... 401 data format ......................................... 25
ternary plots ..................................... 345 multiple spline curve
ternary tick labels.............................. 406 format ................................................ 29
ternary tick marks ............................. 405 multiple straight line
text formatting .................................. 167 data format ......................................... 31
tick labels......................................... 380 multiple users........................................... 6
tick marks ........................................ 319 multiple Z columns................................. 47
titles and legends ................................ 61
whisker cap widths............................ 281
modifying for new pages....................... 134 N
mouse naming
moving objects ................................. 154 graph pages ............................... 192–193
sizing objects.................................... 155 notebook files ............................ 192–193
mouse-over feedback ............................ 130 notebook items ................................. 193
moving sections ..................................... 192–193
worksheets ................................ 192–193

751
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

natural log axis scale............................. 348 regression......................................... 657

needle plot normalize............................................. 487
creating .............................................. 95 normden function ................................. 608
new normdist function ................................. 608
equation ........................................... 192 norminv function .................................. 609
Excel worksheets .............................. 192 notebook files
graph pages ...................................... 192 creating ............................................ 192
graphs with templates........................ 131 naming...................................... 192–193
macros ............................................. 192 opening ..................................... 193–194
notebook files and items .................... 192 saving .............................................. 181
pages with templates ......................... 131 template notebook files............... 133, 147
reports.............................................. 192 viewing ..................................... 193–194
sections ............................................ 192 notebook items ..................................... 193
worksheets ....................................... 192 creating within Notebook
new features ............................................. 4 Manager ......................................... 192
noisy data cutting/copying between
smoothing ........................................ 489 notebooks ................................ 193, 195
non-keyboard characters ....................... 165 exporting as non-notebook files.......... 126
non-notebook files naming............................................. 192
exporting to original file format.......... 126 opening ..................................... 193–194
opening ..................................... 193–194 printing selected notebook
nonlinear regression.............................. 529 items .............................................. 184
assumption checking ......................... 632 saving .............................................. 181
confidence intervals .......................... 634 viewing ..................................... 193–194
constant variance .............................. 632 Notebook Manager
Cook’s Distance................................ 635 cutting and copying between
DFFITS............................................ 635 notebooks ....................................... 195
Durbin-Watson ................................. 632 docking ............................................ 181
influence .......................................... 635 dragging........................................... 181
Kolmogorov-Smirnov test ................. 632 opening and closing notebooks .......... 180
leverage ........................................... 635 sizing ............................................... 181
normality.......................................... 632 notebooks
power............................................... 635 closing ............................................. 180
prediction intervals ........................... 634 opening ............................................ 180
PRESS Prediction Error .................... 634 password protecting .......................... 185
setting options ....................629, 674, 698 viewing ............................................ 180
view in regression reports.................. 633 novice prompting.................................... 10
nonlinear regression reports................... 632 nstalling SigmaPlot................................... 5
confidence intervals .......................... 634 nth....................................................... 609
include confidence intervals............... 634 nudging
predicted values ................................ 633 graphs and objects............................. 156
prediction intervals ........................... 634 numbers
raw residuals .................................... 633 display formats ................................. 227
report flagged values only.................. 633 functions .......................................... 560
Studentized deleted residuals ............. 633 options ............................................... 10
Studentized residuals......................... 633 precision functions............................ 560
normal random generation functions.............. 560
using as source template for new numeric axis values
pages.............................................. 134 factoring out ..................................... 376
normality ............................................. 632 numeric data
P values............................................ 632 converting to date and time
testing .............................................. 632 data ......................................... 238, 666
normality test formatting in worksheets ................... 236

752
 Piecewise

setting decimal places in working on pages.............. 146–147,

worksheets...................................... 236 150, 154, 175
setting engineering notation in ODBC databases .................................. 205
worksheets...................................... 236 importing Excel ................................ 208
numeric functions ................................. 560 OLE
numeric values viewing objects as icons .................... 139
changing contour labels..................... 330 OLE2
tick labels......................................... 330 embedding........................................ 137
linking ............................................. 137
pasting graphs................................... 137
O one way analysis of variance (ANOVA)
Object Browser .................................... 445 transform ........................................... 525
Object Properties dialog one way anova
specifying size .................................. 155 indexing data .................................... 497
Object Properties dialog box unindexing data ................................ 498
axis attributes ................................... 358 one-line functions
modifying line .................................. 151 executing.......................................... 518
specifying location............................ 155 opening
objects embedded graphs ................................ 75
aligning.........................................4, 163 Excel worksheets .............................. 255
change background color................... 151 non-notebook files ..................... 193–194
change color of fill pattern lines and notebook files ............................ 193–194
edge lines ....................................... 151 notebook items .......................... 193–194
change fill patterns ............................ 151 notebooks ........................................ 180
copying ............................................ 136 SigmaPlot as a command line ............ 448
cutting.............................................. 136 SigmaPlot in other applications.......... 448
displaying as icons ..................... 143, 145 worksheets ....................................... 194
dragging........................................... 154 opening files............................................. 8
drawing.........................................4, 149 opening worksheets .............................. 197
editing linked............................. 138, 146 operators
embedding................................. 138, 146 transform operators ........................... 521
fills .................................................. 151 options
grouping/ungrouping......................... 157 automatic legends ............................... 10
inserting from file ............................. 145 backup files ........................................ 10
inserting linked objects...................... 145 column statistics ..........................10, 215
inserting new .................................... 145 Excel workbooks ................................ 10
linking ...................................... 138, 146 fast page open..................................... 10
modifying.................................. 150, 154 for assumption checking.................... 632
modifying object links....................... 146 graph defaults ..................................... 10
mouse, using to size .......................... 155 layout files.......................................... 10
moving...................................... 154–155 macro window .................................. 442
moving front/back............................. 157 nonlinear regression
multiple selection.............................. 154 reports..................................... 632–633
pasting as linked/embedded ............... 143 novice prompting................................ 10
pasting as specified file type .............. 143 numbers ............................................. 10
pasting to a page ........................ 137, 147 page ................................................... 10
scaling ...................................... 154–155 residuals........................................... 633
selecting on a page............................ 128 retain window states............................ 10
set pattern and edge line set auto recovery................................. 10
thickness ........................................ 151 setting date and time ........................... 10
sizing ........................................ 154–155 statistics ............................................. 10
using the Paste Special templates............................................ 10
command........................................ 137 worksheet........................................... 10
viewing object links .......................... 146

753
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

Options button specifying graph and object size.......... 155

Regression Wizard ............................ 638 templates................................... 133, 147
options, regression................................ 642 text and labels................................... 165
step size ........................................... 643 units of measurement ........................ 173
tolerance .......................................... 644 viewing graphs ................................. 147
origin axes ........................................... 315 working with graphs .......... 146–147,
other values 150, 154, 175
column statistics ............................... 214 working with
outliers objects............... 146–147, 150, 154, 175
box plots .......................................... 281 zooming in/out.................................. 131
highlighting ...................................... 252 page objects
removing.......................................... 250 selecting on a page............................ 128
Overwrite mode.................................... 203 Page toolbar ......................................... 149
pages
selecting graphs ................................ 128
P selecting objects ............................... 128
P value selecting text .................................... 128
regression results .............................. 656 paper size............................................. 172
P values for normality and constant parameters
variance ............................................. 632 coefficient of variation ...................... 645
page constraints ........................................ 640
adding graphs ................................... 130 convergence message ........................ 668
aligning objects/graphs...................... 163 default settings in Regression
automatic legends ............................. 168 Wizard ........................................... 640
changing format................................ 170 defined but not referenced ................. 669
clearing graphs/objects ...................... 148 dependencies .................................... 645
color ................................................ 174 entering............................................ 640
copying graphs ................................. 130 invalid.............................................. 668
copying objects/graphs ...................... 136 missing ............................................ 669
creating graphs for current................. 130 regression results .............................. 645
creating new objects to insert............. 145 setting in equations ........................... 106
cutting objects/graphs........................ 136 standard error ................................... 645
deleting objects................................. 148 viewing constraints ........................... 646
editing format ................................... 170 parametric equations
embedding objects ..................... 138, 146 plotting ............................................ 462
exporting as non-notebook file ........... 126 partdist ................................................ 609
hiding graph titles ............................. 148 password protecting data....................... 428
hiding graphs.................................... 147 passwords
hiding legends .................................. 148 password protecting .......................... 428
inserting objects from files................. 145 protecting notebooks ......................... 185
legends............................................. 165 Paste shortcut ....................................... 202
linking objects ........................... 138, 146 Paste Special
moving between command ......................................... 137
notebooks ................................ 193, 195 displaying pasted objects as
moving objects/graphs................ 154–155 icons .............................................. 143
naming...................................... 192–193 embedding objects ..................... 138, 146
paper size ......................................... 172 linking objects ........................... 138, 146
pasting graphs................................... 130 modifying pasted object icons............ 143
pasting graphs/objects ....................... 137 pasting graphs without data ............... 141
setting Options.................................... 10 pasting
setup ................................................ 170 data........................................... 205, 242
sizing graphs and objects............ 154–155 graphs as metafiles ............................ 137
specifying graph and object graphs to page .................................. 130
location .......................................... 155

754
 Piecewise

graphs to PowerPoint ........................ 459 custom incrementing schemes.............. 92

graphs/objects with the Paste Special dummy............................................. 302
command........................................ 137 frequency ......................................... 456
objects ............................................. 137 layering lines in front/behind
transpose .......................................... 244 symbols............................................ 85
patterns multiple.............................................. 67
assigning to worksheet ........................ 92 multiple axes for single ..................... 302
changing ............................................ 88 needle plot.......................................... 95
changing color lines of fills and offsetting radial axes ......................... 391
edges.............................................. 151 pattern line thickness........................... 88
changing density of plot fills ................ 88 picking different data .......................... 63
changing object fills .......................... 151 Piper plots ........................................ 460
modifying........................................... 91 polar axes......................................... 394
plot line thickness ............................... 88 selecting............................................. 62
set pattern and edge line survival curve ................................... 485
thickness ........................................ 151 symbols.........................................76, 82
setting thickness ............................... 151 vector plots....................................... 486
percentile methods plots, 2D
box plots .......................................... 283 box plots .......................................... 281
percentiles............................................ 283 creating with asymmetric error
performing bars ................................................ 270
extended transforms .......................... 518 creating with error bars...................... 266
perspective grouped bar charts...................... 275–276
3D graphs......................................... 315 line .................................................. 261
picking data line and scatter.................................. 261
different columns to plot...................... 63 linear regression lines................. 112, 114
different data for current plot ............... 63 modifying 2D ............................ 112, 118
pie charts ............................................... 91 multiple curves ................................. 264
adding exploding slices .............. 339–340 reference lines .................................. 281
creating .............................................. 39 scatter .............................................. 261
data format ......................................... 24 types available ....................261–262, 280
data formats........................................ 39 using category data ........................... 264
example ............................................. 11 plots, 3D
examples .......................................... 337 bar charts ......................................... 307
fills .............................................91, 151 mesh ................................................ 306
modifying......................................... 340 scatter and line plots.......................... 305
plotting data ....................................... 39 waterfall plots................................... 308
rotating ............................................ 339 plotting
slice edges........................................ 151 equations onto existing graphs ........... 105
Pie charts magnitude data as vector ................... 486
sample graph ...................................... 13 polar and parametric equations........... 462
Piper plots............................................ 460 portion of data .................................... 70
Plain Text (.TXT, .PRN,.DAT,.ASC) saved equations................................. 107
importing ......................................... 204 plotting data
plot fills 2D graphs........................................... 42
pattern density .................................... 88 3D graphs........................................... 48
plot styles additional data .................................... 67
multiple curves ................................. 264 asymmetric error bar plots ................... 42
plot types bubble plots........................................ 46
error bars.......................................... 266 column averaged error bar plots ........... 42
plots contour plots....................................... 48
about................................................ 301 multiple curves ............................41, 264
adding new......................................... 67 multiple curves, same X or Y............... 41

755
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

polar plots ...................................44, 341 power ........................................... 635, 658

portion of ........................................... 70 alpha value ....................................... 658
scatter graphs, 3D ............................... 48 regression results .............................. 658
stacked bar chart ................................. 43 power spectral density
using category data ........................... 264 computing ........................................ 463
using row numbers for X or Y PowerPoint
values............................................... 42 creating slides with graphs................. 459
vector plot .......................................... 44 pre-formatted worksheets ........................ 51
plotting equations .......................... 103, 111 prec ..................................................... 610
point plot precise location
horizontal data format ......................... 25 moving axes to ................................. 359
vertical data format ............................. 25 precision functions ............................... 560
points precision options .................................. 376
page units......................................... 173 predicted values
polar and parametric equations regression diagnostic results .............. 658
plotting ............................................ 462 regression results .............................. 659
polar axes view in nonlinear regression
modifying......................................... 394 reports............................................ 633
radial tick labels................................ 394 view in regression reports.................. 633
polar plot data formats prediction bands ................................... 649
polar line plot ..................................... 34 nonlinear regression .......................... 634
polar scatter line plot........................... 34 prediction interval................................. 660
polar scatter plot ................................. 34 95% ................................................. 660
polar plots regression results .............................. 660
angular axes ..................................... 389 prediction intervals
arranging data..................................... 44 adding to 2D graphs .......................... 114
clockwise angular units ..................... 342 calculating........................................ 115
creating .......................................44, 341 defined ............................................. 115
data for multiple curves ....................... 44 linear regressions .............................. 114
data format ......................................... 24 view in nonlinear regression
example ............................................. 14 reports............................................ 634
modifying........................................... 44 prefixes
modifying axes ................................. 388 contour labels ................................... 328
offsetting radial axes ......................... 391 tick labels......................................... 380
plotting data ....................................... 44 preparing
radial and angular values ..................... 44 graphs for publication ................ 430, 432
radial axes ................................. 391, 394 PRESS Prediction Error ........................ 634
symbols.........................................76, 82 previewing
using XY values ................................. 44 worksheets before printing................. 257
polar plots, multiple curves printer settings
data from one column.......................... 44 configuring .........................256, 259–260
polynomial........................................... 610 printing .................................................... 8
polynomial order column statistics ........................ 256, 258
regression lines ................................. 112 graph pages ...................................... 127
population guidelines for submitting graphs for
confidence interval results ................. 660 publication ..................................... 430
portrait previewing ....................................... 257
page orientation ................................ 172 reports.............................................. 416
positioning selected notebook items..................... 184
2D axes using the Property setting options ........................... 256, 259
Browser.......................................... 359 worksheet.................................. 256–257
2D axis............................................. 359 worksheet data........................... 256–257
3D axes ............................................ 319 printing options

756
 Piecewise

setting .............................................. 127 using as column titles ........................ 521

.PRN files
opening ..................................... 193–194
probability axis scale ............................ 348 R
probit axis scale.................................... 349 radar plot data formats
procedures arrow line radar plot............................ 34
adding to macros............................... 445 error and radio band radar plot ............. 34
producing line plus radar plot .............................. 34
file for publication............................. 431 radar line plot ..................................... 34
producing files for publication radar scatter line plot........................... 34
.EPS files ......................................... 431 radar scatter plot ................................. 34
.TIFF files ........................................ 431 radial axes
SigmaPlot files.................................. 431 about................................................ 391
program folders ........................................ 6 attributes .......................................... 393
properties lines .......................................... 391, 394
modifying text .................................. 167 modifying.................................. 391, 394
Property Browser.................................. 127 moving...................................... 391, 394
customizing tick labels ...................... 383 offset from graph center .................... 391
how to use ............................................ 8 tick labels......................................... 394
modifying graphs................................ 61 turning on/off ............................ 391, 394
modifying grids .................................. 61 radial labels
modifying tick turning on/off ................................... 394
appearance............................... 364, 371 radial values........................................... 44
modifying titles and legends ................ 61 radians ................................................. 520
moving axes ..................................... 359 random ................................................ 611
positioning 2D axes .......................... 359 random generation functions ................. 560
radial axes ........................................ 391 range
viewing/hiding axis........................... 356 angular axis ...................................... 389
protecting Z data for contour plots ..................... 326
notebooks with passwords ................. 185 range plots ........................................... 269
publishing range, axis
graphs in journals....................... 430, 432 axis values........................................ 326
journal submission modifying......................................... 352
requirements................................... 430 modifying by dragging ...................... 398
publishing graphs ................................. 427 ranges
.EPS................................................. 432 functions .......................................... 560
about dpi .......................................... 432 operators .......................................... 522
using the Submission Assistant .......... 433 rank and percentile
put into ................................................ 611 computing ........................................ 463
raw residuals
view in regression reports.................. 633
Q real ...................................................... 611
quality control lines .............................. 281 rearranging data.................................... 244
quartile plots ........................................ 271 reciprocal axis scale.............................. 350
quartiles reduced chi-square................................ 655
computing for box plots .................... 283 reference lines
Quattro/DOS (.WK*) adding to 2D graphs .......................... 281
importing ......................................... 204 direction........................................... 118
Quick Access Toolbar ............................... 8 displaying......................................... 118
quick re-plot......................................... 463 displaying in front/behind.................. 118
Quick Start............................................. 51 labels ............................................... 118
quick transforms line attributes.................................... 118
automatic updating............................ 519 line thickness.................................... 118
Quick Transforms line type ........................................... 118

757
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

lower specification ............................ 118 prediction interval for the

statistics ........................................... 118 regression ....................................... 660
turning on/off ................................... 118 PRESS statistic ................................. 657
references standard error ................................... 655
graph design ....................................... 21 standard error of the estimate............. 655
Marquardt-Levenberg statistics ........................................... 655
Algorithm....................................... 627 sum of squares.................................. 656
regional settings regression statements
date and time format ......................... 233 bad or missing .................................. 669
regression ............................................ 529 containing unknown function............. 669
adding equations to graph unknown variable ............................. 669
pages.............................. 629–630, Regression Wizard.............. 4, 112, 625, 628
676–677, 699–700 .FIT files .......................................... 627
cancelling......................................... 644 about the curve fitter ......................... 626
completion status messages ............... 645 Adding .FIT files to library or
confidence bands .............................. 649 notebook ........................................ 627
constraints, parameter ....................... 640 cancelling a regression ...................... 644
error status messages......................... 669 constraints ........................................ 640
extending equation curves to creating new equations ...................... 637
axes ...........629–630, 676–677, 699–700 Equation Library............................... 628
iterations ................................... 626, 642 equation options ............................... 639
lessons ............................................. 701 fit with weight .................................. 642
Marquardt-Levenberg interpreting initial results................... 645
algorithm........................................ 626 iterations .......................................... 642
prediction bands ............................... 649 multiple independent variables........... 639
quitting ............................................ 646 parameters........................................ 640
report ............................................... 654 running regression from a
results .............................................. 645 notebook ........................................ 636
results messages ............................... 668 saving equation changes .................... 638
running a regression again ................. 646 selecting the equation........................ 628
saving results.................................... 646 selecting variables............................. 629
step size ........................................... 643 setting graph options ......................... 629
tolerance .......................................... 644 setting numeric output options ........... 629
regression results step size ........................................... 643
ANOVA table ................................... 656 tolerance .......................................... 644
coefficients ....................................... 655 using to add equations to graph
confidence interval............................ 659 pages....................................... 629–630
confidence interval for the variable options ................................ 639
regression ....................................... 660 viewing and editing code................... 638
constant variance test ........................ 658 viewing initial results ........................ 629
constants .......................................... 655 watching the fit progress.................... 644
Cook’s Distance test.......................... 659 regressions
DFFITS............................................ 659 fitting data ............................................ 4
diagnostics ....................................... 658 using data in Excel worksheets .......... 256
Durbin-Watson statistic ..................... 657 relational operators
F statistic.......................................... 656 transforms ........................................ 523
influence diagnostics ......................... 659 removing
leverage ........................................... 659 outliers............................................. 250
normality test.................................... 657 Report Editor ........................................... 4
P value ............................................. 656 adding tables .................................... 425
power............................................... 658 formatting paragraphs ....................... 421
predicted values ................................ 659 formatting text .................................. 421
formatting toolbar ............................. 421

758
 Piecewise

ruler ................................................. 422 retain window states ............................... 10

setting paragraph indents ................... 424 rgbcolor ............................................... 612
setting ruler units .............................. 423 ribbons
setting tabs ....................................... 423 using .................................................... 7
showing or hiding rulers .................... 422 right-clicking
report options for nonlinear hiding graphs.................................... 147
regression.................................... 632–633 selected graphs and objects................ 128
report rulers ROC Curve Analysis ............................ 464
centimeters ....................................... 423 rotating
inches .............................................. 423 3D graphs......................................... 315
showing or hiding ............................. 422 3D graphs axes placement ................. 319
reports angular axis ...................................... 389
creating within Notebook axis titles .......................................... 363
Manager ......................................... 192 contour labels ................................... 328
dynamic curve fitting ........................ 678 labels ............................................... 165
embedding objects ............................ 138 pie charts................................... 339–340
exporting.......................................... 415 text .................................................. 165
global curve fitting ............................ 700 round ................................................... 614
inserting date and time ...................... 421 rows
linking objects .................................. 138 deleting ............................................ 244
printing ............................................ 416 inserting empty ................................. 243
regression......................................... 654 selecting........................................... 241
Report Editor........................................ 4 sizing ........................................ 219, 237
setting measurement units.................. 410 titles.......................................... 244, 249
setting page size and margins............. 413 transposing ....................................... 244
setting ruler units .............................. 410 using as column titles ................. 246, 249
showing or hiding rulers .................... 422 rulers
tables ............................................... 425 aligning graphs and objects................ 163
requirements runavg ................................................. 614
submitting graphs for running
publication ..................................... 430 extended transforms .......................... 518
residual tests macros ............................................. 449
Durbin-Watson statistic ..................... 657
PRESS statistic ................................. 657
residuals .............................................. 633 S
regression diagnostic results .............. 658 sampling
standardized ..................................... 658 data.................................................... 70
Studentized....................................... 658 SAS Data Set
Studentized deleted ........................... 658 importing ......................................... 204
resize SAS Export File
symbols............................................ 169 importing ......................................... 204
Resizing satisfying
embedded graphs ................................ 75 tolerance .......................................... 668
restoring saving
legends to default settings.................. 169 data.................................................. 181
results graphs .............................................. 181
completion status messages ............... 668 linear regression results ..................... 114
error status messages......................... 669 notebook files ................................... 181
linear regressions .............................. 114 pages ............................................... 181
regression......................................... 645 regression equation changes .............. 638
regression messages ................... 645, 668 regression results .............................. 646
saving regression .............................. 646 time using the Graph Style
viewing constraints; .......................... 646 Gallery ............................................. 57
worksheets ....................................... 181

759
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

saving time scientific notation ................................. 217

using the Graph Style Gallery .............. 57 tick labels......................................... 376
saving your work...................................... 8 using as axis values.................... 330, 376
Sax Basic section
getting Help...................................... 440 creating within Notebook
scalars Manager ......................................... 192
operators .......................................... 522 editing.............................................. 193
scalars and ranges................................. 522 naming...................................... 192–193
scale security
angular............................................. 389 password protecting notebooks .......... 185
axis ...................................................... 3 selecting
base/exponent labels ......................... 376 all data in worksheet ......................... 241
category .................................... 349, 354 columns ........................................... 241
common log ..................................... 348 data.................................................. 241
custom ............................................. 356 entire worksheet ............................... 241
date/time .......................................... 350 graph style.....................................25, 50
linear ............................................... 348 graph type .......................................... 24
logit ................................................. 349 graphs ................................................ 62
natural log ........................................ 348 graphs on page.................................. 128
probability........................................ 348 objects on page ................................. 128
probit ............................................... 349 page objects...................................... 128
reciprocal ......................................... 350 plots................................................... 62
tick labels......................................... 380 right-clicking graphs ......................... 128
tick marks ................................. 370, 405 rows................................................. 241
types ..................................... 3, 353, 356 text on page ...................................... 128
scale type Selection mode..................................... 128
changing ................................... 353, 356 serial numbers .......................................... 6
scale, axis set auto recovery
base/exponent labels ......................... 330 options ............................................... 10
contour plots..................................... 326 setting
scales axis breaks ....................................... 360
Arrhenius ......................................... 356 decimal places .................................. 225
Extreme Value Distribution ............... 356 equation parameters .......................... 106
using a date and time scale ................ 355 equations options in the Dynamic Fit
scaling Wizard ........................................... 672
graphs ....................................... 154–155 equations options in the Global Fit
objects ...................................... 154–155 Wizard .................................... 695–696
using mouse ..................................... 155 equations options in the Regression
using Object Properties ..................... 155 Wizard ........................................... 629
scatter and line plots line intervals for contour plots ........... 327
examples .......................................... 305 macro window options ...................... 442
scatter plots options for nonlinear
asymmetric error bars........................ 270 regression .........................629, 674, 698
creating ............................................ 263 passwords......................................... 428
data format ......................................... 24 passwords for the World Wide
drop lines ......................................... 102 Web ............................................... 428
error bars.......................................... 266 printing options...................127, 256, 259
examples ................................... 261–262 report options ................................... 410
quartile plots..................................... 271 trigonometric units for Quick
range plots........................................ 269 Transforms ..................................... 520
symbols.........................................76, 82 setting up
scatter plots, 3D graph page format ............................. 170
creating ..................................... 309–311 settings

760
 Piecewise

3D graph view .................................. 315 Piper Plots........................................ 460

angular axis ...................................... 389 Plotting Polar and Parametric
axis range......................................... 352 Equations ....................................... 462
column statistics ................................. 10 Power Spectral Density ..................... 463
error bars.......................................... 272 Quick Re-Plot................................... 463
frame lines ....................................... 319 Rank and Percentile .......................... 463
object location on page...................... 155 ROC Curve Analysis......................... 464
radial axes ................................. 391, 394 Standard Curve ................................. 479
reference lines .................................. 118 Survival Curve.................................. 485
statistics ........................................... 215 Vector Plot ....................................... 486
template files .................................... 134 SigmaScan (.SPW)
worksheet........................................... 10 importing ......................................... 204
shading SigmaStat 1.0 (.SMB)
3D graphs......................................... 315 importing ......................................... 204
between two curves on an area SigmaStat transforms............................ 496
plot ................................................ 291 simple error bars
shapes data format ......................................... 25
lines ................................................... 85 simple error bars and regression
Shortcut menu data format ......................................... 25
hide.................................................. 147 simple regression
shortcuts data format ......................................... 25
worksheet......................................... 202 simple scatter plot
showing ............................................... 147 data format ......................................... 25
SigmaPlot simple spline curve
folders.................................................. 6 data format ....................................29, 31
installing .......................................... 5–6 simple straight line
registration ........................................... 6 data format ......................................... 31
system requirements.............................. 5 simple straight line plot
using in Windows ................................. 7 data format ......................................... 29
using OLE2 to edit graphs pasted to simple transforms
other applications............................ 137 absolute value................................... 498
SigmaPlot 1.0 and 2.0 (.SPW) arcsin square root transform............... 498
importing ......................................... 204 divide............................................... 498
SigmaPlot Macintosh 4 and 5 exponential....................................... 498
Worksheet log log(x) ......................................... 498
importing ......................................... 204 natural log ln(x) ................................ 498
SigmaPlot macros reciprocal ......................................... 498
Area Below Curves ........................... 451 square .............................................. 498
Batch Process Excel Files.................. 451 square root ....................................... 498
Bland-Altman Analysis ..................... 452 subtract ............................................ 498
Border Plots ..................................... 453 sin ....................................................... 615
By Group Data Split.......................... 454 sinh ..................................................... 615
Color Transition Values ..................... 454 sinp ..................................................... 615
Compute 1st Derivative..................... 454 size...................................................... 616
Dot Density Plot ............................... 455 column statistics ............................... 214
F Test Comparison of Curves............. 456 symbols............................................ 169
Frequency Plot.................................. 456 values from column for symbols .......... 82
Gaussian Cumulative sizing
Distribution .................................... 458 columns and rows ............................. 237
Insert Graphs into Word .................... 458 columns and Rows ............................ 219
Label Symbols.................................. 459 graphs ....................................... 154–155
Merge Columns ................................ 459 Notebook Manager ........................... 181
Paste to PowerPoint Slide.................. 459 objects ...................................... 154–155

761
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

using mouse ..................................... 155 column statistics ............................... 214

using Object Properties dialog parameter ......................................... 645
box ................................................ 155 regression results .............................. 655
slices, pie chart standard error of the estimate
edges ............................................... 151 regression results .............................. 655
exploding .................................. 339–340 Standard percentile method
rotating ..................................... 339–340 using for box plots ............................ 283
.SMB files standardized residuals
importing ......................................... 204 regression diagnostic results .............. 658
smoothing statements
unordered XYZ data ......................... 493 IF function ....................................... 524
smoothing data statistical functions ............................... 560
mesh plots ............................................ 4 statistical summary table
snap-to................................................. 164 results .............................................. 655
.snb files statistical transforms ............................. 496
saving .............................................. 181 statistics
solving bivariate ........................................... 526
differential equations......................... 526 Durbin-Watson ................................. 657
equations................................... 108, 111 F statistic.......................................... 656
equations for x within range .............. 108 Options .............................................. 10
functions ................................... 108, 111 PRESS ............................................. 657
solving equations........................... 103, 111 reference lines .................................. 118
sort ...................................................... 616 setting Options.................................. 215
sorting showing/hiding ................................. 215
data.................................................. 240 using Excel worksheets ..................... 255
source worksheet............................................. 3
templates for new pages .................... 134 stddev ........................................... 530, 617
.SP5 files STDDEV function ................................ 526
opening ..................................... 193–194 stderr ................................................... 617
spacing step graph transform ............................. 530
bars...............................................95, 99 step size
bars from different plots ............. 95, default value..................................... 643
99, 278 entering............................................ 643
special construct functions .................... 560 Studentized deleted residuals
speed regression results .............................. 658
increasing drawing speed..................... 70 view in regression reports.................. 633
.SPG files Studentized residuals
opening ..................................... 193–194 regression diagnostic results .............. 658
SPSS files view in regression reports.................. 633
importing ......................................... 211 style
.SPW files Graph Style Gallery ............................ 58
opening ..................................... 193–194 styles
sqrt ............................................... 530, 617 graph ................................................. 25
stacked bar chart..................................... 43 using the Graph Style
stacked bar charts Gallery ........................................57–58
automatic reference lines ................... 117 subblock .............................................. 618
stacking data ........................................ 497 Submission Assistant ............................ 433
standard curve macro ............................ 479 editing a profile................................. 434
standard deviation submitting
column statistics ............................... 214 graphs to journals....................... 430, 432
standard deviation of linear regression Subscript.............................................. 165
coefficients transform.......................... 530 suffixes/prefixes
standard error contour labels ................................... 328

762
 Piecewise

tick labels......................................... 380 [Link].................................. 136

sum ..................................................... 618 templates ...................................... 10,
column statistics ............................... 214 158–159, 161–162, 175
sum of squares adding styles to gallery........................ 58
regression results .............................. 656 creating ..................................... 133, 147
Superscript........................................... 165 Graph Style Gallery .......................57–58
survival curves JNT files .......................................... 136
creating ............................................ 485 notebook files ............................ 133, 147
switching options ............................................... 10
between date and time and numeric page .......................................... 133, 147
display ........................................... 238 ternary axes
symbols about................................................ 396
alphanumeric ...................................... 80 dragging........................................... 398
assigning to worksheet ........................ 92 ternary axis direction
box plots .......................................... 282 modifying......................................... 401
changing edge color ............................ 76 ternary data
changing edge thickness ...................... 76 normalizing ...................................... 487
changing fills ...................................... 76 ternary graphs
changing size...................................... 76 changing axis direction...................... 401
changing type ..................................... 76 changing scale direction .................... 401
characters used as ............................... 80 changing scale type ........................... 399
color incrementing .............................. 78 creating ............................................ 343
custom incrementing schemes.............. 92 data for multiple -curve plot ................ 45
dot/crosshair color .............................. 76 data for single plot curve ..................... 45
fills .................................................. 151 data format ......................................... 24
Greek ............................................... 165 defined ............................................... 45
increment customizing ...................92, 99 line plots .......................................... 343
inserting in legends ........................... 165 line/scatter plots................................ 343
layering lines in front/behind ............... 85 modifying plots................................. 345
modifying attributes ............................ 76 modifying tick labels......................... 406
modifying in plots..........................76, 82 modifying tick marks ........................ 405
resize ............................................... 169 multiple-curve plots ............................ 45
restoring to default settings................ 169 normalizing data for .......................... 487
size values from a worksheet plot data set ...................................... 343
column ............................................. 82 scatter plots ...................................... 343
using characters as .............................. 80 selecting data.................................... 343
using macro to label with................... 459 selecting worksheet data.................... 487
Systat third-column data................................ 45
European office................................... 20 ternary plot data formats
exporting to ...................................... 213 ternary line plot .................................. 35
system requirements ................................. 5 ternary scatter line plot ........................ 35
Excel workbooks .................................. 5 ternary scatter plot .............................. 35
hardware .............................................. 5 ternary triplets
data for............................................... 45
testing
T constant variance .............................. 632
tables normality.......................................... 632
adding to reports ............................... 425 text
tan ....................................................... 619 adding to page .................................. 165
tanh ..................................................... 619 alignment ......................................... 165
tden function ........................................ 619 editing contour labels ........................ 334
tdist function ........................................ 619 editing tick labels.............................. 376
template files entering..................................... 165, 167
settings............................................. 134

763
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

formatting ........................................ 167 hiding .............................................. 364

grouping/ungrouping......................... 157 intervals assigned to a
labels to page.................................... 165 worksheet ....................................... 370
rotating ............................................ 165 labels ............................................... 380
subscript........................................... 165 length........................................ 372, 405
superscript........................................ 165 modifying.................................. 370, 405
using as plot symbols .......................... 80 modifying ternary ............................. 405
text files turning on/off ................................... 372
exporting worksheets ........................ 213 viewing ............................................ 364
importing ......................................... 210 ticks
text labels specifying direction........................... 371
creating ............................................ 165 time and date........................................ 379
text mode tinv function......................................... 620
entering non-keyboard tips and tricks
characters ....................................... 165 avoid repeating the same steps ............. 57
Text Properties dialog box titles
changing text labels........................... 374 axis .................................................. 364
thickness column...................................... 244, 249
axis lines ................................... 357–358 column and row titles dialog
contour lines..................................... 323 box ................................................ 245
grid lines .......................................... 385 hiding graph ..................................... 148
line .............................................85, 151 row ........................................... 244, 249
radial axes ........................................ 393 using cells as column or row
reference lines .................................. 118 titles ............................................... 249
tick marks ................................. 372, 405 using worksheet columns as row
thickness plot pattern lines ...................... 88 titles ............................................... 247
Three dimensional .................................. 15 using worksheet rows as column
tick intervals titles ............................................... 246
Date and Time .................................. 369 tolerance
tick labels default setting ................................... 644
custom ...................................... 330, 383 entering............................................ 644
date and time .................................... 330 satisfying.......................................... 668
date and time axes............................. 381 toolbars
editing text ....................................... 376 drawing............................................ 149
engineering notation.......................... 376 using Macro Window toolbar............. 440
factors.............................................. 376 Tools menu
formatting numeric tick labels............ 376 draw arrow ....................................... 149
modifying......................................... 380 draw box .......................................... 149
modifying ternary ............................. 406 draw ellipse ...................................... 149
numeric notation ............................... 330 draw line .......................................... 149
prefix/suffix ...................................... 380 total ..................................................... 620
radial axes ........................................ 394 TOTAL function............................ 525–526
rotating ............................................ 374 trajectory plots
scientific notation.............................. 376 creating ..................................... 309–310
text attributes.................................... 374 symbols.............................................. 82
time and date .................................... 379 Trajectory plots
using from a worksheet symbols.............................................. 76
column .................................... 330, 383 transform
tick line options .................................... 372 order of precedence........................... 521
tick mark direction................................ 371 transform components
tick marks relational operators ........................... 521
customizing intervals ........................ 370 scalars & ranges................................ 522
date and time axes............................. 369 transform operators .......................... 521

764
 Piecewise

variables........................................... 523 variables........................................... 523

transform examples .............................. 524 transparent mesh
analysis of variance table................... 525 creating plots .................................... 313
anova table ....................................... 525 selecting shading .............................. 313
bivariate statistics ............................. 526 Transpose Paste shortcut ....................... 202
coefficient of determination for transposing
nonlinear regressions....................... 529 rows and columns ............................. 244
control chart ..................................... 530 trapezoidal rule..................................... 451
differential equation solving .............. 526 trapezoidal rule transform ..................... 525
F-test to determine statistical trigonometric functions ......................... 560
improvement in regression............... 528 trigonometric units
fractional defective control setting .............................................. 520
chart............................................... 530 Tukey plot............................................ 281
linear regression parameters .............. 530 turning on/off
linear regression standard axes ................................................. 356
deviations ....................................... 530 contour labels ................................... 328
trapezoidal rule beneath a curve.......... 525 contour lines..................................... 323
transform functions grids ................................................ 387
arguments......................................... 559 insertion mode .................................. 203
descriptions ...................................... 560 radial axes ................................. 391, 394
transform operators............................... 521 radial labels ...................................... 394
arithmetic ......................................... 523 reference lines .................................. 118
logical.............................................. 524 tick marks ........................................ 372
order of operation ............................. 521 tutorial
ranges & scalars................................ 522 regression......................................... 701
relational .......................................... 523 two dimensional ................................11, 15
transform variables two way anova
relational operators ........................... 521 indexing data .................................... 497
transform operators .......................... 521 unindexing data ................................ 498
transforms .TXT files
[Link] .................................. 525 opening ..................................... 193–194
applying to data .................................... 4 types
[Link] ..................................... 525 graph ................................................. 24
arguments......................................... 559 lines ................................................... 85
as column titles................................. 521
[Link]............................... 526
defined ................................................. 4 U
[Link] ............................... 526 undo
duplicate column titles ...................... 198 setting for worksheets ....................... 198
extended........................................... 518 ungrouping
F_TEST.XFM................................... 528 objects/text ....................................... 157
from SigmaStat................................. 496 unindexing data ............................. 254, 498
function descriptions ......................... 560 units of measurement
[Link] .................................. 123 page ................................................. 173
normalize ternary data....................... 487 user accounts............................................ 6
operators .......................................... 521 user folders .............................................. 6
[Link]........................................... 529 user-defined
ranges & scalars................................ 522 command with bubble plots ................. 46
simple .............................................. 498 differential equations......................... 526
statistical .......................................... 496 F-test ............................................... 528
STDV_REG.XFM ............................ 530 user-defined functions
using data in Excel worksheets .......... 256 creating ............................................ 446
using transform language................... 511 in macros ......................................... 445
user-defined transforms......................... 511

765
 SigmaPlot 12 User’s Guide

function descriptions ......................... 560 linear regression results ..................... 114

UserDialog Editor................................. 444 Macro Window................................. 438
using notebook files ............................ 193–194
the equation solver ..................... 108, 111 notebook items .......................... 193–194
object links....................................... 146
objects as icons................................. 139
V pasted objects as icons....................... 143
values tick marks ........................................ 364
angular............................................... 44
axis range......................................... 326
axis scale.......................................... 326 W
bucket .............................................. 120 water fall plots
minimum.......................................... 214 creating ............................................ 311
minimum and maximum.................... 214 waterfall plots
minimum positive ............................. 214 examples .......................................... 308
missing ............................................ 214 WebViewer
radial ................................................. 44 publishing graphs on the World Wide
Z data for contour plots ..................... 326 Web ............................................... 427
values, axis Weibull scale........................................ 356
factors.............................................. 376 weibullden ........................................... 621
labels ............................................... 380 weibulldist ........................................... 621
numeric labels .................................. 330 whiskers
range......................................... 326, 352 box plots .......................................... 281
time and date ............................. 332, 379 widths
variable bar widths ................................. 99 box widths........................................ 282
variables whisker caps..................................... 281
relational operators ........................... 523 wizards
unknown .......................................... 669 histogram ......................................... 120
VBA® Wizards
creating macros using........................ 438 histogram ......................................... 123
vector formats ...................................... 432 Regression............................................ 4
vector plots .WK* files
2D ................................................... 298 opening ..................................... 193–194
creating ............................................ 486 worksheet
modifying arrowheads....................... 301 changing grid color and
vertical bar chart thickness ........................................ 221
data format ......................................... 24 column statistics ........................ 213, 255
vertical dot plot column titles.............................. 244, 249
data format ......................................... 25 column type labels ............................ 383
vertical point plot data format.................. 25 deleting columns and rows ................ 244
view entering data..................................... 256
3D graphs......................................... 315 Excel ........................................ 255–256
viewing................................................ 356 exporting as non-notebook
axes ................................................. 356 file .......................................... 126, 211
axis titles .......................................... 364 exporting data............................ 256–257
column statistics ............................3, 213 going to a cell ................................... 201
column statistics in Excel importing data ....................204, 210, 250
worksheets...................................... 255 inserting columns and rows ............... 243
constraints, parameter ....................... 646 inserting graphic cells ......................... 92
contour lines..................................... 323 inserting symbol size values ................ 82
data for embedded graphs.................... 75 insertion mode .................................. 203
graphs ....................................... 131, 147 moving around.................................. 201
graphs on page.................................. 147 moving between
inserted objects as icons .................... 145 notebooks ................................ 193, 195

766
 Piecewise

moving data...................................... 242 x25 ...................................................... 622

naming...................................... 192–193 x50 ...................................................... 622
opening ............................................ 194 x75 ...................................................... 623
overwrite mode................................. 203 xatymax ............................................... 624
previewing before printing................. 257 xwtr..................................................... 624
printing ..................................... 256–257 XY error bars ....................................... 274
printing column statistics................... 258
right-click pop-up menu
shortcuts......................................... 202 Z
row titles ................................... 244, 249 zooming in/out
selecting all data ............................... 241 on graphs ......................................... 131
selecting data.................................... 241
selecting entire.................................. 241
set data feedback colors..................... 223
setting Options.................................... 10
setting printing options...................... 259
size ...................................................... 3
sorting data....................................... 240
statistics ............................................... 3
Statistics, showing/hiding .................. 215
transposing rows and columns ........... 244
worksheet functions
overview .......................................... 560
worksheets
creating within Notebook
Manager ......................................... 192
entering data..................................... 202
exporting as text files ........................ 213
formatting date and time data............. 236
formatting numeric data .................... 236
formatting text .................................. 236
macro to split data into multiple
columns.......................................... 454
opening ............................................ 197
setting Day Zero ............................... 233
setting decimal places ....................... 225
wrap text .......................................... 236
World Wide Web
publishing graphs to .......................... 427
setting passwords to protect your
data ................................................ 428
using the WebViewer ........................ 427
wrapping text
in worksheet cells ............................. 236

X
X,Y values
bubble plots........................................ 46
X,Y, many Z
Contour plots...................................... 48
Mesh plots.......................................... 48
X,Y,Z values
contour plots....................................... 48

767